diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-0.txt | 10128 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 215084 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1369923 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/646-h.htm | 12062 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 133982 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p0b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 83256 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p0s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28811 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p136b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 119122 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p136s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35429 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p175b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 111956 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p175s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37352 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p24b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 98931 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p24s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29269 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p334b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 97074 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p334s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 44303 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p352b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 196819 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p352s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29895 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p77b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 87951 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/images/p77s.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29450 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/646.txt | 10150 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/646.zip | bin | 0 -> 215389 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/coril10.txt | 10722 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/coril10.zip | bin | 0 -> 211645 bytes |
26 files changed, 43078 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/646-0.txt b/646-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d906ed6 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10128 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at +www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you +will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before +using this eBook. + +Title: The Coral Island + a Tale of the Pacific Ocean + +Author: R. M. Ballantyne + +Release Date: September, 1996 [eBook #646] +[Most recently updated: September 27, 2021] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +Produced by: David Price + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND *** + +{Book cover: cover.jpg} + + + + + +The Coral Island: +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + + +{A coral island: p0.jpg} + +BY + +ROBERT MICHAEL BALLANTYNE, +AUTHOR OF "HUDSON'S BAY; OR, EVERY-DAY LIFE IN THE WILDS OF NORTH +AMERICA; +"SNOW-FLAKES AND SUN-BEAMS; OR, THE YOUNG FUR-TRADERS;" +"UNGAVA: A TALE OF THE ESQUIMAUX," ETC., ETC. + +WITH ILLUSTRATIONS BY DALZIEL. + +London: +THOMAS NELSON AND SONS, PATERNOSTER ROW. +EDINBURGH; AND NEW YORK. +1884. + + + + +Preface + + +I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures herein set down. +With the memory of my boyish feelings strong upon me, I present my book +specially to boys, in the earnest hope that they may derive valuable +information, much pleasure, great profit, and unbounded amusement from +its pages. + +One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to be melancholy and +morose, and who cannot enter with kindly sympathy into the regions of +fun, let me seriously advise him to shut my book and put it away. It is +not meant for him. + +RALPH ROVER + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +The beginning--My early life and character--I thirst for adventure in +foreign lands and go to sea. + +Roving has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the joy of my +heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In childhood, in boyhood, and +in man's estate, I have been a rover; not a mere rambler among the woody +glens and upon the hill-tops of my own native land, but an enthusiastic +rover throughout the length and breadth of the wide wide world. + +It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in which I was +born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic Ocean. My father was a +sea-captain; my grandfather was a sea-captain; my great-grandfather had +been a marine. Nobody could tell positively what occupation _his_ father +had followed; but my dear mother used to assert that he had been a +midshipman, whose grandfather, on the mother's side, had been an admiral +in the royal navy. At anyrate we knew that, as far back as our family +could be traced, it had been intimately connected with the great watery +waste. Indeed this was the case on both sides of the house; for my +mother always went to sea with my father on his long voyages, and so +spent the greater part of her life upon the water. + +Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving disposition. Soon +after I was born, my father, being old, retired from a seafaring life, +purchased a small cottage in a fishing village on the west coast of +England, and settled down to spend the evening of his life on the shores +of that sea which had for so many years been his home. It was not long +after this that I began to show the roving spirit that dwelt within me. +For some time past my infant legs had been gaining strength, so that I +came to be dissatisfied with rubbing the skin off my chubby knees by +walking on them, and made many attempts to stand up and walk like a man; +all of which attempts, however, resulted in my sitting down violently and +in sudden surprise. One day I took advantage of my dear mother's absence +to make another effort; and, to my joy, I actually succeeded in reaching +the doorstep, over which I tumbled into a pool of muddy water that lay +before my father's cottage door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror +of my poor mother when she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a group +of cackling ducks, and the tenderness with which she stripped off my +dripping clothes and washed my dirty little body! From this time forth +my rambles became more frequent, and, as I grew older, more distant, +until at last I had wandered far and near on the shore and in the woods +around our humble dwelling, and did not rest content until my father +bound me apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to sea. + +For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in coasting +along the shores of my native land. My Christian name was Ralph, and my +comrades added to this the name of Rover, in consequence of the passion +which I always evinced for travelling. Rover was not my real name, but +as I never received any other I came at last to answer to it as naturally +as to my proper name; and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good reason +why I should not introduce myself to the reader as Ralph Rover. My +shipmates were kind, good-natured fellows, and they and I got on very +well together. They did, indeed, very frequently make game of and banter +me, but not unkindly; and I overheard them sometimes saying that Ralph +Rover was a "queer, old-fashioned fellow." This, I must confess, +surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but could come at no +satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my old-fashionedness lay. It +is true I was a quiet lad, and seldom spoke except when spoken to. +Moreover, I never could understand the jokes of my companions even when +they were explained to me: which dulness in apprehension occasioned me +much grief; however, I tried to make up for it by smiling and looking +pleased when I observed that they were laughing at some witticism which I +had failed to detect. I was also very fond of inquiring into the nature +of things and their causes, and often fell into fits of abstraction while +thus engaged in my mind. But in all this I saw nothing that did not seem +to be exceedingly natural, and could by no means understand why my +comrades should call me "an old-fashioned fellow." + +Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many seamen who +had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; and I freely confess +that my heart glowed ardently within me as they recounted their wild +adventures in foreign lands,--the dreadful storms they had weathered, the +appalling dangers they had escaped, the wonderful creatures they had seen +both on the land and in the sea, and the interesting lands and strange +people they had visited. But of all the places of which they told me, +none captivated and charmed my imagination so much as the Coral Islands +of the Southern Seas. They told me of thousands of beautiful fertile +islands that had been formed by a small creature called the coral insect, +where summer reigned nearly all the year round,--where the trees were +laden with a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit,--where the climate was +almost perpetually delightful,--yet where, strange to say, men were wild, +bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those favoured isles to which the +gospel of our Saviour had been conveyed. These exciting accounts had so +great an effect upon my mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I +resolved to make a voyage to the South Seas. + +I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear parents to +let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would never have become +a great captain had he remained in the coasting trade, he saw the truth +of what I said, and gave his consent. My dear mother, seeing that my +father had made up his mind, no longer offered opposition to my wishes. +"But oh, Ralph," she said, on the day I bade her adieu, "come back soon +to us, my dear boy, for we are getting old now, Ralph, and may not have +many years to live." + +I will not take up my reader's time with a minute account of all that +occurred before I took my final leave of my dear parents. Suffice it to +say, that my father placed me under the charge of an old mess-mate of his +own, a merchant captain, who was on the point of sailing to the South +Seas in his own ship, the Arrow. My mother gave me her blessing and a +small Bible; and her last request was, that I would never forget to read +a chapter every day, and say my prayers; which I promised, with tears in +my eyes, that I would certainly do. + +Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine large ship, +and set sail for the islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +The departure--The sea--My companions--Some account of the wonderful +sights we saw on the great deep--A dreadful storm and a frightful wreck. + +It was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her canvass to +the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the south. Oh, how my heart +bounded with delight as I listened to the merry chorus of the sailors, +while they hauled at the ropes and got in the anchor! The captain +shouted--the men ran to obey--the noble ship bent over to the breeze, and +the shore gradually faded from my view, while I stood looking on with a +kind of feeling that the whole was a delightful dream. + +The first thing that struck me as being different from anything I had yet +seen during my short career on the sea, was the hoisting of the anchor on +deck, and lashing it firmly down with ropes, as if we had now bid adieu +to the land for ever, and would require its services no more. + +"There, lass," cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, giving the fluke of the +anchor a hearty slap with his hand after the housing was +completed--"there, lass, take a good nap now, for we shan't ask you to +kiss the mud again for many a long day to come!" + +And so it was. That anchor did not "kiss the mud" for many long days +afterwards; and when at last it did, it was for the last time! + +There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were my special +favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, broad-shouldered youth of +eighteen, with a handsome, good-humoured, firm face. He had had a good +education, was clever and hearty and lion-like in his actions, but mild +and quiet in disposition. Jack was a general favourite, and had a +peculiar fondness for me. My other companion was Peterkin Gay. He was +little, quick, funny, decidedly mischievous, and about fourteen years +old. But Peterkin's mischief was almost always harmless, else he could +not have been so much beloved as he was. + +"Hallo! youngster," cried Jack Martin, giving me a slap on the shoulder, +the day I joined the ship, "come below and I'll show you your berth. You +and I are to be mess-mates, and I think we shall be good friends, for I +like the look o' you." + +Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became the best and +stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the stormy waves. + +I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. We had the usual +amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw many strange fish rolling +in the sea, and I was greatly delighted one day by seeing a shoal of +flying fish dart out of the water and skim through the air about a foot +above the surface. They were pursued by dolphins, which feed on them, +and one flying-fish in its terror flew over the ship, struck on the +rigging, and fell upon the deck. Its wings were just fins elongated, and +we found that they could never fly far at a time, and never mounted into +the air like birds, but skimmed along the surface of the sea. Jack and I +had it for dinner, and found it remarkably good. + +When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of America, the +weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors began to tell +stories about the furious gales and the dangers of that terrible cape. + +"Cape Horn," said one, "is the most horrible headland I ever doubled. +I've sailed round it twice already, and both times the ship was a'most +blow'd out o' the water." + +"An' I've been round it once," said another, "an' that time the sails +were split, and the ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they wouldn't +work, and we wos all but lost." + +"An' I've been round it five times," cried a third, "an' every time wos +wuss than another, the gales wos so tree-mendous!" + +"And I've been round it no times at all," cried Peterkin, with an +impudent wink of his eye, "an' _that_ time I wos blow'd inside out!" + +Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough weather, and, +in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were sailing gently, before a +warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific Ocean. Thus we proceeded on our +voyage, sometimes bounding merrily before a fair breeze, at other times +floating calmly on the glassy wave and fishing for the curious +inhabitants of the deep,--all of which, although the sailors thought +little of them, were strange, and interesting, and very wonderful to me. + +At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I shall never +forget the delight with which I gazed,--when we chanced to pass one,--at +the pure, white, dazzling shores, and the verdant palm-trees, which +looked bright and beautiful in the sunshine. And often did we three long +to be landed on one, imagining that we should certainly find perfect +happiness there! Our wish was granted sooner than we expected. + +One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm burst upon +our ship. The first squall of wind carried away two of our masts; and +left only the foremast standing. Even this, however, was more than +enough, for we did not dare to hoist a rag of sail on it. For five days +the tempest raged in all its fury. Everything was swept off the decks +except one small boat. The steersman was lashed to the wheel, lest he +should be washed away, and we all gave ourselves up for lost. The +captain said that he had no idea where we were, as we had been blown far +out of our course; and we feared much that we might get among the +dangerous coral reefs which are so numerous in the Pacific. At day-break +on the sixth morning of the gale we saw land ahead. It was an island +encircled by a reef of coral on which the waves broke in fury. There was +calm water within this reef, but we could only see one narrow opening +into it. For this opening we steered, but, ere we reached it, a +tremendous wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder completely off, and +left us at the mercy of the winds and waves. + +"It's all over with us now, lads," said the captain to the men; "get the +boat ready to launch; we shall be on the rocks in less than half an +hour." + +The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was little +hope of so small a boat living in such a sea. + +"Come boys," said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to me and Peterkin, as we +stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our fate;--"Come boys, we three shall +stick together. You see it is impossible that the little boat can reach +the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure to upset, so I mean rather +to trust myself to a large oar. I see through the telescope that the ship +will strike at the tail of the reef, where the waves break into the quiet +water inside; so, if we manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over +the breakers, we may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will you join +me?" + +We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with confidence, +although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his voice, that he had +little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the white waves that lashed +the reef and boiled against the rocks as if in fury, I felt that there +was but a step between us and death. My heart sank within me; but at +that moment my thoughts turned to my beloved mother, and I remembered +those words, which were among the last that she said to me--"Ralph, my +dearest child, always remember in the hour of danger to look to your Lord +and Saviour Jesus Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your +body and your soul." So I felt much comforted when I thought thereon. + +The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready with the boat, +and the captain beside them giving orders, when a tremendous wave came +towards us. We three ran towards the bow to lay hold of our oar, and had +barely reached it when the wave fell on the deck with a crash like +thunder. At the same moment the ship struck, the foremast broke off +close to the deck and went over the side, carrying the boat and men along +with it. Our oar got entangled with the wreck, and Jack seized an axe to +cut it free, but, owing to the motion of the ship, he missed the cordage +and struck the axe deep into the oar. Another wave, however, washed it +clear of the wreck. We all seized hold of it, and the next instant we +were struggling in the wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat +whirling in the surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming waves. +Then I became insensible. + +On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of soft +grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with Peterkin on his +knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples with water, and +endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a wound in my forehead. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +The Coral Island--Our first cogitations after landing, and the result of +them--We conclude that the island is uninhabited. + +There is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in recovering from +a state of insensibility, which is almost indescribable; a sort of +dreamy, confused consciousness; a half-waking half-sleeping condition, +accompanied with a feeling of weariness, which, however, is by no means +disagreeable. As I slowly recovered and heard the voice of Peterkin +inquiring whether I felt better, I thought that I must have overslept +myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for being lazy; but before I +could leap up in haste, the thought seemed to vanish suddenly away, and I +fancied that I must have been ill. Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, +and I thought of home, and the garden at the back of my father's cottage, +with its luxuriant flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my +dear mother trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. But the +roaring of the surf put these delightful thoughts to flight, and I was +back again at sea, watching the dolphins and the flying-fish, and reefing +topsails off the wild and stormy Cape Horn. Gradually the roar of the +surf became louder and more distinct. I thought of being wrecked far far +away from my native land, and slowly opened my eyes to meet those of my +companion Jack, who, with a look of intense anxiety, was gazing into my +face. + +"Speak to us, my dear Ralph," whispered Jack, tenderly, "are you better +now?" + +I smiled and looked up, saying, "Better; why, what do you mean, Jack? I'm +quite well." + +"Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in this way?" said +Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for the poor boy had been really +under the impression that I was dying. + +I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my forehead, +found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I had lost a good +deal of blood. + +"Come, come, Ralph," said Jack, pressing me gently backward, "lie down, +my boy; you're not right yet. Wet your lips with this water, it's cool +and clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at hand. There now, +don't say a word, hold your tongue," said he, seeing me about to speak. +"I'll tell you all about it, but you must not utter a syllable till you +have rested well." + +"Oh! don't stop him from speaking, Jack," said Peterkin, who, now that +his fears for my safety were removed, busied himself in erecting a +shelter of broken branches in order to protect me from the wind; which, +however, was almost unnecessary, for the rock beside which I had been +laid completely broke the force of the gale. "Let him speak, Jack; it's +a comfort to hear that he's alive, after lying there stiff and white and +sulky for a whole hour, just like an Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a +fellow as you are, Ralph; always up to mischief. You've almost knocked +out all my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It's very wicked of you, indeed it is." + +While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite clear +again, and I began to understand my position. "What do you mean by +saying I half choked you, Peterkin?" said I. + +"What do I mean? Is English not your mother tongue, or do you want me to +repeat it in French, by way of making it clearer? Don't you remember--" + +"I remember nothing," said I, interrupting him, "after we were thrown +into the sea." + +{Slowly recovering: p24.jpg} + +"Hush, Peterkin," said Jack, "you're exciting Ralph with your nonsense. +I'll explain it to you. You recollect that after the ship struck, we +three sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I noticed that the oar +struck your head and gave you that cut on the brow, which nearly stunned +you, so that you grasped Peterkin round the neck without knowing +apparently what you were about. In doing so you pushed the +telescope,--which you clung to as if it had been your life,--against +Peterkin's mouth--" + +"Pushed it against his mouth!" interrupted Peterkin, "say crammed it down +his throat. Why, there's a distinct mark of the brass rim on the back of +my gullet at this moment!" + +"Well, well, be that as it may," continued Jack, "you clung to him, +Ralph, till I feared you really would choke him; but I saw that he had a +good hold of the oar, so I exerted myself to the utmost to push you +towards the shore, which we luckily reached without much trouble, for the +water inside the reef is quite calm." + +"But the captain and crew, what of them?" I inquired anxiously. + +Jack shook his head. + +"Are they lost?" + +"No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not much chance of +their being saved. The ship struck at the very tail of the island on +which we are cast. When the boat was tossed into the sea it fortunately +did not upset, although it shipped a good deal of water, and all the men +managed to scramble into it; but before they could get the oars out the +gale carried them past the point and away to leeward of the island. After +we landed I saw them endeavouring to pull towards us, but as they had +only one pair of oars out of the eight that belong to the boat, and as +the wind was blowing right in their teeth, they gradually lost ground. +Then I saw them put about and hoist some sort of sail,--a blanket, I +fancy, for it was too small for the boat,--and in half an hour they were +out of sight." + +"Poor fellows," I murmured sorrowfully. + +"But the more I think about it, I've better hope of them," continued +Jack, in a more cheerful tone. "You see, Ralph, I've read a great deal +about these South Sea Islands, and I know that in many places they are +scattered about in thousands over the sea, so they're almost sure to fall +in with one of them before long." + +"I'm sure I hope so," said Peterkin, earnestly. "But what has become of +the wreck, Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there while I was +watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to pieces?" + +"No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the bottom," replied +Jack. "As I said before, she struck on the tail of the island and stove +in her bow, but the next breaker swung her clear, and she floated away to +leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made a hard struggle to reach her, +but long before they came near her she filled and went down. It was +after she foundered that I saw them trying to pull to the island." + +There was a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I have no doubt +that each was revolving in his mind our extraordinary position. For my +part I cannot say that my reflections were very agreeable. I knew that +we were on an island, for Jack had said so, but whether it was inhabited +or not I did not know. If it should be inhabited, I felt certain, from +all I had heard of South Sea Islanders, that we should be roasted alive +and eaten. If it should turn out to be uninhabited, I fancied that we +should be starved to death. "Oh!" thought I, "if the ship had only stuck +on the rocks we might have done pretty well, for we could have obtained +provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a shelter, but +now--alas! alas! we are lost!" These last words I uttered aloud in my +distress. + +"Lost! Ralph?" exclaimed Jack, while a smile overspread his hearty +countenance. "Saved, you should have said. Your cogitations seem to have +taken a wrong road, and led you to a wrong conclusion." + +"Do you know what conclusion _I_ have come to?" said Peterkin. "I have +made up my mind that it's capital,--first rate,--the best thing that ever +happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that ever lay before three +jolly young tars. We've got an island all to ourselves. We'll take +possession in the name of the king; we'll go and enter the service of its +black inhabitants. Of course we'll rise, naturally, to the top of +affairs. White men always do in savage countries. You shall be king, +Jack; Ralph, prime minister, and I shall be--" + +"The court jester," interrupted Jack. + +"No," retorted Peterkin, "I'll have no title at all. I shall merely +accept a highly responsible situation under government, for you see, +Jack, I'm fond of having an enormous salary and nothing to do." + +"But suppose there are no natives?" + +"Then we'll build a charming villa, and plant a lovely garden round it, +stuck all full of the most splendiferous tropical flowers, and we'll farm +the land, plant, sow, reap, eat, sleep, and be merry." + +"But to be serious," said Jack, assuming a grave expression of +countenance, which I observed always had the effect of checking +Peterkin's disposition to make fun of everything, "we are really in +rather an uncomfortable position. If this is a desert island, we shall +have to live very much like the wild beasts, for we have not a tool of +any kind, not even a knife." + +"Yes, we have _that_," said Peterkin, fumbling in his trousers pocket, +from which he drew forth a small penknife with only one blade, and that +was broken. + +"Well, that's better than nothing; but come," said Jack, rising, "we are +wasting our time in _talking_ instead of _doing_. You seem well enough +to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our pockets, and then +let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort of island we have been +cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it seems likely to be our home for +some time to come." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy discovery--Our +island described--Jack proves himself to be learned and sagacious above +his fellows--Curious discoveries--Natural lemonade! + +We now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into our +personal property. When we reached the shore, after being wrecked, my +companions had taken off part of their clothes and spread them out in the +sun to dry, for, although the gale was raging fiercely, there was not a +single cloud in the bright sky. They had also stripped off most part of +my wet clothes and spread them also on the rocks. Having resumed our +garments, we now searched all our pockets with the utmost care, and laid +their contents out on a flat stone before us; and, now that our minds +were fully alive to our condition, it was with no little anxiety that we +turned our several pockets inside out, in order that nothing might escape +us. When all was collected together we found that our worldly goods +consisted of the following articles:-- + +First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about the middle +and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on its edge. +(Peterkin said of this, with his usual pleasantry, that it would do for a +saw as well as a knife, which was a great advantage.) Second, An old +German-silver pencil-case without any lead in it. Third, A piece of whip- +cord about six yards long. Fourth, A sailmaker's needle of a small size. +Fifth, A ship's telescope, which I happened to have in my hand at the +time the ship struck, and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was +in the water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out of my +grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I cannot understand why +I kept such a firm hold of this telescope. They say that a drowning man +will clutch at a straw. Perhaps it may have been some such feeling in +me, for I did not know that it was in my hand at the time we were +wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure in having it with us now, +although we did not see that it could be of much use to us, as the glass +at the small end was broken to pieces. Our sixth article was a brass +ring which Jack always wore on his little finger. I never understood why +he wore it, for Jack was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to +care for ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said "it was in memory of the +girl he left behind him!" But as he never spoke of this girl to either +of us, I am inclined to think that Peterkin was either jesting or +mistaken. In addition to these articles we had a little bit of tinder, +and the clothes on our backs. These last were as follows:-- + +Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair of +sailors' thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel shirt, a blue jacket, and +a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, besides a pair of worsted socks, +and a cotton pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen portraits of Lord Nelson +printed on it, and a union Jack in the middle. Peterkin had on a striped +flannel shirt,--which he wore outside his trousers, and belted round his +waist, after the manner of a tunic,--and a round black straw hat. He had +no jacket, having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; +but this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island proved +to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I often preferred +to go about without our jackets. Peterkin had also a pair of white +cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief with white spots all over it. My +own costume consisted of a blue flannel shirt, a blue jacket, a black +cap, and a pair of worsted socks, besides the shoes and canvass trousers +already mentioned. This was all we had, and besides these things we had +nothing else; but, when we thought of the danger from which we had +escaped, and how much worse off we might have been had the ship struck on +the reef during the night, we felt very thankful that we were possessed +of so much, although, I must confess, we sometimes wished that we had had +a little more. + +While we were examining these things, and talking about them, Jack +suddenly started and exclaimed-- + +"The oar! we have forgotten the oar." + +"What good will that do us?" said Peterkin; "there's wood enough on the +island to make a thousand oars." + +"Ay, lad," replied Jack, "but there's a bit of hoop iron at the end of +it, and that may be of much use to us." + +"Very true," said I, "let us go fetch it;" and with that we all three +rose and hastened down to the beach. I still felt a little weak from +loss of blood, so that my companions soon began to leave me behind; but +Jack perceived this, and, with his usual considerate good nature, turned +back to help me. This was now the first time that I had looked well +about me since landing, as the spot where I had been laid was covered +with thick bushes which almost hid the country from our view. As we now +emerged from among these and walked down the sandy beach together, I cast +my eyes about, and, truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose +at the beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale had +suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it dashed our +ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after accomplishing that. +The island on which we stood was hilly, and covered almost everywhere +with the most beautiful and richly coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, +none of which I knew the names of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa- +nut palms, which I recognised at once from the many pictures that I had +seen of them before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling whiteness +lined this bright green shore, and upon it there fell a gentle ripple of +the sea. This last astonished me much, for I recollected that at home +the sea used to fall in huge billows on the shore long after a storm had +subsided. But on casting my glance out to sea the cause became apparent. +About a mile distant from the shore I saw the great billows of the ocean +rolling like a green wall, and falling with a long, loud roar, upon a low +coral reef, where they were dashed into white foam and flung up in clouds +of spray. This spray sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here +and there, a beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling +drops. We afterwards found that this coral reef extended quite round the +island, and formed a natural breakwater to it. Beyond this the sea rose +and tossed violently from the effects of the storm; but between the reef +and the shore it was as calm and as smooth as a pond. + +My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at sight of so +many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned suddenly to the +contemplation of the Creator of them all. I mention this the more +gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed to say, I very seldom thought +of my Creator, although I was constantly surrounded by the most beautiful +and wonderful of His works. I observed from the expression of my +companion's countenance that he too derived much joy from the splendid +scenery, which was all the more agreeable to us after our long voyage on +the salt sea. There, the breeze was fresh and cold, but here it was +delightfully mild; and, when a puff blew off the land, it came laden with +the most exquisite perfume that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we +were startled by a loud "Huzza!" from Peterkin, and, on looking towards +the edge of the sea, we saw him capering and jumping about like a monkey, +and ever and anon tugging with all his might at something that lay upon +the shore. + +"What an odd fellow he is, to be sure," said Jack, taking me by the arm +and hurrying forward; "come, let us hasten to see what it is." + +"Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what we want," cried +Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging with all his power. "First +rate; just the very ticket!" + +I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin was in the +habit of using very remarkable and peculiar phrases. And I am free to +confess that I did not well understand the meaning of some of them,--such, +for instance, as "the very ticket;" but I think it my duty to recount +everything relating to my adventures with a strict regard to truthfulness +in as far as my memory serves me; so I write, as nearly as possible, the +exact words that my companions spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain +what he meant by "ticket," but he always answered me by going into fits +of laughter. However, by observing the occasions on which he used it, I +came to understand that it meant to show that something was remarkably +good, or fortunate. + +On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to pull the +axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, Jack struck it +while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among which it had become +entangled at the bow of the ship. Fortunately for us the axe had +remained fast in the oar, and even now, all Peterkin's strength could not +draw it out of the cut. + +"Ah! that is capital indeed," cried Jack, at the same time giving the axe +a wrench that plucked it out of the tough wood. "How fortunate this is! +It will be of more value to us than a hundred knives, and the edge is +quite new and sharp." + +"I'll answer for the toughness of the handle at any rate," cried +Peterkin; "my arms are nearly pulled out of the sockets. But see here, +our luck is great. There is iron on the blade." He pointed to a piece +of hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round the blade of the +oar to prevent it from splitting. + +This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on his knees, and +with the edge of the axe began carefully to force out the nails. But as +they were firmly fixed in, and the operation blunted our axe, we carried +the oar up with us to the place where we had left the rest of our things, +intending to burn the wood away from the iron at a more convenient time. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, after we had laid it on the stone which contained +our little all, "I propose that we should go to the tail of the island, +where the ship struck, which is only a quarter of a mile off, and see if +anything else has been thrown ashore. I don't expect anything, but it is +well to see. When we get back here it will be time to have our supper +and prepare our beds." + +"Agreed!" cried Peterkin and I together, as, indeed, we would have agreed +to any proposal that Jack made; for, besides his being older and much +stronger and taller than either of us, he was a very clever fellow, and I +think would have induced people much older than himself to choose him for +their leader, especially if they required to be led on a bold enterprise. + +Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so brightly in the +rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite dazzled by its glare, it +suddenly came into Peterkin's head that we had nothing to eat except the +wild berries which grew in profusion at our feet. + +"What shall we do, Jack?" said he, with a rueful look; "perhaps they may +be poisonous!" + +"No fear," replied Jack, confidently; "I have observed that a few of them +are not unlike some of the berries that grow wild on our own native +hills. Besides, I saw one or two strange birds eating them just a few +minutes ago, and what won't kill the birds won't kill us. But look up +there, Peterkin," continued Jack, pointing to the branched head of a +cocoa-nut palm. "There are nuts for us in all stages." + +"So there are!" cried Peterkin, who being of a very unobservant nature +had been too much taken up with other things to notice anything so high +above his head as the fruit of a palm tree. But, whatever faults my +young comrade had, he could not be blamed for want of activity or animal +spirits. Indeed, the nuts had scarcely been pointed out to him when he +bounded up the tall stem of the tree like a squirrel, and, in a few +minutes, returned with three nuts, each as large as a man's fist. + +"You had better keep them till we return," said Jack. "Let us finish our +work before eating." + +"So be it, captain, go ahead," cried Peterkin, thrusting the nuts into +his trousers pocket. "In fact I don't want to eat just now, but I would +give a good deal for a drink. Oh that I could find a spring! but I don't +see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I say, Jack, how does it happen +that you seem to be up to everything? You have told us the names of half- +a-dozen trees already, and yet you say that you were never in the South +Seas before." + +"I'm not up to _everything_, Peterkin, as you'll find out ere long," +replied Jack, with a smile; "but I have been a great reader of books of +travel and adventure all my life, and that has put me up to a good many +things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with." + +"Oh, Jack, that's all humbug. If you begin to lay everything to the +credit of books, I'll quite lose my opinion of you," cried Peterkin, with +a look of contempt. "I've seen a lot o' fellows that were _always_ +poring over books, and when they came to try to _do_ anything, they were +no better than baboons!" + +"You are quite right," retorted Jack; "and I have seen a lot of fellows +who never looked into books at all, who knew nothing about anything +except the things they had actually seen, and very little they knew even +about these. Indeed, some were so ignorant that they did not know that +cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!" + +I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there was much +truth in it, as to Peterkin's ignorance. + +"Humph! maybe you're right," answered Peterkin; "but I would not give +_tuppence_ for a man of books, if he had nothing else in him." + +"Neither would I," said Jack; "but that's no reason why you should run +books down, or think less of me for having read them. Suppose, now, +Peterkin, that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give you a long +and particular account of the way to do it, would not that be very +useful?" + +"No doubt of it," said Peterkin, laughing. + +"And suppose I were to write the account in a letter instead of telling +you in words, would that be less useful?" + +"Well--no, perhaps not." + +"Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in the form of a +book, would it not be as good and useful as ever?" + +"Oh, bother! Jack, you're a philosopher, and that's worse than anything!" +cried Peterkin, with a look of pretended horror. + +"Very well, Peterkin, we shall see," returned Jack, halting under the +shade of a cocoa-nut tree. "You said you were thirsty just a minute ago; +now, jump up that tree and bring down a nut,--not a ripe one, bring a +green, unripe one." + +Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in earnest, he +obeyed. + +"Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it to your mouth, old +fellow," said Jack. + +Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into uncontrollable +laughter at the changes that instantly passed over his expressive +countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to his mouth, and thrown back +his head in order to catch what came out of it, than his eyes opened to +twice their ordinary size with astonishment, while his throat moved +vigorously in the act of swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense +delight overspread his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being +firmly fixed to the hole in the nut, could not take part in the +expression; but he endeavoured to make up for this by winking at us +excessively with his right eye. At length he stopped, and, drawing a +long breath, exclaimed-- + +"Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you're a Briton--the best fellow I +ever met in my life. Only taste that!" said he, turning to me and +holding the nut to my mouth. I immediately drank, and certainly I was +much surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed copiously down my +throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet taste, mingled with acid; +in fact, it was the likest thing to lemonade I ever tasted, and was most +grateful and refreshing. I handed the nut to Jack, who, after tasting +it, said, "Now, Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa +nut in my life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once +read that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is true!" + +"And pray," asked Peterkin, "what sort of 'stuff' does the ripe nut +contain?" + +"A hollow kernel," answered Jack, "with a liquid like milk in it; but it +does not satisfy thirst so well as hunger. It is very wholesome food I +believe." + +"Meat and drink on the same tree!" cried Peterkin; "washing in the sea, +lodging on the ground,--and all for nothing! My dear boys, we're set up +for life; it must be the ancient Paradise,--hurrah!" and Peterkin tossed +his straw hat in the air, and ran along the beach hallooing like a madman +with delight. + +We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were very unlike +Paradise in many things. But more of this in its proper place. + +We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had struck, but +did not find a single article, although we searched carefully among the +coral rocks, which at this place jutted out so far as nearly to join the +reef that encircled the island. Just as we were about to return, +however, we saw something black floating in a little cove that had +escaped our observation. Running forward, we drew it from the water, and +found it to be a long thick leather boot, such as fishermen at home wear; +and a few paces farther on we picked up its fellow. We at once +recognised these as having belonged to our captain, for he had worn them +during the whole of the storm, in order to guard his legs from the waves +and spray that constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on +seeing them was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack soon put +my mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if the captain had +been drowned with the boots on, he would certainly have been washed +ashore along with them, and that he had no doubt whatever he had kicked +them off while in the sea, that he might swim more easily. + +Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, as Jack +said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest too. I also +tried them, but, although I was long enough in the legs for them, they +were much too large in the feet for me; so we handed them to Jack, who +was anxious to make me keep them, but as they fitted his large limbs and +feet as if they had been made for him, I would not hear of it, so he +consented at last to use them. I may remark, however, that Jack did not +use them often, as they were extremely heavy. + +It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our encampment; so we +put off our visit to the top of a hill till next day, and employed the +light that yet remained to us in cutting down a quantity of boughs and +the broad leaves of a tree, of which none of us knew the name. With +these we erected a sort of rustic bower, in which we meant to pass the +night. There was no absolute necessity for this, because the air of our +island was so genial and balmy that we could have slept quite well +without any shelter; but we were so little used to sleeping in the open +air, that we did not quite relish the idea of lying down without any +covering over us: besides, our bower would shelter us from the night dews +or rain, if any should happen to fall. Having strewed the floor with +leaves and dry grass, we bethought ourselves of supper. + +But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no means of +making a fire. + +"Now, there's a fix!--what shall we do?" said Peterkin, while we both +turned our eyes to Jack, to whom we always looked in our difficulties. +Jack seemed not a little perplexed. + +"There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach," said he, "but they are +of no use at all without a steel. However, we must try." So saying, he +went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. On one of these he +placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; but it was with great +difficulty that a very small spark was struck out of the flints, and the +tinder, being a bad, hard piece, would not catch. He then tried the bit +of hoop iron, which would not strike fire at all; and after that the back +of the axe, with no better success. During all these trials Peterkin sat +with his hands in his pockets, gazing with a most melancholy visage at +our comrade, his face growing longer and more miserable at each +successive failure. + +"Oh dear!" he sighed, "I would not care a button for the cooking of our +victuals,--perhaps they don't need it,--but it's so dismal to eat one's +supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital day, that it's a pity +to finish off in this glum style. Oh, I have it!" he cried, starting up; +"the spy-glass,--the big glass at the end is a burning-glass!" + +"You forget that we have no sun," said I. + +Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the telescope he had +quite overlooked the absence of the sun. + +"Ah, boys, I've got it now!" exclaimed Jack, rising and cutting a branch +from a neighbouring bush, which be stripped of its leaves. "I recollect +seeing this done once at home. Hand me the bit of whip-cord." With the +cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then he cut a piece, about three +inches long, off the end of a dead branch, which he pointed at the two +ends. Round this he passed the cord of the bow, and placed one end +against his chest, which was protected from its point by a chip of wood; +the other point he placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to +saw vigorously with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill +while boring a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds the tinder +began to smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; and in less than a +quarter of an hour we were drinking our lemonade and eating cocoa nuts +round a fire that would have roasted an entire sheep, while the smoke, +flames, and sparks, flew up among the broad leaves of the overhanging +palm trees, and cast a warm glow upon our leafy bower. + +That night the starry sky looked down through the gently rustling trees +upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the surf upon the coral +reef was our lullaby. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith--We luxuriate in the sea, +try our diving powers, and make enchanting excursions among the coral +groves at the bottom of the ocean--The wonders of the deep enlarged upon. + +What a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious morning, and +find the rising sun staring into your face with dazzling brilliancy!--to +see the birds twittering in the bushes, and to hear the murmuring of a +rill, or the soft hissing ripples as they fall upon the sea-shore! At +any time and in any place such sights and sounds are most charming, but +more especially are they so when one awakens to them, for the first time, +in a novel and romantic situation, with the soft sweet air of a tropical +climate mingling with the fresh smell of the sea, and stirring the +strange leaves that flutter overhead and around one, or ruffling the +plumage of the stranger birds that fly inquiringly around, as if to +demand what business we have to intrude uninvited on their domains. When +I awoke on the morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this most +delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of leaves, +gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees into the clear blue +sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that passed slowly across it, my +heart expanded more and more with an exulting gladness, the like of which +I had never felt before. While I meditated, my thoughts again turned to +the great and kind Creator of this beautiful world, as they had done on +the previous day, when I first beheld the sea and the coral reef, with +the mighty waves dashing over it into the calm waters of the lagoon. + +While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, for I had +faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to my beloved +mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was with a feeling of +dismay that I remembered I had left it in the ship. I was much troubled +about this. However, I consoled myself with reflecting that I could keep +the second part of my promise to her, namely, that I should never omit to +say my prayers. So I rose quietly, lest I should disturb my companions, +who were still asleep, and stepped aside into the bushes for this +purpose. + +On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay down to think +over our situation. Just at that moment I was attracted by the sight of +a very small parrot, which Jack afterwards told me was called a paroquet. +It was seated on a twig that overhung Peterkin's head, and I was speedily +lost in admiration of its bright green plumage, which was mingled with +other gay colours. While I looked I observed that the bird turned its +head slowly from side to side and looked downwards, first with the one +eye, and then with the other. On glancing downwards I observed that +Peterkin's mouth was wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking +into it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in my +composition, and that I never could understand a joke. In regard to the +latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, when they were explained +to me, I understood jokes as well as most people: but in regard to the +former he must certainly have been wrong, for this bird seemed to me to +be extremely funny; and I could not help thinking that, if it should +happen to faint, or slip its foot, and fall off the twig into Peterkin's +mouth, he would perhaps think it funny too! Suddenly the paroquet bent +down its head and uttered a loud scream in his face. This awoke him, +and, with a cry of surprise, he started up, while the foolish bird flew +precipitately away. + +"Oh you monster!" cried Peterkin, shaking his fist at the bird. Then he +yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked what o'clock it was. + +I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches were at the +bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a little past sunrise. + +Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he looked up into the +bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his eyes glistened with delight, +and he uttered a faint "hurrah!" and yawned again. Then he gazed slowly +round, till, observing the calm sea through an opening in the bushes, he +started suddenly up as if he had received an electric shock, uttered a +vehement shout, flung off his garments, and, rushing over the white +sands, plunged into the water. The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow +with a look of grave surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of +intelligence on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that he +only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his feet, +threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a lion-like spring, +dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea with such force as quite +to envelop Peterkin in a shower of spray. Jack was a remarkably good +swimmer and diver, so that after his plunge we saw no sign of him for +nearly a minute; after which he suddenly emerged, with a cry of joy, a +good many yards out from the shore. My spirits were so much raised by +seeing all this that I, too, hastily threw off my garments and +endeavoured to imitate Jack's vigorous bound; but I was so awkward that +my foot caught on a stump, and I fell to the ground; then I slipped on a +stone while running over the mud, and nearly fell again, much to the +amusement of Peterkin, who laughed heartily, and called me a "slow +coach," while Jack cried out, "Come along, Ralph, and I'll help you." +However, when I got into the water I managed very well, for I was really +a good swimmer, and diver too. I could not, indeed, equal Jack, who was +superior to any Englishman I ever saw, but I infinitely surpassed +Peterkin, who could only swim a little, and could not dive at all. + +While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in running along +the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, and occasionally +dived for stones. I shall never forget my surprise and delight on first +beholding the bottom of the sea. As I have before stated, the water +within the reef was as calm as a pond; and, as there was no wind, it was +quite clear, from the surface to the bottom, so that we could see down +easily even at a depth of twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I dived +in shallower water, we expected to have found sand and stones, instead of +which we found ourselves in what appeared really to be an enchanted +garden. The whole of the bottom of the lagoon, as we called the calm +water within the reef, was covered with coral of every shape, size, and +hue. Some portions were formed like large mushrooms; others appeared +like the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached to them; but the +most common kind was a species of branching coral, and some portions were +of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure white. Among this there grew +large quantities of sea-weed of the richest hues imaginable, and of the +most graceful forms; while innumerable fishes--blue, red, yellow, green, +and striped--sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this submarine +garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our approaching them. + +On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, Jack and I +rose close to each other. + +"Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so lovely?" said Jack, as +he flung the spray from his hair. + +"Never," I replied. "It appears to me like fairy realms. I can scarcely +believe that we are not dreaming." + +"Dreaming!" cried Jack, "do you know, Ralph, I'm half tempted to think +that we really are dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to make the most +of it, and dream another dive; so here goes,--down again, my boy!" + +We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other while under +water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we could keep down much +longer than I ever recollect having done in our own seas at home. I +believe that this was owing to the heat of the water, which was so warm +that we afterwards found we could remain in it for two and three hours at +a time without feeling any unpleasant effects such as we used to +experience in the sea at home. When Jack reached the bottom, he grasped +the coral stems, and crept along on his hands and knees, peeping under +the sea-weed and among the rocks. I observed him also pick up one or two +large oysters, and retain them in his grasp, as if he meant to take them +up with him, so I also gathered a few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a +fish with blue and yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its +tail, but did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and attempted +to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang like an arrow to +the surface, where, on following him, I found him gasping and coughing, +and spitting water from his mouth. In a few minutes he recovered, and we +both turned to swim ashore. + +"I declare, Ralph," said he, "that I actually tried to laugh under +water." + +"So I saw," I replied; "and I observed that you very nearly caught that +fish by the tail. It would have done capitally for breakfast if you +had." + +"Breakfast enough here," said he, holding up the oysters, as we landed +and ran up the beach. "Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. Split open +these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. They'll agree with +the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no doubt." + +Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and opened them with +the edge of our axe, exclaiming, "Now, that _is_ capital. There's +nothing I'm so fond of." + +"Ah! that's lucky," remarked Jack. "I'll be able to keep you in good +order now, Master Peterkin. You know you can't dive any better than a +cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall have no oysters for +breakfast." + +"I'm very glad that our prospect of breakfast is so good," said I, "for +I'm very hungry." + +"Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph," said Peterkin, holding a +large oyster to my lips. I opened my mouth and swallowed it in silence, +and really it was remarkably good. + +We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for spending the +day. We had no difficulty with the fire this morning, as our burning- +glass was an admirable one; and while we roasted a few oysters and ate +our cocoa nuts, we held a long, animated conversation about our plans for +the future. What those plans were, and how we carried them into effect, +the reader shall see hereafter. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable and +interesting discoveries--We get a dreadful fright--The bread-fruit +tree--Wonderful peculiarity of some of the fruit trees--Signs of former +inhabitants. + +Our first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles we +possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a small cave +which we discovered near our encampment. This cave, we hoped, might be +useful to us afterwards as a store-house. Then we cut two large clubs +off a species of very hard tree which grew near at hand. One of these +was given to Peterkin, the other to me, and Jack armed himself with the +axe. We took these precautions because we purposed to make an excursion +to the top of the mountains of the interior, in order to obtain a better +view of our island. Of course we knew not what dangers might befall us +by the way, so thought it best to be prepared. + +Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished our fire, we +sallied forth and walked a short distance along the sea-beach, till we +came to the entrance of a valley, through which flowed the rivulet before +mentioned. Here we turned our backs on the sea and struck into the +interior. + +The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley was truly +splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle rise in the land, +which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart on each side of the +valley. These ridges,--which, as well as the low grounds between them, +were covered with trees and shrubs of the most luxuriant kind--continued +to recede inland for about two miles, when they joined the foot of a +small mountain. This hill rose rather abruptly from the head of the +valley, and was likewise entirely covered even to the top with trees, +except on one particular spot near the left shoulder, where was a bare +and rocky place of a broken and savage character. Beyond this hill we +could not see, and we therefore directed our course up the banks of the +rivulet towards the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, should +that be possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was. + +Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, carrying the +axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his enormous club, came second, as +he said he should like to be in a position to defend me if any danger +should threaten. I brought up the rear, but, having been more taken up +with the wonderful and curious things I saw at starting than with +thoughts of possible danger, I had very foolishly left my club behind me. +Although, as I have said the trees and bushes were very luxuriant, they +were not so thickly crowded together as to hinder our progress among +them. We were able to wind in and out, and to follow the banks of the +stream quite easily, although, it is true, the height and thickness of +the foliage prevented us from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a jutting- +out rock on the hill sides afforded us a position whence we could enjoy +the romantic view and mark our progress towards the foot of the hill. I +was particularly struck, during the walk, with the richness of the +undergrowth in most places, and recognised many berries and plants that +resembled those of my native land, especially a tall, elegantly-formed +fern, which emitted an agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of +flowers, too, but I did not see so many of these as I should have +expected in such a climate. We also saw a great variety of small birds +of bright plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one that awoke +Peterkin so rudely in the morning. + +Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering anything to +alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing close under a part +of the hill which was hidden from our view by the broad leaves of the +banana trees, which grew in great luxuriance in that part. Jack was just +preparing to force his way through this thicket, when we were startled +and arrested by a strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to +us quite different from any of the sounds we had heard during the +previous part of our walk. + +"Hallo!" cried Peterkin, stopping short and grasping his club with both +hands, "what's that?" + +Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right hand, while +with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and endeavoured to peer +amongst them. + +"I can see nothing," he said, after a short pause. + +"I think it--" + +Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all sprang back +and stood on the defensive. For myself, having forgotten my club, and +not having taken the precaution to cut another, I buttoned my jacket, +doubled my fists, and threw myself into a boxing attitude. I must say, +however, that I felt somewhat uneasy; and my companions afterwards +confessed that their thoughts at this moment had been instantly filled +with all they had ever heard or read of wild beasts and savages, +torturings at the stake, roastings alive, and such like horrible things. +Suddenly the pattering noise increased with tenfold violence. It was +followed by a fearful crash among the bushes, which was rapidly repeated, +as if some gigantic animal were bounding towards us. In another moment +an enormous rock came crashing through the shrubbery, followed by a cloud +of dust and small stones, flew close past the spot where we stood, +carrying bushes and young trees along with it. + +"Pooh! is that all?" exclaimed Peterkin, wiping the perspiration off his +forehead. "Why, I thought it was all the wild men and beasts in the +South Sea Islands galloping on in one grand charge to sweep us off the +face of the earth, instead of a mere stone tumbling down the mountain +side." + +"Nevertheless," remarked Jack, "if that same stone had hit any of us, it +would have rendered the charge you speak of quite unnecessary, Peterkin." + +This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. On examining the +spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close to the foot of a very +rugged precipice, from which stones of various sizes were always tumbling +at intervals. Indeed, the numerous fragments lying scattered all around +might have suggested the cause of the sound, had we not been too suddenly +alarmed to think of anything. + +We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future excursions into +the interior, we would be careful to avoid this dangerous precipice. + +Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and prepared to ascend +it. Here Jack made a discovery which caused us all very great joy. This +was a tree of a remarkably beautiful appearance, which Jack confidently +declared to be the celebrated bread-fruit tree. + +"Is it celebrated?" inquired Peterkin, with a look of great simplicity. + +"It is," replied Jack + +"That's odd, now," rejoined Peterkin; "never heard of it before." + +"Then it's not so celebrated as I thought it was," returned Jack, quietly +squeezing Peterkin's hat over his eyes; "but listen, you ignorant boobie! +and hear of it now." + +Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as much +interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one of the most +valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears two, sometimes three, +crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit is very like wheaten bread in +appearance, and that it constitutes the principal food of many of the +islanders. + +"So," said Peterkin, "we seem to have everything ready prepared to our +hands in this wonderful island,--lemonade ready bottled in nuts, and loaf- +bread growing on the trees!" + +Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious fact that +he spoke almost the literal truth. "Moreover," continued Jack, "the +bread-fruit tree affords a capital gum, which serves the natives for +pitching their canoes; the bark of the young branches is made by them +into cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and of a good colour, they +build their houses. So you see, lads, that we have no lack of material +here to make us comfortable, if we are only clever enough to use it." + +"But are you sure that that's it?" asked Peterkin. + +"Quite sure," replied Jack; "for I was particularly interested in the +account I once read of it, and I remember the description well. I am +sorry, however, that I have forgotten the descriptions of many other +trees which I am sure we have seen to-day, if we could but recognise +them. So you see, Peterkin, I'm not up to everything yet." + +"Never mind, Jack," said Peterkin, with a grave, patronizing expression +of countenance, patting his tall companion on the shoulder,--"never mind, +Jack; you know a good deal for your age. You're a clever boy, sir,--a +promising young man; and if you only go on as you have begun, sir, you +will--" + +The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping up +Peterkin's heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick shrubs, where, +finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking in the sunshine, while +Jack and I examined the bread-tree. + +We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its broad leaves, +which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply indented, and of a +glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The fruit, with which it was loaded, +was nearly round, and appeared to be about six inches in diameter, with a +rough rind, marked with lozenge-shaped divisions. It was of various +colours, from light pea-green to brown and rich yellow. Jack said that +the yellow was the ripe fruit. We afterwards found that most of the +fruit-trees on the island were evergreens, and that we might, when we +wished, pluck the blossom and the ripe fruit from the same tree. Such a +wonderful difference from the trees of our own country surprised us not a +little. The bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; the trunk was +about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be twenty feet high, being +quite destitute of branches up to that height, where it branched off into +a beautiful and umbrageous head. We noticed that the fruit hung in +clusters of twos and threes on the branches; but as we were anxious to +get to the top of the hill, we refrained from attempting to pluck any at +that time. + +Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and it was +with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep sides of the +hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if possible a grander, prospect +met our gaze. We found that this was not the highest part of the island, +but that another hill lay beyond, with a wide valley between it and the +one on which we stood. This valley, like the first, was also full of +rich trees, some dark and some light green, some heavy and thick in +foliage, and others light, feathery, and graceful, while the beautiful +blossoms on many of them threw a sort of rainbow tint over all, and gave +to the valley the appearance of a garden of flowers. Among these we +recognised many of the bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, and +also a great many cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we pushed down +the hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to ascend the second +mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to the top, but the summit +was bare, and in some places broken. + +While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with much +interest. This was the stump of a tree that had evidently been cut down +with an axe! So, then, we were not the first who had viewed this +beautiful isle. The hand of man had been at work there before us. It +now began to recur to us again that perhaps the island was inhabited, +although we had not seen any traces of man until now; but a second glance +at the stump convinced us that we had not more reason to think so now +than formerly; for the surface of the wood was quite decayed, and partly +covered with fungus and green matter, so that it must have been cut many +years ago. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "some ship or other has touched here long ago +for wood, and only taken one tree." + +We did not think this likely, however, because, in such circumstances, +the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, and near the shore, +whereas this was a large tree and stood near the top of the mountain. In +fact it was the highest large tree on the mountain, all above it being +wood of very recent growth. + +"I can't understand it," said Jack, scratching the surface of the stump +with his axe. "I can only suppose that the savages have been here and +cut it for some purpose known only to themselves. But, hallo! what have +we here?" + +As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and fungus from +the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces of marks, as if some +inscription or initials had been cut thereon. But although the traces +were distinct, beyond all doubt, the exact form of the letters could not +be made out. Jack thought they looked like J. S. but we could not be +certain. They had apparently been carelessly cut, and long exposure to +the weather had so broken them up that we could not make out what they +were. We were exceedingly perplexed at this discovery, and stayed a long +time at the place conjecturing what these marks could have been, but +without avail; so, as the day was advancing, we left it and quickly +reached the top of the mountain. + +We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from it we saw +our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around us. As I have always +thought it impossible to get a thing properly into one's understanding +without comprehending it, I shall beg the reader's patience for a little +while I describe our island, thus, shortly:-- + +It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; the other, +on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a rich, beautiful valley, +as already said. This valley crossed the island from one end to the +other, being high in the middle and sloping on each side towards the sea. +The large mountain sloped, on the side farthest from where we had been +wrecked, gradually towards the sea; but although, when viewed at a +glance, it had thus a regular sloping appearance, a more careful +observation showed that it was broken up into a multitude of very small +vales, or rather dells and glens, intermingled with little rugged spots +and small but abrupt precipices here and there, with rivulets tumbling +over their edges and wandering down the slopes in little white streams, +sometimes glistening among the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa- +nut trees, or hid altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base of +this mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which terminated +abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the island, whence we had +come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot of which diverged three +valleys; one being that which we had ascended, with a smaller vale on +each side of it, and separated from it by the two ridges before +mentioned. In these smaller valleys there were no streams, but they were +clothed with the same luxuriant vegetation. + +The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, as it was +almost circular in form, its circumference must have been thirty +miles;--perhaps a little more, if allowance be made for the numerous bays +and indentations of the shore. The entire island was belted by a beach +of pure white sand, on which laved the gentle ripples of the lagoon. We +now also observed that the coral reef completely encircled the island; +but it varied its distance from it here and there, in some places being a +mile from the beach, in others, a few hundred yards, but the average +distance was half a mile. The reef lay very low, and the spray of the +surf broke quite over it in many places. This surf never ceased its +roar, for, however calm the weather might be, there is always a gentle +swaying motion in the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable +out at sea, reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water within +the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. There were three narrow +openings in the reef; one opposite each end of the valley which I have +described as crossing the island; the other opposite our own valley, +which we afterwards named the Valley of the Wreck. At each of these +openings the reef rose into two small green islets, covered with bushes +and having one or two cocoa-nut palms on each. These islets were very +singular, and appeared as if planted expressly for the purpose of marking +the channel into the lagoon. Our captain was making for one of these +openings the day we were wrecked, and would have reached it too, I doubt +not, had not the rudder been torn away. Within the lagoon were several +pretty, low coral islands, just opposite our encampment; and, immediately +beyond these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other islands, at various +distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all of them, as far as we could +discern, smaller than ours and apparently uninhabited. They seemed to be +low coral islands, raised but little above the sea, yet covered with +cocoa-nut trees. + +All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the top of the +mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we prepared to return; but +here again we discovered traces of the presence of man. These were a +pole or staff and one or two pieces of wood which had been squared with +an axe. All of these were, however, very much decayed, and they had +evidently not been touched for many years. + +Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. On the way we +fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, but whether old or of +recent date none of us were able to guess. This also tended to raise our +hopes of obtaining some animal food on the island, so we reached home in +good spirits, quite prepared for supper, and highly satisfied with our +excursion. + +After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we came to the +conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went to bed. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +Jack's ingenuity--We get into difficulties about fishing, and get out of +them by a method which gives us a cold bath--Horrible encounter with a +shark. + +For several days after the excursion related in the last chapter we did +not wander far from our encampment, but gave ourselves up to forming +plans for the future and making our present abode comfortable. + +There were various causes that induced this state of comparative +inaction. In the first place, although everything around us was so +delightful, and we could without difficulty obtain all that we required +for our bodily comfort, we did not quite like the idea of settling down +here for the rest of our lives, far away from our friends and our native +land. To set energetically about preparations for a permanent residence +seemed so like making up our minds to saying adieu to home and friends +for ever, that we tacitly shrank from it and put off our preparations, +for one reason and another, as long as we could. Then there was a little +uncertainty still as to there being natives on the island, and we +entertained a kind of faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. +But as day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to work at +our homestead. + +During this time, however, we had not been altogether idle. We made +several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, most of which did not +improve it. Then we removed our goods, and took up our abode in the +cave, but found the change so bad that we returned gladly to the bower. +Besides this we bathed very frequently, and talked a great deal; at least +Jack and Peterkin did,--I listened. Among other useful things, Jack, who +was ever the most active and diligent, converted about three inches of +the hoop-iron into an excellent knife. First he beat it quite flat with +the axe. Then he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with +our piece of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of +sand-stone. When it was finished he used it to shape a better handle, to +which he fixed it with a strip of his cotton handkerchief;--in which +operation he had, as Peterkin pointed out, torn off one of Lord Nelson's +noses. However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by Peterkin as a +fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to the end of it. This +the fish were allowed to swallow, and then they were pulled quickly +ashore. But as the line was very short and we had no boat, the fish we +caught were exceedingly small. + +One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been angling, and +said in a very cross tone, "I'll tell you what, Jack, I'm not going to be +humbugged with catching such contemptible things any longer. I want you +to swim out with me on your back, and let me fish in deep water!" + +"Dear me, Peterkin," replied Jack, "I had no idea you were taking the +thing so much to heart, else I would have got you out of that difficulty +long ago. Let me see,"--and Jack looked down at a piece of timber on +which he had been labouring, with a peculiar gaze of abstraction, which +he always assumed when trying to invent or discover anything. + +"What say you to building a boat?" he inquired, looking up hastily. + +"Take far too long," was the reply; "can't be bothered waiting. I want +to begin at once!" + +Again Jack considered. "I have it!" he cried. "We'll fell a large tree +and launch the trunk of it in the water, so that when you want to fish +you've nothing to do but to swim out to it." + +"Would not a small raft do better?" said I. + +"Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together with. Perhaps we +may find something hereafter that will do as well, but, in the meantime, +let us try the tree." + +This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far distant, where we +knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew near the water's edge. As +soon as we reached it Jack threw off his coat, and, wielding the axe with +his sturdy arms, hacked and hewed at it for a quarter of an hour without +stopping. Then he paused, and, while he sat down to rest, I continued +the work. Then Peterkin made a vigorous attack on it, so that when Jack +renewed his powerful blows, a few minutes cutting brought it down with a +terrible crash. + +"Hurrah! now for it," cried Jack; "let us off with its head." + +So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six yards from +the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, short poles or levers +from the stout branches, with which to roll the log down the beach into +the sea; for, as it was nearly two feet thick at the large end, we could +not move it without such helps. With the levers, however, we rolled it +slowly into the sea. + +Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next shaped the +levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted to embark. This was +easy enough to do; but, after seating ourselves astride the log, it was +with the utmost difficulty we kept it from rolling round and plunging us +into the water. Not that we minded that much; but we preferred, if +possible, to fish in dry clothes. To be sure, our trousers were +necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling in the water on each side of +the log; but, as they could be easily dried, we did not care. After half +an hour's practice, we became expert enough to keep our balance pretty +steadily. Then Peterkin laid down his paddle, and having baited his line +with a whole oyster, dropt it into deep water. + +"Now, then, Jack," said he, "be cautious; steer clear o' that sea-weed. +There; that's it; gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at least a foot +long down there, coming to--ha! that's it! Oh! bother, he's off." + +"Did he bite?" said Jack, urging the log onwards a little with his +paddle. + +"Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the moment I began to haul he +opened his jaws and let it out again." + +"Let him swallow it next time," said Jack, laughing at the melancholy +expression of Peterkin's visage. + +"There he's again," cried Peterkin, his eyes flashing with excitement. +"Look out! Now then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute _won't_ swallow +it!" + +"Try to haul him up by the mouth, then," cried Jack. "Do it gently." + +A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor Peterkin had +tried and failed again. + +"Never mind, lad," said Jack, in a voice of sympathy; "we'll move on, and +offer it to some other fish." So saying, Jack plied his paddle; but +scarcely had he moved from the spot, when a fish with an enormous head +and a little body darted from under a rock and swallowed the bait at +once. + +"Got him this time,--that's a fact!" cried Peterkin, hauling in the line. +"He's swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I declare. Oh what a +thumper!" + +As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward to see it, +and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his arms round the fish's neck; +and, in another instant, we were all floundering in the water! + +A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface like three +drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We soon recovered our +position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin secured the fish, which had +well-nigh escaped in the midst of our struggles. It was little worth +having, however; but, as Peterkin remarked, it was better than the smouts +he had been catching for the last two or three days; so we laid it on the +log before us, and having re-baited the line, dropt it in again for +another. + +Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention was suddenly +attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards away from us. Peterkin +shouted to us to paddle in that direction, as he thought it was a big +fish, and we might have a chance of catching it. But Jack, instead of +complying, said, in a deep, earnest tone of voice, which I never before +heard him use,-- + +"Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; quick,--it's a shark!" + +The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for it must be +remembered that our legs were hanging down in the water, and we could not +venture to pull them up without upsetting the log. Peterkin instantly +hauled up the line; and, grasping his paddle, exerted himself to the +utmost, while we also did our best to make for shore. But we were a good +way off, and the log being, as I have before said, very heavy, moved but +slowly through the water. We now saw the shark quite distinctly swimming +round and round us, its sharp fin every now and then protruding above the +water. From its active and unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up +its mind to attack us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our lives, +while he himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted "Look +out!--there he comes!" and in a second we saw the monstrous fish dive +close under us, and turn half over on his side. But we all made a great +commotion with our paddles, which no doubt frightened it away for that +time, as we saw it immediately after circling round us as before. + +"Throw the fish to him," cried Jack, in a quick, suppressed voice; "we'll +make the shore in time yet if we can keep him off for a few minutes." + +Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then plied his +paddle again with all his might. No sooner had the fish fallen on the +water than we observed the shark to sink. In another second we saw its +white breast rising; for sharks always turn over on their sides when +about to seize their prey, their mouths being not at the point of their +heads like those of other fish, but, as it were, under their chins. In +another moment his snout rose above the water,--his wide jaws, armed with +a terrific double row of teeth, appeared. The dead fish was engulfed, +and the shark sank out of sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that +it would be satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its +quick motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once. + +"Stop paddling," cried Jack suddenly. "I see it coming up behind us. +Now, obey my orders quickly. Our lives may depend on it Ralph. Peterkin, +do your best to _balance the log_. Don't look out for the shark. Don't +glance behind you. Do nothing but balance the log." + +{A dreadful adventure: p77.jpg} + +Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only too glad to +do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of escape, for we had +implicit confidence in Jack's courage and wisdom. For a few seconds, +that seemed long minutes to my mind, we sat thus silently; but I could +not resist glancing backward, despite the orders to the contrary. On +doing so, I saw Jack sitting rigid like a statue, with his paddle raised, +his lips compressed, and his eye-brows bent over his eyes, which glared +savagely from beneath them down into the water. I also saw the shark, to +my horror, quite close under the log, in the act of darting towards +Jack's foot. I could scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In +another moment the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the +water, and threw it over the log. The monster's snout rubbed against the +log as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into which Jack +instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its throat. So violent +was the act that Jack rose to his feet in performing it; the log was +thereby rolled completely over, and we were once more plunged into the +water. We all rose, spluttering and gasping, in a moment. + +"Now then, strike out for shore," cried Jack. "Here, Peterkin, catch +hold of my collar, and kick out with a will." + +Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such force that +he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being free from all +encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with him. As we had by this time +drawn pretty near to the shore, a few minutes more sufficed to carry us +into shallow water; and, finally, we landed in safety, though very much +exhausted, and not a little frightened by our terrible adventure. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to dive--How he did +it--More difficulties overcome--The water garden--Curious creatures of +the sea--The tank--Candles missed very much, and the candle-nut tree +discovered--Wonderful account of Peterkin's first voyage--Cloth found +growing on a tree--A plan projected, and arms prepared for offence and +defence--A dreadful cry. + +Our encounter with the shark was the first great danger that had befallen +us since landing on this island, and we felt very seriously affected by +it, especially when we considered that we had so often unwittingly +incurred the same danger before while bathing. We were now forced to +take to fishing again in the shallow water, until we should succeed in +constructing a raft. What troubled us most, however, was, that we were +compelled to forego our morning swimming excursions. We did, indeed, +continue to enjoy our bathe in the shallow water, but Jack and I found +that one great source of our enjoyment was gone, when we could no longer +dive down among the beautiful coral groves at the bottom of the lagoon. +We had come to be so fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest +in watching the formations of coral and the gambols of the many beautiful +fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that we had become +quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and the localities that +they chiefly haunted. We had also become expert divers. But we made it +a rule never to stay long under water at a time. Jack told me that to do +so often was bad for the lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, +would ere long do us a serious injury. So we never stayed at the bottom +as long as we might have done, but came up frequently to the top for +fresh air, and dived down again immediately. Sometimes, when Jack +happened to be in a humorous frame, he would seat himself at the bottom +of the sea on one of the brain corals, as if he were seated on a large +paddock-stool, and then make faces at me, in order, if possible, to make +me laugh under water. At first, when he took me unawares, he nearly +succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to laugh; but +afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being naturally of a +grave disposition, I had no difficulty in restraining myself. I used +often to wonder how poor Peterkin would have liked to be with us; and he +sometimes expressed much regret at being unable to join us. I used to do +my best to gratify him, poor fellow, by relating all the wonders that we +saw; but this, instead of satisfying, seemed only to whet his curiosity +the more, so one day we prevailed on him to try to go down with us. But, +although a brave boy in every other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the +water, and it was with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken down, +for he could never have managed to push himself down to the bottom +without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a yard or so +into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle and kick violently, +so we were forced to let him go, when he rose out of the water like a +cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful roar, and struck out for the land +with the utmost possible haste. + +Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought thereon, +Jack and I felt very much depressed in our spirits. I could see, also, +that Peterkin grieved and sympathized with us, for, when talking about +this matter, he refrained from jesting and bantering us upon it. + +As, however, a man's difficulties usually set him upon devising methods +to overcome them, whereby he often discovers better things than those he +may have lost, so this our difficulty induced us to think of searching +for a large pool among the rocks, where the water should be deep enough +for diving yet so surrounded by rocks as to prevent sharks from getting +at us. And such a pool we afterwards found, which proved to be very much +better than our most sanguine hopes anticipated. It was situated not +more than ten minutes' walk from our camp, and was in the form of a small +deep bay or basin, the entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so +shallow that no fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not +unless he should be a remarkably thin one. + +Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the coral +formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed plants far more +lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon itself. And the water +was so clear and still, that, although very deep, you could see the +minutest object at the bottom. Besides this, there was a ledge of rock +which overhung the basin at its deepest part, from which we could dive +pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit and see not only all the +wonders I had described to him, but also see Jack and me creeping amongst +the marine shrubbery at the bottom, like, as--he expressed it,--"two +great white sea-monsters." During these excursions of ours to the bottom +of the sea, we began to get an insight into the manners and customs of +its inhabitants, and to make discoveries of wonderful things, the like of +which we never before conceived. Among other things, we were deeply +interested with the operations of the little coral insect which, I was +informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely constructed many of the +numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, certainly, when we considered +the great reef which these insects had formed round the island on which +we were cast, and observed their ceaseless activity in building their +myriad cells, it did at first seem as if this might be true; but then, +again, when I looked at the mountains of the island, and reflected that +there were thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South +Seas, I doubted that there must be some mistake here. But more of this +hereafter. + +I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of the +anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and such-like +creatures; and was not content with watching those I saw during my dives +in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop out a hole in the coral rock +close to it, which I filled with salt water, and stocked with sundry +specimens of anemones and shell-fish, in order to watch more closely how +they were in the habit of passing their time. Our burning-glass also now +became a great treasure to me, as it enabled me to magnify, and so to +perceive more clearly the forms and actions of these curious creatures of +the deep. + +Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we began to +talk of a project which we had long had in contemplation,--namely, to +travel entirely round the island; in order, first, to ascertain whether +it contained any other productions which might be useful to us; and, +second, to see whether there might be any place more convenient and +suitable for our permanent residence than that on which we were now +encamped. Not that we were in any degree dissatisfied with it; on the +contrary, we entertained quite a home-feeling to our bower and its +neighbourhood; but if a better place did exist, there was no reason why +we should not make use of it. At any rate, it would be well to know of +its existence. + +We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack proposed that, +before undertaking such an excursion, we should supply ourselves with +good defensive arms, for, as we intended not only to go round all the +shore, but to ascend most of the valleys, before returning home, we +should be likely to meet in with, he would not say dangers, but, at +least, with everything that existed on the island, whatever that might +be. + +"Besides," said Jack, "it won't do for us to live on cocoa-nuts and +oysters always. No doubt they are very excellent in their way, but I +think a little animal food, now and then, would be agreeable as well as +good for us; and as there are many small birds among the trees, some of +which are probably very good to eat, I think it would be a capital plan +to make bows and arrows, with which we could easily knock them over." + +"First rate!" cried Peterkin. "You will make the bows, Jack, and I'll +try my hand at the arrows. The fact is, I'm quite tired of throwing +stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I think, and have +persevered up to the present time, but I've never hit anything yet." + +"You forget," said I, "you hit me one day on the shin." + +"Ah, true," replied Peterkin, "and a precious shindy you kicked up in +consequence. But you were at least four yards away from the impudent +paroquet I aimed at; so you see what a horribly bad shot I am." + +"But," said I, "Jack, you cannot make three bows and arrows before to- +morrow, and would it not be a pity to waste time, now that we have made +up our minds to go on this expedition? Suppose that you make one bow and +arrow for yourself, and we can take our clubs?" + +"That's true, Ralph. The day is pretty far advanced, and I doubt if I +can make even one bow before dark. To be sure I might work by +fire-light, after the sun goes down." + +We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed with the sun, +as we had no pressing call to work o' nights; and, indeed, our work +during the day was usually hard enough,--what between fishing, and +improving our bower, and diving in the Water Garden, and rambling in the +woods; so that, when night came, we were usually very glad to retire to +our beds. But now that we had a desire to work at night, we felt a wish +for candles. + +"Won't a good blazing fire give you light enough?" inquired Peterkin. + +"Yes," replied Jack, "quite enough; but then it will give us a great deal +more than enough of heat in this warm climate of ours." + +"True," said Peterkin; "I forgot that. It would roast us." + +"Well, as you're always doing that at any rate," remarked Jack, "we could +scarcely call it a change. But the fact is, I've been thinking over this +subject before. There is a certain nut growing in these islands which is +called the candle-nut, because the natives use it instead of candles, and +I know all about it, and how to prepare it for burning--" + +"Then why don't you do it?" interrupted Peterkin. "Why have you kept us +in the dark so long, you vile philosopher?" + +"Because," said Jack, "I have not seen the tree yet, and I'm not sure +that I should know either the tree or the nuts if I did see them. You +see, I forget the description." + +"Ah! that's just the way with me," said Peterkin with a deep sigh. "I +never could keep in my mind for half an hour the few descriptions I ever +attempted to remember. The very first voyage I ever made was caused by +my mistaking a description, or forgetting it, which is the same thing. +And a horrible voyage it was. I had to fight with the captain the whole +way out, and made the homeward voyage by swimming!" + +"Come, Peterkin," said I, "you can't get even _me_ to believe that." + +"Perhaps not, but it's true, notwithstanding," returned Peterkin, +pretending to be hurt at my doubting his word. + +"Let us hear how it happened," said Jack, while a good-natured smile +overspread his face. + +"Well, you must know," began Peterkin, "that the very day before I went +to sea, I was greatly taken up with a game at hockey, which I was playing +with my old school-fellows for the last time before leaving them. You +see I was young then, Ralph." Peterkin gazed, in an abstracted and +melancholy manner, out to sea! "Well, in the midst of the game, my +uncle, who had taken all the bother and trouble of getting me bound +'prentice and rigged out, came and took me aside, and told me that he was +called suddenly away from home, and would not be able to see me aboard, +as he had intended. 'However,' said he, 'the captain knows you are +coming, so that's not of much consequence; but as you'll have to find the +ship yourself, you must remember her name and description. D'ye hear, +boy?' I certainly did hear, but I'm afraid I did not understand, for my +mind was so taken up with the game, which I saw my side was losing, that +I began to grow impatient, and the moment my uncle finished his +description of the ship, and bade me good-bye, I bolted back to my game, +with only a confused idea of three masts, and a green painted tafferel, +and a gilt figure-head of Hercules with his club at the bow. Next day I +was so much cast down with everybody saying good-bye, and a lot o' my +female friends cryin' horribly over me, that I did not start for the +harbour, where the ship was lying among a thousand others, till it was +almost too late. So I had to run the whole way. When I reached the +pier, there were so many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. 'Now,' said I to myself, 'Peterkin, +you're in a fix.' Then I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and three +masts, belonging to a ship just about to start; so I darted on board, but +speedily jumped on shore again, when I found that two of the masts +belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a third! At last I +caught sight of what I made sure was it,--a fine large vessel just +casting off her moorings. The tafferel was green. Three masts,--yes, +that must be it,--and the gilt figure-head of Hercules. To be sure it +had a three-pronged pitchfork in its hand instead of a club; but that +might be my uncle's mistake; or perhaps Hercules sometimes varied his +weapons. 'Cast off!' roared a voice from the quarter-deck. 'Hold on!' +cried I, rushing frantically through the crowd. 'Hold on! hold on!' +repeated some of the bystanders, while the men at the ropes delayed for a +minute. This threw the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his +friends had come down to see him off, and having his orders contradicted +so flatly was too much for him. However, the delay was sufficient. I +took a race and a good leap; the ropes were cast off; the steam-tug gave +a puff, and we started. Suddenly the captain was up to me: 'Where did +you come from, you scamp, and what do you want here?' + +"'Please, sir,' said I, touching my cap, 'I'm you're new 'prentice come +aboard.' + +"'New 'Prentice,' said he, stamping, 'I've got no new 'prentice. My boys +are all aboard already. This is a trick, you young blackguard. You've +run away, you have;' and the captain stamped about the deck and swore +dreadfully; for, you see, the thought of having to stop the ship and +lower a boat and lose half an hour, all for the slake of sending a small +boy ashore, seemed to make him very angry. Besides, it was blowin' fresh +outside the harbour, so that, to have let the steamer alongside to put me +into it was no easy job. Just as we were passing the pier-head, where +several boats were rowing into harbour, the captain came up to me,-- + +"'You've run away, you blackguard,' he said, giving me a box on the ear. + +"'No I haven't,' said I, angrily; for the box was by no means a light +one. + +"Hark'ee, boy, can you swim?' + +"'Yes,' said I. + +"'Then do it,' and, seizing me by my trousers and the nape of my neck, he +tossed me over the side into the sea. The fellows in the boats at the +end of the pier, backed their oars on seeing this; but observing that I +could swim, they allowed me to make the best of my way to the pier-head. +So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim my first homeward voyage." + +Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. "But tell us about the +candle-nut tree," said I; "you were talking about it." + +"Very true," said Jack, "but I fear I can remember little about it. I +believe the nut is about the size of a walnut; and I think that the +leaves are white, but I am not sure." + +"Eh! ha! hum!" exclaimed Peterkin, "I saw a tree answering to that +description this very day." + +"Did you?" cried Jack. "Is it far from this?" + +"No, not half a mile." + +"Then lead me to it," said Jack, seizing his axe. + +In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the underwood of the +forest, headed by Peterkin. + +We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had closely +examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut tree. Its leaves were +of a beautiful silvery white, and formed a fine contrast to the +dark-green foliage of the surrounding trees. We immediately filled our +pockets with the nuts, after which Jack said,-- + +"Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one of the long +branches." + +This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was very high, +and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger trees, he was not +much accustomed to climbing the high ones. The leaf or branch was a very +large one, and we were surprised at its size and strength. Viewed from a +little distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems to be a tall, straight stem, +without a single branch except at the top, where there is a tuft of +feathery-looking leaves, that seem to wave like soft plumes in the wind. +But when we saw one of these leaves or branches at our feet, we found it +to be a strong stalk, about fifteen feet long, with a number of narrow, +pointed leaflets ranged alternately on each side. But what seemed to us +the most wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling +cloth, which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where it had +been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had the greatest +difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, on account of this +substance, as it was wrapped quite round the tree, and, he observed, +round all the other branches, thus forming a strong support to the large +leaves while exposed to high winds. When I call this substance cloth I +do not exaggerate. Indeed, with regard to all the things I saw during my +eventful career in the South Seas, I have been exceedingly careful not to +exaggerate, or in any way to mislead or deceive my readers. This cloth, +I say, was remarkably like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam +or fibre down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, about +the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these fibres, very long +and tough, the one layer crossing the other obliquely, and the whole was +cemented together with a still finer fibrous and adhesive substance. When +we regarded it attentively, we could with difficulty believe that it had +not been woven by human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth we +stripped carefully off, and found it to be above two feet long, by a foot +broad, and we carried it home with us as a great prize. + +Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the central spine or +stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. Having made a small fire, he +baked the nuts slightly, and then pealed off the husks. After this he +wished to bore a hole in them, which, not having anything better at hand +at the time, he did with the point of our useless pencil-case. Then he +strung them on the cocoa-nut spine, and on putting a light to the topmost +nut, we found to our joy that it burned with a clear, beautiful flame; +upon seeing which, Peterkin sprang up and danced round the fire for at +least five minutes in the excess of his satisfaction. + +"Now lads," said Jack, extinguishing our candle, the sun will set in an +hour, so we have no time to lose. "I shall go and cut a young tree to +make my bow out of, and you had better each of you go and select good +strong sticks for clubs, and we'll set to work at them after dark." + +So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by Peterkin, while +I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, and fell to examining its +structure. So engrossed was I in this that I was still sitting in the +same attitude and occupation when my companions returned. + +"I told you so!" cried Peterkin, with a loud laugh. "Oh, Ralph, you're +incorrigible. See, there's a club for you. I was sure, when we left you +looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find you poring over it when +we came back, so I just cut a club for you as well as for myself." + +"Thank you, Peterkin," said I. "It was kind of you to do that, instead +of scolding me for a lazy fellow, as I confess I deserve." + +"Oh! as to that," returned Peterkin, "I'll blow you up yet, if you wish +it--only it would be of no use if I did, for you're a perfect mule!" + +As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing it in a +holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our bower, we seated +ourselves on our leafy beds and began to work. + +"I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use," said Jack, chipping the +piece of wood he had brought with his axe. "I used to be a pretty fair +shot once. But what's that you're doing?" he added, looking at Peterkin, +who had drawn the end of a long pole into the tent, and was endeavouring +to fit a small piece of the hoop-iron to the end of it. + +"I'm going to enlist into the Lancers," answered Peterkin. "You see, +Jack, I find the club rather an unwieldy instrument for my delicately- +formed muscles, and I flatter myself I shall do more execution with a +spear." + +"Well, if length constitutes power," said Jack, "you'll certainly be +invincible." + +The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, being a very +strong but light and tough young tree, which merely required thinning at +the butt to be a serviceable weapon. + +"That's a very good idea," said I. + +"Which--this?" inquired Peterkin, pointing to the spear. + +"Yes;" I replied. + +"Humph!" said he; "you'd find it a pretty tough and matter-of-fact idea, +if you had it stuck through your gizzard, old boy!" + +"I mean the idea of making it is a good one," said I, laughing. "And, +now I think of it, I'll change my plan, too. I don't think much of a +club, so I'll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. I used to be +very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David slaying Goliath the +Philistine, and I was once thought to be expert at it." + +So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time we all worked +very busily without speaking. At length Peterkin looked up: "I say, +Jack, I'm sorry to say I must apply to you for another strip of your +handkerchief, to tie on this rascally head with. It's pretty well torn +at any rate, so you won't miss it." + +Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin suddenly laid +his hand on his arm and arrested him. + +"Hist, man," said he, "be tender; you should never be needlessly cruel if +you can help it. Do try to shave past Lord Nelson's mouth without +tearing it, if possible! Thanks. There are plenty more handkerchiefs on +the cocoa-nut trees." + +Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record his jests +and humorous sayings now! + +While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but most +strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the sea, but was so far +away that we could not clearly distinguish its precise direction. Rushing +out of our bower, we hastened down to the beach and stayed to listen. +Again it came quite loud and distinct on the night air,--a prolonged, +hideous cry, something like the braying of an ass. The moon had risen, +and we could see the islands in and beyond the lagoon quite plainly, but +there was no object visible to account for such a cry. A strong gust of +wind was blowing from the point whence the sound came, but this died away +while we were gazing out to sea. + +"What can it be?" said Peterkin, in a low whisper, while we all +involuntarily crept closer to each other. + +"Do you know," said Jack, "I have heard that mysterious sound twice +before, but never so loud as to-night. Indeed it was so faint that I +thought I must have merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to alarm +you, I said nothing about it." + +We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did not come, +we returned to the bower and resumed our work. + +"Very strange," said Peterkin, quite gravely. "Do you believe in ghosts, +Ralph?" + +"No," I answered, "I do not. Nevertheless I must confess that strange, +unaccountable sounds, such as we have just heard, make me feel a little +uneasy." + +"What say you to it, Jack?" + +"I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy," he replied. "I never saw +a ghost myself, and I never met with any one who had; and I have +generally found that strange and unaccountable things have almost always +been accounted for, and found to be quite simple, on close examination. I +certainly can't imagine what _that_ sound is; but I'm quite sure I shall +find out before long,--and if it's a ghost I'll--" + +"Eat it," cried Peterkin. + +"Yes, I'll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two arrows are finished; so if +you're ready we had better turn in." + +By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an iron point +very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, the lines of which +were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut cloth, plaited; and Jack +had made a stout bow, nearly five feet long, with two arrows, feathered +with two or three large plumes which some bird had dropt. They had no +barbs, but Jack said that if arrows were well feathered, they did not +require iron points, but would fly quite well if merely sharpened at the +point; which I did not know before. + +"A feathered arrow without a barb," said he, "is a good weapon, but a +barbed arrow without feathers is utterly useless." + +The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, part of +which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the bow. + +Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought it wise to +exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons before starting, so +we spent the whole of the next day in practising. And it was well we did +so, for we found that our arms were very imperfect, and that we were far +from perfect in the use of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much +too strong, and he had to thin it. Also the spear was much too heavy, +and so had to be reduced in thickness, although nothing would induce +Peterkin to have it shortened. My sling answered very well, but I had +fallen so much out of practice that my first stone knocked off Peterkin's +hat, and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. However, after +having spent the whole day in diligent practice, we began to find some of +our former expertness returning--at least Jack and I did. As for +Peterkin, being naturally a neat-handed boy, he soon handled his spear +well, and could run full tilt at a cocoa nut, and hit it with great +precision once out of every five times. + +But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to the +unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had made him +Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from morning till +night, perseveringly, at the same thing. Peterkin wished very much to +run about and stick his spear into everything he passed; but Jack put up +a cocoa nut, and would not let him leave off running at that for a +moment, except when he wanted to rest. We laughed at Jack for this, but +we were both convinced that it did us much good. + +That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down to rest, +although we were much fatigued, in order that we might be in readiness to +set out on our expedition at daylight on the following morning. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +Prepare for a journey round the island--Sagacious reflections--Mysterious +appearances and startling occurrences. + +Scarcely had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of the broad +Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing in Peterkin's ear +to awaken him, ran down the beach to take his customary dip in the sea. +We did not, as was our wont, bathe that morning in our Water Garden, but, +in order to save time, refreshed ourselves in the shallow water just +opposite the bower. Our breakfast was also despatched without loss of +time, and in less than an hour afterwards all our preparations for the +journey were completed. + +In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of cocoa-nut cloth +round his waist, into which he thrust the axe. I was also advised to put +on a belt and carry a short cudgel or bludgeon in it; for, as Jack truly +remarked, the sling would be of little use if we should chance to come to +close quarters with any wild animal. As for Peterkin, notwithstanding +that he carried such a long, and I must add, frightful-looking spear over +his shoulder, we could not prevail on him to leave his club behind; +"for," said he, "a spear at close quarters is not worth a button." I +must say that it seemed to me that the club was, to use his own style of +language, not worth a button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the +head, something like the club which I remember to have observed in +picture-books of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that he +required to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at all. +However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out upon our +travels. + +We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as we knew +that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in with cocoa-nut +trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as Peterkin said, with meat +and drink and pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the precaution, however, to +put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest we should want fire. + +The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that very still and +peaceful sort which made the few noises that we heard seem to be _quiet_ +noises. I know no other way of expressing this idea. Noises which so +far from interrupting the universal tranquillity of earth, sea, and +sky--rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the world around us really +was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the peculiarly melancholy--yet, it +seemed to me, cheerful--plaint of sea-birds floating on the glassy water, +or sailing in the sky, also the subdued twittering of little birds among +the bushes, the faint ripples on the beach, and the solemn boom of the +surf upon the distant coral reef. We felt very glad in our hearts as we +walked along the sands side by side. For my part, I felt so deeply +overjoyed, that I was surprised at my own sensations, and fell into a +reverie upon the causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion that a +state of profound peace and repose, both in regard to outward objects and +within the soul, is the happiest condition in which man can be placed; +for, although I had many a time been most joyful and happy when engaged +in bustling, energetic, active pursuits or amusements, I never found that +such joy or satisfaction was so deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as +that which I now experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this +opinion when I observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that +Peterkin's happiness was also very great; yet he did not express this by +dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much as a single shout, but +walked quietly between us with his eye sparkling, and a joyful smile upon +his countenance. My reader must not suppose that I thought all this in +the clear and methodical manner in which I have set it down here. These +thoughts did, indeed, pass through my mind, but they did so in a very +confused and indefinite manner, for I was young at that time, and not +much given to deep reflections. Neither did I consider that the peace +whereof I write is not to be found in this world--at least in its +perfection, although I have since learned that by religion a man may +attain to a very great degree of it. + +I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between us. We had two +ways of walking together about our island. When we travelled through the +woods, we always did so in single file, as by this method we advanced +with greater facility, the one treading in the other's footsteps. In +such cases Jack always took the lead, Peterkin followed, and I brought up +the rear. But when we travelled along the sands, which extended almost +in an unbroken line of glistening white round the island, we marched +abreast, as we found this method more sociable, and every way more +pleasant. Jack, being the tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin +marched between us, as by this arrangement either of us could talk to him +or he to us, while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse together, +we could conveniently do so over Peterkin's head. Peterkin used to say, +in reference to this arrangement, that had he been as tall as either of +us, our order of march might have been the same, for, as Jack often used +to scold him for letting everything we said to him pass in at one ear and +out at the other, his head could of course form no interruption to our +discourse. + +We were now fairly started. Half a mile's walk conveyed us round a bend +in the land which shut out our bower from view, and for some time we +advanced at a brisk pace without speaking, though our eyes were not idle, +but noted everything, in the woods, on the shore, or in the sea, that was +interesting. After passing the ridge of land that formed one side of our +valley--the Valley of the Wreck--we beheld another small vale lying +before us in all the luxuriant loveliness of tropical vegetation. We +had, indeed, seen it before from the mountain-top, but we had no idea +that it would turn out to be so much more lovely when we were close to +it. We were about to commence the exploration of this valley, when +Peterkin stopped us, and directed our attention to a very remarkable +appearance in advance along the shore. + +"What's yon, think you?" said he, levelling his spear, as if he expected +an immediate attack from the object in question, though it was full half +a mile distant. + +As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as if of +steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of several feet, and then +disappeared. Had this been near the sea, we would not have been so +greatly surprised, as it might in that case have been the surf, for at +this part of the coast the coral reef approached so near to the island +that in some parts it almost joined it. There was therefore no lagoon +between, and the heavy surf of the ocean beat almost up to the rocks. But +this white column appeared about fifty yards inland. The rocks at the +place were rugged, and they stretched across the sandy beach into the +sea. Scarce had we ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when +another column flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot +where the first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long irregular +intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were now quite sure that +the columns were watery or composed of spray, but what caused them we +could not guess, so we determined to go and see. + +In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the spray. We +had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The ground also was full of holes +here and there. Now, while we stood anxiously waiting for the +re-appearance of these water-spouts, we heard a low, rumbling sound near +us, which quickly increased to a gargling and hissing noise, and a moment +afterwards a thick spout of water burst upwards from a hole in the rock, +and spouted into the air with much violence, and so close to where Jack +and I were standing that it nearly touched us. We sprang to one side, +but not before a cloud of spray descended, and drenched us both to the +skin. + +Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few drops, and +burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on beholding our miserable +plight. + +"Mind your eye!" he shouted eagerly, "there goes another!" The words +were scarcely out of his mouth when there came up a spout from another +hole, which served us exactly in the same manner as before. + +Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was abruptly put a +stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to where he stood. + +"Where'll it spout this time, I wonder?" he said, looking about with some +anxiety, and preparing to run. Suddenly there came a loud hiss or snort; +a fierce spout of water burst up between Peterkin's legs, blew him off +his feet, enveloped him in its spray, and hurled him to the ground. He +fell with so much violence that we feared he must have broken some of his +bones, and ran anxiously to his assistance; but fortunately he had fallen +on a clump of tangled herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most +deplorable condition. + +It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite sure that he +was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the next spout might arise, +we assisted him hastily to jump up and hurry from the spot. + +I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the spout of water +was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin completely off his legs, I am +not quite certain of the exact height to which it lifted him, being +somewhat startled by the event, and blinded partially by the spray, so +that my power of observation was somewhat impaired for the moment. + +"What's to be done now?" inquired Peterkin ruefully. + +"Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves," replied Jack. + +"And here is material ready to our hand," said I, picking up a dried +branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the woods. + +In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again dried. While +they were hanging up before the fire, we walked down to the beach, and +soon observed that these curious spouts took place immediately after the +fall of a huge wave, never before it; and, moreover, that the spouts did +not take place excepting when the billow was an extremely large one. From +this we concluded that there must be a subterraneous channel in the rock +into which the water was driven by the larger waves, and finding no way +of escape except through these small holes, was thus forced up violently +through them. At any rate, we could not conceive any other reason for +these strange water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple and probable +one, we forthwith adopted it. + +"I say, Ralph, what's that in the water? is it a shark?" said Jack, just +as we were about to quit the place. + +I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which he was +looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I saw a very faint +pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed to move slightly while I +looked at it. + +"It's like a fish of some sort," said I. + +"Hallo, Peterkin!" cried Jack, "fetch your spear; here's work for it." + +But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be too short. + +"There, now," said Peterkin with a sneer, "you were always telling me it +was too long." + +Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let go his +hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must have missed, for +the handle soon rose again; and when the spear was drawn up, there was +the pale green object in exactly the same spot, slowly moving its tail. + +"Very odd," said Jack. + +But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack and all of +us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could neither hit it nor drive +it away, so we were compelled to continue our journey without discovering +what it was. I was very much perplexed at this strange appearance in the +water, and could not get it out of my mind for a long time afterwards. +However, I quieted myself by resolving that I would pay a visit to it +again at some more convenient season. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits--The resources of the +Coral Island gradually unfolded--The banian-tree--Another tree which is +supported by natural planks--Water-fowl found--A very remarkable +discovery, and a very peculiar murder--We luxuriate on the fat of the +land. + +Our examination of the little valley proved to be altogether most +satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to those we had +already seen in our own valley, but also one or two others of a different +species. We had also the satisfaction of discovering a peculiar +vegetable, which Jack concluded must certainly be that of which he had +read as being very common among the South Sea islanders, and which was +named _taro_. Also we found a large supply of yams, and another root +like a potato in appearance. As these were all quite new to us, we +regarded our lot as a most fortunate one, in being thus cast on an island +which was so prolific and so well stored with all the necessaries of +life. Long afterwards we found out that this island of ours was no +better in these respects than thousands of other islands in those seas. +Indeed, many of them were much richer and more productive; but that did +not render us the less grateful for our present good fortune. We each +put one of these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our +supper; of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds here, +and traces of some four-footed animal again. Meanwhile the sun began to +descend, so we returned to the shore, and pushed on round the spouting +rocks into the next valley. This was that valley of which I have spoken +as running across the entire island. It was by far the largest and most +beautiful that we had yet looked upon. Here were trees of every shape +and size and hue which it is possible to conceive of, many of which we +had not seen in the other valleys; for, the stream in this valley being +larger, and the mould much richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was +clothed with a more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees +were dark glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting well +with those of a pale light green, which were everywhere abundant. Among +these we recognised the broad dark heads of the bread-fruit, with its +golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage of the candle-nut, and several +species which bore a strong resemblance to the pine; while here and +there, in groups and in single trees, rose the tall forms of the cocoa- +nut palms, spreading abroad, and waving their graceful plumes high above +all the rest, as if they were a superior race of stately giants keeping +guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it was a most enchanting scene, +and I thanked God for having created such delightful spots for the use of +man. + +Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack uttered an +exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a little to one side +of us, said,-- + +"That's a banian-tree." + +"And what's a banian-tree?" inquired Peterkin, as we walked towards it. + +"A very curious one, as you shall see presently," replied Jack. "It is +called the _aoa_ here, if I recollect rightly, and has a wonderful +peculiarity about it. What an enormous one it is, to be sure." + +"_It_!" repeated Peterkin; "why, there are dozens of banians here! What +do you mean by talking bad grammar? Is your philosophy deserting you, +Jack?" + +"There is but one tree here of this kind," returned Jack, "as you will +perceive if you will examine it." And, sure enough, we did find that +what we had supposed was a forest of trees was in reality only one. Its +bark was of a light colour, and had a shining appearance, the leaves +being lance-shaped, small, and of a beautiful pea-green. But the +wonderful thing about it was, that the branches, which grew out from the +stem horizontally, sent down long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, +taking root, had themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like +the tree itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the branches at +various distances, and thus supported them on natural pillars, some of +which were so large and strong, that it was not easy at first to +distinguish the offspring from the parent stem. The fibres were of all +sizes and in all states of advancement, from the pillars we have just +mentioned to small cords which hung down and were about to take root, and +thin brown threads still far from the ground, which swayed about with +every motion of wind. In short, it seemed to us that, if there were only +space afforded to it, this single tree would at length cover the whole +island. + +Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, which, as its +peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely useful to us, merits +description. It was a splendid chestnut, but its proper name Jack did +not know. However, there were quantities of fine nuts upon it, some of +which we put in our pockets. But its stem was the wonderful part of it. +It rose to about twelve feet without a branch, and was not of great +thickness; on the contrary, it was remarkably slender for the size of the +tree; but, to make up for this, there were four or five wonderful +projections in this stem, which I cannot better describe than by asking +the reader to suppose that five planks of two inches thick and three feet +broad had been placed round the trunk of the tree, with their _edges_ +closely fixed to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that these +planks had been covered over with the bark of the tree and incorporated +with it. In short, they were just natural buttresses, without which the +stem could not have supported its heavy and umbrageous top. We found +these chestnuts to be very numerous. They grew chiefly on the banks of +the stream, and were of all sizes. + +While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack chipped a piece +off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood to be firm and easily +cut. He then struck the axe into it with all his force, and very soon +split it off close to the tree, first, however, having cut it across +transversely above and below. By this means he satisfied himself that we +could now obtain short planks, as it were all ready sawn, of any size and +thickness that we desired; which was a very great discovery indeed, +perhaps the most important we had yet made. + +We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp near the +beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome in the forest. On +our way we could not help admiring the birds which flew and chirped +around us. Among them we observed a pretty kind of paroquet, with a +green body, a blue head, and a red breast; also a few beautiful +turtledoves, and several flocks of wood-pigeons. The hues of many of +these birds were extremely vivid,--bright green, blue, and scarlet, being +the prevailing tints. We made several attempts throughout the day to +bring down one of these, both with the bow and the sling,--not for mere +sport, but to ascertain whether they were good for food. But we +invariably missed, although once or twice we were very near hitting. As +evening drew on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I slung a stone +into the midst of them at a venture, and had the good fortune to kill +one. We were startled, soon after, by a loud whistling noise above our +heads; and on looking up, saw a flock of wild ducks making for the coast. +We watched these, and, observing where they alighted, followed them up +until we came upon a most lovely blue lake, not more than two hundred +yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its placid surface, which +reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a mirror, was covered with +various species of wild ducks, feeding among the sedges and broad-leaved +water-plants which floated on it, while numerous birds like water-hens +ran to and fro most busily on its margin. These all with one accord flew +tumultuously away the instant we made our appearance. While walking +along the margin we observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could +not tell. + +Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a little out of +our way to see if we could procure one of those ducks; so, directing +Peterkin to go straight to the shore and kindle a fire, we separated, +promising to rejoin him speedily. But we did not find the ducks, +although we made a diligent search for half an hour. We were about to +retrace our steps, when we were arrested by one of the strangest sights +that we had yet beheld. + +Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew a superb +tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on the island. Its +trunk was at least five feet in diameter, with a smooth gray bark; above +this the spreading branches were clothed with light green leaves, amid +which were clusters of bright yellow fruit, so numerous as to weigh down +the boughs with their great weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum +species, of an oblong form, and a good deal larger than the magnum bonum +plum. The ground at the foot of this tree was thickly strewn with the +fallen fruit, in the midst of which lay sleeping, in every possible +attitude, at least twenty hogs of all ages and sizes, apparently quite +surfeited with a recent banquet. + +Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at these +coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning and snoring +heavily amid the remains of their supper. + +"Now, Ralph," said Jack, in a low whisper, "put a stone in your sling,--a +good big one,--and let fly at that fat fellow with his back toward you. +I'll try to put an arrow into yon little pig." + +"Don't you think we had better put them up first?" I whispered; "it seems +cruel to kill them while asleep." + +"If I wanted _sport_, Ralph, I would certainly set them up; but as we +only want _pork_, we'll let them lie. Besides, we're not sure of killing +them; so, fire away." + +Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it went bang +against the hog's flank as if against the head of a drum; but it had no +other effect than that of causing the animal to start to its feet, with a +frightful yell of surprise, and scamper away. At the same instant Jack's +bow twanged, and the arrow pinned the little pig to the ground by the +ear. + +"I've missed, after all," cried Jack, darting forward with uplifted axe, +while the little pig uttered a loud squeal, tore the arrow from the +ground, and ran away with it, along with the whole drove, into the bushes +and disappeared, though we heard them screaming long afterwards in the +distance. + +"That's very provoking, now," said Jack, rubbing the point of his nose. + +"Very," I replied, stroking my chin. + +"Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin," said Jack. "It's getting +late." And, without further remark, we threaded our way quickly through +the woods towards the shore. + +When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted and +beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for our +encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We wondered very much +at this; but Jack suggested that he might have gone to fetch water; so he +gave a shout to let him know that we had arrived, and sat down upon a +rock, while I threw off my jacket and seized the axe, intending to split +up one or two billets of wood. But I had scarce moved from the spot +when, in the distance, we heard a most appalling shriek, which was +followed up by a chorus of yells from the hogs, and a loud "hurrah!" + +"I do believe," said I, "that Peterkin has met with the hogs." + +"When Greek meets Greek," said Jack, soliloquizing, "then comes the tug +of--" + +"Hurrah!" shouted Peterkin in the distance. + +We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, and soon +descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us with a little pig +transfixed on the end of his long spear! + +"Well done, my boy!" exclaimed Jack, slapping him on the shoulder when he +came up, "you're the best shot amongst us." + +"Look here Jack!" cried Peterkin, as he disengaged the animal from his +spear. "Do you recognise that hole?" said he, pointing to the pig's ear; +"and are you familiar with this arrow, eh?" + +"Well, I declare!" said Jack. + +"Of course you do," interrupted Peterkin; "but, pray, restrain your +declarations at this time, and let's have supper, for I'm uncommonly +hungry, I can tell you; and it's no joke to charge a whole herd of swine +with their great-grandmother bristling like a giant porcupine at the head +of them!" + +We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display of viands +we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the light of the blazing +fire. There was, first of all, the little pig; then there was the taro- +root, and the yam, and the potato, and six plums; and, lastly, the wood- +pigeon. To these Peterkin added a bit of sugar-cane, which he had cut +from a little patch of that plant which he had found not long after +separating from us; "and," said he, "the patch was somewhat in a square +form, which convinces me it must have been planted by man." + +"Very likely," replied Jack. "From all we have seen, I'm inclined to +think that some of the savages must have dwelt here long ago." + +We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we were to cook +the pig. None of us had ever cut up one before, and we did not know +exactly how to begin; besides, we had nothing but the axe to do it with, +our knife having been forgotten. At last Jack started up and said,-- + +"Don't let us waste more time talking about it, boys. Hold it up, +Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg on this block of wood, so;" and he cut +it off, with a large portion of the haunch, at a single blow of the axe. +"Now the other,--that's it." And having thus cut off the two hind legs, +he made several deep gashes in them, thrust a sharp-pointed stick through +each, and stuck them up before the blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon was +then split open, quite flat, washed clean in salt water, and treated in a +similar manner. While these were cooking, we scraped a hole in the sand +and ashes under the fire, into which we put our vegetables, and covered +them up. + +The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and four or +five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and had a thick rind. We +found it somewhat like an Irish potato, and exceedingly good. The yam +was roundish, and had a rough brown skin. It was very sweet and well- +flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to find, was quite sweet and +exceedingly palatable, as also were the plums; and, indeed, the pork and +pigeon too, when we came to taste them. Altogether this was decidedly +the most luxurious supper we had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it +was out-of-sight better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin said +he feared that if we should remain long on the island he would infallibly +become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack remarked that he need not +fear that, for he was _both_ already! And so, having eaten our fill, not +forgetting to finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves comfortably down +to sleep upon a couch of branches under the overhanging ledge of a coral +rock. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon--Humble advice regarding +cold water--The "horrible cry" accounted for--The curious birds called +penguins--Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm--Questions on the formation +of coral islands--Mysterious footsteps--Strange discoveries and sad +sights. + +When we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun was already +a good way above the horizon, so I came to the conclusion that a heavy +supper is not conducive to early rising. Nevertheless, we felt +remarkably strong and well, and much disposed to have our breakfast. +First, however, we had our customary morning bathe, which refreshed us +greatly. + +I have often wondered very much in after years that the inhabitants of my +own dear land did not make more frequent use of this most charming +element, water. I mean in the way of cold bathing. Of course, I have +perceived that it is not convenient for them to go into the sea or the +rivers in winter, as we used to do on the Coral Island; but then, I knew +from experience that a large washing-tub and a sponge do form a most +pleasant substitute. The feelings of freshness, of cleanliness, of +vigour, and extreme hilarity, that always followed my bathes in the sea, +and even, when in England, my ablutions in the wash-tub, were so +delightful, that I would sooner have gone without my breakfast than +without my bathe in cold water. My readers will forgive me for asking +whether they are in the habit of bathing thus every morning; and if they +answer "No," they will pardon me for recommending them to begin at once. +Of late years, since retiring from the stirring life of adventure which I +have led so long in foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, so I do not +mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it down. Perhaps, in +reference to it, I may just hint that there may be too much of a good +thing. I know not; but of this I am quite certain, that there may also +be too little of a good thing; and the great delight I have had in cold +bathing during the course of my adventurous career inclines me to think +that it is better to risk taking too much than to content one's self with +too little. Such is my opinion, derived from much experience; but I put +it before my readers with the utmost diffidence and with profound +modesty, knowing that it may possibly jar with their feelings of +confidence in their own ability to know and judge as to what is best and +fittest in reference to their own affairs. But, to return from this +digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness. + +We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, and were just +beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually accompanies vigorous +exercise, when, on turning a point that revealed to us a new and +beautiful cluster of islands, we were suddenly arrested by the appalling +cry which had so alarmed us a few nights before. But this time we were +by no means so much alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas +at that time it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, +though I am unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many of the +fears that are apt to assail us in the dark. + +On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his spear. + +"Now, what can it be?" said he, looking round at Jack. "I tell you what +it is, if we are to go on being pulled up in a constant state of horror +and astonishment, as we have been for the last week, the sooner we're out +o' this island the better, notwithstanding the yams and lemonade, and +pork and plums!" + +Peterkin's remark was followed by a repetition of the cry, louder than +before. + +"It comes from one of these islands," said Jack. + +"It must be the ghost of a jackass, then," said Peterkin, "for I never +heard anything so like." + +We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, on the +largest, we observed curious objects moving on the shore. + +"Soldiers they are,--that's flat!" cried Peterkin, gazing at them in the +utmost amazement. + +And, in truth, Peterkin's remark seemed to me to be correct; for, at the +distance from which we saw them, they appeared to be an army of soldiers. +There they stood, rank and file, in lines and in squares, marching and +countermarching, with blue coats and white trousers. While we were +looking at them, the dreadful cry came again over the water, and Peterkin +suggested that it must be a regiment sent out to massacre the natives in +cold blood. At this remark Jack laughed and said,-- + +"Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!" + +"Penguins?" repeated Peterkin. + +"Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins,--nothing more or less than big sea- +birds, as you shall see one of these days, when we pay them a visit in +our boat, which I mean to set about building the moment we return to our +bower." + +"So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering army of +soldiers," remarked Peterkin, "have dwindled down to penguins,--big sea- +birds! Very good. Then I propose that we continue our journey as fast +as possible, lest our island should be converted into a dream before we +get completely round it." + +Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new discovery, +and the singular appearance of these birds, of which Jack could only give +us a very slight and vague account; and I began to long to commence to +our boat, in order that we might go and inspect them more narrowly. But +by degrees these thoughts left me, and I began to be much taken up again +with the interesting peculiarities of the country which we were passing +through. + +The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the first, at +about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we calculated, and we +hoped to sleep on the night following at our bower. I will not here note +so particularly all that we said and saw during the course of this second +day, as we did not make any further discoveries of great importance. The +shore along which we travelled, and the various parts of the woods +through which we passed, were similar to those which have been already +treated of. There were one or two observations that we made, however, +and these were as follows:-- + +We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew only in the +valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the streams, where the +soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm grew in every place +whatsoever,--not only on the hill sides, but also on the sea shore, and +even, as has been already stated, on the coral reef itself, where the +soil, if we may use the name, was nothing better than loose sand mingled +with broken shells and coral rock. So near to the sea, too, did this +useful tree grow, that in many places its roots were washed by the spray +from the breakers. Yet we found the trees growing thus on the sands to +be quite as luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, and the fruit as +good and refreshing also. Besides this, I noticed that, on the summit of +the high mountain, which we once more ascended at a different point from +our first ascent, were found abundance of shells and broken coral +formations, which Jack and I agreed proved either that this island must +have once been under the sea, or that the sea must once have been above +the island. In other words, that as shells and coral could not possibly +climb to the mountain top, they must have been washed upon it while the +mountain top was on a level with the sea. We pondered this very much; +and we put to ourselves the question, "What raised the island to its +present height above the sea?" But to this we could by no means give to +ourselves a satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have been blown up +by a volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must have jumped up of its +own accord! We also noticed, what had escaped us before, that the solid +rocks of which the island was formed were quite different from the live +coral rocks on the shore, where the wonderful little insects were +continually working. They seemed, indeed, to be of the same material,--a +substance like limestone; but, while the coral rocks were quite full of +minute cells in which the insects lived, the other rocks inland were hard +and solid, without the appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and +conversations on this subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin +said we should certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we +were such good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his pleasantry on +this and similar points to deter us from making our notes and +observations as we went along. + +We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but abstained from +killing any of them, having more than sufficient for our present +necessities. We saw also many of their foot-prints in this +neighbourhood. Among these we also observed the footprints of a smaller +animal, which we examined with much care, but could form no certain +opinion as to them. Peterkin thought they were those of a little dog, +but Jack and I thought differently. We became very curious on this +matter, the more so that we observed these foot-prints to lie scattered +about in one locality, as if the animal which had made them was wandering +round about in a very irregular manner, and without any object in view. +Early in the forenoon of our third day we observed these footprints to be +much more numerous than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged +off into the woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so +closely beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with difficulty. We +had now become so anxious to find out what animal this was, and where it +went to, that we determined to follow the track, and, if possible, clear +up the mystery. Peterkin said, in a bantering tone, that he was sure it +would be cleared up as usual in some frightfully simple way, and prove to +be no mystery at all! + +The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by the animal +itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had made it, and that +the smaller one made use of it. But everywhere the creeping plants and +tangled bushes crossed our path, so that we forced our way along with +some difficulty. Suddenly, as we came upon an open space, we heard a +faint cry, and observed a black animal standing in the track before us. + +"A wild-cat!" cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his bow, and discharging it +so hastily that he missed the animal, and hit the earth about half a foot +to one side of it. To our surprise the wild-cat did not fly, but walked +slowly towards the arrow, and snuffed at it. + +"That's the most comical wild-cat I ever saw!" cried Jack. + +"It's a tame wild-cat, I think," said Peterkin, levelling his spear to +make a charge. + +"Stop!" cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; "I do believe the poor +beast is blind. See, it strikes against the branches as it walks along. +It must be a very old one;" and I hastened towards it. + +"Only think," said Peterkin, with a suppressed laugh, "of a superannuated +wild-cat!" + +We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly so, but +extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we were quite +close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, putting up its back and +tail, while the black hair stood all on end, uttered a hoarse mew and a +fuff. + +"Poor thing," said Peterkin, gently extending his hand, and endeavouring +to pat the cat's head. "Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; puss, puss, puss; +cheetie pussy!" + +No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of anger fled, +and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself to be stroked, and +rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly all the time, and showing +every symptom of the most extreme delight. + +"It's no more a wild cat than I am!" cried Peterkin, taking it in his +arms. "It's quite tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!" + +We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little surprised, and, to +say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight of the poor animal's +excessive joy. It rubbed its head against Peterkin's cheek, licked his +chin, and thrust its head almost violently into his neck, while it purred +more loudly than I ever heard a cat purr before, and appeared to be so +much overpowered by its feelings, that it occasionally mewed and purred +almost in the same breath. Such demonstrations of joy and affection led +us at once to conclude that this poor cat must have known man before, and +we conjectured that it had been left either accidentally or by design on +the island many years ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at +meeting once more with human beings. While we were fondling the cat and +talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the midst of which +we stood. + +"Hallo!" exclaimed he; "this looks something like a clearing. The axe +has been at work here. Just look at these tree-stumps." + +We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found trees that +had been cut down here and there, also stumps and broken branches; all of +which, however, were completely covered over with moss, and bore evidence +of having been in this condition for some years. No human foot-prints +were to be seen, either on the track or among the bushes; but those of +the cat were found everywhere. We now determined to follow up the track +as far as it went, and Peterkin put the cat down; but it seemed to be so +weak, and mewed so very pitifully, that he took it up again and carried +it in his arms, where, in a few minutes, it fell sound asleep. + +About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more numerous, and +the track, diverging to the right, followed for a short space the banks +of a stream. Suddenly we came to a spot where once must have been a rude +bridge, the stones of which were scattered in the stream, and those on +each bank entirely covered over with moss. In silent surprise and +expectancy we continued to advance, and, a few yards farther on, beheld, +under the shelter of some bread-fruit trees, a small hut or cottage. I +cannot hope to convey to my readers a very correct idea of the feelings +that affected us on witnessing this unexpected sight. We stood for a +long time in silent wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy +stillness about the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at +length speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded by +some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin's voice, usually so +quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed now; for there was a +dreariness about this silent, lonely, uninhabited cottage,--so strange in +its appearance, so far away from the usual dwellings of man, so old, +decayed, and deserted in its aspect,--that fell upon our spirits like a +thick cloud, and blotted out as with a pall the cheerful sunshine that +had filled us since the commencement of our tour round the island. + +The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its construction. It was not +more than twelve feet long by ten feet broad, and about seven or eight +feet high. It had one window, or rather a small frame in which a window +might, perhaps, once have been, but which was now empty. The door was +exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, and the roof was covered +with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. But every part of it was in a +state of the utmost decay. Moss and green matter grew in spots all over +it. The woodwork was quite perforated with holes; the roof had nearly +fallen in, and appeared to be prevented from doing so altogether by the +thick matting of creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which years +of neglect had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while the thick, +luxuriant branches of the bread-fruit and other trees spread above it, +and flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, as if to guard it from the +heat and the light of day. We conversed long and in whispers about this +strange habitation ere we ventured to approach it; and when at length we +did so it was, at least on my part, with feelings of awe. + +At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from the deep +shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom within, he could not +clearly discern objects; so we lifted the latch and pushed open the door. +We observed that the latch was made of iron, and almost eaten away with +rust. In the like condition were also the hinges, which creaked as the +door swung back. On entering, we stood still and gazed around us, while +we were much impressed with the dreary stillness of the room. But what +we saw there surprised and shocked us not a little. There was no +furniture in the apartment save a little wooden stool and an iron pot, +the latter almost eaten through with rust. In the corner farthest from +the door was a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a +little heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to examine +them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that of a dog, which was +extended close beside that of the man, with its head resting on his bosom + +Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and could scarce +refrain from tears on beholding these sad remains. After some time, we +began to talk about what we had seen, and to examine in and around the +hut, in order to discover some clue to the name or history of this poor +man, who had thus died in solitude, with none to mourn his loss save his +cat and his faithful dog. But we found nothing,--neither a book nor a +scrap of paper. We found, however, the decayed remnants of what appeared +to have been clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things bore +marks of any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as to convince +us that they had lain in the condition in which we found them for many +years. + +This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the top of the +mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the patch of sugar-cane +and other traces of man which we had met with in the course of our +rambles over the island. And we were much saddened by the reflection +that the lot of this poor wanderer might possibly be our own, after many +years' residence on the island, unless we should be rescued by the visit +of some vessel or the arrival of natives. Having no clue whatever to +account for the presence of this poor human being in such a lonely spot, +we fell to conjecturing what could have brought him there. I was +inclined to think that he must have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose +vessel had been lost here, and all the crew been drowned except himself +and his dog and cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run +away from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him company. +We were also much occupied in our minds with the wonderful difference +between the cat and the dog. For here we saw that while the one +perished, like a loving friend, by its master's side, with its head +resting on his bosom, the other had sought to sustain itself by prowling +abroad in the forest, and had lived in solitude to a good old age. +However, we did not conclude from this that the cat was destitute of +affection, for we could not forget its emotions on first meeting with us; +but we saw from this, that the dog had a great deal more of generous love +in its nature than the cat, because it not only found it impossible to +live after the death of its master, but it must needs, when it came to +die, crawl to his side and rest its head upon his lifeless breast. + +While we were thinking on these things, and examining into everything +about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation from Peterkin. + +"I say, Jack," said he, "here is something that will be of use to us." + +"What is it?" said Jack, hastening across the room. + +"An old pistol," replied Peterkin, holding up the weapon, which he had +just pulled from under a heap of broken wood and rubbish that lay in a +corner. + +"That, indeed, might have been useful," said Jack, examining it, "if we +had any powder; but I suspect the bow and the sling will prove more +serviceable." + +"True, I forgot that," said Peterkin; "but we may as well take it with +us, for the flint will serve to strike fire with when the sun does not +shine." + +{A saddening discovery: p136.jpg} + +After having spent more than an hour at this place without discovering +anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the old cat, which had +lain very contentedly asleep on the stool whereon he had placed it, and +we prepared to take our departure. In leaving the hut, Jack stumbled +heavily against the door-post, which was so much decayed as to break +across, and the whole fabric of the hut seemed ready to tumble about our +ears. This put into our heads that we might as well pull it down, and so +form a mound over the skeleton. Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down +the other door-post, which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in +ruins to the ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor +recluse and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away the iron +pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much use to us +hereafter. + +During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and examined the +other end of the large valley, which we found to be so much alike to the +parts already described, that I shall not recount the particulars of what +we saw in this place. I may, however, remark, that we did not quite +recover our former cheerful spirits until we arrived at our bower, which +we did late in the evening, and found everything just in the same +condition as we had left it three days before. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + +Something wrong with the tank--Jack's wisdom and Peterkin's +impertinence--Wonderful behaviour of a crab--Good wishes for those who +dwell far from the sea--Jack commences to build a little boat. + +Rest is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. During my long +experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered life, I have found that +periods of profound rest at certain intervals, in addition to the +ordinary hours of repose, are necessary to the wellbeing of man. And the +nature as well as the period of this rest varies, according to the +different temperaments of individuals, and the peculiar circumstances in +which they may chance to be placed. To those who work with their minds, +bodily labour is rest. To those who labour with the body, deep sleep is +rest. To the downcast, the weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are +rest. Nay, further, I think that to the gay, the frivolous, the +reckless, when sated with pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves +to be rest of a kind, although, perchance, it were better that I should +call it relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one class of men to whom +rest is denied. There is no rest to the wicked. At this I do but hint, +however, as I treat not of that rest which is spiritual, but, more +particularly, of that which applies to the mind and to the body. + +Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we found it +exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after completing the journey +just related. It had not, indeed, been a very long journey, nevertheless +we had pursued it so diligently that our frames were not a little +prostrated. Our minds were also very much exhausted in consequence of +the many surprises, frequent alarms, and much profound thought, to which +they had been subjected; so that when we lay down on the night of our +return under the shelter of the bower, we fell immediately into very deep +repose. I can state this with much certainty, for Jack afterwards +admitted the fact, and Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard +snoring loudly at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition +we remained all night and the whole of the following day without awaking +once, or so much as moving our positions. When we did awake it was near +sunset, and we were all in such a state of lassitude that we merely rose +to swallow a mouthful of food. As Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a +yawn, we took breakfast at tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we +lay till the following forenoon. + +After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed lest we had +lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed on this head, for we had +carefully kept count of the days since we were cast upon our island, in +order that we might remember the Sabbath-day, which day we had hitherto +with one accord kept as a day of rest, and refrained from all work +whatsoever. However, on considering the subject, we all three +entertained the same opinion as to how long we had slept, and so our +minds were put at ease. + +We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to see how did +the animals which I had placed in the tank. We found the garden more +charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, and Jack and I plunged into +its depth, and gambolled among its radiant coral groves; while Peterkin +wallowed at the surface, and tried occasionally to kick us as we passed +below. Having dressed, I then hastened to the tank; but what was my +surprise and grief to find nearly all the animals dead, and the water in +a putrid condition! I was greatly distressed at this, and wondered what +could be the cause of it. + +"Why, you precious humbug," said Peterkin, coming up to me, "how could +you expect it to be otherwise? When fishes are accustomed to live in the +Pacific Ocean, how can you expect them to exist in a hole like that?" + +"Indeed, Peterkin," I replied, "there seems to be truth in what you say. +Nevertheless, now I think of it, there must be some error in your +reasoning; for, if I put in but a few very small animals, they will bear +the same proportion to this pond that the millions of fish bear to the +ocean." + +"I say, Jack," cried Peterkin, waving his hand, "come here, like a good +fellow. Ralph is actually talking philosophy. Do come to our +assistance, for he's out o' sight beyond me already!" + +"What's the matter?" inquired Jack, coming up, while he endeavoured to +scrub his long hair dry with a towel of cocoa-nut cloth. + +I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, quite agreed +with me. "Your best plan," he said, "will be to put very few animals at +first into your tank, and add more as you find it will bear them. And +look here," he added, pointing to the sides of the tank, which, for the +space of two inches above the water-level, were incrusted with salt, "you +must carry your philosophy a little farther, Ralph. That water has +evaporated so much that it is too salt for anything to live in. You will +require to add _fresh_ water now and then, in order to keep it at the +same degree of saltness as the sea." + +"Very true, Jack, that never struck me before," said I. + +"And, now I think of it," continued Jack, "it seems to me that the surest +way of arranging your tank so as to get it to keep pure and in good +condition, will be to imitate the ocean in it. In fact make it a +miniature Pacific. I don't see how you can hope to succeed unless you do +that." + +"Most true," said I, pondering what my companion said. "But I fear that +that will be very difficult." + +"Not at all," cried Jack, rolling his towel up into a ball, and throwing +it into the face of Peterkin, who had been grinning and winking at him +during the last five minutes. "Not at all. Look here. There is water +of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill your tank with sea water, +and keep it at that saltness by marking the height at which the water +stands on the sides. When it evaporates a little, pour in _fresh_ water +from the brook till it comes up to the mark, and then it will be right, +for the salt does not evaporate with the water. Then, there's lots of +sea-weed in the sea;--well, go and get one or two bits of sea-weed, and +put them into your tank. Of course the weed must be alive, and growing +to little stones; or you can chip a bit off the rocks with the weed +sticking to it. Then, if you like, you can throw a little sand and +gravel into your tank, and the thing's complete." + +"Nay, not quite," said Peterkin, who had been gravely attentive to this +off-hand advice, "not quite; you must first make three little men to dive +in it before it can be said to be perfect, and that would be rather +difficult, I fear, for two of them would require to be philosophers. But +hallo! what's this? I say, Ralph, look here. There's one o' your crabs +up to something uncommon. It's performing the most remarkable operation +for a crab I ever saw,--taking off its coat, I do believe, before going +to bed!" + +We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a little amused +at the conduct of one of the crabs which still survived it companions. It +was one of the common small crabs, like to those that are found running +about everywhere on the coasts of England. While we gazed at it, we +observed its back to split away from the lower part of its body, and out +of the gap thus formed came a soft lump which moved and writhed +unceasingly. This lump continued to increase in size until it appeared +like a bunch of crab's legs: and, indeed, such it proved in a very few +minutes to be; for the points of the toes were at length extricated from +this hole in its back, the legs spread out, the body followed, and the +crab walked away quite entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, +leaving a perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of one! + +"Well!" exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, "I've _heard_ of a man +jumping out of his skin and sitting down in his skeleton in order to cool +himself, but I never expected to _see_ a crab do it!" + +We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more so when we +observed that the new crab was larger than the crab that it came out of. +It was also quite soft, but by next morning its skin had hardened into a +good shell. We came thus to know that crabs grow in this way, and not by +the growing of their shells, as we had always thought before we saw this +wonderful operation. + +Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about preparing +my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came to regard it as +very sound and worthy of being acted on. So I forthwith put his plan in +execution, and found it to answer excellently well, indeed much beyond my +expectation; for I found that after a little experience had taught me the +proper proportion of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount of +water, the tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I did not +require ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, but only to add +a very little fresh water from the brook, now and then, as the other +evaporated. I therefore concluded that if I had been suddenly conveyed, +along with my tank, into some region where there was no salt sea at all, +my little sea and my sea-fish would have continued to thrive and to +prosper notwithstanding. This made me greatly to desire that those +people in the world who live far inland might know of my wonderful tank, +and, by having materials like to those of which it was made conveyed to +them, thus be enabled to watch the habits of those most mysterious +animals that reside in the sea, and examine with their own eyes the +wonders of the great deep. + +For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily employed in +building a little boat out of the curious natural planks of the chestnut +tree, I spent much of my time in examining with the burning-glass the +marvellous operations that were constantly going on in my tank. Here I +saw those anemones which cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs +of jelly, to the rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and +wait till little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched them, +when they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm around their +victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. Here I saw the ceaseless +working of those little coral insects whose efforts have encrusted the +islands of the Pacific with vast rocks, and surrounded them with enormous +reefs. And I observed that many of these insects, though extremely +minute, were very beautiful, coming out of their holes in a circle of +fine threads, and having the form of a shuttle-cock. Here I saw curious +little barnacles opening a hole in their backs and constantly putting out +a thin feathery hand, with which, I doubt not, they dragged their food +into their mouths. Here, also, I saw those crabs which have shells only +on the front of their bodies, but no shell whatever on their remarkably +tender tails, so that, in order to find a protection to them, they thrust +them into the empty shells of wilks, or some such fish, and when they +grow too big for one, change into another. But, most curious of all, I +saw an animal which had the wonderful power, when it became ill, of +casting its stomach and its teeth away from it, and getting an entirely +new set in the course of a few months! All this I saw, and a great deal +more, by means of my tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from +setting down more particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the +adventures that befell us while we remained on this island. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs--The mysterious green monster +explained--We are thrown into unutterable terror by the idea that Jack is +drowned--The Diamond Cave. + +"Come, Jack," cried Peterkin, one morning about three weeks after our +return from our long excursion, "let's be jolly to-day, and do something +vigorous. I'm quite tired of hammering and hammering, hewing and +screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of ours, that seems as +hard to build as Noah's ark; let us go on an excursion to the mountain +top, or have a hunt after the wild ducks, or make a dash at the pigs. I'm +quite flat--flat as bad ginger-beer--flat as a pancake; in fact, I want +something to rouse me, to toss me up, as it were. Eh! what do you say to +it?" + +"Well," answered Jack, throwing down the axe with which he was just about +to proceed towards the boat, "if that's what you want, I would recommend +you to make an excursion to the water-spouts; the last one we had to do +with tossed you up a considerable height, perhaps the next will send you +higher, who knows, if you're at all reasonable or moderate in your +expectations!" + +"Jack, my dear boy," said Peterkin, gravely, "you are really becoming too +fond of jesting. It's a thing I don't at all approve of, and if you +don't give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, we shall have to +part." + +"Well, then, Peterkin," replied Jack, with a smile, "what would you +have?" + +"Have?" said Peterkin, "I would _have_ nothing. I didn't say I wanted to +_have_; I said that I wanted to _do_." + +"By the by," said I, interrupting their conversation, "I am reminded by +this that we have not yet discovered the nature of yon curious appearance +that we saw near the water-spouts, on our journey round the island. +Perhaps it would be well to go for that purpose." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Peterkin, "I know the nature of it well enough." + +"What was it?" said I. + +"It was of a _mysterious_ nature to be sure!" said he, with a wave of his +hand, while he rose from the log on which he had been sitting, and +buckled on his belt, into which he thrust his enormous club. + +"Well then, let us away to the water-spouts," cried Jack, going up to the +bower for his bow and arrows; "and bring your spear, Peterkin. It may be +useful." + +We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, sallied +forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, which, as I have +before mentioned, were not far from our present place of abode. On +arriving there we hastened down to the edge of the rocks, and gazed over +into the sea, where we observed the pale-green object still distinctly +visible, moving its tail slowly to and fro in the water. + +"Most remarkable!" said Jack. + +"Exceedingly curious," said I. + +"Beats everything!" said Peterkin. + +"Now, Jack," he added, "you made such a poor figure in your last attempt +to stick that object, that I would advise you to let me try it. If it +has got a heart at all, I'll engage to send my spear right through the +core of it; if it hasn't got a heart, I'll send it through the spot where +its heart ought to be." + +"Fire away, then, my boy," replied Jack with a laugh. + +Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or two above +his head, then darted it like an arrow into the sea. Down it went +straight into the centre of the green object, passed quite through it, +and came up immediately afterwards, pure and unsullied, while the +mysterious tail moved quietly as before! + +"Now," said Peterkin, gravely, "that brute is a heartless monster; I'll +have nothing more to do with it." + +"I'm pretty sure now," said Jack, "that it is merely a phosphoric light; +but I must say I'm puzzled at its staying always in that exact spot." + +I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that it must be +phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had seen much while on +our voyage to these seas. "But," said I, "there is nothing to hinder us +from diving down to it, now that we are sure it is not a shark." + +"True," returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; "I'll go down, Ralph, +as I'm better at diving than you are. Now then, Peterkin, out o' the +road!" Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above his head, bent over +the rocks, and plunged into the sea. For a second or two the spray +caused by his dive hid him from view, then the water became still, and we +saw him swimming far down in the midst of the green object. Suddenly he +sank below it, and vanished altogether from our sight! We gazed +anxiously down at the spot where he had disappeared, for nearly a minute, +expecting every moment to see him rise again for breath; but fully a +minute passed, and still he did not reappear. Two minutes passed! and +then a flood of alarm rushed in upon my soul, when I considered that +during all my acquaintance with him, Jack had never stayed underwater +more than a minute at a time; indeed seldom so long. + +"Oh, Peterkin!" I said, in a voice that trembled with increasing anxiety, +"something has happened. It is more than three minutes now!" But +Peterkin did not answer and I observed that he was gazing down into the +water with a look of intense fear mingled with anxiety, while his face +was overspread with a deadly paleness. Suddenly he sprang to his feet +and rushed about in a frantic state, wringing his hands, and exclaiming, +"Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! It must have been a shark, and he is gone +for ever!" + +For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The intensity of my +feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But I was recalled to myself by +Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder and staring wildly into my face, +while he exclaimed, "Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has only fainted. Dive for +him, Ralph!" + +It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. In a moment I +rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without waiting to throw off my +garments, was on the point to spring into the waves, when I observed +something black rising up through the green object. In another moment +Jack's head rose to the surface, and he gave a wild shout, flinging back +the spray from his locks, as was his wont after a dive. Now we were +almost as much amazed at seeing him reappear, well and strong, as we had +been at first at his non-appearance; for, to the best of our judgment, he +had been nearly ten minutes under water, perhaps longer, and it required +no exertion of our reason to convince us that this was utterly impossible +for mortal man to do and retain his strength and faculties. It was +therefore with a feeling akin to superstitious awe that I held down my +hand and assisted him to clamber up the steep rocks. But no such feeling +affected Peterkin. No sooner did Jack gain the rocks and seat himself on +one, panting for breath, than he threw his arms round his neck, and burst +into a flood of tears. "Oh, Jack, Jack!" said he, "where were you? What +kept you so long?" + +After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit still and +listen to Jack's explanation, although he could not restrain himself from +attempting to wink every two minutes at me, in order to express his joy +at Jack's safety. I say he attempted to wink, but I am bound to add that +he did not succeed, for his eyes were so much swollen with weeping, that +his frequent attempts only resulted in a series of violent and altogether +idiotical contortions of the face, that were very far from expressing +what he intended. However, I knew what the poor fellow meant by it, so I +smiled to him in return, and endeavoured to make believe that he was +winking. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, when we were composed enough to listen to him, +"yon green object is not a shark; it is a stream of light issuing from a +cave in the rocks. Just after I made my dive, I observed that this light +came from the side of the rock above which we are now sitting; so I +struck out for it, and saw an opening into some place or other that +appeared to be luminous within. For one instant I paused to think +whether I ought to venture. Then I made up my mind, and dashed into it. +For you see, Peterkin, although I take some time to tell this, it +happened in the space of a few seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough +in me to serve to bring me out o' the hole and up to the surface again. +Well, I was just on the point of turning,--for I began to feel a little +uncomfortable in such a place,--when it seemed to me as if there was a +faint light right above me. I darted upwards, and found my head out of +water. This relieved me greatly, for I now felt that I could take in air +enough to enable me to return the way I came. Then it all at once +occurred to me that I might not be able to find the way out again; but, +on glancing downwards, my mind was put quite at rest by seeing the green +light below me streaming into the cave, just like the light that we had +seen streaming out of it, only what I now saw was much brighter. + +"At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed around me, it was so +dark; but gradually my eyes became accustomed to it, and I found that I +was in a huge cave, part of the walls of which I observed on each side of +me. The ceiling just above me was also visible, and I fancied that I +could perceive beautiful glittering objects there, but the farther end of +the cave was shrouded in darkness. While I was looking around me in +great wonder, it came into my head that you two would think I was +drowned; so I plunged down through the passage again in a great hurry, +rose to the surface, and--here I am!" + +When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this remarkable +cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down to see it; which I +did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, that I could scarcely see +anything. When I returned, we had a long conversation about it, during +which I observed that Peterkin had a most lugubrious expression on his +countenance. + +"What's the matter, Peterkin?" said I. + +"The matter?" he replied. "It's all very well for you two to be talking +away like mermaids about the wonders of this cave, but you know I must be +content to hear about it, while you are enjoying yourselves down there +like mad dolphins. It's really too bad." + +"I'm very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I am," said Jack, "but we +cannot help you. If you would only learn to dive--" + +"Learn to fly, you might as well say!" retorted Peterkin, in a very sulky +tone. + +"If you would only consent to keep still," said I, "we would take you +down with us in ten seconds." + +"Hum!" returned Peterkin; "suppose a salamander was to propose to you +'only to keep still,' and he would carry you through a blazing fire in a +few seconds, what would you say?" + +We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that nothing was +to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we could not rest satisfied +till we had seen more of this cave; so, after further consultation, Jack +and I determined to try if we could take down a torch with us, and set +fire to it in the cavern. This we found to be an undertaking of no small +difficulty; but we accomplished it at last by the following means:--First, +we made a torch of a very inflammable nature out of the bark of a certain +tree, which we cut into strips, and, after twisting, cemented together +with a kind of resin or gum, which we also obtained from another tree; +neither of which trees, however, was known by name to Jack. This, when +prepared, we wrapped up in a great number of plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so +that we were confident it could not get wet during the short time it +should be under water. Then we took a small piece of the tinder, which +we had carefully treasured up lest we should require it, as before said, +when the sun should fail us; also, we rolled up some dry grass and a few +chips, which, with a little bow and drill, like those described before, +we made into another bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When +all was ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against the rocks +we might be subjected to, we kept on. + +Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one bundle, with +the torch; I the other, with the things for producing fire. + +"Now don't weary for us, Peterkin, should we be gone some time," said +Jack; "we'll be sure to return in half-an-hour at the very latest, +however interesting the cave should be, that we may relieve your mind." + +"Farewell!" said Peterkin, coming up to us with a look of deep but +pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and kissed each of us on the +cheek. "Farewell! and while you are gone I shall repose my weary limbs +under the shelter of this bush, and meditate on the changefulness of all +things earthly, with special reference to the forsaken condition of a +poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!" So saying, Peterkin waved his hand, +turned from us, and cast himself upon the ground with a look of +melancholy resignation, which was so well feigned, that I would have +thought it genuine had he not accompanied it with a gentle wink. We both +laughed, and, springing from the rocks together, plunged head first into +the sea. + +We gained the interior of the submarine cave without difficulty, and, on +emerging from the waves, supported ourselves for some time by treading- +water, while we held the two bundles above our heads. This we did in +order to let our eyes become accustomed to the obscurity. Then, when we +could see sufficiently, we swam to a shelving rock, and landed in safety. +Having wrung the water from our trousers, and dried ourselves as well as +we could under the circumstances, we proceeded to ignite the torch. This +we accomplished without difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did it +flare up than we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects that were +revealed to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above us seemed to be +about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded into the distance, +until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be made of coral, and was +supported by massive columns of the same material. Immense icicles (as +they appeared to us) hung from it in various places. These, however, +were formed, not of ice, but of a species of limestone, which seemed to +flow in a liquid form towards the point of each, where it became solid. A +good many drops fell, however, to the rock below, and these formed little +cones, which rose to meet the points above. Some of them had already +met, and thus we saw how the pillars were formed, which at first seemed +to us as if they had been placed there by some human architect to support +the roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor was composed +of the same material as the pillars; and it presented the curious +appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water when gently ruffled by +the wind. There were several openings on either hand in the walls, that +seemed to lead into other caverns; but these we did not explore at this +time. We also observed that the ceiling was curiously marked in many +places, as if it were the fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the walls, +as well as the roof, sparkled in the light of our torch, and threw back +gleams and flashes, as if they were covered with precious stones. +Although we proceeded far into this cavern, we did not come to the end of +it; and we were obliged to return more speedily than we would otherwise +have done, as our torch was nearly expended. We did not observe any +openings in the roof, or any indications of places whereby light might +enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an immense mass of pure +white coral rock, which caught and threw back the little light that found +an entrance through the cave's mouth, and thus produced, we conjectured, +the pale-green object which had first attracted our attention. We +concluded, also, that the reflecting power of this rock was that which +gave forth the dim light that faintly illumined the first part of the +cave. + +Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the small piece +of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry spot; conceiving that we +might possibly stand in need of it, if at any future time we should +chance to wet our torch while diving into the cavern. As we stood for a +few minutes after it was out, waiting till our eyes became accustomed to +the gloom, we could not help remarking the deep, intense stillness and +the unutterable gloom of all around us; and, as I thought of the +stupendous dome above, and the countless gems that had sparkled in the +torch-light a few minutes before, it came into my mind to consider how +strange it is that God should make such wonderful and exquisitely beautiful +works never to be seen at all, except, indeed, by chance visitors such as +ourselves. + +I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the islands of +the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful than the one I +have just described. + +"Now, Ralph, are you ready?" said Jack, in a low voice, that seemed to +echo up into the dome above. + +"Quite ready." + +"Come along, then," said he; and, plunging off the ledge of the rock into +the water, we dived through the narrow entrance. In a few seconds we +were panting on the rocks above, and receiving the congratulations of our +friend Peterkin. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + +Strange peculiarity of the tides--Also of the twilight--Peterkin's +remarkable conduct in embracing a little pig and killing a big sow--Sage +remarks on jesting--Also on love. + +It was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to enjoy the glad +sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond Cave, as we named it; for, +although we did not stay more than half an hour away, it seemed to us +much longer. While we were dressing, and during our walk home, we did +our best to satisfy the curiosity of poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, +with lively sincerity, his inability to dive. + +There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as we best +could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the tide of these seas, +we might perhaps have found it possible to take him down with us at low +water; but as the tide never rose or fell more than eighteen inches or +two feet, this was impossible. + +This peculiarity of the tide--its slight rise and fall--had not attracted +our observation till some time after our residence on the island. Neither +had we observed another curious circumstance until we had been some time +there. This was the fact, that the tide rose and fell with constant +regularity, instead of being affected by the changes of the moon as in +our own country, and as it is in most other parts of the world,--at least +in all those parts with which I am acquainted. Every day and every +night, at twelve o'clock precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six +o'clock every morning and evening it is ebb. I can speak with much +confidence on this singular circumstance, as we took particular note of +it, and never found it to alter. Of course, I must admit, we had to +guess the hour of twelve midnight, and I think we could do this pretty +correctly; but in regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, because we +easily found the highest point that the sun reached in the sky by placing +ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed the sharp summit of a +cliff resting against the sky, just where the sun passed. + +Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the first few days +of our residence here, and could only account for it by our being so much +taken up with the more obvious wonders of our novel situation. I have +since learned, however, that this want of observation is a sad and very +common infirmity of human nature, there being hundreds of persons before +whose eyes the most wonderful things are passing every day, who +nevertheless are totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my +sympathy with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of conduct +which I have now for a long time myself adopted,--namely, the habit of +forcing my attention upon _all_ things that go on around me, and of +taking some degree of interest in them, whether I feel it naturally or +not. I suggest this the more earnestly, though humbly, because I have +very frequently come to know that my indifference to a thing has +generally been caused by my ignorance in regard to it. + +We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; and Jack +told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these tides did great +good to the world in many ways, particularly in the way of cleansing the +shores of the land, and carrying off the filth that was constantly poured +into the sea there-from; which, Peterkin suggested, was remarkably _tidy_ +of it to do. Poor Peterkin could never let slip an opportunity to joke, +however inopportune it might be: which at first we found rather a +disagreeable propensity, as it often interrupted the flow of very +agreeable conversation; and, indeed, I cannot too strongly record my +disapprobation of this tendency in general: but we became so used to it +at last that we found it no interruption whatever; indeed, strange to +say, we came to feel that it was a necessary part of our enjoyment (such +is the force of habit), and found the sudden outbursts of mirth, +resulting from his humorous disposition, quite natural and refreshing to +us in the midst of our more serious conversations. But I must not +misrepresent Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he knew +many things which we did not; and I also observed that those things which +he learned from experience were never forgotten. From all these things I +came at length to understand that things very opposite and dissimilar in +themselves, when united, do make an agreeable whole; as, for example, we +three on this our island, although most unlike in many things, when +united, made a trio so harmonious that I question if there ever met +before such an agreeable triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of +discord whatever in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral +Island; and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having been all +tuned to the same key, namely, that of _love_! Yes, we loved one another +with much fervency while we lived on that island; and, for the matter of +that, we love each other still. + +And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that just preceded +it--namely, the tides--I may here remark on another curious natural +phenomenon. We found that there was little or no twilight in this +island. We had a distinct remembrance of the charming long twilight at +home, which some people think the most delightful part of the day, though +for my part I have always preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, we +used to sit down on some rocky point or eminence, at the close of our +day's work, to enjoy the evening breeze; but no sooner had the sun sunk +below the horizon than all became suddenly dark. This rendered it +necessary that we should watch the sun when we happened to be out +hunting, for to be suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very +perplexing, as, although the stars shone with great beauty and +brilliancy, they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous boughs +that interlaced above our heads. + +But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin about the +Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the locality, we were +wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt and a squeal were borne +down by the land breeze to our ears. + +"That's the ticket!" was Peterkin's remarkable exclamation, as he started +convulsively, and levelled his spear. + +"Hist!" cried Jack; "these are your friends, Peterkin. They must have +come over expressly to pay you a friendly visit, for it is the first time +we have seen them on this side the island." + +"Come along!" cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the wood, while Jack and I +followed, smiling at his impatience. + +Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than before, came +down the valley. At this time we were just opposite the small vale which +lay between the Valley of the Wreck and Spouting Cliff. + +"I say, Peterkin," cried Jack, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Well, what is't?" + +"Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there on the hill side. If +you go and stand with Ralph in the lee of yon cliff, I'll cut round +behind and drive them through the gorge, so that you'll have a better +chance of picking out a good one. Now, mind you pitch into a fat young +pig, Peterkin," added Jack, as he sprang into the bushes. + +"Won't I, just!" said Peterkin, licking his lips, as we took our station +beside the cliff. "I feel quite a tender affection for young pigs in my +heart. Perhaps it would be more correct to say in my s--." + +"There they come!" cried I, as a terrific yell from Jack sent the whole +herd screaming down the hill. Now, Peterkin, being unable to hold back, +crept a short way up a very steep grassy mound, in order to get a better +view of the hogs before they came up; and just as he raised his head +above its summit, two little pigs, which had outrun their companions, +rushed over the top with the utmost precipitation. One of these brushed +close past Peterkin's ear; the other, unable to arrest its headlong +flight, went, as Peterkin himself afterwards expressed it, "bash" into +his arms with a sudden squeal, which was caused more by the force of the +blow than the will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently down +to the foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached than the little pig +recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and fled shrieking from the spot. +But I slang a large stone after it, which, being fortunately well aimed, +hit it behind the ear, and felled it to the earth. + +"Capital, Ralph! that's your sort!" cried Peterkin, who, to my surprise +and great relief, had risen to his feet. Apparently unhurt, though much +dishevelled, he rushed franticly towards the gorge, which the yells of +the hogs told us they were now approaching. I had made up my mind that I +would abstain from killing another, as, if Peterkin should be successful, +two were more than sufficient for our wants at the present time. Suddenly +they all burst forth,--two or three little round ones in advance, and an +enormous old sow with a drove of hogs at her heels. + +"Now, Peterkin," said I, "there's a nice little fat one; just spear it." + +But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass unharmed. I looked at +him in surprise, and saw that his lips were compressed and his eyebrows +knitted, as if he were about to fight with some awful enemy. + +"What is it?" I inquired, with some trepidation. + +Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a yell that +nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow to the heart. +Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear went in at one side and +came out at the other! + +"Oh, Peterkin!" said I, going up to him, "what have you done?" + +"Done? I've killed their great-great-grandmother, that's all," said he, +looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the transfixed animal. + +"Hallo! what's this?" said Jack, as he came up. "Why, Peterkin, you must +be fond of a tough chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, she'll try +your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick _her_, Peterkin?" + +"Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes." + +"What have your shoes to do with the old hog?' said I, smiling. + +"My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with her," replied +Peterkin; "nevertheless she will have a good deal to do with my future +shoes. The fact is, when I saw you floor that pig so neatly, Ralph, it +struck me that there was little use in killing another. Then I +remembered all at once that I had long wanted some leather or tough +substance to make shoes of, and this old grandmother seemed so tough that +I just made up my mind to stick her, and you see I've done it!" + +"That you certainly have, Peterkin," said Jack, as he was examining the +transfixed animal. + +We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, although the +distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At length we hit on the plan +of tying its four feet together, and passing the spear handle between +them. Jack took one end on his shoulder, I took the other on mine, and +Peterkin carried the small pig. + +Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin remarked, +with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he afterwards spoke in +similarly glowing terms in reference to the supper that followed, there +is every reason to believe that we retired that night to our leafy beds +in a high state of satisfaction. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + +Boat-building extraordinary--Peterkin tries his hand at cookery and fails +most signally--The boat finished--Curious conversation with the cat, and +other matters. + +For many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting assiduity +to the construction of our boat, which at length began to look somewhat +like one. But those only who have had the thing to do can entertain a +right idea of the difficulty involved in such an undertaking, with no +other implements than an axe, a bit of hoop-iron, a sail-needle, and a +broken pen-knife. But Jack did it. He was of, that disposition which +_will_ not be conquered. When he believed himself to be acting rightly, +he overcame all obstacles. I have seen Jack, when doubtful whether what +he was about to do were right or wrong, as timid and vacillating as a +little girl,--and I honour him for it! + +As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here relative to the +manner of its construction may not be amiss. + +I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful buttresses +or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with the chief part of our +material. First of all Jack sought out a limb of a tree of such a form +and size as, while it should form the keel a bend at either end should +form the stem and stern posts. Such a piece, however, was not easy to +obtain, but at last he procured it, by rooting up a small tree which had +a branch growing at the proper angle about ten feet up its stem, with two +strong roots growing in such a form as enabled him to make a flat-sterned +boat. This placed, he procured three branching roots of suitable size, +which he fitted to the keel at equal distances, thus forming three strong +ribs. Now, the squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of the +grooves in the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all work for +the axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully expert; but it +was quite a different affair when he came to nailing the ribs to the +keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a large hole, and no +nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, much perplexed here; but +Jack at length devised an instrument that served very well. He took the +remainder of our hoop-iron and beat it into the form of a pipe or +cylinder, about as thick as a man's finger. This he did by means of our +axe and the old rusty axe we had found at the house of the poor man at +the other side of the island. This, when made red hot, bored slowly +though the timbers; and, the better to retain the heat, Jack shut up one +end of it and filled it with sand. True, the work was very slowly done, +but it mattered not--we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into the keel, +but not quite through. Into these were placed stout pegs made of a tree +called iron-wood; and, when they were hammered well home, the timbers +were as firmly fixed as if they had been nailed with iron. The gunwales, +which were very stout, were fixed in a similar manner. But, besides the +wooden nails, they were firmly lashed to the stem and stern posts and +ribs by means of a species of cordage which we had contrived to make out +of the fibrous husk of the cocoa nut. This husk was very tough, and when +a number of the threads were joined together they formed excellent +cordage. At first we tied the different lengths together, but this was +such a clumsy and awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by +careful interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make good +cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost us much time +and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits when we grew weary, and +so all that we required was at last constructed. + +Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch thick. These +were dressed with the axe,--but clumsily, for an axe is ill adapted for +such work. Five of these planks on each side were sufficient, and we +formed the boat in a very rounded, barrel-like shape, in order to have as +little twisting of the planks as possible; for, although we could easily +bend them, we could not easily twist them. Having no nails to rivet the +planks with, we threw aside the ordinary fashion of boat building and +adopted one of our own. The planks were therefore placed on each other's +edges, and sewed together with the tough cordage already mentioned. They +were also thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. Each stitch +or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: Three holes were bored +in the upper plank and three in the lower,--the holes being above each +other, that is, in a vertical line. Through these holes the cord was +passed, and, when tied, formed a powerful stitch of three ply. Besides +this, we placed between the edges of the planks, layers of cocoa-nut +fibre, which, as it swelled when wetted, would, we hoped, make our little +vessel water-tight. But in order further to secure this end, we +collected a large quantity of pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with +which, when boiled in our old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside +of the boat, and, while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut +cloth on it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the interior +was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the exterior, being +uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action of the water, was we +hoped, likely to keep the boat quite dry. I may add that our hopes were +not disappointed. + +While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted him, but, +as our assistance was not much required, we more frequently went +a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the entrance of the long valley +which lay nearest to our bower. Here we found large flocks of ducks of +various kinds, some of them bearing so much resemblance to the wild ducks +of our own country that I think they must have been the same. On these +occasions we took the bow and the sling, with both of which we were often +successful, though I must confess I was the least so. Our suppers were +thus pleasantly varied, and sometimes we had such a profusion spread out +before us that we frequently knew not with which of the dainties to +begin. + +I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought home had +always a liberal share of our good things, and so well was it looked +after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered much of its former +strength, and seemed to improve in sight as well as hearing. + +{Leaving for the "mud-flats": p175.jpg} + +The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in front of the +entrance to our bower, was our table. On this rock we had spread out the +few articles we possessed the day we were shipwrecked; and on the same +rock, during many a day afterwards, we spread out the bountiful supply +with which we had been blessed on our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat +down at this table to a feast consisting of hot rolls,--as Peterkin +called the newly baked bread fruit,--a roast pig, roast duck, boiled and +roasted yams, cocoa nuts, taro, and sweet potatoes; which we followed up +with a dessert of plums, apples, and plantains,--the last being a large- +sized and delightful fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more +than twelve feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down with cocoa-nut +lemonade. + +Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new dish,--"a conglomerate," +as he used to say; but these generally turned out such atrocious +compounds that he was ultimately induced to give up his attempts in +extreme disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point out to Jack that his +failure was a direct contradiction to the proverb which he, Jack, was +constantly thrusting down his throat, namely, that "where there's a will +there's a way." For he had a great will to become a cook, but could by +no means find a way to accomplish that end. + +One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on which +dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, flinging down his +axe, exclaimed,-- + +"There, lads, the boat's finished at last! so we've nothing to do now but +shape two pair of oars, and then we may put to sea as soon as we like." + +This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for although we +were aware that the boat had been gradually getting near its completion, +it had taken so long that we did not expect it to be quite ready for at +least two or three weeks. But Jack had wrought hard and said nothing, in +order to surprise us. + +"My dear fellow," cried Peterkin, "you're a perfect trump. But why did +you not tell us it was so nearly ready? won't we have a jolly sail to- +morrow? eh?" + +"Don't talk so much, Peterkin," said Jack; "and, pray, hand me a bit of +that pig." + +"Certainly, my dear," cried Peterkin, seizing the axe; "what part will +you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece of the breast; which?" + +"A hind leg, if you please," answered Jack; "and, pray, be so good as to +include the tail." + +"With all my heart," said Peterkin, exchanging the axe for his hoop-iron +knife, with which he cut off the desired portion. "I'm only too glad, my +dear boy, to see that your appetite is so wholesale; and there's no +chance whatever of its dwindling down into re-tail again, at least in so +far as this pig is concerned. Ralph, lad, why don't you laugh?--eh?" he +added turning suddenly to me with a severe look of inquiry. + +"Laugh?" said I; "what at, Peterkin? why should I laugh?" + +Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves laughing so +immoderately that I was induced to believe I had missed noticing some +good joke, so I begged that it might be explained to me; but as this only +produced repeated roars of laughter, I smiled and helped myself to +another slice of plantain. + +"Well, but," continued Peterkin, "I was talking of a sail to-morrow. +Can't we have one, Jack?" + +"No," replied Jack, "we can't have a sail, but I hope we shall have a +row, as I intend to work hard at the oars this afternoon, and, if we +can't get them finished by sunset we'll light our candle-nuts, and turn +them out of hands before we turn into bed." + +"Very good," said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork to the cat, who +received it with a mew of satisfaction. "I'll help you, if I can." + +"Afterwards," continued Jack, "we will make a sail out of the cocoa-nut +cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we shall be able to sail to some of +the other islands, and visit our old friends the penguins." + +The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our observations to +the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the beautiful sea, afforded us +much delight, and, after dinner, we set about making the oars in good +earnest. Jack went into the woods and blocked them roughly out with the +axe, and I smoothed them down with the knife, while Peterkin remained in +the bower, spinning, or, rather, twisting some strong thick cordage with +which to fasten them to the boat. + +We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, Jack and I +returned to the bower with four stout oars, which required little to be +done to them save a slight degree of polishing with the knife. As we +drew near we were suddenly arrested by the sound of a voice! We were not +a little surprised at this--indeed I may almost say alarmed--for, +although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of talking, we had never, up to +this time, found him talking to himself. We listened intently, and still +heard the sound of a voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be +silent, and, advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in. + +The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little amusing. On the +top of a log which we sometimes used as a table, sat the black cat, with +a very demure expression on its countenance; and in front of it, sitting +on the ground, with his legs extended on either side of the log, was +Peterkin. At the moment we saw him he was gazing intently into the cat's +face, with his nose about four inches from it,--his hands being thrust +into his breeches pockets. + +"Cat," said Peterkin, turning his head a little on one side, "I love +you!" + +There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this affectionate +declaration but the cat said nothing. + +"Do you hear me?" cried Peterkin, sharply. "I love you--I do. Don't you +love me?" + +To this touching appeal the cat said "Mew," faintly. + +"Ah! that's right. You're a jolly old rascal. Why did you not speak at +once? eh?" and Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed the cat on the +nose! + +"Yes," continued Peterkin, after a pause, "I love you. D'you think I'd +say so if I didn't, you black villain? I love you because I've got to +take care of you, and to look after you, and to think about you, and to +see that you don't die--" + +"Mew, me-a-w!" said the cat. + +"Very good," continued Peterkin, "quite true, I have no doubt; but you've +no right to interrupt me, sir. Hold your tongue till I have done +speaking. Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me the first +time you ever saw me, and didn't seem to be afraid, and appeared to be +fond of me, though you didn't know that I wasn't going to kill you. Now, +that was brave, that was bold, and very jolly, old boy, and I love you +for it--I do!" + +Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat looked +placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if in +contemplation. Suddenly he looked up. + +"Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won't speak? eh? Now, tell +me; don't you think it's a monstrous shame that these two scoundrels, +Jack and Ralph, should keep us waiting for our supper so long?" + +Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; yawned +slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin's nose! + +"Just so, old boy, you're a clever fellow,--I really do believe the brute +understands me!" said Peterkin, while a broad grin overspread his face, +as he drew back and surveyed the cat. + +At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. The cat uttered an +angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up and exclaimed,-- + +"Bad luck to you, Jack! you've nearly made the heart jump out of my body, +you have." + +"Perhaps I have," replied Jack, laughing, as we entered the bower, "but, +as I don't intend to keep you or the cat any longer from your supper, I +hope that you'll both forgive me." + +Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but I observed +that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered ourselves, and he +did not seem to relish any allusion to the subject afterwards; so we +refrained from remarking on it ever after,--though it tickled us not a +little at the time. + +After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful adventures in +our little boat, and distant voyages upon the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + +The boat launched--We visit the coral reef--The great breaker that never +goes down--Coral insects--The way in which coral islands are made--The +boat's sail--We tax our ingenuity to form fish-hooks--Some of the fish we +saw--And a monstrous whale--Wonderful shower of little fish--Water-spouts. + +It was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first launched our +little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of the lagoon. Not a +breath of wind ruffled the surface of the deep. Not a cloud spotted the +deep blue sky. Not a sound that was discordant broke the stillness of +the morning, although there were many sounds, sweet, tiny, and melodious, +that mingled in the universal harmony of nature. The sun was just rising +from the Pacific's ample bosom and tipping the mountain tops with a red +glow. The sea was shining like a sheet of glass, yet heaving with the +long deep swell that, all the world round, indicates the life of ocean; +and the bright sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of +that pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious gems. +Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to its profoundest +depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift that heart in adoration +and gratitude to the great Creator of this magnificent and glorious +universe. + +At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and thither +without aim or object. But after the effervescence of our spirits was +abated, we began to look about us and to consider what we should do. + +"I vote that we row to the reef," cried Peterkin. + +"And I vote that we visit the islands within the lagoon," said I. + +"And I vote we do both," cried Jack, "so pull away, boys." + +As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat was so small +that only two were necessary. The extra pair were reserved in case any +accident should happen to the others. It was therefore only needful that +two of us should row, while the third steered, by means of an oar, and +relieved the rowers occasionally. + +First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over it, but saw +nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we landed on a larger island, +on which were growing a few cocoa-nut trees. Not having eaten anything +that morning, we gathered a few of the nuts and breakfasted. After this +we pulled straight out to sea and landed on the coral reef. + +This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We had now been so +long on shore that we had almost forgotten the appearance of breakers, +for there were none within the lagoon; but now, as we stood beside the +foam-crested billow of the open sea, all the enthusiasm of the sailor was +awakened in our breasts; and, as we gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that +single magnificent breaker that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot +the Coral Island behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm repose of +the scented woods; we forgot all that had passed during the last few +months, and remembered nothing but the storms, the calms, the fresh +breezes and the surging billows of the open sea. + +This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often alluded, was a +much larger and more sublime object than we had at all imagined it to be. +It rose many yards above the level of the sea, and could be seen +approaching at some distance from the reef. Slowly and majestically it +came on, acquiring greater volume and velocity as it advanced, until it +assumed the form of a clear watery arch, which sparkled in the bright +sun. On it came with resistless and solemn majesty,--the upper edge +lipped gently over, and it fell with a roar that seemed as though the +heart of Ocean were broken in the crash of tumultuous water, while the +foam-clad coral reef appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock! + +We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was with +difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I have once before +mentioned, this wave broke in many places over the reef and scattered +some of its spray into the lagoon, but in most places the reef was +sufficiently broad and elevated to receive and check its entire force. In +many places the coral rocks were covered with vegetation,--the beginning, +as it appeared to us, of future islands. Thus, on this reef, we came to +perceive how most of the small islands of those seas are formed. On one +part we saw the spray of the breaker washing over the rocks, and millions +of little, active, busy creatures continuing the work of building up this +living rampart. At another place, which was just a little too high for +the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all dead; for we found +that they never did their work above water. They had faithfully +completed the mighty work which their Creator had given them to do, and +they were now all dead. Again, in other spots the ceaseless lashing of +the sea had broken the dead coral in pieces, and cast it up in the form +of sand. Here sea-birds had alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and +stray bits of wood had been washed up, seeds of plants had been carried +by the wind and a few lovely blades of bright green had already sprung +up, which, when they died, would increase the size and fertility of these +emeralds of Ocean. At other places these islets had grown apace, and +were shaded by one or two cocoa-nut trees, which grew, literally, in the +sand, and were constantly washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have +before remarked, their fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our taste. + +Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the large coral +islands. We could now understand how the low ones were formed, but the +larger islands cost us much consideration, yet we could arrive at no +certain conclusion on the subject. + +Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during the whole +day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, and, withal, +rather hungry, to our bower. + +"Now," said Jack, "as our boat answers so well, we will get a mast and +sail made immediately." + +"So we will," cried Peterkin, as we all assisted to drag the boat above +high-water mark; "we'll light our candle and set about it this very +night. Hurrah, my boys, pull away!" + +As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on her keel; +and, as the sands were in this place mingled with broken coral rocks, we +saw portions of the wood being scraped off. + +"Hallo!" cried Jack, on seeing this. "That won't do. Our keel will be +worn off in no time at this rate." + +"So it will," said I, pondering deeply as to how this might be prevented. +But I am not of a mechanical turn, naturally, so I could conceive no +remedy save that of putting a plate of iron on the keel, but as we had no +iron I knew not what was to be done. "It seems to me, Jack," I added, +"that it is impossible to prevent the keel being worn off thus." + +"Impossible!" cried Peterkin, "my dear Ralph, you are mistaken, there is +nothing so easy--" + +"How?" I inquired, in some surprise. + +"Why, by not using the boat at all!" replied Peterkin. + +"Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin," said Jack, as he shouldered the +oars, "come along with me and I'll give you work to do. In the first +place, you will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to work to make +sewing twine with it--" + +"Please, captain," interrupted Peterkin, "I've got lots of it made +already,--more than enough, as a little friend of mine used to be in the +habit of saying every day after dinner." + +"Very well," continued Jack; "then you'll help Ralph to collect cocoa-nut +cloth, and cut it into shape, after which we'll make a sail of it. I'll +see to getting the mast and the gearing; so let's to work." + +And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from that time we +had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary rigging, in our little +boat. The sail was not, indeed, very handsome to look at, as it was +formed of a number of oblong patches of cloth; but we had sewed it well +by means of our sail-needle, so that it was strong, which was the chief +point. Jack had also overcome the difficulty about the keel, by pinning +to it a _false_ keel. This was a piece of tough wood, of the same length +and width as the real keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of +this depth because the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more +safe, but more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea where the +trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one direction, was a matter +of great importance. This piece of wood was pegged very firmly to the +keel; and we now launched our boat with the satisfaction of knowing that +when the false keel should be scraped off we could easily put on another; +whereas, should the real keel have been scraped away, we could not have +renewed it without taking our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said made +his "marrow quake to think upon." + +The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed about in the +lagoon with great delight, and examined with much interest the appearance +of our island from a distance. Also, we gazed into the depths of the +water, and watched for hours the gambols of the curious and +bright-coloured fish among the corals and sea-weed. Peterkin also made a +fishing line, and Jack constructed a number of hooks, some of which were +very good, others remarkably bad. Some of these hooks were made of iron- +wood, which did pretty well, the wood being extremely hard, and Jack made +them very thick and large. Fish there are not particular. Some of the +crooked bones in fish-heads also answered for this purpose pretty well. +But that which formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass +finger-ring belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little trouble to +manufacture it. First he cut it with the axe; then twisted it into the +form of a hook. The barb took him several hours to cut. He did it by +means of constant sawing with the broken pen-knife. As for the point, an +hour's rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent one. + +It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the appearance +of the multitudes of fish that were day after day drawn into our boat by +means of the brass hook. Peterkin always caught them,--for we observed +that he derived much pleasure from fishing,--while Jack and I found ample +amusement in looking on, also in gazing down at the coral groves, and in +baiting the hook. Among the fish that we saw, but did not catch, were +porpoises and sword-fish, whales and sharks. The porpoises came +frequently into our lagoon in shoals, and amused us not a little by their +bold leaps into the air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword- +fish were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting from +their noses. We often saw them darting after other fish, and no doubt +they sometimes killed them with their ivory swords. Jack remembered +having heard once of a sword-fish attacking a ship,--which seemed strange +indeed; but, as they are often in the habit of attacking whales, perhaps +it mistook the ship for one. This sword-fish ran against the vessel with +such force, that it drove its sword quite through the thick planks; and +when the ship arrived in harbour, long afterwards, the sword was found +still sticking in it! + +Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to bathe in +deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat to give us +warning, if he should see a shark approaching. As for the whales, they +never came into our lagoon, but we frequently saw them spouting in the +deep water beyond the reef. I shall never forget my surprise the first +day I saw one of these huge monsters close to me. We had been rambling +about on the reef during the morning, and were about to re-embark in our +little boat, to return home, when a loud blowing sound caused us to wheel +rapidly round. We were just in time to see a shower of spray falling, +and the flukes or tail of some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few +hundred yards off. We waited some time to see if he would rise again. As +we stood, the sea seemed to open up at our very feet; an immense spout of +water was sent with a snort high into the air, and the huge blunt head of +a sperm whale arose before us. It was so large that it could easily have +taken our little boat, along with ourselves, into its mouth! It plunged +slowly back into the sea, like a large ship foundering, and struck the +water with its tail so forcibly as to cause a sound like a cannon shot. +We also saw a great number of flying fish, although we caught none; and +we noticed that they never flew out of the water except when followed by +their bitter foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to escape. +But of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us so much as those that +we used to find in shallow pools after a shower of rain; and this not on +account of their appearance, for they were ordinary-looking and very +small, but on account of their having descended in a shower of rain! We +could account for them in no other way, because the pools in which we +found these fish were quite dry before the shower, and at some distance +above high-water mark. Jack, however, suggested a cause which seemed to +me very probable. We used often to see water-spouts in the sea. A water- +spout is a whirling body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp- +pointed pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long tongue, +which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have joined, they look +something like an hour-glass. The water-spout is then carried by the +wind, sometimes gently, sometimes with violence, over the sea, sometimes +up into the clouds, and then, bursting asunder, it descends in a deluge. +This often happens over the land as well as over the sea; and it +sometimes does much damage, but frequently it passes gently away. Now, +Jack thought that the little fish might perhaps have been carried up in a +water-spout, and so sent down again in a shower of rain. But we could +not be certain as to this point; yet we thought it likely. + +During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we caught a good +many eels, which we found to be very good to eat. We also found turtles +among the coral rocks, and made excellent soup in our iron kettle. +Moreover, we discovered many shrimps and prawns, so that we had no lack +of variety in our food; and, indeed, we never passed a week without +making some new and interesting discovery of some sort or other, either +on the land or in the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + +A monster wave and its consequences--The boat lost and found--Peterkin's +terrible accident--Supplies of food for a voyage in the boat--We visit +Penguin Island, and are amazed beyond measure--Account of the penguins. + +One day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were sitting on +the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an excursion which we +intended to make to Penguin Island the next day. + +"You see," said Peterkin, "it might be all very well for a stupid fellow +like me to remain here and leave the penguins alone, but it would be +quite inconsistent with your characters as philosophers to remain any +longer in ignorance of the habits and customs of these birds; so the +sooner we go the better." + +"Very true," said I; "there is nothing I desire so much as to have a +closer inspection of them." + +"And I think," said Jack, "that you had better remain at home, Peterkin, +to take care of the cat; for I'm sure the hogs will be at it in your +absence, out of revenge for your killing their great-grandmother so +recklessly." + +"Stay at home?" cried Peterkin; "my dear fellow, you would certainly lose +your way, or get upset, if I were not there to take care of you." + +"Ah, true," said Jack, gravely, "that did not occur to me; no doubt you +must go. Our boat does require a good deal of ballast; and all that you +say, Peterkin, carries so much weight with it, that we won't need stones +if you go." + +Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event occurred, which, +as it is not generally known, I shall be particular in recording here. + +While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, like a low +cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The day was a fine one, +though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was blowing, but the sea was not +rougher, or the breaker on the reef higher, than usual. At first we +thought that this looked like a thunder-cloud; and, as we had had a good +deal of broken weather of late, accompanied by occasional peals of +thunder, we supposed that a storm must be approaching. Gradually, +however, this line seemed to draw nearer, without spreading up over the +sky, as would certainly have been the case if it had been a storm-cloud. +Still nearer it came, and soon we saw that it was moving swiftly towards +the island; but there was no sound till it reached the islands out at +sea. As it passed these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, +that a cloud of white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the +air: it was accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture that +the approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but we had no +idea how large it was till it came near to ourselves. When it approached +the outer reef, however, we were awe-struck with its unusual magnitude; +and we sprang to our feet, and clambered hastily up to the highest point +of the precipice, under an indefinable feeling of fear. + +I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was very near to +the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was at a considerable +distance out to sea. Owing to this formation, the wave reached the reef +at the latter point before it struck at the foot of Spouting Cliff. The +instant it touched the reef we became aware, for the first time, of its +awful magnitude. It burst completely over the reef at all points, with a +roar that seemed louder to me than thunder; and this roar continued for +some seconds, while the wave rolled gradually along towards the cliff on +which we stood. As its crest reared before us, we felt that we were in +great danger, and turned to flee; but we were too late. With a crash +that seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic billow fell, and +instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of water-spouts with such +force that they shrieked on issuing from their narrow vents. It seemed +to us as if the earth had been blown up with water. We were stunned and +confused by the shock, and so drenched and blinded with spray, that we +knew not for a few moments whither to flee for shelter. At length we all +three gained an eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a scene +of devastation met our gaze as we looked along the shore! This enormous +wave not only burst over the reef, but continued its way across the +lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach of the island with such force that +passed completely over it and dashed into the woods, levelling the +smaller trees and bushes in its headlong course! + +On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been swept away, +and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have been utterly +destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we thought of this, and we +hastened round through the woods towards our home. On reaching it we +found, to our great relief of mind, that the force of the wave had been +expended just before reaching the bower; but the entrance to it was +almost blocked up by the torn-up bushes and tangled heaps of sea-weed. +Having satisfied ourselves as to the bower, we hurried to the spot where +the boat had been left; but no boat was there! The spot on which it had +stood was vacant, and no sign of it could we see on looking around us. + +"It may have been washed up into the woods," said Jack, hurrying up the +beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was to be seen, and we were about to +give ourselves over to despair, when Peterkin called to Jack and said,-- + +"Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious and wise as to +make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts grow upon trees; will +you now be so good as to inform me what sort of fruit that is growing on +the top of yonder bush? for I confess to being ignorant, or, at least, +doubtful on the point." + +We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our surprise, beheld +our little boat snugly nestled among the leaves! We were very much +overjoyed at this, for we would have suffered any loss rather than the +loss of our boat. We found that the wave had actually borne the boat on +its crest from the beach into the woods, and there launched it into the +heart of this bush; which was extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed +against a rock or a tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, whereas it +had not received the smallest injury. It was no easy matter, however, to +get it out of the bush and down to the sea again. This cost us two days +of hard labour to accomplish. + +We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the bower, and +spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the neighbourhood to +look as clean and orderly as before; for the uprooted bushes and sea-weed +that lay on the beach formed a more dreadfully confused-looking mass than +one who had not seen the place after the inundation could conceive. + +Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of those who +interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of our world, that +this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of the islands of the +Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the year. I heard this stated by +the missionaries during my career in those seas. They could not tell me +whether it visited all of the islands, but I was certainly assured that +it occurred periodically in some of them. + +After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the _debris_ of +the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to paying the penguins a +visit. The boat was therefore overhauled and a few repairs done. Then +we prepared a supply of provisions, for we intended to be absent at least +a night or two, perhaps longer. This took us some time to do, for while +Jack was busy with the boat, Peterkin was sent into the woods to spear a +hog or two, and had to search long, sometimes, ere he found them. +Peterkin was usually sent on this errand, when we wanted a pork chop +(which was not seldom), because he was so active, and could run so +wonderfully fast that he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, +being dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home without +having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, indeed, a more serious +accident happened to him. He had been out all morning alone and did not +return at the usual time to dinner. We wondered at this, for Peterkin +was always very punctual at the dinner hour. As supper-time drew near we +began to be anxious about him, and at length sallied forth to search the +woods. For a long time we sought in vain, but a little before dark we +came upon the tracks of the hogs, which we followed up until we came to +the brow of a rather steep bank or precipice. Looking over this we +beheld Peterkin lying in a state of insensibility at the foot, with his +cheek resting on the snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the earth +by the spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to bathe his +forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of seeing him revive. +After we had carried him home he related to as how the thing had +happened. + +"You must know," said he, "I walked about all the forenoon, till I was as +tired as an old donkey, without seeing a single grunter, not so much as a +track of one; but, as I was determined not to return empty-handed, I +resolved to go without my dinner and--" + +"What!" exclaimed Jack, "did you _really_ resolve to do that?" + +"Now, Jack, hold your tongue," returned Peterkin; "I say that I resolved +to forego my dinner and to push to the head of the small valley, where I +felt pretty sure of discovering the hogs. I soon found that I was on the +right scent, for I had scarcely walked half a mile in the direction of +the small plum tree we found there the other day, when a squeak fell on +my ear. 'Ho, ho,' said I, 'there you go, my boys;' and I hurried up the +glen. I soon started them, and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. +In a few seconds I was up with him, and stuck my spear right through his +dumpy body. Just as I did so, I saw that we were on the edge of a +precipice, whether high or low I knew not, but I had been running at such +a pace that I could not stop, so the pig and I gave a howl in concert and +went plunging over together. I remembered nothing more after that, till +I came to my senses and found you bathing my temples, and Ralph wringing +his hands over me." + +But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of getting +tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in hunting, and +returned before evening with three very nice little hogs. I, also, was +successful in my visit to the mud-flats, where I killed several ducks. So +that, when we launched and loaded our boat at sunrise the following +morning, we found our store of provisions to be more than sufficient. +Part had been cooked the night before, and, on taking note of the +different items, we found the account to stand thus:-- + +10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.) +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.) +6 Taro roots. +50 Fine large plums. +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe. +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.) +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw. +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing. + +I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by Peterkin +specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of its compounding a +profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; but I can say, with much +confidence, that we found it to be atrociously bad, and, after the first +tasting, scraped it carefully out and threw it overboard. We calculated +that this supply would last us for several days, but we afterwards found +that it was much more than we required, especially in regard to the cocoa +nuts, of which we found large supplies wherever we went. However, as +Peterkin remarked, it was better to have too much than too little, as we +knew not to what straits we might be put during our voyage. + +It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and rowed over +the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed between the two +green islets that guard the entrance. We experienced some difficulty and +no little danger in passing the surf of the breaker, and shipped a good +deal of water in the attempt; but, once past the billow, we found +ourselves floating placidly on the long oily swell that rose and fell +slowly as it rolled over the wide ocean. + +Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at about a mile +beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it must be at least twenty +miles distant by the way we should have to go. We might, indeed, have +shortened the way by coasting round our island inside of the lagoon, and +going out at the passage in the reef nearly opposite to Penguin Island, +but we preferred to go by the open sea; first, because it was more +adventurous; and, secondly, because we should have the pleasure of again +feeling the motion of the deep, which we all loved very much, not being +liable to sea sickness. + +"I wish we had a breeze," said Jack. + +"So do I," cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and wiping his heated brow; +"pulling is hard work. Oh dear, if we could only catch a hundred or two +of these gulls, tie them to the boat with long strings, and make them fly +as we want them, how capital it would be!" + +"Or bore a hole through a shark's tail, and reeve a rope through it, eh?" +remarked Jack. "But, I say, it seems that my wish is going to be +granted, for here comes a breeze. Ship your oar, Peterkin. Up with the +mast, Ralph; I'll see to the sail. Mind your helm; look out for +squalls!" + +This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark blue line +on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of time, swept down +on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it went. We presented the +stern of the boat to its first violence, and, in a few seconds, it +moderated into a steady breeze, to which we spread our sail and flew +merrily over the waves. Although the breeze died away soon afterwards, +it had been so stiff while it lasted, that we were carried over the +greater part of our way before it fell calm again; so that, when the +flapping of the sail against the mast told us that it was time to resume +the oars, we were not much more than a mile from Penguin Island. + +"There go the soldiers!" cried Peterkin as we came in sight of it; "how +spruce their white trousers look, this morning! I wonder if they will +receive us kindly. D'you think they are hospitable, Jack?" + +"Don't talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you shall see shortly." + +As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the manoeuvres and +appearance of these strange birds. They seemed to be of different +species, for some had crests on their heads while others had none, and +while some were about the size of a goose others appeared nearly as large +as a swan. We also saw a huge albatross soaring above the heads of the +penguins. It was followed and surrounded by numerous flocks of +sea-gulls. Having approached to within a few yards of the island, which +was a low rock, with no other vegetation on it than a few bushes, we lay +on our oars and gazed at the birds with surprise and pleasure, they +returning our gaze with interest. We now saw that their soldier-like +appearance was owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on +their short legs,--"Bolt-up-right," as Peterkin expressed it. They had +black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, and bluish backs. Their +wings were so short that they looked more like the fins of a fish, and, +indeed, we soon saw that they used them for the purpose of swimming under +water. There were no quills on these wings, but a sort of scaly +feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. Their legs were +short, and placed so far back that the birds, while on land, were obliged +to stand quite upright in order to keep their balance; but in the water +they floated like other water-fowl. At first we were so stunned with the +clamour which they and other sea-birds kept up around us, that we knew +not which way to look,--for they covered the rocks in thousands; but, as +we continued to gaze, we observed several quadrupeds (as we thought) +walking in the midst of the penguins. + +"Pull in a bit," cried Peterkin, "and let's see what these are. They +must be fond of noisy company, to consort with such creatures." + +To our surprise we found that these were no other than penguins which had +gone down on all fours, and were crawling among the bushes on their feet +and wings, just like quadrupeds. Suddenly one big old bird, that had +been sitting on a point very near to us, gazing in mute astonishment, +became alarmed, and, scuttling down the rocks, plumped or fell, rather +than ran, into the sea. It dived in a moment, and, a few seconds +afterwards, came out of the water far a-head, with such a spring, and +such a dive back into the sea again, that we could scarcely believe it +was not a fish that had leaped in sport. + +"That beats everything," said Peterkin, rubbing his nose, and screwing up +his face with an expression of exasperated amazement. "I've heard of a +thing being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I never did expect to live +to see a brute that was all three together,--at once--in one! But look +there!" he continued, pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, +"look there! there's no end to it. What _has_ that brute got under its +tail?" + +We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw a penguin +walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with an egg under its +tail. There were several others, we observed, burdened in the same way; +and we found afterwards that these were a species of penguins that always +carried their eggs so. Indeed, they had a most convenient cavity for the +purpose, just between the tail and the legs. We were very much impressed +with the regularity and order of this colony. The island seemed to be +apportioned out into squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and +sat in stiff solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and +down the spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but others were +feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us to laugh not a +little. The mother stood on a mound or raised rock, while the young one +stood patiently below her on the ground. Suddenly the mother raised her +head and uttered a series of the most discordant cackling sounds. + +"She's going to choke," cried Peterkin. + +But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked like it. In a +few seconds she put down her head and opened her mouth, into which the +young one thrust its beak and seemed to suck something from her throat. +Then the cackling was renewed, the sucking continued, and so the +operation of feeding was carried on till the young one was satisfied; but +what she fed her little one with, we could not tell. + +"Now, just look yonder!" said Peterkin, in an excited tone; "if that +isn't the most abominable piece of maternal deception I ever saw. That +rascally old lady penguin has just pitched her young one into the sea, +and there's another about to follow her example." + +This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep rock close +to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin endeavouring to entice +her young one into the water; but the young one seemed very unwilling to +go, and, notwithstanding the enticements of its mother, moved very slowly +towards her. At last she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it +a little towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as to say, +'Don't be afraid, darling! I won't hurt you, my pet!' but no sooner did +she get it to the edge of the rock, where it stood looking pensively down +at the sea, than she gave it a sudden and violent push, sending it +headlong down the slope into the water, where its mother left it to +scramble ashore as it best could. We observed many of them employed in +doing this, and we came to the conclusion that this is the way in which +old penguins teach their children to swim. + +Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we were +startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the most clumsy and +ludicrous manner towards the sea. The beach, here, was a sloping rock, +and when they came to it, some of them succeeded in hopping down in +safety, but others lost their balance and rolled and scrambled down the +slope in the most helpless manner. The instant they reached the water, +however, they seemed to be in their proper element. They dived and +bounded out of it and into it again with the utmost agility; and so, +diving and bounding and spluttering, for they could not fly, they went +rapidly out to sea. + +On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and said, "It's +my opinion that these birds are all stark, staring mad, and that this is +an enchanted island. I therefore propose that we should either put about +ship and fly in terror from the spot, or land valorously on the island, +and sell our lives as dearly as we can." + +"I vote for landing, so pull in, lads," said Jack, giving a stroke with +his oar that made the boat spin. In a few seconds we ran the boat into a +little creek where we made her fast to a projecting piece of coral, and, +running up the beach, entered the ranks of the penguins armed with our +cudgels and our spear. We were greatly surprised to find that, instead +of attacking us or showing signs of fear at our approach, these curious +birds did not move from their places until we laid hands on them, and +merely turned their eyes on us in solemn, stupid wonder as we passed. +There was one old penguin, however, that began to walk slowly toward the +sea, and Peterkin took it into his head that he would try to interrupt +its progress, so he ran between it and the sea and brandished his cudgel +in its face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It would not +retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but battled with +Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it reached the sea. Had +Peterkin used his club he could easily have felled it, no doubt; but, as +he had no wish to do so cruel an act merely out of sport, he let the bird +escape. + +We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the habits of these +curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we all three concluded, +after much consultation, that they were the most wonderful creatures we +had ever seen; and further, we thought it probable that they were the +most wonderful creatures in the world! + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + +An awful storm and its consequences--Narrow escape--A rock proves a sure +foundation--A fearful night and a bright morning--Deliverance from +danger. + +It was evening before we left the island of the penguins. As we had made +up our minds to encamp for the night on a small island, whereon grew a +few cocoa-nut trees, which was about two miles off, we lay to our oars +with some energy. But a danger was in store for us which we had not +anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so quickly to Penguin +Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff breeze, and, before we +had made half the distance to the small island, it became a regular gale. +Although it was not so directly against us as to prevent our rowing in +the course we wished to go, yet it checked us very much; and although the +force of the sea was somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began +to rise, and to roll their broken crests against our small craft, so that +she began to take in water, and we had much ado to keep ourselves afloat. +At last the wind and sea together became so violent that we found it +impossible to make the island, so Jack suddenly put the head of the boat +round and ordered Peterkin and me to hoist a corner of the sail, +intending to run back to Penguin Island. + +"We shall at least have the shelter of the bushes," he said, as the boat +flew before the wind, "and the penguins will keep us company." + +As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much against us +that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order to beat up for the +island, being by this change thrown much to leeward of it. What made +matters worse was, that the gale came in squalls, so that we were more +than once nearly upset. + +"Stand by, both of you," cried Jack, in a quick, earnest tone; "be ready +to dowse the sail. I very much fear we won't make the island after all." + +Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting everything to Jack +that we had fallen into the way of not considering things, especially +such things as were under Jack's care. We had, therefore, never doubted +for a moment that all was going well, so that it was with no little +anxiety that we heard him make the above remark. However, we had no time +for question or surmise, for, at the moment he spoke, a heavy squall was +bearing down upon us, and, as we were then flying with our lee gunwale +dipping occasionally under the waves, it was evident that we should have +to lower our sail altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the +boat, but Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did +not upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full of +water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again hoisted a corner of +the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared came upon us. We found it +quite impossible to make Penguin Island. The gale carried us quickly +past it towards the open sea, and the terrible truth flashed upon us that +we should be swept out and left to perish miserably in a small boat in +the midst of the wide ocean. + +This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw nothing in the +direction whither the wind was blowing us save the raging billows of the +sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed around us, for we were now +beyond the shelter of the islands, and it seemed as though any of the +huge billows, which curled over in masses of foam, might swallow us up in +a moment. The water, also, began to wash in over our sides, and I had to +keep constantly baling, for Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin the +sail for an instant, without endangering our lives. In the midst of this +distress Jack uttered an exclamation of hope, and pointed towards a low +island or rock which lay directly ahead. It had been hitherto +unobserved, owing to the dark clouds that obscured the sky and the +blinding spray that seemed to fill the whole atmosphere. + +As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute of trees +and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely over it. In fact +it was nothing more than the summit of one of the coral formations, which +rose only a few feet above the level of the water, and was, in stormy +weather, all but invisible. Over this island the waves were breaking in +the utmost fury, and our hearts sank within us as we saw that there was +not a spot where we could thrust our little boat without its being dashed +to pieces. + +"Show a little bit more sail," cried Jack, as we swept past the weather +side of the rock with fearful speed. + +"Ay, ay," answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot more of our sail. + +Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over and creak +so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I expected to be upset +every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart for his rashness. But I did +him injustice, for, although during two seconds the water rushed in-board +in a torrent, he succeeded in steering us sharply round to the leeward +side of the rock, where the water was comparatively calm, and the force +of the breeze broken. + +"Out your oars now, lads; that's well done. Give way!" We obeyed +instantly. The oars splashed into the waves together. One good hearty +pull, and we were floating in a comparatively calm creek that was so +narrow as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we were in perfect +safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our cable to the rocks, I +thanked God in my heart for our deliverance from so great danger. But, +although I have said we were now in safety, I suspect that few of my +readers would have envied our position. It is true we had no lack of +food, but we were drenched to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and +the spray flying over our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as +it were, in water; the spot on which we had landed was not more than +twelve yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not move without +the risk of being swept away by the storm. At the upper end of the creek +was a small hollow or cave in the rock, which sheltered us from the fury +of the winds and waves; and as the rock extended in a sort of ledge over +our heads, it prevented the spray from falling upon us. + +"Why," said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery again, "it seems to me +that we have got into a mermaid's cave, for there is nothing but water +all round us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the past." + +Peterkin's idea was not inappropriate, for, what with the sea roaring in +white foam up to our very feet, and the spray flying in white sheets +continually over our heads, and the water dripping heavily from the ledge +above like a curtain in front of our cave, it did seem to us very much +more like being below than above water. + +"Now, boys," cried Jack, "bestir yourselves, and let's make ourselves +comfortable. Toss out our provisions, Peterkin; and here, Ralph, lend a +hand to haul up the boat. Look sharp." + +"Ay, ay, captain," we cried, as we hastened to obey, much cheered by the +hearty manner of our comrade. + +Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, so that we +succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable than could have been +expected. We landed our provisions, wrung the water out of our garments, +spread our sail below us for a carpet, and, after having eaten a hearty +meal, began to feel quite cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits +sank again, for with the daylight all evidence of our security vanished +away. We could no longer see the firm rock on which we lay, while we +were stunned with the violence of the tempest that raged around us. The +night grew pitchy dark, as it advanced, so that we could not see our +hands when we held them up before our eyes, and were obliged to feel each +other occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for the storm at last +became so terrible that it was difficult to make our voices audible. A +slight variation of the wind, as we supposed, caused a few drops of spray +ever and anon to blow into our faces; and the eddy of the sea, in its mad +boiling, washed up into our little creek until it reached our feet and +threatened to tear away our boat. In order to prevent this latter +calamity, we hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare through the +watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror to the scene. Yet +we longed for those dismal flashes, for they were less appalling than the +thick blackness that succeeded them. Crashing peals of thunder seemed to +tear the skies in twain, and fell upon our ears through the wild yelling +of the hurricane as if it had been but a gentle summer breeze; while the +billows burst upon the weather side of the island until we fancied that +the solid rock was giving way, and, in our agony, we clung to the bare +ground, expecting every moment to be whirled away and whelmed in the +black howling sea! Oh! it was a night of terrible anxiety, and no one +can conceive the feelings of intense gratitude and relief with which we +at last saw the dawn of day break through the vapory mists around us. + +For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, while the storm +continued to rage with unabated fury. On the morning of the fourth day +it suddenly ceased, and the wind fell altogether; but the waves still ran +so high that we did not dare to put off in our boat. During the greater +part of this period we scarcely slept above a few minutes at a time, but +on the third night we slept soundly and awoke early on the fourth morning +to find the sea very much down, and the sun shining brightly again in the +clear blue sky. + +It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in our little +boat and steered away for our island home, which, we were overjoyed to +find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we had feared that we had +been blown out of sight of it altogether. As it was a dead calm we had +to row during the greater part of the day; but towards the afternoon a +fair breeze sprang up, which enabled us to hoist our sail. We soon +passed Penguin Island, and the other island which we had failed to reach +on the day the storm commenced; but as we had still enough of provisions, +and were anxious to get home, we did not land, to the great +disappointment of Peterkin, who seemed to entertain quite an affection +for the penguins. + +Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did not reach +the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and before we had sailed +more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, the wind died away altogether, +so that we had to take to our oars again. It was late and the moon and +stars were shining brightly when we arrived opposite the bower and leaped +upon the strand. So glad were we to be safe back again on our beloved +island, that we scarcely took time to drag the boat a short way up the +beach, and then ran up to see that all was right at the bower. I must +confess, however, that my joy was mingled with a vague sort of fear lest +our home had been visited and destroyed during our absence; but on +reaching it we found everything just as it had been left, and the poor +black cat curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our +humble dwelling. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + +Shoemaking--The even tenor of our way suddenly interrupted--An unexpected +visit and an appalling battle--We all become warriors, and Jack proves +himself be a hero. + +For many months after this we continued to live on our island in +uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went out a-fishing in +the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the woods, or ascended to the +mountain top, by way of variety, although Peterkin always asserted that +we went for the purpose of hailing any ship that might chance to heave in +sight. But I am certain that none of us wished to be delivered from our +captivity, for we were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say that as +we were very young we should not feel the loss of a year or two. +Peterkin, as I have said before, was thirteen years of age, Jack +eighteen, and I fifteen. But Jack was very tall, strong, and manly for +his age, and might easily have been mistaken for twenty. + +The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual summer, and +as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit and blossom all the +year round, we never wanted for a plentiful supply of food. The hogs, +too, seemed rather to increase than diminish, although Peterkin was very +frequent in his attacks on them with his spear. If at any time we failed +in finding a drove, we had only to pay a visit to the plum-tree before +mentioned, where we always found a large family of them asleep under its +branches. + +We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making various +garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had landed were +beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also succeeded in making excellent +shoes out of the skin of the old hog, in the following manner:--He first +cut a piece of the hide, of an oblong form, a few inches longer than his +foot. This he soaked in water, and, while it was wet, he sewed up one +end of it, so as to form a rough imitation of that part of the heel of a +shoe where the seam is. This done, he bored a row of holes all round the +edge of the piece of skin, through which a tough line was passed. Into +the sewed-up part of this shoe he thrust his heel, then, drawing the +string tight, the edges rose up and overlapped his foot all round. It is +true there were a great many ill-looking puckers in these shoes, but we +found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack came at last to +prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various other useful +articles, which added to our comfort, and once or twice spoke of building +us a house, but we had so great an affection for the bower, and, withal, +found it so serviceable, that we determined not to leave it, nor to +attempt the building of a house, which, in such a climate, might turn out +to be rather disagreeable than useful. + +We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on the other +side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we had powder and shot, +as it would render pig-killing much easier; but, after all, we had become +so expert in the use of our sling and bow and spear, that we were +independent of more deadly weapons. + +Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much pleasure +as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert in the water from +constant practice. As for Jack and I, we began to feel as if water were +our native element, and revelled in it with so much confidence and +comfort that Peterkin said he feared we would turn into fish some day, +and swim off and leave him; adding, that he had been for a long time +observing that Jack was becoming more and more like a shark every day. +Whereupon Jack remarked, that if he, Peterkin, were changed into a fish, +he would certainly turn into nothing better or bigger than a shrimp. Poor +Peterkin did not envy us our delightful excursions under water, except, +indeed, when Jack would dive down to the bottom of the Water Garden, sit +down on a rock and look up and make faces at him. Peterkin did feel +envious then, and often said he would give anything to be able to do +that. I was much amused when Peterkin said this; for if he could only +have seen his own face when he happened to take a short dive, he would +have seen that Jack's was far surpassed by it. The great difference +being, however, that Jack made faces on purpose--Peterkin couldn't help +it! + +Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and amusements, an +event occurred one day which was as unexpected as it was exceedingly +alarming and very horrible. + +Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the rocks at +Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from his garments, +having recently fallen by accident into the sea,--a thing he was +constantly doing,--when our attention was suddenly arrested by two +objects which appeared on the horizon. + +"What are yon, think you?" I said, addressing Jack. + +"I can't imagine," answered he; "I've noticed them for some time, and +fancied they were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them the more I +feel convinced they are much larger than gulls." + +"They seem to be coming towards us," said I. + +"Hallo! what's wrong?" inquired Peterkin, coming up. + +"Look there," said Jack. + +"Whales!" cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with his hand. "No! eh! can +they be boats, Jack?" + +Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing human faces +again. + +"I think you are about right, Peterkin;--but they seem to me to move +strangely for boats," said Jack, in a low tone, as if he were talking to +himself. + +I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack's countenance as he gazed +long and intently at the two objects, which were now nearing us fast. At +last he sprang to his feet. "They are canoes, Ralph! whether war-canoes +or not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all the natives of the South +Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they have little respect for +strangers. We must hide if they land here, which I earnestly hope they +will not do." + +I was greatly alarmed at Jack's speech, but I confess I thought less of +what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner in which he said it, and +it was with very uncomfortable feelings that Peterkin and I followed him +quickly into the woods. + +"How unfortunate," said I, as we gained the shelter of the bushes, "that +we have forgotten our arms." + +"It matters not," said Jack; "here are clubs enough and to spare." As he +spoke, he laid his hand on a bundle of stout poles of various sizes, +which Peterkin's ever-busy hands had formed, during our frequent visits +to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, than that of having +something to do. + +We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, and lay +down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes approach, without +ourselves being seen. At first we made an occasional remark on their +appearance, but after they entered the lagoon, and drew near the beach, +we ceased to speak, and gazed with intense interest at the scene before +us. + +We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by the other, +and that it contained a few women and children, as well as men,--perhaps +forty souls altogether; while the canoe which pursued it contained only +men. They seemed to be about the same in number, but were better armed, +and had the appearance of being a war party. Both crews were paddling +with all their might, and it seemed as if the pursuers exerted themselves +to overtake the natives ere they could land. In this, however, they +failed. The foremost canoe made for the beach close beneath the rocks +behind which we were concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors +in the water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam curled +from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in their black faces +as they strained every muscle of their naked bodies; nor did they relax +their efforts till the canoe struck the beach with a violent shock; then, +with a shout of defiance, the whole party sprang, as if by magic, from +the canoe to the shore. Three women, two of whom carried infants in +their arms, rushed into the woods; and the men crowded to the water's +edge, with stones in their hands, spears levelled, and clubs brandished, +to resist the landing of their enemies. + +The distance between the two canoes had been about half a mile, and, at +the great speed they were going, this was soon passed. As the pursuers +neared the shore, no sign of fear or hesitation was noticeable. On they +came like a wild charger,--received but recked not of a shower of stones. +The canoe struck, and, with a yell that seemed to issue from the throats +of incarnate fiends, they leaped into the water, and drove their enemies +up the beach. + +The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to behold. Most of the +men wielded clubs of enormous size and curious shapes, with which they +dashed out each other's brains. As they were almost entirely naked, and +had to bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their terrible hand-to-hand +encounters, they looked more like demons than human beings. I felt my +heart grow sick at the sight of this bloody battle, and would fain have +turned away, but a species of fascination seemed to hold me down and glue +my eyes upon the combatants. I observed that the attacking party was led +by a most extraordinary being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I +concluded was a chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous extent, +so that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light-yellow hue, which +surprised me much, for the man's body was as black as coal, and I felt +convinced that the hair must have been dyed. He was tattooed from head +to foot; and his face, besides being tattooed, was besmeared with red +paint, and streaked with white. Altogether, with his yellow turban-like +hair, his Herculean black frame, his glittering eyes and white teeth, he +seemed the most terrible monster I ever beheld. He was very active in +the fight, and had already killed four men. + +Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite as strong +and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club something like an +eagle's beak at the point. For a second or two these giants eyed each +other warily, moving round and round, as if to catch each other at a +disadvantage, but seeing that nothing was to be gained by this caution, +and that the loss of time might effectually turn the tide of battle +either way, they apparently made up their minds to attack at the same +instant, for, with a wild shout and simultaneous spring, they swung their +heavy clubs, which met with a loud report. Suddenly the yellow-haired +savage tripped, his enemy sprang forward, the ponderous club was swung, +but it did not descend, for at that moment the savage was felled to the +ground by a stone from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief's +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The savages who +landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on seeing the fall of +their chief. But not one escaped. They were all overtaken and felled to +the earth. I saw, however, that they were not all killed. Indeed, their +enemies, now that they were conquered, seemed anxious to take them alive; +and they succeeded in securing fifteen, whom they bound hand and foot +with cords, and, carrying them up into the woods, laid them down among +the bushes. Here they left them, for what purpose I knew not, and +returned to the scene of the late battle, where the remnant of the party +were bathing their wounds. + +Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, only twenty- +eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the bush to hunt for the +women and children. Of the other party, as I have said, only ten +survived, and these were lying bound and helpless on the grass. + +Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and whispered our fears +that the savages might clamber up the rocks to search for fresh water, +and so discover our place of concealment; but we were so much interested +in watching their movements that we agreed to remain where we were; and, +indeed, we could not easily have risen without exposing ourselves to +detection. One of the savages now went up to the wood and soon returned +with a bundle of fire-wood, and we were not a little surprised to see him +set fire to it by the very same means used by Jack the time we made our +first fire,--namely, with the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, +two of the party went again to the woods and returned with one of the +bound men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as the +thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their enemies. As +they bore him to the fire my feelings almost overpowered me. I gasped +for breath, and seizing my club, endeavoured to spring to my feet; but +Jack's powerful arm pinned me to the earth. Next moment one of the +savages raised his club, and fractured the wretched creature's skull. He +must have died instantly, and, strange though it may seem, I confess to a +feeling of relief when the deed was done, because I now knew that the +poor savage could not be burned alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to +quiver when the monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, after +roasting them slightly over the fire, devoured them. + +Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few seconds, the two +savages hastened towards the fire dragging the three women and their two +infants along with them. One of those women was much younger than her +companions, and we were struck with the modesty of her demeanour and the +gentle expression of her face, which, although she had the flattish nose +and thick lips of the others, was of a light-brown colour, and we +conjectured that she must be of a different race. She and her companions +wore short petticoats and a kind of tippet on their shoulders. Their +hair was jet black, but instead of being long, was short and +curly,--though not woolly--somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While +we gazed with interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, the big +chief advanced to one of the elder females and laid his hand upon the +child. But the mother shrank from him, and clasping the little one to +her bosom, uttered a wail of fear. With a savage laugh, the chief tore +the child from her arms and tossed it into the sea. A low groan burst +from Jack's lips as we witnessed this atrocious act and heard the +mother's shriek, as she fell insensible on the sand. The rippling waves +rolled the child on the beach, as if they refused to be a party in such a +foul murder, and we could observe that the little one still lived. + +The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief addressed her; but +although we heard his voice, and even the words distinctly, of course we +could not understand what he said. The girl made no answer to his fierce +questions, and we saw by the way in which he pointed to the fire that he +threatened her life. + +"Peterkin," said Jack in a hoarse whisper, "have you got your knife?" + +"Yes," replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as death. + +"That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding quick. Here is the small +knife, Ralph. Fly both of you through the bush, cut the cords that bind +the prisoners and set them free. There! quick, ere it be too late." Jack +sprang up, and seized a heavy but short bludgeon, while his strong frame +trembled with emotion, and large drops rolled down his forehead. + +At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few minutes before +advanced towards the girl with his heavy club. Jack uttered a yell that +rang like a death-shriek among the rocks. With one bound he leaped over +a precipice full fifteen feet high, and, before the savages had recovered +from their surprise, was in the midst of them; while Peterkin and I +dashed through the bushes towards the prisoners. With one blow of his +staff Jack felled the man with the club, then, turning round with a look +of fury, he rushed upon the big chief with the yellow hair. Had the blow +which Jack aimed at his head taken effect, the huge savage would have +needed no second stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it by +springing to one side, while, at the same time, he swung his ponderous +club at the head of his foe. It was now Jack's turn to leap aside, and +well was it for him that the first outburst of his blind fury was over, +else he had become an easy prey to his gigantic antagonist; but Jack was +cool now. He darted his blows rapidly and well, and the superiority of +his light weapon was strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could +easily evade the blows of the chief's heavy club, the chief could not so +easily evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, so quick was he, and +so frightfully did he fling about the mighty weapon, that, although Jack +struck him almost every blow, the strokes had to be delivered so quickly +that they wanted force to be very effectual. + +It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the success of +their chief in this encounter to be so certain that they refrained from +interfering. Had they doubted it, they would have probably ended the +matter at once by felling him. But they contented themselves with +awaiting the issue. + +The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now began to be +apparent. His movements became slower, his breath hissed through his +clenched teeth, and the surprised savages drew nearer in order to render +assistance. Jack observed this movement. He felt that his fate was +sealed, and resolved to cast his life upon the next blow. The chiefs +club was again about to descend on his head. He might have evaded it +easily, but instead of doing so, he suddenly shortened his grasp of his +own club, rushed in under the blow, struck his adversary right between +the eyes with all his force and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the +senseless body of the chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to +descend on the head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive +body of the chief completely covered him. That moment saved his life. +Ere the savages could tear the chief's body away, seven of their number +fell prostrate beneath the clubs of the prisoners whom Peterkin and I had +set free, and two others fell under our own hand. We could never have +accomplished this had not our enemies been so engrossed with the fight +between Jack and their chief that they had failed to observe us until we +were upon them. They still out-numbered our party by three, but we were +flushed with victory while they were taken by surprise and dispirited by +the fall of their chief. Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping +fury of Jack, who seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no +sooner shaken himself free of the chief's body than he rushed into the +midst of them, and in three blows equalized our numbers. Peterkin and I +flew to the rescue, the savages followed us, and, in less than ten +minutes, the whole of our opponents were knocked down or made prisoners, +bound hand and foot, and extended side by side upon the sea shore. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + +Intercourse with the savages--Cannibalism prevented--The slain are buried +and the survivors depart, leaving us again alone on our Coral Island. + +After the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and gazed at us +in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a flood of questions, +which, being wholly unintelligible, of course we could not answer. +However, by way of putting an end to it, Jack took the chief (who had +recovered from the effects of his wound) by the hand and shook it warmly. +No sooner did the blacks see that this was meant to express good-will +than they shook hands with us all round. After this ceremony was gone +through Jack went up to the girl, who had never once moved from the rock +where she had been left, but had continued an eager spectator of all that +had passed. He made signs to her to follow him and then, taking the +chief by the hand, was about to conduct him to the bower when his eye +fell on the poor infant which had been thrown into the sea and was still +lying on the shore. Dropping the chief's hand he hastened towards it, +and, to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We also found that +the mother was beginning to recover slowly. + +"Here, get out o' the way," said Jack, pushing us aside, as we stooped +over the poor woman and endeavoured to restore her, "I'll soon bring her +round." So saying, he placed the infant on her bosom and laid its warm +cheek on hers. The effect was wonderful. The woman opened her eyes, +felt the child, looked at it, and with a cry of joy clasped it in her +arms, at the same time endeavouring to rise, for the purpose, apparently, +of rushing into the woods. + +"There, that's all right," said Jack, once more taking the chief by the +hand. "Now Ralph and Peterkin, make the women and these fellows follow +me to the bower. Well entertain them as hospitably as we can." + +In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in front of +the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, several ducks, and a +variety of cold fish, together with an unlimited supply of cocoa-nuts, +bread-fruits, yams, taro, and plums; with all of which they seemed to be +quite familiar and perfectly satisfied. + +Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our day's work, took +a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and throwing ourselves on our beds +fell fast asleep. The savages it seems followed our example, and in half- +an-hour the whole camp was buried in repose. + +How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we lay down +the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the heavens. I +awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being unable at first to +comprehend our situation. "Now, then," said he, springing up, "let's see +after breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how long do you mean to +lie there?" + +Peterkin yawned heavily. "Well!" said he, opening his eyes and looking +up after some trouble, "if it isn't to-morrow morning, and me thinking it +was to-day all this time. Hallo! Venus, where did you come from? you +seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as well speak to the cat as +to you--better, in fact, for it understands me, and you don't." + +This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the elderly females, +who had seated herself on the rock in front of the bower, and, having +placed her child at her feet, was busily engaged in devouring the remains +of a roast pig. + +By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast in an +advanced state of preparation. During the course of it we made sundry +attempts to converse with the natives by signs, but without effect. At +last we hit upon a plan of discovering their names. Jack pointed to his +breast and said "Jack," very distinctly; then he pointed to Peterkin and +to me, repeating our names at the same time. Then he pointed to himself +again, and said "Jack," and laying his finger on the breast of the chief, +looked inquiringly into his face. The chief instantly understood him and +said "Tararo," twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it after him, and the +chief, nodding his head approvingly, said "Chuck." On hearing which, +Peterkin exploded with laughter; but Jack turned and with a frown rebuked +him, saying, "I must look even more indignantly at you than I feel, +Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don't like to be laughed at." +Then turning towards the youngest of the women, who was seated at the +door of the bower, he pointed to her; whereupon the chief said, "Avatea;" +and pointing towards the sun, raised his finger slowly towards the +zenith, where it remained steadily for a minute or two. + +"What can that mean, I wonder," said Jack, looking puzzled. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "the chief means she is an angel come down to +stay here for a while. If so, she's an uncommonly black one!" + +We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack went up to +her and said, "Avatea." The woman smiled sadly, and nodded her head, at +the same time pointing to her breast and then to the sun, in the same +manner as the chief had done. We were much puzzled to know what this +could signify, but as there was no way of solving our difficulty we were +obliged to rest content. + +Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking up his axe, +he led them to the place where the battle had been fought. Here we found +the prisoners, who had passed the night on the beach having been totally +forgotten by us, as our minds had been full of our guests, and were +ultimately overcome by sleep. They did not seem the worse for their +exposure, however, as we judged by the hearty appetite with which they +devoured the breakfast that was soon after given to them. Jack then +began to dig a hole in the sand, and, after working a few seconds, he +pointed to it and to the dead bodies that lay exposed on the beach. The +natives immediately perceived what he wanted, and, running for their +paddles, dug a hole in the course of half an hour that was quite large +enough to contain all the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they +tossed their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we felt +assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had we not +asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired chief was the last +thrown in. This wretched man would have recovered from the blow with +which Jack felled him, and, indeed, he did endeavour to rise during the +melee that followed his fall, but one of his enemies, happening to notice +the action, dealt him a blow with his club that killed him on the spot. + +While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one of the +savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made apparently of stone, cut +a large slice of flesh from his thigh. We knew at once that he intended +to make use of this for food, and could not repress a cry of horror and +disgust. + +"Come, come, you blackguard," cried Jack, starting up and seizing the man +by the arm, "pitch that into the hole. Do you hear?" + +The savage of course did not understand the command, but he perfectly +understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded the flesh, and +his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the hole. Nevertheless he did not +obey. Jack instantly turned to Tararo and made signs to him to enforce +obedience. The chief seemed to understand the appeal, for he stepped +forward, raised his club, and was on the point of dashing out the brains +of his offending subject, when Jack sprang forward and caught his +uplifted arm. + +"Stop!" he shouted, "you blockhead, I don't want you to kill the man." He +then pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The chief uttered a few +words, which had the desired effect; for the man threw the flesh into the +hole, which was immediately filled up. This man was of a morose, sulky +disposition, and, during all the time he remained on the island, regarded +us, especially Jack, with a scowling visage. His name, we found, was +Mahine. + +The next three or four days were spent by the savages in mending their +canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock it had sustained on +striking the shore. This canoe was a very curious structure. It was +about thirty feet long, and had a high towering stern. The timbers, of +which it was partly composed, were fastened much in the same way as those +of our little boat were put together; but the part that seemed most +curious to us was a sort of out-rigger, or long plank, which was attached +to the body of the canoe by means of two stout cross beams. These beams +kept the plank parallel with the canoe, but not in contact with it, for +it floated in the water with an open space between; thus forming a sort +of double canoe. This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting of +the canoe, which was so narrow that it could not have maintained an +upright position without the out-rigger. We could not help wondering +both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this contrivance. + +When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the prisoners +into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and fruit. Peterkin +also went to the plum-tree for the purpose of making a special onslaught +upon the hogs, and killed no less than six of them. These we baked and +presented to our friends on the day of their departure. On that day +Tararo made a great many energetic signs to us, which, after much +consideration, we came to understand were proposals that we should go +away with him to his island; but, having no desire to do so, we shook our +heads very decidedly. However, we consoled him by presenting him with +our rusty axe, which we thought we could spare, having the excellent one +which had been so providentially washed ashore to us the day we were +wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names carved on it, +and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as an ornament. + +In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the beach. Being unable +to speak to the savages, we went through the ceremony of shaking hands, +and expected they would depart; but, before doing so, Tararo went up to +Jack and rubbed noses with him, after which he did the same with Peterkin +and me! Seeing that this was their mode of salutation, we determined to +conform to their custom, so we rubbed noses heartily with the whole +party, women and all! The only disagreeable part of the process was, +when we came to rub noses with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that +when he saw his wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much +more inclined to _bang_ than to _rub_ his nose. Avatea was the last to +take leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of real sorrow when she +approached to bid us farewell. Besides her modest air and gentle manners +she was the only one of the party who exhibited the smallest sign of +regret at parting from us. Going up to Jack, she put out her flat little +nose to be rubbed, and thereafter paid the same compliment to Peterkin +and me. + +An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an indefinable +feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were seated in silence +beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on the wonderful events of +the last few days. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life--A sail!--An unexpected +salute--The end of the black cat--A terrible dive--An incautious +proceeding and a frightful catastrophe. + +Life is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, that it beat a +druggist's shop all to sticks; for, whereas the first is a compound of +good and bad, the other is a horrible compound of all that is utterly +detestable. And indeed the more I consider it the more I am struck with +the strange mixture of good and evil that exists not only in the material +earth but in our own natures. In our own Coral Island we had experienced +every variety of good that a bountiful Creator could heap on us. Yet on +the night of the storm we had seen how almost, in our case,--and +altogether, no doubt, in the case of others less fortunate--all this good +might be swept away for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in +the soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these good +and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, crushed and +hurled to the ground in destructive devastation. We had lived for many +months in a clime for the most part so beautiful, that we had often +wondered whether Adam and Eve had found Eden more sweet; and we had seen +the quiet solitudes of our paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious +savages, and the white sands stained with blood and strewed with lifeless +forms; yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many symptoms of a kindly +nature. I pondered these things much, and, while I considered them, +there recurred to my memory those words which I had read in my Bible,--the +works of God are wonderful, and his ways past finding out. + +After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and frequent +conversations about them, and I noticed that Peterkin's manner was now +much altered. He did not, indeed, jest less heartily than before, but he +did so less frequently, and often there was a tone of deep seriousness in +his manner, if not in his words, which made him seem to Jack and me as if +he had grown two years older within a few days. But indeed I was not +surprised at this, when I reflected on the awful realities which we had +witnessed so lately. We could by no means shake off a tendency to gloom +for several weeks afterwards; but, as time wore away, our usual good +spirits returned somewhat, and we began to think of the visit of the +savages with feelings akin to those with which we recall a terrible +dream. + +One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, preparatory +to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had kept us in such +constant supply of hogs that we had become quite tired of pork, and +desired a change. Peterkin was sunning himself on the ledge of rock, +while we were creeping among the rocks below. Happening to look up, I +observed Peterkin cutting the most extraordinary capers and making +violent gesticulations for us to come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose +immediately. + +"A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on the horizon there, just +over the entrance to the lagoon!" cried Peterkin, as we scrambled up the +rocks. + +"So it is, and a schooner, too!" said Jack, as he proceeded hastily to +dress. + +Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this discovery, for if +it should touch at our island we had no doubt the captain would be happy +to give us a passage to some of the civilized islands, where we could +find a ship sailing for England, or some other part of Europe. Home, +with all its associations, rushed in upon my heart like a flood, and, +much though I loved the Coral Island and the bower which had now been our +home so long, I felt that I could have quitted all at that moment without +a sigh. With joyful anticipations we hastened to the highest point of +rock near our dwelling, and awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now +perceived that she was making straight for the island, under a steady +breeze. + +In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she rounded to, and +backed her topsails in order to survey the coast. Seeing this, and +fearing that they might not perceive us, we all three waved pieces of +cocoa-nut cloth in the air, and soon had the satisfaction of seeing them +beginning to lower a boat and bustle about the decks as if they meant to +land. Suddenly a flag was run up to the peak, a little cloud of white +smoke rose from the schooner's side, and, before we could guess their +intentions, a cannon-shot came crashing through the bushes, carried away +several cocoa-nut trees in its passage, and burst in atoms against the +cliff a few yards below the spot on which we stood. + +With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the schooner's +peak was black, with a Death's head and cross bones upon it. As we gazed +at each other in blank amazement, the word "pirate" escaped our lips +simultaneously. + +"What is to be done?" cried Peterkin, as we observed a boat shoot from +the vessel's side, and make for the entrance of the reef. "If they take +us off the island, it will either be to throw us overboard for sport, or +to make pirates of us." + +I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only resource in this +emergency. He stood with folded arms, and his eyes fixed with a grave, +anxious expression on the ground. "There is but one hope," said he, +turning with a sad expression of countenance to Peterkin; "perhaps, after +all, we may not have to resort to it. If these villains are anxious to +take us, they will soon overrun the whole island. But come, follow me." + +Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, and led us +by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he halted, and, advancing +cautiously to the rocks, glanced over their edge. We were soon by his +side, and saw the boat, which was crowded with armed men, just touching +the shore. In an instant the crew landed, formed line, and rushed up to +our bower. + +In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of them +swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On reaching the +water's edge, he tossed it far into the sea, and joined his companions, +who appeared to be holding a hasty council. + +"You see what we may expect," said Jack bitterly. "The man who will +wantonly kill a poor brute for sport will think little of murdering a +fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance left,--the Diamond +Cave." + +"The Diamond Cave!" cried Peterkin, "then my chance is a poor one, for I +could not dive into it if all the pirates on the Pacific were at my +heels." + +"Nay, but," said I, "we will take you down, Peterkin, if you will only +trust us." + +As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, and radiate, +as if from a centre, towards the woods and along shore. + +"Now, Peterkin," said Jack, in a solemn tone, "you must make up your mind +to do it, or we must make up our minds to die in your company." + +"Oh, Jack, my dear friend," cried Peterkin, turning pale, "leave me; I +don't believe they'll think it worth while to kill me. Go, you and +Ralph, and dive into the cave." + +"That will not I," answered Jack quietly, while he picked up a stout +cudgel from the ground. "So now, Ralph, we must prepare to meet these +fellows. Their motto is, 'No quarter.' If we can manage to floor those +coming in this direction, we may escape into the woods for a while." + +"There are five of them," said I; "we have no chance." + +"Come, then," cried Peterkin, starting up, and grasping Jack convulsively +by the arm, "let us dive; I will go." + +Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the feelings of +horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare idea of being held +down, even for a few seconds,--that spasmodic, involuntary recoil from +compulsory immersion which has no connection whatever with cowardice; and +they will understand the amount of resolution that it required in +Peterkin to allow himself to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and +then, through a narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. But +there was no alternative. The pirates had already caught sight of us, +and were now within a short distance of the rocks. + +Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms. + +"Now, keep quite still, no struggling," said Jack, "or we are lost." + +Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble features, and +the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he had fully made up his +mind to go through with it. Just as the pirates gained the foot of the +rocks, which hid us for a moment from their view, we bent over the sea, +and plunged down together head foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. +He floated passively between us like a log of wood, and we passed the +tunnel and rose into the cave in a shorter space of time than I had ever +done it before. + +Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and in a few +seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in safety. Jack now +searched for the tinder and torch, which always lay in the cave. He soon +found them, and, lighting the torch, revealed to Peterkin's wondering +gaze the marvels of the place. But we were too wet to waste much time in +looking about us. Our first care was to take off our clothes, and wring +them as dry as we could. This done, we proceeded to examine into the +state of our larder, for, as Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing +how long the pirates might remain on the island. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "they may take it into their heads to stop here +altogether, and so we shall be buried alive in this place." + +"Don't you think, Peterkin, that it's the nearest thing to being drowned +alive that you ever felt?" said Jack with a smile. "But I've no fear of +that. These villains never stay long on shore. The sea is their home, +so you may depend upon it that they won't stay more than a day or two at +the furthest." + +We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in the cavern. +At various periods Jack and I had conveyed cocoa nuts and other fruits, +besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to this submarine cave, partly for +amusement, and partly from a feeling that we might possibly be driven one +day to take shelter here from the savages. Little did we imagine that +the first savages who would drive us into it would be white savages, +perhaps our own countrymen. We found the cocoa-nuts in good condition, +and the cooked yams, but the bread-fruits were spoiled. We also found +the cloth where we had left it; and, on opening it out, there proved to +be sufficient to make a bed; which was important, as the rock was damp. +Having collected it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch +in the midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange chamber +to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, ghastly +appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, with the thick +darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops that fell at long +intervals from the roof of the cavern into the still water; and the +strong contrast between all this and our bed and supper, which, with our +faces, were lit up with the deep red flame of the torch. + +We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, for we did +not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault above when we +happened to raise them. At last the faint light that came through the +opening died away, warning us that it was night and time for rest. We +therefore put out our torch and lay down to sleep. + +On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our faculties so as to +remember where we were, and we were in much uncertainty as to whether it +was early or late. We saw by the faint light that it was day, but could +not guess at the hour; so Jack proposed that he should dive out and +reconnoitre. + +"No, Jack," said I, "do you rest here. You've had enough to do during +the last few days. Rest yourself now, and take care of Peterkin, while I +go out to see what the pirates are about. I'll be very careful not to +expose myself, and I'll bring you word again in a short time." + +"Very well, Ralph," answered Jack, "please yourself, but don't be long; +and if you'll take my advice you'll go in your clothes, for I would like +to have some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees without clothes is +uncomfortable, to say the least of it." + +"The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp lookout," said Peterkin, "so, +pray, be careful." + +"No fear," said I; "good-bye." + +"Good-bye," answered my comrades. + +And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged into the +water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open air. On rising, I +was careful to come up gently and to breathe softly, while I kept close +in beside the rocks; but, as I observed no one near me, I crept slowly +out, and ascended the cliff a step at a time, till I obtained a full view +of the shore. No pirates were to be seen,--even their boat was gone; but +as it was possible they might have hidden themselves, I did not venture +too boldly forward. Then it occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to +my surprise, I saw the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on +the horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. Then my first +impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the good news; but I +checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, in order to make sure +that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate schooner. I looked long and +anxiously at her, and, giving vent to a deep sigh of relief, said aloud, +"Yes, there she goes; the villains have been baulked of their prey this +time at least." + +"Not so sure of that!" said a deep voice at my side; while, at the same +moment, a heavy hand grasped my shoulder, and held it as if in a vice. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + +I fall into the hands of pirates--How they treated me, and what I said to +them--The result of the whole ending in a melancholy separation and in a +most unexpected gift. + +My heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, turning round, +I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce aspect regarding me with a +smile of contempt. He was a white man,--that is to say, he was a man of +European blood, though his face, from long exposure to the weather, was +deeply bronzed. His dress was that of a common seaman, except that he +had on a Greek skull-cap, and wore a broad shawl of the richest silk +round his waist. In this shawl were placed two pair of pistols and a +heavy cutlass. He wore a beard and moustache, which, like the locks on +his head, were short, curly, and sprinkled with gray hairs. + +"So, youngster," he said, with a sardonic smile, while I felt his grasp +tighten on my shoulder, "the villains have been baulked of their prey, +have they? We shall see, we shall see. Now, you whelp, look yonder." As +he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill whistle. In a second or two it was +answered, and the pirate-boat rowed round the point at the Water Garden, +and came rapidly towards us. "Now, go, make a fire on that point; and +hark'ee, youngster, if you try to run away, I'll send a quick and sure +messenger after you," and he pointed significantly at his pistols. + +I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the burning-glass in my +pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a thick smoke ascended into the +air. It had scarcely appeared for two minutes when the boom of a gun +rolled over the sea, and, looking up, I saw that the schooner was making +for the island again. It now flashed across me that this was a ruse on +the part of the pirates, and that they had sent their vessel away, +knowing that it would lead us to suppose that they had left altogether. +But there was no use of regret now. I was completely in their power, so +I stood helplessly beside the pirate watching the crew of the boat as +they landed on the beach. For an instant I contemplated rushing over the +cliff into the sea, but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some of +the men were already between me and the water. + +There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their scheme, as the +crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who had captured me by the +title of captain. They were a ferocious set of men, with shaggy beards +and scowling brows. All of them were armed with cutlasses and pistols, +and their costumes were, with trifling variations, similar to that of the +captain. As I looked from one to the other, and observed the low, +scowling brows, that never unbent, even when the men laughed, and the +mean, rascally expression that sat on each face, I felt that my life hung +by a hair. + +"But where are the other cubs?" cried one of the men, with an oath that +made me shudder. "I'll swear to it there were three, at least, if not +more." + +"You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other dogs?" said the +captain. + +"If you mean my companions," said I, in a low voice, "I won't tell you." + +A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer. + +The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then drawing a pistol from +his belt, he cocked it and said, "Now, youngster, listen to me. I've no +time to waste here. If you don't tell me all you know, I'll blow your +brains out! Where are your comrades?" + +For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this extremity. +Suddenly a thought occurred to me. + +"Villain," said I, shaking my clenched fist in his face, "to blow my +brains out would make short work of me, and be soon over. Death by +drowning is as sure, and the agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to your +face, if you were to toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I would not +tell you where my companions are, and I dare you to try me!" + +The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. "Say you so?" cried +he, uttering a fierce oath. "Here, lads, take him by the legs and heave +him in,--quick!" + +The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my audacity, +advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me towards the cliff, I +congratulated myself not a little on the success of my scheme, for I knew +that once in the water I should be safe, and could rejoin Jack and +Peterkin in the cave. But my hopes were suddenly blasted by the captain +crying out, "Hold on, lads, hold on. We'll give him a taste of the thumb- +screws before throwing him to the sharks. Away with him into the boat. +Look alive! the breeze is freshening." + +The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down the rocks, +tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for some time stunned +with the violence of my fall. + +On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I perceived that +we were already outside the coral reef, and close alongside the schooner, +which was of small size and clipper built. I had only time to observe +this much, when I received a severe kick on the side from one of the men, +who ordered me, in a rough voice, to jump aboard. Rising hastily I +clambered up the side. In a few minutes the boat was hoisted on deck, +the vessel's head put close to the wind, and the Coral Island dropped +slowly astern as we beat up against a head sea. + +Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily engaged in +working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to me, so I remained +leaning against the bulwarks close to the gangway, watching their +operations. I was surprised to find that there were no guns or +carronades of any kind in the vessel, which had more of the appearance of +a fast-sailing trader than a pirate. But I was struck with the neatness +of everything. The brass work of the binnacle and about the tiller, as +well as the copper belaying-pins, were as brightly polished as if they +had just come from the foundry. The decks were pure white, and smooth. +The masts were clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and +truck, which were painted black. The standing and running rigging was in +the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. In short, +everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her low black hull to +the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an amount of care and strict +discipline that would have done credit to a ship of the Royal Navy. There +was nothing lumbering or unseemly about the vessel, excepting, perhaps, a +boat, which lay on the deck with its keel up between the fore and main +masts. It seemed disproportionately large for the schooner; but, when I +saw that the crew amounted to between thirty and forty men, I concluded +that this boat was held in reserve, in case of any accident compelling +the crew to desert the vessel. + +As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to that of +the captain. But in head gear they differed not only from him but from +each other, some wearing the ordinary straw hat of the merchant service, +while others wore cloth caps and red worsted night-caps. I observed that +all their arms were sent below; the captain only retaining his cutlass +and a single pistol in the folds of his shawl. Although the captain was +the tallest and most powerful man in the ship, he did not strikingly +excel many of his men in this respect, and the only difference that an +ordinary observer would have noticed was, a certain degree of open +candour, straightforward daring, in the bold, ferocious expression of his +face, which rendered him less repulsive than his low-browed associates, +but did not by any means induce the belief that he was a hero. This look +was, however, the indication of that spirit which gave him the +pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who called him captain. He +was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of personal fear, and utterly +reckless of consequences, and, therefore, a terror to his men, who +individually hated him, but unitedly felt it to be their advantage to +have him at their head. + +But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I had left on +shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, which was now far away +to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears rolled slowly down my cheeks +as I thought that I might never see them more. + +"So you're blubbering, are you, you obstinate whelp?" said the deep voice +of the captain, as he came up and gave me a box on the ear that nearly +felled me to the deck. "I don't allow any such weakness aboard o' this +ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or I'll give you something to cry +for." + +I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, but felt +that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, so I made no +reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my eyes. + +"I thought you were made of better stuff," continued the captain, +angrily; "I'd rather have a mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed puppy. +But I'll cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks before long. Now +go below, and stay there till I call you." + +As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg standing by the +side of the main-mast, on which the word _gunpowder_ was written in +pencil. It immediately flashed across me that, as we were beating up +against the wind, anything floating in the sea would be driven on the +reef encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected--for thought is +more rapid than the lightning--that my old companions had a pistol. +Without a moment's hesitation, therefore, I lifted the keg from the deck +and tossed it into the sea! An exclamation of surprise burst from the +captain and some of the men who witnessed this act of mine. + +Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the captain raised +his hand to strike me, while he shouted, "Boy! whelp! what mean you by +that?" + +"If you lower your hand," said I, in a loud voice, while I felt the blood +rush to my temples, "I'll tell you. Until you do so I'm dumb!" + +The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of amazement. + +"Now," continued I, "I threw that keg into the sea because the wind and +waves will carry it to my friends on the Coral Island, who happen to have +a pistol, but no powder. I hope that it will reach them soon, and my +only regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. Moreover, pirate, you +said just now that you thought I was made of better stuff! I don't know +what stuff I am made of,--I never thought much about that subject; but +I'm quite certain of this, that I am made of such stuff as the like of +you shall never tame, though you should do your worst." + +To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, smiled, and, +thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that encircled his waist, +turned on his heel and walked aft, while I went below. + +Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the men +received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, patting me on the +back, said, "Well done, lad! you're a brick, and I have no doubt will +turn out a rare cove. Bloody Bill, there, was just such a fellow as you +are, and he's now the biggest cut-throat of us all." + +"Take a can of beer, lad," cried another, "and wet your whistle after +that speech o' your'n to the captain. If any one o' us had made it, +youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this time." + +"Stop your clapper, Jack," vociferated a third; "give the boy a junck o' +meat. Don't you see he's a'most goin' to kick the bucket?" + +"And no wonder," said the first speaker, with an oath, "after the tumble +you gave him into the boat. I guess it would have broke _your_ neck if +you had got it." + +I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, to the +combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be recollected that +I had dived out of the cave that morning before breakfast, and it was now +near mid-day. I therefore gladly accepted a plate of boiled pork and a +yam, which were handed to me by one of the men from the locker on which +some of the crew were seated eating their dinner. But I must add that +the zest with which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of the +frightful oaths and the terrible language that flowed from the lips of +these godless men, even in the midst of their hilarity and good-humour. +The man who had been alluded to as Bloody Bill was seated near me, and I +could not help wondering at the moody silence he maintained among his +comrades. He did indeed reply to their questions in a careless, off-hand +tone, but he never volunteered a remark. The only difference between him +and the others was his taciturnity and his size, for he was nearly, if +not quite, as large a man as the captain. + +During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own reflections, +which were anything but agreeable, for I could not banish from my mind +the threat about the thumb-screws, of the nature and use of which I had a +vague but terrible conception. I was still meditating on my unhappy fate +when, just after night-fall, one of the watch on deck called down the +hatchway,-- + +"Hallo there! one o' you, tumble up and light the cabin lamp, and send +that boy aft to the captain--sharp!" + +"Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants you. Look alive," +said Bloody Bill, raising his huge frame from the locker on which he had +been asleep for the last two hours. He sprang up the ladder and I +instantly followed him, and, going aft, was shown into the cabin by one +of the men, who closed the door after me. + +A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft light over +the cabin, which was a small apartment, and comfortably but plainly +finished. Seated on a camp-stool at the table, and busily engaged in +examining a chart of the Pacific, was the captain, who looked up as I +entered, and, in a quiet voice, bade me be seated, while he threw down +his pencil, and, rising from the table, stretched himself on a sofa at +the upper end of the cabin. + +"Boy," said he, looking me full in the face, "what is your name?" + +"Ralph Rover," I replied. + +"Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that island? How +many companions had you on it? Answer me, now, and mind you tell no +lies." + +"I never tell lies," said I, firmly. + +The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, and bade me +answer his questions. + +I then told him the history of myself and my companions from the time we +sailed till the day of his visit to the island, taking care, however, to +make no mention of the Diamond Cave. After I had concluded, he was +silent for a few minutes; then, looking up, he said--"Boy, I believe +you." + +I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he should not +believe me. However, I made no reply. + +"And what," continued the captain, "makes you think that this schooner is +a pirate?" + +"The black flag," said I, "showed me what you are; and if any further +proof were wanting I have had it in the brutal treatment I have received +at your hands." + +The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he continued--"Boy, +you are too bold. I admit that we treated you roughly, but that was +because you made us lose time and gave us a good deal of trouble. As to +the black flag, that is merely a joke that my fellows play off upon +people sometimes in order to frighten them. It is their humour, and does +no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a lawful trader,--a rough one, I grant +you, but one can't help that in these seas, where there are so many +pirates on the water and such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry +on a trade in sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, +Ralph, to behave yourself and be a good boy, I'll take you along with me +and give you a good share of the profits. You see I'm in want of an +honest boy like you, to look after the cabin and keep the log, and +superintend the traffic on shore sometimes. What say you, Ralph, would +you like to become a sandal-wood trader?" + +I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal relieved to +find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; but instead of +replying I said, "If it be as you state, then why did you take me from my +island, and why do you not now take me back?" + +The captain smiled as he replied, "I took you off in anger, boy, and I'm +sorry for it. I would even now take you back, but we are too far away +from it. See, there it is," he added, laying his finger on the chart, +"and we are now here,--fifty miles at least. It would not be fair to my +men to put about now, for they have all an interest in the trade." + +I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more conversation, I +agreed to become one of the crew, at least until we could reach some +civilized island where I might be put ashore. The captain assented to +this proposition, and after thanking him for the promise, I left the +cabin and went on deck with feelings that ought to have been lighter, but +which were, I could not tell why, marvellously heavy and uncomfortable +still. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + +Bloody Bill--Dark surmises--A strange sail, and a strange crew, and a +still stranger cargo--New reasons for favouring missionaries--A murderous +massacre, and thoughts thereon. + +Three weeks after the conversation narrated in the last chapter, I was +standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner watching the gambols of a +shoal of porpoises that swam round us. It was a dead calm. One of those +still, hot, sweltering days, so common in the Pacific, when Nature seems +to have gone to sleep, and the only thing in water or in air that proves +her still alive, is her long, deep breathing, in the swell of the mighty +sea. No cloud floated in the deep blue above; no ripple broke the +reflected blue below. The sun shone fiercely in the sky, and a ball of +fire blazed, with almost equal power, from out the bosom of the water. So +intensely still was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of +the deep, that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, we +might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue liquid +ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck in all +creation, floating in the midst of it. + +No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of a porpoise, +the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on the swell, the patter +of the reef-points, and the occasional flap of the hanging sails. An +awning covered the fore and after parts of the schooner, under which the +men composing the watch on deck lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with +excessive heat. Bloody Bill, as the men invariably called him, was +standing at the tiller, but his post for the present was a sinecure, and +he whiled away the time by alternately gazing in dreamy abstraction at +the compass in the binnacle, and by walking to the taffrail in order to +spit into the sea. In one of these turns he came near to where I was +standing, and, leaning over the side, looked long and earnestly down into +the blue wave. + +This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was the only +human being on board with whom I had the slightest desire to become +better acquainted. The other men, seeing that I did not relish their +company, and knowing that I was a protege of the captain, treated me with +total indifference. Bloody Bill, it is true, did the same; but as this +was his conduct towards every one else, it was not peculiar in reference +to me. Once or twice I tried to draw him into conversation, but he +always turned away after a few cold monosyllables. As he now leaned over +the taffrail close beside me, I said to him,-- + +"Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do you never speak to any +one?" + +Bill smiled slightly as he replied, "Why, I s'pose it's because I haint +got nothin' to say!" + +"That's strange," said I, musingly; "you look like a man that could +think, and such men can usually speak." + +"So they can, youngster," rejoined Bill, somewhat sternly; "and I could +speak too if I had a mind to, but what's the use o' speakin' here! The +men only open their mouths to curse and swear, an' they seem to find it +entertaining; but I don't, so I hold my tongue." + +"Well, Bill, that's true, and I would rather not hear you speak at all +than hear you speak like the other men; but _I_ don't swear, Bill, so you +might talk to me sometimes, I think. Besides, I'm weary of spending day +after day in this way, without a single soul to say a pleasant word to. +I've been used to friendly conversation, Bill, and I really would take it +kind if you would talk with me a little now and then." + +Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad expression +pass across his sun-burnt face. + +"An' where have you been used to friendly conversation," said Bill, +looking down again into the sea; "not on that Coral Island, I take it?" + +"Yes, indeed," said I energetically; "I have spent many of the happiest +months in my life on that Coral Island;" and without waiting to be +further questioned, I launched out into a glowing account of the happy +life that Jack and Peterkin and I had spent together, and related +minutely every circumstance that befell us while on the island. + +"Boy, boy," said Bill, in a voice so deep that it startled me, "this is +no place for you." + +"That's true," said I; "I'm of little use on board, and I don't like my +comrades; but I can't help it, and at anyrate I hope to be free again +soon." + +"Free?" said Bill, looking at me in surprise. + +"Yes, free," returned I; "the captain said he would put me ashore after +this trip was over." + +"_This trip_! Hark'ee, boy," said Bill, lowering his voice, "what said +the captain to you the day you came aboard?" + +"He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no pirate, and told me +that if I would join him for this trip he would give me a good share of +the profits or put me on shore in some civilized island if I chose." + +Bill's brows lowered savagely as he muttered, "Ay, he said truth when he +told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but he lied when--" + +"Sail ho!" shouted the look-out at the masthead. + +"Where, away?" cried Bill, springing to the tiller; while the men, +startled by the sudden cry jumped up and gazed round the horizon. + +"On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir," answered the look-out. + +At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the rigging, +surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping his eye round the +horizon he gazed steadily at a particular point. + +"Take in top-sails," shouted the captain, swinging himself down on the +deck by the main-back stay. + +"Take in top-sails," roared the first mate. + +"Ay, ay, sir-r-r," answered the men as they sprang into the rigging and +went aloft like cats. + +Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet schooner. The top- +sails were taken in and stowed, the men stood by the sheets and halyards, +and the captain gazed anxiously at the breeze which was now rushing +towards us like a sheet of dark blue. In a few seconds it struck us. The +schooner trembled as if in surprise at the sudden onset, while she fell +away, then bending gracefully to the wind, as though in acknowledgment of +her subjection, she cut through the waves with her sharp prow like a +dolphin, while Bill directed her course towards the strange sail. + +In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that she was a +schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts and sails we +judged her to be a trader. She evidently did not like our appearance, +for, the instant the breeze reached her, she crowded all sail and showed +us her stern. As the breeze had moderated a little our top-sails were +again shaken out, and it soon became evident,--despite the proverb, "A +stern chase is a long one," that we doubled her speed and would overhaul +her speedily. When within a mile we hoisted British colours, but +receiving no acknowledgment, the captain ordered a shot to be fired +across her bows. In a moment, to my surprise, a large portion of the +bottom of the boat amidships was removed, and in the hole thus exposed +appeared an immense brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by +means of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The heavy ball +struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, ricochetting into +the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond it. + +This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel backed her +top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, about a hundred +yards off. + +"Lower the boat," cried the captain. + +In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the crew, who +were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the captain passed me to +get into it, he said, "jump into the stern sheets, Ralph, I may want +you." I obeyed, and in ten minutes more we were standing on the +stranger's deck. We were all much surprised at the sight that met our +eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we were accustomed to see, +there were only fifteen blacks standing on the quarter-deck and regarding +us with looks of undisguised alarm. They were totally unarmed and most +of them unclothed; one or two, however, wore portions of European attire. +One had on a pair of duck trousers which were much too large for him and +stuck out in a most ungainly manner. Another wore nothing but the common +scanty native garment round the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the +most ludicrous personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, was a +tall middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of countenance, who +wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, and a straw hat, while +his black brawny legs were totally uncovered below the knees. + +"Where's the commander of this ship?" inquired our captain, stepping up +to this individual. + +"I is capin," he answered, taking off his straw hat and making a low bow. + +"You!" said our captain, in surprise. "Where do you come from, and where +are you bound? What cargo have you aboard?" + +"We is come," answered the man with the swallow-tail, "from Aitutaki; we +was go for Rarotonga. We is native miss'nary ship; our name is de _Olive +Branch_; an' our cargo is two tons cocoa-nuts, seventy pigs, twenty cats, +and de Gosp'l." + +This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with a shout of +laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by the captain, whose +expression instantly changed from one of severity to that of frank +urbanity as he advanced towards the missionary and shook him warmly by +the hand. + +"I am very glad to have fallen in with you," said he, "and I wish you +much success in your missionary labours. Pray take me to your cabin, as +I wish to converse with you privately." + +The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led him away I +heard him saying, "Me most glad to find you trader; we t'ought you be +pirate. You very like one 'bout the masts." + +What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, but he +came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking hands cordially +with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and returned to the +schooner, which was immediately put before the wind. In a few minutes +the _Olive Branch_ was left far behind us. + +That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men talking +about this curious ship. + +"I wonder," said one, "why our captain looked so sweet on yon swallow- +tailed super-cargo o' pigs and Gospels. If it had been an ordinary +trader, now, he would have taken as many o' the pigs as he required and +sent the ship with all on board to the bottom." + +"Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you don't know that," cried +another. "The captain cares as much for the gospel as you do (an' that's +precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, that the only place +among the southern islands where a ship can put in and get what she wants +in comfort, is where the gospel has been sent to. There are hundreds o' +islands, at this blessed moment, where you might as well jump straight +into a shark's maw as land without a band o' thirty comrades armed to the +teeth to back you." + +"Ay," said a man with a deep scar over his right eye, "Dick's new to the +work. But if the captain takes us for a cargo o' sandal-wood to the +Feejees he'll get a taste o' these black gentry in their native +condition. For my part I don't know, an' I don't care, what the gospel +does to them; but I know that when any o' the islands chance to get it, +trade goes all smooth an' easy; but where they ha'nt got it, Beelzebub +himself could hardly desire better company." + +"Well, you ought to be a good judge," cried another, laughing, "for +you've never kept any company but the worst all your life!" + +"Ralph Rover!" shouted a voice down the hatchway. "Captain wants you, +aft." + +Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as I went the +strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of the gospel on +savage natures;--testimony which, as it was perfectly disinterested, I +had no doubt whatever was strictly true. + +On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and as we were +alone together I tried to draw him into conversation. After repeating to +him the conversation in the forecastle about the missionaries, I said,-- + +"Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in sandal-wood?" + +"Yes, Ralph, she is; but she's just as really a pirate. The black flag +you saw flying at the peak was no deception." + +"Then how can you say she's a trader?" asked I. + +"Why, as to that, she trades when she can't take by force, but she takes +by force, when she can, in preference. Ralph," he added, lowering his +voice, "if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have witnessed done on +these decks you would not need to ask if we were pirates. But you'll +find it out soon enough. As for the missionaries, the captain favours +them because they are useful to him. The South-Sea islanders are such +incarnate fiends that they are the better of being tamed, and the +missionaries are the only men who can do it." + +Our track after this lay through several clusters of small islets, among +which we were becalmed more than once. During this part of our voyage +the watch on deck and the look-out at the mast-head were more than +usually vigilant, as we were not only in danger of being attacked by the +natives, who, I learned from the captain's remarks, were a bloody and +deceitful tribe at this group, but we were also exposed to much risk from +the multitudes of coral reefs that rose up in the channels between the +islands, some of them just above the surface, others a few feet below it. +Our precautions against the savages I found were indeed necessary. + +One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most of which +appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of fresh water the +captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask or two. But we were +mistaken in thinking there were no natives; for scarcely had we drawn +near to the shore when a band of naked blacks rushed out of the bush and +assembled on the beach, brandishing their clubs and spears in a +threatening manner. Our men were well armed, but refrained from showing +any signs of hostility, and rowed nearer in order to converse with the +natives; and I now found that more than one of the crew could imperfectly +speak dialects of the language peculiar to the South Sea islanders. When +within forty yards of the shore, we ceased rowing, and the first mate +stood up to address the multitude; but, instead of answering us, they +replied with a shower of stones, some of which cut the men severely. +Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was about to be fired, +when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from the schooner, which lay +not more than five or six hundred yards off the shore. + +"Don't fire," he shouted, angrily. "Pull off to the point ahead of you." + +The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep curses as they +prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and they burned for revenge. +Three or four of them hesitated, and seemed disposed to mutiny. + +"Don't distress yourselves, lads," said the mate, while a bitter smile +curled his lip. "Obey orders. The captain's not the man to take an +insult tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I'll give myself to +the sharks." + +The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, which was now +crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, probably, to five or six +hundred. We had not rowed off above a couple of hundred yards when a +loud roar thundered over the sea, and the big brass gun sent a withering +shower of grape point blank into the midst of the living mass, through +which a wide lane was cut, while a yell, the like of which I could not +have imagined, burst from the miserable survivors as they fled to the +woods. Amongst the heaps of dead that lay on the sand, just where they +had fallen, I could distinguish mutilated forms writhing in agony, while +ever and anon one and another rose convulsively from out the mass, +endeavoured to stagger towards the wood, and ere they had taken a few +steps, fell and wallowed on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me +as I witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little time +to think, for the captain's deep voice came again over the water towards +us: "Pull ashore, lads, and fill your water casks." The men obeyed in +silence, and it seemed to me as if even their hard hearts were shocked by +the ruthless deed. On gaining the mouth of the rivulet at which we +intended to take in water, we found it flowing with blood, for the +greater part of those who were slain had been standing on the banks of +the stream, a short way above its mouth. Many of the wretched creatures +had fallen into it, and we found one body, which had been carried down, +jammed between two rocks, with the staring eyeballs turned towards us and +his black hair waving in the ripples of the blood-red stream. No one +dared to oppose our landing now, so we carried our casks to a pool above +the murdered group, and having filled them, returned on board. +Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried us away from +the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from the memory of what +I had seen. + +"And this," thought I, gazing in horror at the captain, who, with a quiet +look of indifference, leaned upon the taffrail smoking a cigar and +contemplating the fertile green islets as they passed like a lovely +picture before our eyes--"this is the man who favours the missionaries +because they are useful to him and can tame the savages better than any +one else can do it!" Then I wondered in my mind whether it were possible +for any missionary to tame _him_! + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious--Unpleasant +prospects--Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic agency--The +pirates negotiate with a Feejee chief--Various etceteras that are +calculated to surprise and horrify. + +It was many days after the events just narrated ere I recovered a little +of my wonted spirits. I could not shake off the feeling for a long time +that I was in a frightful dream, and the sight of our captain filled me +with so much horror that I kept out of his way as much as my duties about +the cabin would permit. Fortunately he took so little notice of me that +he did not observe my changed feelings towards him, otherwise it might +have been worse for me. + +But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first island we +should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of the natives +rather than remain an hour longer than I could help in the pirate +schooner. I pondered this subject a good deal, and at last made up my +mind to communicate my intention to Bloody Bill; for, during several +talks I had had with him of late, I felt assured that he too would +willingly escape if possible. When I told him of my design he shook his +head. "No, no, Ralph," said he, "you must not think of running away +here. Among some of the groups of islands you might do so with safety, +but if you tried it here you would find that you had jumped out of the +fryin' pan into the fire." + +"How so, Bill?" said I, "would the natives not receive me?" + +"That they would, lad; but they would eat you too." + +"Eat me!" said I in surprise, "I thought the South Sea islanders never +ate anybody except their enemies." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Bill. "I s'pose 'twas yer tender-hearted friends in +England that put that notion into your head. There's a set o' +soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who don't like to have their +feelin's ruffled, and when you tell them anything they don't like--that +shocks them, as they call it--no matter how true it be, they stop their +ears and cry out, 'Oh, that is _too_ horrible! We can't believe that!' +An' they say truth. They can't believe it 'cause they won't believe it. +Now, I believe there's thousands o' the people in England who are sich +born drivellin' _won't-believers_ that they think the black fellows +hereaway, at the worst, eat an enemy only now an' then, out o' spite; +whereas, I know for certain, and many captains of the British and +American navies know as well as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not +only their enemies but one another; and they do it not for spite, but for +pleasure. It's a _fact_ that they prefer human flesh to any other. But +they don't like white men's flesh so well as black. They say it makes +them sick." + +"Why, Bill," said I, "you told me just now that they would eat _me_ if +they caught me." + +"So I did; and so I think they would. I've only heard some o' them say +they don't like white men _so well_ as black; but if they was hungry they +wouldn't be particular. Anyhow, I'm sure they would kill you. You see, +Ralph, I've been a good while in them parts, and I've visited the +different groups of islands oftentimes as a trader. And thorough goin' +blackguards some o' them traders are. No better than pirates, I can tell +you. One captain that I sailed with was not a chip better than the one +we're with now. He was tradin' with a friendly chief one day, aboard his +vessel. The chief had swam off to us with the things for trade tied a- +top of his head, for them chaps are like otters in the water. Well, the +chief was hard on the captain, and would not part with some o' his +things. When their bargainin' was over they shook hands, and the chief +jumped over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty yards from the +ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. He then hove up +anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along shore, he dropped six black- +fellows with his rifle, remarkin' that 'that would spoil the trade for +the next comers.' But, as I was sayin', I'm up to the ways o' these +fellows. One o' the laws o' the country is, that every shipwrecked +person who happens to be cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to +be roasted and eaten. There was a small tradin' schooner wrecked off one +of these islands when we were lyin' there in harbour during a storm. The +crew was lost, all but three men, who swam ashore. The moment they +landed they were seized by the natives and carried up into the woods. We +knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could not help them, +for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore they would likely have +killed us all. We never saw the three men again; but we heard frightful +yelling, and dancing, and merry-making that night; and one of the +natives, who came aboard to trade with us next day, told us that the +_long pigs_, as he called the men, had been roasted and eaten, and their +bones were to be converted into sail needles. He also said that white +men were bad to eat, and that most o' the people on shore were sick." + +I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this terrible account +of the natives, and asked Bill what he would advise me to do. Looking +round the deck to make sure that we were not overheard, he lowered his +voice and said, "There are two or three ways that we might escape, Ralph, +but none o' them's easy. If the captain would only sail for some o' the +islands near Tahiti, we might run away there well enough, because the +natives are all Christians; an' we find that wherever the savages take up +with Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are safe +to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity myself," he continued, in +a soliloquising voice, "and I don't well know what it means; but a man +with half an eye can see what it does for these black critters. However, +the captain always keeps a sharp look out after us when we get to these +islands, for he half suspects that one or two o' us are tired of his +company. Then, we might manage to cut the boat adrift some fine night +when it's our watch on deck, and clear off before they discovered that we +were gone. But we would run the risk o' bein' caught by the blacks. I +wouldn't like to try that plan. But you and I will think over it, Ralph, +and see what's to be done. In the meantime it's our watch below, so I'll +go and turn in." + +Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade took his +place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into conversation with +him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, looked down into the +phosphorescent waves that gargled around the ladder, and streamed out +like a flame of blue light in the vessel's wake. My thoughts were very +sad, and I could scarce refrain from tears as I contrasted my present +wretched position with the happy, peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral +Island with my dear companions. As I thought upon Jack and Peterkin +anxious forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to myself the grief +and dismay with which they would search every nook and corner of the +island, in a vain attempt to discover my dead body; for I felt assured +that if they did not see any sign of the pirate schooner or boat, when +they came out of the cave to look for me, they would never imagine that I +had been carried away. I wondered, too, how Jack would succeed in +getting Peterkin out of the cave without my assistance; and I trembled +when I thought that he might lose presence of mind, and begin to kick +when he was in the tunnel! These thoughts were suddenly interrupted and +put to flight by a bright red blaze which lighted up the horizon to the +southward, and cut a crimson glow far over the sea. This appearance was +accompanied by a low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at the +same time, the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling wind blew +around us in fitful gusts. + +The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were under the +belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the captain coming on +deck, soon explained the phenomena. + +"It's only a volcano," said he. "I knew there was one hereabouts, but +thought it was extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; we'll +likely have a breeze, and it's well to be ready." + +As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed was not +rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant from the volcano, +these must have been carried to us from it by the wind. As the captain +had predicted, a stiff breeze soon afterwards sprang up, under the +influence of which we speedily left the volcano far behind us; but during +the greater part of the night we could see its lurid glare and hear its +distant thunder. The shower did not cease to fall for several hours, and +we must have sailed under it for nearly forty miles, perhaps farther. +When we emerged from the cloud, our decks and every part of the rigging +were completely covered with a thick coat of ashes. I was much +interested in this, and recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of +the islands of the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, +and had said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the Pacific were +nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a huge continent which had +sunk under the influence of volcanic agency. + +Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few miles to +windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant aspect. It +consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be nearly four thousand feet +high. They were separated from each other by a broad valley, whose thick- +growing trees ascended a considerable distance up the mountain sides; and +rich level plains, or meadow-land, spread round the base of the +mountains, except at the point immediately opposite the large valley, +where a river seemed to carry the trees, as it were, along with it down +to the white sandy shore. The mountain tops, unlike those of our Coral +Island, were sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while their sides were more +rugged and grand in outline than anything I had yet seen in those seas. +Bloody Bill was beside me when the island first hove in sight. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, "I know that island well. They call it Emo." + +"Have you been here before, then?" I inquired. + +"Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. 'Tis a famous island +for sandal-wood. We have taken many cargoes off it already, and have +paid for them too; for the savages are so numerous that we dared not try +to take it by force. But our captain has tried to cheat them so often, +that they're beginnin' not to like us overmuch now. Besides, the men +behaved ill the last time we were here; and I wonder the captain is not +afraid to venture. But he's afraid o' nothing earthly, I believe." + +We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our anchor in six +fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small creek, whose shores +were densely covered with mangroves and tall umbrageous trees. The +principal village of the natives lay about half a mile from this point. +Ordering the boat out, the captain jumped into it, and ordered me to +follow him. The men, fifteen in number, were well armed; and the mate +was directed to have Long Tom ready for emergencies. + +"Give way, lads," cried the captain. + +The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from the +schooner's side, and in a few minutes reached the shore. Here, contrary +to our expectation, we were met with the utmost cordiality by Romata, the +principal chief of the island, who conducted us to his house, and gave us +mats to sit upon. I observed in passing that the natives, of whom there +were two or three thousand, were totally unarmed. + +After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and various +roots was spread before us; of which we partook sparingly, and then +proceeded to business. The captain stated his object in visiting the +island, regretted that there had been a slight misunderstanding during +the last visit, and hoped that no ill-will was borne by either party, and +that a satisfactory trade would be accomplished. + +Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any differences +between them, protested that he was delighted to see his friends again, +and assured them they should have every assistance in cutting and +embarking the wood. The terms were afterwards agreed on, and we rose to +depart. All this conversation was afterwards explained to me by Bill, +who understood the language pretty well. + +Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great chief from +another island was then on a visit to him, and that he was to be +ceremoniously entertained on the following day. After begging to be +allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving permission, he sent his +canoe ashore to bring him off. At the same time he gave orders to bring +on board his two favourites, a cock and a paroquet. While the canoe was +gone on this errand, I had time to regard the savage chief attentively. +He was a man of immense size, with massive but beautifully moulded limbs +and figure, only parts of which, the broad chest and muscular arms, were +uncovered; for, although the lower orders generally wore no other +clothing than a strip of cloth called _maro_ round their loins, the +chief, on particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of +a species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese +paper-mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and moustache, and +his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it resembled a large +turban, in which was stuck a long wooden pin! I afterwards found that +this pin served for scratching the head, for which purpose the fingers +were too short without disarranging the hair. But Romata put himself to +much greater inconvenience on account of his hair, for we found that he +slept with his head resting on a wooden pillow, in which was cut a hollow +for the neck, so that the hair of the sleeper might not be disarranged. + +In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, who +certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having painted one +half of his face red and the other half yellow, besides ornamenting it +with various designs in black! Otherwise he was much the same in +appearance as Romata, though not so powerfully built. As this chief had +never seen a ship before, except, perchance, some of the petty traders +that at long intervals visit these remote islands, he was much taken up +with the neatness and beauty of all the fittings of the schooner. He was +particularly struck with a musket which was shown to him, and asked where +the white men got hatchets hard enough to cut the tree of which the +barrel was made! While he was thus engaged, his brother chief stood +aloof, talking with the captain, and fondling a superb cock and a little +blue-headed paroquet, the favourites of which I have before spoken. I +observed that all the other natives walked in a crouching posture while +in the presence of Romata. Before our guests left us, the captain +ordered the brass gun to be uncovered and fired for their gratification; +and I have every reason to believe he did so for the purpose of showing +our superior power, in case the natives should harbour any evil designs +against us. Romata had never seen this gun before, as it had not been +uncovered on previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed +it was very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he begged that +the captain would fire it. So a shot was put into it. The chiefs were +then directed to look at a rock about two miles out at sea, and the gun +was fired. In a second the top of the rock was seen to burst asunder, +and to fall in fragments into the sea. + +Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he pointed to +a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the captain to fire at +him, evidently supposing that his permission was quite sufficient to +justify the captain in such an act. He was therefore surprised, and not +a little annoyed, when the captain refused to fire at the native, and +ordered the gun to be housed. + +Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement to these +savages, that which pleased Romata's visitor most was the ship's pump. He +never tired of examining it, and pumping up the water. Indeed, so much +was he taken up with this pump, that he could not be prevailed on to +return on shore, but sent a canoe to fetch his favourite stool, on which +he seated himself, and spent the remainder of the day in pumping the +bilge-water out of the ship! + +Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the captain, with +one or two men, remained on board, in order to be ready, if need be, with +the brass gun, which was unhoused and conspicuously elevated, with its +capacious muzzle directed point blank at the chief's house. The men were +fully armed as usual; and the captain ordered me to go with them, to +assist in the work. I was much pleased with this order, for it freed me +from the captain's company, which I could not now endure, and it gave me +an opportunity of seeing the natives. + +As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant groves of +banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I observed that there +were many of the plum and banian trees, with which I had become familiar +on the Coral Island. I noticed also large quantities of taro-roots, +yams, and sweet potatoes, growing in enclosures. On turning into an open +glade of the woods, we came abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. +They were built chiefly of bamboos, and were thatched with the large +thick leaves of the pandanus; but many of them had little more than a +sloping roof and three sides with an open front, being the most simple +shelter from the weather that could well be imagined. Within these, and +around them, were groups of natives--men, women, and children--who all +stood up to gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party of men +whom the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile inland we +arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, while the men set to +work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to observe the country. + +About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one of whom +carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and potatoes on +several plantain leaves, which he presented to the men, who sat down +under the shade of a tree to dine. The chief sat down to dine also; but, +to my surprise, instead of feeding himself, one of his wives performed +that office for him! I was seated beside Bill, and asked him the reason +of this. + +"It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed himself," answered Bill; +"but I daresay he's not particular, except on great occasions. They've a +strange custom among them, Ralph, which is called _tabu_, and they carry +it to great lengths. If a man chooses a particular tree for his god, the +fruit o' that tree is tabued to him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be +killed by his people, and eaten, of course, for killing means eating +hereaway. Then, you see that great mop o' hair on the chief's head? +Well, he has a lot o' barbers to keep it in order; and it's a law that +whoever touches the head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his +hands are tabued; so, in that way, the barbers' hands are always tabued, +and they daren't use them for their lives, but have to be fed like big +babies, as they are, sure enough!" + +"That's odd, Bill. But look there," said I, pointing to a man whose skin +was of a much lighter colour than the generality of the natives. "I've +seen a few of these light-skinned fellows among the Fejeeans. They seem +to me to be of quite a different race." + +"So they are," answered Bill. "These fellows come from the Tongan +Islands, which lie a long way to the eastward. They come here to build +their big war-canoes; and as these take two, and sometimes four years, to +build, there's always some o' the brown-skins among the black sarpents o' +these islands." + +"By the way, Bill," said I, "your mentioning serpents, reminds me that I +have not seen a reptile of any kind since I came to this part of the +world." + +"No more there are any," said Bill, "if ye except the niggers themselves, +there's none on the islands, but a lizard or two and some sich harmless +things. But I never seed any myself. If there's none on the land, +however, there's more than enough in the water, and that minds me of a +wonderful brute they have here. But, come, I'll show it to you." So +saying, Bill arose, and, leaving the men still busy with the baked pig, +led me into the forest. After proceeding a short distance we came upon a +small pond of stagnant water. A native lad had followed us, to whom we +called and beckoned him to come to us. On Bill saying a few words to +him, which I did not understand, the boy advanced to the edge of the +pond, and gave a low peculiar whistle. Immediately the water became +agitated and an enormous eel thrust its head above the surface and +allowed the youth to touch it. It was about twelve feet long, and as +thick round the body as a man's thigh. + +"There," said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, "what do you think of +that for a god, Ralph? This is one o' their gods, and it has been fed +with dozens o' livin' babies already. How many more it'll get afore it +dies is hard to say." + +"Babies?" said I, with an incredulous look + +"Ay, babies," returned Bill. "Your soft-hearted folk at home would say, +'Oh, horrible! impossible!' to that, and then go away as comfortable and +unconcerned as if their sayin' 'horrible! impossible!' had made it a lie. +But I tell you, Ralph, it's a _fact_. I've seed it with my own eyes the +last time I was here, an' mayhap if you stop a while at this accursed +place, and keep a sharp look out, you'll see it too. They don't feed it +regularly with livin' babies, but they give it one now and then as a +treat. Bah! you brute!' cried Bill, in disgust, giving the reptile a +kick on the snout with his heavy boot, that sent it sweltering back in +agony into its loathsome pool. I thought it lucky for Bill, indeed for +all of us, that the native youth's back happened to be turned at the +time, for I am certain that if the poor savages had come to know that we +had so rudely handled their god, we should have had to fight our way back +to the ship. As we retraced our steps I questioned my companion further +on this subject. + +"How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a dreadful thing to be +done?" + +"Allow it? the mothers _do_ it! It seems to me that there's nothing too +fiendish or diabolical for these people to do. Why, in some of the +islands they have an institution called the _Areoi_, and the persons +connected with that body are ready for any wickedness that mortal man can +devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o' their customs is to +murder their infants the moment they are born. The mothers agree to it, +and the fathers do it. And the mildest ways they have of murdering them +is by sticking them through the body with sharp splinters of bamboo, +strangling them with their thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping +them to death while under the sod." + +I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these horrors. + +"But it's a curious fact," he continued, after a pause, during which we +walked in silence towards the spot where we had left our comrades,--"it's +a curious fact, that wherever the missionaries get a footin' all these +things come to an end at once, an' the savages take to doin' each other +good, and singin' psalms, just like Methodists." + +"God bless the missionaries!" said I, while a feeling of enthusiasm +filled my heart, so that I could speak with difficulty. "God bless and +prosper the missionaries till they get a footing in every island of the +sea!" + +"I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I could," said Bill, in a +deep, sad voice; "but it would be a mere mockery for a man to ask a +blessing for others who dare not ask one for himself. But, Ralph," he +continued, "I've not told you half o' the abominations I have seen durin' +my life in these seas. If we pull long together, lad, I'll tell you +more; and if times have not changed very much since I was here last, it's +like that you'll have a chance o' seeing a little for yourself before +long." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + +The Sandal-wood party--Native children's games, somewhat +surprising--Desperate amusements suddenly and fatally brought to a +close--An old friend recognised--News--Romata's mad conduct. + +Next day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I accompanied them +as before. During the dinner hour I wandered into the woods alone, being +disinclined for food that day. I had not rambled far when I found myself +unexpectedly on the sea-shore, having crossed a narrow neck of land which +separated the native village from a large bay. Here I found a party of +the islanders busy with one of their war-canoes, which was almost ready +for launching. I stood for a long time watching this party with great +interest, and observed that they fastened the timbers and planks to each +other very much in the same way in which I had seen Jack fasten those of +our little boat. But what surprised me most was its immense length, +which I measured very carefully, and found to be a hundred feet long; and +it was so capacious that it could have held three hundred men. It had +the unwieldy out-rigger and enormously high stern-posts which I had +remarked on the canoe that came to us while I was on the Coral Island. +Observing some boys playing at games a short way along the beach, I +resolved to go and watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were +engaged so busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe. + +Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I began to +think this must be the general play-ground of the village, I sat down on +a grassy bank under the shade of a plantain-tree, to watch them. And a +happier or more noisy crew I have never seen. There were at least two +hundred of them, both boys and girls, all of whom were clad in no other +garments than their own glossy little black skins, except the maro, or +strip of cloth round the loins of the boys, and a very short petticoat or +kilt on the girls. They did not all play at the same game, but amused +themselves in different groups. + +One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our blind-man's- +buff. Another set were walking on stilts, which raised the children +three feet from the ground. They were very expert at this amusement and +seldom tumbled. In another place I observed a group of girls standing +together, and apparently enjoying themselves very much; so I went up to +see what they were doing, and found that they were opening their eye-lids +with their fingers till their eyes appeared of an enormous size, and then +thrusting pieces of straw between the upper and lower lids, across the +eye-ball, to keep them in that position! This seemed to me, I must +confess, a very foolish as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the +children seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they made. +I pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that if little children +knew how silly they seem to grown-up people when they make faces, they +would not be so fond of doing it. In another place were a number of boys +engaged in flying kites, and I could not help wondering that some of the +games of those little savages should be so like to our own, although they +had never seen us at play. But the kites were different from ours in +many respects, being of every variety of shape. They were made of very +thin cloth, and the boys raised them to a wonderful height in the air by +means of twine made from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, +some of which showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor +savages, and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be sent out +to them. But the amusement which the greatest number of the children of +both sexes seemed to take chief delight in, was swimming and diving in +the sea; and the expertness which they exhibited was truly amazing. They +seemed to have two principal games in the water, one of which was to dive +off a sort of stage which had been erected near a deep part of the sea, +and chase each other in the water. Some of them went down to an +extraordinary depth; others skimmed along the surface, or rolled over and +over like porpoises, or diving under each other, came up unexpectedly and +pulled each other down by a leg or an arm. They never seemed to tire of +this sport, and, from the great heat of the water in the South Seas, they +could remain in it nearly all day without feeling chilled. Many of these +children were almost infants, scarce able to walk; yet they staggered +down the beach, flung their round fat little black bodies fearlessly into +deep water, and struck out to sea with as much confidence as ducklings. + +The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the surf. But as +this is an amusement in which all engage, from children of ten to gray- +headed men of sixty, and as I had an opportunity of witnessing it in +perfection the day following, I shall describe it more minutely. + +I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand swimming-match +was got up, for Romata came and told the captain that they were going to +engage in it, and begged him to "come and see." + +"What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?" I inquired of Bill, as we +walked together to a part of the shore on which several thousands of the +natives were assembled. + +"It's a very favourite lark with these 'xtr'or'nary critters," replied +Bill, giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably bulged out his +left cheek. "Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to the water as soon +a'most as they can walk, an' long before they can do that anything +respectably, so that they are as much at home in the sea as on the land. +Well, ye see, I 'spose they found swimmin' for miles out to sea, and +divin' fathoms deep, wasn't exciting enough, so they invented this game +o' the surf. Each man and boy, as you see, has got a short board or +plank, with which he swims out for a mile or more to sea, and then, +gettin' on the top o' yon thundering breaker, they come to shore on the +top of it, yellin' and screechin' like fiends. It's a marvel to me that +they're not dashed to shivers on the coral reef, for sure an' sartin am I +that if any o' us tried it, we wouldn't be worth the fluke of a broken +anchor after the wave fell. But there they go!" + +As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we were now +standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, plunged into the +surf, and were carried off by the seething foam of the retreating wave. + +At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined the shore, +so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff breeze had +rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the feet of the multitudes +who lined the beach. For some time the swimmers continued to strike out +to sea, breasting over the swell like hundreds of black seals. Then they +all turned, and, watching an approaching billow, mounted its white crest, +and, each laying his breast on the short flat board, came rolling towards +the shore, careering on the summit of the mighty wave, while they and the +onlookers shouted and yelled with excitement. Just as the monster wave +curled in solemn majesty to fling its bulky length upon the beach, most +of the swimmers slid back into the trough behind; others, slipping off +their boards, seized them in their hands, and, plunging through the +watery waste, swam out to repeat the amusement; but a few, who seemed to +me the most reckless, continued their career until they were launched +upon the beach, and enveloped in the churning foam and spray. One of +these last came in on the crest of the wave most manfully, and landed +with a violent bound almost on the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by +his peculiar head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained +as their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint with +which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to his feet, I +recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, my old friend of the +Coral Island! + +Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing quickly, took me +round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the effect of transferring a +good deal of the moist paint from his nose to mine. Then, recollecting +that this was not the white man's mode of salutation, he grasped me by +the hand and shook it violently. + +"Hallo, Ralph!" cried Bill, in surprise, "that chap seems to have taken a +sudden fancy to you, or he must be an old acquaintance." + +"Right, Bill," I replied, "he is indeed an old acquaintance;" and I +explained in a few words that he was the chief whose party Jack and +Peterkin and I had helped to save. + +Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an animated +conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the course of it to +me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him about the memorable +battle, and the part we had taken in it. When he paused, I begged of +Bill to ask him about the woman Avatea, for I had some hope that she +might have come with Tararo on this visit. "And ask him," said I, "who +she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different race from the +Feejeeans." On the mention of her name the chief frowned darkly, and +seemed to speak with much anger. + +"You're right, Ralph," said Bill, when the chief had ceased to talk; +"she's not a Feejee girl, but a Samoan. How she ever came to this place +the chief does not very clearly explain, but he says she was taken in +war, and that he got her three years ago, an' kept her as his daughter +ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else she'd have been roasted and +eaten like the rest." + +"But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?" said I. + +"Because the girl's somewhat obstinate, like most o' the sex, an' won't +marry the man he wants her to. It seems that a chief of some other +island came on a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but she +wouldn't have him on no account, bein' already in love, and engaged to a +young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a desperate shindy; so, +as he was going on a war expedition in his canoe, he left her to think +about it, sayin' he'd be back in six months or so, when he hoped she +wouldn't be so obstropolous. This happened just a week ago; an' Tararo +says that if she's not ready to go, when the chief returns, as his bride, +she'll be sent to him as a _long pig_." + +"As a long pig!" I exclaimed in surprise; "why what does he mean by +that?" + +"He means somethin' very unpleasant," answered Bill with a frown. "You +see these blackguards eat men an' women just as readily as they eat pigs; +and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each other in appearance, +they call men _long_ pigs. If Avatea goes to this fellow as a long pig, +it's all up with her, poor thing." + +"Is she on the island now?" I asked eagerly. + +"No, she's at Tararo's island." + +"And where does it lie?" + +"About fifty or sixty miles to the south'ard o' this," returned Bill; +"but I--" + +At this moment we were startled by the cry of "Mao! mao!--a shark! a +shark!" which was immediately followed by a shriek that rang clear and +fearfully loud above the tumult of cries that arose from the savages in +the water and on the land. We turned hastily towards the direction +whence the cry came, and had just time to observe the glaring eye-balls +of one of the swimmers as he tossed his arms in the air. Next instant he +was pulled under the waves. A canoe was instantly launched, and the hand +of the drowning man was caught, but only half of his body was dragged +from the maw of the monster, which followed the canoe until the water +became so shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next +billow was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore. + +In most countries of the world this would have made a deep impression on +the spectators, but the only effect it had upon these islanders was to +make them hurry with all speed out of the sea, lest a similar fate should +befall some of the others; but, so utterly reckless were they of human +life, that it did not for a moment suspend the progress of their +amusements. It is true the surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat +abruptly, but they immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me +that sharks do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being frightened away +by the immense numbers of men and boys in the water, and by the shouting +and splashing that they make. "But," said he, "such a thing as you have +seen just now don't frighten them much. They'll be at it again to-morrow +or next day, just as if there wasn't a single shark between Feejee and +Nova Zembla." + +After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing matches; and +being men of immense size and muscle, they did a good deal of injury to +each other, especially in boxing, in which not only the lower orders, but +several of the chiefs and priests engaged. Each bout was very quickly +terminated, for they did not pretend to a scientific knowledge of the +art, and wasted no time in sparring, but hit straight out at each other's +heads, and their blows were delivered with great force. Frequently one +of the combatants was knocked down with a single blow; and one gigantic +fellow hit his adversary so severely that he drove the skin entirely off +his forehead. This feat was hailed with immense applause by the +spectators. + +During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, though I confess +I could not refrain from beholding them, I was struck with the beauty of +many of the figures and designs that were tattooed on the persons of the +chiefs and principal men. One figure, that seemed to me very elegant, +was that of a palm-tree tattooed on the back of a man's leg, the roots +rising, as it were, from under his heel, the stem ascending the tendon of +the ankle, and the graceful head branching out upon the calf. I +afterwards learned that this process of tattooing is very painful, and +takes long to do, commencing at the age of ten, and being continued at +intervals up to the age of thirty. It is done by means of an instrument +made of bone, with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the kernel of +the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, and the mark thus +made is indelible. The operation is performed by a class of men whose +profession it is, and they tattoo as much at a time, as the person on +whom they are operating can bear; which is not much, the pain and +inflammation caused by tattooing being very great, sometimes causing +death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed with an ornamental stripe down +the legs, which gave them the appearance of being clad in tights. Others +had marks round the ankles and insteps, which looked like tight-fitting +and elegant boots. Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts +were very profusely marked with every imaginable species of +device,--muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, intermingled with +lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary figures. + +The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a few marks +on their feet and arms. But I must say, however objectionable this +strange practice may be, it nevertheless had this good effect, that it +took away very much from their appearance of nakedness. + +Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our schooner, we +observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood of his house, +apparently mad with passion. + +"Ah!" said Bill to me, "there he's at his old tricks again. That's his +way when he gets drink. The natives make a sort of drink o' their own, +and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy he's like a wild +tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a bottle, as usual, to keep +him in good humour. After drinkin' he usually goes to sleep, and the +people know it well and keep out of his way, for fear they should waken +him. Even the babies are taken out of ear-shot; for, when he's waked up, +he rushes out just as you see him now, and spears or clubs the first +person he meets." + +It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon had been in +his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about without one. Suddenly +he caught sight of an unfortunate man who was trying to conceal himself +behind a tree. Rushing towards him, Romata struck him a terrible blow on +the head, which knocked out the poor man's eye and also dislocated the +chief's finger. The wretched creature offered no resistance; he did not +even attempt to parry the blow. Indeed, from what Bill said, I found +that he might consider himself lucky in having escaped with his life, +which would certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of +a club at the time. + +"Have these wretched creatures no law among themselves," said I, "which +can restrain such wickedness?" + +"None," replied Bill. "The chief's word is law. He might kill and eat a +dozen of his own subjects any day for nothing more than his own pleasure, +and nobody would take the least notice of it." + +This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we wended our +way to the beach, but I could not observe any other expression on the +faces of the men than that of total indifference or contempt. It seemed +to me a very awful thing that it should be possible for men to come to +such hardness of heart and callousness to the sight of bloodshed and +violence; but, indeed, I began to find that such constant exposure to +scenes of blood was having a slight effect upon myself, and I shuddered +when I came to think that I, too, was becoming callous. + +I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up and down +the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the conclusion that if +I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such bloody deeds as I had witnessed +within the last few weeks, could so soon come to be less sensitive about +them, how little wonder that these poor ignorant savages, who were born +and bred in familiarity therewith, should think nothing of them at all, +and should hold human life in so very slight esteem. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + +Mischief brewing--My blood is made to run cold--Evil consultations and +wicked resolves--Bloody Bill attempts to do good and fails--The +attack--Wholesale murder--The flight--The escape. + +Next morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of deep +depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy fate, the +more wretched and miserable did I feel. + +I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most dreadful +character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere pastime. On shore were +the natives, whose practices were so horrible that I could not think of +them without shuddering. On board were none but pirates of the blackest +dye, who, although not cannibals, were foul murderers, and more +blameworthy even than the savages, inasmuch as they knew better. Even +Bill, with whom I had, under the strange circumstances of my lot, formed +a kind of intimacy, was so fierce in his nature as to have acquired the +title of "Bloody" from his vile companions. I felt very much cast down +the more I considered the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as +it seemed to me, at least for a long time to come. At last, in my +feeling of utter helplessness, I prayed fervently to the Almighty that he +would deliver me out of my miserable condition; and when I had done so I +felt some degree of comfort. + +When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the men usually +started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me to remain aboard that +day, as I did not feel well; but he looked at me angrily, and ordered me, +in a surly tone, to get ready to go on shore as usual. The fact was that +the captain had been out of humour for some time past. Romata and he had +had some differences, and high words had passed between them, during +which the chief had threatened to send a fleet of his war-canoes, with a +thousand men, to break up and burn the schooner; whereupon the captain +smiled sarcastically, and going up to the chief gazed sternly in his +face, while he said, "I have only to raise my little finger just now, and +my big gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five minutes!" +Although the chief was a bold man, he quailed before the pirate's glance +and threat, and made no reply; but a bad feeling had been raised and old +sores had been opened. + +I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. Before starting, +however, the captain called me into the cabin, and said,-- + +"Here, Ralph, I've got a mission for you, lad. That blackguard Romata is +in the dumps, and nothing will mollify him but a gift; so do you go up to +his house and give him these whales' teeth, with my compliments. Take +with you one of the men who can speak the language." + +I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six white +whales' teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, which seemed to me +very paltry things. However, I did not dare to hesitate or ask any +questions; so, gathering them up, I left the cabin and was soon on my way +to the chief's house, accompanied by Bill. On expressing my surprise at +the gift, he said,-- + +"They're paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but they're considered of +great value by them chaps. They're a sort o' cash among them. The red +ones are the most prized, one of them bein' equal to twenty o' the white +ones. I suppose the only reason for their bein' valuable is that there +ain't many of them, and they're hard to be got." + +On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in the midst +of a number of large bales of native cloth and other articles, which had +been brought to him as presents from time to time by inferior chiefs. He +received us rather haughtily, but on Bill explaining the nature of our +errand he became very condescending, and his eyes glistened with +satisfaction when he received the whales' teeth, although he laid them +aside with an assumption of kingly indifference. + +"Go," said he, with a wave of the hand,--"go, tell your captain that he +may cut wood to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come ashore,--I want to +have a palaver with him." + +As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his head: + +"There's mischief brewin' in that black rascal's head. I know him of +old. But what comes here?" + +As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in the wood, and +presently there issued from it a band of savages, in the midst of whom +were a number of men bearing burdens on their shoulders. At first I +thought that these burdens were poles with something rolled round them, +the end of each pole resting on a man's shoulder. But on a nearer +approach I saw that they were human beings, tied hand and foot, and so +lashed to the poles that they could not move. I counted twenty of them +as they passed. + +"More murder!" said Bill, in a voice that sounded between a hoarse laugh +and a groan. + +"Surely they are not going to murder them?" said I, looking anxiously +into Bill's face. + +"I don't know, Ralph," replied Bill, "what they're goin' to do with them; +but I fear they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that way." + +As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed that Bill +looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction where the procession +had disappeared. At last he stopped, and turning abruptly on his heel, +said,-- + +"I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom o' that affair. Let +us follow these black scoundrels and see what they're goin' to do." + +I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody practices; but +Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and went. We passed rapidly through +the bush, being guided in the right direction by the shouts of the +savages. Suddenly there was a dead silence, which continued for some +time, while Bill and I involuntarily quickened our pace until we were +running at the top of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously +mentioned. As we reached the verge of the wood, we discovered the +savages surrounding the large war-canoe, which they were apparently on +the point of launching. Suddenly the multitude put their united strength +to the canoe; but scarcely had the huge machine begun to move, when a +yell, the most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, rose high above the +shouting of the savages. It had not died away when another and another +smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I saw that these inhuman monsters +were actually launching their canoe over the living bodies of their +victims. But there was no pity in the breasts of these men. Forward +they went in ruthless indifference, shouting as they went, while high +above their voices rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, +as, one after another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst the +eyeballs from their sockets, and sent the life's blood gushing from their +mouths. Oh, reader, this is no fiction. I would not, for the sake of +thrilling you with horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was witnessed. +It is true; true as that accursed sin which has rendered the human heart +capable of such diabolical enormities! + +When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a deep +groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as if I had been +a child, cried,-- + +"Come along, lad; let's away!"--and so, staggering and stumbling over the +tangled underwood, we fled from the fatal spot. + +During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a horrible dream. +I scarce knew what was said to me, and was more than once blamed by the +men for idling my time. At last the hour to return aboard came. We +marched down to the beach, and I felt relief for the first time when my +feet rested on the schooner's deck. + +In the course of the evening I overheard part of a conversation between +the captain and the first mate, which startled me not a little. They +were down in the cabin, and conversed in an under-tone, but the sky-light +being off, I overheard every word that was said. + +"I don't half like it," said the mate. "It seems to me that we'll only +have hard fightin' and no pay." + +"No pay!" repeated the captain, in a voice of suppressed anger. "Do you +call a good cargo all for nothing no pay?" + +"Very true," returned the mate; "but we've got the cargo aboard. Why not +cut your cable and take French leave o' them? What's the use o' tryin' +to lick the blackguards when it'll do us no manner o' good?" + +"Mate," said the captain, in a low voice, "you talk like a fresh-water +sailor. I can only attribute this shyness to some strange delusion; for +surely" (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone as he said this) +"surely I am not to suppose that _you_ have become soft-hearted! Besides, +you are wrong in regard to the cargo being aboard; there's a good quarter +of it lying in the woods, and that blackguard chief knows it and won't +let me take it off. He defied us to do our worst, yesterday." + +"Defied us! did he?" cried the mate, with a bitter laugh. "Poor +contemptible thing!" + +"And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are afraid to attack +him." + +"Who said I was afraid?" growled the mate, sulkily. "I'm as ready as any +man in the ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend to do?" + +"I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up to the head of the +creek there, from which point we can command the pile of sandal-wood with +our gun. Then I shall land with all the men except two, who shall take +care of the schooner and be ready with the boat to take us off. We can +creep through the woods to the head of the village, where these cannibals +are always dancing round their suppers of human flesh, and if the +carbines of the men are loaded with a heavy charge of buck-shot, we can +drop forty or fifty at the first volley. After that the thing will be +easy enough. The savages will take to the mountains in a body, and we +shall take what we require, up anchor, and away." + +To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the cabin I heard the +captain say,-- + +"Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don't forget the buck-shot." + +The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this murderous +conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, who seemed much +perplexed about it. At length he said,-- + +"I'll tell you what I'll do, Ralph: I'll swim ashore after dark and fix a +musket to a tree not far from the place where we'll have to land, and +I'll tie a long string to the trigger, so that when our fellows cross it +they'll let it off, and so alarm the village in time to prevent an +attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin' back to the boat; so, +master captain," added Bill with a smile that for the first time seemed +to me to be mingled with good-natured cheerfulness, "you'll be baulked at +least for once in your life by Bloody Bill." + +After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. He slipped over +the side with a musket in his left hand, while with his right he swam +ashore and entered the woods. He soon returned, having accomplished his +purpose, and got on board without being seen,--I being the only one on +deck. + +When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on deck, the +cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. These sweeps were +immensely large oars, each requiring a couple of men to work it. In a +few minutes we entered the mouth of the creek, which was indeed the mouth +of a small river, and took about half an hour to ascend it, although the +spot where we intended to land was not more than six hundred yards from +the mouth, because there was a slight current against us, and the +mangroves which narrowed the creek, impeded the rowers in some places. +Having reached the spot, which was so darkened by overhanging trees that +we could see with difficulty, a small kedge anchor attached to a thin +line was let softly down over the stern. + +"Now, lads," whispered the captain, as he walked along the line of men, +who were all armed to the teeth, "don't be in a hurry, aim low, and don't +waste your first shots." + +He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in silence. There +was no room to row, but oars were not needed, as a slight push against +the side of the schooner sent the boat gliding to the shore. + +"There's no need of leaving two in the boat," whispered the mate, as the +men stepped out; "we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph stay." + +The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness with the boat- +hook, to shove ashore at a moment's notice if they should return, or to +shove off if any of the savages should happen to approach. He then threw +his carbine into the hollow of his arm and glided through the bushes +followed by his men. With a throbbing head I awaited the result of our +plan. I knew the exact locality where the musket was placed, for Bill +had described it to me, and I kept my straining eyes fixed upon the spot. +But no sound came, and I began to fear that either they had gone in +another direction or that Bill had not fixed the string properly. +Suddenly I heard a faint click, and observed one or two bright sparks +among the bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at +once that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming had not +caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly failed. A feeling of dread now +began to creep over me as I stood in the boat, in that dark, silent spot, +awaiting the issue of this murderous expedition. I shuddered as I +glanced at the water that glided past like a dark reptile. I looked back +at the schooner, but her hull was just barely visible, while her tapering +masts were lost among the trees which overshadowed her. Her lower sails +were set, but so thick was the gloom that they were quite invisible. + +Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices raised a yell in +the village; again the cry rose on the night air, and was followed by +broken shouts as of scattered parties of men bounding into the woods. +Then I heard another shout loud and close at hand. It was the voice of +the captain cursing the man who had fired the premature shot. Then came +the order, "Forward," followed by the wild hurrah of our men, as they +charged the savages. Shots now rang in quick succession, and at last a +loud volley startled the echoes of the woods. It was followed by a +multitude of wild shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another +"hurrah" from the men; the distance of the sound proving that they were +driving their enemies before them towards the sea. + +While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now mingled in +confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the leaves not far from me. +At first I thought it was a party of savages who had observed the +schooner, but I was speedily undeceived by observing a body of +natives--apparently several hundreds, as far as I could guess in the +uncertain light--bounding through the woods towards the scene of battle. +I saw at once that this was a party who had out-flanked our men, and +would speedily attack them in the rear. And so it turned out, for, in a +short time, the shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I +heard a death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear. + +At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of exultation +that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that our men had been +conquered. I was immediately thrown into dreadful consternation. What +was I now to do? To be taken by the savages was too horrible to be +thought of; to flee to the mountains was hopeless, as I should soon be +discovered; and to take the schooner out of the creek without assistance +was impossible. I resolved, however, to make the attempt, as being my +only hope, and was on the point of pushing off when my hand was stayed +and my blood chilled by an appalling shriek in which I recognised the +voice of one of the crew. It was succeeded by a shout from the savages. +Then came another, and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, +as I felt convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold blood. +With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on fire, I seized the +boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang from the bushes. + +"Stop! Ralph, stop!--there now, push off," he cried, and bounded into the +boat so violently as nearly to upset her. It was Bill's voice! In +another moment we were on board,--the boat made fast, the line of the +anchor cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first stroke of Bill's giant +arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, for in his haste he forgot +that I could scarcely move the unwieldy oar. Springing to the stern he +lashed the rudder in such a position as that, while it aided me, it acted +against him, and so rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The +schooner now began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we reached +its mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told that we were +discovered. Instantly a number of the savages plunged into the water and +swam towards us; but we were making so much way that they could not +overtake us. One, however, an immensely powerful man, succeeded in +laying hold of the cut rope that hung from the stern, and clambered +quickly upon deck. Bill caught sight of him the instant his head +appeared above the taffrail. But he did not cease to row, and did not +appear even to notice the savage until he was within a yard of him; then, +dropping the sweep, he struck him a blow on the forehead with his +clenched fist that felled him to the deck. Lifting him up he hurled him +overboard and resumed the oar. But now a greater danger awaited us, for +the savages had outrun us on the bank and were about to plunge into the +water ahead of the schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was +sealed. For one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, drawing a pistol +from his belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held the pan of his pistol +over the touch-hole and fired. The shot was succeeded by the hiss of the +cannon's priming, then the blaze and the crashing thunder of the +monstrous gun burst upon the savages with such deafening roar that it +seemed as if their very mountains had been rent asunder. + +This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation caused by the +unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a gentle breeze, which +the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us from feeling, bulged out our +sails; the schooner bent before it, and the shouts of the disappointed +savages grew fainter and fainter in the distance as we were slowly wafted +out to sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + +Reflections--The wounded man--The squall--True consolation--Death. + +There is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their bodies and +in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to be wonderfully +adapted and exactly proportioned to the circumstances in which +individuals may happen to be placed,--a power which, in most cases, is +sufficient to carry a man through and over every obstacle that may happen +to be thrown in his path through life, no matter how high or how steep +the mountain may be, but which often forsakes him the moment the summit +is gained, the point of difficulty passed; and leaves him prostrated, +with energies gone, nerves unstrung, and a feeling of incapacity +pervading the entire frame that renders the most trifling effort almost +impossible. + +During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to severe mental +and much physical excitement, which had almost crushed me down by the +time I was relieved from duty in the course of the evening. But when the +expedition, whose failure has just been narrated, was planned, my +anxieties and energies had been so powerfully aroused that I went through +the protracted scenes of that terrible night without a feeling of the +slightest fatigue. My mind and body were alike active and full of +energy. No sooner was the last thrilling fear of danger past, however, +than my faculties were utterly relaxed; and, when I felt the cool breezes +of the Pacific playing around my fevered brow, and heard the free waves +rippling at the schooner's prow, as we left the hated island behind us, +my senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck. + +From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by the arm, +saying,-- + +"Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we're safe now. Poor thing, I believe +he's fainted." And raising me in his arms he laid me on the folds of the +gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the tiller. "Here, take a +drop o' this, it'll do you good, my boy," he added, in a voice of +tenderness which I had never heard him use before, while he held a brandy- +flask to my lips. + +I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next moment my +head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast asleep. I slept long, for +when I awoke the sun was a good way above the horizon. I did not move on +first opening my eyes, as I felt a delightful sensation of rest pervading +me, and my eyes were riveted on and charmed with the gorgeous splendour +of the mighty ocean, that burst upon my sight. It was a dead calm; the +sea seemed a sheet of undulating crystal, tipped and streaked with the +saffron hues of sunrise, which had not yet merged into the glowing heat +of noon; and there was a deep calm in the blue dome above, that was not +broken even by the usual flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would have +lain in contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but my mind was +recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the present by the sight +of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet with his head reclining, +as if in sleep, on his right arm, which rested on the tiller. As he +seemed to rest peacefully I did not mean to disturb him, but the slight +noise I made in raising myself on my elbow caused him to start and look +round. + +"Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long and soundly," he +said, turning towards me. + +On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He was deadly pale, +and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks over his face, was clotted +with blood. Blood also stained his hollow cheeks and covered the front +of his shirt, which, with the greater part of dress, was torn and soiled +with mud. + +"Oh, Bill!" said I, with deep anxiety, "what is the matter with you? You +are ill. You must have been wounded." + +"Even so, lad," said Bill in a deep soft voice, while he extended his +huge frame on the couch from which I had just risen. "I've got an ugly +wound, I fear, and I've been waiting for you to waken, to ask you to get +me a drop o' brandy and a mouthful o' bread from the cabin lockers. You +seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that I didn't like to disturb you. But +I don't feel up to much just now." + +I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below immediately, and +returned in a few seconds with a bottle of brandy and some broken +biscuit. He seemed much refreshed after eating a few morsels and +drinking a long draught of water mingled with a little of the spirits. +Immediately afterwards he fell asleep, and I watched him anxiously until +he awoke, being desirous of knowing the nature and extent of his wound. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a slumber of an hour, "I'm +the better of that nap, Ralph; I feel twice the man I was;" and he +attempted to rise, but sank back again immediately with a deep groan. + +"Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look at your wound. +I'll make a comfortable bed for you here on deck, and get you some +breakfast. After that you shall tell me how you got it. Cheer up, +Bill," I added, seeing that he turned his head away; "you'll be all right +in a little, and I'll be a capital nurse to you though I'm no doctor." + +I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. While it was +kindling, I went to the steward's pantry and procured the materials for a +good breakfast, with which, in little more than half an hour, I returned +to my companion. He seemed much better, and smiled kindly on me as I set +before him a cup of coffee and a tray with several eggs and some bread on +it. + +"Now then, Bill," said I, cheerfully, sitting down beside him on the +deck, "let's fall to. I'm very hungry myself, I can tell you; but--I +forgot--your wound," I added, rising; "let me look at it." + +I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the chest. It did +not bleed much, and, as it was on the right side, I was in hopes that it +might not be very serious. But Bill shook his head. "However," said he, +"sit down, Ralph, and I'll tell you all about it." + +"You see, after we left the boat an' began to push through the bushes, we +went straight for the line of my musket, as I had expected; but by some +unlucky chance it didn't explode, for I saw the line torn away by the +men's legs, and heard the click o' the lock; so I fancy the priming had +got damp and didn't catch. I was in a great quandary now what to do, for +I couldn't concoct in my mind, in the hurry, any good reason for firin' +off my piece. But they say necessity's the mother of invention; so, just +as I was givin' it up and clinchin' my teeth to bide the worst o't, and +take what should come, a sudden thought came into my head. I stepped out +before the rest, seemin' to be awful anxious to be at the savages, +tripped my foot on a fallen tree, plunged head foremost into a bush, an', +ov coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a screechin' from the +camp as I never heard in all my life. I rose at once, and was rushin' on +with the rest when the captain called a halt. + +{The dying pirate: p334.jpg} + +"'You did that a-purpose, you villain!' he said, with a tremendous oath, +and, drawin' a pistol from his belt, let fly right into my breast. I +fell at once, and remembered no more till I was startled and brought +round by the most awful yell I ever heard in my life, except, maybe, the +shrieks o' them poor critters that were crushed to death under yon big +canoe. Jumpin' up, I looked round, and, through the trees, saw a fire +gleamin' not far off, the light o' which showed me the captain and men +tied hand and foot, each to a post, and the savages dancin' round them +like demons. I had scarce looked for a second, when I saw one o' them go +up to the captain flourishing a knife, and, before I could wink, he +plunged it into his breast, while another yell, like the one that roused +me, rang upon my ear. I didn't wait for more, but, bounding up, went +crashing through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows caught +sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin' into the +boat, as you know." + +Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and shuddered +frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from continuing the +subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his mind to other things. + +"But now, Bill," said I, "it behoves us to think about the future, and +what course of action we shall pursue. Here we are, on the wide Pacific, +in a well-appointed schooner, which is our own,--at least no one has a +better claim to it than we have,--and the world lies before us. Moreover, +here comes a breeze, so we must make up our minds which way to steer." + +"Ralph, boy," said my companion, "it matters not to me which way we go. I +fear that my time is short now. Go where you will. I'm content." + +"Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the Coral Island, and +see what has become of my dear old comrades, Jack and Peterkin. I +believe the island has no name, but the captain once pointed it out to me +on the chart, and I marked it afterwards; so, as we know pretty well our +position just now, I think I can steer to it. Then, as to working the +vessel, it is true I cannot hoist the sails single-handed, but luckily we +have enough of sail set already, and if it should come on to blow a +squall, I could at least drop the peaks of the main and fore sails, and +clew them up partially without help, and throw her head close into the +wind, so as to keep her all shaking till the violence of the squall is +past. And if we have continued light breezes, I'll rig up a complication +of blocks and fix them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able +to hoist the sails without help. 'Tis true I'll require half a day to +hoist them, but we don't need to mind that. Then I'll make a sort of +erection on deck to screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you can only +manage to sit beside the tiller and steer for two hours every day, so as +to let me get a nap, I'll engage to let you off duty all the rest of the +twenty-four hours. And if you don't feel able for steering, I'll lash +the helm and heave to, while I get you your breakfasts and dinners; and +so we'll manage famously, and soon reach the Coral Island." + +Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain. + +"And what will you do," said he, "if it comes on to blow a storm?" + +This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do in such a +case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and said, "Bill, when a man +has done all that he _can_ do, he ought to leave the rest to God." + +"Oh, Ralph," said my companion, in a faint voice, looking anxiously into +my face, "I wish that I had the feelin's about God that you seem to have, +at this hour. I'm dyin', Ralph; yet I, who have braved death a hundred +times, am afraid to die. I'm afraid to enter the next world. Something +within tells me there will be a reckoning when I go there. But it's all +over with me, Ralph. I feel that there's no chance o' my bein' saved." + +"Don't say that, Bill," said I, in deep compassion, "don't say that. I'm +quite sure there's hope even for you, but I can't remember the words of +the Bible that make me think so. Is there not a Bible on board, Bill?" + +"No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor boy that was taken +aboard against his will. He died, poor lad, I think, through ill +treatment and fear. After he was gone the captain found his Bible and +flung it overboard." + +I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the way in +which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me that I was +actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than this blood-stained +pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he never read the Bible, and was +never brought up to care for it; whereas I was carefully taught to read +it by my own mother, and had read it daily as long as I possessed one, +yet to so little purpose that I could not now call to mind a single text +that would meet this poor man's case, and afford him the consolation he +so much required. I was much distressed, and taxed my memory for a long +time. At last a text did flash into my mind, and I wondered much that I +had not thought of it before. + +"Bill," said I, in a low voice, "'Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ and +thou shalt be saved.'" + +"Ay, Ralph, I've heard the missionaries say that before now, but what +good can it do me? It's not for me that. It's not for the likes o' me." + +I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that that word was +for him as well as for me, I could not remember any other word whereby I +could prove it. + +After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, "Ralph, I've +led a terrible life. I've been a sailor since I was a boy, and I've gone +from bad to worse ever since I left my father's roof. I've been a pirate +three years now. It is true I did not choose the trade, but I was +inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here by force till I became +reckless and at last joined them. Since that time my hand has been +steeped in human blood again and again. Your young heart would grow cold +if I--; but why should I go on? 'Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is +fixed." + +"Bill," said I, "'Though your sins be red like crimson, they shall be +white as snow.' 'Only believe.'" + +"Only believe!" cried Bill, starting up on his elbow; "I've heard men +talk o' believing as if it was easy. Ha! 'tis easy enough for a man to +point to a rope and say, 'I believe that would bear my weight;' but 'tis +another thing for a man to catch hold o' that rope, and swing himself by +it over the edge of a precipice!" + +The energy with which he said this, and the action with which it was +accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back with a deep groan. As +if the very elements sympathized with this man's sufferings, a low moan +came sweeping over the sea. + +"Hist! Ralph," said Bill, opening his eves; "there's a squall coming, +lad. Look alive, boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the main-sail peak. +Them squalls come quick sometimes." + +I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall was indeed +bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my notice, owing to my being +so much engrossed by our conversation. I instantly did as Bill desired, +for the schooner was still lying motionless on the glassy sea. I +observed with some satisfaction that the squall was bearing down on the +larboard bow, so that it would strike the vessel in the position in which +she would be best able to stand the shock. Having done my best to +shorten sail, I returned aft, and took my stand at the helm. + +"Now, boy," said Bill, in a faint voice, "keep her close to the wind." + +A few seconds afterwards he said, "Ralph, let me hear those two texts +again." + +I repeated them. + +"Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?" + +"Quite sure," I replied. + +Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon us, and the +spray dashed over our decks. For a time the schooner stood it bravely, +and sprang forward against the rising sea like a war-horse. Meanwhile +clouds darkened the sky, and the sea began to rise in huge billows. There +was still too much sail on the schooner, and, as the gale increased, I +feared that the masts would be torn out of her or carried away, while the +wind whistled and shrieked through the strained rigging. Suddenly the +wind shifted a point, a heavy sea struck us on the bow, and the schooner +was almost laid on her beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my legs. +At the same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin which had +served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence against the sky- +light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I could see that the shock +had rendered him insensible, but I did not dare to quit the tiller for an +instant, as it required all my faculties, bodily and mental, to manage +the schooner. For an hour the blast drove us along, while, owing to the +sharpness of the vessel's bow and the press of canvass, she dashed +through the waves instead of breasting over them, thereby drenching the +decks with water fore and aft. At the end of that time the squall passed +away, and left us rocking on the bosom of the agitated sea. + +My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise Bill from +the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran below for the brandy +bottle and rubbed his face and hands with it, and endeavoured to pour a +little down his throat. But my efforts, although I continued them long +and assiduously, were of no avail; as I let go the hand which I had been +chafing it fell heavily on the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, and +sat for some time quite motionless, but there was no flutter there--the +pirate was dead! + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + +Alone on the deep--Necessity the mother of invention--A valuable book +discovered--Natural phenomenon--A bright day in my history. + +It was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I now seated +myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid features of my +late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past history and +contemplated with anxiety my present position. Alone! in the midst of +the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect knowledge of navigation, and in +a schooner requiring at least eight men as her proper crew. But I will +not tax the reader's patience with a minute detail of my feelings and +doings during the first few days that followed the death of my companion. +I will merely mention that I tied a cannon ball to his feet and, with +feelings of the deepest sorrow, consigned him to the deep. + +For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the east, and, as +my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid progress towards my +destination. I could not take an observation, which I very much +regretted, as the captain's quadrant was in the cabin; but, from the day +of setting sail from the island of the savages, I had kept a dead +reckoning, and as I knew pretty well now how much lee-way the schooner +made, I hoped to hit the Coral Island without much difficulty. In this I +was the more confident that I knew its position on the chart (which I +understood was a very good one), and so had its correct bearings by +compass. + +As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had got into +the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting the top-sails. +This was a most arduous task, and my first attempts were complete +failures, owing, in a great degree, to my reprehensible ignorance of +mechanical forces. The first error I made was in applying my apparatus +of blocks and pulleys to a rope which was too weak, so that the very +first heave I made broke it in two, and sent me staggering against the +after-hatch, over which I tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, +tumbled down the companion ladder into the cabin. I was much bruised and +somewhat stunned by this untoward accident. However, I considered it +fortunate that I was not killed. In my next attempt I made sure of not +coming by a similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and fitted up +larger blocks and ropes. But although the principle on which I acted was +quite correct, the machinery was now so massive and heavy that the mere +friction and stiffness of the thick cordage prevented me from moving it +at all. Afterwards, however, I came to proportion things more correctly; +but I could not avoid reflecting at the time how much better it would +have been had I learned all this from observation and study, instead of +waiting till I was forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious +lessons of experience. + +After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it took me the +greater part of a day to hoist the main-top sail. As I could not steer +and work at this at the same time, I lashed the helm in such a position +that, with a little watching now and then, it kept the schooner in her +proper course. By this means I was enabled also to go about the deck and +down below for things that I wanted, as occasion required; also to cook +and eat my victuals. But I did not dare to trust to this plan during the +three hours of rest that I allowed myself at night, as the wind might +have shifted, in which case I should have been blown far out of my course +ere I awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to during those +three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails in such a position +as that by acting against each other, they would keep the ship +stationary. After my night's rest, therefore, I had only to make +allowance for the lee-way she had made, and so resume my course. + +Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall should come, +but I made the best provision I could in the circumstances, and concluded +that by letting go the weather-braces of the top-sails and the top-sail +halyards at the same time, I should thereby render these sails almost +powerless. Besides this, I proposed to myself to keep a sharp look-out +on the barometer in the cabin, and if I observed at any time a sudden +fall in it, I resolved that I would instantly set about my multiform +appliances for reducing sail, so as to avoid being taken at unawares. +Thus I sailed prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I +calculated I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the thought of +which my heart bounded with joyful expectation. + +The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a volume of +Captain Cook's voyages. This, I suppose, the pirate captain had brought +with him in order to guide him, and to furnish him with information +regarding the islands of these seas. I found this a most delightful book +indeed, and I not only obtained much interesting knowledge about the sea +in which I was sailing, but I had many of my own opinions, derived from +experience, corroborated; and not a few of them corrected. Besides the +reading of this charming book, and the daily routine of occupations, +nothing of particular note happened to me during this voyage, except +once, when on rising one night, after my three hours' nap, while it was +yet dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating in +what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often noticed the +beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but this far exceeded +anything of the sort I ever saw before. The whole sea appeared somewhat +like milk and was remarkably luminous. + +I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, brought some of +the water on board and took it down to the cabin to examine it; but no +sooner did I approach the light than the strange appearance disappeared, +and when I removed the cabin lamp the luminous light appeared again. I +was much puzzled with this, and took up a little of the water in the +hollow of my hand and then let it run off, when I found that the luminous +substance was left behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but +when I got there it was gone. I found, however, that when I went into +the dark my hand shone again; so I took the large glass of the ship's +telescope and examined my hand minutely, when I found that there were on +it one or two small patches of a clear, transparent substance like jelly, +which were so thin as to be almost invisible to the naked eye. Thus I +came to know that the beautiful phosphoric light, which I had so often +admired before, was caused by animals, for I had no doubt that these were +of the same kind as the medusae or jelly-fish which are seen in all parts +of the world. + +On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a nap into +which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I gazed around me. I +was surprised and delighted to see a large albatross soaring majestically +over the ship. I immediately took it into my head that this was the +albatross I had seen at Penguin Island. I had, of course, no good reason +for supposing this, but the idea occurred to me, I know not why, and I +cherished it, and regarded the bird with as much affection as if he had +been an old friend. He kept me company all that day and left me as night +fell. + +Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the helm, for I +had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for day-light, and peered +towards the horizon, where I thought I observed something like a black +cloud against the dark sky. Being always on the alert for squalls, I ran +to the bow. There could be no doubt it was a squall, and as I listened I +thought I heard the murmur of the coming gale. Instantly I began to work +might and main at my cumbrous tackle for shortening sail, and in the +course of an hour and a half had the most of it reduced,--the top-sail +yards down on the caps, the top-sails clewed up, the sheets hauled in, +the main and fore peaks lowered, and the flying-jib down. While thus +engaged the dawn advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance ahead +in the midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared for the +worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the bow. I now +heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a single ray of the rising +sun gleamed over the ocean I saw--what! could it be that I was +dreaming?--that magnificent breaker with its ceaseless roar!--that +mountain top!--yes, once more I beheld the Coral Island! + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + +The effect of a cannon-shot--A happy reunion of a somewhat moist +nature--Retrospects and explanations--An awful dive--New plans--The last +of the Coral Island. + +I almost fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled emotions that +filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my beautiful island. It was +still many miles away, but sufficiently near to enable me to trace +distinctly the well-remembered outlines of the two mountains. My first +impulse was to utter an exclamation of gratitude for being carried to my +former happy home in safety; my second, to jump up, clap my hands, shout, +and run up and down the deck, with no other object in view than that of +giving vent to my excited feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, +and spent nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to +get a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again. + +After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now regretted +having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of hoisting the main- +top sail again; but recollecting that it would take me full half a day to +accomplish, and that, at the present rate of sailing, two hours would +bring me to the island, I immediately dismissed the idea. + +The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish preparations for +arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I remembered that they were not in +the habit of rising before six, and, as it was now only three, I hoped to +arrive before they were awake. Moreover, I set about making ready to let +go the anchor, resolving in my own mind that, as I knew the depth of +water in the passage of the reef and within the lagoon, I would run the +schooner in and bring up opposite the bower. Fortunately the anchor was +hanging at the cat-head, otherwise I should never have been able to use +it. Now, I had only to cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own +weight. After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a thought struck me. +I went to the powder magazine, brought up a blank cartridge and loaded +the big brass gun, which, it will be remembered, was unhoused when we set +sail, and, as I had no means of housing it, there it had stood, bristling +alike at fair weather and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its +mouth well, and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust the +poker into the fire. + +{A terrible surprise: p352.jpg} + +All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was blowing, so that I was +now not more than quarter of a mile from the reef. I was soon at the +entrance, and, as the schooner glided quietly through, I glanced +affectionately at the huge breaker, as if it had been the same one I had +seen there when I bade adieu, as I feared for ever, to the island. On +coming opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm hard down. The schooner +came round with a rapid, graceful bend, and lost way just opposite the +bower. Running forward, I let go the anchor, caught up the red-hot +poker, applied it to the brass gun, and the mountains with a _bang_, such +as had only once before broke their slumbering echoes! + +Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to the bang +with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the bower, in scanty +costume, his eye-balls starting from his head with surprise and terror. +One gaze he gave, one yell, and then fled into the bushes like a wild +cat. The next moment Jack went through exactly the same performance, the +only difference being, that his movements were less like those of Jack-in- +the-box, though not less vigorous and rapid than those of Peterkin. + +"Hallo!" I shouted, almost mad with joy, "what, ho! Peterkin! Jack! +hallo! it's me!" + +My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted and turned round, +and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that they recognised my voice, +by both of them running at full speed towards the beach. I could no +longer contain myself. Throwing off my jacket, I jumped overboard at the +same moment that Jack bounded into the sea. In another moment we met in +deep water, clasped each other round the neck, and sank, as a matter of +course, to the bottom! We were well-nigh choked, and instantly struggled +to the surface, where Peterkin was spluttering about like a wounded duck, +laughing and crying by turns, and choking himself with salt water! + +It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, an +adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on the beach, +as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in our dripping +garments, and giving utterance to incoherent rhapsodies, mingled with +wild shouts. It can be more easily imagined than described, so I will +draw a curtain over this part of my history, and carry the reader forward +over an interval of three days. + +During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing but roast +pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, plums, potatoes, +and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack the terrible and +wonderful adventures I had gone through since we last met. After I had +finished the account, they made me go all over it again; and, when I had +concluded the second recital, I had to go over it again, while they +commented upon it piecemeal. They were much affected by what I told them +of the probable fate of Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook the +idea of the poor girl being converted into a _long pig_! As for Jack, he +clenched his teeth, and shook his fist towards the sea, saying at the +same time, that he was sorry he had not broken Tararo's head, and he only +hoped that one day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the bridge +of that chief's nose! After they had "pumped me dry," as Peterkin said, +I begged to be informed of what had happened to them during my long +absence, and particularly as to how they got out of the Diamond Cave. + +"Well, you must know," began Jack, "after you had dived out of the cave, +on the day you were taken away from us, we waited very patiently for half +an hour, not expecting you to return before the end of that time. Then +we began to upbraid you for staying so long, when you knew we would be +anxious; but when an hour passed, we became alarmed, and I resolved at +all hazards to dive out, and see what had become of you, although I felt +for poor Peterkin, because, as he truly said, 'If you never come back, +I'm shut up here for life.' However, I promised not to run any risk, and +he let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of him!" + +"I should just think it was!" interrupted Peterkin, looking at Jack over +the edge of a monstrous potato which he happened to be devouring at the +time. + +"Well," continued Jack, "you may guess my consternation when you did not +answer to my halloo. At first I imagined that the pirates must have +killed you, and left you in the bush, or thrown you into the sea; then it +occurred to me that this would have served no end of theirs, so I came to +the conclusion that they must have carried you away with them. As this +thought struck me, I observed the pirate schooner standing away to the +nor'ard, almost hull-down on the horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to +watch her as she slowly sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my +boy, that I shed more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I +verify believe, all my life before--" + +"Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting," said Peterkin; "surely you must be +mistaken in that; you've often told me that, when you were a baby, you +used to howl and roar from morning to--" + +"Hold your tongue, Peterkin," cried Jack. "Well, after the schooner had +disappeared, I dived back into the cave, much to Peterkin's relief, and +told him what I had seen. We sat down and had a long talk over this +matter, and then we agreed to make a regular, systematic search through +the woods, so as to make sure, at least, that you had not been killed. +But now we thought of the difficulty of getting out of the cave without +your help. Peterkin became dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; +and I must confess that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not +hope alone to take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him +in; and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with him +that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt water. However, +there was no help for it, and I endeavoured to calm his fears as well as +I could: 'for,' said I, 'you can't live here, Peterkin;' to which he +replied, 'Of course not, Jack, I can only die here, and, as that's not at +all desirable, you had better propose something.' So I suggested that he +should take a good long breath, and trust himself to me. + +"'Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut cloth, into which I could +shove my head, and tie it tight round my neck?' he asked, with a haggard +smile. 'It might let me get one breath under water!' + +"'No use,' said I; 'it would fill in a moment and suffocate you. I see +nothing for it, Peterkin, if you really can't keep your breath so long, +but to let me knock you down, and carry you out while in a state of +insensibility.' + +"But Peterkin didn't relish this idea. He seemed to fear that I could +not be able to measure the exact force of the blow, and might, on the one +hand, hit him so softly as to render a second or third blow necessary, +which would be very uncomfortable; or, on the other hand, give him such a +smash as would entirely spoil his figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the life +out of him altogether! At last I got him persuaded to try to hold his +breath, and commit himself to me; so he agreed, and down we went. But I +had not got him half way through, when he began to struggle and kick like +a wild bull, burst from my grasp, and hit against the roof of the tunnel. +I was therefore, obliged to force him violently back into the cave gain, +where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he had lost his presence +of mind, and--" + +"Nothing of the sort," cried Peterkin, indignantly, "I had only lost my +wind; and if I had not had presence of mind enough to kick as I did, I +should have bu'st in your arms!" + +"Well, well, so be it," resumed Jack, with a smile, "but the upshot of it +was, that we had to hold another consultation on the point, and I really +believe that, had it not been for a happy thought of mine, we should have +been consulting there yet." + +"I wish we had," again interrupted Peterkin with a sigh. "I'm sure, +Ralph, if I had thought that you were coming back again, I would +willingly have awaited your return for months, rather than have endured +the mental agony which I went through! But proceed." + +"The thought was this," continued Jack, "that I should tie Peterkin's +hands and feet with cords, and then lash him firmly to a stout pole about +five feet long, in order to render him quite powerless, and keep him +straight and stiff. You should have seen his face of horror, Ralph, when +I suggested this: but he came to see that it was his only chance, and +told me to set about it as fast as I could; 'for,' said he, 'this is no +jokin', Jack, _I_ can tell you, and the sooner it's done the better.' I +soon procured the cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to +the cave, and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, +to say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English mummy would +be, if there were such things, for he was as white as a dead man." + +"'Now,' said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, 'swim with me as near to the +edge of the hole as you can before you dive, then let me take a long +breath, and, as I sha'nt be able to speak after I've taken it, you'll +watch my face, and the moment you see me wink--dive! And oh!' he added, +earnestly, 'pray don't be long!' + +"I promised to pay the strictest attention to his wishes, and swam with +him to the outlet of the cave. Here I paused. 'Now then,' said I, 'pull +away at the wind, lad.'" + +Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help thinking of the +frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as big as the ox. Then I +looked into his face earnestly. Slap went the lid of his right eye; down +went my head, and up went my heels. We shot through the passage like an +arrow, and rose to the surface of the open sea before you could count +twenty! + +"Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, on reaching the +free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough to have been heard a mile +off, and then, the change in his feelings was so sudden and great, that +he did not wait till we landed, but began, tied up as he was, to shout +and sing for joy as I supported him with my left arm to the shore. +However, in the middle of a laugh that a hyaena might have envied, I let +him accidentally slip, which extinguished him in a moment. + +"After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our search for your +dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low our hearts sank as we set +off, day after day, to examine the valleys and mountain sides with the +utmost care. In about three weeks we completed the survey of the whole +island, and had at least the satisfaction of knowing that you had not +been killed. But it occurred to us that you might have been thrown into +the sea, so we examined the sands and the lagoon carefully, and +afterwards went all round the outer reef. One day, while we were upon +the reef, Peterkin espied a small dark object lying among the rocks, +which seemed to be quite different from the surrounding stones. We +hastened towards the spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking +out the head we discovered that it was gunpowder." + +"It was I who sent you that, Jack," said I, with a smile. + +"Fork out!" cried Peterkin, energetically, starting to his feet and +extending his open hand to Jack. "Down with the money, sir, else I'll +have you shut up for life in a debtor's prison the moment we return to +England!" + +"I'll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime," returned Jack, laughing, "so +sit down and be quiet. The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered this keg +of powder, Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a thousand pounds that +you had something to do with it, and I took him a bet of ten thousand +that you had not. + +"Peterkin was right then," said I, explaining how the thing had occurred. + +"Well, we found it very useful," continued Jack; "although some of it had +got a little damp; and we furbished up the old pistol, with which +Peterkin is a crack shot now. But, to continue. We did not find any +other vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up all hope of ever +seeing you again. After this the island became a dreary place to us, and +we began to long for a ship to heave in sight and take us off. But now +that you're back again, my dear fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful +as it used to do, and I love it as much as ever." + +"And now," continued Jack, "I have a great desire to visit some of the +other islands of the South Seas. Here we have a first-rate schooner at +our disposal, so I don't see what should hinder us." + +"Just the very thing I was going to propose," cried Peterkin; "I vote for +starting at once." + +"Well, then," said Jack, "it seems to me that we could not do better than +shape our course for the island on which Avatea lives, and endeavour to +persuade Tararo to let her marry the black fellow to whom she is engaged, +instead of making a long pig of her. If he has a spark of gratitude in +him he'll do it. Besides, having become champions for this girl once +before, it behoves us, as true knights, not to rest until we set her +free; at least, all the heroes in all the story-books I have ever read +would count it foul disgrace to leave such a work unfinished." + +"I'm sure I don't know, or care, what your knights in story-books would +do," said Peterkin, "but I'm certain that it would be capital fun, so I'm +your man whenever you want me." + +This plan of Jack's was quite in accordance with his romantic, impulsive +nature; and, having made up his mind to save this black girl, he could +not rest until the thing was commenced. + +"But there may be great danger in this attempt," he said, at the end of a +long consultation on the subject; "will you, lads, go with me in spite of +this?" + +"Go with you?" we repeated in the same breath. + +"Can you doubt it?" said I. + +"For a moment," added Peterkin. + +I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on this +enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit the island; +and as the schooner was well laden with stores of every kind for a long +cruise, we had little to do except to add to our abundant supply a +quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, taro, yams, plums, and potatoes, +chiefly with the view of carrying the fragrance of our dear island along +with us as long as we could. + +When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different familiar +spots where most of our time had been spent. We ascended the mountain +top, and gazed for the last time at the rich green foliage in the +valleys, the white sandy beach, the placid lagoon, and the barrier coral- +reef with its crested breakers. Then we descended to Spouting Cliff, and +looked down at the pale-green monster which we had made such fruitless +efforts to spear in days gone by. From this we hurried to the Water +Garden and took a last dive into its clear waters, and a last gambol +amongst its coral groves. I hurried out before my companions, and +dressed in haste, in order to have a long examination of my tank, which +Peterkin, in the fulness of his heart, had tended with the utmost care, +as being a vivid remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition;--the water as clear and pellucid as +crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the most brilliant hues; the red, +purple, yellow, green, and striped anemones fully expanded, and +stretching out their arms as if to welcome and embrace their former +master; the starfish, zoophytes, sea-pens, and other innumerable marine +insects, looking fresh and beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, +looking as wide awake, impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It +was indeed so lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow +myself to be torn away from it. + +Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few articles we +possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the broken telescope, the +pen-knife, the hook made from the brass ring, and the sail-needle, with +which we had landed on the island;--also, the long boots and the pistol, +besides several curious articles of costume which we had manufactured +from time to time. + +These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having carved our +names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:-- + + JACK MARTIN, + RALPH ROVER, + PETERKIN GAY, + +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then hoisted on +board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation cost us great labour +and much time, as the anchor was so heavy that we could not move it +without the aid of my complex machinery of blocks and pulleys. A steady +breeze was blowing off shore when we set sail, at a little before sunset. +It swept us quickly past the reef and out to sea. The shore grew rapidly +more indistinct as the shades of evening fell, while our clipper bark +bounded lightly over the waves. Slowly the mountain top sank on the +horizon, until it became a mere speck. In another moment the sun and the +Coral Island sank together into the broad bosom of the Pacific. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + +The voyage--The island, and a consultation in which danger is scouted as +a thing unworthy of consideration--Rats and cats--The native +teacher--Awful revelations--Wonderful effects of Christianity. + +Our voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and prosperous. +The breeze continued generally fair, and at all times enabled us to lie +our course; for being, as I have said before, clipper-built, the pirate +schooner could lie very close to the wind, and made little lee-way. We +had no difficulty now in managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and +powerful, while Peterkin was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were +a very insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had proposed +to us to make such a voyage in it before we had been forced to go through +so many hardships from necessity, we would have turned away with pity +from the individual making such proposal as from a madman. I pondered +this a good deal, and at last concluded that men do not know how much +they are capable of doing till they try, and that we should never give +way to despair in any undertaking, however difficult it may seem:--always +supposing, however, that our cause is a good one, and that we can ask the +divine blessing on it. + +Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in some +things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth arrangement of +ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor's eye, a very lumbering and +clumsy appearance. But I will not drag my reader through the details of +this voyage. Suffice it to say, that, after an agreeable sail of about +three weeks, we arrived off the island of Mango, which I recognised at +once from the description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it +during one of our conversations. + +As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and held a +council of war. + +"Now, boys," said Jack, as we seated ourselves beside him on the cabin +sky-light, "before we go farther in this business, we must go over the +pros and cons of it; for, although you have so generously consented to +stick by me through thick and thin, it would be unfair did I not see that +you thoroughly understand the danger of what we are about to attempt." + +"Oh! bother the danger," cried Peterkin; "I wonder to hear _you_, Jack, +talk of danger. When a fellow begins to talk about it, he'll soon come +to magnify it to such a degree that he'll not be fit to face it when it +comes, no more than a suckin' baby!" + +"Nay, Peterkin," replied Jack, gravely, "I won't be jested out of it. I +grant you, that, when we've once resolved to act, and have made up our +minds what to do, we should think no more of danger. But, before we have +so resolved, it behoves us to look at it straight in the face, and +examine into it, and walk round it; for if we flinch at a distant view, +we're sure to run away when the danger is near. Now, I understand from +you, Ralph, that the island is inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out +cannibals, whose principal law is--'Might is right, and the weakest goes +to the wall?'" + +"Yes," said I, "so Bill gave me to understand. He told me, however, +that, at the southern side of it, the missionaries had obtained a footing +amongst an insignificant tribe. A native teacher had been sent there by +the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in persuading the chief at that part to +embrace Christianity. But instead of that being of any advantage to our +enterprise, it seems the very reverse; for the chief Tararo is a +determined heathen, and persecutes the Christians,--who are far too weak +in numbers to offer any resistance,--and looks with dislike upon all +white men, whom he regards as propagators of the new faith." + +"'Tis a pity," said Jack, "that the Christian tribe is so small, for we +shall scarcely be safe under their protection, I fear. If Tararo takes +it into his head to wish for our vessel, or to kill ourselves, he could +take us from them by force. You say that the native missionary talks +English?" + +"So I believe." + +"Then, what I propose is this," said Jack: "We will run round to the +south side of the island, and cut anchor off the Christian village. We +are too far away just now to have been descried by any of the savages, so +we shall get there unobserved, and have time to arrange our plans before +the heathen tribes know of our presence. But, in doing this, we run the +risk of being captured by the ill-disposed tribes, and being very ill +used, if not--a--" + +"Roasted alive and eaten," cried Peterkin. "Come, out with it, Jack; +according to your own showing, it's well to look the danger straight in +the face!" + +"Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you prepared, then, to +take your chance of that?" + +"I've been prepared and had my mind made up long ago," cried Peterkin, +swaggering about the deck with his hands thrust into his breeches' +pockets. "The fact is, Jack, I don't believe that Tararo will be so +ungrateful as to eat us; and I'm quite sure that he'll be too happy to +grant us whatever we ask: so the sooner we go in and win the better." + +Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage gratitude, as the +sequel will show. + +The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a long run to +the south'ard, we put about and beat up for the south side of Mango, +where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to off the coral reef. Here we +awaited the arrival of a canoe, which immediately put off on our rounding +to. When it arrived, a mild-looking native, of apparently forty years of +age, came on board, and, taking off his straw hat, made us a low bow. He +was clad in a respectable suit of European clothes; and the first words +he uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and shook hands with him, were,-- + +"Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at Mango--you are heartily +welcome." + +After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, "You must be the native +missionary teacher of whom I have heard--are you not?" + +"I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord Jesus at this +station." + +"You're the very man I want to see, then," replied Jack; "that's lucky. +Come down to the cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. I wish +particularly to speak with you. My men there" (pointing to Peterkin and +me) "will look after your people." + +"Thank you," said the teacher, as he followed Jack to the cabin, "I do +not drink wine or any strong drink." + +"Oh! then, there's lots of water, and you can have biscuit." + +"Now, 'pon my word, that's cool!" said Peterkin; "his _men_, forsooth! +Well, since we are to be men, we may as well come it as strong over these +black chaps as we can. Hallo, there!" he cried to the half dozen of +natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in wonder at all they saw, +"here's for you;" and he handed them a tray of broken biscuit and a can +of water. Then, thrusting his hands into his pockets, he walked up and +down the deck with an enormous swagger, whistling vociferously. + +In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and the latter, +bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe and paddled to the +shore. When he was gone, Peterkin stepped up to Jack, and, touching his +cap, said,-- + +"Well, captain, have you any communications to make to your _men_?" + +"Yes," cried Jack; "ready about, mind the helm and clew up your tongue, +while I con the schooner through the passage in the reef. The teacher, +who seems a first-rate fellow, says it's quite deep, and good anchorage +within the lagoon close to the shore." + +While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under a light +breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the island, living +amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a strong desire to join the +Christians, but Tararo would not let her, and kept her constantly in +close confinement. + +"Moreover," continued Jack, "I find that she belongs to one of the Samoan +Islands, where Christianity had been introduced long before her capture +by the heathens of a neighbouring island; and the very day after she was +taken, she was to have joined the church which had been planted there by +that excellent body, the London Missionary Society. The teacher tells +me, too, that the poor girl has fallen in love with a Christian chief, +who lives on an island some fifty miles or so to the south of this one, +and that she is meditating a desperate attempt at escape. So, you see, +we have come in the nick of time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow +whom you heard of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, the +heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there's to be a battle +fought the day after to-morrow, in which the principal leader is Tararo; +so that we'll not be able to commence our negotiations with the rascally +chief till the day after." + +The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at the head of +a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every description peculiar +to the tropics rose in the richest luxuriance to the summit of a hilly +ridge, which was the line of demarcation between the possessions of the +Christians and those of the neighbouring heathen chief. + +The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, stretching +in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. The cottages stood +several hundred yards from the beach, and were protected from the glare +of the sea by the rich foliage of rows of large Barringtonia and other +trees, which girt the shore. The village was about a mile in length, and +perfectly straight, with a wide road down the middle, on either side of +which were rows of the tufted-topped ti tree, whose delicate and +beautiful blossoms, hanging beneath their plume-crested tops, added +richness to the scene. The cottages of the natives were built beneath +these trees, and were kept in the most excellent order, each having a +little garden in front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks +were covered with black and white pebbles. + +Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly with lamp +black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red ochre, which +contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime that covered the +walls. On a prominent position stood a handsome church, which was quite +a curiosity in its way. It was a hundred feet long by fifty broad, and +was seated throughout to accommodate upwards of two thousand persons. It +had six large folding doors and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, +although a large and substantial edifice, it had been built, we were told +by the teacher, in the space of two months! There was not a single iron +nail in the fabric, and the natives had constructed it chiefly with their +stone and bone axes and other tools, having only one or two axes or tools +of European manufacture. Everything around this beautiful spot wore an +aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we dropped our anchor within a +stone's cast of the substantial coral wharf, I could not avoid +contrasting it with the wretched village of Emo, where I had witnessed so +many frightful scenes. When the teacher afterwards told me that the +people of this tribe had become converts only a year previous to our +arrival, and that they had been living before that in the practice of the +most bloody system of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, +"What a convincing proof that Christianity is of God!" + +On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm welcome by +the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a native, clothed in a +simple European gown and straw bonnet. The shore was lined with hundreds +of natives, whose persons were all more or less clothed with native +cloth. Some of the men had on a kind of poncho formed of this cloth, +their legs being uncovered. Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and +no upper garment except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of the +dresses, both of women and men, were grotesque enough, being very bad +imitations of the European garb; but all wore a dress of some sort or +other. They seemed very glad to see us, and crowded round us as the +teacher led the way to his dwelling, where we were entertained, in the +most sumptuous manner, on baked pig and all the varieties of fruits and +vegetables that the island produced. We were much annoyed, however, by +the rats: they seemed to run about the house like domestic animals. As +we sat at table, one of them peeped up at us over the edge of the cloth, +close to Peterkin's elbow, who floored it with a blow on the snout from +his knife, exclaiming as he did so-- + +"I say, Mister Teacher, why don't you set traps for these brutes?--surely +you are not fond of them!" + +"No," replied the teacher, with a smile; "we would be glad to get rid of +them if we could; but if we were to trap all the rats on the island, it +would occupy our whole time." + +"Are they, then, so numerous?" inquired Jack. + +"They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the north side eat them, +and think them very sweet. So did my people formerly; but they do not +eat so many now, because the missionary who was last here expressed +disgust at it. The poor people asked if it was wrong to eat rats; and he +told them that it was certainly not wrong, but that the people of England +would be much disgusted were they asked to eat rats." + +We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man when we +were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their numbers, for the +rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during our meal, two men were +stationed at the table to keep them off! + +"What a pity you have no cats," said Peterkin, as he aimed a blow at +another reckless intruder, and missed it. + +"We would, indeed, be glad to have a few," rejoined the teacher, "but +they are difficult to be got. The hogs, we find, are very good +rat-killers, but they do not seem to be able to keep the numbers down. I +have heard that they are better than cats." + +As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was wrinkled with a +smile of merriment. Observing that I had noticed it, he said:-- + +"I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the first cat that was +taken to Raratonga. This is one of the stations of the London Missionary +Society. It, like our own, is infested with rats, and a cat was brought +at last to the island. It was a large black one. On being turned loose, +instead of being content to stay among men, the cat took to the +mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes paying visits during the +night to the houses of the natives; some of whom, living at a distance +from the settlement, had not heard of the cat's arrival, and were +dreadfully frightened in consequence, calling it a 'monster of the deep,' +and flying in terror away from it. One night the cat, feeling a desire +for company, I suppose, took its way to the house of a chief, who had +recently been converted to Christianity, and had begun to learn to read +and pray. The chief's wife, who was sitting awake at his side while he +slept, beheld with horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard +with surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, she awoke +her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his old religion, and +burning his god, who, she declared, was now come to be avenged of them. +'Get up and pray! get up and pray!' she cried. The chief arose, and, on +opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring lights, and heard the same +ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme urgency of the case, he +commenced, with all possible vehemence, to vociferate the alphabet, as a +prayer to God to deliver them from the vengeance of Satan! On hearing +this, the cat, as much alarmed as themselves, fled precipitately away, +leaving the chief and his wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy +of their prayer." + +We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher related in +English so good, that we certainly could not have supposed him a native +but for the colour of his face and the foreign accent in his tone. Next +day we walked out with this interesting man, and were much entertained +and instructed by his conversation, as we rambled through the cool shady +groves of bananas, citrons, limes, and other trees, or sauntered among +the cottages of the natives, and watched them while they laboured +diligently in the taro beds, or manufactured the tapa or native cloth. To +some of these Jack put questions through the medium of the missionary; +and the replies were such as to surprise us at the extent of their +knowledge. Indeed, Peterkin very truly remarked that "they seemed to +know a considerable deal more than Jack himself!" + +Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained was the +following, in regard to coral formations:-- + +"The islands of the Pacific," said our friend, "are of three different +kinds or classes. Those of the first class are volcanic, mountainous, +and wild; some shooting their jagged peaks into the clouds at an +elevation of ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of the second class +are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height from one hundred to five +hundred feet. The hills on these are not so wild or broken as those of +the first class, but are richly clothed with vegetation, and very +beautiful. I have no doubt that the Coral Island on which you were +wrecked was one of this class. They are supposed to have been upheaved +from the bottom of the sea by volcanic agency, but they are not +themselves volcanic in their nature, neither are they of coral formation. +Those of the third class are the low coralline islands usually having +lagoons of water in their midst; they are very numerous. + +"As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are formed; there are +various opinions on this point. I will give you what seems to me the +most probable theory,--a theory, I may add, which is held by some of the +good and scientific missionaries. It is well known that there is much +lime in salt water; it is also known that coral is composed of lime. It +is supposed that the polypes, or coral insects, have the power of +attracting this lime to their bodies; and with this material they build +their little cells or habitations. They choose the summit of a volcano, +or the top of a submarine mountain, as a foundation on which to build; +for it is found that they never work at any great depth below the +surface. On this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, +reach the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the top +sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus forming the +coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the central island; after +that the insects within the lagoon cease working. When the surface of +the water is reached, these myriads of wonderful creatures die. Then +birds visit the spot, and seeds are thus conveyed thither, which take +root, and spring up, and flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline +islets of which you have seen so many in these seas. The reefs round the +large islands are formed in a similar manner. When we consider," added +the missionary, "the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we are +filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient king to +exclaim, 'How manifold, O God, are thy works! in wisdom thou hast made +them all.'" + +We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, and felt +not a little gratified to find that the opinions which Jack and I had +been led to form from personal observation on our Coral Island were thus +to a great extent corroborated. + +The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: "When missionaries +were first sent here, three years ago, a small vessel brought them; and +the chief, who is now dead, promised to treat well the two native +teachers who were left with their wives on the island. But scarcely had +the boat which landed them returned to the ship, than the natives began +to maltreat their guests, taking away all they possessed, and offering +them further violence, so that, when the boat was sent in haste to fetch +them away, the clothes of both men and women were torn nearly off their +backs. + +"Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and I, being in her, +volunteered to land alone, without any goods whatever; begging that my +wife might be brought to me the following year,--that is, _this_ year; +and, as you see, she is with me. But the surf was so high that the boat +could not land me; so with nothing on but my trousers and shirt, and with +a few catechisms and a Bible, besides some portions of the Scripture +translated into the Mango tongue, I sprang into the sea, and swam ashore +on the crest of a breaker. I was instantly dragged up the beach by the +natives; who, on finding I had nothing worth having upon me, let me +alone. I then made signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which +they did. At first the natives listened to me in silence, but laughed at +what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed Saviour Jesus +Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me ill sometimes; but I +persevered, and continued to dwell among them, and dispute, and exhort +them to give up their sinful ways of life, burn their idols, and come to +Jesus. + +"About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief was dead. He was +the father of the present chief, who is now a most consistent member of +the church. It is a custom here that, when a chief dies, his wives are +strangled and buried with him. Knowing this, I hastened to his house to +endeavour to prevent such cruelty if possible. When I arrived, I found +two of the wives had already been killed, while another was in the act of +being strangled. I pleaded hard for her, but it was too late; she was +already dead. I then entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, +after much hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she termed +it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which was +accordingly done. + +"All this time the chief's son was walking up and down before his +father's house with a brow black as thunder. When he entered, I went in +with him, and found, to my surprise, that his father was not dead! The +old man was sitting on a mat in a corner, with an expression of placid +resignation on his face. + +"'Why,' said I, 'have you strangled your father's wives before he is +dead?' + +"To this the son replied, 'He is dead. That is no longer my father. He +is as good as dead now. He is to be _buried alive_.' + +"I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among the Feejee +islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or infirm, the heir to +the chieftainship has a right to depose his father; in which case he is +considered as dead, and is buried alive. The young chief was now about +to follow this custom, and, despite my earnest entreaties and pleadings, +the old chief was buried that day before my eyes in the same grave with +his four strangled wives! Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, and I +prayed to God to open the hearts of these poor creatures, as he had +already opened mine, and pour into them the light and the love of the +gospel of Jesus. My prayer was answered very soon. A week afterwards, +the son, who was now chief of the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on +his shoulders, and groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my +feet, he desired me to burn it! + +"You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I sprang up and embraced +him, while I shed tears of joy. Then we made a fire, and burned the god +to ashes, amid an immense concourse of the people, who seemed terrified +at what was being done, and shrank back when we burned the god, expecting +some signal vengeance to be taken upon us; but seeing that nothing +happened, they changed their minds, and thought that our God must be the +true one after all. From that time the mission prospered steadily, and +now, while there is not a single man in the tribe who has not burned his +household gods, and become a convert to Christianity, there are not a +few, I hope, who are true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as +brands from the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will +not tell you more of our progress at this time, but you see," he said, +waving his hand around him, "the village and the church did not exist a +year ago!" + +We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could not help +again in my heart praying God to prosper those missionary societies that +send such inestimable blessings to these islands of dark and bloody +idolatry. The teacher also added that the other tribes were very +indignant at this one for having burned its gods, and threatened to +destroy it altogether, but they had done nothing yet; "and if they +should," said the teacher, "the Lord is on our side; of whom shall we be +afraid?" + +"Have the missionaries many stations in these seas?" inquired Jack. + +"Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a great many in the Tahiti +group, and other islands in that quarter. Then the Wesleyans have the +Feejee Islands all to themselves, and the Americans have many stations in +other groups. But still, my friend, there are hundreds of islands here +the natives of which have never heard of Jesus, or the good word of God, +or the Holy Spirit; and thousands are living and dying in the practice of +those terrible sins and bloody murders of which you have already heard. I +trust, my friends," he added, looking earnestly into our faces, "I trust +that if you ever return to England, you will tell your Christian friends +that the horrors which they hear of in regard to these islands are +_literally true_, and that when they have heard the worst, the '_half has +not been told them_;' for there are perpetrated here foul deeds of +darkness of which man may not speak. You may also tell them," he said, +looking around with a smile, while a tear of gratitude trembled in his +eye and rolled down his coal-black cheek,--"tell them of the blessings +that the gospel has wrought _here_!" + +We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his request. On +returning towards the village, about noon, we remarked on the beautiful +whiteness of the cottages. + +"That is owing to the lime with which they are plastered," said the +teacher. "When the natives were converted, as I have described, I set +them to work to build cottages for themselves, and also this handsome +church which you see. When the framework and other parts of the houses +were up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the sea. They brought +immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, and, piling the coral +above it, set it on fire. + +"'Look! look!' cried the poor people, in amazement; 'what wonderful +people the Christians are! He is roasting stones. We shall not need +taro or bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!' + +"But their surprise was still greater when the coral was reduced to a +fine soft white powder. They immediately set up a great shout, and, +mingling the lime with water, rubbed their faces and their bodies all +over with it, and ran through the village screaming with delight. They +were also much surprised at another thing they saw me do. I wished to +make some household furniture, and constructed a turning-lathe to assist +me. The first thing that I turned was the leg of a sofa; which was no +sooner finished than the chief seized it with wonder and delight, and ran +through the village exhibiting it to the people, who looked upon it with +great admiration. The chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round +his neck as an ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen it +before he became a Christian he would have made it his god!" + +As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his door. Saying that +he had business to attend to, he left us to amuse ourselves as we best +could. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, turning abruptly towards us, and buttoning up his +jacket as he spoke, "I'm off to see the battle. I've no particular +fondness for seein' blood-shed, but I must find out the nature o' these +fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so that I may be able to +speak of it again, if need be, authoritatively. It's only six miles off, +and we don't run much more risk than that of getting a rap with a stray +stone or an over-shot arrow. Will you go?" + +"To be sure we will," said Peterkin. + +"If they chance to see us we'll cut and run for it," added Jack. + +"Dear me!" cried Peterkin,--"_you_ run! thought you would scorn to run +from any one." + +"So I would, if it were my duty to fight," returned Jack, coolly; "but as +I don't want to fight, and don't intend to fight, if they offer to attack +us I'll run away like the veriest coward that ever went by the name of +Peterkin. So come along." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + +A strange and bloody battle--The lion bearded in his den--Frightful +scenes of cruelty, and fears for the future. + +We had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot on which +the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two hours reached it. +The summit of a bare hill was the place chosen; for, unlike most of the +other islanders, who are addicted to bush-fighting, those of Mango are in +the habit of meeting on open ground. We arrived before the two parties +had commenced the deadly struggle, and, creeping as close up as we dared +among the rocks, we lay and watched them. + +The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in rank four +deep. Those in the first row were armed with long spears; the second, +with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third row was composed of young +men with slings; and the fourth consisted of women, who carried baskets +of stones for the slingers, and clubs and spears with which to supply the +warriors. Soon after we arrived, the attack was made with great fury. +There was no science displayed. The two bodies of savages rushed +headlong upon each other and engaged in a general _melee_, and a more +dreadful set of men I have never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made +of various substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as possible; and +as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, shouted, yelled, and +dashed each other to the ground, I thought I had never seen men look so +like demons before. + +We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed to be +perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands in order to +defend them. One stout young women we saw, whose husband was hard +pressed and about to be overcome: she lifted a large stone, and throwing +it at his opponent's head, felled him to the earth. But the battle did +not last long. The band most distant from us gave way and were routed, +leaving eighteen of their comrades dead upon the field. These the +victors brained as they lay; and putting some of their brains on leaves +went off with them, we were afterwards informed, to their temples, to +present them to their gods as an earnest of the human victims who were +soon to be brought there. + +We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the deepest +sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just witnessed. + +Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we made +preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the teacher endeavoured +to dissuade us. + +"You do not know," said he, turning to Jack, "the danger you run in +venturing amongst these ferocious savages. I feel much pity for poor +Avatea; but you are not likely to succeed in saving her, and you may die +in the attempt." + +"Well," said Jack, quietly, "I am not afraid to die in a good cause." + +The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and after a little +further conversation agreed to accompany us as interpreter; saying that, +although Tararo was unfriendly to him, he had hitherto treated him with +respect. + +We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail round the +island and drop anchor opposite the heathen village. We manned her with +natives, and hoped to overawe the savages by displaying our brass gun to +advantage. The teacher soon after came on board, and setting our sails +we put to sea. In two hours more we made the cliffs reverberate with the +crash of the big gun, which we fired by way of salute, while we ran the +British ensign up to the peak and cast anchor. The commotion on shore +showed us that we had struck terror into the hearts of the natives; but +seeing that we did not offer to molest them, a canoe at length put off +and paddled cautiously towards us. The teacher showed himself, and +explaining that we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, +desired the native to go and tell him to come on board. + +We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. During this time +the native teacher conversed with us again, and told us many things +concerning the success of the gospel among those islands; and perceiving +that we were by no means so much gratified as we ought to have been at +the hearing of such good news, he pressed us more closely in regard to +our personal interest in religion, and exhorted us to consider that our +souls were certainly in as great danger as those of the wretched heathen +whom we pitied so much, if we had not already found salvation in Jesus +Christ. "Nay, further," he added, "if such be your unhappy case, you +are, in the sight of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my +young friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, and +do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have been brought +up in the light of the blessed gospel and call yourselves Christians. +These poor savages are indeed the enemies of our Lord; but you, if ye be +not true believers, are traitors!" + +I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher spoke in this +earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. Peterkin, too, did not +seem to like it, and I thought would willingly have escaped; but Jack +seemed deeply impressed, and wore an anxious expression on his naturally +grave countenance, while he assented to the teacher's remarks and put to +him many earnest questions. Meanwhile the natives who composed our crew, +having nothing particular to do, had squatted down on the deck and taken +out their little books containing the translated portions of the New +Testament, along with hymns and spelling-books, and were now busily +engaged, some vociferating the alphabet, others learning prayers off by +heart, while a few sang hymns,--all of them being utterly unmindful of +our presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon afterwards they all +engaged in a prayer which was afterwards translated to us, and proved to +be a petition for the success of our undertaking and for the conversion +of the heathen. + +While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and several savages +leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the teacher and informed him that +Tararo could not come on board that day, being busy with some religious +ceremonies before the gods, which could on no account be postponed. He +was also engaged with a friendly chief who was about to take his +departure from the island, and therefore begged that the teacher and his +friends would land and pay a visit to him. To this the teacher returned +answer that we would land immediately. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, as we were about to step into our little boat, +"I'm not going to take any weapons with me, and I recommend you to take +none either. We are altogether in the power of these savages, and the +utmost we could do, if they were to attack us, would be to kill a few of +them before we were ourselves overpowered. I think that our only chance +of success lies in mild measures. Don't you think so?" + +To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down a huge +bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair of enormous +horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe the natives! We then +jumped into our boat and rowed ashore. + +On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked savages, who +shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house or shed where a baked +pig and a variety of vegetables were prepared for us. Having partaken of +these, the teacher begged to be conducted to the chief; but there seemed +some hesitation, and after some consultation among themselves, one of the +men stood forward and spoke to the teacher. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack when the savage had concluded. + +"He says that the chief is just going to the temple of his god and cannot +see us yet; so we must be patient, my friend." + +"Well," cried Jack, rising; "if he won't come to see me, I'll e'en go and +see him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their proceedings at +this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, friend?" + +"I cannot," said the teacher, shaking his head; "I must not go to the +heathen temples and witness their inhuman rites, except for the purpose +of condemning their wickedness and folly." + +"Very good," returned Jack; "then I'll go alone, for I cannot condemn +their doings till I have seen them." + +Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him through +the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind the village, on +the top of which stood the Bure, or temple, under the dark shade of a +group of iron-wood trees. As we went through the village, I was again +led to contrast the rude huts and sheds, and their almost naked savage- +looking inhabitants, with the natives of the Christian village, who, to +use the teacher's scriptural expression, were now "clothed and in their +right mind." + +As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we were arrested +by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the rear. Drawing aside +into the bushes we awaited their coming up, and as they drew near we +observed that it was a procession of the natives, many of whom were +dancing and gesticulating in the most frantic manner. They had an +exceedingly hideous aspect, owing to the black, red, and yellow paints +with which their faces and naked bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of +these came a band of men carrying three or four planks, on which were +seated in rows upwards of a dozen men. I shuddered involuntarily as I +recollected the sacrifice of human victims at the island of Emo, and +turned with a look of fear to Jack as I said,-- + +"Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are going to commit some of +their cruel practices on these wretched men. We had better not go to the +temple. We shall only be horrified without being able to do any good, +for I fear they are going to kill them." + +Jack's face wore an expression of deep compassion as he said, in a low +voice, "No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of these poor fellows are over +long ago." + +I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, who were now +quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they were all dead. They +were tied firmly with ropes in a sitting posture on the planks, and +seemed, as they bent their sightless eye-balls and grinning mouths over +the dancing crew below, as if they were laughing in ghastly mockery at +the utter inability of their enemies to hurt them now. These, we +discovered afterwards, were the men who had been slain in the battle of +the previous day, and were now on their way to be first presented to the +gods, and then eaten. Behind these came two men leading between them a +third, whose hands were pinioned behind his back. He walked with a firm +step, and wore a look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him +along; so that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to +receive some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and children, with +whom we mingled and followed to the temple. + +Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall circular +building, open at one side. Around it were strewn heaps of human bones +and skulls. At a table inside sat the priest, an elderly man, with a +long gray beard. He was seated on a stool, and before him lay several +knives, made of wood, bone, and splinters of bamboo, with which he +performed his office of dissecting dead bodies. Farther in lay a variety +of articles that had been dedicated to the god, and among them were many +spears and clubs. I observed among the latter some with human teeth +sticking in them, where the victims had been clubbed in their mouths. + +Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with vermilion and +soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a man, called a "dan-vosa" +(orator), advanced, and, laying his hands on their heads, began to chide +them, apparently, in a low bantering tone. What he said we knew not, +but, as he went on, he waxed warm, and at last shouted to them at the top +of his lungs, and finally finished by kicking the bodies over and running +away, amid the shouts and laughter of the people, who now rushed forward. +Seizing the bodies by a leg, or an arm, or by the hair of the head, they +dragged them over stumps and stones and through sloughs, until they were +exhausted. The bodies were then brought back to the temple and dissected +by the priest, after which they were taken out to be baked. + +Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones were heated +red hot. When ready these were spread out on the ground, and a thick +coating of leaves strewn over them to slack the heat. On this "lovo," or +oven, the bodies were then placed, covered over, and left to bake. + +The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring hill or +mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house lying ready to be +erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated by curiosity, we staggered +after them mechanically, scarce knowing where we were going or what we +did, and feeling a sort of impression that all we saw was a dreadful +dream. + +Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a certain spot. +We pressed forward and obtained a sight of what they were doing. A large +wooden beam or post lay on the ground, beside the other parts of the +frame-work of the house, and close to the end of it was a hole about +seven feet deep and upwards of two feet wide. While we looked, the man +whom we had before observed with his hands pinioned, was carried into the +circle. His hands were now free, but his legs were tightly strapped +together. The post of the house was then placed in the hole, and the man +put in beside it. His head was a good way below the surface of the hole, +and his arms were clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until +all was covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards told, +was a _ceremony_ usually performed at the dedication of a new temple, or +the erection of a chief's house! + +"Come, come," cried Jack, on beholding this horrible tragedy, "we have +seen enough, enough, far more than enough! Let us go." + +Jack's face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we hurried back to rejoin +the teacher, and I have no doubt that he felt terrible anxiety when he +considered the number and ferocity of the savages, and the weakness of +the few arms which were ready indeed to essay, but impotent to effect, +Avatea's deliverance from these ruthless men. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with its +consequences--Plans of escape, and heroic resolves. + +When we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what had passed, +he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but we had not sat long +in conversation, when we were interrupted by the arrival of Tararo on the +beach, accompanied by a number of followers bearing baskets of vegetables +and fruits on their heads. + +We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our interpreter, much +pleasure in seeing us. + +"And what is it that my friends wish to say to me?" he inquired. + +The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be spared. + +"Tell him," said Jack, "that I consider that I have a right to ask this +of him, having not only saved the girl's life, but the lives of his own +people also; and say that I wish her to be allowed to follow her own +wishes, and join the Christians." + +While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and we could +see plainly that our request met with no favourable reception. He +replied with considerable energy, and at some length. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack. + +"I regret to say that he will not listen to the proposal. He says he has +pledged his word to his friend that the girl shall be sent to him, and a +deputy is even now on this island awaiting the fulfilment of the pledge." + +Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. "Tell Tararo," he exclaimed with +flashing eye, "that if he does not grant my demand, it will be worse for +him. Say I have a big gun on board my schooner that will blow his +village into the sea, if he does not give up the girl." + +"Nay, my friend," said the teacher, gently, "I will not tell him that; we +must overcome evil with good.'" + +"What does my friend say?" inquired the chief, who seemed nettled by +Jack's looks of defiance. + +"He is displeased," replied the teacher. + +Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked towards the men +who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who had now emptied the whole +on the beach in an enormous pile. + +"What are they doing there?" I inquired. + +"I think that they are laying out a gift which they intend to present to +some one," said the teacher. + +At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl between +them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and vegetables, placed her on +the top of it. We started with surprise and fear, for in the young +female before us we recognised the Samoan girl, Avatea! + +We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming fears. + +"Oh! my dear young friend," whispered the teacher, in a voice of deep +emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, "she is to be made a sacrifice +even now!" + +"Is she?" cried Jack, with a vehement shout, spurning the teacher aside, +and dashing over two natives who stood in his way, while he rushed +towards the heap, sprang up its side, and seized Avatea by the arm. In +another moment he dragged her down, placed her back to a large tree, and, +wrenching a war-club from the hand of a native who seemed powerless and +petrified with surprise, whirled it above his head, and yelled, rather +than shouted, while his face blazed with fury, "Come on, the whole nation +of you, an ye like it, and do your worst!" + +It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; for every +savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with club and spear, and, +doubtless, would speedily have poured out his brave blood on the sod, had +not the teacher rushed in between them, and, raising his voice to its +utmost, cried.-- + +"Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to judge in this matter. +It is for Tararo, the chief, to say whether or not the young man shall +live or die." + +The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the gratifying +acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the teacher, or some +lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack's former aid in time of need, +that influenced Tararo, but he stepped forward, and, waving his hand, +said to his people,--"Desist. The young man's life is mine." Then, +turning to Jack, he said, "You have forfeited your liberty and life to +me. Submit yourself, for we are more numerous than the sand upon the +shore. You are but one; why should you die?" + +"Villain!" exclaimed Jack, passionately, "I may die, but, assuredly, I +shall not perish alone. I will not submit until you promise that this +girl shall not be injured." + +"You are very bold," replied the chief, haughtily, "but very foolish. Yet +I will say that Avatea shall not be sent away, at least for three days." + +"You had better accept these terms," whispered the teacher, entreatingly. +"If you persist in this mad defiance, you will be slain, and Avatea will +be lost. Three days are worth having." + +Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing it moodily +to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and hung down his head in +silence. + +Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher to say that +he did not forget his former services, and, therefore, would leave him +free as to his person, but that the schooner would be detained till he +had further considered the matter. + +While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to where Avatea +was standing as possible, without creating suspicion, and whispered to +her a few words in the native language. Avatea, who, during the whole of +the foregoing scene, had stood leaning against the tree perfectly +passive, and seemingly quite uninterested in all that was going on, +replied by a single rapid glance of her dark eye, which was instantly +cast down again on the ground at her feet. + +Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the teacher +on board the schooner. + +On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack threw +himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the teacher +seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his shoulder, +said,-- + +"Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God has given us three days, +and we must use the means that are in our power to free this poor girl +from slavery. We must not sit in idle disappointment, we must act"-- + +"Act!" cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing back his hair wildly; "it +is mockery to balk of acting when one is bound hand and foot. How can I +act? I cannot fight a whole nation of savages single-handed. Yes," he +said, with a bitter smile, "I can fight them, but I cannot conquer them, +or save Avatea." + +"Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just now. You cannot +expect that blessing which alone can insure success, unless you are more +submissive. I will tell you my plans if you will listen." + +"Listen!" cried Jack, eagerly, "of course I will, my good fellow; I did +not know you had any plans. Out with them. I only hope you will show me +how I can get the girl on board of this schooner, and I'd up anchor and +away in no time. But proceed with your plans." + +The teacher smiled sadly: "Ah! my friend, if one fathom of your anchor +chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a thousand warriors would be +standing on your deck. No, no, that could not be done. Even now, your +ship would be taken from you were it not that Tararo has some feeling of +gratitude toward you. But I know Tararo well. He is a man of falsehood, +as all the unconverted savages are. The chief to whom he has promised +this girl is very powerful, and Tararo _must_ fulfil his promise. He has +told you that he would do nothing to the girl for three days; but that is +because the party who are to take her away will not be ready to start for +three days. Still, as he might have made you a prisoner during those +three days, I say that God has given them to us." + +"Well, but what do you propose to do?" said Jack, impatiently. + +"My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I think you have +courage to brave it. It is this: There is an island about fifty miles to +the south of this, the natives of which are Christians, and have been so +for two years or more, and the principal chief is Avatea's lover. Once +there, Avatea would be safe. Now, I suggest that you should abandon your +schooner. Do you think that you can make so great a sacrifice?" + +"Friend," replied Jack, "when I make up my mind to go through with a +thing of importance, I can make any sacrifice." + +The teacher smiled. "Well, then, the savages could not conceive it +possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would voluntarily lose your +fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies here they think they have you +all safe: so I suggest that we get a quantity of stores conveyed to a +sequestered part of the shore, provide a small canoe, put Avatea on +board, and you three would paddle to the Christian island." + +"Bravo!" cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing the teacher's hand. +"Missionary, you're a regular brick. I didn't think you had so much in +you." + +"As for me," continued the teacher, "I will remain on board till they +discover that you are gone. Then they will ask me where you are gone to, +and I will refuse to tell." + +"And what'll be the result of that?" inquired Jack. + +"I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; but," he added, looking at Jack +with a peculiar smile, "I too am not afraid to die in a good cause!" + +"But how are we to get hold of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +"I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular spot, to which I +will guide you to-night. We shall then arrange about it. She will +easily manage to elude her keepers, who are not very strict in watching +her, thinking it impossible that she could escape from the island. +Indeed, I am sure that such an idea will never enter their heads. But, +as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in a small canoe, on +the open sea, is a great voyage to make. You may miss the island, too, +in which case there is no other in that direction for a hundred miles or +more; and if you lose your way and fall among other heathens, you know +the law of Feejee--a cast-away who gains the shore is doomed to die. You +must count the cost, my young friend." + +"I have counted it," replied Jack. "If Avatea consents to run the risk, +most certainly I will; and so will my comrades also. Besides," added +Jack, looking seriously into the teacher's face, "your Bible,--_our_ +Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those who call on Him in the time of +trouble; who holds the winds in his fists and the waters in the hollow of +his hand." + +We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; collected +together such things as we should require, and laid out on the deck +provisions sufficient to maintain us for several weeks, purposing to load +the canoe with as much as she could hold consistently with speed and +safety. These we covered with a tarpaulin, intending to convey them to +the canoe only a few hours before starting. When night spread her sable +curtain over the scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along +with the natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on our +enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and followed our sable +guide, who led us by a long detour, in order to avoid the village, to the +place of rendezvous. We had not stood more than five minutes under the +gloomy shade of the thick foliage when a dark figure glided noiselessly +up to us. + +"Ah! here you are," said Jack, as Avatea approached. "Now, then, tell +her what we've come about, and don't waste time." + +"I understan' leetl English," said Avatea, in a low voice. + +"Why, where did you pick up English?" exclaimed Jack, in amazement; "you +were dumb as a stone when I saw you last." + +"She has learned all she knows of it from me," said the teacher, "since +she came to the island." + +We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering into all the +details, and concealing none of the danger, so that she might be fully +aware of the risk she ran. As we had anticipated, she was too glad of +the opportunity thus afforded her to escape from her persecutors to think +of the danger or risk. + +"Then you're willing to go with us, are you?" said Jack. + +"Yis, I am willing to go." + +"And you're not afraid to trust yourself out on the deep sea so far?" + +"No, I not 'fraid to go. Safe with Christian." + +After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it was time +to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having appointed to meet at +the cliff where the canoe lay, on the following night, just after dark, +we hastened away--we to row on board the schooner with muffled +oars--Avatea to glide back to her prison-hut among the Mango savages. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + +The flight--The pursuit--Despair and its results--The lion bearded in his +den again--Awful danger threatened and wonderfully averted--A terrific +storm. + +As the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became naturally very +fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and we spent the whole of +the following day in a state of nervous anxiety. We resolved to go a- +shore and ramble about the village, as if to observe the habits and +dwellings of the people, as we thought that an air of affected +indifference to the events of the previous day would be more likely than +any other course of conduct to avert suspicion as to our intentions. +While we were thus occupied, the teacher remained on board with the +Christian natives, whose powerful voices reached us ever and anon as they +engaged in singing hymns or in prayer. + +At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank into the sea, +and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to which I have already +referred, ended abruptly in a dark night. Hastily throwing a few +blankets into our little boat, we stepped into it, and, whispering +farewell to the natives in the schooner, rowed gently over the lagoon, +taking care to keep as near to the beach as possible. We rowed in the +utmost silence and with muffled oars, so that had any one observed us at +the distance of a few yards, he might have almost taken us for a phantom- +boat or a shadow on the dark water. Not a breath of air was stirring; +but fortunately the gentle ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with +the soft roar of the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the +slight plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars. + +Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging cliff under +whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow in the water ready +to be launched, and most of her cargo already stowed away. As the keel +of our little boat grated on the sand, a hand was laid upon the bow, and +a dim form was seen. + +"Ha!" said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped upon the beach, "is that +you, Avatea?" + +"Yis, it am me," was the reply. + +"All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to shove off the canoe," +whispered Jack to the teacher; "and Peterkin, do you shove these blankets +aboard, we may want them before long. Avatea, step into the +middle;--that's right." + +"Is all ready?" whispered the teacher. + +"Not quite," replied Peterkin. "Here, Ralph, lay hold o' this pair of +oars, and stow them away if you can. I don't like paddles. After we're +safe away I'll try to rig up rollicks for them." + +"Now, then, in with you and shove off." + +One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher's hand, and, with his +whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we shot like an arrow from +the shore, sped over the still waters of the lagoon, and paddled as +swiftly as strong arms and willing hearts could urge us over the long +swell of the open sea. + +All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our paddles in +almost total silence and without halt, save twice to recruit our failing +energies with a mouthful of food and a draught of water. Jack had taken +the bearing of the island just after starting, and laying a small pocket- +compass before him, kept the head of the canoe due south, for our chance +of hitting the island depended very much on the faithfulness of our +steersman in keeping our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its proper +course. Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and Avatea worked untiringly +in the middle. + +As the sun's lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the sea Jack ceased +working, threw down his paddle, and called a halt. + +"There," he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn sigh, "we've put a +considerable breadth of water between us and these black rascals, so now +we'll have a hearty supper and a sound sleep." + +"Hear, hear," cried Peterkin. "Nobly spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop +water, Ralph. Why, girl what's wrong with you? You look just like a +black owl blinking in the sunshine." + +Avatea smiled. "I sleepy," she said; and as if to prove the truth of +this, she laid her head on the edge of the canoe and fell fast asleep. + +"That's uncommon sharp practice," said Peterkin, with a broad grin. +"Don't you think we should awake her to make her eat something first? or, +perhaps," he added, with a grave, meditative look, "perhaps we might put +some food in her mouth, which is so elegantly open at the present moment, +and see if she'd swallow it while asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come +round to the front here and feed her quietly, while Jack and I are +tucking into the victuals. It would be a monstrous economy of time." + +I could not help smiling at Peterkin's idea, which, indeed, when I +pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; nevertheless I declined to +put it in practice, being fearful of the result should the victual chance +to go down the wrong throat. But, on suggesting this to Peterkin, he +exclaimed-- + +"Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an eye might see +that if it went down Avatea's throat it could not go down the wrong +throat!--unless, indeed, you have all of a sudden become inordinately +selfish, and think that all the throats in the world are wrong ones +except your own. However, don't talk so much, and hand me the pork +before Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled to at least one minute +morsel." + +"Peterkin, you're a villain. A paltry little villain," said Jack, +quietly, as he tossed the hind legs (including the tail) of a cold roast +pig to his comrade; "and I must again express my regret that unavoidable +circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and that necessity has +compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. Were it not that you are +incapable of walking upon the water, I would order you, sir, out of the +canoe." + +"There! you've wakened Avatea with your long tongue," retorted Peterkin, +with a frown, as the girl gave vent to a deep sigh. "No," he continued, +"it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth of her black Apollo. I +say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice of that yam. Between you and +Jack I run a chance of being put on short allowance, if not--yei--a--a--ow!" + +Peterkin's concluding remark was a yawn of so great energy that Jack +recommended him to postpone the conclusion of his meal till next +morning,--a piece of advice which he followed so quickly, that I was +forcibly reminded of his remark, a few minutes before, in regard to the +sharp practice of Avatea. + +My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I am much +given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be surprised to learn that +I fell into a deep reverie on the subject of sleep, which was continued +without intermission into the night, and prolonged without interruption +into the following morning. But I cannot feel assured that I actually +slept during that time, although I am tolerably certain that I was not +awake. + +Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, while the +night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and silent. + +A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the morning, just +as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east. + +"What's wrong?" cried Jack, starting up. + +Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread towards the +horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of the largest sized +war-canoes was approaching us! + +With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his paddle, glanced +at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, commanded us to "give way." + +But we did not require to be urged. Already our four paddles were +glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over the glassy sea like a +dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers told that they had observed our +motions. + +"I see something like land ahead," said Jack, in a hopeful tone. "It +seems impossible that we could have made the island yet; still, if it is +so, we may reach it before these fellows can catch us, for our canoe is +light and our muscles are fresh." + +No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long chase, we had +no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a hundred warriors. +Nevertheless, we resolved to do our utmost to escape, and paddled with a +degree of vigour that kept us well in advance of our pursuers. The war- +canoe was so far behind us that it seemed but a little speck on the sea, +and the shouts, to which the crew occasionally gave vent, came faintly +towards us on the morning breeze. We therefore hoped that we should be +able to keep in advance for an hour or two, when we might, perhaps, reach +the land ahead. But this hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, +not long after, rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a fog- +bank! + +A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was expressed +on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to our hopes. But we +had little time to think of regret. Our danger was too great and +imminent to permit of a moment's relaxation from our exertions. No hope +now animated our bosoms; but a feeling of despair, strange to say, lent +us power to work, and nerved our arms with such energy, that it was +several hours ere the savages overtook us. When we saw that there was +indeed no chance of escape, and that paddling any longer would only serve +to exhaust our strength, without doing any good, we turned the side of +our canoe towards the approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles. + +Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, Jack +lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with us, and, +resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of bold defiance. +Peterkin took the other oar and also stood up, but there was no anger +visible on his countenance. When not sparkling with fun, it usually wore +a mild, sad expression, which was deepened on the present occasion, as he +glanced at Avatea, who sat with her face resting in her hands upon her +knees. Without knowing very well what I intended to do, I also arose and +grasped my paddle with both hands. + +On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the foam +curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the savages glancing +the beams of the rising sun. Perfect silence was maintained on both +sides, and we could hear the hissing water, and see the frowning eyes of +the warriors, as they came rushing on. When about twenty yards distant, +five or six of the savages in the bow rose, and, laying aside their +paddles, took up their spears. Jack and Peterkin raised their oars, +while, with a feeling of madness whirling in my brain, I grasped my +paddle and prepared for the onset. But, before any of us could strike a +blow, the sharp prow of the war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the +side, and hurled us into the sea! + +What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly drowned; but +when I recovered from the state of insensibility into which I had been +thrown, I found myself stretched on my back, bound hand and foot between +Jack and Peterkin, in the bottom of the large canoe. + +In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the savages +only rested one hour. When night came, they rested again for another +hour, and appeared to sleep just as they sat. But we were neither +unbound nor allowed to speak to each other during the voyage, nor was a +morsel of food or a draught of water given to us. For food, however, we +cared little; but we would have given much for a drop of water to cool +our parched lips, and we would have been glad, too, had they loosened the +cords that bound us, for they were tightly fastened and occasioned us +much pain. The air, also, was unusually hot, so much so that I felt +convinced that a storm was brewing. This also added to our sufferings. +However, these were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from +which we had fled. + +While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, who was +seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not fettered in any way. +Our captors now drove us before them towards the hut of Tararo, at which +we speedily arrived, and found the chief seated with an expression on his +face that boded us no good. Our friend the teacher stood beside him, +with a look of anxiety on his mild features. + +"How comes it," said Tararo, turning to the teacher, "that these youths +have abused our hospitality?" + +"Tell him," replied Jack, "that we have not abused his hospitality, for +his hospitality has not been extended to us. I came to the island to +deliver Avatea, and my only regret is that I have failed to do so. If I +get another chance, I will try to save her yet." + +The teacher shook his head. "Nay, my young friend, I had better not tell +him that. It will only incense him." + +"Fear not," replied Jack. "If you don't tell him that, you'll tell him +nothing, for I won't say anything softer." + +On hearing Jack's speech, Tararo frowned and his eye flashed with anger. + +"Go," he said, "presumptuous boy. My debt to you is cancelled. You and +your companions shall die." + +As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, who seized +Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, and, dragging us +from the hut of the chief, led us through the wood to the outskirts of +the village. Here they thrust us into a species of natural cave in a +cliff, and, having barricaded the entrance, left us in total darkness. + +After feeling about for some time--for our legs were unshackled, although +our wrists were still bound with thongs--we found a low ledge of rock +running along one side of the cavern. On this we seated ourselves, and +for a long time maintained unbroken silence. + +At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. "Alas! dear Jack and +Peterkin," said I, "what is to become of us? I fear that we are doomed +to die." + +"I know not," replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, "I know not; Ralph, I +regret deeply the hastiness of my violent temper, which, I must confess, +has been the chief cause of our being brought to this sad condition. +Perhaps the teacher may do something for us. But I have little hope." + +"Ah! no," said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; "I am sure he can't help us. +Tararo doesn't care more for him than for one of his dogs." + +"Truly," said I, "there seems no chance of deliverance, unless the +Almighty puts forth his arm to save us. Yet I must say that I have great +hope, my comrades, for we have come to this dark place by no fault of +ours--unless it be a fault to try to succour a woman in distress." + +I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to the cavern, +which was caused by the removal of the barricade. Immediately after, +three men entered, and, taking us by the collars of our coats, led us +away through the forest. As we advanced, we heard much shouting and +beating of native drums in the village, and at first we thought that our +guards were conducting us to the hut of Tararo again. But in this we +were mistaken. The beating of drums gradually increased, and soon after +we observed a procession of the natives coming towards us. At the head +of this procession we were placed, and then we all advanced together +towards the temple where human victims were wont to be sacrificed! + +A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind the awful +scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful spot. But +deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence we little expected it. +During the whole of that day there had been an unusual degree of heat in +the atmosphere, and the sky assumed that lurid aspect which portends a +thunder-storm. Just as we were approaching the horrid temple, a growl of +thunder burst overhead and heavy drops of rain began to fall. + +Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical regions can +form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane that burst upon the +island of Mango at this time. Before we reached the temple, the storm +burst upon us with a deafening roar, and the natives, who knew too well +the devastation that was to follow, fled right and left through the woods +in order to save their property, leaving us alone in the midst of the +howling storm. The trees around us bent before the blast like willows, +and we were about to flee in order to seek shelter, when the teacher ran +toward us with a knife in his hand. + +"Thank the Lord," he said, cutting our bonds, "I am in time! Now, seek +the shelter of the nearest rock." + +This we did without a moment's hesitation, for the whistling wind burst, +ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the trees, and, tearing them from +their roots, hurled them with violence to the ground. Rain cut across +the land in sheets, and lightning played like forked serpents in the air; +while, high above the roar of the hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, +and burst, and rolled in awful majesty. + +In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs were blown +completely off the houses in many cases; and in others, the houses +themselves were levelled with the ground. In the midst of this, the +natives were darting to and fro, in some instances saving their goods, +but in many others seeking to save themselves from the storm of +destruction that whirled around them. But, terrific although the tempest +was on land, it was still more tremendous on the mighty ocean. Billows +sprang, as it were, from the great deep, and while their crests were +absolutely scattered into white mist, they fell upon the beach with a +crash that seemed to shake the solid land. But they did not end there. +Each successive wave swept higher and higher on the beach, until the +ocean lashed its angry waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, +in a sheet of white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and +carried off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native dwellings! It +was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in some degree at least, to +impress the mind of beholders with the might and the majesty of God. + +We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, during which +time the storm raged in fury; but on the night following it abated +somewhat, and in the morning we went to the village to seek for food, +being so famished with hunger that we lost all feeling of danger and all +wish to escape in our desire to satisfy the cravings of nature. But no +sooner had we obtained food than we began to wish that we had rather +endeavoured to make our escape into the mountains. This we attempted to +do soon afterwards, but the natives were now able to look after us, and +on our showing a disposition to avoid observation and make towards the +mountains, we were seized by three warriors, who once more bound our +wrists and thrust us into our former prison. + +It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down the first +savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his fist, but he was +speedily overpowered by others. Thus we were again prisoners, with the +prospect of torture and a violent death before us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + +Imprisonment--Sinking hopes--Unexpected freedom to more than one, and in +more senses than one. + +For a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary prison, during +which dismal time we did not see the face of a human being, except that +of the silent savage who brought us our daily food. + +There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I have felt as +if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that crushed my inmost heart +could never pass away, until death should make me cease to feel the +present was such a season. + +During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill at our +hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the cave--dreading lest it +should prove to be that of our executioner. But as time dragged heavily +on, we ceased to feel this alarm, and began to experience such a deep, +irrepressible longing for freedom, that we chafed and fretted in our +confinement like tigers. Then a feeling of despair came over us, and we +actually longed for the time when the savages would take us forth to die! +But these changes took place very gradually, and were mingled sometimes +with brighter thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark +cavern on our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the +past, until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future. + +A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty supply of +yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted our food. + +"Well, Ralph, how have you slept?" said Jack, in a listless tone, on +rising one morning from his humble couch. "Were you much disturbed by +the wind last night?" + +"No," said I; "I dreamed of home all night, and I thought that my mother +smiled upon me, and beckoned me to go to her; but I could not, for I was +chained." + +"And I dreamed, too," said Peterkin; "but it was of our happy home on the +Coral Island. I thought we were swimming in the Water Garden; then the +savages gave a yell, and we were immediately in the cave at Spouting +Cliff, which, somehow or other, changed into this gloomy cavern; and I +awoke to find it true." + +Peterkin's tone was so much altered by the depressing influence of his +long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was he who spoke, I should +scarcely have recognised it, so sad was it, and so unlike to the merry, +cheerful voice we had been accustomed to hear. I pondered this much, and +thought of the terrible decline of happiness that may come on human +beings in so short a time; how bright the sunshine in the sky at one +time, and, in a short space, how dark the overshadowing cloud! I had no +doubt that the Bible would have given me much light and comfort on this +subject, if I had possessed one, and I once more had occasion to regret +deeply having neglected to store my memory with its consoling truths. + +While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of the cave, by +saying, in a melancholy tone, "Oh, I wonder if we shall ever see our dear +island more." + +His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he bent down +his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me to see our once joyous +companion in tears, and I felt a burning desire to comfort him; but, +alas! what could I say? I could hold out no hope; and although I essayed +twice to speak, the words refused to pass my lips. While I hesitated, +Jack sat down beside him, and whispered a few words in his ear, while +Peterkin threw himself on his friend's breast, and rested his head on his +shoulder. + +Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, we heard +footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately our jailer +entered. We were so much accustomed to his regular visits, however, that +we paid little attention to him, expecting that he would set down our +meagre fare, as usual, and depart. But, to our surprise, instead of +doing so, he advanced towards us with a knife in his hand, and, going up +to Jack, he cut the thongs that bound his wrists, then he did the same to +Peterkin and me! For fully five minutes we stood in speechless +amazement, with our freed hands hanging idly by our sides. The first +thought that rushed into my mind was, that the time had come to put us to +death; and although, as I have said before, we actually wished for death +in the strength of our despair, now that we thought it drew really near I +felt all the natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a +chill of horror at the suddenness of our call. + +But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage pointed to the +cave's mouth, and we marched, almost mechanically, into the open air. +Here, to our surprise, we found the teacher standing under a tree, with +his hands clasped before him, and the tears trickling down his dark +cheeks. On seeing Jack, who came out first, he sprang towards him, and +clasping him in his arms, exclaimed,-- + +"Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of God you are +free!" + +"Free!" cried Jack. + +"Ay, free," repeated the teacher, shaking us warmly by the hands again +and again; "free to go and come as you will. The Lord has unloosed the +bands of the captive and set the prisoners free. A missionary has been +sent to us, and Tararo has embraced the Christian religion! The people +are even now burning their gods of wood! Come, my dear friends, and see +the glorious sight." + +We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been accustomed in +our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we imagined for a moment this +must surely be nothing more than another vivid dream. Our eyes and minds +were dazzled, too, by the brilliant sunshine, which almost blinded us +after our long confinement to the gloom of our prison, so that we felt +giddy with the variety of conflicting emotions that filled our throbbing +bosoms; but as we followed the footsteps of our sable friend, and beheld +the bright foliage of the trees, and heard the cries of the paroquets, +and smelt the rich perfume of the flowering shrubs, the truth, that we +were really delivered from prison and from death, rushed with +overwhelming power into our souls, and, with one accord, while tears +sprang to our eyes, we uttered a loud long cheer of joy. + +It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who chanced to +be near. Running towards us, they shook us by the hand with every +demonstration of kindly feeling. They then fell behind, and, forming a +sort of procession, conducted us to the dwelling of Tararo. + +The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never forget. On a +rude bench in front of his house sat the chief. A native stood on his +left hand, who, from his dress, seemed to be a teacher. On his right +stood an English gentleman, who, I at once and rightly concluded, was a +missionary. He was tall, thin, and apparently past forty, with a bald +forehead, and thin gray hair. The expression of his countenance was the +most winning I ever saw, and his clear gray eye beamed with a look that +was frank, fearless, loving, and truthful. In front of the chief was an +open space, in the centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to +be set on fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who +had come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A bright smile +overspread the missionary's face as he advanced quickly to meet us, and +he shook us warmly by the hands. + +"I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young friends," he said. "My +friend, and your friend, the teacher, has told me your history; and I +thank our Father in heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided me to +this island, and made me the instrument of saving you." + +We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some surprise +how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in our favour. + +"I will tell you that at a more convenient time," he answered, "meanwhile +we must not forget the respect due to the chief. He waits to receive +you." + +In the conversation that immediately followed between us and Tararo, the +latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus Christ had been sent to +the island, and that to it we were indebted for our freedom. Moreover, +he told us that we were at liberty to depart in our schooner whenever we +pleased, and that we should be supplied with as much provision as we +required. He concluded by shaking hands with us warmly, and performing +the ceremony of rubbing noses. + +This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find words to +express our gratitude to the chief and to the missionary. + +"And what of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in the midst of +whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, strapping fellow, whose +noble mien and air of superiority bespoke him a chief of no ordinary +kind. + +"That youth is her lover. He came this very morning in his war-canoe to +treat with Tararo for Avatea. He is to be married in a few days, and +afterwards returns to his island home with his bride!" + +"That's capital," said Jack, as he stepped up to the savage and gave him +a hearty shake of the hand. "I wish you joy, my lad;--and you too, +Avatea." + +As Jack spoke, Avatea's lover took him by the hand and led him to the +spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, surrounded by most of the +chief men of the tribe. The girl herself followed, and stood on his left +hand while her lover stood on his right, and, commanding silence, made +the following speech, which was translated by the missionary:-- + +"Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is old. Your heart +also is large and very brave. I and Avatea are your debtors, and we +wish, in the midst of this assembly, to acknowledge our debt, and to say +that it is one which we can never repay. You have risked your life for +one who was known to you only for a few days. But she was a woman in +distress, and that was enough to secure to her the aid of a Christian +man. We, who live in these islands of the sea, know that the true +Christians always act thus. Their religion is one of love and kindness. +We thank God that so many Christians have been sent here--we hope many +more will come. Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray +for you and your brave comrades when you are far away." + +To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, in which he +insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he would have done for any +woman under the sun. But Jack's forte did not lie in speech-making, so +he terminated rather abruptly by seizing the chief's hand and shaking it +violently, after which he made a hasty retreat. + +"Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin," said Jack, as we mingled with the crowd, +"it seems to me that the object we came here for having been +satisfactorily accomplished, we have nothing more to do but get ready for +sea as fast as we can, and hurrah for dear old England!" + +"That's my idea precisely," said Peterkin, endeavouring to wink, but he +had wept so much of late, poor fellow, that he found it difficult; +"however, I'm not going away till I see these fellows burn their gods." + +Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire was put to +the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the acclamations of the +assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango were reduced to ashes! + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + +Conclusion. + +To part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene of constant +leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial greeting to-day, are +doomed ere long to unite for the last time, when the quivering lips +pronounce the word--"Farewell." It is a sad thought, but should we on +that account exclude it from our minds? May not a lesson worth learning +be gathered in the contemplation of it? May it not, perchance, teach us +to devote our thoughts more frequently and attentively to that land where +we meet, but part no more? + +How many do we part from in this world with a light "Good-bye," whom we +never see again! Often do I think, in my meditations on this subject, +that if we realized more fully the shortness of the fleeting intercourse +that we have in this world with many of our fellow-men, we would try more +earnestly to do them good, to give them a friendly smile, as it were, in +passing (for the longest intercourse on earth is little more than a +passing word and glance), and show that we have sympathy with them in the +short quick struggle of life, by our kindly words and looks and action. + +The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of the South +Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep regret at parting +with the natives of the island of Mango; for, after they embraced the +Christian faith, they sought, by showing us the utmost kindness, to +compensate for the harsh treatment we had experienced at their hands; and +we felt a growing affection for the native teachers and the missionary, +and especially for Avatea and her husband. + +Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations with the +missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been making for the +island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop was blown out of its +course, during a violent gale, and driven to this island. At first the +natives refused to listen to what he had to say; but, after a week's +residence among them, Tararo came to him and said that he wished to +become a Christian, and would burn his idols. He proved himself to be +sincere, for, as we have seen, he persuaded all his people to do +likewise. I use the word persuaded advisedly; for, like all the other +Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a despot and might have commanded obedience to +his wishes; but he entered so readily into the spirit of the new faith +that he perceived at once the impropriety of using constraint in the +propagation of it. He set the example, therefore; and that example was +followed by almost every man of the tribe. + +During the short time that we remained at the island, repairing our +vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives had commenced building +a large and commodious church, under the superintendence of the +missionary, and several rows of new cottages were marked out; so that the +place bid fair to become, in a few months, as prosperous and beautiful as +the Christian village at the other end of the island. + +After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, loaded with +presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of the native teachers went +with them, for the purpose of visiting still more distant islands of the +sea, and spreading, if possible, the light of the glorious gospel there. + +As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, in order +to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and Peterkin and I held a +consultation in the cabin of our schooner,--which we found just as we had +left her, for everything that had been taken out of her was restored. We +now resolved to delay our departure no longer. The desire to see our +beloved native land was strong upon us, and we could not wait. + +Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we thought it +likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient crew of sailors to +man our vessel; so we accepted their offer gladly. + +It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white sails of the +pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. The missionary, and +thousands of the natives, came down to bid us God-speed, and to see us +sail away. As the vessel bent before a light fair wind, we glided +quickly over the lagoon under a cloud of canvass. + +Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives gave us a +loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while he stood on a +coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the wind, we heard the single +word "Farewell" borne faintly over the sea. + +That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the wide sea and +up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, strangely mixed with +sadness, passed through our hearts,--for we were at length "homeward +bound," and were gradually leaving far behind us the beautiful, bright, +green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND *** + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will +be renamed. + +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the +United States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. + +START: FULL LICENSE + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the +person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph +1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the +Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when +you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work +on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and + most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no + restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it + under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this + eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the + United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where + you are located before using this eBook. + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format +other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain +Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +provided that: + +* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation." + +* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm + works. + +* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + +* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at +www.gutenberg.org + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without +widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular +state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. + +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: www.gutenberg.org + +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + diff --git a/646-0.zip b/646-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9320d64 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-0.zip diff --git a/646-h.zip b/646-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e64c32a --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h.zip diff --git a/646-h/646-h.htm b/646-h/646-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..61eb8a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/646-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,12062 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne</title> +<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> +<style type="text/css"> + +body { margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + text-align: justify; } + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 {text-align: center; font-style: normal; font-weight: +normal; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;} + +h1 {font-size: 300%; + margin-top: 0.6em; + margin-bottom: 0.6em; + letter-spacing: 0.12em; + word-spacing: 0.2em; + text-indent: 0em;} +h2 {font-size: 150%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +h3 {font-size: 130%; margin-top: 1em;} +h4 {font-size: 120%;} +h5 {font-size: 110%;} + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;} + +hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} + +p {text-indent: 1em; + margin-top: 0.25em; + margin-bottom: 0.25em; } + +p.letter {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; } + +p.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +div.fig { display:block; + margin:0 auto; + text-align:center; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em;} + +a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:hover {color:red} + + </style> +</head> +<body> + +<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online +at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you +are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the +country where you are located before using this eBook. +</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: The Coral Island<br /> + a Tale of the Pacific Ocean</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: R. M. Ballantyne</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: September, 1996 [eBook #646]<br /> +[Most recently updated: September 27, 2021]</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: David Price</div> +<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND ***</div> + +<div class="fig" style="width:75%;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" style="width:100%;" alt="[Illustration]" /> +</div> + +<h1>The Coral Island:<br /> +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean</h1> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p0b.jpg"> +<img alt="A coral island" src="images/p0s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p style="text-align: center"><span class="smcap">by</span></p> +<p style="text-align: center">ROBERT MICHAEL BALLANTYNE,<br /> +<span class="smcap">author of</span> “<span +class="smcap">hudson’s bay</span>; <span +class="smcap">or</span>, <span class="smcap">every-day life in +the wilds of north america</span>;<br /> +”<span class="smcap">snow-flakes and sun-beams</span>; +<span class="smcap">or</span>, <span class="smcap">the young +fur-traders</span>;”<br /> +“<span class="smcap">ungava</span>: <span class="smcap">a +tale of the esquimaux</span>,” <span +class="smcap">etc.</span>, <span class="smcap">etc.</span></p> +<p style="text-align: center"><span class="smcap">with +illustrations by dalziel</span>.</p> +<p style="text-align: center">London:<br /> +THOMAS NELSON AND SONS, PATERNOSTER ROW.<br /> +<span class="smcap">edinburgh</span>; <span class="smcap">and new +york</span>.<br /> +1884.</p> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>Preface</h2> + +<p>I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures +herein set down. With the memory of my boyish feelings +strong upon me, I present my book specially to boys, in the +earnest hope that they may derive valuable information, much +pleasure, great profit, and unbounded amusement from its +pages.</p> + +<p>One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to +be melancholy and morose, and who cannot enter with kindly +sympathy into the regions of fun, let me seriously advise him to +shut my book and put it away. It is not meant for him.</p> +<p style="text-align: right">RALPH ROVER</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The beginning—My early life and character—I thirst +for adventure in foreign lands and go to sea.</p> + +<p>Roving has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the +joy of my heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In +childhood, in boyhood, and in man’s estate, I have been a +rover; not a mere rambler among the woody glens and upon the +hill-tops of my own native land, but an enthusiastic rover +throughout the length and breadth of the wide wide world.</p> + +<p>It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in +which I was born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic +Ocean. My father was a sea-captain; my grandfather was a +sea-captain; my great-grandfather had been a marine. Nobody +could tell positively what occupation <i>his</i> father had +followed; but my dear mother used to assert that he had been a +midshipman, whose grandfather, on the mother’s side, had +been an admiral in the royal navy. At anyrate we knew that, +as far back as our family could be traced, it had been intimately +connected with the great watery waste. Indeed this was the +case on both sides of the house; for my mother always went to sea +with my father on his long voyages, and so spent the greater part +of her life upon the water.</p> + +<p>Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving +disposition. Soon after I was born, my father, being old, +retired from a seafaring life, purchased a small cottage in a +fishing village on the west coast of England, and settled down to +spend the evening of his life on the shores of that sea which had +for so many years been his home. It was not long after this +that I began to show the roving spirit that dwelt within +me. For some time past my infant legs had been gaining +strength, so that I came to be dissatisfied with rubbing the skin +off my chubby knees by walking on them, and made many attempts to +stand up and walk like a man; all of which attempts, however, +resulted in my sitting down violently and in sudden +surprise. One day I took advantage of my dear +mother’s absence to make another effort; and, to my joy, I +actually succeeded in reaching the doorstep, over which I tumbled +into a pool of muddy water that lay before my father’s +cottage door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror of my +poor mother when she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a +group of cackling ducks, and the tenderness with which she +stripped off my dripping clothes and washed my dirty little +body! From this time forth my rambles became more frequent, +and, as I grew older, more distant, until at last I had wandered +far and near on the shore and in the woods around our humble +dwelling, and did not rest content until my father bound me +apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to sea.</p> + +<p>For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in +coasting along the shores of my native land. My Christian +name was Ralph, and my comrades added to this the name of Rover, +in consequence of the passion which I always evinced for +travelling. Rover was not my real name, but as I never +received any other I came at last to answer to it as naturally as +to my proper name; and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good +reason why I should not introduce myself to the reader as Ralph +Rover. My shipmates were kind, good-natured fellows, and +they and I got on very well together. They did, indeed, +very frequently make game of and banter me, but not unkindly; and +I overheard them sometimes saying that Ralph Rover was a +“queer, old-fashioned fellow.” This, I must +confess, surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but +could come at no satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my +old-fashionedness lay. It is true I was a quiet lad, and +seldom spoke except when spoken to. Moreover, I never could +understand the jokes of my companions even when they were +explained to me: which dulness in apprehension occasioned me much +grief; however, I tried to make up for it by smiling and looking +pleased when I observed that they were laughing at some witticism +which I had failed to detect. I was also very fond of +inquiring into the nature of things and their causes, and often +fell into fits of abstraction while thus engaged in my +mind. But in all this I saw nothing that did not seem to be +exceedingly natural, and could by no means understand why my +comrades should call me “an old-fashioned +fellow.”</p> + +<p>Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many +seamen who had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; +and I freely confess that my heart glowed ardently within me as +they recounted their wild adventures in foreign lands,—the +dreadful storms they had weathered, the appalling dangers they +had escaped, the wonderful creatures they had seen both on the +land and in the sea, and the interesting lands and strange people +they had visited. But of all the places of which they told +me, none captivated and charmed my imagination so much as the +Coral Islands of the Southern Seas. They told me of +thousands of beautiful fertile islands that had been formed by a +small creature called the coral insect, where summer reigned +nearly all the year round,—where the trees were laden with +a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit,—where the climate +was almost perpetually delightful,—yet where, strange to +say, men were wild, bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those +favoured isles to which the gospel of our Saviour had been +conveyed. These exciting accounts had so great an effect +upon my mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I resolved +to make a voyage to the South Seas.</p> + +<p>I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear +parents to let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would +never have become a great captain had he remained in the coasting +trade, he saw the truth of what I said, and gave his +consent. My dear mother, seeing that my father had made up +his mind, no longer offered opposition to my wishes. +“But oh, Ralph,” she said, on the day I bade her +adieu, “come back soon to us, my dear boy, for we are +getting old now, Ralph, and may not have many years to +live.”</p> + +<p>I will not take up my reader’s time with a minute +account of all that occurred before I took my final leave of my +dear parents. Suffice it to say, that my father placed me +under the charge of an old mess-mate of his own, a merchant +captain, who was on the point of sailing to the South Seas in his +own ship, the Arrow. My mother gave me her blessing and a +small Bible; and her last request was, that I would never forget +to read a chapter every day, and say my prayers; which I +promised, with tears in my eyes, that I would certainly do.</p> + +<p>Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine +large ship, and set sail for the islands of the Pacific +Ocean.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The departure—The sea—My companions—Some +account of the wonderful sights we saw on the great deep—A +dreadful storm and a frightful wreck.</p> + +<p>It was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her +canvass to the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the +south. Oh, how my heart bounded with delight as I listened +to the merry chorus of the sailors, while they hauled at the +ropes and got in the anchor! The captain shouted—the +men ran to obey—the noble ship bent over to the breeze, and +the shore gradually faded from my view, while I stood looking on +with a kind of feeling that the whole was a delightful dream.</p> + +<p>The first thing that struck me as being different from +anything I had yet seen during my short career on the sea, was +the hoisting of the anchor on deck, and lashing it firmly down +with ropes, as if we had now bid adieu to the land for ever, and +would require its services no more.</p> + +<p>“There, lass,” cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, +giving the fluke of the anchor a hearty slap with his hand after +the housing was completed—“there, lass, take a good +nap now, for we shan’t ask you to kiss the mud again for +many a long day to come!”</p> + +<p>And so it was. That anchor did not “kiss the +mud” for many long days afterwards; and when at last it +did, it was for the last time!</p> + +<p>There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were +my special favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, +broad-shouldered youth of eighteen, with a handsome, +good-humoured, firm face. He had had a good education, was +clever and hearty and lion-like in his actions, but mild and +quiet in disposition. Jack was a general favourite, and had +a peculiar fondness for me. My other companion was Peterkin +Gay. He was little, quick, funny, decidedly mischievous, +and about fourteen years old. But Peterkin’s mischief +was almost always harmless, else he could not have been so much +beloved as he was.</p> + +<p>“Hallo! youngster,” cried Jack Martin, giving me a +slap on the shoulder, the day I joined the ship, “come +below and I’ll show you your berth. You and I are to +be mess-mates, and I think we shall be good friends, for I like +the look o’ you.”</p> + +<p>Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became +the best and stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the +stormy waves.</p> + +<p>I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. +We had the usual amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw +many strange fish rolling in the sea, and I was greatly delighted +one day by seeing a shoal of flying fish dart out of the water +and skim through the air about a foot above the surface. +They were pursued by dolphins, which feed on them, and one +flying-fish in its terror flew over the ship, struck on the +rigging, and fell upon the deck. Its wings were just fins +elongated, and we found that they could never fly far at a time, +and never mounted into the air like birds, but skimmed along the +surface of the sea. Jack and I had it for dinner, and found +it remarkably good.</p> + +<p>When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of +America, the weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors +began to tell stories about the furious gales and the dangers of +that terrible cape.</p> + +<p>“Cape Horn,” said one, “is the most horrible +headland I ever doubled. I’ve sailed round it twice +already, and both times the ship was a’most blow’d +out o’ the water.”</p> + +<p>“An’ I’ve been round it once,” said +another, “an’ that time the sails were split, and the +ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they wouldn’t work, and +we wos all but lost.”</p> + +<p>“An’ I’ve been round it five times,” +cried a third, “an’ every time wos wuss than another, +the gales wos so tree-mendous!”</p> + +<p>“And I’ve been round it no times at all,” +cried Peterkin, with an impudent wink of his eye, +“an’ <i>that</i> time I wos blow’d inside +out!”</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough +weather, and, in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were +sailing gently, before a warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific +Ocean. Thus we proceeded on our voyage, sometimes bounding +merrily before a fair breeze, at other times floating calmly on +the glassy wave and fishing for the curious inhabitants of the +deep,—all of which, although the sailors thought little of +them, were strange, and interesting, and very wonderful to +me.</p> + +<p>At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I +shall never forget the delight with which I gazed,—when we +chanced to pass one,—at the pure, white, dazzling shores, +and the verdant palm-trees, which looked bright and beautiful in +the sunshine. And often did we three long to be landed on +one, imagining that we should certainly find perfect happiness +there! Our wish was granted sooner than we expected.</p> + +<p>One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm +burst upon our ship. The first squall of wind carried away +two of our masts; and left only the foremast standing. Even +this, however, was more than enough, for we did not dare to hoist +a rag of sail on it. For five days the tempest raged in all +its fury. Everything was swept off the decks except one +small boat. The steersman was lashed to the wheel, lest he +should be washed away, and we all gave ourselves up for +lost. The captain said that he had no idea where we were, +as we had been blown far out of our course; and we feared much +that we might get among the dangerous coral reefs which are so +numerous in the Pacific. At day-break on the sixth morning +of the gale we saw land ahead. It was an island encircled +by a reef of coral on which the waves broke in fury. There +was calm water within this reef, but we could only see one narrow +opening into it. For this opening we steered, but, ere we +reached it, a tremendous wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder +completely off, and left us at the mercy of the winds and +waves.</p> + +<p>“It’s all over with us now, lads,” said the +captain to the men; “get the boat ready to launch; we shall +be on the rocks in less than half an hour.”</p> + +<p>The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was +little hope of so small a boat living in such a sea.</p> + +<p>“Come boys,” said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to +me and Peterkin, as we stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our +fate;—“Come boys, we three shall stick +together. You see it is impossible that the little boat can +reach the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure to +upset, so I mean rather to trust myself to a large oar. I see +through the telescope that the ship will strike at the tail of +the reef, where the waves break into the quiet water inside; so, +if we manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over the +breakers, we may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will +you join me?”</p> + +<p>We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with +confidence, although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his +voice, that he had little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the +white waves that lashed the reef and boiled against the rocks as +if in fury, I felt that there was but a step between us and +death. My heart sank within me; but at that moment my +thoughts turned to my beloved mother, and I remembered those +words, which were among the last that she said to +me—“Ralph, my dearest child, always remember in the +hour of danger to look to your Lord and Saviour Jesus +Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your body +and your soul.” So I felt much comforted when I +thought thereon.</p> + +<p>The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready +with the boat, and the captain beside them giving orders, when a +tremendous wave came towards us. We three ran towards the +bow to lay hold of our oar, and had barely reached it when the +wave fell on the deck with a crash like thunder. At the +same moment the ship struck, the foremast broke off close to the +deck and went over the side, carrying the boat and men along with +it. Our oar got entangled with the wreck, and Jack seized +an axe to cut it free, but, owing to the motion of the ship, he +missed the cordage and struck the axe deep into the oar. +Another wave, however, washed it clear of the wreck. We all +seized hold of it, and the next instant we were struggling in the +wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat whirling in the +surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming waves. +Then I became insensible.</p> + +<p>On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of +soft grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with +Peterkin on his knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples +with water, and endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a +wound in my forehead.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<p class="letter" +>The Coral Island—Our first cogitations after landing, +and the result of them—We conclude that the island is +uninhabited.</p> + +<p>There is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in +recovering from a state of insensibility, which is almost +indescribable; a sort of dreamy, confused consciousness; a +half-waking half-sleeping condition, accompanied with a feeling +of weariness, which, however, is by no means disagreeable. +As I slowly recovered and heard the voice of Peterkin inquiring +whether I felt better, I thought that I must have overslept +myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for being lazy; but +before I could leap up in haste, the thought seemed to vanish +suddenly away, and I fancied that I must have been ill. +Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, and I thought of home, and +the garden at the back of my father’s cottage, with its +luxuriant flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my +dear mother trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. +But the roaring of the surf put these delightful thoughts to +flight, and I was back again at sea, watching the dolphins and +the flying-fish, and reefing topsails off the wild and stormy +Cape Horn. Gradually the roar of the surf became louder and +more distinct. I thought of being wrecked far far away from +my native land, and slowly opened my eyes to meet those of my +companion Jack, who, with a look of intense anxiety, was gazing +into my face.</p> + +<p>“Speak to us, my dear Ralph,” whispered Jack, +tenderly, “are you better now?”</p> + +<p>I smiled and looked up, saying, “Better; why, what do +you mean, Jack? I’m quite well.”</p> + +<p>“Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in +this way?” said Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for +the poor boy had been really under the impression that I was +dying.</p> + +<p>I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my +forehead, found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I +had lost a good deal of blood.</p> + +<p>“Come, come, Ralph,” said Jack, pressing me gently +backward, “lie down, my boy; you’re not right +yet. Wet your lips with this water, it’s cool and +clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at +hand. There now, don’t say a word, hold your +tongue,” said he, seeing me about to speak. +“I’ll tell you all about it, but you must not utter a +syllable till you have rested well.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! don’t stop him from speaking, Jack,” +said Peterkin, who, now that his fears for my safety were +removed, busied himself in erecting a shelter of broken branches +in order to protect me from the wind; which, however, was almost +unnecessary, for the rock beside which I had been laid completely +broke the force of the gale. “Let him speak, Jack; +it’s a comfort to hear that he’s alive, after lying +there stiff and white and sulky for a whole hour, just like an +Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a fellow as you are, Ralph; +always up to mischief. You’ve almost knocked out all +my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It’s very wicked of you, indeed it +is.”</p> + +<p>While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite +clear again, and I began to understand my position. +“What do you mean by saying I half choked you, +Peterkin?” said I.</p> + +<p>“What do I mean? Is English not your mother +tongue, or do you want me to repeat it in French, by way of +making it clearer? Don’t you +remember—”</p> + +<p>“I remember nothing,” said I, interrupting him, +“after we were thrown into the sea.”</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p24b.jpg"> +<img alt="Slowly recovering" src="images/p24s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>“Hush, Peterkin,” said Jack, “you’re +exciting Ralph with your nonsense. I’ll explain it to +you. You recollect that after the ship struck, we three +sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I noticed that the oar +struck your head and gave you that cut on the brow, which nearly +stunned you, so that you grasped Peterkin round the neck without +knowing apparently what you were about. In doing so you +pushed the telescope,—which you clung to as if it had been +your life,—against Peterkin’s mouth—”</p> + +<p>“Pushed it against his mouth!” interrupted +Peterkin, “say crammed it down his throat. Why, +there’s a distinct mark of the brass rim on the back of my +gullet at this moment!”</p> + +<p>“Well, well, be that as it may,” continued Jack, +“you clung to him, Ralph, till I feared you really would +choke him; but I saw that he had a good hold of the oar, so I +exerted myself to the utmost to push you towards the shore, which +we luckily reached without much trouble, for the water inside the +reef is quite calm.”</p> + +<p>“But the captain and crew, what of them?” I +inquired anxiously.</p> + +<p>Jack shook his head.</p> + +<p>“Are they lost?”</p> + +<p>“No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not +much chance of their being saved. The ship struck at the +very tail of the island on which we are cast. When the boat +was tossed into the sea it fortunately did not upset, although it +shipped a good deal of water, and all the men managed to scramble +into it; but before they could get the oars out the gale carried +them past the point and away to leeward of the island. +After we landed I saw them endeavouring to pull towards us, but +as they had only one pair of oars out of the eight that belong to +the boat, and as the wind was blowing right in their teeth, they +gradually lost ground. Then I saw them put about and hoist +some sort of sail,—a blanket, I fancy, for it was too small +for the boat,—and in half an hour they were out of +sight.”</p> + +<p>“Poor fellows,” I murmured sorrowfully.</p> + +<p>“But the more I think about it, I’ve better hope +of them,” continued Jack, in a more cheerful tone. +“You see, Ralph, I’ve read a great deal about these +South Sea Islands, and I know that in many places they are +scattered about in thousands over the sea, so they’re +almost sure to fall in with one of them before long.”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I hope so,” said Peterkin, +earnestly. “But what has become of the wreck, +Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there while I was +watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to +pieces?”</p> + +<p>“No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the +bottom,” replied Jack. “As I said before, she +struck on the tail of the island and stove in her bow, but the +next breaker swung her clear, and she floated away to +leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made a hard struggle +to reach her, but long before they came near her she filled and +went down. It was after she foundered that I saw them +trying to pull to the island.”</p> + +<p>There was a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I +have no doubt that each was revolving in his mind our +extraordinary position. For my part I cannot say that my +reflections were very agreeable. I knew that we were on an +island, for Jack had said so, but whether it was inhabited or not +I did not know. If it should be inhabited, I felt certain, +from all I had heard of South Sea Islanders, that we should be +roasted alive and eaten. If it should turn out to be +uninhabited, I fancied that we should be starved to death. +“Oh!” thought I, “if the ship had only stuck on +the rocks we might have done pretty well, for we could have +obtained provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a +shelter, but now—alas! alas! we are lost!” +These last words I uttered aloud in my distress.</p> + +<p>“Lost! Ralph?” exclaimed Jack, while a smile +overspread his hearty countenance. “Saved, you should have +said. Your cogitations seem to have taken a wrong road, and +led you to a wrong conclusion.”</p> + +<p>“Do you know what conclusion <i>I</i> have come +to?” said Peterkin. “I have made up my mind +that it’s capital,—first rate,—the best thing +that ever happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that +ever lay before three jolly young tars. We’ve got an +island all to ourselves. We’ll take possession in the +name of the king; we’ll go and enter the service of its +black inhabitants. Of course we’ll rise, naturally, +to the top of affairs. White men always do in savage +countries. You shall be king, Jack; Ralph, prime minister, +and I shall be—”</p> + +<p>“The court jester,” interrupted Jack.</p> + +<p>“No,” retorted Peterkin, “I’ll have no +title at all. I shall merely accept a highly responsible +situation under government, for you see, Jack, I’m fond of +having an enormous salary and nothing to do.”</p> + +<p>“But suppose there are no natives?”</p> + +<p>“Then we’ll build a charming villa, and plant a +lovely garden round it, stuck all full of the most splendiferous +tropical flowers, and we’ll farm the land, plant, sow, +reap, eat, sleep, and be merry.”</p> + +<p>“But to be serious,” said Jack, assuming a grave +expression of countenance, which I observed always had the effect +of checking Peterkin’s disposition to make fun of +everything, “we are really in rather an uncomfortable +position. If this is a desert island, we shall have to live +very much like the wild beasts, for we have not a tool of any +kind, not even a knife.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, we have <i>that</i>,” said Peterkin, +fumbling in his trousers pocket, from which he drew forth a small +penknife with only one blade, and that was broken.</p> + +<p>“Well, that’s better than nothing; but +come,” said Jack, rising, “we are wasting our time in +<i>talking</i> instead of <i>doing</i>. You seem well +enough to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our +pockets, and then let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort +of island we have been cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it +seems likely to be our home for some time to come.”</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy +discovery—Our island described—Jack proves himself to +be learned and sagacious above his fellows—Curious +discoveries—Natural lemonade!</p> + +<p>We now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into +our personal property. When we reached the shore, after +being wrecked, my companions had taken off part of their clothes +and spread them out in the sun to dry, for, although the gale was +raging fiercely, there was not a single cloud in the bright +sky. They had also stripped off most part of my wet clothes +and spread them also on the rocks. Having resumed our +garments, we now searched all our pockets with the utmost care, +and laid their contents out on a flat stone before us; and, now +that our minds were fully alive to our condition, it was with no +little anxiety that we turned our several pockets inside out, in +order that nothing might escape us. When all was collected +together we found that our worldly goods consisted of the +following articles:—</p> + +<p>First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about +the middle and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on +its edge. (Peterkin said of this, with his usual +pleasantry, that it would do for a saw as well as a knife, which +was a great advantage.) Second, An old German-silver +pencil-case without any lead in it. Third, A piece of +whip-cord about six yards long. Fourth, A sailmaker’s +needle of a small size. Fifth, A ship’s telescope, +which I happened to have in my hand at the time the ship struck, +and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was in the +water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out +of my grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I +cannot understand why I kept such a firm hold of this +telescope. They say that a drowning man will clutch at a +straw. Perhaps it may have been some such feeling in me, +for I did not know that it was in my hand at the time we were +wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure in having it with +us now, although we did not see that it could be of much use to +us, as the glass at the small end was broken to pieces. Our +sixth article was a brass ring which Jack always wore on his +little finger. I never understood why he wore it, for Jack +was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to care for +ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said “it was in +memory of the girl he left behind him!” But as he +never spoke of this girl to either of us, I am inclined to think +that Peterkin was either jesting or mistaken. In addition +to these articles we had a little bit of tinder, and the clothes +on our backs. These last were as follows:—</p> + +<p>Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair +of sailors’ thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel +shirt, a blue jacket, and a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, +besides a pair of worsted socks, and a cotton +pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen portraits of Lord Nelson +printed on it, and a union Jack in the middle. Peterkin had +on a striped flannel shirt,—which he wore outside his +trousers, and belted round his waist, after the manner of a +tunic,—and a round black straw hat. He had no jacket, +having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; but +this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island +proved to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I +often preferred to go about without our jackets. Peterkin +had also a pair of white cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief +with white spots all over it. My own costume consisted of a +blue flannel shirt, a blue jacket, a black cap, and a pair of +worsted socks, besides the shoes and canvass trousers already +mentioned. This was all we had, and besides these things we +had nothing else; but, when we thought of the danger from which +we had escaped, and how much worse off we might have been had the +ship struck on the reef during the night, we felt very thankful +that we were possessed of so much, although, I must confess, we +sometimes wished that we had had a little more.</p> + +<p>While we were examining these things, and talking about them, +Jack suddenly started and exclaimed—</p> + +<p>“The oar! we have forgotten the oar.”</p> + +<p>“What good will that do us?” said Peterkin; +“there’s wood enough on the island to make a thousand +oars.”</p> + +<p>“Ay, lad,” replied Jack, “but there’s +a bit of hoop iron at the end of it, and that may be of much use +to us.”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” said I, “let us go fetch +it;” and with that we all three rose and hastened down to +the beach. I still felt a little weak from loss of blood, +so that my companions soon began to leave me behind; but Jack +perceived this, and, with his usual considerate good nature, +turned back to help me. This was now the first time that I +had looked well about me since landing, as the spot where I had +been laid was covered with thick bushes which almost hid the +country from our view. As we now emerged from among these +and walked down the sandy beach together, I cast my eyes about, +and, truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose at the +beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale +had suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it +dashed our ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after +accomplishing that. The island on which we stood was hilly, +and covered almost everywhere with the most beautiful and richly +coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, none of which I knew the +names of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa-nut palms, which +I recognised at once from the many pictures that I had seen of +them before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling +whiteness lined this bright green shore, and upon it there fell a +gentle ripple of the sea. This last astonished me much, for +I recollected that at home the sea used to fall in huge billows +on the shore long after a storm had subsided. But on +casting my glance out to sea the cause became apparent. +About a mile distant from the shore I saw the great billows of +the ocean rolling like a green wall, and falling with a long, +loud roar, upon a low coral reef, where they were dashed into +white foam and flung up in clouds of spray. This spray +sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here and there, a +beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling +drops. We afterwards found that this coral reef extended +quite round the island, and formed a natural breakwater to +it. Beyond this the sea rose and tossed violently from the +effects of the storm; but between the reef and the shore it was +as calm and as smooth as a pond.</p> + +<p>My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at +sight of so many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned +suddenly to the contemplation of the Creator of them all. I +mention this the more gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed +to say, I very seldom thought of my Creator, although I was +constantly surrounded by the most beautiful and wonderful of His +works. I observed from the expression of my +companion’s countenance that he too derived much joy from +the splendid scenery, which was all the more agreeable to us +after our long voyage on the salt sea. There, the breeze +was fresh and cold, but here it was delightfully mild; and, when +a puff blew off the land, it came laden with the most exquisite +perfume that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we were +startled by a loud “Huzza!” from Peterkin, and, on +looking towards the edge of the sea, we saw him capering and +jumping about like a monkey, and ever and anon tugging with all +his might at something that lay upon the shore.</p> + +<p>“What an odd fellow he is, to be sure,” said Jack, +taking me by the arm and hurrying forward; “come, let us +hasten to see what it is.”</p> + +<p>“Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what +we want,” cried Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging +with all his power. “First rate; just the very +ticket!”</p> + +<p>I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin +was in the habit of using very remarkable and peculiar +phrases. And I am free to confess that I did not well +understand the meaning of some of them,—such, for instance, +as “the very ticket;” but I think it my duty to +recount everything relating to my adventures with a strict regard +to truthfulness in as far as my memory serves me; so I write, as +nearly as possible, the exact words that my companions +spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain what he meant by +“ticket,” but he always answered me by going into +fits of laughter. However, by observing the occasions on +which he used it, I came to understand that it meant to show that +something was remarkably good, or fortunate.</p> + +<p>On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to +pull the axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, +Jack struck it while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among +which it had become entangled at the bow of the ship. +Fortunately for us the axe had remained fast in the oar, and even +now, all Peterkin’s strength could not draw it out of the +cut.</p> + +<p>“Ah! that is capital indeed,” cried Jack, at the +same time giving the axe a wrench that plucked it out of the +tough wood. “How fortunate this is! It will be +of more value to us than a hundred knives, and the edge is quite +new and sharp.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll answer for the toughness of the handle at +any rate,” cried Peterkin; “my arms are nearly pulled +out of the sockets. But see here, our luck is great. +There is iron on the blade.” He pointed to a piece of +hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round the blade of +the oar to prevent it from splitting.</p> + +<p>This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on +his knees, and with the edge of the axe began carefully to force +out the nails. But as they were firmly fixed in, and the +operation blunted our axe, we carried the oar up with us to the +place where we had left the rest of our things, intending to burn +the wood away from the iron at a more convenient time.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, after we had laid it on +the stone which contained our little all, “I propose that +we should go to the tail of the island, where the ship struck, +which is only a quarter of a mile off, and see if anything else +has been thrown ashore. I don’t expect anything, but +it is well to see. When we get back here it will be time to +have our supper and prepare our beds.”</p> + +<p>“Agreed!” cried Peterkin and I together, as, +indeed, we would have agreed to any proposal that Jack made; for, +besides his being older and much stronger and taller than either +of us, he was a very clever fellow, and I think would have +induced people much older than himself to choose him for their +leader, especially if they required to be led on a bold +enterprise.</p> + +<p>Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so +brightly in the rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite +dazzled by its glare, it suddenly came into Peterkin’s head +that we had nothing to eat except the wild berries which grew in +profusion at our feet.</p> + +<p>“What shall we do, Jack?” said he, with a rueful +look; “perhaps they may be poisonous!”</p> + +<p>“No fear,” replied Jack, confidently; “I +have observed that a few of them are not unlike some of the +berries that grow wild on our own native hills. Besides, I +saw one or two strange birds eating them just a few minutes ago, +and what won’t kill the birds won’t kill us. +But look up there, Peterkin,” continued Jack, pointing to +the branched head of a cocoa-nut palm. “There are +nuts for us in all stages.”</p> + +<p>“So there are!” cried Peterkin, who being of a +very unobservant nature had been too much taken up with other +things to notice anything so high above his head as the fruit of +a palm tree. But, whatever faults my young comrade had, he +could not be blamed for want of activity or animal spirits. +Indeed, the nuts had scarcely been pointed out to him when he +bounded up the tall stem of the tree like a squirrel, and, in a +few minutes, returned with three nuts, each as large as a +man’s fist.</p> + +<p>“You had better keep them till we return,” said +Jack. “Let us finish our work before +eating.”</p> + +<p>“So be it, captain, go ahead,” cried Peterkin, +thrusting the nuts into his trousers pocket. “In fact +I don’t want to eat just now, but I would give a good deal +for a drink. Oh that I could find a spring! but I +don’t see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I say, +Jack, how does it happen that you seem to be up to +everything? You have told us the names of half-a-dozen +trees already, and yet you say that you were never in the South +Seas before.”</p> + +<p>“I’m not up to <i>everything</i>, Peterkin, as +you’ll find out ere long,” replied Jack, with a +smile; “but I have been a great reader of books of travel +and adventure all my life, and that has put me up to a good many +things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Jack, that’s all humbug. If you begin +to lay everything to the credit of books, I’ll quite lose +my opinion of you,” cried Peterkin, with a look of +contempt. “I’ve seen a lot o’ fellows +that were <i>always</i> poring over books, and when they came to +try to <i>do</i> anything, they were no better than +baboons!”</p> + +<p>“You are quite right,” retorted Jack; “and I +have seen a lot of fellows who never looked into books at all, +who knew nothing about anything except the things they had +actually seen, and very little they knew even about these. +Indeed, some were so ignorant that they did not know that +cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!”</p> + +<p>I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there +was much truth in it, as to Peterkin’s ignorance.</p> + +<p>“Humph! maybe you’re right,” answered +Peterkin; “but I would not give <i>tuppence</i> for a man +of books, if he had nothing else in him.”</p> + +<p>“Neither would I,” said Jack; “but +that’s no reason why you should run books down, or think +less of me for having read them. Suppose, now, Peterkin, +that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give you a long +and particular account of the way to do it, would not that be +very useful?”</p> + +<p>“No doubt of it,” said Peterkin, laughing.</p> + +<p>“And suppose I were to write the account in a letter +instead of telling you in words, would that be less +useful?”</p> + +<p>“Well—no, perhaps not.”</p> + +<p>“Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in +the form of a book, would it not be as good and useful as +ever?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, bother! Jack, you’re a philosopher, and +that’s worse than anything!” cried Peterkin, with a +look of pretended horror.</p> + +<p>“Very well, Peterkin, we shall see,” returned +Jack, halting under the shade of a cocoa-nut tree. +“You said you were thirsty just a minute ago; now, jump up +that tree and bring down a nut,—not a ripe one, bring a +green, unripe one.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in +earnest, he obeyed.</p> + +<p>“Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it +to your mouth, old fellow,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into +uncontrollable laughter at the changes that instantly passed over +his expressive countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to +his mouth, and thrown back his head in order to catch what came +out of it, than his eyes opened to twice their ordinary size with +astonishment, while his throat moved vigorously in the act of +swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense delight +overspread his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being +firmly fixed to the hole in the nut, could not take part in the +expression; but he endeavoured to make up for this by winking at +us excessively with his right eye. At length he stopped, +and, drawing a long breath, exclaimed—</p> + +<p>“Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you’re +a Briton—the best fellow I ever met in my life. Only +taste that!” said he, turning to me and holding the nut to +my mouth. I immediately drank, and certainly I was much +surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed copiously down my +throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet taste, +mingled with acid; in fact, it was the likest thing to lemonade I +ever tasted, and was most grateful and refreshing. I handed +the nut to Jack, who, after tasting it, said, “Now, +Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa nut in my +life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once read +that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is +true!”</p> + +<p>“And pray,” asked Peterkin, “what sort of +‘stuff’ does the ripe nut contain?”</p> + +<p>“A hollow kernel,” answered Jack, “with a +liquid like milk in it; but it does not satisfy thirst so well as +hunger. It is very wholesome food I believe.”</p> + +<p>“Meat and drink on the same tree!” cried Peterkin; +“washing in the sea, lodging on the ground,—and all +for nothing! My dear boys, we’re set up for life; it +must be the ancient Paradise,—hurrah!” and Peterkin +tossed his straw hat in the air, and ran along the beach +hallooing like a madman with delight.</p> + +<p>We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were +very unlike Paradise in many things. But more of this in +its proper place.</p> + +<p>We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had +struck, but did not find a single article, although we searched +carefully among the coral rocks, which at this place jutted out +so far as nearly to join the reef that encircled the +island. Just as we were about to return, however, we saw +something black floating in a little cove that had escaped our +observation. Running forward, we drew it from the water, +and found it to be a long thick leather boot, such as fishermen +at home wear; and a few paces farther on we picked up its +fellow. We at once recognised these as having belonged to +our captain, for he had worn them during the whole of the storm, +in order to guard his legs from the waves and spray that +constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on +seeing them was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack +soon put my mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if +the captain had been drowned with the boots on, he would +certainly have been washed ashore along with them, and that he +had no doubt whatever he had kicked them off while in the sea, +that he might swim more easily.</p> + +<p>Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, +as Jack said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest +too. I also tried them, but, although I was long enough in +the legs for them, they were much too large in the feet for me; +so we handed them to Jack, who was anxious to make me keep them, +but as they fitted his large limbs and feet as if they had been +made for him, I would not hear of it, so he consented at last to +use them. I may remark, however, that Jack did not use them +often, as they were extremely heavy.</p> + +<p>It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our +encampment; so we put off our visit to the top of a hill till +next day, and employed the light that yet remained to us in +cutting down a quantity of boughs and the broad leaves of a tree, +of which none of us knew the name. With these we erected a +sort of rustic bower, in which we meant to pass the night. +There was no absolute necessity for this, because the air of our +island was so genial and balmy that we could have slept quite +well without any shelter; but we were so little used to sleeping +in the open air, that we did not quite relish the idea of lying +down without any covering over us: besides, our bower would +shelter us from the night dews or rain, if any should happen to +fall. Having strewed the floor with leaves and dry grass, +we bethought ourselves of supper.</p> + +<p>But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no +means of making a fire.</p> + +<p>“Now, there’s a fix!—what shall we +do?” said Peterkin, while we both turned our eyes to Jack, +to whom we always looked in our difficulties. Jack seemed +not a little perplexed.</p> + +<p>“There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach,” +said he, “but they are of no use at all without a +steel. However, we must try.” So saying, he +went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. On +one of these he placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; +but it was with great difficulty that a very small spark was +struck out of the flints, and the tinder, being a bad, hard +piece, would not catch. He then tried the bit of hoop iron, +which would not strike fire at all; and after that the back of +the axe, with no better success. During all these trials +Peterkin sat with his hands in his pockets, gazing with a most +melancholy visage at our comrade, his face growing longer and +more miserable at each successive failure.</p> + +<p>“Oh dear!” he sighed, “I would not care a +button for the cooking of our victuals,—perhaps they +don’t need it,—but it’s so dismal to eat +one’s supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital +day, that it’s a pity to finish off in this glum +style. Oh, I have it!” he cried, starting up; +“the spy-glass,—the big glass at the end is a +burning-glass!”</p> + +<p>“You forget that we have no sun,” said I.</p> + +<p>Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the +telescope he had quite overlooked the absence of the sun.</p> + +<p>“Ah, boys, I’ve got it now!” exclaimed Jack, +rising and cutting a branch from a neighbouring bush, which be +stripped of its leaves. “I recollect seeing this done +once at home. Hand me the bit of whip-cord.” +With the cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then he +cut a piece, about three inches long, off the end of a dead +branch, which he pointed at the two ends. Round this he +passed the cord of the bow, and placed one end against his chest, +which was protected from its point by a chip of wood; the other +point he placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to saw +vigorously with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill +while boring a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds +the tinder began to smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; +and in less than a quarter of an hour we were drinking our +lemonade and eating cocoa nuts round a fire that would have +roasted an entire sheep, while the smoke, flames, and sparks, +flew up among the broad leaves of the overhanging palm trees, and +cast a warm glow upon our leafy bower.</p> + +<p>That night the starry sky looked down through the gently +rustling trees upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the +surf upon the coral reef was our lullaby.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith—We +luxuriate in the sea, try our diving powers, and make enchanting +excursions among the coral groves at the bottom of the +ocean—The wonders of the deep enlarged upon.</p> + +<p>What a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious +morning, and find the rising sun staring into your face with +dazzling brilliancy!—to see the birds twittering in the +bushes, and to hear the murmuring of a rill, or the soft hissing +ripples as they fall upon the sea-shore! At any time and in +any place such sights and sounds are most charming, but more +especially are they so when one awakens to them, for the first +time, in a novel and romantic situation, with the soft sweet air +of a tropical climate mingling with the fresh smell of the sea, +and stirring the strange leaves that flutter overhead and around +one, or ruffling the plumage of the stranger birds that fly +inquiringly around, as if to demand what business we have to +intrude uninvited on their domains. When I awoke on the +morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this most +delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of +leaves, gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees +into the clear blue sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that +passed slowly across it, my heart expanded more and more with an +exulting gladness, the like of which I had never felt +before. While I meditated, my thoughts again turned to the +great and kind Creator of this beautiful world, as they had done +on the previous day, when I first beheld the sea and the coral +reef, with the mighty waves dashing over it into the calm waters +of the lagoon.</p> + +<p>While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, +for I had faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to +my beloved mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was +with a feeling of dismay that I remembered I had left it in the +ship. I was much troubled about this. However, I +consoled myself with reflecting that I could keep the second part +of my promise to her, namely, that I should never omit to say my +prayers. So I rose quietly, lest I should disturb my +companions, who were still asleep, and stepped aside into the +bushes for this purpose.</p> + +<p>On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay +down to think over our situation. Just at that moment I was +attracted by the sight of a very small parrot, which Jack +afterwards told me was called a paroquet. It was seated on +a twig that overhung Peterkin’s head, and I was speedily +lost in admiration of its bright green plumage, which was mingled +with other gay colours. While I looked I observed that the +bird turned its head slowly from side to side and looked +downwards, first with the one eye, and then with the other. +On glancing downwards I observed that Peterkin’s mouth was +wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking into +it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in +my composition, and that I never could understand a joke. +In regard to the latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, +when they were explained to me, I understood jokes as well as +most people: but in regard to the former he must certainly have +been wrong, for this bird seemed to me to be extremely funny; and +I could not help thinking that, if it should happen to faint, or +slip its foot, and fall off the twig into Peterkin’s mouth, +he would perhaps think it funny too! Suddenly the paroquet +bent down its head and uttered a loud scream in his face. +This awoke him, and, with a cry of surprise, he started up, while +the foolish bird flew precipitately away.</p> + +<p>“Oh you monster!” cried Peterkin, shaking his fist +at the bird. Then he yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked +what o’clock it was.</p> + +<p>I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches +were at the bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a +little past sunrise.</p> + +<p>Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he +looked up into the bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his +eyes glistened with delight, and he uttered a faint +“hurrah!” and yawned again. Then he gazed +slowly round, till, observing the calm sea through an opening in +the bushes, he started suddenly up as if he had received an +electric shock, uttered a vehement shout, flung off his garments, +and, rushing over the white sands, plunged into the water. +The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow with a look of grave +surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of intelligence +on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that he +only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his +feet, threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a +lion-like spring, dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea +with such force as quite to envelop Peterkin in a shower of +spray. Jack was a remarkably good swimmer and diver, so +that after his plunge we saw no sign of him for nearly a minute; +after which he suddenly emerged, with a cry of joy, a good many +yards out from the shore. My spirits were so much raised by +seeing all this that I, too, hastily threw off my garments and +endeavoured to imitate Jack’s vigorous bound; but I was so +awkward that my foot caught on a stump, and I fell to the ground; +then I slipped on a stone while running over the mud, and nearly +fell again, much to the amusement of Peterkin, who laughed +heartily, and called me a “slow coach,” while Jack +cried out, “Come along, Ralph, and I’ll help +you.” However, when I got into the water I managed +very well, for I was really a good swimmer, and diver too. +I could not, indeed, equal Jack, who was superior to any +Englishman I ever saw, but I infinitely surpassed Peterkin, who +could only swim a little, and could not dive at all.</p> + +<p>While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in +running along the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, +and occasionally dived for stones. I shall never forget my +surprise and delight on first beholding the bottom of the +sea. As I have before stated, the water within the reef was +as calm as a pond; and, as there was no wind, it was quite clear, +from the surface to the bottom, so that we could see down easily +even at a depth of twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I +dived in shallower water, we expected to have found sand and +stones, instead of which we found ourselves in what appeared +really to be an enchanted garden. The whole of the bottom +of the lagoon, as we called the calm water within the reef, was +covered with coral of every shape, size, and hue. Some +portions were formed like large mushrooms; others appeared like +the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached to them; but +the most common kind was a species of branching coral, and some +portions were of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure +white. Among this there grew large quantities of sea-weed +of the richest hues imaginable, and of the most graceful forms; +while innumerable fishes—blue, red, yellow, green, and +striped—sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this +submarine garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our +approaching them.</p> + +<p>On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, +Jack and I rose close to each other.</p> + +<p>“Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so +lovely?” said Jack, as he flung the spray from his +hair.</p> + +<p>“Never,” I replied. “It appears to me +like fairy realms. I can scarcely believe that we are not +dreaming.”</p> + +<p>“Dreaming!” cried Jack, “do you know, Ralph, +I’m half tempted to think that we really are +dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to make the most of it, +and dream another dive; so here goes,—down again, my +boy!”</p> + +<p>We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other +while under water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we +could keep down much longer than I ever recollect having done in +our own seas at home. I believe that this was owing to the +heat of the water, which was so warm that we afterwards found we +could remain in it for two and three hours at a time without +feeling any unpleasant effects such as we used to experience in +the sea at home. When Jack reached the bottom, he grasped +the coral stems, and crept along on his hands and knees, peeping +under the sea-weed and among the rocks. I observed him also +pick up one or two large oysters, and retain them in his grasp, +as if he meant to take them up with him, so I also gathered a +few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a fish with blue and +yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its tail, but +did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and +attempted to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang +like an arrow to the surface, where, on following him, I found +him gasping and coughing, and spitting water from his +mouth. In a few minutes he recovered, and we both turned to +swim ashore.</p> + +<p>“I declare, Ralph,” said he, “that I +actually tried to laugh under water.”</p> + +<p>“So I saw,” I replied; “and I observed that +you very nearly caught that fish by the tail. It would have +done capitally for breakfast if you had.”</p> + +<p>“Breakfast enough here,” said he, holding up the +oysters, as we landed and ran up the beach. +“Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. Split open +these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. +They’ll agree with the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no +doubt.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and +opened them with the edge of our axe, exclaiming, “Now, +that <i>is</i> capital. There’s nothing I’m so +fond of.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! that’s lucky,” remarked Jack. +“I’ll be able to keep you in good order now, Master +Peterkin. You know you can’t dive any better than a +cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall have no +oysters for breakfast.”</p> + +<p>“I’m very glad that our prospect of breakfast is +so good,” said I, “for I’m very +hungry.”</p> + +<p>“Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph,” +said Peterkin, holding a large oyster to my lips. I opened +my mouth and swallowed it in silence, and really it was +remarkably good.</p> + +<p>We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for +spending the day. We had no difficulty with the fire this +morning, as our burning-glass was an admirable one; and while we +roasted a few oysters and ate our cocoa nuts, we held a long, +animated conversation about our plans for the future. What +those plans were, and how we carried them into effect, the reader +shall see hereafter.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable +and interesting discoveries—We get a dreadful +fright—The bread-fruit tree—Wonderful peculiarity of +some of the fruit trees—Signs of former inhabitants.</p> + +<p>Our first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles +we possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a +small cave which we discovered near our encampment. This +cave, we hoped, might be useful to us afterwards as a +store-house. Then we cut two large clubs off a species of +very hard tree which grew near at hand. One of these was +given to Peterkin, the other to me, and Jack armed himself with +the axe. We took these precautions because we purposed to +make an excursion to the top of the mountains of the interior, in +order to obtain a better view of our island. Of course we +knew not what dangers might befall us by the way, so thought it +best to be prepared.</p> + +<p>Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished +our fire, we sallied forth and walked a short distance along the +sea-beach, till we came to the entrance of a valley, through +which flowed the rivulet before mentioned. Here we turned +our backs on the sea and struck into the interior.</p> + +<p>The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley +was truly splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle +rise in the land, which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart +on each side of the valley. These ridges,—which, as +well as the low grounds between them, were covered with trees and +shrubs of the most luxuriant kind—continued to recede +inland for about two miles, when they joined the foot of a small +mountain. This hill rose rather abruptly from the head of +the valley, and was likewise entirely covered even to the top +with trees, except on one particular spot near the left shoulder, +where was a bare and rocky place of a broken and savage +character. Beyond this hill we could not see, and we +therefore directed our course up the banks of the rivulet towards +the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, should that be +possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was.</p> + +<p>Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, +carrying the axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his +enormous club, came second, as he said he should like to be in a +position to defend me if any danger should threaten. I +brought up the rear, but, having been more taken up with the +wonderful and curious things I saw at starting than with thoughts +of possible danger, I had very foolishly left my club behind +me. Although, as I have said the trees and bushes were very +luxuriant, they were not so thickly crowded together as to hinder +our progress among them. We were able to wind in and out, +and to follow the banks of the stream quite easily, although, it +is true, the height and thickness of the foliage prevented us +from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a jutting-out rock on +the hill sides afforded us a position whence we could enjoy the +romantic view and mark our progress towards the foot of the +hill. I was particularly struck, during the walk, with the +richness of the undergrowth in most places, and recognised many +berries and plants that resembled those of my native land, +especially a tall, elegantly-formed fern, which emitted an +agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of flowers, +too, but I did not see so many of these as I should have expected +in such a climate. We also saw a great variety of small +birds of bright plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one +that awoke Peterkin so rudely in the morning.</p> + +<p>Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering +anything to alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing +close under a part of the hill which was hidden from our view by +the broad leaves of the banana trees, which grew in great +luxuriance in that part. Jack was just preparing to force +his way through this thicket, when we were startled and arrested +by a strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to us +quite different from any of the sounds we had heard during the +previous part of our walk.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” cried Peterkin, stopping short and +grasping his club with both hands, “what’s +that?”</p> + +<p>Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right +hand, while with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and +endeavoured to peer amongst them.</p> + +<p>“I can see nothing,” he said, after a short +pause.</p> + +<p>“I think it—”</p> + +<p>Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all +sprang back and stood on the defensive. For myself, having +forgotten my club, and not having taken the precaution to cut +another, I buttoned my jacket, doubled my fists, and threw myself +into a boxing attitude. I must say, however, that I felt +somewhat uneasy; and my companions afterwards confessed that +their thoughts at this moment had been instantly filled with all +they had ever heard or read of wild beasts and savages, +torturings at the stake, roastings alive, and such like horrible +things. Suddenly the pattering noise increased with tenfold +violence. It was followed by a fearful crash among the +bushes, which was rapidly repeated, as if some gigantic animal +were bounding towards us. In another moment an enormous +rock came crashing through the shrubbery, followed by a cloud of +dust and small stones, flew close past the spot where we stood, +carrying bushes and young trees along with it.</p> + +<p>“Pooh! is that all?” exclaimed Peterkin, wiping +the perspiration off his forehead. “Why, I thought it +was all the wild men and beasts in the South Sea Islands +galloping on in one grand charge to sweep us off the face of the +earth, instead of a mere stone tumbling down the mountain +side.”</p> + +<p>“Nevertheless,” remarked Jack, “if that same +stone had hit any of us, it would have rendered the charge you +speak of quite unnecessary, Peterkin.”</p> + +<p>This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. +On examining the spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close +to the foot of a very rugged precipice, from which stones of +various sizes were always tumbling at intervals. Indeed, +the numerous fragments lying scattered all around might have +suggested the cause of the sound, had we not been too suddenly +alarmed to think of anything.</p> + +<p>We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future +excursions into the interior, we would be careful to avoid this +dangerous precipice.</p> + +<p>Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and +prepared to ascend it. Here Jack made a discovery which +caused us all very great joy. This was a tree of a +remarkably beautiful appearance, which Jack confidently declared +to be the celebrated bread-fruit tree.</p> + +<p>“Is it celebrated?” inquired Peterkin, with a look +of great simplicity.</p> + +<p>“It is,” replied Jack</p> + +<p>“That’s odd, now,” rejoined Peterkin; +“never heard of it before.”</p> + +<p>“Then it’s not so celebrated as I thought it +was,” returned Jack, quietly squeezing Peterkin’s hat +over his eyes; “but listen, you ignorant boobie! and hear +of it now.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as +much interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one +of the most valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears +two, sometimes three, crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit +is very like wheaten bread in appearance, and that it constitutes +the principal food of many of the islanders.</p> + +<p>“So,” said Peterkin, “we seem to have +everything ready prepared to our hands in this wonderful +island,—lemonade ready bottled in nuts, and loaf-bread +growing on the trees!”</p> + +<p>Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious +fact that he spoke almost the literal truth. +“Moreover,” continued Jack, “the bread-fruit +tree affords a capital gum, which serves the natives for pitching +their canoes; the bark of the young branches is made by them into +cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and of a good colour, +they build their houses. So you see, lads, that we have no +lack of material here to make us comfortable, if we are only +clever enough to use it.”</p> + +<p>“But are you sure that that’s it?” asked +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Quite sure,” replied Jack; “for I was +particularly interested in the account I once read of it, and I +remember the description well. I am sorry, however, that I +have forgotten the descriptions of many other trees which I am +sure we have seen to-day, if we could but recognise them. +So you see, Peterkin, I’m not up to everything +yet.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind, Jack,” said Peterkin, with a grave, +patronizing expression of countenance, patting his tall companion +on the shoulder,—“never mind, Jack; you know a good +deal for your age. You’re a clever boy, sir,—a +promising young man; and if you only go on as you have begun, +sir, you will—”</p> + +<p>The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping +up Peterkin’s heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick +shrubs, where, finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking +in the sunshine, while Jack and I examined the bread-tree.</p> + +<p>We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its +broad leaves, which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply +indented, and of a glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The +fruit, with which it was loaded, was nearly round, and appeared +to be about six inches in diameter, with a rough rind, marked +with lozenge-shaped divisions. It was of various colours, +from light pea-green to brown and rich yellow. Jack said +that the yellow was the ripe fruit. We afterwards found +that most of the fruit-trees on the island were evergreens, and +that we might, when we wished, pluck the blossom and the ripe +fruit from the same tree. Such a wonderful difference from +the trees of our own country surprised us not a little. The +bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; the trunk was +about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be twenty feet +high, being quite destitute of branches up to that height, where +it branched off into a beautiful and umbrageous head. We +noticed that the fruit hung in clusters of twos and threes on the +branches; but as we were anxious to get to the top of the hill, +we refrained from attempting to pluck any at that time.</p> + +<p>Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and +it was with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep +sides of the hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if +possible a grander, prospect met our gaze. We found that +this was not the highest part of the island, but that another +hill lay beyond, with a wide valley between it and the one on +which we stood. This valley, like the first, was also full +of rich trees, some dark and some light green, some heavy and +thick in foliage, and others light, feathery, and graceful, while +the beautiful blossoms on many of them threw a sort of rainbow +tint over all, and gave to the valley the appearance of a garden +of flowers. Among these we recognised many of the +bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, and also a great many +cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we pushed down the +hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to ascend the +second mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to the +top, but the summit was bare, and in some places broken.</p> + +<p>While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with +much interest. This was the stump of a tree that had +evidently been cut down with an axe! So, then, we were not +the first who had viewed this beautiful isle. The hand of +man had been at work there before us. It now began to recur +to us again that perhaps the island was inhabited, although we +had not seen any traces of man until now; but a second glance at +the stump convinced us that we had not more reason to think so +now than formerly; for the surface of the wood was quite decayed, +and partly covered with fungus and green matter, so that it must +have been cut many years ago.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps,” said Peterkin, “some ship or +other has touched here long ago for wood, and only taken one +tree.”</p> + +<p>We did not think this likely, however, because, in such +circumstances, the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, +and near the shore, whereas this was a large tree and stood near +the top of the mountain. In fact it was the highest large +tree on the mountain, all above it being wood of very recent +growth.</p> + +<p>“I can’t understand it,” said Jack, +scratching the surface of the stump with his axe. “I +can only suppose that the savages have been here and cut it for +some purpose known only to themselves. But, hallo! what +have we here?”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and +fungus from the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces +of marks, as if some inscription or initials had been cut +thereon. But although the traces were distinct, beyond all +doubt, the exact form of the letters could not be made out. +Jack thought they looked like J. S. but we could not be +certain. They had apparently been carelessly cut, and long +exposure to the weather had so broken them up that we could not +make out what they were. We were exceedingly perplexed at +this discovery, and stayed a long time at the place conjecturing +what these marks could have been, but without avail; so, as the +day was advancing, we left it and quickly reached the top of the +mountain.</p> + +<p>We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from +it we saw our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around +us. As I have always thought it impossible to get a thing +properly into one’s understanding without comprehending it, +I shall beg the reader’s patience for a little while I +describe our island, thus, shortly:—</p> + +<p>It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; +the other, on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a +rich, beautiful valley, as already said. This valley +crossed the island from one end to the other, being high in the +middle and sloping on each side towards the sea. The large +mountain sloped, on the side farthest from where we had been +wrecked, gradually towards the sea; but although, when viewed at +a glance, it had thus a regular sloping appearance, a more +careful observation showed that it was broken up into a multitude +of very small vales, or rather dells and glens, intermingled with +little rugged spots and small but abrupt precipices here and +there, with rivulets tumbling over their edges and wandering down +the slopes in little white streams, sometimes glistening among +the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa-nut trees, or hid +altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base of this +mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which +terminated abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the +island, whence we had come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot +of which diverged three valleys; one being that which we had +ascended, with a smaller vale on each side of it, and separated +from it by the two ridges before mentioned. In these +smaller valleys there were no streams, but they were clothed with +the same luxuriant vegetation.</p> + +<p>The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, +as it was almost circular in form, its circumference must have +been thirty miles;—perhaps a little more, if allowance be +made for the numerous bays and indentations of the shore. +The entire island was belted by a beach of pure white sand, on +which laved the gentle ripples of the lagoon. We now also +observed that the coral reef completely encircled the island; but +it varied its distance from it here and there, in some places +being a mile from the beach, in others, a few hundred yards, but +the average distance was half a mile. The reef lay very +low, and the spray of the surf broke quite over it in many +places. This surf never ceased its roar, for, however calm +the weather might be, there is always a gentle swaying motion in +the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable out at sea, +reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water +within the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. +There were three narrow openings in the reef; one opposite each +end of the valley which I have described as crossing the island; +the other opposite our own valley, which we afterwards named the +Valley of the Wreck. At each of these openings the reef +rose into two small green islets, covered with bushes and having +one or two cocoa-nut palms on each. These islets were very +singular, and appeared as if planted expressly for the purpose of +marking the channel into the lagoon. Our captain was making +for one of these openings the day we were wrecked, and would have +reached it too, I doubt not, had not the rudder been torn +away. Within the lagoon were several pretty, low coral +islands, just opposite our encampment; and, immediately beyond +these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other islands, at various +distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all of them, as far as +we could discern, smaller than ours and apparently +uninhabited. They seemed to be low coral islands, raised +but little above the sea, yet covered with cocoa-nut trees.</p> + +<p>All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the +top of the mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we +prepared to return; but here again we discovered traces of the +presence of man. These were a pole or staff and one or two +pieces of wood which had been squared with an axe. All of +these were, however, very much decayed, and they had evidently +not been touched for many years.</p> + +<p>Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. +On the way we fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, +but whether old or of recent date none of us were able to +guess. This also tended to raise our hopes of obtaining +some animal food on the island, so we reached home in good +spirits, quite prepared for supper, and highly satisfied with our +excursion.</p> + +<p>After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we +came to the conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went +to bed.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Jack’s ingenuity—We get into difficulties about +fishing, and get out of them by a method which gives us a cold +bath—Horrible encounter with a shark.</p> + +<p>For several days after the excursion related in the last +chapter we did not wander far from our encampment, but gave +ourselves up to forming plans for the future and making our +present abode comfortable.</p> + +<p>There were various causes that induced this state of +comparative inaction. In the first place, although +everything around us was so delightful, and we could without +difficulty obtain all that we required for our bodily comfort, we +did not quite like the idea of settling down here for the rest of +our lives, far away from our friends and our native land. +To set energetically about preparations for a permanent residence +seemed so like making up our minds to saying adieu to home and +friends for ever, that we tacitly shrank from it and put off our +preparations, for one reason and another, as long as we +could. Then there was a little uncertainty still as to +there being natives on the island, and we entertained a kind of +faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. But as +day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to +work at our homestead.</p> + +<p>During this time, however, we had not been altogether +idle. We made several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, +most of which did not improve it. Then we removed our +goods, and took up our abode in the cave, but found the change so +bad that we returned gladly to the bower. Besides this we +bathed very frequently, and talked a great deal; at least Jack +and Peterkin did,—I listened. Among other useful +things, Jack, who was ever the most active and diligent, +converted about three inches of the hoop-iron into an excellent +knife. First he beat it quite flat with the axe. Then +he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with our +piece of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of +sand-stone. When it was finished he used it to shape a +better handle, to which he fixed it with a strip of his cotton +handkerchief;—in which operation he had, as Peterkin +pointed out, torn off one of Lord Nelson’s noses. +However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by Peterkin as a +fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to the end +of it. This the fish were allowed to swallow, and then they +were pulled quickly ashore. But as the line was very short +and we had no boat, the fish we caught were exceedingly +small.</p> + +<p>One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been +angling, and said in a very cross tone, “I’ll tell +you what, Jack, I’m not going to be humbugged with catching +such contemptible things any longer. I want you to swim out +with me on your back, and let me fish in deep water!”</p> + +<p>“Dear me, Peterkin,” replied Jack, “I had no +idea you were taking the thing so much to heart, else I would +have got you out of that difficulty long ago. Let me +see,”—and Jack looked down at a piece of timber on +which he had been labouring, with a peculiar gaze of abstraction, +which he always assumed when trying to invent or discover +anything.</p> + +<p>“What say you to building a boat?” he inquired, +looking up hastily.</p> + +<p>“Take far too long,” was the reply; +“can’t be bothered waiting. I want to begin at +once!”</p> + +<p>Again Jack considered. “I have it!” he +cried. “We’ll fell a large tree and launch the +trunk of it in the water, so that when you want to fish +you’ve nothing to do but to swim out to it.”</p> + +<p>“Would not a small raft do better?” said I.</p> + +<p>“Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together +with. Perhaps we may find something hereafter that will do +as well, but, in the meantime, let us try the tree.”</p> + +<p>This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far +distant, where we knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew +near the water’s edge. As soon as we reached it Jack +threw off his coat, and, wielding the axe with his sturdy arms, +hacked and hewed at it for a quarter of an hour without +stopping. Then he paused, and, while he sat down to rest, I +continued the work. Then Peterkin made a vigorous attack on +it, so that when Jack renewed his powerful blows, a few minutes +cutting brought it down with a terrible crash.</p> + +<p>“Hurrah! now for it,” cried Jack; “let us +off with its head.”</p> + +<p>So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six +yards from the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, +short poles or levers from the stout branches, with which to roll +the log down the beach into the sea; for, as it was nearly two +feet thick at the large end, we could not move it without such +helps. With the levers, however, we rolled it slowly into +the sea.</p> + +<p>Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next +shaped the levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted +to embark. This was easy enough to do; but, after seating +ourselves astride the log, it was with the utmost difficulty we +kept it from rolling round and plunging us into the water. +Not that we minded that much; but we preferred, if possible, to +fish in dry clothes. To be sure, our trousers were +necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling in the water on each +side of the log; but, as they could be easily dried, we did not +care. After half an hour’s practice, we became expert +enough to keep our balance pretty steadily. Then Peterkin +laid down his paddle, and having baited his line with a whole +oyster, dropt it into deep water.</p> + +<p>“Now, then, Jack,” said he, “be cautious; +steer clear o’ that sea-weed. There; that’s it; +gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at least a foot long +down there, coming to—ha! that’s it! Oh! +bother, he’s off.”</p> + +<p>“Did he bite?” said Jack, urging the log onwards a +little with his paddle.</p> + +<p>“Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the +moment I began to haul he opened his jaws and let it out +again.”</p> + +<p>“Let him swallow it next time,” said Jack, +laughing at the melancholy expression of Peterkin’s +visage.</p> + +<p>“There he’s again,” cried Peterkin, his eyes +flashing with excitement. “Look out! Now +then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute +<i>won’t</i> swallow it!”</p> + +<p>“Try to haul him up by the mouth, then,” cried +Jack. “Do it gently.”</p> + +<p>A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor +Peterkin had tried and failed again.</p> + +<p>“Never mind, lad,” said Jack, in a voice of +sympathy; “we’ll move on, and offer it to some other +fish.” So saying, Jack plied his paddle; but scarcely +had he moved from the spot, when a fish with an enormous head and +a little body darted from under a rock and swallowed the bait at +once.</p> + +<p>“Got him this time,—that’s a fact!” +cried Peterkin, hauling in the line. “He’s +swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I declare. Oh +what a thumper!”</p> + +<p>As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward +to see it, and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his +arms round the fish’s neck; and, in another instant, we +were all floundering in the water!</p> + +<p>A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface +like three drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We +soon recovered our position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin +secured the fish, which had well-nigh escaped in the midst of our +struggles. It was little worth having, however; but, as +Peterkin remarked, it was better than the smouts he had been +catching for the last two or three days; so we laid it on the log +before us, and having re-baited the line, dropt it in again for +another.</p> + +<p>Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention +was suddenly attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards +away from us. Peterkin shouted to us to paddle in that +direction, as he thought it was a big fish, and we might have a +chance of catching it. But Jack, instead of complying, +said, in a deep, earnest tone of voice, which I never before +heard him use,—</p> + +<p>“Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; +quick,—it’s a shark!”</p> + +<p>The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for +it must be remembered that our legs were hanging down in the +water, and we could not venture to pull them up without upsetting +the log. Peterkin instantly hauled up the line; and, +grasping his paddle, exerted himself to the utmost, while we also +did our best to make for shore. But we were a good way off, +and the log being, as I have before said, very heavy, moved but +slowly through the water. We now saw the shark quite +distinctly swimming round and round us, its sharp fin every now +and then protruding above the water. From its active and +unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up its mind to attack +us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our lives, while he +himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted “Look +out!—there he comes!” and in a second we saw the +monstrous fish dive close under us, and turn half over on his +side. But we all made a great commotion with our paddles, +which no doubt frightened it away for that time, as we saw it +immediately after circling round us as before.</p> + +<p>“Throw the fish to him,” cried Jack, in a quick, +suppressed voice; “we’ll make the shore in time yet +if we can keep him off for a few minutes.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then +plied his paddle again with all his might. No sooner had +the fish fallen on the water than we observed the shark to +sink. In another second we saw its white breast rising; for +sharks always turn over on their sides when about to seize their +prey, their mouths being not at the point of their heads like +those of other fish, but, as it were, under their chins. In +another moment his snout rose above the water,—his wide +jaws, armed with a terrific double row of teeth, appeared. +The dead fish was engulfed, and the shark sank out of +sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that it would be +satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its +quick motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once.</p> + +<p>“Stop paddling,” cried Jack suddenly. +“I see it coming up behind us. Now, obey my orders +quickly. Our lives may depend on it Ralph. Peterkin, +do your best to <i>balance the log</i>. Don’t look +out for the shark. Don’t glance behind you. Do +nothing but balance the log.”</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p77b.jpg"> +<img alt="A dreadful adventure" src="images/p77s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only +too glad to do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of +escape, for we had implicit confidence in Jack’s courage +and wisdom. For a few seconds, that seemed long minutes to +my mind, we sat thus silently; but I could not resist glancing +backward, despite the orders to the contrary. On doing so, +I saw Jack sitting rigid like a statue, with his paddle raised, +his lips compressed, and his eye-brows bent over his eyes, which +glared savagely from beneath them down into the water. I +also saw the shark, to my horror, quite close under the log, in +the act of darting towards Jack’s foot. I could +scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In another moment +the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the water, +and threw it over the log. The monster’s snout rubbed +against the log as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into +which Jack instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its +throat. So violent was the act that Jack rose to his feet +in performing it; the log was thereby rolled completely over, and +we were once more plunged into the water. We all rose, +spluttering and gasping, in a moment.</p> + +<p>“Now then, strike out for shore,” cried +Jack. “Here, Peterkin, catch hold of my collar, and +kick out with a will.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such +force that he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being +free from all encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with +him. As we had by this time drawn pretty near to the shore, +a few minutes more sufficed to carry us into shallow water; and, +finally, we landed in safety, though very much exhausted, and not +a little frightened by our terrible adventure.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to +dive—How he did it—More difficulties +overcome—The water garden—Curious creatures of the +sea—The tank—Candles missed very much, and the +candle-nut tree discovered—Wonderful account of +Peterkin’s first voyage—Cloth found growing on a +tree—A plan projected, and arms prepared for offence and +defence—A dreadful cry.</p> + +<p>Our encounter with the shark was the first great danger that +had befallen us since landing on this island, and we felt very +seriously affected by it, especially when we considered that we +had so often unwittingly incurred the same danger before while +bathing. We were now forced to take to fishing again in the +shallow water, until we should succeed in constructing a +raft. What troubled us most, however, was, that we were +compelled to forego our morning swimming excursions. We +did, indeed, continue to enjoy our bathe in the shallow water, +but Jack and I found that one great source of our enjoyment was +gone, when we could no longer dive down among the beautiful coral +groves at the bottom of the lagoon. We had come to be so +fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest in watching +the formations of coral and the gambols of the many beautiful +fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that we had +become quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and the +localities that they chiefly haunted. We had also become +expert divers. But we made it a rule never to stay long +under water at a time. Jack told me that to do so often was +bad for the lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, would +ere long do us a serious injury. So we never stayed at the +bottom as long as we might have done, but came up frequently to +the top for fresh air, and dived down again immediately. +Sometimes, when Jack happened to be in a humorous frame, he would +seat himself at the bottom of the sea on one of the brain corals, +as if he were seated on a large paddock-stool, and then make +faces at me, in order, if possible, to make me laugh under +water. At first, when he took me unawares, he nearly +succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to laugh; +but afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being +naturally of a grave disposition, I had no difficulty in +restraining myself. I used often to wonder how poor +Peterkin would have liked to be with us; and he sometimes +expressed much regret at being unable to join us. I used to +do my best to gratify him, poor fellow, by relating all the +wonders that we saw; but this, instead of satisfying, seemed only +to whet his curiosity the more, so one day we prevailed on him to +try to go down with us. But, although a brave boy in every +other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the water, and it was +with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken down, for he +could never have managed to push himself down to the bottom +without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a +yard or so into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle +and kick violently, so we were forced to let him go, when he rose +out of the water like a cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful +roar, and struck out for the land with the utmost possible +haste.</p> + +<p>Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought +thereon, Jack and I felt very much depressed in our +spirits. I could see, also, that Peterkin grieved and +sympathized with us, for, when talking about this matter, he +refrained from jesting and bantering us upon it.</p> + +<p>As, however, a man’s difficulties usually set him upon +devising methods to overcome them, whereby he often discovers +better things than those he may have lost, so this our difficulty +induced us to think of searching for a large pool among the +rocks, where the water should be deep enough for diving yet so +surrounded by rocks as to prevent sharks from getting at +us. And such a pool we afterwards found, which proved to be +very much better than our most sanguine hopes anticipated. +It was situated not more than ten minutes’ walk from our +camp, and was in the form of a small deep bay or basin, the +entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so shallow that no +fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not unless he +should be a remarkably thin one.</p> + +<p>Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the +coral formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed +plants far more lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon +itself. And the water was so clear and still, that, +although very deep, you could see the minutest object at the +bottom. Besides this, there was a ledge of rock which +overhung the basin at its deepest part, from which we could dive +pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit and see not only all +the wonders I had described to him, but also see Jack and me +creeping amongst the marine shrubbery at the bottom, like, +as—he expressed it,—“two great white +sea-monsters.” During these excursions of ours to the +bottom of the sea, we began to get an insight into the manners +and customs of its inhabitants, and to make discoveries of +wonderful things, the like of which we never before +conceived. Among other things, we were deeply interested +with the operations of the little coral insect which, I was +informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely constructed many +of the numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, certainly, +when we considered the great reef which these insects had formed +round the island on which we were cast, and observed their +ceaseless activity in building their myriad cells, it did at +first seem as if this might be true; but then, again, when I +looked at the mountains of the island, and reflected that there +were thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South +Seas, I doubted that there must be some mistake here. But +more of this hereafter.</p> + +<p>I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of +the anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and +such-like creatures; and was not content with watching those I +saw during my dives in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop +out a hole in the coral rock close to it, which I filled with +salt water, and stocked with sundry specimens of anemones and +shell-fish, in order to watch more closely how they were in the +habit of passing their time. Our burning-glass also now +became a great treasure to me, as it enabled me to magnify, and +so to perceive more clearly the forms and actions of these +curious creatures of the deep.</p> + +<p>Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we +began to talk of a project which we had long had in +contemplation,—namely, to travel entirely round the island; +in order, first, to ascertain whether it contained any other +productions which might be useful to us; and, second, to see +whether there might be any place more convenient and suitable for +our permanent residence than that on which we were now +encamped. Not that we were in any degree dissatisfied with +it; on the contrary, we entertained quite a home-feeling to our +bower and its neighbourhood; but if a better place did exist, +there was no reason why we should not make use of it. At +any rate, it would be well to know of its existence.</p> + +<p>We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack +proposed that, before undertaking such an excursion, we should +supply ourselves with good defensive arms, for, as we intended +not only to go round all the shore, but to ascend most of the +valleys, before returning home, we should be likely to meet in +with, he would not say dangers, but, at least, with everything +that existed on the island, whatever that might be.</p> + +<p>“Besides,” said Jack, “it won’t do for +us to live on cocoa-nuts and oysters always. No doubt they +are very excellent in their way, but I think a little animal +food, now and then, would be agreeable as well as good for us; +and as there are many small birds among the trees, some of which +are probably very good to eat, I think it would be a capital plan +to make bows and arrows, with which we could easily knock them +over.”</p> + +<p>“First rate!” cried Peterkin. “You +will make the bows, Jack, and I’ll try my hand at the +arrows. The fact is, I’m quite tired of throwing +stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I +think, and have persevered up to the present time, but I’ve +never hit anything yet.”</p> + +<p>“You forget,” said I, “you hit me one day on +the shin.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, true,” replied Peterkin, “and a +precious shindy you kicked up in consequence. But you were +at least four yards away from the impudent paroquet I aimed at; +so you see what a horribly bad shot I am.”</p> + +<p>“But,” said I, “Jack, you cannot make three +bows and arrows before to-morrow, and would it not be a pity to +waste time, now that we have made up our minds to go on this +expedition? Suppose that you make one bow and arrow for +yourself, and we can take our clubs?”</p> + +<p>“That’s true, Ralph. The day is pretty far +advanced, and I doubt if I can make even one bow before +dark. To be sure I might work by fire-light, after the sun +goes down.”</p> + +<p>We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed +with the sun, as we had no pressing call to work o’ nights; +and, indeed, our work during the day was usually hard +enough,—what between fishing, and improving our bower, and +diving in the Water Garden, and rambling in the woods; so that, +when night came, we were usually very glad to retire to our +beds. But now that we had a desire to work at night, we +felt a wish for candles.</p> + +<p>“Won’t a good blazing fire give you light +enough?” inquired Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Jack, “quite enough; but then +it will give us a great deal more than enough of heat in this +warm climate of ours.”</p> + +<p>“True,” said Peterkin; “I forgot that. +It would roast us.”</p> + +<p>“Well, as you’re always doing that at any +rate,” remarked Jack, “we could scarcely call it a +change. But the fact is, I’ve been thinking over this +subject before. There is a certain nut growing in these +islands which is called the candle-nut, because the natives use +it instead of candles, and I know all about it, and how to +prepare it for burning—”</p> + +<p>“Then why don’t you do it?” interrupted +Peterkin. “Why have you kept us in the dark so long, +you vile philosopher?”</p> + +<p>“Because,” said Jack, “I have not seen the +tree yet, and I’m not sure that I should know either the +tree or the nuts if I did see them. You see, I forget the +description.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! that’s just the way with me,” said +Peterkin with a deep sigh. “I never could keep in my +mind for half an hour the few descriptions I ever attempted to +remember. The very first voyage I ever made was caused by +my mistaking a description, or forgetting it, which is the same +thing. And a horrible voyage it was. I had to fight +with the captain the whole way out, and made the homeward voyage +by swimming!”</p> + +<p>“Come, Peterkin,” said I, “you can’t +get even <i>me</i> to believe that.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not, but it’s true, +notwithstanding,” returned Peterkin, pretending to be hurt +at my doubting his word.</p> + +<p>“Let us hear how it happened,” said Jack, while a +good-natured smile overspread his face.</p> + +<p>“Well, you must know,” began Peterkin, “that +the very day before I went to sea, I was greatly taken up with a +game at hockey, which I was playing with my old school-fellows +for the last time before leaving them. You see I was young +then, Ralph.” Peterkin gazed, in an abstracted and +melancholy manner, out to sea! “Well, in the midst of +the game, my uncle, who had taken all the bother and trouble of +getting me bound ’prentice and rigged out, came and took me +aside, and told me that he was called suddenly away from home, +and would not be able to see me aboard, as he had intended. +‘However,’ said he, ‘the captain knows you are +coming, so that’s not of much consequence; but as +you’ll have to find the ship yourself, you must remember +her name and description. D’ye hear, +boy?’ I certainly did hear, but I’m afraid I +did not understand, for my mind was so taken up with the game, +which I saw my side was losing, that I began to grow impatient, +and the moment my uncle finished his description of the ship, and +bade me good-bye, I bolted back to my game, with only a confused +idea of three masts, and a green painted tafferel, and a gilt +figure-head of Hercules with his club at the bow. Next day +I was so much cast down with everybody saying good-bye, and a lot +o’ my female friends cryin’ horribly over me, that I +did not start for the harbour, where the ship was lying among a +thousand others, till it was almost too late. So I had to +run the whole way. When I reached the pier, there were so +many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. ‘Now,’ said I to +myself, ‘Peterkin, you’re in a fix.’ Then +I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and three masts, belonging to +a ship just about to start; so I darted on board, but speedily +jumped on shore again, when I found that two of the masts +belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a third! +At last I caught sight of what I made sure was it,—a fine +large vessel just casting off her moorings. The tafferel +was green. Three masts,—yes, that must be +it,—and the gilt figure-head of Hercules. To be sure +it had a three-pronged pitchfork in its hand instead of a club; +but that might be my uncle’s mistake; or perhaps Hercules +sometimes varied his weapons. ‘Cast off!’ +roared a voice from the quarter-deck. ‘Hold +on!’ cried I, rushing frantically through the crowd. +‘Hold on! hold on!’ repeated some of the bystanders, +while the men at the ropes delayed for a minute. This threw +the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his friends had +come down to see him off, and having his orders contradicted so +flatly was too much for him. However, the delay was +sufficient. I took a race and a good leap; the ropes were +cast off; the steam-tug gave a puff, and we started. +Suddenly the captain was up to me: ‘Where did you come +from, you scamp, and what do you want here?’</p> + +<p>“‘Please, sir,’ said I, touching my cap, +‘I’m you’re new ’prentice come +aboard.’</p> + +<p>“‘New ’Prentice,’ said he, stamping, +‘I’ve got no new ’prentice. My boys are +all aboard already. This is a trick, you young +blackguard. You’ve run away, you have;’ and the +captain stamped about the deck and swore dreadfully; for, you +see, the thought of having to stop the ship and lower a boat and +lose half an hour, all for the slake of sending a small boy +ashore, seemed to make him very angry. Besides, it was +blowin’ fresh outside the harbour, so that, to have let the +steamer alongside to put me into it was no easy job. Just +as we were passing the pier-head, where several boats were rowing +into harbour, the captain came up to me,—</p> + +<p>“‘You’ve run away, you blackguard,’ he +said, giving me a box on the ear.</p> + +<p>“‘No I haven’t,’ said I, angrily; for +the box was by no means a light one.</p> + +<p>“Hark’ee, boy, can you swim?’</p> + +<p>“‘Yes,’ said I.</p> + +<p>“‘Then do it,’ and, seizing me by my +trousers and the nape of my neck, he tossed me over the side into +the sea. The fellows in the boats at the end of the pier, +backed their oars on seeing this; but observing that I could +swim, they allowed me to make the best of my way to the +pier-head. So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim my +first homeward voyage.”</p> + +<p>Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. +“But tell us about the candle-nut tree,” said I; +“you were talking about it.”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” said Jack, “but I fear I can +remember little about it. I believe the nut is about the +size of a walnut; and I think that the leaves are white, but I am +not sure.”</p> + +<p>“Eh! ha! hum!” exclaimed Peterkin, “I saw a +tree answering to that description this very day.”</p> + +<p>“Did you?” cried Jack. “Is it far from +this?”</p> + +<p>“No, not half a mile.”</p> + +<p>“Then lead me to it,” said Jack, seizing his +axe.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the +underwood of the forest, headed by Peterkin.</p> + +<p>We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had +closely examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut +tree. Its leaves were of a beautiful silvery white, and +formed a fine contrast to the dark-green foliage of the +surrounding trees. We immediately filled our pockets with +the nuts, after which Jack said,—</p> + +<p>“Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one +of the long branches.”</p> + +<p>This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was +very high, and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger +trees, he was not much accustomed to climbing the high +ones. The leaf or branch was a very large one, and we were +surprised at its size and strength. Viewed from a little +distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems to be a tall, straight stem, +without a single branch except at the top, where there is a tuft +of feathery-looking leaves, that seem to wave like soft plumes in +the wind. But when we saw one of these leaves or branches +at our feet, we found it to be a strong stalk, about fifteen feet +long, with a number of narrow, pointed leaflets ranged +alternately on each side. But what seemed to us the most +wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling +cloth, which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where +it had been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had +the greatest difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, +on account of this substance, as it was wrapped quite round the +tree, and, he observed, round all the other branches, thus +forming a strong support to the large leaves while exposed to +high winds. When I call this substance cloth I do not +exaggerate. Indeed, with regard to all the things I saw +during my eventful career in the South Seas, I have been +exceedingly careful not to exaggerate, or in any way to mislead +or deceive my readers. This cloth, I say, was remarkably +like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam or fibre +down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, about +the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these +fibres, very long and tough, the one layer crossing the other +obliquely, and the whole was cemented together with a still finer +fibrous and adhesive substance. When we regarded it +attentively, we could with difficulty believe that it had not +been woven by human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth +we stripped carefully off, and found it to be above two feet +long, by a foot broad, and we carried it home with us as a great +prize.</p> + +<p>Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the +central spine or stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. +Having made a small fire, he baked the nuts slightly, and then +pealed off the husks. After this he wished to bore a hole +in them, which, not having anything better at hand at the time, +he did with the point of our useless pencil-case. Then he +strung them on the cocoa-nut spine, and on putting a light to the +topmost nut, we found to our joy that it burned with a clear, +beautiful flame; upon seeing which, Peterkin sprang up and danced +round the fire for at least five minutes in the excess of his +satisfaction.</p> + +<p>“Now lads,” said Jack, extinguishing our candle, +the sun will set in an hour, so we have no time to lose. +“I shall go and cut a young tree to make my bow out of, and +you had better each of you go and select good strong sticks for +clubs, and we’ll set to work at them after dark.”</p> + +<p>So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by +Peterkin, while I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, +and fell to examining its structure. So engrossed was I in +this that I was still sitting in the same attitude and occupation +when my companions returned.</p> + +<p>“I told you so!” cried Peterkin, with a loud +laugh. “Oh, Ralph, you’re incorrigible. +See, there’s a club for you. I was sure, when we left +you looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find you poring +over it when we came back, so I just cut a club for you as well +as for myself.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, Peterkin,” said I. “It was +kind of you to do that, instead of scolding me for a lazy fellow, +as I confess I deserve.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! as to that,” returned Peterkin, +“I’ll blow you up yet, if you wish it—only it +would be of no use if I did, for you’re a perfect +mule!”</p> + +<p>As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing +it in a holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our +bower, we seated ourselves on our leafy beds and began to +work.</p> + +<p>“I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use,” +said Jack, chipping the piece of wood he had brought with his +axe. “I used to be a pretty fair shot once. But +what’s that you’re doing?” he added, looking at +Peterkin, who had drawn the end of a long pole into the tent, and +was endeavouring to fit a small piece of the hoop-iron to the end +of it.</p> + +<p>“I’m going to enlist into the Lancers,” +answered Peterkin. “You see, Jack, I find the club +rather an unwieldy instrument for my delicately-formed muscles, +and I flatter myself I shall do more execution with a +spear.”</p> + +<p>“Well, if length constitutes power,” said Jack, +“you’ll certainly be invincible.”</p> + +<p>The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, +being a very strong but light and tough young tree, which merely +required thinning at the butt to be a serviceable weapon.</p> + +<p>“That’s a very good idea,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Which—this?” inquired Peterkin, pointing to +the spear.</p> + +<p>“Yes;” I replied.</p> + +<p>“Humph!” said he; “you’d find it a +pretty tough and matter-of-fact idea, if you had it stuck through +your gizzard, old boy!”</p> + +<p>“I mean the idea of making it is a good one,” said +I, laughing. “And, now I think of it, I’ll +change my plan, too. I don’t think much of a club, so +I’ll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. I +used to be very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David +slaying Goliath the Philistine, and I was once thought to be +expert at it.”</p> + +<p>So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time +we all worked very busily without speaking. At length +Peterkin looked up: “I say, Jack, I’m sorry to say I +must apply to you for another strip of your handkerchief, to tie +on this rascally head with. It’s pretty well torn at +any rate, so you won’t miss it.”</p> + +<p>Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin +suddenly laid his hand on his arm and arrested him.</p> + +<p>“Hist, man,” said he, “be tender; you should +never be needlessly cruel if you can help it. Do try to +shave past Lord Nelson’s mouth without tearing it, if +possible! Thanks. There are plenty more handkerchiefs +on the cocoa-nut trees.”</p> + +<p>Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record +his jests and humorous sayings now!</p> + +<p>While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but +most strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the +sea, but was so far away that we could not clearly distinguish +its precise direction. Rushing out of our bower, we +hastened down to the beach and stayed to listen. Again it +came quite loud and distinct on the night air,—a prolonged, +hideous cry, something like the braying of an ass. The moon +had risen, and we could see the islands in and beyond the lagoon +quite plainly, but there was no object visible to account for +such a cry. A strong gust of wind was blowing from the +point whence the sound came, but this died away while we were +gazing out to sea.</p> + +<p>“What can it be?” said Peterkin, in a low whisper, +while we all involuntarily crept closer to each other.</p> + +<p>“Do you know,” said Jack, “I have heard that +mysterious sound twice before, but never so loud as +to-night. Indeed it was so faint that I thought I must have +merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to alarm you, I said +nothing about it.”</p> + +<p>We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did +not come, we returned to the bower and resumed our work.</p> + +<p>“Very strange,” said Peterkin, quite +gravely. “Do you believe in ghosts, Ralph?”</p> + +<p>“No,” I answered, “I do not. +Nevertheless I must confess that strange, unaccountable sounds, +such as we have just heard, make me feel a little +uneasy.”</p> + +<p>“What say you to it, Jack?”</p> + +<p>“I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy,” he +replied. “I never saw a ghost myself, and I never met +with any one who had; and I have generally found that strange and +unaccountable things have almost always been accounted for, and +found to be quite simple, on close examination. I certainly +can’t imagine what <i>that</i> sound is; but I’m +quite sure I shall find out before long,—and if it’s +a ghost I’ll—”</p> + +<p>“Eat it,” cried Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I’ll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two +arrows are finished; so if you’re ready we had better turn +in.”</p> + +<p>By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an +iron point very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, +the lines of which were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut +cloth, plaited; and Jack had made a stout bow, nearly five feet +long, with two arrows, feathered with two or three large plumes +which some bird had dropt. They had no barbs, but Jack said +that if arrows were well feathered, they did not require iron +points, but would fly quite well if merely sharpened at the +point; which I did not know before.</p> + +<p>“A feathered arrow without a barb,” said he, +“is a good weapon, but a barbed arrow without feathers is +utterly useless.”</p> + +<p>The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, +part of which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the +bow.</p> + +<p>Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought +it wise to exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons +before starting, so we spent the whole of the next day in +practising. And it was well we did so, for we found that +our arms were very imperfect, and that we were far from perfect +in the use of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much +too strong, and he had to thin it. Also the spear was much +too heavy, and so had to be reduced in thickness, although +nothing would induce Peterkin to have it shortened. My +sling answered very well, but I had fallen so much out of +practice that my first stone knocked off Peterkin’s hat, +and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. +However, after having spent the whole day in diligent practice, +we began to find some of our former expertness returning—at +least Jack and I did. As for Peterkin, being naturally a +neat-handed boy, he soon handled his spear well, and could run +full tilt at a cocoa nut, and hit it with great precision once +out of every five times.</p> + +<p>But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to +the unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had +made him Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from +morning till night, perseveringly, at the same thing. +Peterkin wished very much to run about and stick his spear into +everything he passed; but Jack put up a cocoa nut, and would not +let him leave off running at that for a moment, except when he +wanted to rest. We laughed at Jack for this, but we were +both convinced that it did us much good.</p> + +<p>That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down +to rest, although we were much fatigued, in order that we might +be in readiness to set out on our expedition at daylight on the +following morning.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Prepare for a journey round the island—Sagacious +reflections—Mysterious appearances and startling +occurrences.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of +the broad Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing +in Peterkin’s ear to awaken him, ran down the beach to take +his customary dip in the sea. We did not, as was our wont, +bathe that morning in our Water Garden, but, in order to save +time, refreshed ourselves in the shallow water just opposite the +bower. Our breakfast was also despatched without loss of +time, and in less than an hour afterwards all our preparations +for the journey were completed.</p> + +<p>In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of +cocoa-nut cloth round his waist, into which he thrust the +axe. I was also advised to put on a belt and carry a short +cudgel or bludgeon in it; for, as Jack truly remarked, the sling +would be of little use if we should chance to come to close +quarters with any wild animal. As for Peterkin, +notwithstanding that he carried such a long, and I must add, +frightful-looking spear over his shoulder, we could not prevail +on him to leave his club behind; “for,” said he, +“a spear at close quarters is not worth a +button.” I must say that it seemed to me that the +club was, to use his own style of language, not worth a +button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the head, something +like the club which I remember to have observed in picture-books +of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that he required +to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at all. +However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out upon +our travels.</p> + +<p>We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as +we knew that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in +with cocoa-nut trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as +Peterkin said, with meat and drink and +pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the precaution, however, to +put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest we should want +fire.</p> + +<p>The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that +very still and peaceful sort which made the few noises that we +heard seem to be <i>quiet</i> noises. I know no other way +of expressing this idea. Noises which so far from +interrupting the universal tranquillity of earth, sea, and +sky—rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the world +around us really was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the +peculiarly melancholy—yet, it seemed to me, +cheerful—plaint of sea-birds floating on the glassy water, +or sailing in the sky, also the subdued twittering of little +birds among the bushes, the faint ripples on the beach, and the +solemn boom of the surf upon the distant coral reef. We +felt very glad in our hearts as we walked along the sands side by +side. For my part, I felt so deeply overjoyed, that I was +surprised at my own sensations, and fell into a reverie upon the +causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion that a state +of profound peace and repose, both in regard to outward objects +and within the soul, is the happiest condition in which man can +be placed; for, although I had many a time been most joyful and +happy when engaged in bustling, energetic, active pursuits or +amusements, I never found that such joy or satisfaction was so +deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as that which I now +experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this opinion +when I observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that +Peterkin’s happiness was also very great; yet he did not +express this by dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much +as a single shout, but walked quietly between us with his eye +sparkling, and a joyful smile upon his countenance. My +reader must not suppose that I thought all this in the clear and +methodical manner in which I have set it down here. These +thoughts did, indeed, pass through my mind, but they did so in a +very confused and indefinite manner, for I was young at that +time, and not much given to deep reflections. Neither did I +consider that the peace whereof I write is not to be found in +this world—at least in its perfection, although I have +since learned that by religion a man may attain to a very great +degree of it.</p> + +<p>I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between +us. We had two ways of walking together about our +island. When we travelled through the woods, we always did +so in single file, as by this method we advanced with greater +facility, the one treading in the other’s footsteps. +In such cases Jack always took the lead, Peterkin followed, and I +brought up the rear. But when we travelled along the sands, +which extended almost in an unbroken line of glistening white +round the island, we marched abreast, as we found this method +more sociable, and every way more pleasant. Jack, being the +tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin marched between us, as +by this arrangement either of us could talk to him or he to us, +while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse together, we +could conveniently do so over Peterkin’s head. +Peterkin used to say, in reference to this arrangement, that had +he been as tall as either of us, our order of march might have +been the same, for, as Jack often used to scold him for letting +everything we said to him pass in at one ear and out at the +other, his head could of course form no interruption to our +discourse.</p> + +<p>We were now fairly started. Half a mile’s walk +conveyed us round a bend in the land which shut out our bower +from view, and for some time we advanced at a brisk pace without +speaking, though our eyes were not idle, but noted everything, in +the woods, on the shore, or in the sea, that was +interesting. After passing the ridge of land that formed +one side of our valley—the Valley of the Wreck—we +beheld another small vale lying before us in all the luxuriant +loveliness of tropical vegetation. We had, indeed, seen it +before from the mountain-top, but we had no idea that it would +turn out to be so much more lovely when we were close to +it. We were about to commence the exploration of this +valley, when Peterkin stopped us, and directed our attention to a +very remarkable appearance in advance along the shore.</p> + +<p>“What’s yon, think you?” said he, levelling +his spear, as if he expected an immediate attack from the object +in question, though it was full half a mile distant.</p> + +<p>As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as +if of steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of +several feet, and then disappeared. Had this been near the +sea, we would not have been so greatly surprised, as it might in +that case have been the surf, for at this part of the coast the +coral reef approached so near to the island that in some parts it +almost joined it. There was therefore no lagoon between, +and the heavy surf of the ocean beat almost up to the +rocks. But this white column appeared about fifty yards +inland. The rocks at the place were rugged, and they +stretched across the sandy beach into the sea. Scarce had +we ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when another +column flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot +where the first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long +irregular intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were +now quite sure that the columns were watery or composed of spray, +but what caused them we could not guess, so we determined to go +and see.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the +spray. We had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The +ground also was full of holes here and there. Now, while we +stood anxiously waiting for the re-appearance of these +water-spouts, we heard a low, rumbling sound near us, which +quickly increased to a gargling and hissing noise, and a moment +afterwards a thick spout of water burst upwards from a hole in +the rock, and spouted into the air with much violence, and so +close to where Jack and I were standing that it nearly touched +us. We sprang to one side, but not before a cloud of spray +descended, and drenched us both to the skin.</p> + +<p>Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few +drops, and burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on +beholding our miserable plight.</p> + +<p>“Mind your eye!” he shouted eagerly, “there +goes another!” The words were scarcely out of his +mouth when there came up a spout from another hole, which served +us exactly in the same manner as before.</p> + +<p>Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was +abruptly put a stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to +where he stood.</p> + +<p>“Where’ll it spout this time, I wonder?” he +said, looking about with some anxiety, and preparing to +run. Suddenly there came a loud hiss or snort; a fierce +spout of water burst up between Peterkin’s legs, blew him +off his feet, enveloped him in its spray, and hurled him to the +ground. He fell with so much violence that we feared he +must have broken some of his bones, and ran anxiously to his +assistance; but fortunately he had fallen on a clump of tangled +herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most deplorable +condition.</p> + +<p>It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite +sure that he was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the +next spout might arise, we assisted him hastily to jump up and +hurry from the spot.</p> + +<p>I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the +spout of water was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin +completely off his legs, I am not quite certain of the exact +height to which it lifted him, being somewhat startled by the +event, and blinded partially by the spray, so that my power of +observation was somewhat impaired for the moment.</p> + +<p>“What’s to be done now?” inquired Peterkin +ruefully.</p> + +<p>“Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves,” replied +Jack.</p> + +<p>“And here is material ready to our hand,” said I, +picking up a dried branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the +woods.</p> + +<p>In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again +dried. While they were hanging up before the fire, we +walked down to the beach, and soon observed that these curious +spouts took place immediately after the fall of a huge wave, +never before it; and, moreover, that the spouts did not take +place excepting when the billow was an extremely large one. +From this we concluded that there must be a subterraneous channel +in the rock into which the water was driven by the larger waves, +and finding no way of escape except through these small holes, +was thus forced up violently through them. At any rate, we +could not conceive any other reason for these strange +water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple and probable one, +we forthwith adopted it.</p> + +<p>“I say, Ralph, what’s that in the water? is it a +shark?” said Jack, just as we were about to quit the +place.</p> + +<p>I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which +he was looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I +saw a very faint pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed +to move slightly while I looked at it.</p> + +<p>“It’s like a fish of some sort,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Hallo, Peterkin!” cried Jack, “fetch your +spear; here’s work for it.”</p> + +<p>But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be +too short.</p> + +<p>“There, now,” said Peterkin with a sneer, +“you were always telling me it was too long.”</p> + +<p>Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let +go his hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must +have missed, for the handle soon rose again; and when the spear +was drawn up, there was the pale green object in exactly the same +spot, slowly moving its tail.</p> + +<p>“Very odd,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack +and all of us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could +neither hit it nor drive it away, so we were compelled to +continue our journey without discovering what it was. I was +very much perplexed at this strange appearance in the water, and +could not get it out of my mind for a long time afterwards. +However, I quieted myself by resolving that I would pay a visit +to it again at some more convenient season.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits—The +resources of the Coral Island gradually unfolded—The +banian-tree—Another tree which is supported by natural +planks—Water-fowl found—A very remarkable discovery, +and a very peculiar murder—We luxuriate on the fat of the +land.</p> + +<p>Our examination of the little valley proved to be altogether +most satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to +those we had already seen in our own valley, but also one or two +others of a different species. We had also the satisfaction +of discovering a peculiar vegetable, which Jack concluded must +certainly be that of which he had read as being very common among +the South Sea islanders, and which was named <i>taro</i>. +Also we found a large supply of yams, and another root like a +potato in appearance. As these were all quite new to us, we +regarded our lot as a most fortunate one, in being thus cast on +an island which was so prolific and so well stored with all the +necessaries of life. Long afterwards we found out that this +island of ours was no better in these respects than thousands of +other islands in those seas. Indeed, many of them were much +richer and more productive; but that did not render us the less +grateful for our present good fortune. We each put one of +these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our supper; +of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds +here, and traces of some four-footed animal again. +Meanwhile the sun began to descend, so we returned to the shore, +and pushed on round the spouting rocks into the next +valley. This was that valley of which I have spoken as +running across the entire island. It was by far the largest +and most beautiful that we had yet looked upon. Here were +trees of every shape and size and hue which it is possible to +conceive of, many of which we had not seen in the other valleys; +for, the stream in this valley being larger, and the mould much +richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was clothed with a +more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees were +dark glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting +well with those of a pale light green, which were everywhere +abundant. Among these we recognised the broad dark heads of +the bread-fruit, with its golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage +of the candle-nut, and several species which bore a strong +resemblance to the pine; while here and there, in groups and in +single trees, rose the tall forms of the cocoa-nut palms, +spreading abroad, and waving their graceful plumes high above all +the rest, as if they were a superior race of stately giants +keeping guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it was a +most enchanting scene, and I thanked God for having created such +delightful spots for the use of man.</p> + +<p>Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack +uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a +little to one side of us, said,—</p> + +<p>“That’s a banian-tree.”</p> + +<p>“And what’s a banian-tree?” inquired +Peterkin, as we walked towards it.</p> + +<p>“A very curious one, as you shall see presently,” +replied Jack. “It is called the <i>aoa</i> here, if I +recollect rightly, and has a wonderful peculiarity about +it. What an enormous one it is, to be sure.”</p> + +<p>“<i>It</i>!” repeated Peterkin; “why, there +are dozens of banians here! What do you mean by talking bad +grammar? Is your philosophy deserting you, Jack?”</p> + +<p>“There is but one tree here of this kind,” +returned Jack, “as you will perceive if you will examine +it.” And, sure enough, we did find that what we had +supposed was a forest of trees was in reality only one. Its +bark was of a light colour, and had a shining appearance, the +leaves being lance-shaped, small, and of a beautiful +pea-green. But the wonderful thing about it was, that the +branches, which grew out from the stem horizontally, sent down +long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, taking root, had +themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like the tree +itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the +branches at various distances, and thus supported them on natural +pillars, some of which were so large and strong, that it was not +easy at first to distinguish the offspring from the parent +stem. The fibres were of all sizes and in all states of +advancement, from the pillars we have just mentioned to small +cords which hung down and were about to take root, and thin brown +threads still far from the ground, which swayed about with every +motion of wind. In short, it seemed to us that, if there +were only space afforded to it, this single tree would at length +cover the whole island.</p> + +<p>Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, +which, as its peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely +useful to us, merits description. It was a splendid +chestnut, but its proper name Jack did not know. However, +there were quantities of fine nuts upon it, some of which we put +in our pockets. But its stem was the wonderful part of +it. It rose to about twelve feet without a branch, and was +not of great thickness; on the contrary, it was remarkably +slender for the size of the tree; but, to make up for this, there +were four or five wonderful projections in this stem, which I +cannot better describe than by asking the reader to suppose that +five planks of two inches thick and three feet broad had been +placed round the trunk of the tree, with their <i>edges</i> +closely fixed to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that +these planks had been covered over with the bark of the tree and +incorporated with it. In short, they were just natural +buttresses, without which the stem could not have supported its +heavy and umbrageous top. We found these chestnuts to be +very numerous. They grew chiefly on the banks of the +stream, and were of all sizes.</p> + +<p>While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack +chipped a piece off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood +to be firm and easily cut. He then struck the axe into it +with all his force, and very soon split it off close to the tree, +first, however, having cut it across transversely above and +below. By this means he satisfied himself that we could now +obtain short planks, as it were all ready sawn, of any size and +thickness that we desired; which was a very great discovery +indeed, perhaps the most important we had yet made.</p> + +<p>We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp +near the beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome +in the forest. On our way we could not help admiring the +birds which flew and chirped around us. Among them we +observed a pretty kind of paroquet, with a green body, a blue +head, and a red breast; also a few beautiful turtledoves, and +several flocks of wood-pigeons. The hues of many of these +birds were extremely vivid,—bright green, blue, and +scarlet, being the prevailing tints. We made several +attempts throughout the day to bring down one of these, both with +the bow and the sling,—not for mere sport, but to ascertain +whether they were good for food. But we invariably missed, +although once or twice we were very near hitting. As +evening drew on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I +slung a stone into the midst of them at a venture, and had the +good fortune to kill one. We were startled, soon after, by +a loud whistling noise above our heads; and on looking up, saw a +flock of wild ducks making for the coast. We watched these, +and, observing where they alighted, followed them up until we +came upon a most lovely blue lake, not more than two hundred +yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its placid surface, +which reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a mirror, was +covered with various species of wild ducks, feeding among the +sedges and broad-leaved water-plants which floated on it, while +numerous birds like water-hens ran to and fro most busily on its +margin. These all with one accord flew tumultuously away +the instant we made our appearance. While walking along the +margin we observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could +not tell.</p> + +<p>Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a +little out of our way to see if we could procure one of those +ducks; so, directing Peterkin to go straight to the shore and +kindle a fire, we separated, promising to rejoin him +speedily. But we did not find the ducks, although we made a +diligent search for half an hour. We were about to retrace +our steps, when we were arrested by one of the strangest sights +that we had yet beheld.</p> + +<p>Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew +a superb tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on +the island. Its trunk was at least five feet in diameter, +with a smooth gray bark; above this the spreading branches were +clothed with light green leaves, amid which were clusters of +bright yellow fruit, so numerous as to weigh down the boughs with +their great weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum +species, of an oblong form, and a good deal larger than the +magnum bonum plum. The ground at the foot of this tree was +thickly strewn with the fallen fruit, in the midst of which lay +sleeping, in every possible attitude, at least twenty hogs of all +ages and sizes, apparently quite surfeited with a recent +banquet.</p> + +<p>Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at +these coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning +and snoring heavily amid the remains of their supper.</p> + +<p>“Now, Ralph,” said Jack, in a low whisper, +“put a stone in your sling,—a good big one,—and +let fly at that fat fellow with his back toward you. +I’ll try to put an arrow into yon little pig.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you think we had better put them up +first?” I whispered; “it seems cruel to kill them +while asleep.”</p> + +<p>“If I wanted <i>sport</i>, Ralph, I would certainly set +them up; but as we only want <i>pork</i>, we’ll let them +lie. Besides, we’re not sure of killing them; so, +fire away.”</p> + +<p>Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it +went bang against the hog’s flank as if against the head of +a drum; but it had no other effect than that of causing the +animal to start to its feet, with a frightful yell of surprise, +and scamper away. At the same instant Jack’s bow +twanged, and the arrow pinned the little pig to the ground by the +ear.</p> + +<p>“I’ve missed, after all,” cried Jack, +darting forward with uplifted axe, while the little pig uttered a +loud squeal, tore the arrow from the ground, and ran away with +it, along with the whole drove, into the bushes and disappeared, +though we heard them screaming long afterwards in the +distance.</p> + +<p>“That’s very provoking, now,” said Jack, +rubbing the point of his nose.</p> + +<p>“Very,” I replied, stroking my chin.</p> + +<p>“Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin,” +said Jack. “It’s getting late.” +And, without further remark, we threaded our way quickly through +the woods towards the shore.</p> + +<p>When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted +and beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for +our encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We +wondered very much at this; but Jack suggested that he might have +gone to fetch water; so he gave a shout to let him know that we +had arrived, and sat down upon a rock, while I threw off my +jacket and seized the axe, intending to split up one or two +billets of wood. But I had scarce moved from the spot when, +in the distance, we heard a most appalling shriek, which was +followed up by a chorus of yells from the hogs, and a loud +“hurrah!”</p> + +<p>“I do believe,” said I, “that Peterkin has +met with the hogs.”</p> + +<p>“When Greek meets Greek,” said Jack, +soliloquizing, “then comes the tug of—”</p> + +<p>“Hurrah!” shouted Peterkin in the distance.</p> + +<p>We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, +and soon descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us +with a little pig transfixed on the end of his long spear!</p> + +<p>“Well done, my boy!” exclaimed Jack, slapping him +on the shoulder when he came up, “you’re the best +shot amongst us.”</p> + +<p>“Look here Jack!” cried Peterkin, as he disengaged +the animal from his spear. “Do you recognise that +hole?” said he, pointing to the pig’s ear; “and +are you familiar with this arrow, eh?”</p> + +<p>“Well, I declare!” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Of course you do,” interrupted Peterkin; +“but, pray, restrain your declarations at this time, and +let’s have supper, for I’m uncommonly hungry, I can +tell you; and it’s no joke to charge a whole herd of swine +with their great-grandmother bristling like a giant porcupine at +the head of them!”</p> + +<p>We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display +of viands we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the +light of the blazing fire. There was, first of all, the +little pig; then there was the taro-root, and the yam, and the +potato, and six plums; and, lastly, the wood-pigeon. To +these Peterkin added a bit of sugar-cane, which he had cut from a +little patch of that plant which he had found not long after +separating from us; “and,” said he, “the patch +was somewhat in a square form, which convinces me it must have +been planted by man.”</p> + +<p>“Very likely,” replied Jack. “From all +we have seen, I’m inclined to think that some of the +savages must have dwelt here long ago.”</p> + +<p>We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we +were to cook the pig. None of us had ever cut up one +before, and we did not know exactly how to begin; besides, we had +nothing but the axe to do it with, our knife having been +forgotten. At last Jack started up and said,—</p> + +<p>“Don’t let us waste more time talking about it, +boys. Hold it up, Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg +on this block of wood, so;” and he cut it off, with a large +portion of the haunch, at a single blow of the axe. +“Now the other,—that’s it.” And +having thus cut off the two hind legs, he made several deep +gashes in them, thrust a sharp-pointed stick through each, and +stuck them up before the blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon +was then split open, quite flat, washed clean in salt water, and +treated in a similar manner. While these were cooking, we +scraped a hole in the sand and ashes under the fire, into which +we put our vegetables, and covered them up.</p> + +<p>The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and +four or five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and +had a thick rind. We found it somewhat like an Irish +potato, and exceedingly good. The yam was roundish, and had +a rough brown skin. It was very sweet and +well-flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to find, was +quite sweet and exceedingly palatable, as also were the plums; +and, indeed, the pork and pigeon too, when we came to taste +them. Altogether this was decidedly the most luxurious +supper we had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it was +out-of-sight better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin +said he feared that if we should remain long on the island he +would infallibly become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack +remarked that he need not fear that, for he was <i>both</i> +already! And so, having eaten our fill, not forgetting to +finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves comfortably down to +sleep upon a couch of branches under the overhanging ledge of a +coral rock.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon—Humble +advice regarding cold water—The “horrible cry” +accounted for—The curious birds called +penguins—Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm—Questions +on the formation of coral islands—Mysterious +footsteps—Strange discoveries and sad sights.</p> + +<p>When we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun +was already a good way above the horizon, so I came to the +conclusion that a heavy supper is not conducive to early +rising. Nevertheless, we felt remarkably strong and well, +and much disposed to have our breakfast. First, however, we +had our customary morning bathe, which refreshed us greatly.</p> + +<p>I have often wondered very much in after years that the +inhabitants of my own dear land did not make more frequent use of +this most charming element, water. I mean in the way of +cold bathing. Of course, I have perceived that it is not +convenient for them to go into the sea or the rivers in winter, +as we used to do on the Coral Island; but then, I knew from +experience that a large washing-tub and a sponge do form a most +pleasant substitute. The feelings of freshness, of +cleanliness, of vigour, and extreme hilarity, that always +followed my bathes in the sea, and even, when in England, my +ablutions in the wash-tub, were so delightful, that I would +sooner have gone without my breakfast than without my bathe in +cold water. My readers will forgive me for asking whether +they are in the habit of bathing thus every morning; and if they +answer “No,” they will pardon me for recommending +them to begin at once. Of late years, since retiring from +the stirring life of adventure which I have led so long in +foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, +so I do not mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it +down. Perhaps, in reference to it, I may just hint that +there may be too much of a good thing. I know not; but of +this I am quite certain, that there may also be too little of a +good thing; and the great delight I have had in cold bathing +during the course of my adventurous career inclines me to think +that it is better to risk taking too much than to content +one’s self with too little. Such is my opinion, +derived from much experience; but I put it before my readers with +the utmost diffidence and with profound modesty, knowing that it +may possibly jar with their feelings of confidence in their own +ability to know and judge as to what is best and fittest in +reference to their own affairs. But, to return from this +digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness.</p> + +<p>We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, +and were just beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually +accompanies vigorous exercise, when, on turning a point that +revealed to us a new and beautiful cluster of islands, we were +suddenly arrested by the appalling cry which had so alarmed us a +few nights before. But this time we were by no means so +much alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas at +that time it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, +though I am unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many +of the fears that are apt to assail us in the dark.</p> + +<p>On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his +spear.</p> + +<p>“Now, what can it be?” said he, looking round at +Jack. “I tell you what it is, if we are to go on +being pulled up in a constant state of horror and astonishment, +as we have been for the last week, the sooner we’re out +o’ this island the better, notwithstanding the yams and +lemonade, and pork and plums!”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s remark was followed by a repetition of the +cry, louder than before.</p> + +<p>“It comes from one of these islands,” said +Jack.</p> + +<p>“It must be the ghost of a jackass, then,” said +Peterkin, “for I never heard anything so like.”</p> + +<p>We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, +on the largest, we observed curious objects moving on the +shore.</p> + +<p>“Soldiers they are,—that’s flat!” +cried Peterkin, gazing at them in the utmost amazement.</p> + +<p>And, in truth, Peterkin’s remark seemed to me to be +correct; for, at the distance from which we saw them, they +appeared to be an army of soldiers. There they stood, rank +and file, in lines and in squares, marching and countermarching, +with blue coats and white trousers. While we were looking +at them, the dreadful cry came again over the water, and Peterkin +suggested that it must be a regiment sent out to massacre the +natives in cold blood. At this remark Jack laughed and +said,—</p> + +<p>“Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!”</p> + +<p>“Penguins?” repeated Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins,—nothing more or +less than big sea-birds, as you shall see one of these days, when +we pay them a visit in our boat, which I mean to set about +building the moment we return to our bower.”</p> + +<p>“So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering +army of soldiers,” remarked Peterkin, “have dwindled +down to penguins,—big sea-birds! Very good. +Then I propose that we continue our journey as fast as possible, +lest our island should be converted into a dream before we get +completely round it.”</p> + +<p>Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new +discovery, and the singular appearance of these birds, of which +Jack could only give us a very slight and vague account; and I +began to long to commence to our boat, in order that we might go +and inspect them more narrowly. But by degrees these +thoughts left me, and I began to be much taken up again with the +interesting peculiarities of the country which we were passing +through.</p> + +<p>The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the +first, at about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we +calculated, and we hoped to sleep on the night following at our +bower. I will not here note so particularly all that we +said and saw during the course of this second day, as we did not +make any further discoveries of great importance. The shore +along which we travelled, and the various parts of the woods +through which we passed, were similar to those which have been +already treated of. There were one or two observations that +we made, however, and these were as follows:—</p> + +<p>We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew +only in the valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the +streams, where the soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm +grew in every place whatsoever,—not only on the hill sides, +but also on the sea shore, and even, as has been already stated, +on the coral reef itself, where the soil, if we may use the name, +was nothing better than loose sand mingled with broken shells and +coral rock. So near to the sea, too, did this useful tree +grow, that in many places its roots were washed by the spray from +the breakers. Yet we found the trees growing thus on the +sands to be quite as luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, +and the fruit as good and refreshing also. Besides this, I +noticed that, on the summit of the high mountain, which we once +more ascended at a different point from our first ascent, were +found abundance of shells and broken coral formations, which Jack +and I agreed proved either that this island must have once been +under the sea, or that the sea must once have been above the +island. In other words, that as shells and coral could not +possibly climb to the mountain top, they must have been washed +upon it while the mountain top was on a level with the sea. +We pondered this very much; and we put to ourselves the question, +“What raised the island to its present height above the +sea?” But to this we could by no means give to +ourselves a satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have +been blown up by a volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must +have jumped up of its own accord! We also noticed, what had +escaped us before, that the solid rocks of which the island was +formed were quite different from the live coral rocks on the +shore, where the wonderful little insects were continually +working. They seemed, indeed, to be of the same +material,—a substance like limestone; but, while the coral +rocks were quite full of minute cells in which the insects lived, +the other rocks inland were hard and solid, without the +appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and conversations +on this subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin said we +should certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we +were such good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his +pleasantry on this and similar points to deter us from making our +notes and observations as we went along.</p> + +<p>We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but +abstained from killing any of them, having more than sufficient +for our present necessities. We saw also many of their +foot-prints in this neighbourhood. Among these we also +observed the footprints of a smaller animal, which we examined +with much care, but could form no certain opinion as to +them. Peterkin thought they were those of a little dog, but +Jack and I thought differently. We became very curious on +this matter, the more so that we observed these foot-prints to +lie scattered about in one locality, as if the animal which had +made them was wandering round about in a very irregular manner, +and without any object in view. Early in the forenoon of +our third day we observed these footprints to be much more +numerous than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged off +into the woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so +closely beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with +difficulty. We had now become so anxious to find out what +animal this was, and where it went to, that we determined to +follow the track, and, if possible, clear up the mystery. +Peterkin said, in a bantering tone, that he was sure it would be +cleared up as usual in some frightfully simple way, and prove to +be no mystery at all!</p> + +<p>The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by +the animal itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had +made it, and that the smaller one made use of it. But +everywhere the creeping plants and tangled bushes crossed our +path, so that we forced our way along with some difficulty. +Suddenly, as we came upon an open space, we heard a faint cry, +and observed a black animal standing in the track before us.</p> + +<p>“A wild-cat!” cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his +bow, and discharging it so hastily that he missed the animal, and +hit the earth about half a foot to one side of it. To our +surprise the wild-cat did not fly, but walked slowly towards the +arrow, and snuffed at it.</p> + +<p>“That’s the most comical wild-cat I ever +saw!” cried Jack.</p> + +<p>“It’s a tame wild-cat, I think,” said +Peterkin, levelling his spear to make a charge.</p> + +<p>“Stop!” cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; +“I do believe the poor beast is blind. See, it +strikes against the branches as it walks along. It must be +a very old one;” and I hastened towards it.</p> + +<p>“Only think,” said Peterkin, with a suppressed +laugh, “of a superannuated wild-cat!”</p> + +<p>We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly +so, but extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we +were quite close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, +putting up its back and tail, while the black hair stood all on +end, uttered a hoarse mew and a fuff.</p> + +<p>“Poor thing,” said Peterkin, gently extending his +hand, and endeavouring to pat the cat’s head. +“Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; puss, puss, puss; cheetie +pussy!”</p> + +<p>No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of +anger fled, and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself +to be stroked, and rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly +all the time, and showing every symptom of the most extreme +delight.</p> + +<p>“It’s no more a wild cat than I am!” cried +Peterkin, taking it in his arms. “It’s quite +tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!”</p> + +<p>We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little +surprised, and, to say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight +of the poor animal’s excessive joy. It rubbed its +head against Peterkin’s cheek, licked his chin, and thrust +its head almost violently into his neck, while it purred more +loudly than I ever heard a cat purr before, and appeared to be so +much overpowered by its feelings, that it occasionally mewed and +purred almost in the same breath. Such demonstrations of +joy and affection led us at once to conclude that this poor cat +must have known man before, and we conjectured that it had been +left either accidentally or by design on the island many years +ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at meeting once more +with human beings. While we were fondling the cat and +talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the midst +of which we stood.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” exclaimed he; “this looks something +like a clearing. The axe has been at work here. Just +look at these tree-stumps.”</p> + +<p>We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found +trees that had been cut down here and there, also stumps and +broken branches; all of which, however, were completely covered +over with moss, and bore evidence of having been in this +condition for some years. No human foot-prints were to be +seen, either on the track or among the bushes; but those of the +cat were found everywhere. We now determined to follow up +the track as far as it went, and Peterkin put the cat down; but +it seemed to be so weak, and mewed so very pitifully, that he +took it up again and carried it in his arms, where, in a few +minutes, it fell sound asleep.</p> + +<p>About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more +numerous, and the track, diverging to the right, followed for a +short space the banks of a stream. Suddenly we came to a +spot where once must have been a rude bridge, the stones of which +were scattered in the stream, and those on each bank entirely +covered over with moss. In silent surprise and expectancy +we continued to advance, and, a few yards farther on, beheld, +under the shelter of some bread-fruit trees, a small hut or +cottage. I cannot hope to convey to my readers a very +correct idea of the feelings that affected us on witnessing this +unexpected sight. We stood for a long time in silent +wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy stillness about +the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at length +speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded by +some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin’s +voice, usually so quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed +now; for there was a dreariness about this silent, lonely, +uninhabited cottage,—so strange in its appearance, so far +away from the usual dwellings of man, so old, decayed, and +deserted in its aspect,—that fell upon our spirits like a +thick cloud, and blotted out as with a pall the cheerful sunshine +that had filled us since the commencement of our tour round the +island.</p> + +<p>The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its +construction. It was not more than twelve feet long by ten +feet broad, and about seven or eight feet high. It had one +window, or rather a small frame in which a window might, perhaps, +once have been, but which was now empty. The door was +exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, and the roof was +covered with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. But every +part of it was in a state of the utmost decay. Moss and +green matter grew in spots all over it. The woodwork was +quite perforated with holes; the roof had nearly fallen in, and +appeared to be prevented from doing so altogether by the thick +matting of creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which +years of neglect had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while +the thick, luxuriant branches of the bread-fruit and other trees +spread above it, and flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, +as if to guard it from the heat and the light of day. We +conversed long and in whispers about this strange habitation ere +we ventured to approach it; and when at length we did so it was, +at least on my part, with feelings of awe.</p> + +<p>At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from +the deep shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom +within, he could not clearly discern objects; so we lifted the +latch and pushed open the door. We observed that the latch +was made of iron, and almost eaten away with rust. In the +like condition were also the hinges, which creaked as the door +swung back. On entering, we stood still and gazed around +us, while we were much impressed with the dreary stillness of the +room. But what we saw there surprised and shocked us not a +little. There was no furniture in the apartment save a +little wooden stool and an iron pot, the latter almost eaten +through with rust. In the corner farthest from the door was +a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a little +heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to +examine them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that +of a dog, which was extended close beside that of the man, with +its head resting on his bosom</p> + +<p>Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and +could scarce refrain from tears on beholding these sad +remains. After some time, we began to talk about what we +had seen, and to examine in and around the hut, in order to +discover some clue to the name or history of this poor man, who +had thus died in solitude, with none to mourn his loss save his +cat and his faithful dog. But we found +nothing,—neither a book nor a scrap of paper. We +found, however, the decayed remnants of what appeared to have +been clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things +bore marks of any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as +to convince us that they had lain in the condition in which we +found them for many years.</p> + +<p>This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the +top of the mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the +patch of sugar-cane and other traces of man which we had met with +in the course of our rambles over the island. And we were +much saddened by the reflection that the lot of this poor +wanderer might possibly be our own, after many years’ +residence on the island, unless we should be rescued by the visit +of some vessel or the arrival of natives. Having no clue +whatever to account for the presence of this poor human being in +such a lonely spot, we fell to conjecturing what could have +brought him there. I was inclined to think that he must +have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose vessel had been lost here, +and all the crew been drowned except himself and his dog and +cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run away +from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him +company. We were also much occupied in our minds with the +wonderful difference between the cat and the dog. For here +we saw that while the one perished, like a loving friend, by its +master’s side, with its head resting on his bosom, the +other had sought to sustain itself by prowling abroad in the +forest, and had lived in solitude to a good old age. +However, we did not conclude from this that the cat was destitute +of affection, for we could not forget its emotions on first +meeting with us; but we saw from this, that the dog had a great +deal more of generous love in its nature than the cat, because it +not only found it impossible to live after the death of its +master, but it must needs, when it came to die, crawl to his side +and rest its head upon his lifeless breast.</p> + +<p>While we were thinking on these things, and examining into +everything about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation +from Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“I say, Jack,” said he, “here is something +that will be of use to us.”</p> + +<p>“What is it?” said Jack, hastening across the +room.</p> + +<p>“An old pistol,” replied Peterkin, holding up the +weapon, which he had just pulled from under a heap of broken wood +and rubbish that lay in a corner.</p> + +<p>“That, indeed, might have been useful,” said Jack, +examining it, “if we had any powder; but I suspect the bow +and the sling will prove more serviceable.”</p> + +<p>“True, I forgot that,” said Peterkin; “but +we may as well take it with us, for the flint will serve to +strike fire with when the sun does not shine.”</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p136b.jpg"> +<img alt="A saddening discovery" src="images/p136s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>After having spent more than an hour at this place without +discovering anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the +old cat, which had lain very contentedly asleep on the stool +whereon he had placed it, and we prepared to take our +departure. In leaving the hut, Jack stumbled heavily +against the door-post, which was so much decayed as to break +across, and the whole fabric of the hut seemed ready to tumble +about our ears. This put into our heads that we might as +well pull it down, and so form a mound over the skeleton. +Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down the other door-post, +which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in ruins to the +ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor recluse +and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away the +iron pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much +use to us hereafter.</p> + +<p>During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and +examined the other end of the large valley, which we found to be +so much alike to the parts already described, that I shall not +recount the particulars of what we saw in this place. I +may, however, remark, that we did not quite recover our former +cheerful spirits until we arrived at our bower, which we did late +in the evening, and found everything just in the same condition +as we had left it three days before.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Something wrong with the tank—Jack’s wisdom and +Peterkin’s impertinence—Wonderful behaviour of a +crab—Good wishes for those who dwell far from the +sea—Jack commences to build a little boat.</p> + +<p>Rest is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. +During my long experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered +life, I have found that periods of profound rest at certain +intervals, in addition to the ordinary hours of repose, are +necessary to the wellbeing of man. And the nature as well +as the period of this rest varies, according to the different +temperaments of individuals, and the peculiar circumstances in +which they may chance to be placed. To those who work with +their minds, bodily labour is rest. To those who labour +with the body, deep sleep is rest. To the downcast, the +weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are rest. Nay, +further, I think that to the gay, the frivolous, the reckless, +when sated with pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves to +be rest of a kind, although, perchance, it were better that I +should call it relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one +class of men to whom rest is denied. There is no rest to +the wicked. At this I do but hint, however, as I treat not +of that rest which is spiritual, but, more particularly, of that +which applies to the mind and to the body.</p> + +<p>Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we +found it exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after +completing the journey just related. It had not, indeed, +been a very long journey, nevertheless we had pursued it so +diligently that our frames were not a little prostrated. +Our minds were also very much exhausted in consequence of the +many surprises, frequent alarms, and much profound thought, to +which they had been subjected; so that when we lay down on the +night of our return under the shelter of the bower, we fell +immediately into very deep repose. I can state this with +much certainty, for Jack afterwards admitted the fact, and +Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard snoring loudly +at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition we +remained all night and the whole of the following day without +awaking once, or so much as moving our positions. When we +did awake it was near sunset, and we were all in such a state of +lassitude that we merely rose to swallow a mouthful of +food. As Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a yawn, we took +breakfast at tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we lay +till the following forenoon.</p> + +<p>After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed +lest we had lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed +on this head, for we had carefully kept count of the days since +we were cast upon our island, in order that we might remember the +Sabbath-day, which day we had hitherto with one accord kept as a +day of rest, and refrained from all work whatsoever. +However, on considering the subject, we all three entertained the +same opinion as to how long we had slept, and so our minds were +put at ease.</p> + +<p>We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to +see how did the animals which I had placed in the tank. We +found the garden more charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, +and Jack and I plunged into its depth, and gambolled among its +radiant coral groves; while Peterkin wallowed at the surface, and +tried occasionally to kick us as we passed below. Having +dressed, I then hastened to the tank; but what was my surprise +and grief to find nearly all the animals dead, and the water in a +putrid condition! I was greatly distressed at this, and +wondered what could be the cause of it.</p> + +<p>“Why, you precious humbug,” said Peterkin, coming +up to me, “how could you expect it to be otherwise? +When fishes are accustomed to live in the Pacific Ocean, how can +you expect them to exist in a hole like that?”</p> + +<p>“Indeed, Peterkin,” I replied, “there seems +to be truth in what you say. Nevertheless, now I think of +it, there must be some error in your reasoning; for, if I put in +but a few very small animals, they will bear the same proportion +to this pond that the millions of fish bear to the +ocean.”</p> + +<p>“I say, Jack,” cried Peterkin, waving his hand, +“come here, like a good fellow. Ralph is actually +talking philosophy. Do come to our assistance, for +he’s out o’ sight beyond me already!”</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” inquired Jack, coming +up, while he endeavoured to scrub his long hair dry with a towel +of cocoa-nut cloth.</p> + +<p>I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, +quite agreed with me. “Your best plan,” he +said, “will be to put very few animals at first into your +tank, and add more as you find it will bear them. And look +here,” he added, pointing to the sides of the tank, which, +for the space of two inches above the water-level, were incrusted +with salt, “you must carry your philosophy a little +farther, Ralph. That water has evaporated so much that it +is too salt for anything to live in. You will require to +add <i>fresh</i> water now and then, in order to keep it at the +same degree of saltness as the sea.”</p> + +<p>“Very true, Jack, that never struck me before,” +said I.</p> + +<p>“And, now I think of it,” continued Jack, +“it seems to me that the surest way of arranging your tank +so as to get it to keep pure and in good condition, will be to +imitate the ocean in it. In fact make it a miniature +Pacific. I don’t see how you can hope to succeed +unless you do that.”</p> + +<p>“Most true,” said I, pondering what my companion +said. “But I fear that that will be very +difficult.”</p> + +<p>“Not at all,” cried Jack, rolling his towel up +into a ball, and throwing it into the face of Peterkin, who had +been grinning and winking at him during the last five +minutes. “Not at all. Look here. There is +water of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill your tank with +sea water, and keep it at that saltness by marking the height at +which the water stands on the sides. When it evaporates a +little, pour in <i>fresh</i> water from the brook till it comes +up to the mark, and then it will be right, for the salt does not +evaporate with the water. Then, there’s lots of +sea-weed in the sea;—well, go and get one or two bits of +sea-weed, and put them into your tank. Of course the weed +must be alive, and growing to little stones; or you can chip a +bit off the rocks with the weed sticking to it. Then, if +you like, you can throw a little sand and gravel into your tank, +and the thing’s complete.”</p> + +<p>“Nay, not quite,” said Peterkin, who had been +gravely attentive to this off-hand advice, “not quite; you +must first make three little men to dive in it before it can be +said to be perfect, and that would be rather difficult, I fear, +for two of them would require to be philosophers. But +hallo! what’s this? I say, Ralph, look here. +There’s one o’ your crabs up to something +uncommon. It’s performing the most remarkable +operation for a crab I ever saw,—taking off its coat, I do +believe, before going to bed!”</p> + +<p>We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a +little amused at the conduct of one of the crabs which still +survived it companions. It was one of the common small +crabs, like to those that are found running about everywhere on +the coasts of England. While we gazed at it, we observed +its back to split away from the lower part of its body, and out +of the gap thus formed came a soft lump which moved and writhed +unceasingly. This lump continued to increase in size until +it appeared like a bunch of crab’s legs: and, indeed, such +it proved in a very few minutes to be; for the points of the toes +were at length extricated from this hole in its back, the legs +spread out, the body followed, and the crab walked away quite +entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, leaving a +perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of +one!</p> + +<p>“Well!” exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, +“I’ve <i>heard</i> of a man jumping out of his skin +and sitting down in his skeleton in order to cool himself, but I +never expected to <i>see</i> a crab do it!”</p> + +<p>We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more +so when we observed that the new crab was larger than the crab +that it came out of. It was also quite soft, but by next +morning its skin had hardened into a good shell. We came +thus to know that crabs grow in this way, and not by the growing +of their shells, as we had always thought before we saw this +wonderful operation.</p> + +<p>Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about +preparing my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came +to regard it as very sound and worthy of being acted on. So +I forthwith put his plan in execution, and found it to answer +excellently well, indeed much beyond my expectation; for I found +that after a little experience had taught me the proper +proportion of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount +of water, the tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I +did not require ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, +but only to add a very little fresh water from the brook, now and +then, as the other evaporated. I therefore concluded that +if I had been suddenly conveyed, along with my tank, into some +region where there was no salt sea at all, my little sea and my +sea-fish would have continued to thrive and to prosper +notwithstanding. This made me greatly to desire that those +people in the world who live far inland might know of my +wonderful tank, and, by having materials like to those of which +it was made conveyed to them, thus be enabled to watch the habits +of those most mysterious animals that reside in the sea, and +examine with their own eyes the wonders of the great deep.</p> + +<p>For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily +employed in building a little boat out of the curious natural +planks of the chestnut tree, I spent much of my time in examining +with the burning-glass the marvellous operations that were +constantly going on in my tank. Here I saw those anemones +which cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs of jelly, +to the rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and wait +till little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched +them, when they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm +around their victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. +Here I saw the ceaseless working of those little coral insects +whose efforts have encrusted the islands of the Pacific with vast +rocks, and surrounded them with enormous reefs. And I +observed that many of these insects, though extremely minute, +were very beautiful, coming out of their holes in a circle of +fine threads, and having the form of a shuttle-cock. Here I +saw curious little barnacles opening a hole in their backs and +constantly putting out a thin feathery hand, with which, I doubt +not, they dragged their food into their mouths. Here, also, +I saw those crabs which have shells only on the front of their +bodies, but no shell whatever on their remarkably tender tails, +so that, in order to find a protection to them, they thrust them +into the empty shells of wilks, or some such fish, and when they +grow too big for one, change into another. But, most +curious of all, I saw an animal which had the wonderful power, +when it became ill, of casting its stomach and its teeth away +from it, and getting an entirely new set in the course of a few +months! All this I saw, and a great deal more, by means of +my tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from setting down +more particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the +adventures that befell us while we remained on this island.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs—The mysterious +green monster explained—We are thrown into unutterable +terror by the idea that Jack is drowned—The Diamond +Cave.</p> + +<p>“Come, Jack,” cried Peterkin, one morning about +three weeks after our return from our long excursion, +“let’s be jolly to-day, and do something +vigorous. I’m quite tired of hammering and hammering, +hewing and screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of +ours, that seems as hard to build as Noah’s ark; let us go +on an excursion to the mountain top, or have a hunt after the +wild ducks, or make a dash at the pigs. I’m quite +flat—flat as bad ginger-beer—flat as a pancake; in +fact, I want something to rouse me, to toss me up, as it +were. Eh! what do you say to it?”</p> + +<p>“Well,” answered Jack, throwing down the axe with +which he was just about to proceed towards the boat, “if +that’s what you want, I would recommend you to make an +excursion to the water-spouts; the last one we had to do with +tossed you up a considerable height, perhaps the next will send +you higher, who knows, if you’re at all reasonable or +moderate in your expectations!”</p> + +<p>“Jack, my dear boy,” said Peterkin, gravely, +“you are really becoming too fond of jesting. +It’s a thing I don’t at all approve of, and if you +don’t give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, we +shall have to part.”</p> + +<p>“Well, then, Peterkin,” replied Jack, with a +smile, “what would you have?”</p> + +<p>“Have?” said Peterkin, “I would <i>have</i> +nothing. I didn’t say I wanted to <i>have</i>; I said +that I wanted to <i>do</i>.”</p> + +<p>“By the by,” said I, interrupting their +conversation, “I am reminded by this that we have not yet +discovered the nature of yon curious appearance that we saw near +the water-spouts, on our journey round the island. Perhaps +it would be well to go for that purpose.”</p> + +<p>“Humph!” ejaculated Peterkin, “I know the +nature of it well enough.”</p> + +<p>“What was it?” said I.</p> + +<p>“It was of a <i>mysterious</i> nature to be sure!” +said he, with a wave of his hand, while he rose from the log on +which he had been sitting, and buckled on his belt, into which he +thrust his enormous club.</p> + +<p>“Well then, let us away to the water-spouts,” +cried Jack, going up to the bower for his bow and arrows; +“and bring your spear, Peterkin. It may be +useful.”</p> + +<p>We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, +sallied forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, +which, as I have before mentioned, were not far from our present +place of abode. On arriving there we hastened down to the +edge of the rocks, and gazed over into the sea, where we observed +the pale-green object still distinctly visible, moving its tail +slowly to and fro in the water.</p> + +<p>“Most remarkable!” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Exceedingly curious,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Beats everything!” said Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Now, Jack,” he added, “you made such a poor +figure in your last attempt to stick that object, that I would +advise you to let me try it. If it has got a heart at all, +I’ll engage to send my spear right through the core of it; +if it hasn’t got a heart, I’ll send it through the +spot where its heart ought to be.”</p> + +<p>“Fire away, then, my boy,” replied Jack with a +laugh.</p> + +<p>Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or +two above his head, then darted it like an arrow into the +sea. Down it went straight into the centre of the green +object, passed quite through it, and came up immediately +afterwards, pure and unsullied, while the mysterious tail moved +quietly as before!</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Peterkin, gravely, “that brute +is a heartless monster; I’ll have nothing more to do with +it.”</p> + +<p>“I’m pretty sure now,” said Jack, +“that it is merely a phosphoric light; but I must say +I’m puzzled at its staying always in that exact +spot.”</p> + +<p>I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that +it must be phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had +seen much while on our voyage to these seas. +“But,” said I, “there is nothing to hinder us +from diving down to it, now that we are sure it is not a +shark.”</p> + +<p>“True,” returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; +“I’ll go down, Ralph, as I’m better at diving +than you are. Now then, Peterkin, out o’ the +road!” Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above +his head, bent over the rocks, and plunged into the sea. +For a second or two the spray caused by his dive hid him from +view, then the water became still, and we saw him swimming far +down in the midst of the green object. Suddenly he sank +below it, and vanished altogether from our sight! We gazed +anxiously down at the spot where he had disappeared, for nearly a +minute, expecting every moment to see him rise again for breath; +but fully a minute passed, and still he did not reappear. +Two minutes passed! and then a flood of alarm rushed in upon my +soul, when I considered that during all my acquaintance with him, +Jack had never stayed underwater more than a minute at a time; +indeed seldom so long.</p> + +<p>“Oh, Peterkin!” I said, in a voice that trembled +with increasing anxiety, “something has happened. It +is more than three minutes now!” But Peterkin did not +answer and I observed that he was gazing down into the water with +a look of intense fear mingled with anxiety, while his face was +overspread with a deadly paleness. Suddenly he sprang to +his feet and rushed about in a frantic state, wringing his hands, +and exclaiming, “Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! It must +have been a shark, and he is gone for ever!”</p> + +<p>For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The +intensity of my feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But +I was recalled to myself by Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder +and staring wildly into my face, while he exclaimed, +“Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has only fainted. Dive for +him, Ralph!”</p> + +<p>It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. +In a moment I rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without +waiting to throw off my garments, was on the point to spring into +the waves, when I observed something black rising up through the +green object. In another moment Jack’s head rose to +the surface, and he gave a wild shout, flinging back the spray +from his locks, as was his wont after a dive. Now we were +almost as much amazed at seeing him reappear, well and strong, as +we had been at first at his non-appearance; for, to the best of +our judgment, he had been nearly ten minutes under water, perhaps +longer, and it required no exertion of our reason to convince us +that this was utterly impossible for mortal man to do and retain +his strength and faculties. It was therefore with a feeling +akin to superstitious awe that I held down my hand and assisted +him to clamber up the steep rocks. But no such feeling +affected Peterkin. No sooner did Jack gain the rocks and +seat himself on one, panting for breath, than he threw his arms +round his neck, and burst into a flood of tears. “Oh, +Jack, Jack!” said he, “where were you? What +kept you so long?”</p> + +<p>After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit +still and listen to Jack’s explanation, although he could +not restrain himself from attempting to wink every two minutes at +me, in order to express his joy at Jack’s safety. I +say he attempted to wink, but I am bound to add that he did not +succeed, for his eyes were so much swollen with weeping, that his +frequent attempts only resulted in a series of violent and +altogether idiotical contortions of the face, that were very far +from expressing what he intended. However, I knew what the +poor fellow meant by it, so I smiled to him in return, and +endeavoured to make believe that he was winking.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, when we were composed +enough to listen to him, “yon green object is not a shark; +it is a stream of light issuing from a cave in the rocks. +Just after I made my dive, I observed that this light came from +the side of the rock above which we are now sitting; so I struck +out for it, and saw an opening into some place or other that +appeared to be luminous within. For one instant I paused to +think whether I ought to venture. Then I made up my mind, +and dashed into it. For you see, Peterkin, although I take +some time to tell this, it happened in the space of a few +seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough in me to serve to bring +me out o’ the hole and up to the surface again. Well, +I was just on the point of turning,—for I began to feel a +little uncomfortable in such a place,—when it seemed to me +as if there was a faint light right above me. I darted +upwards, and found my head out of water. This relieved me +greatly, for I now felt that I could take in air enough to enable +me to return the way I came. Then it all at once occurred +to me that I might not be able to find the way out again; but, on +glancing downwards, my mind was put quite at rest by seeing the +green light below me streaming into the cave, just like the light +that we had seen streaming out of it, only what I now saw was +much brighter.</p> + +<p>“At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed +around me, it was so dark; but gradually my eyes became +accustomed to it, and I found that I was in a huge cave, part of +the walls of which I observed on each side of me. The +ceiling just above me was also visible, and I fancied that I +could perceive beautiful glittering objects there, but the +farther end of the cave was shrouded in darkness. While I +was looking around me in great wonder, it came into my head that +you two would think I was drowned; so I plunged down through the +passage again in a great hurry, rose to the surface, +and—here I am!”</p> + +<p>When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this +remarkable cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down +to see it; which I did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, +that I could scarcely see anything. When I returned, we had +a long conversation about it, during which I observed that +Peterkin had a most lugubrious expression on his countenance.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter, Peterkin?” said I.</p> + +<p>“The matter?” he replied. “It’s +all very well for you two to be talking away like mermaids about +the wonders of this cave, but you know I must be content to hear +about it, while you are enjoying yourselves down there like mad +dolphins. It’s really too bad.”</p> + +<p>“I’m very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I +am,” said Jack, “but we cannot help you. If you +would only learn to dive—”</p> + +<p>“Learn to fly, you might as well say!” retorted +Peterkin, in a very sulky tone.</p> + +<p>“If you would only consent to keep still,” said I, +“we would take you down with us in ten seconds.”</p> + +<p>“Hum!” returned Peterkin; “suppose a +salamander was to propose to you ‘only to keep +still,’ and he would carry you through a blazing fire in a +few seconds, what would you say?”</p> + +<p>We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that +nothing was to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we +could not rest satisfied till we had seen more of this cave; so, +after further consultation, Jack and I determined to try if we +could take down a torch with us, and set fire to it in the +cavern. This we found to be an undertaking of no small +difficulty; but we accomplished it at last by the following +means:—First, we made a torch of a very inflammable nature +out of the bark of a certain tree, which we cut into strips, and, +after twisting, cemented together with a kind of resin or gum, +which we also obtained from another tree; neither of which trees, +however, was known by name to Jack. This, when prepared, we +wrapped up in a great number of plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so that +we were confident it could not get wet during the short time it +should be under water. Then we took a small piece of the +tinder, which we had carefully treasured up lest we should +require it, as before said, when the sun should fail us; also, we +rolled up some dry grass and a few chips, which, with a little +bow and drill, like those described before, we made into another +bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When all was +ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against +the rocks we might be subjected to, we kept on.</p> + +<p>Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one +bundle, with the torch; I the other, with the things for +producing fire.</p> + +<p>“Now don’t weary for us, Peterkin, should we be +gone some time,” said Jack; “we’ll be sure to +return in half-an-hour at the very latest, however interesting +the cave should be, that we may relieve your mind.”</p> + +<p>“Farewell!” said Peterkin, coming up to us with a +look of deep but pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and +kissed each of us on the cheek. “Farewell! and while +you are gone I shall repose my weary limbs under the shelter of +this bush, and meditate on the changefulness of all things +earthly, with special reference to the forsaken condition of a +poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!” So saying, Peterkin +waved his hand, turned from us, and cast himself upon the ground +with a look of melancholy resignation, which was so well feigned, +that I would have thought it genuine had he not accompanied it +with a gentle wink. We both laughed, and, springing from +the rocks together, plunged head first into the sea.</p> + +<p>We gained the interior of the submarine cave without +difficulty, and, on emerging from the waves, supported ourselves +for some time by treading-water, while we held the two bundles +above our heads. This we did in order to let our eyes +become accustomed to the obscurity. Then, when we could see +sufficiently, we swam to a shelving rock, and landed in +safety. Having wrung the water from our trousers, and dried +ourselves as well as we could under the circumstances, we +proceeded to ignite the torch. This we accomplished without +difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did it flare up than +we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects that were revealed +to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above us seemed to +be about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded into the +distance, until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be +made of coral, and was supported by massive columns of the same +material. Immense icicles (as they appeared to us) hung +from it in various places. These, however, were formed, not +of ice, but of a species of limestone, which seemed to flow in a +liquid form towards the point of each, where it became +solid. A good many drops fell, however, to the rock below, +and these formed little cones, which rose to meet the points +above. Some of them had already met, and thus we saw how +the pillars were formed, which at first seemed to us as if they +had been placed there by some human architect to support the +roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor was +composed of the same material as the pillars; and it presented +the curious appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water +when gently ruffled by the wind. There were several +openings on either hand in the walls, that seemed to lead into +other caverns; but these we did not explore at this time. +We also observed that the ceiling was curiously marked in many +places, as if it were the fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the +walls, as well as the roof, sparkled in the light of our torch, +and threw back gleams and flashes, as if they were covered with +precious stones. Although we proceeded far into this +cavern, we did not come to the end of it; and we were obliged to +return more speedily than we would otherwise have done, as our +torch was nearly expended. We did not observe any openings +in the roof, or any indications of places whereby light might +enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an immense mass +of pure white coral rock, which caught and threw back the little +light that found an entrance through the cave’s mouth, and +thus produced, we conjectured, the pale-green object which had +first attracted our attention. We concluded, also, that the +reflecting power of this rock was that which gave forth the dim +light that faintly illumined the first part of the cave.</p> + +<p>Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the +small piece of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry +spot; conceiving that we might possibly stand in need of it, if +at any future time we should chance to wet our torch while diving +into the cavern. As we stood for a few minutes after it was +out, waiting till our eyes became accustomed to the gloom, we +could not help remarking the deep, intense stillness and the +unutterable gloom of all around us; and, as I thought of the +stupendous dome above, and the countless gems that had sparkled +in the torch-light a few minutes before, it came into my mind to +consider how strange it is that God should make such wonderful +and exquisitely beautiful works never to be seen at all, except, +indeed, by chance visitors such as ourselves.</p> + +<p>I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the +islands of the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful +than the one I have just described.</p> + +<p>“Now, Ralph, are you ready?” said Jack, in a low +voice, that seemed to echo up into the dome above.</p> + +<p>“Quite ready.”</p> + +<p>“Come along, then,” said he; and, plunging off the +ledge of the rock into the water, we dived through the narrow +entrance. In a few seconds we were panting on the rocks +above, and receiving the congratulations of our friend +Peterkin.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Strange peculiarity of the tides—Also of the +twilight—Peterkin’s remarkable conduct in embracing a +little pig and killing a big sow—Sage remarks on +jesting—Also on love.</p> + +<p>It was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to +enjoy the glad sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond +Cave, as we named it; for, although we did not stay more than +half an hour away, it seemed to us much longer. While we +were dressing, and during our walk home, we did our best to +satisfy the curiosity of poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, +with lively sincerity, his inability to dive.</p> + +<p>There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as +we best could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the +tide of these seas, we might perhaps have found it possible to +take him down with us at low water; but as the tide never rose or +fell more than eighteen inches or two feet, this was +impossible.</p> + +<p>This peculiarity of the tide—its slight rise and +fall—had not attracted our observation till some time after +our residence on the island. Neither had we observed +another curious circumstance until we had been some time +there. This was the fact, that the tide rose and fell with +constant regularity, instead of being affected by the changes of +the moon as in our own country, and as it is in most other parts +of the world,—at least in all those parts with which I am +acquainted. Every day and every night, at twelve +o’clock precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six +o’clock every morning and evening it is ebb. I can +speak with much confidence on this singular circumstance, as we +took particular note of it, and never found it to alter. Of +course, I must admit, we had to guess the hour of twelve +midnight, and I think we could do this pretty correctly; but in +regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, because we easily +found the highest point that the sun reached in the sky by +placing ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed the sharp +summit of a cliff resting against the sky, just where the sun +passed.</p> + +<p>Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the +first few days of our residence here, and could only account for +it by our being so much taken up with the more obvious wonders of +our novel situation. I have since learned, however, that +this want of observation is a sad and very common infirmity of +human nature, there being hundreds of persons before whose eyes +the most wonderful things are passing every day, who nevertheless +are totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my +sympathy with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of +conduct which I have now for a long time myself +adopted,—namely, the habit of forcing my attention upon +<i>all</i> things that go on around me, and of taking some degree +of interest in them, whether I feel it naturally or not. I +suggest this the more earnestly, though humbly, because I have +very frequently come to know that my indifference to a thing has +generally been caused by my ignorance in regard to it.</p> + +<p>We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; +and Jack told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these +tides did great good to the world in many ways, particularly in +the way of cleansing the shores of the land, and carrying off the +filth that was constantly poured into the sea there-from; which, +Peterkin suggested, was remarkably <i>tidy</i> of it to do. +Poor Peterkin could never let slip an opportunity to joke, +however inopportune it might be: which at first we found rather a +disagreeable propensity, as it often interrupted the flow of very +agreeable conversation; and, indeed, I cannot too strongly record +my disapprobation of this tendency in general: but we became so +used to it at last that we found it no interruption whatever; +indeed, strange to say, we came to feel that it was a necessary +part of our enjoyment (such is the force of habit), and found the +sudden outbursts of mirth, resulting from his humorous +disposition, quite natural and refreshing to us in the midst of +our more serious conversations. But I must not misrepresent +Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he knew +many things which we did not; and I also observed that those +things which he learned from experience were never +forgotten. From all these things I came at length to +understand that things very opposite and dissimilar in +themselves, when united, do make an agreeable whole; as, for +example, we three on this our island, although most unlike in +many things, when united, made a trio so harmonious that I +question if there ever met before such an agreeable +triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of discord whatever +in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral Island; +and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having been all +tuned to the same key, namely, that of <i>love</i>! Yes, we +loved one another with much fervency while we lived on that +island; and, for the matter of that, we love each other +still.</p> + +<p>And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that +just preceded it—namely, the tides—I may here remark +on another curious natural phenomenon. We found that there +was little or no twilight in this island. We had a distinct +remembrance of the charming long twilight at home, which some +people think the most delightful part of the day, though for my +part I have always preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, +we used to sit down on some rocky point or eminence, at the close +of our day’s work, to enjoy the evening breeze; but no +sooner had the sun sunk below the horizon than all became +suddenly dark. This rendered it necessary that we should +watch the sun when we happened to be out hunting, for to be +suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very perplexing, +as, although the stars shone with great beauty and brilliancy, +they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous boughs that +interlaced above our heads.</p> + +<p>But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin +about the Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the +locality, we were wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt +and a squeal were borne down by the land breeze to our ears.</p> + +<p>“That’s the ticket!” was Peterkin’s +remarkable exclamation, as he started convulsively, and levelled +his spear.</p> + +<p>“Hist!” cried Jack; “these are your friends, +Peterkin. They must have come over expressly to pay you a +friendly visit, for it is the first time we have seen them on +this side the island.”</p> + +<p>“Come along!” cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the +wood, while Jack and I followed, smiling at his impatience.</p> + +<p>Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than +before, came down the valley. At this time we were just +opposite the small vale which lay between the Valley of the Wreck +and Spouting Cliff.</p> + +<p>“I say, Peterkin,” cried Jack, in a hoarse +whisper.</p> + +<p>“Well, what is’t?”</p> + +<p>“Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there +on the hill side. If you go and stand with Ralph in the lee +of yon cliff, I’ll cut round behind and drive them through +the gorge, so that you’ll have a better chance of picking +out a good one. Now, mind you pitch into a fat young pig, +Peterkin,” added Jack, as he sprang into the bushes.</p> + +<p>“Won’t I, just!” said Peterkin, licking his +lips, as we took our station beside the cliff. “I +feel quite a tender affection for young pigs in my heart. +Perhaps it would be more correct to say in my +s—.”</p> + +<p>“There they come!” cried I, as a terrific yell +from Jack sent the whole herd screaming down the hill. Now, +Peterkin, being unable to hold back, crept a short way up a very +steep grassy mound, in order to get a better view of the hogs +before they came up; and just as he raised his head above its +summit, two little pigs, which had outrun their companions, +rushed over the top with the utmost precipitation. One of +these brushed close past Peterkin’s ear; the other, unable +to arrest its headlong flight, went, as Peterkin himself +afterwards expressed it, “bash” into his arms with a +sudden squeal, which was caused more by the force of the blow +than the will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently +down to the foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached +than the little pig recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and +fled shrieking from the spot. But I slang a large stone +after it, which, being fortunately well aimed, hit it behind the +ear, and felled it to the earth.</p> + +<p>“Capital, Ralph! that’s your sort!” cried +Peterkin, who, to my surprise and great relief, had risen to his +feet. Apparently unhurt, though much dishevelled, he rushed +franticly towards the gorge, which the yells of the hogs told us +they were now approaching. I had made up my mind that I +would abstain from killing another, as, if Peterkin should be +successful, two were more than sufficient for our wants at the +present time. Suddenly they all burst forth,—two or +three little round ones in advance, and an enormous old sow with +a drove of hogs at her heels.</p> + +<p>“Now, Peterkin,” said I, “there’s a +nice little fat one; just spear it.”</p> + +<p>But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass +unharmed. I looked at him in surprise, and saw that his +lips were compressed and his eyebrows knitted, as if he were +about to fight with some awful enemy.</p> + +<p>“What is it?” I inquired, with some +trepidation.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a +yell that nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow +to the heart. Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear +went in at one side and came out at the other!</p> + +<p>“Oh, Peterkin!” said I, going up to him, +“what have you done?”</p> + +<p>“Done? I’ve killed their +great-great-grandmother, that’s all,” said he, +looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the transfixed +animal.</p> + +<p>“Hallo! what’s this?” said Jack, as he came +up. “Why, Peterkin, you must be fond of a tough +chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, she’ll try +your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick +<i>her</i>, Peterkin?”</p> + +<p>“Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes.”</p> + +<p>“What have your shoes to do with the old hog?’ +said I, smiling.</p> + +<p>“My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with +her,” replied Peterkin; “nevertheless she will have a +good deal to do with my future shoes. The fact is, when I +saw you floor that pig so neatly, Ralph, it struck me that there +was little use in killing another. Then I remembered all at +once that I had long wanted some leather or tough substance to +make shoes of, and this old grandmother seemed so tough that I +just made up my mind to stick her, and you see I’ve done +it!”</p> + +<p>“That you certainly have, Peterkin,” said Jack, as +he was examining the transfixed animal.</p> + +<p>We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, +although the distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At +length we hit on the plan of tying its four feet together, and +passing the spear handle between them. Jack took one end on +his shoulder, I took the other on mine, and Peterkin carried the +small pig.</p> + +<p>Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin +remarked, with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he +afterwards spoke in similarly glowing terms in reference to the +supper that followed, there is every reason to believe that we +retired that night to our leafy beds in a high state of +satisfaction.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Boat-building extraordinary—Peterkin tries his hand at +cookery and fails most signally—The boat +finished—Curious conversation with the cat, and other +matters.</p> + +<p>For many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting +assiduity to the construction of our boat, which at length began +to look somewhat like one. But those only who have had the +thing to do can entertain a right idea of the difficulty involved +in such an undertaking, with no other implements than an axe, a +bit of hoop-iron, a sail-needle, and a broken pen-knife. +But Jack did it. He was of, that disposition which +<i>will</i> not be conquered. When he believed himself to +be acting rightly, he overcame all obstacles. I have seen +Jack, when doubtful whether what he was about to do were right or +wrong, as timid and vacillating as a little girl,—and I +honour him for it!</p> + +<p>As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here +relative to the manner of its construction may not be amiss.</p> + +<p>I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful +buttresses or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with +the chief part of our material. First of all Jack sought +out a limb of a tree of such a form and size as, while it should +form the keel a bend at either end should form the stem and stern +posts. Such a piece, however, was not easy to obtain, but +at last he procured it, by rooting up a small tree which had a +branch growing at the proper angle about ten feet up its stem, +with two strong roots growing in such a form as enabled him to +make a flat-sterned boat. This placed, he procured three +branching roots of suitable size, which he fitted to the keel at +equal distances, thus forming three strong ribs. Now, the +squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of the grooves in +the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all work for the +axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully expert; but +it was quite a different affair when he came to nailing the ribs +to the keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a large +hole, and no nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, +much perplexed here; but Jack at length devised an instrument +that served very well. He took the remainder of our +hoop-iron and beat it into the form of a pipe or cylinder, about +as thick as a man’s finger. This he did by means of +our axe and the old rusty axe we had found at the house of the +poor man at the other side of the island. This, when made +red hot, bored slowly though the timbers; and, the better to +retain the heat, Jack shut up one end of it and filled it with +sand. True, the work was very slowly done, but it mattered +not—we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into +the keel, but not quite through. Into these were placed +stout pegs made of a tree called iron-wood; and, when they were +hammered well home, the timbers were as firmly fixed as if they +had been nailed with iron. The gunwales, which were very +stout, were fixed in a similar manner. But, besides the +wooden nails, they were firmly lashed to the stem and stern posts +and ribs by means of a species of cordage which we had contrived +to make out of the fibrous husk of the cocoa nut. This husk +was very tough, and when a number of the threads were joined +together they formed excellent cordage. At first we tied +the different lengths together, but this was such a clumsy and +awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by careful +interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make good +cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost +us much time and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits +when we grew weary, and so all that we required was at last +constructed.</p> + +<p>Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch +thick. These were dressed with the axe,—but clumsily, +for an axe is ill adapted for such work. Five of these +planks on each side were sufficient, and we formed the boat in a +very rounded, barrel-like shape, in order to have as little +twisting of the planks as possible; for, although we could easily +bend them, we could not easily twist them. Having no nails +to rivet the planks with, we threw aside the ordinary fashion of +boat building and adopted one of our own. The planks were +therefore placed on each other’s edges, and sewed together +with the tough cordage already mentioned. They were also +thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. Each +stitch or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: Three +holes were bored in the upper plank and three in the +lower,—the holes being above each other, that is, in a +vertical line. Through these holes the cord was passed, +and, when tied, formed a powerful stitch of three ply. +Besides this, we placed between the edges of the planks, layers +of cocoa-nut fibre, which, as it swelled when wetted, would, we +hoped, make our little vessel water-tight. But in order +further to secure this end, we collected a large quantity of +pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with which, when boiled in our +old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside of the boat, and, +while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut cloth on +it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the +interior was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the +exterior, being uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action +of the water, was we hoped, likely to keep the boat quite +dry. I may add that our hopes were not disappointed.</p> + +<p>While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted +him, but, as our assistance was not much required, we more +frequently went a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the +entrance of the long valley which lay nearest to our bower. +Here we found large flocks of ducks of various kinds, some of +them bearing so much resemblance to the wild ducks of our own +country that I think they must have been the same. On these +occasions we took the bow and the sling, with both of which we +were often successful, though I must confess I was the least +so. Our suppers were thus pleasantly varied, and sometimes +we had such a profusion spread out before us that we frequently +knew not with which of the dainties to begin.</p> + +<p>I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought +home had always a liberal share of our good things, and so well +was it looked after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered +much of its former strength, and seemed to improve in sight as +well as hearing.</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p175b.jpg"> +<img alt="Leaving for the “mud-flats”" +src="images/p175s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in +front of the entrance to our bower, was our table. On this +rock we had spread out the few articles we possessed the day we +were shipwrecked; and on the same rock, during many a day +afterwards, we spread out the bountiful supply with which we had +been blessed on our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat down at +this table to a feast consisting of hot rolls,—as Peterkin +called the newly baked bread fruit,—a roast pig, roast +duck, boiled and roasted yams, cocoa nuts, taro, and sweet +potatoes; which we followed up with a dessert of plums, apples, +and plantains,—the last being a large-sized and delightful +fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more than twelve +feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down +with cocoa-nut lemonade.</p> + +<p>Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new +dish,—“a conglomerate,” as he used to say; but +these generally turned out such atrocious compounds that he was +ultimately induced to give up his attempts in extreme +disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point out to Jack that +his failure was a direct contradiction to the proverb which he, +Jack, was constantly thrusting down his throat, namely, that +“where there’s a will there’s a +way.” For he had a great will to become a cook, but +could by no means find a way to accomplish that end.</p> + +<p>One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on +which dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, +flinging down his axe, exclaimed,—</p> + +<p>“There, lads, the boat’s finished at last! so +we’ve nothing to do now but shape two pair of oars, and +then we may put to sea as soon as we like.”</p> + +<p>This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for +although we were aware that the boat had been gradually getting +near its completion, it had taken so long that we did not expect +it to be quite ready for at least two or three weeks. But +Jack had wrought hard and said nothing, in order to surprise +us.</p> + +<p>“My dear fellow,” cried Peterkin, +“you’re a perfect trump. But why did you not +tell us it was so nearly ready? won’t we have a jolly sail +to-morrow? eh?”</p> + +<p>“Don’t talk so much, Peterkin,” said Jack; +“and, pray, hand me a bit of that pig.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly, my dear,” cried Peterkin, seizing the +axe; “what part will you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece +of the breast; which?”</p> + +<p>“A hind leg, if you please,” answered Jack; +“and, pray, be so good as to include the tail.”</p> + +<p>“With all my heart,” said Peterkin, exchanging the +axe for his hoop-iron knife, with which he cut off the desired +portion. “I’m only too glad, my dear boy, to +see that your appetite is so wholesale; and there’s no +chance whatever of its dwindling down into re-tail again, at +least in so far as this pig is concerned. Ralph, lad, why +don’t you laugh?—eh?” he added turning suddenly +to me with a severe look of inquiry.</p> + +<p>“Laugh?” said I; “what at, Peterkin? why +should I laugh?”</p> + +<p>Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves +laughing so immoderately that I was induced to believe I had +missed noticing some good joke, so I begged that it might be +explained to me; but as this only produced repeated roars of +laughter, I smiled and helped myself to another slice of +plantain.</p> + +<p>“Well, but,” continued Peterkin, “I was +talking of a sail to-morrow. Can’t we have one, +Jack?”</p> + +<p>“No,” replied Jack, “we can’t have a +sail, but I hope we shall have a row, as I intend to work hard at +the oars this afternoon, and, if we can’t get them finished +by sunset we’ll light our candle-nuts, and turn them out of +hands before we turn into bed.”</p> + +<p>“Very good,” said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork +to the cat, who received it with a mew of satisfaction. +“I’ll help you, if I can.”</p> + +<p>“Afterwards,” continued Jack, “we will make +a sail out of the cocoa-nut cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we +shall be able to sail to some of the other islands, and visit our +old friends the penguins.”</p> + +<p>The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our +observations to the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the +beautiful sea, afforded us much delight, and, after dinner, we +set about making the oars in good earnest. Jack went into +the woods and blocked them roughly out with the axe, and I +smoothed them down with the knife, while Peterkin remained in the +bower, spinning, or, rather, twisting some strong thick cordage +with which to fasten them to the boat.</p> + +<p>We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, +Jack and I returned to the bower with four stout oars, which +required little to be done to them save a slight degree of +polishing with the knife. As we drew near we were suddenly +arrested by the sound of a voice! We were not a little +surprised at this—indeed I may almost say +alarmed—for, although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of +talking, we had never, up to this time, found him talking to +himself. We listened intently, and still heard the sound of +a voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be +silent, and, advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in.</p> + +<p>The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little +amusing. On the top of a log which we sometimes used as a +table, sat the black cat, with a very demure expression on its +countenance; and in front of it, sitting on the ground, with his +legs extended on either side of the log, was Peterkin. At +the moment we saw him he was gazing intently into the cat’s +face, with his nose about four inches from it,—his hands +being thrust into his breeches pockets.</p> + +<p>“Cat,” said Peterkin, turning his head a little on +one side, “I love you!”</p> + +<p>There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this +affectionate declaration but the cat said nothing.</p> + +<p>“Do you hear me?” cried Peterkin, sharply. +“I love you—I do. Don’t you love +me?”</p> + +<p>To this touching appeal the cat said “Mew,” +faintly.</p> + +<p>“Ah! that’s right. You’re a jolly old +rascal. Why did you not speak at once? eh?” and +Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed the cat on the +nose!</p> + +<p>“Yes,” continued Peterkin, after a pause, “I +love you. D’you think I’d say so if I +didn’t, you black villain? I love you because +I’ve got to take care of you, and to look after you, and to +think about you, and to see that you don’t +die—”</p> + +<p>“Mew, me-a-w!” said the cat.</p> + +<p>“Very good,” continued Peterkin, “quite +true, I have no doubt; but you’ve no right to interrupt me, +sir. Hold your tongue till I have done speaking. +Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me the first time +you ever saw me, and didn’t seem to be afraid, and appeared +to be fond of me, though you didn’t know that I +wasn’t going to kill you. Now, that was brave, that +was bold, and very jolly, old boy, and I love you for it—I +do!”</p> + +<p>Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat +looked placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if +in contemplation. Suddenly he looked up.</p> + +<p>“Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won’t +speak? eh? Now, tell me; don’t you think it’s a +monstrous shame that these two scoundrels, Jack and Ralph, should +keep us waiting for our supper so long?”</p> + +<p>Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; +yawned slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin’s +nose!</p> + +<p>“Just so, old boy, you’re a clever fellow,—I +really do believe the brute understands me!” said Peterkin, +while a broad grin overspread his face, as he drew back and +surveyed the cat.</p> + +<p>At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. +The cat uttered an angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up +and exclaimed,—</p> + +<p>“Bad luck to you, Jack! you’ve nearly made the +heart jump out of my body, you have.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I have,” replied Jack, laughing, as we +entered the bower, “but, as I don’t intend to keep +you or the cat any longer from your supper, I hope that +you’ll both forgive me.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but +I observed that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered +ourselves, and he did not seem to relish any allusion to the +subject afterwards; so we refrained from remarking on it ever +after,—though it tickled us not a little at the time.</p> + +<p>After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful +adventures in our little boat, and distant voyages upon the +sea.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The boat launched—We visit the coral reef—The +great breaker that never goes down—Coral insects—The +way in which coral islands are made—The boat’s +sail—We tax our ingenuity to form fish-hooks—Some of +the fish we saw—And a monstrous whale—Wonderful +shower of little fish—Water-spouts.</p> + +<p>It was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first +launched our little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of +the lagoon. Not a breath of wind ruffled the surface of the +deep. Not a cloud spotted the deep blue sky. Not a +sound that was discordant broke the stillness of the morning, +although there were many sounds, sweet, tiny, and melodious, that +mingled in the universal harmony of nature. The sun was +just rising from the Pacific’s ample bosom and tipping the +mountain tops with a red glow. The sea was shining like a +sheet of glass, yet heaving with the long deep swell that, all +the world round, indicates the life of ocean; and the bright +sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of that +pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious +gems. Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to +its profoundest depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift +that heart in adoration and gratitude to the great Creator of +this magnificent and glorious universe.</p> + +<p>At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and +thither without aim or object. But after the effervescence +of our spirits was abated, we began to look about us and to +consider what we should do.</p> + +<p>“I vote that we row to the reef,” cried +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“And I vote that we visit the islands within the +lagoon,” said I.</p> + +<p>“And I vote we do both,” cried Jack, “so +pull away, boys.”</p> + +<p>As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat +was so small that only two were necessary. The extra pair +were reserved in case any accident should happen to the +others. It was therefore only needful that two of us should +row, while the third steered, by means of an oar, and relieved +the rowers occasionally.</p> + +<p>First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over +it, but saw nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we +landed on a larger island, on which were growing a few cocoa-nut +trees. Not having eaten anything that morning, we gathered +a few of the nuts and breakfasted. After this we pulled +straight out to sea and landed on the coral reef.</p> + +<p>This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We +had now been so long on shore that we had almost forgotten the +appearance of breakers, for there were none within the lagoon; +but now, as we stood beside the foam-crested billow of the open +sea, all the enthusiasm of the sailor was awakened in our +breasts; and, as we gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that single +magnificent breaker that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot +the Coral Island behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm +repose of the scented woods; we forgot all that had passed during +the last few months, and remembered nothing but the storms, the +calms, the fresh breezes and the surging billows of the open +sea.</p> + +<p>This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often +alluded, was a much larger and more sublime object than we had at +all imagined it to be. It rose many yards above the level +of the sea, and could be seen approaching at some distance from +the reef. Slowly and majestically it came on, acquiring +greater volume and velocity as it advanced, until it assumed the +form of a clear watery arch, which sparkled in the bright +sun. On it came with resistless and solemn +majesty,—the upper edge lipped gently over, and it fell +with a roar that seemed as though the heart of Ocean were broken +in the crash of tumultuous water, while the foam-clad coral reef +appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock!</p> + +<p>We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was +with difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I +have once before mentioned, this wave broke in many places over +the reef and scattered some of its spray into the lagoon, but in +most places the reef was sufficiently broad and elevated to +receive and check its entire force. In many places the +coral rocks were covered with vegetation,—the beginning, as +it appeared to us, of future islands. Thus, on this reef, +we came to perceive how most of the small islands of those seas +are formed. On one part we saw the spray of the breaker +washing over the rocks, and millions of little, active, busy +creatures continuing the work of building up this living +rampart. At another place, which was just a little too high +for the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all dead; +for we found that they never did their work above water. +They had faithfully completed the mighty work which their Creator +had given them to do, and they were now all dead. Again, in +other spots the ceaseless lashing of the sea had broken the dead +coral in pieces, and cast it up in the form of sand. Here +sea-birds had alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and stray bits +of wood had been washed up, seeds of plants had been carried by +the wind and a few lovely blades of bright green had already +sprung up, which, when they died, would increase the size and +fertility of these emeralds of Ocean. At other places these +islets had grown apace, and were shaded by one or two cocoa-nut +trees, which grew, literally, in the sand, and were constantly +washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have before remarked, their +fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our taste.</p> + +<p>Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the +large coral islands. We could now understand how the low +ones were formed, but the larger islands cost us much +consideration, yet we could arrive at no certain conclusion on +the subject.</p> + +<p>Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during +the whole day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, +and, withal, rather hungry, to our bower.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Jack, “as our boat answers so +well, we will get a mast and sail made immediately.”</p> + +<p>“So we will,” cried Peterkin, as we all assisted +to drag the boat above high-water mark; “we’ll light +our candle and set about it this very night. Hurrah, my +boys, pull away!”</p> + +<p>As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on +her keel; and, as the sands were in this place mingled with +broken coral rocks, we saw portions of the wood being scraped +off.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” cried Jack, on seeing this. +“That won’t do. Our keel will be worn off in no +time at this rate.”</p> + +<p>“So it will,” said I, pondering deeply as to how +this might be prevented. But I am not of a mechanical turn, +naturally, so I could conceive no remedy save that of putting a +plate of iron on the keel, but as we had no iron I knew not what +was to be done. “It seems to me, Jack,” I +added, “that it is impossible to prevent the keel being +worn off thus.”</p> + +<p>“Impossible!” cried Peterkin, “my dear +Ralph, you are mistaken, there is nothing so +easy—”</p> + +<p>“How?” I inquired, in some surprise.</p> + +<p>“Why, by not using the boat at all!” replied +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin,” said Jack, +as he shouldered the oars, “come along with me and +I’ll give you work to do. In the first place, you +will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to work to make +sewing twine with it—”</p> + +<p>“Please, captain,” interrupted Peterkin, +“I’ve got lots of it made already,—more than +enough, as a little friend of mine used to be in the habit of +saying every day after dinner.”</p> + +<p>“Very well,” continued Jack; “then +you’ll help Ralph to collect cocoa-nut cloth, and cut it +into shape, after which we’ll make a sail of it. +I’ll see to getting the mast and the gearing; so +let’s to work.”</p> + +<p>And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from +that time we had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary +rigging, in our little boat. The sail was not, indeed, very +handsome to look at, as it was formed of a number of oblong +patches of cloth; but we had sewed it well by means of our +sail-needle, so that it was strong, which was the chief +point. Jack had also overcome the difficulty about the +keel, by pinning to it a <i>false</i> keel. This was a +piece of tough wood, of the same length and width as the real +keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of this depth +because the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more +safe, but more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea +where the trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one +direction, was a matter of great importance. This piece of +wood was pegged very firmly to the keel; and we now launched our +boat with the satisfaction of knowing that when the false keel +should be scraped off we could easily put on another; whereas, +should the real keel have been scraped away, we could not have +renewed it without taking our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said +made his “marrow quake to think upon.”</p> + +<p>The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed +about in the lagoon with great delight, and examined with much +interest the appearance of our island from a distance. +Also, we gazed into the depths of the water, and watched for +hours the gambols of the curious and bright-coloured fish among +the corals and sea-weed. Peterkin also made a fishing line, +and Jack constructed a number of hooks, some of which were very +good, others remarkably bad. Some of these hooks were made +of iron-wood, which did pretty well, the wood being extremely +hard, and Jack made them very thick and large. Fish there +are not particular. Some of the crooked bones in fish-heads +also answered for this purpose pretty well. But that which +formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass +finger-ring belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little +trouble to manufacture it. First he cut it with the axe; +then twisted it into the form of a hook. The barb took him +several hours to cut. He did it by means of constant sawing +with the broken pen-knife. As for the point, an +hour’s rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent +one.</p> + +<p>It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the +appearance of the multitudes of fish that were day after day +drawn into our boat by means of the brass hook. Peterkin +always caught them,—for we observed that he derived much +pleasure from fishing,—while Jack and I found ample +amusement in looking on, also in gazing down at the coral groves, +and in baiting the hook. Among the fish that we saw, but +did not catch, were porpoises and sword-fish, whales and +sharks. The porpoises came frequently into our lagoon in +shoals, and amused us not a little by their bold leaps into the +air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword-fish +were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting +from their noses. We often saw them darting after other +fish, and no doubt they sometimes killed them with their ivory +swords. Jack remembered having heard once of a sword-fish +attacking a ship,—which seemed strange indeed; but, as they +are often in the habit of attacking whales, perhaps it mistook +the ship for one. This sword-fish ran against the vessel +with such force, that it drove its sword quite through the thick +planks; and when the ship arrived in harbour, long afterwards, +the sword was found still sticking in it!</p> + +<p>Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to +bathe in deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat +to give us warning, if he should see a shark approaching. +As for the whales, they never came into our lagoon, but we +frequently saw them spouting in the deep water beyond the +reef. I shall never forget my surprise the first day I saw +one of these huge monsters close to me. We had been +rambling about on the reef during the morning, and were about to +re-embark in our little boat, to return home, when a loud blowing +sound caused us to wheel rapidly round. We were just in +time to see a shower of spray falling, and the flukes or tail of +some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few hundred yards +off. We waited some time to see if he would rise +again. As we stood, the sea seemed to open up at our very +feet; an immense spout of water was sent with a snort high into +the air, and the huge blunt head of a sperm whale arose before +us. It was so large that it could easily have taken our +little boat, along with ourselves, into its mouth! It +plunged slowly back into the sea, like a large ship foundering, +and struck the water with its tail so forcibly as to cause a +sound like a cannon shot. We also saw a great number of +flying fish, although we caught none; and we noticed that they +never flew out of the water except when followed by their bitter +foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to +escape. But of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us +so much as those that we used to find in shallow pools after a +shower of rain; and this not on account of their appearance, for +they were ordinary-looking and very small, but on account of +their having descended in a shower of rain! We could +account for them in no other way, because the pools in which we +found these fish were quite dry before the shower, and at some +distance above high-water mark. Jack, however, suggested a +cause which seemed to me very probable. We used often to +see water-spouts in the sea. A water-spout is a whirling +body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp-pointed +pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long +tongue, which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have +joined, they look something like an hour-glass. The +water-spout is then carried by the wind, sometimes gently, +sometimes with violence, over the sea, sometimes up into the +clouds, and then, bursting asunder, it descends in a +deluge. This often happens over the land as well as over +the sea; and it sometimes does much damage, but frequently it +passes gently away. Now, Jack thought that the little fish +might perhaps have been carried up in a water-spout, and so sent +down again in a shower of rain. But we could not be certain +as to this point; yet we thought it likely.</p> + +<p>During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we +caught a good many eels, which we found to be very good to +eat. We also found turtles among the coral rocks, and made +excellent soup in our iron kettle. Moreover, we discovered +many shrimps and prawns, so that we had no lack of variety in our +food; and, indeed, we never passed a week without making some new +and interesting discovery of some sort or other, either on the +land or in the sea.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A monster wave and its consequences—The boat lost and +found—Peterkin’s terrible accident—Supplies of +food for a voyage in the boat—We visit Penguin Island, and +are amazed beyond measure—Account of the penguins.</p> + +<p>One day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were +sitting on the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an +excursion which we intended to make to Penguin Island the next +day.</p> + +<p>“You see,” said Peterkin, “it might be all +very well for a stupid fellow like me to remain here and leave +the penguins alone, but it would be quite inconsistent with your +characters as philosophers to remain any longer in ignorance of +the habits and customs of these birds; so the sooner we go the +better.”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” said I; “there is nothing I +desire so much as to have a closer inspection of them.”</p> + +<p>“And I think,” said Jack, “that you had +better remain at home, Peterkin, to take care of the cat; for +I’m sure the hogs will be at it in your absence, out of +revenge for your killing their great-grandmother so +recklessly.”</p> + +<p>“Stay at home?” cried Peterkin; “my dear +fellow, you would certainly lose your way, or get upset, if I +were not there to take care of you.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, true,” said Jack, gravely, “that did +not occur to me; no doubt you must go. Our boat does +require a good deal of ballast; and all that you say, Peterkin, +carries so much weight with it, that we won’t need stones +if you go.”</p> + +<p>Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event +occurred, which, as it is not generally known, I shall be +particular in recording here.</p> + +<p>While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, +like a low cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The +day was a fine one, though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was +blowing, but the sea was not rougher, or the breaker on the reef +higher, than usual. At first we thought that this looked +like a thunder-cloud; and, as we had had a good deal of broken +weather of late, accompanied by occasional peals of thunder, we +supposed that a storm must be approaching. Gradually, +however, this line seemed to draw nearer, without spreading up +over the sky, as would certainly have been the case if it had +been a storm-cloud. Still nearer it came, and soon we saw +that it was moving swiftly towards the island; but there was no +sound till it reached the islands out at sea. As it passed +these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, that a cloud +of white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the air: it +was accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture +that the approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but +we had no idea how large it was till it came near to +ourselves. When it approached the outer reef, however, we +were awe-struck with its unusual magnitude; and we sprang to our +feet, and clambered hastily up to the highest point of the +precipice, under an indefinable feeling of fear.</p> + +<p>I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was +very near to the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was +at a considerable distance out to sea. Owing to this +formation, the wave reached the reef at the latter point before +it struck at the foot of Spouting Cliff. The instant it +touched the reef we became aware, for the first time, of its +awful magnitude. It burst completely over the reef at all +points, with a roar that seemed louder to me than thunder; and +this roar continued for some seconds, while the wave rolled +gradually along towards the cliff on which we stood. As its +crest reared before us, we felt that we were in great danger, and +turned to flee; but we were too late. With a crash that +seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic billow fell, and +instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of water-spouts with +such force that they shrieked on issuing from their narrow +vents. It seemed to us as if the earth had been blown up +with water. We were stunned and confused by the shock, and +so drenched and blinded with spray, that we knew not for a few +moments whither to flee for shelter. At length we all three +gained an eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a +scene of devastation met our gaze as we looked along the +shore! This enormous wave not only burst over the reef, but +continued its way across the lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach +of the island with such force that passed completely over it and +dashed into the woods, levelling the smaller trees and bushes in +its headlong course!</p> + +<p>On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been +swept away, and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have +been utterly destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we +thought of this, and we hastened round through the woods towards +our home. On reaching it we found, to our great relief of +mind, that the force of the wave had been expended just before +reaching the bower; but the entrance to it was almost blocked up +by the torn-up bushes and tangled heaps of sea-weed. Having +satisfied ourselves as to the bower, we hurried to the spot where +the boat had been left; but no boat was there! The spot on +which it had stood was vacant, and no sign of it could we see on +looking around us.</p> + +<p>“It may have been washed up into the woods,” said +Jack, hurrying up the beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was +to be seen, and we were about to give ourselves over to despair, +when Peterkin called to Jack and said,—</p> + +<p>“Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious +and wise as to make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts +grow upon trees; will you now be so good as to inform me what +sort of fruit that is growing on the top of yonder bush? for I +confess to being ignorant, or, at least, doubtful on the +point.”</p> + +<p>We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our +surprise, beheld our little boat snugly nestled among the +leaves! We were very much overjoyed at this, for we would +have suffered any loss rather than the loss of our boat. We +found that the wave had actually borne the boat on its crest from +the beach into the woods, and there launched it into the heart of +this bush; which was extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed +against a rock or a tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, +whereas it had not received the smallest injury. It was no +easy matter, however, to get it out of the bush and down to the +sea again. This cost us two days of hard labour to +accomplish.</p> + +<p>We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the +bower, and spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the +neighbourhood to look as clean and orderly as before; for the +uprooted bushes and sea-weed that lay on the beach formed a more +dreadfully confused-looking mass than one who had not seen the +place after the inundation could conceive.</p> + +<p>Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of +those who interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of +our world, that this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of +the islands of the Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the +year. I heard this stated by the missionaries during my +career in those seas. They could not tell me whether it +visited all of the islands, but I was certainly assured that it +occurred periodically in some of them.</p> + +<p>After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the +<i>debris</i> of the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to +paying the penguins a visit. The boat was therefore +overhauled and a few repairs done. Then we prepared a +supply of provisions, for we intended to be absent at least a +night or two, perhaps longer. This took us some time to do, +for while Jack was busy with the boat, Peterkin was sent into the +woods to spear a hog or two, and had to search long, sometimes, +ere he found them. Peterkin was usually sent on this +errand, when we wanted a pork chop (which was not seldom), +because he was so active, and could run so wonderfully fast that +he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, being +dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home +without having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, +indeed, a more serious accident happened to him. He had +been out all morning alone and did not return at the usual time +to dinner. We wondered at this, for Peterkin was always +very punctual at the dinner hour. As supper-time drew near +we began to be anxious about him, and at length sallied forth to +search the woods. For a long time we sought in vain, but a +little before dark we came upon the tracks of the hogs, which we +followed up until we came to the brow of a rather steep bank or +precipice. Looking over this we beheld Peterkin lying in a +state of insensibility at the foot, with his cheek resting on the +snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the earth by the +spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to bathe +his forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of seeing +him revive. After we had carried him home he related to as +how the thing had happened.</p> + +<p>“You must know,” said he, “I walked about +all the forenoon, till I was as tired as an old donkey, without +seeing a single grunter, not so much as a track of one; but, as I +was determined not to return empty-handed, I resolved to go +without my dinner and—”</p> + +<p>“What!” exclaimed Jack, “did you +<i>really</i> resolve to do that?”</p> + +<p>“Now, Jack, hold your tongue,” returned Peterkin; +“I say that I resolved to forego my dinner and to push to +the head of the small valley, where I felt pretty sure of +discovering the hogs. I soon found that I was on the right +scent, for I had scarcely walked half a mile in the direction of +the small plum tree we found there the other day, when a squeak +fell on my ear. ‘Ho, ho,’ said I, ‘there +you go, my boys;’ and I hurried up the glen. I soon +started them, and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. +In a few seconds I was up with him, and stuck my spear right +through his dumpy body. Just as I did so, I saw that we +were on the edge of a precipice, whether high or low I knew not, +but I had been running at such a pace that I could not stop, so +the pig and I gave a howl in concert and went plunging over +together. I remembered nothing more after that, till I came +to my senses and found you bathing my temples, and Ralph wringing +his hands over me.”</p> + +<p>But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of +getting tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in +hunting, and returned before evening with three very nice little +hogs. I, also, was successful in my visit to the mud-flats, +where I killed several ducks. So that, when we launched and +loaded our boat at sunrise the following morning, we found our +store of provisions to be more than sufficient. Part had +been cooked the night before, and, on taking note of the +different items, we found the account to stand thus:—</p> + +<p>10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.)<br /> +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.)<br /> +6 Taro roots.<br /> +50 Fine large plums.<br /> +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe.<br /> +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.)<br /> +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw.<br /> +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing.</p> + +<p>I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by +Peterkin specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of +its compounding a profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; +but I can say, with much confidence, that we found it to be +atrociously bad, and, after the first tasting, scraped it +carefully out and threw it overboard. We calculated that +this supply would last us for several days, but we afterwards +found that it was much more than we required, especially in +regard to the cocoa nuts, of which we found large supplies +wherever we went. However, as Peterkin remarked, it was +better to have too much than too little, as we knew not to what +straits we might be put during our voyage.</p> + +<p>It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and +rowed over the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed +between the two green islets that guard the entrance. We +experienced some difficulty and no little danger in passing the +surf of the breaker, and shipped a good deal of water in the +attempt; but, once past the billow, we found ourselves floating +placidly on the long oily swell that rose and fell slowly as it +rolled over the wide ocean.</p> + +<p>Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at +about a mile beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it +must be at least twenty miles distant by the way we should have +to go. We might, indeed, have shortened the way by coasting +round our island inside of the lagoon, and going out at the +passage in the reef nearly opposite to Penguin Island, but we +preferred to go by the open sea; first, because it was more +adventurous; and, secondly, because we should have the pleasure +of again feeling the motion of the deep, which we all loved very +much, not being liable to sea sickness.</p> + +<p>“I wish we had a breeze,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“So do I,” cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and +wiping his heated brow; “pulling is hard work. Oh +dear, if we could only catch a hundred or two of these gulls, tie +them to the boat with long strings, and make them fly as we want +them, how capital it would be!”</p> + +<p>“Or bore a hole through a shark’s tail, and reeve +a rope through it, eh?” remarked Jack. “But, I +say, it seems that my wish is going to be granted, for here comes +a breeze. Ship your oar, Peterkin. Up with the mast, +Ralph; I’ll see to the sail. Mind your helm; look out +for squalls!”</p> + +<p>This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark +blue line on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of +time, swept down on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it +went. We presented the stern of the boat to its first +violence, and, in a few seconds, it moderated into a steady +breeze, to which we spread our sail and flew merrily over the +waves. Although the breeze died away soon afterwards, it +had been so stiff while it lasted, that we were carried over the +greater part of our way before it fell calm again; so that, when +the flapping of the sail against the mast told us that it was +time to resume the oars, we were not much more than a mile from +Penguin Island.</p> + +<p>“There go the soldiers!” cried Peterkin as we came +in sight of it; “how spruce their white trousers look, this +morning! I wonder if they will receive us kindly. +D’you think they are hospitable, Jack?”</p> + +<p>“Don’t talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you +shall see shortly.”</p> + +<p>As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the +manoeuvres and appearance of these strange birds. They +seemed to be of different species, for some had crests on their +heads while others had none, and while some were about the size +of a goose others appeared nearly as large as a swan. We +also saw a huge albatross soaring above the heads of the +penguins. It was followed and surrounded by numerous flocks +of sea-gulls. Having approached to within a few yards of +the island, which was a low rock, with no other vegetation on it +than a few bushes, we lay on our oars and gazed at the birds with +surprise and pleasure, they returning our gaze with +interest. We now saw that their soldier-like appearance was +owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on their short +legs,—“Bolt-up-right,” as Peterkin expressed +it. They had black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, +and bluish backs. Their wings were so short that they +looked more like the fins of a fish, and, indeed, we soon saw +that they used them for the purpose of swimming under +water. There were no quills on these wings, but a sort of +scaly feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. +Their legs were short, and placed so far back that the birds, +while on land, were obliged to stand quite upright in order to +keep their balance; but in the water they floated like other +water-fowl. At first we were so stunned with the clamour +which they and other sea-birds kept up around us, that we knew +not which way to look,—for they covered the rocks in +thousands; but, as we continued to gaze, we observed several +quadrupeds (as we thought) walking in the midst of the +penguins.</p> + +<p>“Pull in a bit,” cried Peterkin, “and +let’s see what these are. They must be fond of noisy +company, to consort with such creatures.”</p> + +<p>To our surprise we found that these were no other than +penguins which had gone down on all fours, and were crawling +among the bushes on their feet and wings, just like +quadrupeds. Suddenly one big old bird, that had been +sitting on a point very near to us, gazing in mute astonishment, +became alarmed, and, scuttling down the rocks, plumped or fell, +rather than ran, into the sea. It dived in a moment, and, a +few seconds afterwards, came out of the water far a-head, with +such a spring, and such a dive back into the sea again, that we +could scarcely believe it was not a fish that had leaped in +sport.</p> + +<p>“That beats everything,” said Peterkin, rubbing +his nose, and screwing up his face with an expression of +exasperated amazement. “I’ve heard of a thing +being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I never did expect to +live to see a brute that was all three together,—at +once—in one! But look there!” he continued, +pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, “look +there! there’s no end to it. What <i>has</i> that +brute got under its tail?”</p> + +<p>We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw +a penguin walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with +an egg under its tail. There were several others, we +observed, burdened in the same way; and we found afterwards that +these were a species of penguins that always carried their eggs +so. Indeed, they had a most convenient cavity for the +purpose, just between the tail and the legs. We were very +much impressed with the regularity and order of this +colony. The island seemed to be apportioned out into +squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and sat in stiff +solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and down +the spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but +others were feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us +to laugh not a little. The mother stood on a mound or +raised rock, while the young one stood patiently below her on the +ground. Suddenly the mother raised her head and uttered a +series of the most discordant cackling sounds.</p> + +<p>“She’s going to choke,” cried Peterkin.</p> + +<p>But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked +like it. In a few seconds she put down her head and opened +her mouth, into which the young one thrust its beak and seemed to +suck something from her throat. Then the cackling was +renewed, the sucking continued, and so the operation of feeding +was carried on till the young one was satisfied; but what she fed +her little one with, we could not tell.</p> + +<p>“Now, just look yonder!” said Peterkin, in an +excited tone; “if that isn’t the most abominable +piece of maternal deception I ever saw. That rascally old +lady penguin has just pitched her young one into the sea, and +there’s another about to follow her example.”</p> + +<p>This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep +rock close to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin +endeavouring to entice her young one into the water; but the +young one seemed very unwilling to go, and, notwithstanding the +enticements of its mother, moved very slowly towards her. +At last she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it a +little towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as +to say, ‘Don’t be afraid, darling! I +won’t hurt you, my pet!’ but no sooner did she get it +to the edge of the rock, where it stood looking pensively down at +the sea, than she gave it a sudden and violent push, sending it +headlong down the slope into the water, where its mother left it +to scramble ashore as it best could. We observed many of +them employed in doing this, and we came to the conclusion that +this is the way in which old penguins teach their children to +swim.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we +were startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the +most clumsy and ludicrous manner towards the sea. The +beach, here, was a sloping rock, and when they came to it, some +of them succeeded in hopping down in safety, but others lost +their balance and rolled and scrambled down the slope in the most +helpless manner. The instant they reached the water, +however, they seemed to be in their proper element. They +dived and bounded out of it and into it again with the utmost +agility; and so, diving and bounding and spluttering, for they +could not fly, they went rapidly out to sea.</p> + +<p>On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and +said, “It’s my opinion that these birds are all +stark, staring mad, and that this is an enchanted island. I +therefore propose that we should either put about ship and fly in +terror from the spot, or land valorously on the island, and sell +our lives as dearly as we can.”</p> + +<p>“I vote for landing, so pull in, lads,” said Jack, +giving a stroke with his oar that made the boat spin. In a +few seconds we ran the boat into a little creek where we made her +fast to a projecting piece of coral, and, running up the beach, +entered the ranks of the penguins armed with our cudgels and our +spear. We were greatly surprised to find that, instead of +attacking us or showing signs of fear at our approach, these +curious birds did not move from their places until we laid hands +on them, and merely turned their eyes on us in solemn, stupid +wonder as we passed. There was one old penguin, however, +that began to walk slowly toward the sea, and Peterkin took it +into his head that he would try to interrupt its progress, so he +ran between it and the sea and brandished his cudgel in its +face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It +would not retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but +battled with Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it +reached the sea. Had Peterkin used his club he could easily +have felled it, no doubt; but, as he had no wish to do so cruel +an act merely out of sport, he let the bird escape.</p> + +<p>We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the +habits of these curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we +all three concluded, after much consultation, that they were the +most wonderful creatures we had ever seen; and further, we +thought it probable that they were the most wonderful creatures +in the world!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +An awful storm and its consequences—Narrow +escape—A rock proves a sure foundation—A fearful +night and a bright morning—Deliverance from danger.</p> + +<p>It was evening before we left the island of the +penguins. As we had made up our minds to encamp for the +night on a small island, whereon grew a few cocoa-nut trees, +which was about two miles off, we lay to our oars with some +energy. But a danger was in store for us which we had not +anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so quickly to +Penguin Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff breeze, +and, before we had made half the distance to the small island, it +became a regular gale. Although it was not so directly +against us as to prevent our rowing in the course we wished to +go, yet it checked us very much; and although the force of the +sea was somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began to +rise, and to roll their broken crests against our small craft, so +that she began to take in water, and we had much ado to keep +ourselves afloat. At last the wind and sea together became +so violent that we found it impossible to make the island, so +Jack suddenly put the head of the boat round and ordered Peterkin +and me to hoist a corner of the sail, intending to run back to +Penguin Island.</p> + +<p>“We shall at least have the shelter of the +bushes,” he said, as the boat flew before the wind, +“and the penguins will keep us company.”</p> + +<p>As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much +against us that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order +to beat up for the island, being by this change thrown much to +leeward of it. What made matters worse was, that the gale +came in squalls, so that we were more than once nearly upset.</p> + +<p>“Stand by, both of you,” cried Jack, in a quick, +earnest tone; “be ready to dowse the sail. I very +much fear we won’t make the island after all.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting +everything to Jack that we had fallen into the way of not +considering things, especially such things as were under +Jack’s care. We had, therefore, never doubted for a +moment that all was going well, so that it was with no little +anxiety that we heard him make the above remark. However, +we had no time for question or surmise, for, at the moment he +spoke, a heavy squall was bearing down upon us, and, as we were +then flying with our lee gunwale dipping occasionally under the +waves, it was evident that we should have to lower our sail +altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the boat, +but Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did +not upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full +of water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again +hoisted a corner of the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared +came upon us. We found it quite impossible to make Penguin +Island. The gale carried us quickly past it towards the +open sea, and the terrible truth flashed upon us that we should +be swept out and left to perish miserably in a small boat in the +midst of the wide ocean.</p> + +<p>This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw +nothing in the direction whither the wind was blowing us save the +raging billows of the sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed +around us, for we were now beyond the shelter of the islands, and +it seemed as though any of the huge billows, which curled over in +masses of foam, might swallow us up in a moment. The water, +also, began to wash in over our sides, and I had to keep +constantly baling, for Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin +the sail for an instant, without endangering our lives. In +the midst of this distress Jack uttered an exclamation of hope, +and pointed towards a low island or rock which lay directly +ahead. It had been hitherto unobserved, owing to the dark +clouds that obscured the sky and the blinding spray that seemed +to fill the whole atmosphere.</p> + +<p>As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute +of trees and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely +over it. In fact it was nothing more than the summit of one +of the coral formations, which rose only a few feet above the +level of the water, and was, in stormy weather, all but +invisible. Over this island the waves were breaking in the +utmost fury, and our hearts sank within us as we saw that there +was not a spot where we could thrust our little boat without its +being dashed to pieces.</p> + +<p>“Show a little bit more sail,” cried Jack, as we +swept past the weather side of the rock with fearful speed.</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay,” answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot +more of our sail.</p> + +<p>Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over +and creak so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I +expected to be upset every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart +for his rashness. But I did him injustice, for, although +during two seconds the water rushed in-board in a torrent, he +succeeded in steering us sharply round to the leeward side of the +rock, where the water was comparatively calm, and the force of +the breeze broken.</p> + +<p>“Out your oars now, lads; that’s well done. +Give way!” We obeyed instantly. The oars +splashed into the waves together. One good hearty pull, and +we were floating in a comparatively calm creek that was so narrow +as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we were in +perfect safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our cable +to the rocks, I thanked God in my heart for our deliverance from +so great danger. But, although I have said we were now in +safety, I suspect that few of my readers would have envied our +position. It is true we had no lack of food, but we were +drenched to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and the spray +flying over our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as +it were, in water; the spot on which we had landed was not more +than twelve yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not +move without the risk of being swept away by the storm. At +the upper end of the creek was a small hollow or cave in the +rock, which sheltered us from the fury of the winds and waves; +and as the rock extended in a sort of ledge over our heads, it +prevented the spray from falling upon us.</p> + +<p>“Why,” said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery +again, “it seems to me that we have got into a +mermaid’s cave, for there is nothing but water all round +us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the +past.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s idea was not inappropriate, for, what with +the sea roaring in white foam up to our very feet, and the spray +flying in white sheets continually over our heads, and the water +dripping heavily from the ledge above like a curtain in front of +our cave, it did seem to us very much more like being below than +above water.</p> + +<p>“Now, boys,” cried Jack, “bestir yourselves, +and let’s make ourselves comfortable. Toss out our +provisions, Peterkin; and here, Ralph, lend a hand to haul up the +boat. Look sharp.”</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay, captain,” we cried, as we hastened to +obey, much cheered by the hearty manner of our comrade.</p> + +<p>Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, +so that we succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable +than could have been expected. We landed our provisions, +wrung the water out of our garments, spread our sail below us for +a carpet, and, after having eaten a hearty meal, began to feel +quite cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits sank +again, for with the daylight all evidence of our security +vanished away. We could no longer see the firm rock on +which we lay, while we were stunned with the violence of the +tempest that raged around us. The night grew pitchy dark, +as it advanced, so that we could not see our hands when we held +them up before our eyes, and were obliged to feel each other +occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for the storm at +last became so terrible that it was difficult to make our voices +audible. A slight variation of the wind, as we supposed, +caused a few drops of spray ever and anon to blow into our faces; +and the eddy of the sea, in its mad boiling, washed up into our +little creek until it reached our feet and threatened to tear +away our boat. In order to prevent this latter calamity, we +hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare +through the watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror +to the scene. Yet we longed for those dismal flashes, for +they were less appalling than the thick blackness that succeeded +them. Crashing peals of thunder seemed to tear the skies in +twain, and fell upon our ears through the wild yelling of the +hurricane as if it had been but a gentle summer breeze; while the +billows burst upon the weather side of the island until we +fancied that the solid rock was giving way, and, in our agony, we +clung to the bare ground, expecting every moment to be whirled +away and whelmed in the black howling sea! Oh! it was a +night of terrible anxiety, and no one can conceive the feelings +of intense gratitude and relief with which we at last saw the +dawn of day break through the vapory mists around us.</p> + +<p>For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, +while the storm continued to rage with unabated fury. On +the morning of the fourth day it suddenly ceased, and the wind +fell altogether; but the waves still ran so high that we did not +dare to put off in our boat. During the greater part of +this period we scarcely slept above a few minutes at a time, but +on the third night we slept soundly and awoke early on the fourth +morning to find the sea very much down, and the sun shining +brightly again in the clear blue sky.</p> + +<p>It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in +our little boat and steered away for our island home, which, we +were overjoyed to find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we +had feared that we had been blown out of sight of it +altogether. As it was a dead calm we had to row during the +greater part of the day; but towards the afternoon a fair breeze +sprang up, which enabled us to hoist our sail. We soon +passed Penguin Island, and the other island which we had failed +to reach on the day the storm commenced; but as we had still +enough of provisions, and were anxious to get home, we did not +land, to the great disappointment of Peterkin, who seemed to +entertain quite an affection for the penguins.</p> + +<p>Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did +not reach the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and +before we had sailed more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, +the wind died away altogether, so that we had to take to our oars +again. It was late and the moon and stars were shining +brightly when we arrived opposite the bower and leaped upon the +strand. So glad were we to be safe back again on our +beloved island, that we scarcely took time to drag the boat a +short way up the beach, and then ran up to see that all was right +at the bower. I must confess, however, that my joy was +mingled with a vague sort of fear lest our home had been visited +and destroyed during our absence; but on reaching it we found +everything just as it had been left, and the poor black cat +curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our +humble dwelling.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Shoemaking—The even tenor of our way suddenly +interrupted—An unexpected visit and an appalling +battle—We all become warriors, and Jack proves himself be a +hero.</p> + +<p>For many months after this we continued to live on our island +in uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went +out a-fishing in the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the +woods, or ascended to the mountain top, by way of variety, +although Peterkin always asserted that we went for the purpose of +hailing any ship that might chance to heave in sight. But I +am certain that none of us wished to be delivered from our +captivity, for we were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say +that as we were very young we should not feel the loss of a year +or two. Peterkin, as I have said before, was thirteen years +of age, Jack eighteen, and I fifteen. But Jack was very +tall, strong, and manly for his age, and might easily have been +mistaken for twenty.</p> + +<p>The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual +summer, and as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit +and blossom all the year round, we never wanted for a plentiful +supply of food. The hogs, too, seemed rather to increase +than diminish, although Peterkin was very frequent in his attacks +on them with his spear. If at any time we failed in finding +a drove, we had only to pay a visit to the plum-tree before +mentioned, where we always found a large family of them asleep +under its branches.</p> + +<p>We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making +various garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had +landed were beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also +succeeded in making excellent shoes out of the skin of the old +hog, in the following manner:—He first cut a piece of the +hide, of an oblong form, a few inches longer than his foot. +This he soaked in water, and, while it was wet, he sewed up one +end of it, so as to form a rough imitation of that part of the +heel of a shoe where the seam is. This done, he bored a row +of holes all round the edge of the piece of skin, through which a +tough line was passed. Into the sewed-up part of this shoe +he thrust his heel, then, drawing the string tight, the edges +rose up and overlapped his foot all round. It is true there +were a great many ill-looking puckers in these shoes, but we +found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack came at +last to prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various +other useful articles, which added to our comfort, and once or +twice spoke of building us a house, but we had so great an +affection for the bower, and, withal, found it so serviceable, +that we determined not to leave it, nor to attempt the building +of a house, which, in such a climate, might turn out to be rather +disagreeable than useful.</p> + +<p>We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on +the other side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we +had powder and shot, as it would render pig-killing much easier; +but, after all, we had become so expert in the use of our sling +and bow and spear, that we were independent of more deadly +weapons.</p> + +<p>Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much +pleasure as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert +in the water from constant practice. As for Jack and I, we +began to feel as if water were our native element, and revelled +in it with so much confidence and comfort that Peterkin said he +feared we would turn into fish some day, and swim off and leave +him; adding, that he had been for a long time observing that Jack +was becoming more and more like a shark every day. +Whereupon Jack remarked, that if he, Peterkin, were changed into +a fish, he would certainly turn into nothing better or bigger +than a shrimp. Poor Peterkin did not envy us our delightful +excursions under water, except, indeed, when Jack would dive down +to the bottom of the Water Garden, sit down on a rock and look up +and make faces at him. Peterkin did feel envious then, and +often said he would give anything to be able to do that. I +was much amused when Peterkin said this; for if he could only +have seen his own face when he happened to take a short dive, he +would have seen that Jack’s was far surpassed by it. +The great difference being, however, that Jack made faces on +purpose—Peterkin couldn’t help it!</p> + +<p>Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and +amusements, an event occurred one day which was as unexpected as +it was exceedingly alarming and very horrible.</p> + +<p>Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the +rocks at Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from +his garments, having recently fallen by accident into the +sea,—a thing he was constantly doing,—when our +attention was suddenly arrested by two objects which appeared on +the horizon.</p> + +<p>“What are yon, think you?” I said, addressing +Jack.</p> + +<p>“I can’t imagine,” answered he; +“I’ve noticed them for some time, and fancied they +were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them the more I feel +convinced they are much larger than gulls.”</p> + +<p>“They seem to be coming towards us,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Hallo! what’s wrong?” inquired Peterkin, +coming up.</p> + +<p>“Look there,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Whales!” cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with +his hand. “No! eh! can they be boats, +Jack?”</p> + +<p>Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing +human faces again.</p> + +<p>“I think you are about right, Peterkin;—but they +seem to me to move strangely for boats,” said Jack, in a +low tone, as if he were talking to himself.</p> + +<p>I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack’s +countenance as he gazed long and intently at the two objects, +which were now nearing us fast. At last he sprang to his +feet. “They are canoes, Ralph! whether war-canoes or +not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all the natives of the +South Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they have little +respect for strangers. We must hide if they land here, +which I earnestly hope they will not do.”</p> + +<p>I was greatly alarmed at Jack’s speech, but I confess I +thought less of what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner +in which he said it, and it was with very uncomfortable feelings +that Peterkin and I followed him quickly into the woods.</p> + +<p>“How unfortunate,” said I, as we gained the +shelter of the bushes, “that we have forgotten our +arms.”</p> + +<p>“It matters not,” said Jack; “here are clubs +enough and to spare.” As he spoke, he laid his hand +on a bundle of stout poles of various sizes, which +Peterkin’s ever-busy hands had formed, during our frequent +visits to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, than that +of having something to do.</p> + +<p>We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, +and lay down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes +approach, without ourselves being seen. At first we made an +occasional remark on their appearance, but after they entered the +lagoon, and drew near the beach, we ceased to speak, and gazed +with intense interest at the scene before us.</p> + +<p>We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by +the other, and that it contained a few women and children, as +well as men,—perhaps forty souls altogether; while the +canoe which pursued it contained only men. They seemed to +be about the same in number, but were better armed, and had the +appearance of being a war party. Both crews were paddling +with all their might, and it seemed as if the pursuers exerted +themselves to overtake the natives ere they could land. In +this, however, they failed. The foremost canoe made for the +beach close beneath the rocks behind which we were +concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors in the +water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam +curled from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in +their black faces as they strained every muscle of their naked +bodies; nor did they relax their efforts till the canoe struck +the beach with a violent shock; then, with a shout of defiance, +the whole party sprang, as if by magic, from the canoe to the +shore. Three women, two of whom carried infants in their +arms, rushed into the woods; and the men crowded to the +water’s edge, with stones in their hands, spears levelled, +and clubs brandished, to resist the landing of their enemies.</p> + +<p>The distance between the two canoes had been about half a +mile, and, at the great speed they were going, this was soon +passed. As the pursuers neared the shore, no sign of fear +or hesitation was noticeable. On they came like a wild +charger,—received but recked not of a shower of +stones. The canoe struck, and, with a yell that seemed to +issue from the throats of incarnate fiends, they leaped into the +water, and drove their enemies up the beach.</p> + +<p>The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to +behold. Most of the men wielded clubs of enormous size and +curious shapes, with which they dashed out each other’s +brains. As they were almost entirely naked, and had to +bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their terrible hand-to-hand +encounters, they looked more like demons than human beings. +I felt my heart grow sick at the sight of this bloody battle, and +would fain have turned away, but a species of fascination seemed +to hold me down and glue my eyes upon the combatants. I +observed that the attacking party was led by a most extraordinary +being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I concluded was a +chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous extent, so +that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light-yellow +hue, which surprised me much, for the man’s body was as +black as coal, and I felt convinced that the hair must have been +dyed. He was tattooed from head to foot; and his face, +besides being tattooed, was besmeared with red paint, and +streaked with white. Altogether, with his yellow +turban-like hair, his Herculean black frame, his glittering eyes +and white teeth, he seemed the most terrible monster I ever +beheld. He was very active in the fight, and had already +killed four men.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite +as strong and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club +something like an eagle’s beak at the point. For a +second or two these giants eyed each other warily, moving round +and round, as if to catch each other at a disadvantage, but +seeing that nothing was to be gained by this caution, and that +the loss of time might effectually turn the tide of battle either +way, they apparently made up their minds to attack at the same +instant, for, with a wild shout and simultaneous spring, they +swung their heavy clubs, which met with a loud report. +Suddenly the yellow-haired savage tripped, his enemy sprang +forward, the ponderous club was swung, but it did not descend, +for at that moment the savage was felled to the ground by a stone +from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief’s +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The +savages who landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on +seeing the fall of their chief. But not one escaped. +They were all overtaken and felled to the earth. I saw, +however, that they were not all killed. Indeed, their +enemies, now that they were conquered, seemed anxious to take +them alive; and they succeeded in securing fifteen, whom they +bound hand and foot with cords, and, carrying them up into the +woods, laid them down among the bushes. Here they left +them, for what purpose I knew not, and returned to the scene of +the late battle, where the remnant of the party were bathing +their wounds.</p> + +<p>Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, +only twenty-eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the +bush to hunt for the women and children. Of the other +party, as I have said, only ten survived, and these were lying +bound and helpless on the grass.</p> + +<p>Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and +whispered our fears that the savages might clamber up the rocks +to search for fresh water, and so discover our place of +concealment; but we were so much interested in watching their +movements that we agreed to remain where we were; and, indeed, we +could not easily have risen without exposing ourselves to +detection. One of the savages now went up to the wood and +soon returned with a bundle of fire-wood, and we were not a +little surprised to see him set fire to it by the very same means +used by Jack the time we made our first fire,—namely, with +the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, two of the +party went again to the woods and returned with one of the bound +men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as +the thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their +enemies. As they bore him to the fire my feelings almost +overpowered me. I gasped for breath, and seizing my club, +endeavoured to spring to my feet; but Jack’s powerful arm +pinned me to the earth. Next moment one of the savages +raised his club, and fractured the wretched creature’s +skull. He must have died instantly, and, strange though it +may seem, I confess to a feeling of relief when the deed was +done, because I now knew that the poor savage could not be burned +alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to quiver when the +monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, after roasting +them slightly over the fire, devoured them.</p> + +<p>Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few +seconds, the two savages hastened towards the fire dragging the +three women and their two infants along with them. One of +those women was much younger than her companions, and we were +struck with the modesty of her demeanour and the gentle +expression of her face, which, although she had the flattish nose +and thick lips of the others, was of a light-brown colour, and we +conjectured that she must be of a different race. She and +her companions wore short petticoats and a kind of tippet on +their shoulders. Their hair was jet black, but instead of +being long, was short and curly,—though not +woolly—somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While +we gazed with interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, +the big chief advanced to one of the elder females and laid his +hand upon the child. But the mother shrank from him, and +clasping the little one to her bosom, uttered a wail of +fear. With a savage laugh, the chief tore the child from +her arms and tossed it into the sea. A low groan burst from +Jack’s lips as we witnessed this atrocious act and heard +the mother’s shriek, as she fell insensible on the +sand. The rippling waves rolled the child on the beach, as +if they refused to be a party in such a foul murder, and we could +observe that the little one still lived.</p> + +<p>The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief +addressed her; but although we heard his voice, and even the +words distinctly, of course we could not understand what he +said. The girl made no answer to his fierce questions, and +we saw by the way in which he pointed to the fire that he +threatened her life.</p> + +<p>“Peterkin,” said Jack in a hoarse whisper, +“have you got your knife?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as +death.</p> + +<p>“That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding +quick. Here is the small knife, Ralph. Fly both of +you through the bush, cut the cords that bind the prisoners and +set them free. There! quick, ere it be too +late.” Jack sprang up, and seized a heavy but short +bludgeon, while his strong frame trembled with emotion, and large +drops rolled down his forehead.</p> + +<p>At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few +minutes before advanced towards the girl with his heavy +club. Jack uttered a yell that rang like a death-shriek +among the rocks. With one bound he leaped over a precipice +full fifteen feet high, and, before the savages had recovered +from their surprise, was in the midst of them; while Peterkin and +I dashed through the bushes towards the prisoners. With one +blow of his staff Jack felled the man with the club, then, +turning round with a look of fury, he rushed upon the big chief +with the yellow hair. Had the blow which Jack aimed at his +head taken effect, the huge savage would have needed no second +stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it by springing to +one side, while, at the same time, he swung his ponderous club at +the head of his foe. It was now Jack’s turn to leap +aside, and well was it for him that the first outburst of his +blind fury was over, else he had become an easy prey to his +gigantic antagonist; but Jack was cool now. He darted his +blows rapidly and well, and the superiority of his light weapon +was strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could easily +evade the blows of the chief’s heavy club, the chief could +not so easily evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, +so quick was he, and so frightfully did he fling about the mighty +weapon, that, although Jack struck him almost every blow, the +strokes had to be delivered so quickly that they wanted force to +be very effectual.</p> + +<p>It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the +success of their chief in this encounter to be so certain that +they refrained from interfering. Had they doubted it, they +would have probably ended the matter at once by felling +him. But they contented themselves with awaiting the +issue.</p> + +<p>The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now +began to be apparent. His movements became slower, his +breath hissed through his clenched teeth, and the surprised +savages drew nearer in order to render assistance. Jack +observed this movement. He felt that his fate was sealed, +and resolved to cast his life upon the next blow. The +chiefs club was again about to descend on his head. He +might have evaded it easily, but instead of doing so, he suddenly +shortened his grasp of his own club, rushed in under the blow, +struck his adversary right between the eyes with all his force +and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the senseless body of the +chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to descend on +the head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive +body of the chief completely covered him. That moment saved +his life. Ere the savages could tear the chief’s body +away, seven of their number fell prostrate beneath the clubs of +the prisoners whom Peterkin and I had set free, and two others +fell under our own hand. We could never have accomplished +this had not our enemies been so engrossed with the fight between +Jack and their chief that they had failed to observe us until we +were upon them. They still out-numbered our party by three, +but we were flushed with victory while they were taken by +surprise and dispirited by the fall of their chief. +Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping fury of Jack, who +seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no sooner +shaken himself free of the chief’s body than he rushed into +the midst of them, and in three blows equalized our +numbers. Peterkin and I flew to the rescue, the savages +followed us, and, in less than ten minutes, the whole of our +opponents were knocked down or made prisoners, bound hand and +foot, and extended side by side upon the sea shore.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Intercourse with the savages—Cannibalism +prevented—The slain are buried and the survivors depart, +leaving us again alone on our Coral Island.</p> + +<p>After the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and +gazed at us in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a +flood of questions, which, being wholly unintelligible, of course +we could not answer. However, by way of putting an end to +it, Jack took the chief (who had recovered from the effects of +his wound) by the hand and shook it warmly. No sooner did +the blacks see that this was meant to express good-will than they +shook hands with us all round. After this ceremony was gone +through Jack went up to the girl, who had never once moved from +the rock where she had been left, but had continued an eager +spectator of all that had passed. He made signs to her to +follow him and then, taking the chief by the hand, was about to +conduct him to the bower when his eye fell on the poor infant +which had been thrown into the sea and was still lying on the +shore. Dropping the chief’s hand he hastened towards +it, and, to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We +also found that the mother was beginning to recover slowly.</p> + +<p>“Here, get out o’ the way,” said Jack, +pushing us aside, as we stooped over the poor woman and +endeavoured to restore her, “I’ll soon bring her +round.” So saying, he placed the infant on her bosom +and laid its warm cheek on hers. The effect was +wonderful. The woman opened her eyes, felt the child, +looked at it, and with a cry of joy clasped it in her arms, at +the same time endeavouring to rise, for the purpose, apparently, +of rushing into the woods.</p> + +<p>“There, that’s all right,” said Jack, once +more taking the chief by the hand. “Now Ralph and +Peterkin, make the women and these fellows follow me to the +bower. Well entertain them as hospitably as we +can.”</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in +front of the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, +several ducks, and a variety of cold fish, together with an +unlimited supply of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruits, yams, taro, and +plums; with all of which they seemed to be quite familiar and +perfectly satisfied.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our +day’s work, took a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and +throwing ourselves on our beds fell fast asleep. The +savages it seems followed our example, and in half-an-hour the +whole camp was buried in repose.</p> + +<p>How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we +lay down the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the +heavens. I awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being +unable at first to comprehend our situation. “Now, +then,” said he, springing up, “let’s see after +breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how long do +you mean to lie there?”</p> + +<p>Peterkin yawned heavily. “Well!” said he, +opening his eyes and looking up after some trouble, “if it +isn’t to-morrow morning, and me thinking it was to-day all +this time. Hallo! Venus, where did you come from? you +seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as well speak +to the cat as to you—better, in fact, for it understands +me, and you don’t.”</p> + +<p>This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the +elderly females, who had seated herself on the rock in front of +the bower, and, having placed her child at her feet, was busily +engaged in devouring the remains of a roast pig.</p> + +<p>By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast +in an advanced state of preparation. During the course of +it we made sundry attempts to converse with the natives by signs, +but without effect. At last we hit upon a plan of +discovering their names. Jack pointed to his breast and said +“Jack,” very distinctly; then he pointed to Peterkin +and to me, repeating our names at the same time. Then he +pointed to himself again, and said “Jack,” and laying +his finger on the breast of the chief, looked inquiringly into +his face. The chief instantly understood him and said +“Tararo,” twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it +after him, and the chief, nodding his head approvingly, said +“Chuck.” On hearing which, Peterkin exploded +with laughter; but Jack turned and with a frown rebuked him, +saying, “I must look even more indignantly at you than I +feel, Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don’t like to +be laughed at.” Then turning towards the youngest of +the women, who was seated at the door of the bower, he pointed to +her; whereupon the chief said, “Avatea;” and pointing +towards the sun, raised his finger slowly towards the zenith, +where it remained steadily for a minute or two.</p> + +<p>“What can that mean, I wonder,” said Jack, looking +puzzled.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps,” said Peterkin, “the chief means +she is an angel come down to stay here for a while. If so, +she’s an uncommonly black one!”</p> + +<p>We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack +went up to her and said, “Avatea.” The woman +smiled sadly, and nodded her head, at the same time pointing to +her breast and then to the sun, in the same manner as the chief +had done. We were much puzzled to know what this could +signify, but as there was no way of solving our difficulty we +were obliged to rest content.</p> + +<p>Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking +up his axe, he led them to the place where the battle had been +fought. Here we found the prisoners, who had passed the +night on the beach having been totally forgotten by us, as our +minds had been full of our guests, and were ultimately overcome +by sleep. They did not seem the worse for their exposure, +however, as we judged by the hearty appetite with which they +devoured the breakfast that was soon after given to them. +Jack then began to dig a hole in the sand, and, after working a +few seconds, he pointed to it and to the dead bodies that lay +exposed on the beach. The natives immediately perceived +what he wanted, and, running for their paddles, dug a hole in the +course of half an hour that was quite large enough to contain all +the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they tossed +their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we felt +assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had we +not asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired +chief was the last thrown in. This wretched man would have +recovered from the blow with which Jack felled him, and, indeed, +he did endeavour to rise during the melee that followed his fall, +but one of his enemies, happening to notice the action, dealt him +a blow with his club that killed him on the spot.</p> + +<p>While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one +of the savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made +apparently of stone, cut a large slice of flesh from his +thigh. We knew at once that he intended to make use of this +for food, and could not repress a cry of horror and disgust.</p> + +<p>“Come, come, you blackguard,” cried Jack, starting +up and seizing the man by the arm, “pitch that into the +hole. Do you hear?”</p> + +<p>The savage of course did not understand the command, but he +perfectly understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded +the flesh, and his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the +hole. Nevertheless he did not obey. Jack instantly +turned to Tararo and made signs to him to enforce +obedience. The chief seemed to understand the appeal, for +he stepped forward, raised his club, and was on the point of +dashing out the brains of his offending subject, when Jack sprang +forward and caught his uplifted arm.</p> + +<p>“Stop!” he shouted, “you blockhead, I +don’t want you to kill the man.” He then +pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The chief +uttered a few words, which had the desired effect; for the man +threw the flesh into the hole, which was immediately filled +up. This man was of a morose, sulky disposition, and, +during all the time he remained on the island, regarded us, +especially Jack, with a scowling visage. His name, we +found, was Mahine.</p> + +<p>The next three or four days were spent by the savages in +mending their canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock +it had sustained on striking the shore. This canoe was a +very curious structure. It was about thirty feet long, and +had a high towering stern. The timbers, of which it was +partly composed, were fastened much in the same way as those of +our little boat were put together; but the part that seemed most +curious to us was a sort of out-rigger, or long plank, which was +attached to the body of the canoe by means of two stout cross +beams. These beams kept the plank parallel with the canoe, +but not in contact with it, for it floated in the water with an +open space between; thus forming a sort of double canoe. +This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting of the canoe, +which was so narrow that it could not have maintained an upright +position without the out-rigger. We could not help +wondering both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this +contrivance.</p> + +<p>When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the +prisoners into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and +fruit. Peterkin also went to the plum-tree for the purpose +of making a special onslaught upon the hogs, and killed no less +than six of them. These we baked and presented to our +friends on the day of their departure. On that day Tararo +made a great many energetic signs to us, which, after much +consideration, we came to understand were proposals that we +should go away with him to his island; but, having no desire to +do so, we shook our heads very decidedly. However, we +consoled him by presenting him with our rusty axe, which we +thought we could spare, having the excellent one which had been +so providentially washed ashore to us the day we were +wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names +carved on it, and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as +an ornament.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the +beach. Being unable to speak to the savages, we went +through the ceremony of shaking hands, and expected they would +depart; but, before doing so, Tararo went up to Jack and rubbed +noses with him, after which he did the same with Peterkin and +me! Seeing that this was their mode of salutation, we +determined to conform to their custom, so we rubbed noses +heartily with the whole party, women and all! The only +disagreeable part of the process was, when we came to rub noses +with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that when he saw his +wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much more +inclined to <i>bang</i> than to <i>rub</i> his nose. Avatea +was the last to take leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of +real sorrow when she approached to bid us farewell. Besides +her modest air and gentle manners she was the only one of the +party who exhibited the smallest sign of regret at parting from +us. Going up to Jack, she put out her flat little nose to +be rubbed, and thereafter paid the same compliment to Peterkin +and me.</p> + +<p>An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an +indefinable feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were +seated in silence beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on +the wonderful events of the last few days.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life—A +sail!—An unexpected salute—The end of the black +cat—A terrible dive—An incautious proceeding and a +frightful catastrophe.</p> + +<p>Life is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, +that it beat a druggist’s shop all to sticks; for, whereas +the first is a compound of good and bad, the other is a horrible +compound of all that is utterly detestable. And indeed the +more I consider it the more I am struck with the strange mixture +of good and evil that exists not only in the material earth but +in our own natures. In our own Coral Island we had +experienced every variety of good that a bountiful Creator could +heap on us. Yet on the night of the storm we had seen how +almost, in our case,—and altogether, no doubt, in the case +of others less fortunate—all this good might be swept away +for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in the +soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these +good and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, +crushed and hurled to the ground in destructive +devastation. We had lived for many months in a clime for +the most part so beautiful, that we had often wondered whether +Adam and Eve had found Eden more sweet; and we had seen the quiet +solitudes of our paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious +savages, and the white sands stained with blood and strewed with +lifeless forms; yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many +symptoms of a kindly nature. I pondered these things much, +and, while I considered them, there recurred to my memory those +words which I had read in my Bible,—the works of God are +wonderful, and his ways past finding out.</p> + +<p>After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and +frequent conversations about them, and I noticed that +Peterkin’s manner was now much altered. He did not, +indeed, jest less heartily than before, but he did so less +frequently, and often there was a tone of deep seriousness in his +manner, if not in his words, which made him seem to Jack and me +as if he had grown two years older within a few days. But +indeed I was not surprised at this, when I reflected on the awful +realities which we had witnessed so lately. We could by no +means shake off a tendency to gloom for several weeks afterwards; +but, as time wore away, our usual good spirits returned somewhat, +and we began to think of the visit of the savages with feelings +akin to those with which we recall a terrible dream.</p> + +<p>One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, +preparatory to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had +kept us in such constant supply of hogs that we had become quite +tired of pork, and desired a change. Peterkin was sunning +himself on the ledge of rock, while we were creeping among the +rocks below. Happening to look up, I observed Peterkin +cutting the most extraordinary capers and making violent +gesticulations for us to come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose +immediately.</p> + +<p>“A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on +the horizon there, just over the entrance to the lagoon!” +cried Peterkin, as we scrambled up the rocks.</p> + +<p>“So it is, and a schooner, too!” said Jack, as he +proceeded hastily to dress.</p> + +<p>Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this +discovery, for if it should touch at our island we had no doubt +the captain would be happy to give us a passage to some of the +civilized islands, where we could find a ship sailing for +England, or some other part of Europe. Home, with all its +associations, rushed in upon my heart like a flood, and, much +though I loved the Coral Island and the bower which had now been +our home so long, I felt that I could have quitted all at that +moment without a sigh. With joyful anticipations we +hastened to the highest point of rock near our dwelling, and +awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now perceived that she +was making straight for the island, under a steady breeze.</p> + +<p>In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she +rounded to, and backed her topsails in order to survey the +coast. Seeing this, and fearing that they might not +perceive us, we all three waved pieces of cocoa-nut cloth in the +air, and soon had the satisfaction of seeing them beginning to +lower a boat and bustle about the decks as if they meant to +land. Suddenly a flag was run up to the peak, a little +cloud of white smoke rose from the schooner’s side, and, +before we could guess their intentions, a cannon-shot came +crashing through the bushes, carried away several cocoa-nut trees +in its passage, and burst in atoms against the cliff a few yards +below the spot on which we stood.</p> + +<p>With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the +schooner’s peak was black, with a Death’s head and +cross bones upon it. As we gazed at each other in blank +amazement, the word “pirate” escaped our lips +simultaneously.</p> + +<p>“What is to be done?” cried Peterkin, as we +observed a boat shoot from the vessel’s side, and make for +the entrance of the reef. “If they take us off the +island, it will either be to throw us overboard for sport, or to +make pirates of us.”</p> + +<p>I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only +resource in this emergency. He stood with folded arms, and +his eyes fixed with a grave, anxious expression on the +ground. “There is but one hope,” said he, +turning with a sad expression of countenance to Peterkin; +“perhaps, after all, we may not have to resort to it. +If these villains are anxious to take us, they will soon overrun +the whole island. But come, follow me.”</p> + +<p>Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, +and led us by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he +halted, and, advancing cautiously to the rocks, glanced over +their edge. We were soon by his side, and saw the boat, +which was crowded with armed men, just touching the shore. +In an instant the crew landed, formed line, and rushed up to our +bower.</p> + +<p>In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of +them swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On +reaching the water’s edge, he tossed it far into the sea, +and joined his companions, who appeared to be holding a hasty +council.</p> + +<p>“You see what we may expect,” said Jack +bitterly. “The man who will wantonly kill a poor +brute for sport will think little of murdering a +fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance +left,—the Diamond Cave.”</p> + +<p>“The Diamond Cave!” cried Peterkin, “then my +chance is a poor one, for I could not dive into it if all the +pirates on the Pacific were at my heels.”</p> + +<p>“Nay, but,” said I, “we will take you down, +Peterkin, if you will only trust us.”</p> + +<p>As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, +and radiate, as if from a centre, towards the woods and along +shore.</p> + +<p>“Now, Peterkin,” said Jack, in a solemn tone, +“you must make up your mind to do it, or we must make up +our minds to die in your company.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Jack, my dear friend,” cried Peterkin, +turning pale, “leave me; I don’t believe +they’ll think it worth while to kill me. Go, you and +Ralph, and dive into the cave.”</p> + +<p>“That will not I,” answered Jack quietly, while he +picked up a stout cudgel from the ground. “So now, +Ralph, we must prepare to meet these fellows. Their motto +is, ‘No quarter.’ If we can manage to floor +those coming in this direction, we may escape into the woods for +a while.”</p> + +<p>“There are five of them,” said I; “we have +no chance.”</p> + +<p>“Come, then,” cried Peterkin, starting up, and +grasping Jack convulsively by the arm, “let us dive; I will +go.”</p> + +<p>Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the +feelings of horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare +idea of being held down, even for a few seconds,—that +spasmodic, involuntary recoil from compulsory immersion which has +no connection whatever with cowardice; and they will understand +the amount of resolution that it required in Peterkin to allow +himself to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and then, +through a narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. +But there was no alternative. The pirates had already +caught sight of us, and were now within a short distance of the +rocks.</p> + +<p>Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms.</p> + +<p>“Now, keep quite still, no struggling,” said Jack, +“or we are lost.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble +features, and the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he +had fully made up his mind to go through with it. Just as +the pirates gained the foot of the rocks, which hid us for a +moment from their view, we bent over the sea, and plunged down +together head foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. +He floated passively between us like a log of wood, and we passed +the tunnel and rose into the cave in a shorter space of time than +I had ever done it before.</p> + +<p>Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and +in a few seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in +safety. Jack now searched for the tinder and torch, which +always lay in the cave. He soon found them, and, lighting +the torch, revealed to Peterkin’s wondering gaze the +marvels of the place. But we were too wet to waste much +time in looking about us. Our first care was to take off +our clothes, and wring them as dry as we could. This done, +we proceeded to examine into the state of our larder, for, as +Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing how long the pirates +might remain on the island.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps,” said Peterkin, “they may take it +into their heads to stop here altogether, and so we shall be +buried alive in this place.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you think, Peterkin, that it’s the +nearest thing to being drowned alive that you ever felt?” +said Jack with a smile. “But I’ve no fear of +that. These villains never stay long on shore. The +sea is their home, so you may depend upon it that they +won’t stay more than a day or two at the +furthest.”</p> + +<p>We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in +the cavern. At various periods Jack and I had conveyed +cocoa nuts and other fruits, besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to +this submarine cave, partly for amusement, and partly from a +feeling that we might possibly be driven one day to take shelter +here from the savages. Little did we imagine that the first +savages who would drive us into it would be white savages, +perhaps our own countrymen. We found the cocoa-nuts in good +condition, and the cooked yams, but the bread-fruits were +spoiled. We also found the cloth where we had left it; and, +on opening it out, there proved to be sufficient to make a bed; +which was important, as the rock was damp. Having collected +it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch in the +midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange +chamber to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, +ghastly appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, +with the thick darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops +that fell at long intervals from the roof of the cavern into the +still water; and the strong contrast between all this and our bed +and supper, which, with our faces, were lit up with the deep red +flame of the torch.</p> + +<p>We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, +for we did not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault +above when we happened to raise them. At last the faint +light that came through the opening died away, warning us that it +was night and time for rest. We therefore put out our torch +and lay down to sleep.</p> + +<p>On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our +faculties so as to remember where we were, and we were in much +uncertainty as to whether it was early or late. We saw by +the faint light that it was day, but could not guess at the hour; +so Jack proposed that he should dive out and reconnoitre.</p> + +<p>“No, Jack,” said I, “do you rest here. +You’ve had enough to do during the last few days. +Rest yourself now, and take care of Peterkin, while I go out to +see what the pirates are about. I’ll be very careful +not to expose myself, and I’ll bring you word again in a +short time.”</p> + +<p>“Very well, Ralph,” answered Jack, “please +yourself, but don’t be long; and if you’ll take my +advice you’ll go in your clothes, for I would like to have +some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees without clothes is +uncomfortable, to say the least of it.”</p> + +<p>“The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp +lookout,” said Peterkin, “so, pray, be +careful.”</p> + +<p>“No fear,” said I; “good-bye.”</p> + +<p>“Good-bye,” answered my comrades.</p> + +<p>And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged +into the water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open +air. On rising, I was careful to come up gently and to +breathe softly, while I kept close in beside the rocks; but, as I +observed no one near me, I crept slowly out, and ascended the +cliff a step at a time, till I obtained a full view of the +shore. No pirates were to be seen,—even their boat +was gone; but as it was possible they might have hidden +themselves, I did not venture too boldly forward. Then it +occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to my surprise, I saw +the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on the +horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. +Then my first impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the +good news; but I checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, +in order to make sure that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate +schooner. I looked long and anxiously at her, and, giving +vent to a deep sigh of relief, said aloud, “Yes, there she +goes; the villains have been baulked of their prey this time at +least.”</p> + +<p>“Not so sure of that!” said a deep voice at my +side; while, at the same moment, a heavy hand grasped my +shoulder, and held it as if in a vice.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +I fall into the hands of pirates—How they treated me, +and what I said to them—The result of the whole ending in a +melancholy separation and in a most unexpected gift.</p> + +<p>My heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, +turning round, I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce +aspect regarding me with a smile of contempt. He was a +white man,—that is to say, he was a man of European blood, +though his face, from long exposure to the weather, was deeply +bronzed. His dress was that of a common seaman, except that +he had on a Greek skull-cap, and wore a broad shawl of the +richest silk round his waist. In this shawl were placed two +pair of pistols and a heavy cutlass. He wore a beard and +moustache, which, like the locks on his head, were short, curly, +and sprinkled with gray hairs.</p> + +<p>“So, youngster,” he said, with a sardonic smile, +while I felt his grasp tighten on my shoulder, “the +villains have been baulked of their prey, have they? We +shall see, we shall see. Now, you whelp, look +yonder.” As he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill +whistle. In a second or two it was answered, and the +pirate-boat rowed round the point at the Water Garden, and came +rapidly towards us. “Now, go, make a fire on that +point; and hark’ee, youngster, if you try to run away, +I’ll send a quick and sure messenger after you,” and +he pointed significantly at his pistols.</p> + +<p>I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the +burning-glass in my pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a +thick smoke ascended into the air. It had scarcely appeared +for two minutes when the boom of a gun rolled over the sea, and, +looking up, I saw that the schooner was making for the island +again. It now flashed across me that this was a ruse on the +part of the pirates, and that they had sent their vessel away, +knowing that it would lead us to suppose that they had left +altogether. But there was no use of regret now. I was +completely in their power, so I stood helplessly beside the +pirate watching the crew of the boat as they landed on the +beach. For an instant I contemplated rushing over the cliff +into the sea, but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some +of the men were already between me and the water.</p> + +<p>There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their +scheme, as the crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who +had captured me by the title of captain. They were a +ferocious set of men, with shaggy beards and scowling +brows. All of them were armed with cutlasses and pistols, +and their costumes were, with trifling variations, similar to +that of the captain. As I looked from one to the other, and +observed the low, scowling brows, that never unbent, even when +the men laughed, and the mean, rascally expression that sat on +each face, I felt that my life hung by a hair.</p> + +<p>“But where are the other cubs?” cried one of the +men, with an oath that made me shudder. “I’ll +swear to it there were three, at least, if not more.”</p> + +<p>“You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other +dogs?” said the captain.</p> + +<p>“If you mean my companions,” said I, in a low +voice, “I won’t tell you.”</p> + +<p>A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer.</p> + +<p>The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then +drawing a pistol from his belt, he cocked it and said, +“Now, youngster, listen to me. I’ve no time to +waste here. If you don’t tell me all you know, +I’ll blow your brains out! Where are your +comrades?”</p> + +<p>For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this +extremity. Suddenly a thought occurred to me.</p> + +<p>“Villain,” said I, shaking my clenched fist in his +face, “to blow my brains out would make short work of me, +and be soon over. Death by drowning is as sure, and the +agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to your face, if you were to +toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I would not tell you +where my companions are, and I dare you to try me!”</p> + +<p>The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. +“Say you so?” cried he, uttering a fierce oath. +“Here, lads, take him by the legs and heave him +in,—quick!”</p> + +<p>The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my +audacity, advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me +towards the cliff, I congratulated myself not a little on the +success of my scheme, for I knew that once in the water I should +be safe, and could rejoin Jack and Peterkin in the cave. +But my hopes were suddenly blasted by the captain crying out, +“Hold on, lads, hold on. We’ll give him a taste +of the thumb-screws before throwing him to the sharks. Away +with him into the boat. Look alive! the breeze is +freshening.”</p> + +<p>The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down +the rocks, tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for +some time stunned with the violence of my fall.</p> + +<p>On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I +perceived that we were already outside the coral reef, and close +alongside the schooner, which was of small size and clipper +built. I had only time to observe this much, when I +received a severe kick on the side from one of the men, who +ordered me, in a rough voice, to jump aboard. Rising +hastily I clambered up the side. In a few minutes the boat +was hoisted on deck, the vessel’s head put close to the +wind, and the Coral Island dropped slowly astern as we beat up +against a head sea.</p> + +<p>Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily +engaged in working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to +me, so I remained leaning against the bulwarks close to the +gangway, watching their operations. I was surprised to find +that there were no guns or carronades of any kind in the vessel, +which had more of the appearance of a fast-sailing trader than a +pirate. But I was struck with the neatness of +everything. The brass work of the binnacle and about the +tiller, as well as the copper belaying-pins, were as brightly +polished as if they had just come from the foundry. The +decks were pure white, and smooth. The masts were +clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and truck, +which were painted black. The standing and running rigging +was in the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. +In short, everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her +low black hull to the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an +amount of care and strict discipline that would have done credit +to a ship of the Royal Navy. There was nothing lumbering or +unseemly about the vessel, excepting, perhaps, a boat, which lay +on the deck with its keel up between the fore and main +masts. It seemed disproportionately large for the schooner; +but, when I saw that the crew amounted to between thirty and +forty men, I concluded that this boat was held in reserve, in +case of any accident compelling the crew to desert the +vessel.</p> + +<p>As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to +that of the captain. But in head gear they differed not +only from him but from each other, some wearing the ordinary +straw hat of the merchant service, while others wore cloth caps +and red worsted night-caps. I observed that all their arms +were sent below; the captain only retaining his cutlass and a +single pistol in the folds of his shawl. Although the +captain was the tallest and most powerful man in the ship, he did +not strikingly excel many of his men in this respect, and the +only difference that an ordinary observer would have noticed was, +a certain degree of open candour, straightforward daring, in the +bold, ferocious expression of his face, which rendered him less +repulsive than his low-browed associates, but did not by any +means induce the belief that he was a hero. This look was, +however, the indication of that spirit which gave him the +pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who called him +captain. He was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of +personal fear, and utterly reckless of consequences, and, +therefore, a terror to his men, who individually hated him, but +unitedly felt it to be their advantage to have him at their +head.</p> + +<p>But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I +had left on shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, +which was now far away to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears +rolled slowly down my cheeks as I thought that I might never see +them more.</p> + +<p>“So you’re blubbering, are you, you obstinate +whelp?” said the deep voice of the captain, as he came up +and gave me a box on the ear that nearly felled me to the +deck. “I don’t allow any such weakness aboard +o’ this ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or +I’ll give you something to cry for.”</p> + +<p>I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, +but felt that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, +so I made no reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my +eyes.</p> + +<p>“I thought you were made of better stuff,” +continued the captain, angrily; “I’d rather have a +mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed puppy. But I’ll +cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks before long. +Now go below, and stay there till I call you.”</p> + +<p>As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg +standing by the side of the main-mast, on which the word +<i>gunpowder</i> was written in pencil. It immediately +flashed across me that, as we were beating up against the wind, +anything floating in the sea would be driven on the reef +encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected—for +thought is more rapid than the lightning—that my old +companions had a pistol. Without a moment’s +hesitation, therefore, I lifted the keg from the deck and tossed +it into the sea! An exclamation of surprise burst from the +captain and some of the men who witnessed this act of mine.</p> + +<p>Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the +captain raised his hand to strike me, while he shouted, +“Boy! whelp! what mean you by that?”</p> + +<p>“If you lower your hand,” said I, in a loud voice, +while I felt the blood rush to my temples, “I’ll tell +you. Until you do so I’m dumb!”</p> + +<p>The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of +amazement.</p> + +<p>“Now,” continued I, “I threw that keg into +the sea because the wind and waves will carry it to my friends on +the Coral Island, who happen to have a pistol, but no +powder. I hope that it will reach them soon, and my only +regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. Moreover, +pirate, you said just now that you thought I was made of better +stuff! I don’t know what stuff I am made of,—I +never thought much about that subject; but I’m quite +certain of this, that I am made of such stuff as the like of you +shall never tame, though you should do your worst.”</p> + +<p>To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, +smiled, and, thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that +encircled his waist, turned on his heel and walked aft, while I +went below.</p> + +<p>Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the +men received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, +patting me on the back, said, “Well done, lad! you’re +a brick, and I have no doubt will turn out a rare cove. +Bloody Bill, there, was just such a fellow as you are, and +he’s now the biggest cut-throat of us all.”</p> + +<p>“Take a can of beer, lad,” cried another, +“and wet your whistle after that speech o’ +your’n to the captain. If any one o’ us had +made it, youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this +time.”</p> + +<p>“Stop your clapper, Jack,” vociferated a third; +“give the boy a junck o’ meat. Don’t you +see he’s a’most goin’ to kick the +bucket?”</p> + +<p>“And no wonder,” said the first speaker, with an +oath, “after the tumble you gave him into the boat. I +guess it would have broke <i>your</i> neck if you had got +it.”</p> + +<p>I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, +to the combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be +recollected that I had dived out of the cave that morning before +breakfast, and it was now near mid-day. I therefore gladly +accepted a plate of boiled pork and a yam, which were handed to +me by one of the men from the locker on which some of the crew +were seated eating their dinner. But I must add that the +zest with which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of +the frightful oaths and the terrible language that flowed from +the lips of these godless men, even in the midst of their +hilarity and good-humour. The man who had been alluded to +as Bloody Bill was seated near me, and I could not help wondering +at the moody silence he maintained among his comrades. He +did indeed reply to their questions in a careless, off-hand tone, +but he never volunteered a remark. The only difference +between him and the others was his taciturnity and his size, for +he was nearly, if not quite, as large a man as the captain.</p> + +<p>During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own +reflections, which were anything but agreeable, for I could not +banish from my mind the threat about the thumb-screws, of the +nature and use of which I had a vague but terrible +conception. I was still meditating on my unhappy fate when, +just after night-fall, one of the watch on deck called down the +hatchway,—</p> + +<p>“Hallo there! one o’ you, tumble up and light the +cabin lamp, and send that boy aft to the +captain—sharp!”</p> + +<p>“Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants +you. Look alive,” said Bloody Bill, raising his huge +frame from the locker on which he had been asleep for the last +two hours. He sprang up the ladder and I instantly followed +him, and, going aft, was shown into the cabin by one of the men, +who closed the door after me.</p> + +<p>A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft +light over the cabin, which was a small apartment, and +comfortably but plainly finished. Seated on a camp-stool at +the table, and busily engaged in examining a chart of the +Pacific, was the captain, who looked up as I entered, and, in a +quiet voice, bade me be seated, while he threw down his pencil, +and, rising from the table, stretched himself on a sofa at the +upper end of the cabin.</p> + +<p>“Boy,” said he, looking me full in the face, +“what is your name?”</p> + +<p>“Ralph Rover,” I replied.</p> + +<p>“Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that +island? How many companions had you on it? Answer me, +now, and mind you tell no lies.”</p> + +<p>“I never tell lies,” said I, firmly.</p> + +<p>The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, +and bade me answer his questions.</p> + +<p>I then told him the history of myself and my companions from +the time we sailed till the day of his visit to the island, +taking care, however, to make no mention of the Diamond +Cave. After I had concluded, he was silent for a few +minutes; then, looking up, he said—“Boy, I believe +you.”</p> + +<p>I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he +should not believe me. However, I made no reply.</p> + +<p>“And what,” continued the captain, “makes +you think that this schooner is a pirate?”</p> + +<p>“The black flag,” said I, “showed me what +you are; and if any further proof were wanting I have had it in +the brutal treatment I have received at your hands.”</p> + +<p>The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he +continued—“Boy, you are too bold. I admit that +we treated you roughly, but that was because you made us lose +time and gave us a good deal of trouble. As to the black +flag, that is merely a joke that my fellows play off upon people +sometimes in order to frighten them. It is their humour, +and does no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a lawful +trader,—a rough one, I grant you, but one can’t help +that in these seas, where there are so many pirates on the water +and such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry on a +trade in sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, +Ralph, to behave yourself and be a good boy, I’ll take you +along with me and give you a good share of the profits. You +see I’m in want of an honest boy like you, to look after +the cabin and keep the log, and superintend the traffic on shore +sometimes. What say you, Ralph, would you like to become a +sandal-wood trader?”</p> + +<p>I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal +relieved to find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; +but instead of replying I said, “If it be as you state, +then why did you take me from my island, and why do you not now +take me back?”</p> + +<p>The captain smiled as he replied, “I took you off in +anger, boy, and I’m sorry for it. I would even now +take you back, but we are too far away from it. See, there +it is,” he added, laying his finger on the chart, +“and we are now here,—fifty miles at least. It +would not be fair to my men to put about now, for they have all +an interest in the trade.”</p> + +<p>I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more +conversation, I agreed to become one of the crew, at least until +we could reach some civilized island where I might be put +ashore. The captain assented to this proposition, and after +thanking him for the promise, I left the cabin and went on deck +with feelings that ought to have been lighter, but which were, I +could not tell why, marvellously heavy and uncomfortable +still.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Bloody Bill—Dark surmises—A strange sail, and a +strange crew, and a still stranger cargo—New reasons for +favouring missionaries—A murderous massacre, and thoughts +thereon.</p> + +<p>Three weeks after the conversation narrated in the last +chapter, I was standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner +watching the gambols of a shoal of porpoises that swam round +us. It was a dead calm. One of those still, hot, +sweltering days, so common in the Pacific, when Nature seems to +have gone to sleep, and the only thing in water or in air that +proves her still alive, is her long, deep breathing, in the swell +of the mighty sea. No cloud floated in the deep blue above; +no ripple broke the reflected blue below. The sun shone +fiercely in the sky, and a ball of fire blazed, with almost equal +power, from out the bosom of the water. So intensely still +was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of the deep, +that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, we +might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue +liquid ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck +in all creation, floating in the midst of it.</p> + +<p>No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of +a porpoise, the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on +the swell, the patter of the reef-points, and the occasional flap +of the hanging sails. An awning covered the fore and after +parts of the schooner, under which the men composing the watch on +deck lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with excessive +heat. Bloody Bill, as the men invariably called him, was +standing at the tiller, but his post for the present was a +sinecure, and he whiled away the time by alternately gazing in +dreamy abstraction at the compass in the binnacle, and by walking +to the taffrail in order to spit into the sea. In one of +these turns he came near to where I was standing, and, leaning +over the side, looked long and earnestly down into the blue +wave.</p> + +<p>This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was +the only human being on board with whom I had the slightest +desire to become better acquainted. The other men, seeing +that I did not relish their company, and knowing that I was a +protege of the captain, treated me with total indifference. +Bloody Bill, it is true, did the same; but as this was his +conduct towards every one else, it was not peculiar in reference +to me. Once or twice I tried to draw him into conversation, +but he always turned away after a few cold monosyllables. +As he now leaned over the taffrail close beside me, I said to +him,—</p> + +<p>“Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do +you never speak to any one?”</p> + +<p>Bill smiled slightly as he replied, “Why, I s’pose +it’s because I haint got nothin’ to say!”</p> + +<p>“That’s strange,” said I, musingly; +“you look like a man that could think, and such men can +usually speak.”</p> + +<p>“So they can, youngster,” rejoined Bill, somewhat +sternly; “and I could speak too if I had a mind to, but +what’s the use o’ speakin’ here! The men +only open their mouths to curse and swear, an’ they seem to +find it entertaining; but I don’t, so I hold my +tongue.”</p> + +<p>“Well, Bill, that’s true, and I would rather not +hear you speak at all than hear you speak like the other men; but +<i>I</i> don’t swear, Bill, so you might talk to me +sometimes, I think. Besides, I’m weary of spending +day after day in this way, without a single soul to say a +pleasant word to. I’ve been used to friendly +conversation, Bill, and I really would take it kind if you would +talk with me a little now and then.”</p> + +<p>Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad +expression pass across his sun-burnt face.</p> + +<p>“An’ where have you been used to friendly +conversation,” said Bill, looking down again into the sea; +“not on that Coral Island, I take it?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, indeed,” said I energetically; “I have +spent many of the happiest months in my life on that Coral +Island;” and without waiting to be further questioned, I +launched out into a glowing account of the happy life that Jack +and Peterkin and I had spent together, and related minutely every +circumstance that befell us while on the island.</p> + +<p>“Boy, boy,” said Bill, in a voice so deep that it +startled me, “this is no place for you.”</p> + +<p>“That’s true,” said I; “I’m of +little use on board, and I don’t like my comrades; but I +can’t help it, and at anyrate I hope to be free again +soon.”</p> + +<p>“Free?” said Bill, looking at me in surprise.</p> + +<p>“Yes, free,” returned I; “the captain said +he would put me ashore after this trip was over.”</p> + +<p>“<i>This trip</i>! Hark’ee, boy,” said +Bill, lowering his voice, “what said the captain to you the +day you came aboard?”</p> + +<p>“He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no +pirate, and told me that if I would join him for this trip he +would give me a good share of the profits or put me on shore in +some civilized island if I chose.”</p> + +<p>Bill’s brows lowered savagely as he muttered, “Ay, +he said truth when he told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but +he lied when—”</p> + +<p>“Sail ho!” shouted the look-out at the +masthead.</p> + +<p>“Where, away?” cried Bill, springing to the +tiller; while the men, startled by the sudden cry jumped up and +gazed round the horizon.</p> + +<p>“On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir,” +answered the look-out.</p> + +<p>At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the +rigging, surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping +his eye round the horizon he gazed steadily at a particular +point.</p> + +<p>“Take in top-sails,” shouted the captain, swinging +himself down on the deck by the main-back stay.</p> + +<p>“Take in top-sails,” roared the first mate.</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay, sir-r-r,” answered the men as they sprang +into the rigging and went aloft like cats.</p> + +<p>Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet +schooner. The top-sails were taken in and stowed, the men +stood by the sheets and halyards, and the captain gazed anxiously +at the breeze which was now rushing towards us like a sheet of +dark blue. In a few seconds it struck us. The +schooner trembled as if in surprise at the sudden onset, while +she fell away, then bending gracefully to the wind, as though in +acknowledgment of her subjection, she cut through the waves with +her sharp prow like a dolphin, while Bill directed her course +towards the strange sail.</p> + +<p>In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that +she was a schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts +and sails we judged her to be a trader. She evidently did +not like our appearance, for, the instant the breeze reached her, +she crowded all sail and showed us her stern. As the breeze +had moderated a little our top-sails were again shaken out, and +it soon became evident,—despite the proverb, “A stern +chase is a long one,” that we doubled her speed and would +overhaul her speedily. When within a mile we hoisted +British colours, but receiving no acknowledgment, the captain +ordered a shot to be fired across her bows. In a moment, to +my surprise, a large portion of the bottom of the boat amidships +was removed, and in the hole thus exposed appeared an immense +brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by means +of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The +heavy ball struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, +ricochetting into the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond +it.</p> + +<p>This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel +backed her top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, +about a hundred yards off.</p> + +<p>“Lower the boat,” cried the captain.</p> + +<p>In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the +crew, who were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the +captain passed me to get into it, he said, “jump into the +stern sheets, Ralph, I may want you.” I obeyed, and +in ten minutes more we were standing on the stranger’s +deck. We were all much surprised at the sight that met our +eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we were +accustomed to see, there were only fifteen blacks standing on the +quarter-deck and regarding us with looks of undisguised +alarm. They were totally unarmed and most of them +unclothed; one or two, however, wore portions of European +attire. One had on a pair of duck trousers which were much +too large for him and stuck out in a most ungainly manner. +Another wore nothing but the common scanty native garment round +the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the most ludicrous +personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, was a tall +middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of countenance, who +wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, and a straw +hat, while his black brawny legs were totally uncovered below the +knees.</p> + +<p>“Where’s the commander of this ship?” +inquired our captain, stepping up to this individual.</p> + +<p>“I is capin,” he answered, taking off his straw +hat and making a low bow.</p> + +<p>“You!” said our captain, in surprise. +“Where do you come from, and where are you bound? +What cargo have you aboard?”</p> + +<p>“We is come,” answered the man with the +swallow-tail, “from Aitutaki; we was go for +Rarotonga. We is native miss’nary ship; our name is +de <i>Olive Branch</i>; an’ our cargo is two tons +cocoa-nuts, seventy pigs, twenty cats, and de +Gosp’l.”</p> + +<p>This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with +a shout of laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by +the captain, whose expression instantly changed from one of +severity to that of frank urbanity as he advanced towards the +missionary and shook him warmly by the hand.</p> + +<p>“I am very glad to have fallen in with you,” said +he, “and I wish you much success in your missionary +labours. Pray take me to your cabin, as I wish to converse +with you privately.”</p> + +<p>The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led +him away I heard him saying, “Me most glad to find you +trader; we t’ought you be pirate. You very like one +’bout the masts.”</p> + +<p>What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, +but he came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking +hands cordially with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and +returned to the schooner, which was immediately put before the +wind. In a few minutes the <i>Olive Branch</i> was left far +behind us.</p> + +<p>That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men +talking about this curious ship.</p> + +<p>“I wonder,” said one, “why our captain +looked so sweet on yon swallow-tailed super-cargo o’ pigs +and Gospels. If it had been an ordinary trader, now, he +would have taken as many o’ the pigs as he required and +sent the ship with all on board to the bottom.”</p> + +<p>“Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you +don’t know that,” cried another. “The +captain cares as much for the gospel as you do (an’ +that’s precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, +that the only place among the southern islands where a ship can +put in and get what she wants in comfort, is where the gospel has +been sent to. There are hundreds o’ islands, at this +blessed moment, where you might as well jump straight into a +shark’s maw as land without a band o’ thirty comrades +armed to the teeth to back you.”</p> + +<p>“Ay,” said a man with a deep scar over his right +eye, “Dick’s new to the work. But if the +captain takes us for a cargo o’ sandal-wood to the Feejees +he’ll get a taste o’ these black gentry in their +native condition. For my part I don’t know, an’ +I don’t care, what the gospel does to them; but I know that +when any o’ the islands chance to get it, trade goes all +smooth an’ easy; but where they ha’nt got it, +Beelzebub himself could hardly desire better company.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you ought to be a good judge,” cried +another, laughing, “for you’ve never kept any company +but the worst all your life!”</p> + +<p>“Ralph Rover!” shouted a voice down the +hatchway. “Captain wants you, aft.”</p> + +<p>Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as +I went the strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of +the gospel on savage natures;—testimony which, as it was +perfectly disinterested, I had no doubt whatever was strictly +true.</p> + +<p>On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and +as we were alone together I tried to draw him into +conversation. After repeating to him the conversation in +the forecastle about the missionaries, I said,—</p> + +<p>“Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in +sandal-wood?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Ralph, she is; but she’s just as really a +pirate. The black flag you saw flying at the peak was no +deception.”</p> + +<p>“Then how can you say she’s a trader?” asked +I.</p> + +<p>“Why, as to that, she trades when she can’t take +by force, but she takes by force, when she can, in +preference. Ralph,” he added, lowering his voice, +“if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have witnessed +done on these decks you would not need to ask if we were +pirates. But you’ll find it out soon enough. As +for the missionaries, the captain favours them because they are +useful to him. The South-Sea islanders are such incarnate +fiends that they are the better of being tamed, and the +missionaries are the only men who can do it.”</p> + +<p>Our track after this lay through several clusters of small +islets, among which we were becalmed more than once. During +this part of our voyage the watch on deck and the look-out at the +mast-head were more than usually vigilant, as we were not only in +danger of being attacked by the natives, who, I learned from the +captain’s remarks, were a bloody and deceitful tribe at +this group, but we were also exposed to much risk from the +multitudes of coral reefs that rose up in the channels between +the islands, some of them just above the surface, others a few +feet below it. Our precautions against the savages I found +were indeed necessary.</p> + +<p>One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most +of which appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of +fresh water the captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask +or two. But we were mistaken in thinking there were no +natives; for scarcely had we drawn near to the shore when a band +of naked blacks rushed out of the bush and assembled on the +beach, brandishing their clubs and spears in a threatening +manner. Our men were well armed, but refrained from showing +any signs of hostility, and rowed nearer in order to converse +with the natives; and I now found that more than one of the crew +could imperfectly speak dialects of the language peculiar to the +South Sea islanders. When within forty yards of the shore, +we ceased rowing, and the first mate stood up to address the +multitude; but, instead of answering us, they replied with a +shower of stones, some of which cut the men severely. +Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was about to be +fired, when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from the +schooner, which lay not more than five or six hundred yards off +the shore.</p> + +<p>“Don’t fire,” he shouted, angrily. +“Pull off to the point ahead of you.”</p> + +<p>The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep +curses as they prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and +they burned for revenge. Three or four of them hesitated, +and seemed disposed to mutiny.</p> + +<p>“Don’t distress yourselves, lads,” said the +mate, while a bitter smile curled his lip. “Obey +orders. The captain’s not the man to take an insult +tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I’ll +give myself to the sharks.”</p> + +<p>The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, +which was now crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, +probably, to five or six hundred. We had not rowed off +above a couple of hundred yards when a loud roar thundered over +the sea, and the big brass gun sent a withering shower of grape +point blank into the midst of the living mass, through which a +wide lane was cut, while a yell, the like of which I could not +have imagined, burst from the miserable survivors as they fled to +the woods. Amongst the heaps of dead that lay on the sand, +just where they had fallen, I could distinguish mutilated forms +writhing in agony, while ever and anon one and another rose +convulsively from out the mass, endeavoured to stagger towards +the wood, and ere they had taken a few steps, fell and wallowed +on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me as I +witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little +time to think, for the captain’s deep voice came again over +the water towards us: “Pull ashore, lads, and fill your +water casks.” The men obeyed in silence, and it +seemed to me as if even their hard hearts were shocked by the +ruthless deed. On gaining the mouth of the rivulet at which +we intended to take in water, we found it flowing with blood, for +the greater part of those who were slain had been standing on the +banks of the stream, a short way above its mouth. Many of +the wretched creatures had fallen into it, and we found one body, +which had been carried down, jammed between two rocks, with the +staring eyeballs turned towards us and his black hair waving in +the ripples of the blood-red stream. No one dared to oppose +our landing now, so we carried our casks to a pool above the +murdered group, and having filled them, returned on board. +Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried us +away from the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from +the memory of what I had seen.</p> + +<p>“And this,” thought I, gazing in horror at the +captain, who, with a quiet look of indifference, leaned upon the +taffrail smoking a cigar and contemplating the fertile green +islets as they passed like a lovely picture before our +eyes—“this is the man who favours the missionaries +because they are useful to him and can tame the savages better +than any one else can do it!” Then I wondered in my +mind whether it were possible for any missionary to tame +<i>him</i>!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious—Unpleasant +prospects—Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic +agency—The pirates negotiate with a Feejee +chief—Various etceteras that are calculated to surprise and +horrify.</p> + +<p>It was many days after the events just narrated ere I +recovered a little of my wonted spirits. I could not shake +off the feeling for a long time that I was in a frightful dream, +and the sight of our captain filled me with so much horror that I +kept out of his way as much as my duties about the cabin would +permit. Fortunately he took so little notice of me that he +did not observe my changed feelings towards him, otherwise it +might have been worse for me.</p> + +<p>But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first +island we should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of +the natives rather than remain an hour longer than I could help +in the pirate schooner. I pondered this subject a good +deal, and at last made up my mind to communicate my intention to +Bloody Bill; for, during several talks I had had with him of +late, I felt assured that he too would willingly escape if +possible. When I told him of my design he shook his +head. “No, no, Ralph,” said he, “you must +not think of running away here. Among some of the groups of +islands you might do so with safety, but if you tried it here you +would find that you had jumped out of the fryin’ pan into +the fire.”</p> + +<p>“How so, Bill?” said I, “would the natives +not receive me?”</p> + +<p>“That they would, lad; but they would eat you +too.”</p> + +<p>“Eat me!” said I in surprise, “I thought the +South Sea islanders never ate anybody except their +enemies.”</p> + +<p>“Humph!” ejaculated Bill. “I +s’pose ’twas yer tender-hearted friends in England +that put that notion into your head. There’s a set +o’ soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who +don’t like to have their feelin’s ruffled, and when +you tell them anything they don’t like—that shocks +them, as they call it—no matter how true it be, they stop +their ears and cry out, ‘Oh, that is <i>too</i> +horrible! We can’t believe that!’ +An’ they say truth. They can’t believe it +’cause they won’t believe it. Now, I believe +there’s thousands o’ the people in England who are +sich born drivellin’ <i>won’t-believers</i> that they +think the black fellows hereaway, at the worst, eat an enemy only +now an’ then, out o’ spite; whereas, I know for +certain, and many captains of the British and American navies +know as well as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not only their +enemies but one another; and they do it not for spite, but for +pleasure. It’s a <i>fact</i> that they prefer human +flesh to any other. But they don’t like white +men’s flesh so well as black. They say it makes them +sick.”</p> + +<p>“Why, Bill,” said I, “you told me just now +that they would eat <i>me</i> if they caught me.”</p> + +<p>“So I did; and so I think they would. I’ve +only heard some o’ them say they don’t like white men +<i>so well</i> as black; but if they was hungry they +wouldn’t be particular. Anyhow, I’m sure they +would kill you. You see, Ralph, I’ve been a good +while in them parts, and I’ve visited the different groups +of islands oftentimes as a trader. And thorough goin’ +blackguards some o’ them traders are. No better than +pirates, I can tell you. One captain that I sailed with was +not a chip better than the one we’re with now. He was +tradin’ with a friendly chief one day, aboard his +vessel. The chief had swam off to us with the things for +trade tied a-top of his head, for them chaps are like otters in +the water. Well, the chief was hard on the captain, and +would not part with some o’ his things. When their +bargainin’ was over they shook hands, and the chief jumped +over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty yards from the +ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. He then +hove up anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along shore, he +dropped six black-fellows with his rifle, remarkin’ that +‘that would spoil the trade for the next +comers.’ But, as I was sayin’, I’m up to +the ways o’ these fellows. One o’ the laws +o’ the country is, that every shipwrecked person who +happens to be cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to be +roasted and eaten. There was a small tradin’ schooner +wrecked off one of these islands when we were lyin’ there +in harbour during a storm. The crew was lost, all but three +men, who swam ashore. The moment they landed they were +seized by the natives and carried up into the woods. We +knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could not help +them, for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore they +would likely have killed us all. We never saw the three men +again; but we heard frightful yelling, and dancing, and +merry-making that night; and one of the natives, who came aboard +to trade with us next day, told us that the <i>long pigs</i>, as +he called the men, had been roasted and eaten, and their bones +were to be converted into sail needles. He also said that +white men were bad to eat, and that most o’ the people on +shore were sick.”</p> + +<p>I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this +terrible account of the natives, and asked Bill what he would +advise me to do. Looking round the deck to make sure that +we were not overheard, he lowered his voice and said, +“There are two or three ways that we might escape, Ralph, +but none o’ them’s easy. If the captain would +only sail for some o’ the islands near Tahiti, we might run +away there well enough, because the natives are all Christians; +an’ we find that wherever the savages take up with +Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are +safe to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity +myself,” he continued, in a soliloquising voice, “and +I don’t well know what it means; but a man with half an eye +can see what it does for these black critters. However, the +captain always keeps a sharp look out after us when we get to +these islands, for he half suspects that one or two o’ us +are tired of his company. Then, we might manage to cut the +boat adrift some fine night when it’s our watch on deck, +and clear off before they discovered that we were gone. But +we would run the risk o’ bein’ caught by the +blacks. I wouldn’t like to try that plan. But +you and I will think over it, Ralph, and see what’s to be +done. In the meantime it’s our watch below, so +I’ll go and turn in.”</p> + +<p>Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade +took his place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into +conversation with him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, +looked down into the phosphorescent waves that gargled around the +ladder, and streamed out like a flame of blue light in the +vessel’s wake. My thoughts were very sad, and I could +scarce refrain from tears as I contrasted my present wretched +position with the happy, peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral +Island with my dear companions. As I thought upon Jack and +Peterkin anxious forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to +myself the grief and dismay with which they would search every +nook and corner of the island, in a vain attempt to discover my +dead body; for I felt assured that if they did not see any sign +of the pirate schooner or boat, when they came out of the cave to +look for me, they would never imagine that I had been carried +away. I wondered, too, how Jack would succeed in getting +Peterkin out of the cave without my assistance; and I trembled +when I thought that he might lose presence of mind, and begin to +kick when he was in the tunnel! These thoughts were +suddenly interrupted and put to flight by a bright red blaze +which lighted up the horizon to the southward, and cut a crimson +glow far over the sea. This appearance was accompanied by a +low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at the same time, +the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling wind blew +around us in fitful gusts.</p> + +<p>The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were +under the belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the +captain coming on deck, soon explained the phenomena.</p> + +<p>“It’s only a volcano,” said he. +“I knew there was one hereabouts, but thought it was +extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; we’ll +likely have a breeze, and it’s well to be ready.”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed +was not rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant +from the volcano, these must have been carried to us from it by +the wind. As the captain had predicted, a stiff breeze soon +afterwards sprang up, under the influence of which we speedily +left the volcano far behind us; but during the greater part of +the night we could see its lurid glare and hear its distant +thunder. The shower did not cease to fall for several +hours, and we must have sailed under it for nearly forty miles, +perhaps farther. When we emerged from the cloud, our decks +and every part of the rigging were completely covered with a +thick coat of ashes. I was much interested in this, and +recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of the islands of +the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, and had +said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the +Pacific were nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a +huge continent which had sunk under the influence of volcanic +agency.</p> + +<p>Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few +miles to windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant +aspect. It consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be +nearly four thousand feet high. They were separated from +each other by a broad valley, whose thick-growing trees ascended +a considerable distance up the mountain sides; and rich level +plains, or meadow-land, spread round the base of the mountains, +except at the point immediately opposite the large valley, where +a river seemed to carry the trees, as it were, along with it down +to the white sandy shore. The mountain tops, unlike those +of our Coral Island, were sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while +their sides were more rugged and grand in outline than anything I +had yet seen in those seas. Bloody Bill was beside me when +the island first hove in sight.</p> + +<p>“Ha!” he exclaimed, “I know that island +well. They call it Emo.”</p> + +<p>“Have you been here before, then?” I inquired.</p> + +<p>“Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. +’Tis a famous island for sandal-wood. We have taken +many cargoes off it already, and have paid for them too; for the +savages are so numerous that we dared not try to take it by +force. But our captain has tried to cheat them so often, +that they’re beginnin’ not to like us overmuch +now. Besides, the men behaved ill the last time we were +here; and I wonder the captain is not afraid to venture. +But he’s afraid o’ nothing earthly, I +believe.”</p> + +<p>We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our +anchor in six fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small +creek, whose shores were densely covered with mangroves and tall +umbrageous trees. The principal village of the natives lay +about half a mile from this point. Ordering the boat out, +the captain jumped into it, and ordered me to follow him. +The men, fifteen in number, were well armed; and the mate was +directed to have Long Tom ready for emergencies.</p> + +<p>“Give way, lads,” cried the captain.</p> + +<p>The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from +the schooner’s side, and in a few minutes reached the +shore. Here, contrary to our expectation, we were met with +the utmost cordiality by Romata, the principal chief of the +island, who conducted us to his house, and gave us mats to sit +upon. I observed in passing that the natives, of whom there +were two or three thousand, were totally unarmed.</p> + +<p>After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and +various roots was spread before us; of which we partook +sparingly, and then proceeded to business. The captain +stated his object in visiting the island, regretted that there +had been a slight misunderstanding during the last visit, and +hoped that no ill-will was borne by either party, and that a +satisfactory trade would be accomplished.</p> + +<p>Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any +differences between them, protested that he was delighted to see +his friends again, and assured them they should have every +assistance in cutting and embarking the wood. The terms +were afterwards agreed on, and we rose to depart. All this +conversation was afterwards explained to me by Bill, who +understood the language pretty well.</p> + +<p>Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great +chief from another island was then on a visit to him, and that he +was to be ceremoniously entertained on the following day. +After begging to be allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving +permission, he sent his canoe ashore to bring him off. At +the same time he gave orders to bring on board his two +favourites, a cock and a paroquet. While the canoe was gone +on this errand, I had time to regard the savage chief +attentively. He was a man of immense size, with massive but +beautifully moulded limbs and figure, only parts of which, the +broad chest and muscular arms, were uncovered; for, although the +lower orders generally wore no other clothing than a strip of +cloth called <i>maro</i> round their loins, the chief, on +particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of a +species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese +paper-mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and +moustache, and his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it +resembled a large turban, in which was stuck a long wooden +pin! I afterwards found that this pin served for scratching +the head, for which purpose the fingers were too short without +disarranging the hair. But Romata put himself to much +greater inconvenience on account of his hair, for we found that +he slept with his head resting on a wooden pillow, in which was +cut a hollow for the neck, so that the hair of the sleeper might +not be disarranged.</p> + +<p>In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, +who certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having +painted one half of his face red and the other half yellow, +besides ornamenting it with various designs in black! +Otherwise he was much the same in appearance as Romata, though +not so powerfully built. As this chief had never seen a +ship before, except, perchance, some of the petty traders that at +long intervals visit these remote islands, he was much taken up +with the neatness and beauty of all the fittings of the +schooner. He was particularly struck with a musket which +was shown to him, and asked where the white men got hatchets hard +enough to cut the tree of which the barrel was made! While +he was thus engaged, his brother chief stood aloof, talking with +the captain, and fondling a superb cock and a little blue-headed +paroquet, the favourites of which I have before spoken. I +observed that all the other natives walked in a crouching posture +while in the presence of Romata. Before our guests left us, +the captain ordered the brass gun to be uncovered and fired for +their gratification; and I have every reason to believe he did so +for the purpose of showing our superior power, in case the +natives should harbour any evil designs against us. Romata +had never seen this gun before, as it had not been uncovered on +previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed it was +very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he +begged that the captain would fire it. So a shot was put +into it. The chiefs were then directed to look at a rock +about two miles out at sea, and the gun was fired. In a +second the top of the rock was seen to burst asunder, and to fall +in fragments into the sea.</p> + +<p>Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he +pointed to a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the +captain to fire at him, evidently supposing that his permission +was quite sufficient to justify the captain in such an act. +He was therefore surprised, and not a little annoyed, when the +captain refused to fire at the native, and ordered the gun to be +housed.</p> + +<p>Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement +to these savages, that which pleased Romata’s visitor most +was the ship’s pump. He never tired of examining it, +and pumping up the water. Indeed, so much was he taken up +with this pump, that he could not be prevailed on to return on +shore, but sent a canoe to fetch his favourite stool, on which he +seated himself, and spent the remainder of the day in pumping the +bilge-water out of the ship!</p> + +<p>Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the +captain, with one or two men, remained on board, in order to be +ready, if need be, with the brass gun, which was unhoused and +conspicuously elevated, with its capacious muzzle directed point +blank at the chief’s house. The men were fully armed +as usual; and the captain ordered me to go with them, to assist +in the work. I was much pleased with this order, for it +freed me from the captain’s company, which I could not now +endure, and it gave me an opportunity of seeing the natives.</p> + +<p>As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant +groves of banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I +observed that there were many of the plum and banian trees, with +which I had become familiar on the Coral Island. I noticed +also large quantities of taro-roots, yams, and sweet potatoes, +growing in enclosures. On turning into an open glade of the +woods, we came abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. +They were built chiefly of bamboos, and were thatched with the +large thick leaves of the pandanus; but many of them had little +more than a sloping roof and three sides with an open front, +being the most simple shelter from the weather that could well be +imagined. Within these, and around them, were groups of +natives—men, women, and children—who all stood up to +gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party of men whom +the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile inland +we arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, while the +men set to work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to observe the +country.</p> + +<p>About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one +of whom carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and +potatoes on several plantain leaves, which he presented to the +men, who sat down under the shade of a tree to dine. The +chief sat down to dine also; but, to my surprise, instead of +feeding himself, one of his wives performed that office for +him! I was seated beside Bill, and asked him the reason of +this.</p> + +<p>“It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed +himself,” answered Bill; “but I daresay he’s +not particular, except on great occasions. They’ve a +strange custom among them, Ralph, which is called <i>tabu</i>, +and they carry it to great lengths. If a man chooses a +particular tree for his god, the fruit o’ that tree is +tabued to him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be killed by his +people, and eaten, of course, for killing means eating +hereaway. Then, you see that great mop o’ hair on the +chief’s head? Well, he has a lot o’ barbers to +keep it in order; and it’s a law that whoever touches the +head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his hands are +tabued; so, in that way, the barbers’ hands are always +tabued, and they daren’t use them for their lives, but have +to be fed like big babies, as they are, sure enough!”</p> + +<p>“That’s odd, Bill. But look there,” +said I, pointing to a man whose skin was of a much lighter colour +than the generality of the natives. “I’ve seen +a few of these light-skinned fellows among the Fejeeans. +They seem to me to be of quite a different race.”</p> + +<p>“So they are,” answered Bill. “These +fellows come from the Tongan Islands, which lie a long way to the +eastward. They come here to build their big war-canoes; and +as these take two, and sometimes four years, to build, +there’s always some o’ the brown-skins among the +black sarpents o’ these islands.”</p> + +<p>“By the way, Bill,” said I, “your mentioning +serpents, reminds me that I have not seen a reptile of any kind +since I came to this part of the world.”</p> + +<p>“No more there are any,” said Bill, “if ye +except the niggers themselves, there’s none on the islands, +but a lizard or two and some sich harmless things. But I +never seed any myself. If there’s none on the land, +however, there’s more than enough in the water, and that +minds me of a wonderful brute they have here. But, come, +I’ll show it to you.” So saying, Bill arose, +and, leaving the men still busy with the baked pig, led me into +the forest. After proceeding a short distance we came upon +a small pond of stagnant water. A native lad had followed +us, to whom we called and beckoned him to come to us. On +Bill saying a few words to him, which I did not understand, the +boy advanced to the edge of the pond, and gave a low peculiar +whistle. Immediately the water became agitated and an +enormous eel thrust its head above the surface and allowed the +youth to touch it. It was about twelve feet long, and as +thick round the body as a man’s thigh.</p> + +<p>“There,” said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, +“what do you think of that for a god, Ralph? This is +one o’ their gods, and it has been fed with dozens o’ +livin’ babies already. How many more it’ll get +afore it dies is hard to say.”</p> + +<p>“Babies?” said I, with an incredulous look</p> + +<p>“Ay, babies,” returned Bill. “Your +soft-hearted folk at home would say, ‘Oh, horrible! +impossible!’ to that, and then go away as comfortable and +unconcerned as if their sayin’ ‘horrible! +impossible!’ had made it a lie. But I tell you, +Ralph, it’s a <i>fact</i>. I’ve seed it with my +own eyes the last time I was here, an’ mayhap if you stop a +while at this accursed place, and keep a sharp look out, +you’ll see it too. They don’t feed it regularly +with livin’ babies, but they give it one now and then as a +treat. Bah! you brute!’ cried Bill, in disgust, +giving the reptile a kick on the snout with his heavy boot, that +sent it sweltering back in agony into its loathsome pool. I +thought it lucky for Bill, indeed for all of us, that the native +youth’s back happened to be turned at the time, for I am +certain that if the poor savages had come to know that we had so +rudely handled their god, we should have had to fight our way +back to the ship. As we retraced our steps I questioned my +companion further on this subject.</p> + +<p>“How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a +dreadful thing to be done?”</p> + +<p>“Allow it? the mothers <i>do</i> it! It seems to +me that there’s nothing too fiendish or diabolical for +these people to do. Why, in some of the islands they have +an institution called the <i>Areoi</i>, and the persons connected +with that body are ready for any wickedness that mortal man can +devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o’ +their customs is to murder their infants the moment they are +born. The mothers agree to it, and the fathers do it. +And the mildest ways they have of murdering them is by sticking +them through the body with sharp splinters of bamboo, strangling +them with their thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping them +to death while under the sod.”</p> + +<p>I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these +horrors.</p> + +<p>“But it’s a curious fact,” he continued, +after a pause, during which we walked in silence towards the spot +where we had left our comrades,—“it’s a curious +fact, that wherever the missionaries get a footin’ all +these things come to an end at once, an’ the savages take +to doin’ each other good, and singin’ psalms, just +like Methodists.”</p> + +<p>“God bless the missionaries!” said I, while a +feeling of enthusiasm filled my heart, so that I could speak with +difficulty. “God bless and prosper the missionaries +till they get a footing in every island of the sea!”</p> + +<p>“I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I +could,” said Bill, in a deep, sad voice; “but it +would be a mere mockery for a man to ask a blessing for others +who dare not ask one for himself. But, Ralph,” he +continued, “I’ve not told you half o’ the +abominations I have seen durin’ my life in these +seas. If we pull long together, lad, I’ll tell you +more; and if times have not changed very much since I was here +last, it’s like that you’ll have a chance o’ +seeing a little for yourself before long.”</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The Sandal-wood party—Native children’s games, +somewhat surprising—Desperate amusements suddenly and +fatally brought to a close—An old friend +recognised—News—Romata’s mad conduct.</p> + +<p>Next day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I +accompanied them as before. During the dinner hour I +wandered into the woods alone, being disinclined for food that +day. I had not rambled far when I found myself unexpectedly +on the sea-shore, having crossed a narrow neck of land which +separated the native village from a large bay. Here I found +a party of the islanders busy with one of their war-canoes, which +was almost ready for launching. I stood for a long time +watching this party with great interest, and observed that they +fastened the timbers and planks to each other very much in the +same way in which I had seen Jack fasten those of our little +boat. But what surprised me most was its immense length, +which I measured very carefully, and found to be a hundred feet +long; and it was so capacious that it could have held three +hundred men. It had the unwieldy out-rigger and enormously +high stern-posts which I had remarked on the canoe that came to +us while I was on the Coral Island. Observing some boys +playing at games a short way along the beach, I resolved to go +and watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were engaged +so busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe.</p> + +<p>Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I +began to think this must be the general play-ground of the +village, I sat down on a grassy bank under the shade of a +plantain-tree, to watch them. And a happier or more noisy +crew I have never seen. There were at least two hundred of +them, both boys and girls, all of whom were clad in no other +garments than their own glossy little black skins, except the +maro, or strip of cloth round the loins of the boys, and a very +short petticoat or kilt on the girls. They did not all play +at the same game, but amused themselves in different groups.</p> + +<p>One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our +blind-man’s-buff. Another set were walking on stilts, +which raised the children three feet from the ground. They +were very expert at this amusement and seldom tumbled. In +another place I observed a group of girls standing together, and +apparently enjoying themselves very much; so I went up to see +what they were doing, and found that they were opening their +eye-lids with their fingers till their eyes appeared of an +enormous size, and then thrusting pieces of straw between the +upper and lower lids, across the eye-ball, to keep them in that +position! This seemed to me, I must confess, a very foolish +as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the children +seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they +made. I pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that +if little children knew how silly they seem to grown-up people +when they make faces, they would not be so fond of doing +it. In another place were a number of boys engaged in +flying kites, and I could not help wondering that some of the +games of those little savages should be so like to our own, +although they had never seen us at play. But the kites were +different from ours in many respects, being of every variety of +shape. They were made of very thin cloth, and the boys +raised them to a wonderful height in the air by means of twine +made from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, some +of which showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor +savages, and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be +sent out to them. But the amusement which the greatest +number of the children of both sexes seemed to take chief delight +in, was swimming and diving in the sea; and the expertness which +they exhibited was truly amazing. They seemed to have two +principal games in the water, one of which was to dive off a sort +of stage which had been erected near a deep part of the sea, and +chase each other in the water. Some of them went down to an +extraordinary depth; others skimmed along the surface, or rolled +over and over like porpoises, or diving under each other, came up +unexpectedly and pulled each other down by a leg or an arm. +They never seemed to tire of this sport, and, from the great heat +of the water in the South Seas, they could remain in it nearly +all day without feeling chilled. Many of these children +were almost infants, scarce able to walk; yet they staggered down +the beach, flung their round fat little black bodies fearlessly +into deep water, and struck out to sea with as much confidence as +ducklings.</p> + +<p>The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the +surf. But as this is an amusement in which all engage, from +children of ten to gray-headed men of sixty, and as I had an +opportunity of witnessing it in perfection the day following, I +shall describe it more minutely.</p> + +<p>I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand +swimming-match was got up, for Romata came and told the captain +that they were going to engage in it, and begged him to +“come and see.”</p> + +<p>“What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?” I +inquired of Bill, as we walked together to a part of the shore on +which several thousands of the natives were assembled.</p> + +<p>“It’s a very favourite lark with these +’xtr’or’nary critters,” replied Bill, +giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably bulged out +his left cheek. “Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to +the water as soon a’most as they can walk, an’ long +before they can do that anything respectably, so that they are as +much at home in the sea as on the land. Well, ye see, I +’spose they found swimmin’ for miles out to sea, and +divin’ fathoms deep, wasn’t exciting enough, so they +invented this game o’ the surf. Each man and boy, as +you see, has got a short board or plank, with which he swims out +for a mile or more to sea, and then, gettin’ on the top +o’ yon thundering breaker, they come to shore on the top of +it, yellin’ and screechin’ like fiends. +It’s a marvel to me that they’re not dashed to +shivers on the coral reef, for sure an’ sartin am I that if +any o’ us tried it, we wouldn’t be worth the fluke of +a broken anchor after the wave fell. But there they +go!”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we +were now standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, +plunged into the surf, and were carried off by the seething foam +of the retreating wave.</p> + +<p>At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined +the shore, so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff +breeze had rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the +feet of the multitudes who lined the beach. For some time +the swimmers continued to strike out to sea, breasting over the +swell like hundreds of black seals. Then they all turned, +and, watching an approaching billow, mounted its white crest, +and, each laying his breast on the short flat board, came rolling +towards the shore, careering on the summit of the mighty wave, +while they and the onlookers shouted and yelled with +excitement. Just as the monster wave curled in solemn +majesty to fling its bulky length upon the beach, most of the +swimmers slid back into the trough behind; others, slipping off +their boards, seized them in their hands, and, plunging through +the watery waste, swam out to repeat the amusement; but a few, +who seemed to me the most reckless, continued their career until +they were launched upon the beach, and enveloped in the churning +foam and spray. One of these last came in on the crest of +the wave most manfully, and landed with a violent bound almost on +the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by his peculiar +head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained as +their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint +with which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to +his feet, I recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, +my old friend of the Coral Island!</p> + +<p>Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing +quickly, took me round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the +effect of transferring a good deal of the moist paint from his +nose to mine. Then, recollecting that this was not the +white man’s mode of salutation, he grasped me by the hand +and shook it violently.</p> + +<p>“Hallo, Ralph!” cried Bill, in surprise, +“that chap seems to have taken a sudden fancy to you, or he +must be an old acquaintance.”</p> + +<p>“Right, Bill,” I replied, “he is indeed an +old acquaintance;” and I explained in a few words that he +was the chief whose party Jack and Peterkin and I had helped to +save.</p> + +<p>Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an +animated conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the +course of it to me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him +about the memorable battle, and the part we had taken in +it. When he paused, I begged of Bill to ask him about the +woman Avatea, for I had some hope that she might have come with +Tararo on this visit. “And ask him,” said I, +“who she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different race +from the Feejeeans.” On the mention of her name the +chief frowned darkly, and seemed to speak with much anger.</p> + +<p>“You’re right, Ralph,” said Bill, when the +chief had ceased to talk; “she’s not a Feejee girl, +but a Samoan. How she ever came to this place the chief +does not very clearly explain, but he says she was taken in war, +and that he got her three years ago, an’ kept her as his +daughter ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else +she’d have been roasted and eaten like the rest.”</p> + +<p>“But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?” +said I.</p> + +<p>“Because the girl’s somewhat obstinate, like most +o’ the sex, an’ won’t marry the man he wants +her to. It seems that a chief of some other island came on +a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but she wouldn’t +have him on no account, bein’ already in love, and engaged +to a young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a desperate +shindy; so, as he was going on a war expedition in his canoe, he +left her to think about it, sayin’ he’d be back in +six months or so, when he hoped she wouldn’t be so +obstropolous. This happened just a week ago; an’ +Tararo says that if she’s not ready to go, when the chief +returns, as his bride, she’ll be sent to him as a <i>long +pig</i>.”</p> + +<p>“As a long pig!” I exclaimed in surprise; +“why what does he mean by that?”</p> + +<p>“He means somethin’ very unpleasant,” +answered Bill with a frown. “You see these +blackguards eat men an’ women just as readily as they eat +pigs; and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each other +in appearance, they call men <i>long</i> pigs. If Avatea +goes to this fellow as a long pig, it’s all up with her, +poor thing.”</p> + +<p>“Is she on the island now?” I asked eagerly.</p> + +<p>“No, she’s at Tararo’s island.”</p> + +<p>“And where does it lie?”</p> + +<p>“About fifty or sixty miles to the south’ard +o’ this,” returned Bill; “but +I—”</p> + +<p>At this moment we were startled by the cry of “Mao! +mao!—a shark! a shark!” which was immediately +followed by a shriek that rang clear and fearfully loud above the +tumult of cries that arose from the savages in the water and on +the land. We turned hastily towards the direction whence +the cry came, and had just time to observe the glaring eye-balls +of one of the swimmers as he tossed his arms in the air. +Next instant he was pulled under the waves. A canoe was +instantly launched, and the hand of the drowning man was caught, +but only half of his body was dragged from the maw of the +monster, which followed the canoe until the water became so +shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next +billow was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore.</p> + +<p>In most countries of the world this would have made a deep +impression on the spectators, but the only effect it had upon +these islanders was to make them hurry with all speed out of the +sea, lest a similar fate should befall some of the others; but, +so utterly reckless were they of human life, that it did not for +a moment suspend the progress of their amusements. It is +true the surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat abruptly, but +they immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me +that sharks do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being +frightened away by the immense numbers of men and boys in the +water, and by the shouting and splashing that they make. +“But,” said he, “such a thing as you have seen +just now don’t frighten them much. They’ll be +at it again to-morrow or next day, just as if there wasn’t +a single shark between Feejee and Nova Zembla.”</p> + +<p>After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing +matches; and being men of immense size and muscle, they did a +good deal of injury to each other, especially in boxing, in which +not only the lower orders, but several of the chiefs and priests +engaged. Each bout was very quickly terminated, for they +did not pretend to a scientific knowledge of the art, and wasted +no time in sparring, but hit straight out at each other’s +heads, and their blows were delivered with great force. +Frequently one of the combatants was knocked down with a single +blow; and one gigantic fellow hit his adversary so severely that +he drove the skin entirely off his forehead. This feat was +hailed with immense applause by the spectators.</p> + +<p>During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, +though I confess I could not refrain from beholding them, I was +struck with the beauty of many of the figures and designs that +were tattooed on the persons of the chiefs and principal +men. One figure, that seemed to me very elegant, was that +of a palm-tree tattooed on the back of a man’s leg, the +roots rising, as it were, from under his heel, the stem ascending +the tendon of the ankle, and the graceful head branching out upon +the calf. I afterwards learned that this process of +tattooing is very painful, and takes long to do, commencing at +the age of ten, and being continued at intervals up to the age of +thirty. It is done by means of an instrument made of bone, +with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the +kernel of the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, +and the mark thus made is indelible. The operation is +performed by a class of men whose profession it is, and they +tattoo as much at a time, as the person on whom they are +operating can bear; which is not much, the pain and inflammation +caused by tattooing being very great, sometimes causing +death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed with an ornamental +stripe down the legs, which gave them the appearance of being +clad in tights. Others had marks round the ankles and +insteps, which looked like tight-fitting and elegant boots. +Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts were very +profusely marked with every imaginable species of +device,—muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, +intermingled with lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary +figures.</p> + +<p>The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a +few marks on their feet and arms. But I must say, however +objectionable this strange practice may be, it nevertheless had +this good effect, that it took away very much from their +appearance of nakedness.</p> + +<p>Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our +schooner, we observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood +of his house, apparently mad with passion.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” said Bill to me, “there he’s at +his old tricks again. That’s his way when he gets +drink. The natives make a sort of drink o’ their own, +and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy he’s +like a wild tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a +bottle, as usual, to keep him in good humour. After +drinkin’ he usually goes to sleep, and the people know it +well and keep out of his way, for fear they should waken +him. Even the babies are taken out of ear-shot; for, when +he’s waked up, he rushes out just as you see him now, and +spears or clubs the first person he meets.”</p> + +<p>It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon +had been in his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about +without one. Suddenly he caught sight of an unfortunate man +who was trying to conceal himself behind a tree. Rushing +towards him, Romata struck him a terrible blow on the head, which +knocked out the poor man’s eye and also dislocated the +chief’s finger. The wretched creature offered no +resistance; he did not even attempt to parry the blow. +Indeed, from what Bill said, I found that he might consider +himself lucky in having escaped with his life, which would +certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of a +club at the time.</p> + +<p>“Have these wretched creatures no law among +themselves,” said I, “which can restrain such +wickedness?”</p> + +<p>“None,” replied Bill. “The +chief’s word is law. He might kill and eat a dozen of +his own subjects any day for nothing more than his own pleasure, +and nobody would take the least notice of it.”</p> + +<p>This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we +wended our way to the beach, but I could not observe any other +expression on the faces of the men than that of total +indifference or contempt. It seemed to me a very awful +thing that it should be possible for men to come to such hardness +of heart and callousness to the sight of bloodshed and violence; +but, indeed, I began to find that such constant exposure to +scenes of blood was having a slight effect upon myself, and I +shuddered when I came to think that I, too, was becoming +callous.</p> + +<p>I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up +and down the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the +conclusion that if I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such +bloody deeds as I had witnessed within the last few weeks, could +so soon come to be less sensitive about them, how little wonder +that these poor ignorant savages, who were born and bred in +familiarity therewith, should think nothing of them at all, and +should hold human life in so very slight esteem.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Mischief brewing—My blood is made to run cold—Evil +consultations and wicked resolves—Bloody Bill attempts to +do good and fails—The attack—Wholesale +murder—The flight—The escape.</p> + +<p>Next morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of +deep depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy +fate, the more wretched and miserable did I feel.</p> + +<p>I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most +dreadful character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere +pastime. On shore were the natives, whose practices were so +horrible that I could not think of them without shuddering. +On board were none but pirates of the blackest dye, who, although +not cannibals, were foul murderers, and more blameworthy even +than the savages, inasmuch as they knew better. Even Bill, +with whom I had, under the strange circumstances of my lot, +formed a kind of intimacy, was so fierce in his nature as to have +acquired the title of “Bloody” from his vile +companions. I felt very much cast down the more I +considered the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as it +seemed to me, at least for a long time to come. At last, in +my feeling of utter helplessness, I prayed fervently to the +Almighty that he would deliver me out of my miserable condition; +and when I had done so I felt some degree of comfort.</p> + +<p>When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the +men usually started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me +to remain aboard that day, as I did not feel well; but he looked +at me angrily, and ordered me, in a surly tone, to get ready to +go on shore as usual. The fact was that the captain had +been out of humour for some time past. Romata and he had +had some differences, and high words had passed between them, +during which the chief had threatened to send a fleet of his +war-canoes, with a thousand men, to break up and burn the +schooner; whereupon the captain smiled sarcastically, and going +up to the chief gazed sternly in his face, while he said, +“I have only to raise my little finger just now, and my big +gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five +minutes!” Although the chief was a bold man, he +quailed before the pirate’s glance and threat, and made no +reply; but a bad feeling had been raised and old sores had been +opened.</p> + +<p>I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. +Before starting, however, the captain called me into the cabin, +and said,—</p> + +<p>“Here, Ralph, I’ve got a mission for you, +lad. That blackguard Romata is in the dumps, and nothing +will mollify him but a gift; so do you go up to his house and +give him these whales’ teeth, with my compliments. +Take with you one of the men who can speak the +language.”</p> + +<p>I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six +white whales’ teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, +which seemed to me very paltry things. However, I did not +dare to hesitate or ask any questions; so, gathering them up, I +left the cabin and was soon on my way to the chief’s house, +accompanied by Bill. On expressing my surprise at the gift, +he said,—</p> + +<p>“They’re paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but +they’re considered of great value by them chaps. +They’re a sort o’ cash among them. The red ones +are the most prized, one of them bein’ equal to twenty +o’ the white ones. I suppose the only reason for +their bein’ valuable is that there ain’t many of +them, and they’re hard to be got.”</p> + +<p>On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in +the midst of a number of large bales of native cloth and other +articles, which had been brought to him as presents from time to +time by inferior chiefs. He received us rather haughtily, +but on Bill explaining the nature of our errand he became very +condescending, and his eyes glistened with satisfaction when he +received the whales’ teeth, although he laid them aside +with an assumption of kingly indifference.</p> + +<p>“Go,” said he, with a wave of the +hand,—“go, tell your captain that he may cut wood +to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come ashore,—I +want to have a palaver with him.”</p> + +<p>As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his +head:</p> + +<p>“There’s mischief brewin’ in that black +rascal’s head. I know him of old. But what +comes here?”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in +the wood, and presently there issued from it a band of savages, +in the midst of whom were a number of men bearing burdens on +their shoulders. At first I thought that these burdens were +poles with something rolled round them, the end of each pole +resting on a man’s shoulder. But on a nearer approach +I saw that they were human beings, tied hand and foot, and so +lashed to the poles that they could not move. I counted +twenty of them as they passed.</p> + +<p>“More murder!” said Bill, in a voice that sounded +between a hoarse laugh and a groan.</p> + +<p>“Surely they are not going to murder them?” said +I, looking anxiously into Bill’s face.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, Ralph,” replied Bill, +“what they’re goin’ to do with them; but I fear +they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that +way.”</p> + +<p>As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed +that Bill looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction +where the procession had disappeared. At last he stopped, +and turning abruptly on his heel, said,—</p> + +<p>“I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom +o’ that affair. Let us follow these black scoundrels +and see what they’re goin’ to do.”</p> + +<p>I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody +practices; but Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and +went. We passed rapidly through the bush, being guided in +the right direction by the shouts of the savages. Suddenly +there was a dead silence, which continued for some time, while +Bill and I involuntarily quickened our pace until we were running +at the top of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously +mentioned. As we reached the verge of the wood, we +discovered the savages surrounding the large war-canoe, which +they were apparently on the point of launching. Suddenly +the multitude put their united strength to the canoe; but +scarcely had the huge machine begun to move, when a yell, the +most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, rose high above the +shouting of the savages. It had not died away when another +and another smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I saw that +these inhuman monsters were actually launching their canoe over +the living bodies of their victims. But there was no pity +in the breasts of these men. Forward they went in ruthless +indifference, shouting as they went, while high above their +voices rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, as, +one after another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst +the eyeballs from their sockets, and sent the life’s blood +gushing from their mouths. Oh, reader, this is no +fiction. I would not, for the sake of thrilling you with +horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was witnessed. +It is true; true as that accursed sin which has rendered the +human heart capable of such diabolical enormities!</p> + +<p>When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a +deep groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as +if I had been a child, cried,—</p> + +<p>“Come along, lad; let’s away!”—and so, +staggering and stumbling over the tangled underwood, we fled from +the fatal spot.</p> + +<p>During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a +horrible dream. I scarce knew what was said to me, and was +more than once blamed by the men for idling my time. At +last the hour to return aboard came. We marched down to the +beach, and I felt relief for the first time when my feet rested +on the schooner’s deck.</p> + +<p>In the course of the evening I overheard part of a +conversation between the captain and the first mate, which +startled me not a little. They were down in the cabin, and +conversed in an under-tone, but the sky-light being off, I +overheard every word that was said.</p> + +<p>“I don’t half like it,” said the mate. +“It seems to me that we’ll only have hard +fightin’ and no pay.”</p> + +<p>“No pay!” repeated the captain, in a voice of +suppressed anger. “Do you call a good cargo all for +nothing no pay?”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” returned the mate; “but +we’ve got the cargo aboard. Why not cut your cable +and take French leave o’ them? What’s the use +o’ tryin’ to lick the blackguards when it’ll do +us no manner o’ good?”</p> + +<p>“Mate,” said the captain, in a low voice, +“you talk like a fresh-water sailor. I can only +attribute this shyness to some strange delusion; for +surely” (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone as he +said this) “surely I am not to suppose that <i>you</i> have +become soft-hearted! Besides, you are wrong in regard to +the cargo being aboard; there’s a good quarter of it lying +in the woods, and that blackguard chief knows it and won’t +let me take it off. He defied us to do our worst, +yesterday.”</p> + +<p>“Defied us! did he?” cried the mate, with a bitter +laugh. “Poor contemptible thing!”</p> + +<p>“And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are +afraid to attack him.”</p> + +<p>“Who said I was afraid?” growled the mate, +sulkily. “I’m as ready as any man in the +ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend to +do?”</p> + +<p>“I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up +to the head of the creek there, from which point we can command +the pile of sandal-wood with our gun. Then I shall land +with all the men except two, who shall take care of the schooner +and be ready with the boat to take us off. We can creep +through the woods to the head of the village, where these +cannibals are always dancing round their suppers of human flesh, +and if the carbines of the men are loaded with a heavy charge of +buck-shot, we can drop forty or fifty at the first volley. +After that the thing will be easy enough. The savages will +take to the mountains in a body, and we shall take what we +require, up anchor, and away.”</p> + +<p>To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the +cabin I heard the captain say,—</p> + +<p>“Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don’t +forget the buck-shot.”</p> + +<p>The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this +murderous conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, +who seemed much perplexed about it. At length he +said,—</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you what I’ll do, Ralph: +I’ll swim ashore after dark and fix a musket to a tree not +far from the place where we’ll have to land, and I’ll +tie a long string to the trigger, so that when our fellows cross +it they’ll let it off, and so alarm the village in time to +prevent an attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin’ +back to the boat; so, master captain,” added Bill with a +smile that for the first time seemed to me to be mingled with +good-natured cheerfulness, “you’ll be baulked at +least for once in your life by Bloody Bill.”</p> + +<p>After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. +He slipped over the side with a musket in his left hand, while +with his right he swam ashore and entered the woods. He +soon returned, having accomplished his purpose, and got on board +without being seen,—I being the only one on deck.</p> + +<p>When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on +deck, the cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. +These sweeps were immensely large oars, each requiring a couple +of men to work it. In a few minutes we entered the mouth of +the creek, which was indeed the mouth of a small river, and took +about half an hour to ascend it, although the spot where we +intended to land was not more than six hundred yards from the +mouth, because there was a slight current against us, and the +mangroves which narrowed the creek, impeded the rowers in some +places. Having reached the spot, which was so darkened by +overhanging trees that we could see with difficulty, a small +kedge anchor attached to a thin line was let softly down over the +stern.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” whispered the captain, as he walked +along the line of men, who were all armed to the teeth, +“don’t be in a hurry, aim low, and don’t waste +your first shots.”</p> + +<p>He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in +silence. There was no room to row, but oars were not +needed, as a slight push against the side of the schooner sent +the boat gliding to the shore.</p> + +<p>“There’s no need of leaving two in the +boat,” whispered the mate, as the men stepped out; +“we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph +stay.”</p> + +<p>The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness +with the boat-hook, to shove ashore at a moment’s notice if +they should return, or to shove off if any of the savages should +happen to approach. He then threw his carbine into the +hollow of his arm and glided through the bushes followed by his +men. With a throbbing head I awaited the result of our +plan. I knew the exact locality where the musket was +placed, for Bill had described it to me, and I kept my straining +eyes fixed upon the spot. But no sound came, and I began to +fear that either they had gone in another direction or that Bill +had not fixed the string properly. Suddenly I heard a faint +click, and observed one or two bright sparks among the +bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at +once that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming +had not caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly +failed. A feeling of dread now began to creep over me as I +stood in the boat, in that dark, silent spot, awaiting the issue +of this murderous expedition. I shuddered as I glanced at +the water that glided past like a dark reptile. I looked +back at the schooner, but her hull was just barely visible, while +her tapering masts were lost among the trees which overshadowed +her. Her lower sails were set, but so thick was the gloom +that they were quite invisible.</p> + +<p>Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices +raised a yell in the village; again the cry rose on the night +air, and was followed by broken shouts as of scattered parties of +men bounding into the woods. Then I heard another shout +loud and close at hand. It was the voice of the captain +cursing the man who had fired the premature shot. Then came +the order, “Forward,” followed by the wild hurrah of +our men, as they charged the savages. Shots now rang in +quick succession, and at last a loud volley startled the echoes +of the woods. It was followed by a multitude of wild +shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another +“hurrah” from the men; the distance of the sound +proving that they were driving their enemies before them towards +the sea.</p> + +<p>While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now +mingled in confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the +leaves not far from me. At first I thought it was a party +of savages who had observed the schooner, but I was speedily +undeceived by observing a body of natives—apparently +several hundreds, as far as I could guess in the uncertain +light—bounding through the woods towards the scene of +battle. I saw at once that this was a party who had +out-flanked our men, and would speedily attack them in the +rear. And so it turned out, for, in a short time, the +shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I heard a +death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear.</p> + +<p>At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of +exultation that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that +our men had been conquered. I was immediately thrown into +dreadful consternation. What was I now to do? To be +taken by the savages was too horrible to be thought of; to flee +to the mountains was hopeless, as I should soon be discovered; +and to take the schooner out of the creek without assistance was +impossible. I resolved, however, to make the attempt, as +being my only hope, and was on the point of pushing off when my +hand was stayed and my blood chilled by an appalling shriek in +which I recognised the voice of one of the crew. It was +succeeded by a shout from the savages. Then came another, +and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, as I felt +convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold +blood. With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on +fire, I seized the boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang +from the bushes.</p> + +<p>“Stop! Ralph, stop!—there now, push off,” he +cried, and bounded into the boat so violently as nearly to upset +her. It was Bill’s voice! In another moment we +were on board,—the boat made fast, the line of the anchor +cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first stroke of +Bill’s giant arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, for +in his haste he forgot that I could scarcely move the unwieldy +oar. Springing to the stern he lashed the rudder in such a +position as that, while it aided me, it acted against him, and so +rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The +schooner now began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we +reached its mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told +that we were discovered. Instantly a number of the savages +plunged into the water and swam towards us; but we were making so +much way that they could not overtake us. One, however, an +immensely powerful man, succeeded in laying hold of the cut rope +that hung from the stern, and clambered quickly upon deck. +Bill caught sight of him the instant his head appeared above the +taffrail. But he did not cease to row, and did not appear +even to notice the savage until he was within a yard of him; +then, dropping the sweep, he struck him a blow on the forehead +with his clenched fist that felled him to the deck. Lifting +him up he hurled him overboard and resumed the oar. But now +a greater danger awaited us, for the savages had outrun us on the +bank and were about to plunge into the water ahead of the +schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was +sealed. For one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, +drawing a pistol from his belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held +the pan of his pistol over the touch-hole and fired. The +shot was succeeded by the hiss of the cannon’s priming, +then the blaze and the crashing thunder of the monstrous gun +burst upon the savages with such deafening roar that it seemed as +if their very mountains had been rent asunder.</p> + +<p>This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation +caused by the unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a +gentle breeze, which the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us +from feeling, bulged out our sails; the schooner bent before it, +and the shouts of the disappointed savages grew fainter and +fainter in the distance as we were slowly wafted out to sea.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Reflections—The wounded man—The squall—True +consolation—Death.</p> + +<p>There is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their +bodies and in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to +be wonderfully adapted and exactly proportioned to the +circumstances in which individuals may happen to be +placed,—a power which, in most cases, is sufficient to +carry a man through and over every obstacle that may happen to be +thrown in his path through life, no matter how high or how steep +the mountain may be, but which often forsakes him the moment the +summit is gained, the point of difficulty passed; and leaves him +prostrated, with energies gone, nerves unstrung, and a feeling of +incapacity pervading the entire frame that renders the most +trifling effort almost impossible.</p> + +<p>During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to +severe mental and much physical excitement, which had almost +crushed me down by the time I was relieved from duty in the +course of the evening. But when the expedition, whose +failure has just been narrated, was planned, my anxieties and +energies had been so powerfully aroused that I went through the +protracted scenes of that terrible night without a feeling of the +slightest fatigue. My mind and body were alike active and +full of energy. No sooner was the last thrilling fear of +danger past, however, than my faculties were utterly relaxed; +and, when I felt the cool breezes of the Pacific playing around +my fevered brow, and heard the free waves rippling at the +schooner’s prow, as we left the hated island behind us, my +senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck.</p> + +<p>From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by +the arm, saying,—</p> + +<p>“Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we’re safe +now. Poor thing, I believe he’s fainted.” +And raising me in his arms he laid me on the folds of the +gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the tiller. +“Here, take a drop o’ this, it’ll do you good, +my boy,” he added, in a voice of tenderness which I had +never heard him use before, while he held a brandy-flask to my +lips.</p> + +<p>I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next +moment my head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast +asleep. I slept long, for when I awoke the sun was a good +way above the horizon. I did not move on first opening my +eyes, as I felt a delightful sensation of rest pervading me, and +my eyes were riveted on and charmed with the gorgeous splendour +of the mighty ocean, that burst upon my sight. It was a +dead calm; the sea seemed a sheet of undulating crystal, tipped +and streaked with the saffron hues of sunrise, which had not yet +merged into the glowing heat of noon; and there was a deep calm +in the blue dome above, that was not broken even by the usual +flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would have lain in +contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but my mind was +recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the present by +the sight of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet with his +head reclining, as if in sleep, on his right arm, which rested on +the tiller. As he seemed to rest peacefully I did not mean +to disturb him, but the slight noise I made in raising myself on +my elbow caused him to start and look round.</p> + +<p>“Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long +and soundly,” he said, turning towards me.</p> + +<p>On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He +was deadly pale, and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks +over his face, was clotted with blood. Blood also stained +his hollow cheeks and covered the front of his shirt, which, with +the greater part of dress, was torn and soiled with mud.</p> + +<p>“Oh, Bill!” said I, with deep anxiety, “what +is the matter with you? You are ill. You must have +been wounded.”</p> + +<p>“Even so, lad,” said Bill in a deep soft voice, +while he extended his huge frame on the couch from which I had +just risen. “I’ve got an ugly wound, I fear, +and I’ve been waiting for you to waken, to ask you to get +me a drop o’ brandy and a mouthful o’ bread from the +cabin lockers. You seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that +I didn’t like to disturb you. But I don’t feel +up to much just now.”</p> + +<p>I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below +immediately, and returned in a few seconds with a bottle of +brandy and some broken biscuit. He seemed much refreshed +after eating a few morsels and drinking a long draught of water +mingled with a little of the spirits. Immediately +afterwards he fell asleep, and I watched him anxiously until he +awoke, being desirous of knowing the nature and extent of his +wound.</p> + +<p>“Ha!” he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a +slumber of an hour, “I’m the better of that nap, +Ralph; I feel twice the man I was;” and he attempted to +rise, but sank back again immediately with a deep groan.</p> + +<p>“Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look +at your wound. I’ll make a comfortable bed for you +here on deck, and get you some breakfast. After that you +shall tell me how you got it. Cheer up, Bill,” I +added, seeing that he turned his head away; “you’ll +be all right in a little, and I’ll be a capital nurse to +you though I’m no doctor.”</p> + +<p>I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. +While it was kindling, I went to the steward’s pantry and +procured the materials for a good breakfast, with which, in +little more than half an hour, I returned to my companion. +He seemed much better, and smiled kindly on me as I set before +him a cup of coffee and a tray with several eggs and some bread +on it.</p> + +<p>“Now then, Bill,” said I, cheerfully, sitting down +beside him on the deck, “let’s fall to. +I’m very hungry myself, I can tell you; but—I +forgot—your wound,” I added, rising; “let me +look at it.”</p> + +<p>I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the +chest. It did not bleed much, and, as it was on the right +side, I was in hopes that it might not be very serious. But +Bill shook his head. “However,” said he, +“sit down, Ralph, and I’ll tell you all about +it.”</p> + +<p>“You see, after we left the boat an’ began to push +through the bushes, we went straight for the line of my musket, +as I had expected; but by some unlucky chance it didn’t +explode, for I saw the line torn away by the men’s legs, +and heard the click o’ the lock; so I fancy the priming had +got damp and didn’t catch. I was in a great quandary +now what to do, for I couldn’t concoct in my mind, in the +hurry, any good reason for firin’ off my piece. But +they say necessity’s the mother of invention; so, just as I +was givin’ it up and clinchin’ my teeth to bide the +worst o’t, and take what should come, a sudden thought came +into my head. I stepped out before the rest, seemin’ +to be awful anxious to be at the savages, tripped my foot on a +fallen tree, plunged head foremost into a bush, an’, ov +coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a +screechin’ from the camp as I never heard in all my +life. I rose at once, and was rushin’ on with the +rest when the captain called a halt.</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p334b.jpg"> +<img alt="The dying pirate" src="images/p334s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>“‘You did that a-purpose, you villain!’ he +said, with a tremendous oath, and, drawin’ a pistol from +his belt, let fly right into my breast. I fell at once, and +remembered no more till I was startled and brought round by the +most awful yell I ever heard in my life, except, maybe, the +shrieks o’ them poor critters that were crushed to death +under yon big canoe. Jumpin’ up, I looked round, and, +through the trees, saw a fire gleamin’ not far off, the +light o’ which showed me the captain and men tied hand and +foot, each to a post, and the savages dancin’ round them +like demons. I had scarce looked for a second, when I saw +one o’ them go up to the captain flourishing a knife, and, +before I could wink, he plunged it into his breast, while another +yell, like the one that roused me, rang upon my ear. I +didn’t wait for more, but, bounding up, went crashing +through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows caught +sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin’ +into the boat, as you know.”</p> + +<p>Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and +shuddered frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from +continuing the subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his +mind to other things.</p> + +<p>“But now, Bill,” said I, “it behoves us to +think about the future, and what course of action we shall +pursue. Here we are, on the wide Pacific, in a +well-appointed schooner, which is our own,—at least no one +has a better claim to it than we have,—and the world lies +before us. Moreover, here comes a breeze, so we must make +up our minds which way to steer.”</p> + +<p>“Ralph, boy,” said my companion, “it matters +not to me which way we go. I fear that my time is short +now. Go where you will. I’m content.”</p> + +<p>“Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the +Coral Island, and see what has become of my dear old comrades, +Jack and Peterkin. I believe the island has no name, but +the captain once pointed it out to me on the chart, and I marked +it afterwards; so, as we know pretty well our position just now, +I think I can steer to it. Then, as to working the vessel, +it is true I cannot hoist the sails single-handed, but luckily we +have enough of sail set already, and if it should come on to blow +a squall, I could at least drop the peaks of the main and fore +sails, and clew them up partially without help, and throw her +head close into the wind, so as to keep her all shaking till the +violence of the squall is past. And if we have continued +light breezes, I’ll rig up a complication of blocks and fix +them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able to hoist +the sails without help. ’Tis true I’ll require +half a day to hoist them, but we don’t need to mind +that. Then I’ll make a sort of erection on deck to +screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you can only manage to sit +beside the tiller and steer for two hours every day, so as to let +me get a nap, I’ll engage to let you off duty all the rest +of the twenty-four hours. And if you don’t feel able +for steering, I’ll lash the helm and heave to, while I get +you your breakfasts and dinners; and so we’ll manage +famously, and soon reach the Coral Island.”</p> + +<p>Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain.</p> + +<p>“And what will you do,” said he, “if it +comes on to blow a storm?”</p> + +<p>This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do +in such a case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and +said, “Bill, when a man has done all that he <i>can</i> do, +he ought to leave the rest to God.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Ralph,” said my companion, in a faint voice, +looking anxiously into my face, “I wish that I had the +feelin’s about God that you seem to have, at this +hour. I’m dyin’, Ralph; yet I, who have braved +death a hundred times, am afraid to die. I’m afraid +to enter the next world. Something within tells me there +will be a reckoning when I go there. But it’s all +over with me, Ralph. I feel that there’s no chance +o’ my bein’ saved.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t say that, Bill,” said I, in deep +compassion, “don’t say that. I’m quite +sure there’s hope even for you, but I can’t remember +the words of the Bible that make me think so. Is there not +a Bible on board, Bill?”</p> + +<p>“No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor +boy that was taken aboard against his will. He died, poor +lad, I think, through ill treatment and fear. After he was +gone the captain found his Bible and flung it +overboard.”</p> + +<p>I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the +way in which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me +that I was actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than +this blood-stained pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he +never read the Bible, and was never brought up to care for it; +whereas I was carefully taught to read it by my own mother, and +had read it daily as long as I possessed one, yet to so little +purpose that I could not now call to mind a single text that +would meet this poor man’s case, and afford him the +consolation he so much required. I was much distressed, and +taxed my memory for a long time. At last a text did flash +into my mind, and I wondered much that I had not thought of it +before.</p> + +<p>“Bill,” said I, in a low voice, +“‘Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ and thou shalt be +saved.’”</p> + +<p>“Ay, Ralph, I’ve heard the missionaries say that +before now, but what good can it do me? It’s not for +me that. It’s not for the likes o’ +me.”</p> + +<p>I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that +that word was for him as well as for me, I could not remember any +other word whereby I could prove it.</p> + +<p>After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, +“Ralph, I’ve led a terrible life. I’ve +been a sailor since I was a boy, and I’ve gone from bad to +worse ever since I left my father’s roof. I’ve +been a pirate three years now. It is true I did not choose +the trade, but I was inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here +by force till I became reckless and at last joined them. +Since that time my hand has been steeped in human blood again and +again. Your young heart would grow cold if I—; but +why should I go on? ’Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is +fixed.”</p> + +<p>“Bill,” said I, “‘Though your sins be +red like crimson, they shall be white as snow.’ +‘Only believe.’”</p> + +<p>“Only believe!” cried Bill, starting up on his +elbow; “I’ve heard men talk o’ believing as if +it was easy. Ha! ’tis easy enough for a man to point +to a rope and say, ‘I believe that would bear my +weight;’ but ’tis another thing for a man to catch +hold o’ that rope, and swing himself by it over the edge of +a precipice!”</p> + +<p>The energy with which he said this, and the action with which +it was accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back +with a deep groan. As if the very elements sympathized with +this man’s sufferings, a low moan came sweeping over the +sea.</p> + +<p>“Hist! Ralph,” said Bill, opening his eves; +“there’s a squall coming, lad. Look alive, +boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the main-sail +peak. Them squalls come quick sometimes.”</p> + +<p>I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall +was indeed bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my +notice, owing to my being so much engrossed by our +conversation. I instantly did as Bill desired, for the +schooner was still lying motionless on the glassy sea. I +observed with some satisfaction that the squall was bearing down +on the larboard bow, so that it would strike the vessel in the +position in which she would be best able to stand the +shock. Having done my best to shorten sail, I returned aft, +and took my stand at the helm.</p> + +<p>“Now, boy,” said Bill, in a faint voice, +“keep her close to the wind.”</p> + +<p>A few seconds afterwards he said, “Ralph, let me hear +those two texts again.”</p> + +<p>I repeated them.</p> + +<p>“Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?”</p> + +<p>“Quite sure,” I replied.</p> + +<p>Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon +us, and the spray dashed over our decks. For a time the +schooner stood it bravely, and sprang forward against the rising +sea like a war-horse. Meanwhile clouds darkened the sky, +and the sea began to rise in huge billows. There was still +too much sail on the schooner, and, as the gale increased, I +feared that the masts would be torn out of her or carried away, +while the wind whistled and shrieked through the strained +rigging. Suddenly the wind shifted a point, a heavy sea +struck us on the bow, and the schooner was almost laid on her +beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my legs. At the +same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin which had +served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence against +the sky-light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I +could see that the shock had rendered him insensible, but I did +not dare to quit the tiller for an instant, as it required all my +faculties, bodily and mental, to manage the schooner. For +an hour the blast drove us along, while, owing to the sharpness +of the vessel’s bow and the press of canvass, she dashed +through the waves instead of breasting over them, thereby +drenching the decks with water fore and aft. At the end of +that time the squall passed away, and left us rocking on the +bosom of the agitated sea.</p> + +<p>My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise +Bill from the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran +below for the brandy bottle and rubbed his face and hands with +it, and endeavoured to pour a little down his throat. But +my efforts, although I continued them long and assiduously, were +of no avail; as I let go the hand which I had been chafing it +fell heavily on the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, +and sat for some time quite motionless, but there was no flutter +there—the pirate was dead!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Alone on the deep—Necessity the mother of +invention—A valuable book discovered—Natural +phenomenon—A bright day in my history.</p> + +<p>It was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I +now seated myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid +features of my late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past +history and contemplated with anxiety my present position. +Alone! in the midst of the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect +knowledge of navigation, and in a schooner requiring at least +eight men as her proper crew. But I will not tax the +reader’s patience with a minute detail of my feelings and +doings during the first few days that followed the death of my +companion. I will merely mention that I tied a cannon ball +to his feet and, with feelings of the deepest sorrow, consigned +him to the deep.</p> + +<p>For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the +east, and, as my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid +progress towards my destination. I could not take an +observation, which I very much regretted, as the captain’s +quadrant was in the cabin; but, from the day of setting sail from +the island of the savages, I had kept a dead reckoning, and as I +knew pretty well now how much lee-way the schooner made, I hoped +to hit the Coral Island without much difficulty. In this I +was the more confident that I knew its position on the chart +(which I understood was a very good one), and so had its correct +bearings by compass.</p> + +<p>As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had +got into the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting +the top-sails. This was a most arduous task, and my first +attempts were complete failures, owing, in a great degree, to my +reprehensible ignorance of mechanical forces. The first +error I made was in applying my apparatus of blocks and pulleys +to a rope which was too weak, so that the very first heave I made +broke it in two, and sent me staggering against the after-hatch, +over which I tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, +tumbled down the companion ladder into the cabin. I was +much bruised and somewhat stunned by this untoward +accident. However, I considered it fortunate that I was not +killed. In my next attempt I made sure of not coming by a +similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and fitted up larger +blocks and ropes. But although the principle on which I +acted was quite correct, the machinery was now so massive and +heavy that the mere friction and stiffness of the thick cordage +prevented me from moving it at all. Afterwards, however, I +came to proportion things more correctly; but I could not avoid +reflecting at the time how much better it would have been had I +learned all this from observation and study, instead of waiting +till I was forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious +lessons of experience.</p> + +<p>After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it +took me the greater part of a day to hoist the main-top +sail. As I could not steer and work at this at the same +time, I lashed the helm in such a position that, with a little +watching now and then, it kept the schooner in her proper +course. By this means I was enabled also to go about the +deck and down below for things that I wanted, as occasion +required; also to cook and eat my victuals. But I did not +dare to trust to this plan during the three hours of rest that I +allowed myself at night, as the wind might have shifted, in which +case I should have been blown far out of my course ere I +awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to during +those three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails in +such a position as that by acting against each other, they would +keep the ship stationary. After my night’s rest, +therefore, I had only to make allowance for the lee-way she had +made, and so resume my course.</p> + +<p>Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall +should come, but I made the best provision I could in the +circumstances, and concluded that by letting go the +weather-braces of the top-sails and the top-sail halyards at the +same time, I should thereby render these sails almost +powerless. Besides this, I proposed to myself to keep a +sharp look-out on the barometer in the cabin, and if I observed +at any time a sudden fall in it, I resolved that I would +instantly set about my multiform appliances for reducing sail, so +as to avoid being taken at unawares. Thus I sailed +prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I +calculated I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the +thought of which my heart bounded with joyful expectation.</p> + +<p>The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a +volume of Captain Cook’s voyages. This, I suppose, +the pirate captain had brought with him in order to guide him, +and to furnish him with information regarding the islands of +these seas. I found this a most delightful book indeed, and +I not only obtained much interesting knowledge about the sea in +which I was sailing, but I had many of my own opinions, derived +from experience, corroborated; and not a few of them +corrected. Besides the reading of this charming book, and +the daily routine of occupations, nothing of particular note +happened to me during this voyage, except once, when on rising +one night, after my three hours’ nap, while it was yet +dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating +in what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often +noticed the beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but +this far exceeded anything of the sort I ever saw before. +The whole sea appeared somewhat like milk and was remarkably +luminous.</p> + +<p>I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, +brought some of the water on board and took it down to the cabin +to examine it; but no sooner did I approach the light than the +strange appearance disappeared, and when I removed the cabin lamp +the luminous light appeared again. I was much puzzled with +this, and took up a little of the water in the hollow of my hand +and then let it run off, when I found that the luminous substance +was left behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but +when I got there it was gone. I found, however, that when I +went into the dark my hand shone again; so I took the large glass +of the ship’s telescope and examined my hand minutely, when +I found that there were on it one or two small patches of a +clear, transparent substance like jelly, which were so thin as to +be almost invisible to the naked eye. Thus I came to know +that the beautiful phosphoric light, which I had so often admired +before, was caused by animals, for I had no doubt that these were +of the same kind as the medusae or jelly-fish which are seen in +all parts of the world.</p> + +<p>On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a +nap into which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I +gazed around me. I was surprised and delighted to see a +large albatross soaring majestically over the ship. I +immediately took it into my head that this was the albatross I +had seen at Penguin Island. I had, of course, no good +reason for supposing this, but the idea occurred to me, I know +not why, and I cherished it, and regarded the bird with as much +affection as if he had been an old friend. He kept me +company all that day and left me as night fell.</p> + +<p>Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the +helm, for I had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for +day-light, and peered towards the horizon, where I thought I +observed something like a black cloud against the dark sky. +Being always on the alert for squalls, I ran to the bow. +There could be no doubt it was a squall, and as I listened I +thought I heard the murmur of the coming gale. Instantly I +began to work might and main at my cumbrous tackle for shortening +sail, and in the course of an hour and a half had the most of it +reduced,—the top-sail yards down on the caps, the top-sails +clewed up, the sheets hauled in, the main and fore peaks lowered, +and the flying-jib down. While thus engaged the dawn +advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance ahead in the +midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared for +the worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the +bow. I now heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a +single ray of the rising sun gleamed over the ocean I +saw—what! could it be that I was dreaming?—that +magnificent breaker with its ceaseless roar!—that mountain +top!—yes, once more I beheld the Coral Island!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The effect of a cannon-shot—A happy reunion of a +somewhat moist nature—Retrospects and explanations—An +awful dive—New plans—The last of the Coral +Island.</p> + +<p>I almost fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled +emotions that filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my +beautiful island. It was still many miles away, but +sufficiently near to enable me to trace distinctly the +well-remembered outlines of the two mountains. My first +impulse was to utter an exclamation of gratitude for being +carried to my former happy home in safety; my second, to jump up, +clap my hands, shout, and run up and down the deck, with no other +object in view than that of giving vent to my excited +feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, and spent +nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to +get a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again.</p> + +<p>After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now +regretted having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of +hoisting the main-top sail again; but recollecting that it would +take me full half a day to accomplish, and that, at the present +rate of sailing, two hours would bring me to the island, I +immediately dismissed the idea.</p> + +<p>The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish +preparations for arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I +remembered that they were not in the habit of rising before six, +and, as it was now only three, I hoped to arrive before they were +awake. Moreover, I set about making ready to let go the +anchor, resolving in my own mind that, as I knew the depth of +water in the passage of the reef and within the lagoon, I would +run the schooner in and bring up opposite the bower. +Fortunately the anchor was hanging at the cat-head, otherwise I +should never have been able to use it. Now, I had only to +cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own weight. +After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a +thought struck me. I went to the powder magazine, brought +up a blank cartridge and loaded the big brass gun, which, it will +be remembered, was unhoused when we set sail, and, as I had no +means of housing it, there it had stood, bristling alike at fair +weather and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its +mouth well, and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust +the poker into the fire.</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p352b.jpg"> +<img alt="A terrible surprise" src="images/p352s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was +blowing, so that I was now not more than quarter of a mile from +the reef. I was soon at the entrance, and, as the schooner +glided quietly through, I glanced affectionately at the huge +breaker, as if it had been the same one I had seen there when I +bade adieu, as I feared for ever, to the island. On coming +opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm hard down. The +schooner came round with a rapid, graceful bend, and lost way +just opposite the bower. Running forward, I let go the +anchor, caught up the red-hot poker, applied it to the brass gun, +and the mountains with a <i>bang</i>, such as had only once +before broke their slumbering echoes!</p> + +<p>Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to +the bang with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the +bower, in scanty costume, his eye-balls starting from his head +with surprise and terror. One gaze he gave, one yell, and +then fled into the bushes like a wild cat. The next moment +Jack went through exactly the same performance, the only +difference being, that his movements were less like those of +Jack-in-the-box, though not less vigorous and rapid than those of +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” I shouted, almost mad with joy, +“what, ho! Peterkin! Jack! hallo! it’s +me!”</p> + +<p>My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted +and turned round, and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that +they recognised my voice, by both of them running at full speed +towards the beach. I could no longer contain myself. +Throwing off my jacket, I jumped overboard at the same moment +that Jack bounded into the sea. In another moment we met in +deep water, clasped each other round the neck, and sank, as a +matter of course, to the bottom! We were well-nigh choked, +and instantly struggled to the surface, where Peterkin was +spluttering about like a wounded duck, laughing and crying by +turns, and choking himself with salt water!</p> + +<p>It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, +an adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on +the beach, as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in +our dripping garments, and giving utterance to incoherent +rhapsodies, mingled with wild shouts. It can be more easily +imagined than described, so I will draw a curtain over this part +of my history, and carry the reader forward over an interval of +three days.</p> + +<p>During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing +but roast pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, +plums, potatoes, and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack +the terrible and wonderful adventures I had gone through since we +last met. After I had finished the account, they made me go +all over it again; and, when I had concluded the second recital, +I had to go over it again, while they commented upon it +piecemeal. They were much affected by what I told them of +the probable fate of Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook +the idea of the poor girl being converted into a <i>long +pig</i>! As for Jack, he clenched his teeth, and shook his +fist towards the sea, saying at the same time, that he was sorry +he had not broken Tararo’s head, and he only hoped that one +day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the bridge of that +chief’s nose! After they had “pumped me +dry,” as Peterkin said, I begged to be informed of what had +happened to them during my long absence, and particularly as to +how they got out of the Diamond Cave.</p> + +<p>“Well, you must know,” began Jack, “after +you had dived out of the cave, on the day you were taken away +from us, we waited very patiently for half an hour, not expecting +you to return before the end of that time. Then we began to +upbraid you for staying so long, when you knew we would be +anxious; but when an hour passed, we became alarmed, and I +resolved at all hazards to dive out, and see what had become of +you, although I felt for poor Peterkin, because, as he truly +said, ‘If you never come back, I’m shut up here for +life.’ However, I promised not to run any risk, and +he let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of +him!”</p> + +<p>“I should just think it was!” interrupted +Peterkin, looking at Jack over the edge of a monstrous potato +which he happened to be devouring at the time.</p> + +<p>“Well,” continued Jack, “you may guess my +consternation when you did not answer to my halloo. At +first I imagined that the pirates must have killed you, and left +you in the bush, or thrown you into the sea; then it occurred to +me that this would have served no end of theirs, so I came to the +conclusion that they must have carried you away with them. +As this thought struck me, I observed the pirate schooner +standing away to the nor’ard, almost hull-down on the +horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to watch her as she slowly +sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my boy, that I +shed more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I +verify believe, all my life before—”</p> + +<p>“Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting,” said +Peterkin; “surely you must be mistaken in that; +you’ve often told me that, when you were a baby, you used +to howl and roar from morning to—”</p> + +<p>“Hold your tongue, Peterkin,” cried Jack. +“Well, after the schooner had disappeared, I dived back +into the cave, much to Peterkin’s relief, and told him what +I had seen. We sat down and had a long talk over this +matter, and then we agreed to make a regular, systematic search +through the woods, so as to make sure, at least, that you had not +been killed. But now we thought of the difficulty of +getting out of the cave without your help. Peterkin became +dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; and I must confess +that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not hope alone to +take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him in; +and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with +him that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt +water. However, there was no help for it, and I endeavoured +to calm his fears as well as I could: ‘for,’ said I, +‘you can’t live here, Peterkin;’ to which he +replied, ‘Of course not, Jack, I can only die here, and, as +that’s not at all desirable, you had better propose +something.’ So I suggested that he should take a good +long breath, and trust himself to me.</p> + +<p>“‘Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut +cloth, into which I could shove my head, and tie it tight round +my neck?’ he asked, with a haggard smile. ‘It +might let me get one breath under water!’</p> + +<p>“‘No use,’ said I; ‘it would fill in a +moment and suffocate you. I see nothing for it, Peterkin, +if you really can’t keep your breath so long, but to let me +knock you down, and carry you out while in a state of +insensibility.’</p> + +<p>“But Peterkin didn’t relish this idea. He +seemed to fear that I could not be able to measure the exact +force of the blow, and might, on the one hand, hit him so softly +as to render a second or third blow necessary, which would be +very uncomfortable; or, on the other hand, give him such a smash +as would entirely spoil his figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the +life out of him altogether! At last I got him persuaded to +try to hold his breath, and commit himself to me; so he agreed, +and down we went. But I had not got him half way through, +when he began to struggle and kick like a wild bull, burst from +my grasp, and hit against the roof of the tunnel. I was +therefore, obliged to force him violently back into the cave +gain, where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he +had lost his presence of mind, and—”</p> + +<p>“Nothing of the sort,” cried Peterkin, +indignantly, “I had only lost my wind; and if I had not had +presence of mind enough to kick as I did, I should have +bu’st in your arms!”</p> + +<p>“Well, well, so be it,” resumed Jack, with a +smile, “but the upshot of it was, that we had to hold +another consultation on the point, and I really believe that, had +it not been for a happy thought of mine, we should have been +consulting there yet.”</p> + +<p>“I wish we had,” again interrupted Peterkin with a +sigh. “I’m sure, Ralph, if I had thought that +you were coming back again, I would willingly have awaited your +return for months, rather than have endured the mental agony +which I went through! But proceed.”</p> + +<p>“The thought was this,” continued Jack, +“that I should tie Peterkin’s hands and feet with +cords, and then lash him firmly to a stout pole about five feet +long, in order to render him quite powerless, and keep him +straight and stiff. You should have seen his face of +horror, Ralph, when I suggested this: but he came to see that it +was his only chance, and told me to set about it as fast as I +could; ‘for,’ said he, ‘this is no +jokin’, Jack, <i>I</i> can tell you, and the sooner +it’s done the better.’ I soon procured the +cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to the cave, +and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, +to say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English +mummy would be, if there were such things, for he was as white as +a dead man.”</p> + +<p>“‘Now,’ said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, +‘swim with me as near to the edge of the hole as you can +before you dive, then let me take a long breath, and, as I +sha’nt be able to speak after I’ve taken it, +you’ll watch my face, and the moment you see me +wink—dive! And oh!’ he added, earnestly, +‘pray don’t be long!’</p> + +<p>“I promised to pay the strictest attention to his +wishes, and swam with him to the outlet of the cave. Here I +paused. ‘Now then,’ said I, ‘pull away at +the wind, lad.’”</p> + +<p>Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help +thinking of the frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as +big as the ox. Then I looked into his face earnestly. +Slap went the lid of his right eye; down went my head, and up +went my heels. We shot through the passage like an arrow, +and rose to the surface of the open sea before you could count +twenty!</p> + +<p>“Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, +on reaching the free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough +to have been heard a mile off, and then, the change in his +feelings was so sudden and great, that he did not wait till we +landed, but began, tied up as he was, to shout and sing for joy +as I supported him with my left arm to the shore. However, +in the middle of a laugh that a hyaena might have envied, I let +him accidentally slip, which extinguished him in a moment.</p> + +<p>“After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our +search for your dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low +our hearts sank as we set off, day after day, to examine the +valleys and mountain sides with the utmost care. In about +three weeks we completed the survey of the whole island, and had +at least the satisfaction of knowing that you had not been +killed. But it occurred to us that you might have been +thrown into the sea, so we examined the sands and the lagoon +carefully, and afterwards went all round the outer reef. +One day, while we were upon the reef, Peterkin espied a small +dark object lying among the rocks, which seemed to be quite +different from the surrounding stones. We hastened towards +the spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking out +the head we discovered that it was gunpowder.”</p> + +<p>“It was I who sent you that, Jack,” said I, with a +smile.</p> + +<p>“Fork out!” cried Peterkin, energetically, +starting to his feet and extending his open hand to Jack. +“Down with the money, sir, else I’ll have you shut up +for life in a debtor’s prison the moment we return to +England!”</p> + +<p>“I’ll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime,” +returned Jack, laughing, “so sit down and be quiet. +The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered this keg of powder, +Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a thousand pounds that you +had something to do with it, and I took him a bet of ten thousand +that you had not.</p> + +<p>“Peterkin was right then,” said I, explaining how +the thing had occurred.</p> + +<p>“Well, we found it very useful,” continued Jack; +“although some of it had got a little damp; and we +furbished up the old pistol, with which Peterkin is a crack shot +now. But, to continue. We did not find any other +vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up all hope of +ever seeing you again. After this the island became a +dreary place to us, and we began to long for a ship to heave in +sight and take us off. But now that you’re back +again, my dear fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful as it used +to do, and I love it as much as ever.”</p> + +<p>“And now,” continued Jack, “I have a great +desire to visit some of the other islands of the South +Seas. Here we have a first-rate schooner at our disposal, +so I don’t see what should hinder us.”</p> + +<p>“Just the very thing I was going to propose,” +cried Peterkin; “I vote for starting at once.”</p> + +<p>“Well, then,” said Jack, “it seems to me +that we could not do better than shape our course for the island +on which Avatea lives, and endeavour to persuade Tararo to let +her marry the black fellow to whom she is engaged, instead of +making a long pig of her. If he has a spark of gratitude in +him he’ll do it. Besides, having become champions for +this girl once before, it behoves us, as true knights, not to +rest until we set her free; at least, all the heroes in all the +story-books I have ever read would count it foul disgrace to +leave such a work unfinished.”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I don’t know, or care, what your +knights in story-books would do,” said Peterkin, “but +I’m certain that it would be capital fun, so I’m your +man whenever you want me.”</p> + +<p>This plan of Jack’s was quite in accordance with his +romantic, impulsive nature; and, having made up his mind to save +this black girl, he could not rest until the thing was +commenced.</p> + +<p>“But there may be great danger in this attempt,” +he said, at the end of a long consultation on the subject; +“will you, lads, go with me in spite of this?”</p> + +<p>“Go with you?” we repeated in the same breath.</p> + +<p>“Can you doubt it?” said I.</p> + +<p>“For a moment,” added Peterkin.</p> + +<p>I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on +this enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit +the island; and as the schooner was well laden with stores of +every kind for a long cruise, we had little to do except to add +to our abundant supply a quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, +taro, yams, plums, and potatoes, chiefly with the view of +carrying the fragrance of our dear island along with us as long +as we could.</p> + +<p>When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different +familiar spots where most of our time had been spent. We +ascended the mountain top, and gazed for the last time at the +rich green foliage in the valleys, the white sandy beach, the +placid lagoon, and the barrier coral-reef with its crested +breakers. Then we descended to Spouting Cliff, and looked +down at the pale-green monster which we had made such fruitless +efforts to spear in days gone by. From this we hurried to +the Water Garden and took a last dive into its clear waters, and +a last gambol amongst its coral groves. I hurried out +before my companions, and dressed in haste, in order to have a +long examination of my tank, which Peterkin, in the fulness of +his heart, had tended with the utmost care, as being a vivid +remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition;—the water as +clear and pellucid as crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the +most brilliant hues; the red, purple, yellow, green, and striped +anemones fully expanded, and stretching out their arms as if to +welcome and embrace their former master; the starfish, zoophytes, +sea-pens, and other innumerable marine insects, looking fresh and +beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, looking as wide +awake, impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It was +indeed so lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow +myself to be torn away from it.</p> + +<p>Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few +articles we possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the +broken telescope, the pen-knife, the hook made from the brass +ring, and the sail-needle, with which we had landed on the +island;—also, the long boots and the pistol, besides +several curious articles of costume which we had manufactured +from time to time.</p> + +<p>These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having +carved our names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:—</p> + +<p class="letter"> +JACK MARTIN,<br /> +RALPH ROVER,<br /> +PETERKIN GAY, +</p> + +<p class="noindent"> +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then +hoisted on board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation +cost us great labour and much time, as the anchor was so heavy +that we could not move it without the aid of my complex machinery +of blocks and pulleys. A steady breeze was blowing off +shore when we set sail, at a little before sunset. It swept +us quickly past the reef and out to sea. The shore grew +rapidly more indistinct as the shades of evening fell, while our +clipper bark bounded lightly over the waves. Slowly the +mountain top sank on the horizon, until it became a mere +speck. In another moment the sun and the Coral Island sank +together into the broad bosom of the Pacific.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The voyage—The island, and a consultation in which +danger is scouted as a thing unworthy of consideration—Rats +and cats—The native teacher—Awful +revelations—Wonderful effects of Christianity.</p> + +<p>Our voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and +prosperous. The breeze continued generally fair, and at all +times enabled us to lie our course; for being, as I have said +before, clipper-built, the pirate schooner could lie very close +to the wind, and made little lee-way. We had no difficulty +now in managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and powerful, while +Peterkin was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were a +very insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had +proposed to us to make such a voyage in it before we had been +forced to go through so many hardships from necessity, we would +have turned away with pity from the individual making such +proposal as from a madman. I pondered this a good deal, and +at last concluded that men do not know how much they are capable +of doing till they try, and that we should never give way to +despair in any undertaking, however difficult it may +seem:—always supposing, however, that our cause is a good +one, and that we can ask the divine blessing on it.</p> + +<p>Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in +some things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth +arrangement of ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor’s +eye, a very lumbering and clumsy appearance. But I will not +drag my reader through the details of this voyage. Suffice +it to say, that, after an agreeable sail of about three weeks, we +arrived off the island of Mango, which I recognised at once from +the description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it during +one of our conversations.</p> + +<p>As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and +held a council of war.</p> + +<p>“Now, boys,” said Jack, as we seated ourselves +beside him on the cabin sky-light, “before we go farther in +this business, we must go over the pros and cons of it; for, +although you have so generously consented to stick by me through +thick and thin, it would be unfair did I not see that you +thoroughly understand the danger of what we are about to +attempt.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! bother the danger,” cried Peterkin; “I +wonder to hear <i>you</i>, Jack, talk of danger. When a +fellow begins to talk about it, he’ll soon come to magnify +it to such a degree that he’ll not be fit to face it when +it comes, no more than a suckin’ baby!”</p> + +<p>“Nay, Peterkin,” replied Jack, gravely, “I +won’t be jested out of it. I grant you, that, when +we’ve once resolved to act, and have made up our minds what +to do, we should think no more of danger. But, before we +have so resolved, it behoves us to look at it straight in the +face, and examine into it, and walk round it; for if we flinch at +a distant view, we’re sure to run away when the danger is +near. Now, I understand from you, Ralph, that the island is +inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out cannibals, whose +principal law is—‘Might is right, and the weakest +goes to the wall?’”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said I, “so Bill gave me to +understand. He told me, however, that, at the southern side +of it, the missionaries had obtained a footing amongst an +insignificant tribe. A native teacher had been sent there +by the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in persuading the chief at +that part to embrace Christianity. But instead of that +being of any advantage to our enterprise, it seems the very +reverse; for the chief Tararo is a determined heathen, and +persecutes the Christians,—who are far too weak in numbers +to offer any resistance,—and looks with dislike upon all +white men, whom he regards as propagators of the new +faith.”</p> + +<p>“’Tis a pity,” said Jack, “that the +Christian tribe is so small, for we shall scarcely be safe under +their protection, I fear. If Tararo takes it into his head +to wish for our vessel, or to kill ourselves, he could take us +from them by force. You say that the native missionary +talks English?”</p> + +<p>“So I believe.”</p> + +<p>“Then, what I propose is this,” said Jack: +“We will run round to the south side of the island, and cut +anchor off the Christian village. We are too far away just +now to have been descried by any of the savages, so we shall get +there unobserved, and have time to arrange our plans before the +heathen tribes know of our presence. But, in doing this, we +run the risk of being captured by the ill-disposed tribes, and +being very ill used, if not—a—”</p> + +<p>“Roasted alive and eaten,” cried Peterkin. +“Come, out with it, Jack; according to your own showing, +it’s well to look the danger straight in the +face!”</p> + +<p>“Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you +prepared, then, to take your chance of that?”</p> + +<p>“I’ve been prepared and had my mind made up long +ago,” cried Peterkin, swaggering about the deck with his +hands thrust into his breeches’ pockets. “The +fact is, Jack, I don’t believe that Tararo will be so +ungrateful as to eat us; and I’m quite sure that +he’ll be too happy to grant us whatever we ask: so the +sooner we go in and win the better.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage +gratitude, as the sequel will show.</p> + +<p>The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a +long run to the south’ard, we put about and beat up for the +south side of Mango, where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to +off the coral reef. Here we awaited the arrival of a canoe, +which immediately put off on our rounding to. When it +arrived, a mild-looking native, of apparently forty years of age, +came on board, and, taking off his straw hat, made us a low +bow. He was clad in a respectable suit of European clothes; +and the first words he uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and +shook hands with him, were,—</p> + +<p>“Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at +Mango—you are heartily welcome.”</p> + +<p>After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, “You +must be the native missionary teacher of whom I have +heard—are you not?”</p> + +<p>“I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord +Jesus at this station.”</p> + +<p>“You’re the very man I want to see, then,” +replied Jack; “that’s lucky. Come down to the +cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. I wish +particularly to speak with you. My men there” +(pointing to Peterkin and me) “will look after your +people.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you,” said the teacher, as he followed Jack +to the cabin, “I do not drink wine or any strong +drink.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! then, there’s lots of water, and you can have +biscuit.”</p> + +<p>“Now, ’pon my word, that’s cool!” said +Peterkin; “his <i>men</i>, forsooth! Well, since we +are to be men, we may as well come it as strong over these black +chaps as we can. Hallo, there!” he cried to the half +dozen of natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in wonder at all +they saw, “here’s for you;” and he handed them +a tray of broken biscuit and a can of water. Then, +thrusting his hands into his pockets, he walked up and down the +deck with an enormous swagger, whistling vociferously.</p> + +<p>In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and +the latter, bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe +and paddled to the shore. When he was gone, Peterkin +stepped up to Jack, and, touching his cap, said,—</p> + +<p>“Well, captain, have you any communications to make to +your <i>men</i>?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” cried Jack; “ready about, mind the +helm and clew up your tongue, while I con the schooner through +the passage in the reef. The teacher, who seems a +first-rate fellow, says it’s quite deep, and good anchorage +within the lagoon close to the shore.”</p> + +<p>While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under +a light breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the +island, living amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a +strong desire to join the Christians, but Tararo would not let +her, and kept her constantly in close confinement.</p> + +<p>“Moreover,” continued Jack, “I find that she +belongs to one of the Samoan Islands, where Christianity had been +introduced long before her capture by the heathens of a +neighbouring island; and the very day after she was taken, she +was to have joined the church which had been planted there by +that excellent body, the London Missionary Society. The +teacher tells me, too, that the poor girl has fallen in love with +a Christian chief, who lives on an island some fifty miles or so +to the south of this one, and that she is meditating a desperate +attempt at escape. So, you see, we have come in the nick of +time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow whom you heard +of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, the +heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there’s to +be a battle fought the day after to-morrow, in which the +principal leader is Tararo; so that we’ll not be able to +commence our negotiations with the rascally chief till the day +after.”</p> + +<p>The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at +the head of a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every +description peculiar to the tropics rose in the richest +luxuriance to the summit of a hilly ridge, which was the line of +demarcation between the possessions of the Christians and those +of the neighbouring heathen chief.</p> + +<p>The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, +stretching in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. +The cottages stood several hundred yards from the beach, and were +protected from the glare of the sea by the rich foliage of rows +of large Barringtonia and other trees, which girt the +shore. The village was about a mile in length, and +perfectly straight, with a wide road down the middle, on either +side of which were rows of the tufted-topped ti tree, whose +delicate and beautiful blossoms, hanging beneath their +plume-crested tops, added richness to the scene. The +cottages of the natives were built beneath these trees, and were +kept in the most excellent order, each having a little garden in +front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks were +covered with black and white pebbles.</p> + +<p>Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly +with lamp black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red +ochre, which contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime +that covered the walls. On a prominent position stood a +handsome church, which was quite a curiosity in its way. It +was a hundred feet long by fifty broad, and was seated throughout +to accommodate upwards of two thousand persons. It had six +large folding doors and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, +although a large and substantial edifice, it had been built, we +were told by the teacher, in the space of two months! There +was not a single iron nail in the fabric, and the natives had +constructed it chiefly with their stone and bone axes and other +tools, having only one or two axes or tools of European +manufacture. Everything around this beautiful spot wore an +aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we dropped our anchor within +a stone’s cast of the substantial coral wharf, I could not +avoid contrasting it with the wretched village of Emo, where I +had witnessed so many frightful scenes. When the teacher +afterwards told me that the people of this tribe had become +converts only a year previous to our arrival, and that they had +been living before that in the practice of the most bloody system +of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, “What a +convincing proof that Christianity is of God!”</p> + +<p>On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm +welcome by the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a +native, clothed in a simple European gown and straw bonnet. +The shore was lined with hundreds of natives, whose persons were +all more or less clothed with native cloth. Some of the men +had on a kind of poncho formed of this cloth, their legs being +uncovered. Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and no +upper garment except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of +the dresses, both of women and men, were grotesque enough, being +very bad imitations of the European garb; but all wore a dress of +some sort or other. They seemed very glad to see us, and +crowded round us as the teacher led the way to his dwelling, +where we were entertained, in the most sumptuous manner, on baked +pig and all the varieties of fruits and vegetables that the +island produced. We were much annoyed, however, by the +rats: they seemed to run about the house like domestic +animals. As we sat at table, one of them peeped up at us +over the edge of the cloth, close to Peterkin’s elbow, who +floored it with a blow on the snout from his knife, exclaiming as +he did so—</p> + +<p>“I say, Mister Teacher, why don’t you set traps +for these brutes?—surely you are not fond of +them!”</p> + +<p>“No,” replied the teacher, with a smile; “we +would be glad to get rid of them if we could; but if we were to +trap all the rats on the island, it would occupy our whole +time.”</p> + +<p>“Are they, then, so numerous?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the +north side eat them, and think them very sweet. So did my +people formerly; but they do not eat so many now, because the +missionary who was last here expressed disgust at it. The +poor people asked if it was wrong to eat rats; and he told them +that it was certainly not wrong, but that the people of England +would be much disgusted were they asked to eat rats.”</p> + +<p>We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man +when we were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their +numbers, for the rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during +our meal, two men were stationed at the table to keep them +off!</p> + +<p>“What a pity you have no cats,” said Peterkin, as +he aimed a blow at another reckless intruder, and missed it.</p> + +<p>“We would, indeed, be glad to have a few,” +rejoined the teacher, “but they are difficult to be +got. The hogs, we find, are very good rat-killers, but they +do not seem to be able to keep the numbers down. I have +heard that they are better than cats.”</p> + +<p>As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was +wrinkled with a smile of merriment. Observing that I had +noticed it, he said:—</p> + +<p>“I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the +first cat that was taken to Raratonga. This is one of the +stations of the London Missionary Society. It, like our +own, is infested with rats, and a cat was brought at last to the +island. It was a large black one. On being turned +loose, instead of being content to stay among men, the cat took +to the mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes paying +visits during the night to the houses of the natives; some of +whom, living at a distance from the settlement, had not heard of +the cat’s arrival, and were dreadfully frightened in +consequence, calling it a ‘monster of the deep,’ and +flying in terror away from it. One night the cat, feeling a +desire for company, I suppose, took its way to the house of a +chief, who had recently been converted to Christianity, and had +begun to learn to read and pray. The chief’s wife, +who was sitting awake at his side while he slept, beheld with +horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard with +surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, +she awoke her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his +old religion, and burning his god, who, she declared, was now +come to be avenged of them. ‘Get up and pray! get up +and pray!’ she cried. The chief arose, and, on +opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring lights, and heard the +same ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme urgency of the +case, he commenced, with all possible vehemence, to vociferate +the alphabet, as a prayer to God to deliver them from the +vengeance of Satan! On hearing this, the cat, as much +alarmed as themselves, fled precipitately away, leaving the chief +and his wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy of their +prayer.”</p> + +<p>We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher +related in English so good, that we certainly could not have +supposed him a native but for the colour of his face and the +foreign accent in his tone. Next day we walked out with +this interesting man, and were much entertained and instructed by +his conversation, as we rambled through the cool shady groves of +bananas, citrons, limes, and other trees, or sauntered among the +cottages of the natives, and watched them while they laboured +diligently in the taro beds, or manufactured the tapa or native +cloth. To some of these Jack put questions through the +medium of the missionary; and the replies were such as to +surprise us at the extent of their knowledge. Indeed, +Peterkin very truly remarked that “they seemed to know a +considerable deal more than Jack himself!”</p> + +<p>Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained +was the following, in regard to coral formations:—</p> + +<p>“The islands of the Pacific,” said our friend, +“are of three different kinds or classes. Those of +the first class are volcanic, mountainous, and wild; some +shooting their jagged peaks into the clouds at an elevation of +ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of the second class +are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height from one hundred +to five hundred feet. The hills on these are not so wild or +broken as those of the first class, but are richly clothed with +vegetation, and very beautiful. I have no doubt that the +Coral Island on which you were wrecked was one of this +class. They are supposed to have been upheaved from the +bottom of the sea by volcanic agency, but they are not themselves +volcanic in their nature, neither are they of coral +formation. Those of the third class are the low coralline +islands usually having lagoons of water in their midst; they are +very numerous.</p> + +<p>“As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are +formed; there are various opinions on this point. I will +give you what seems to me the most probable theory,—a +theory, I may add, which is held by some of the good and +scientific missionaries. It is well known that there is +much lime in salt water; it is also known that coral is composed +of lime. It is supposed that the polypes, or coral insects, +have the power of attracting this lime to their bodies; and with +this material they build their little cells or habitations. +They choose the summit of a volcano, or the top of a submarine +mountain, as a foundation on which to build; for it is found that +they never work at any great depth below the surface. On +this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, reach +the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the top +sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus forming +the coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the central +island; after that the insects within the lagoon cease +working. When the surface of the water is reached, these +myriads of wonderful creatures die. Then birds visit the +spot, and seeds are thus conveyed thither, which take root, and +spring up, and flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline +islets of which you have seen so many in these seas. The +reefs round the large islands are formed in a similar +manner. When we consider,” added the missionary, +“the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we +are filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient +king to exclaim, ‘How manifold, O God, are thy works! in +wisdom thou hast made them all.’”</p> + +<p>We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, +and felt not a little gratified to find that the opinions which +Jack and I had been led to form from personal observation on our +Coral Island were thus to a great extent corroborated.</p> + +<p>The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: +“When missionaries were first sent here, three years ago, a +small vessel brought them; and the chief, who is now dead, +promised to treat well the two native teachers who were left with +their wives on the island. But scarcely had the boat which +landed them returned to the ship, than the natives began to +maltreat their guests, taking away all they possessed, and +offering them further violence, so that, when the boat was sent +in haste to fetch them away, the clothes of both men and women +were torn nearly off their backs.</p> + +<p>“Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and +I, being in her, volunteered to land alone, without any goods +whatever; begging that my wife might be brought to me the +following year,—that is, <i>this</i> year; and, as you see, +she is with me. But the surf was so high that the boat +could not land me; so with nothing on but my trousers and shirt, +and with a few catechisms and a Bible, besides some portions of +the Scripture translated into the Mango tongue, I sprang into the +sea, and swam ashore on the crest of a breaker. I was +instantly dragged up the beach by the natives; who, on finding I +had nothing worth having upon me, let me alone. I then made +signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which they +did. At first the natives listened to me in silence, but +laughed at what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed +Saviour Jesus Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me +ill sometimes; but I persevered, and continued to dwell among +them, and dispute, and exhort them to give up their sinful ways +of life, burn their idols, and come to Jesus.</p> + +<p>“About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief +was dead. He was the father of the present chief, who is +now a most consistent member of the church. It is a custom +here that, when a chief dies, his wives are strangled and buried +with him. Knowing this, I hastened to his house to +endeavour to prevent such cruelty if possible. When I +arrived, I found two of the wives had already been killed, while +another was in the act of being strangled. I pleaded hard +for her, but it was too late; she was already dead. I then +entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, after much +hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she +termed it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which +was accordingly done.</p> + +<p>“All this time the chief’s son was walking up and +down before his father’s house with a brow black as +thunder. When he entered, I went in with him, and found, to +my surprise, that his father was not dead! The old man was +sitting on a mat in a corner, with an expression of placid +resignation on his face.</p> + +<p>“‘Why,’ said I, ‘have you strangled +your father’s wives before he is dead?’</p> + +<p>“To this the son replied, ‘He is dead. That +is no longer my father. He is as good as dead now. He +is to be <i>buried alive</i>.’</p> + +<p>“I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among +the Feejee islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or +infirm, the heir to the chieftainship has a right to depose his +father; in which case he is considered as dead, and is buried +alive. The young chief was now about to follow this custom, +and, despite my earnest entreaties and pleadings, the old chief +was buried that day before my eyes in the same grave with his +four strangled wives! Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, +and I prayed to God to open the hearts of these poor creatures, +as he had already opened mine, and pour into them the light and +the love of the gospel of Jesus. My prayer was answered +very soon. A week afterwards, the son, who was now chief of +the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on his shoulders, and +groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my feet, +he desired me to burn it!</p> + +<p>“You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I +sprang up and embraced him, while I shed tears of joy. Then +we made a fire, and burned the god to ashes, amid an immense +concourse of the people, who seemed terrified at what was being +done, and shrank back when we burned the god, expecting some +signal vengeance to be taken upon us; but seeing that nothing +happened, they changed their minds, and thought that our God must +be the true one after all. From that time the mission +prospered steadily, and now, while there is not a single man in +the tribe who has not burned his household gods, and become a +convert to Christianity, there are not a few, I hope, who are +true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as brands from +the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will +not tell you more of our progress at this time, but you +see,” he said, waving his hand around him, “the +village and the church did not exist a year ago!”</p> + +<p>We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could +not help again in my heart praying God to prosper those +missionary societies that send such inestimable blessings to +these islands of dark and bloody idolatry. The teacher also +added that the other tribes were very indignant at this one for +having burned its gods, and threatened to destroy it altogether, +but they had done nothing yet; “and if they should,” +said the teacher, “the Lord is on our side; of whom shall +we be afraid?”</p> + +<p>“Have the missionaries many stations in these +seas?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a +great many in the Tahiti group, and other islands in that +quarter. Then the Wesleyans have the Feejee Islands all to +themselves, and the Americans have many stations in other +groups. But still, my friend, there are hundreds of islands +here the natives of which have never heard of Jesus, or the good +word of God, or the Holy Spirit; and thousands are living and +dying in the practice of those terrible sins and bloody murders +of which you have already heard. I trust, my +friends,” he added, looking earnestly into our faces, +“I trust that if you ever return to England, you will tell +your Christian friends that the horrors which they hear of in +regard to these islands are <i>literally true</i>, and that when +they have heard the worst, the ‘<i>half has not been told +them</i>;’ for there are perpetrated here foul deeds of +darkness of which man may not speak. You may also tell +them,” he said, looking around with a smile, while a tear +of gratitude trembled in his eye and rolled down his coal-black +cheek,—“tell them of the blessings that the gospel +has wrought <i>here</i>!”</p> + +<p>We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his +request. On returning towards the village, about noon, we +remarked on the beautiful whiteness of the cottages.</p> + +<p>“That is owing to the lime with which they are +plastered,” said the teacher. “When the natives +were converted, as I have described, I set them to work to build +cottages for themselves, and also this handsome church which you +see. When the framework and other parts of the houses were +up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the sea. They +brought immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, and, +piling the coral above it, set it on fire.</p> + +<p>“‘Look! look!’ cried the poor people, in +amazement; ‘what wonderful people the Christians are! +He is roasting stones. We shall not need taro or +bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!’</p> + +<p>“But their surprise was still greater when the coral was +reduced to a fine soft white powder. They immediately set +up a great shout, and, mingling the lime with water, rubbed their +faces and their bodies all over with it, and ran through the +village screaming with delight. They were also much +surprised at another thing they saw me do. I wished to make +some household furniture, and constructed a turning-lathe to +assist me. The first thing that I turned was the leg of a +sofa; which was no sooner finished than the chief seized it with +wonder and delight, and ran through the village exhibiting it to +the people, who looked upon it with great admiration. The +chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round his neck as an +ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen it +before he became a Christian he would have made it his +god!”</p> + +<p>As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his +door. Saying that he had business to attend to, he left us +to amuse ourselves as we best could.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, turning abruptly towards +us, and buttoning up his jacket as he spoke, “I’m off +to see the battle. I’ve no particular fondness for +seein’ blood-shed, but I must find out the nature o’ +these fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so that I +may be able to speak of it again, if need be, +authoritatively. It’s only six miles off, and we +don’t run much more risk than that of getting a rap with a +stray stone or an over-shot arrow. Will you go?”</p> + +<p>“To be sure we will,” said Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“If they chance to see us we’ll cut and run for +it,” added Jack.</p> + +<p>“Dear me!” cried Peterkin,—“<i>you</i> +run! thought you would scorn to run from any one.”</p> + +<p>“So I would, if it were my duty to fight,” +returned Jack, coolly; “but as I don’t want to fight, +and don’t intend to fight, if they offer to attack us +I’ll run away like the veriest coward that ever went by the +name of Peterkin. So come along.”</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A strange and bloody battle—The lion bearded in his +den—Frightful scenes of cruelty, and fears for the +future.</p> + +<p>We had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot +on which the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two +hours reached it. The summit of a bare hill was the place +chosen; for, unlike most of the other islanders, who are addicted +to bush-fighting, those of Mango are in the habit of meeting on +open ground. We arrived before the two parties had +commenced the deadly struggle, and, creeping as close up as we +dared among the rocks, we lay and watched them.</p> + +<p>The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in +rank four deep. Those in the first row were armed with long +spears; the second, with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third +row was composed of young men with slings; and the fourth +consisted of women, who carried baskets of stones for the +slingers, and clubs and spears with which to supply the +warriors. Soon after we arrived, the attack was made with +great fury. There was no science displayed. The two +bodies of savages rushed headlong upon each other and engaged in +a general <i>melee</i>, and a more dreadful set of men I have +never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made of various +substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as +possible; and as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, +shouted, yelled, and dashed each other to the ground, I thought I +had never seen men look so like demons before.</p> + +<p>We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed +to be perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands +in order to defend them. One stout young women we saw, +whose husband was hard pressed and about to be overcome: she +lifted a large stone, and throwing it at his opponent’s +head, felled him to the earth. But the battle did not last +long. The band most distant from us gave way and were +routed, leaving eighteen of their comrades dead upon the +field. These the victors brained as they lay; and putting +some of their brains on leaves went off with them, we were +afterwards informed, to their temples, to present them to their +gods as an earnest of the human victims who were soon to be +brought there.</p> + +<p>We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the +deepest sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just +witnessed.</p> + +<p>Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we +made preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the +teacher endeavoured to dissuade us.</p> + +<p>“You do not know,” said he, turning to Jack, +“the danger you run in venturing amongst these ferocious +savages. I feel much pity for poor Avatea; but you are not +likely to succeed in saving her, and you may die in the +attempt.”</p> + +<p>“Well,” said Jack, quietly, “I am not afraid +to die in a good cause.”</p> + +<p>The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and +after a little further conversation agreed to accompany us as +interpreter; saying that, although Tararo was unfriendly to him, +he had hitherto treated him with respect.</p> + +<p>We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail +round the island and drop anchor opposite the heathen +village. We manned her with natives, and hoped to overawe +the savages by displaying our brass gun to advantage. The +teacher soon after came on board, and setting our sails we put to +sea. In two hours more we made the cliffs reverberate with +the crash of the big gun, which we fired by way of salute, while +we ran the British ensign up to the peak and cast anchor. +The commotion on shore showed us that we had struck terror into +the hearts of the natives; but seeing that we did not offer to +molest them, a canoe at length put off and paddled cautiously +towards us. The teacher showed himself, and explaining that +we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, desired the +native to go and tell him to come on board.</p> + +<p>We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. +During this time the native teacher conversed with us again, and +told us many things concerning the success of the gospel among +those islands; and perceiving that we were by no means so much +gratified as we ought to have been at the hearing of such good +news, he pressed us more closely in regard to our personal +interest in religion, and exhorted us to consider that our souls +were certainly in as great danger as those of the wretched +heathen whom we pitied so much, if we had not already found +salvation in Jesus Christ. “Nay, further,” he +added, “if such be your unhappy case, you are, in the sight +of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my young +friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, +and do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have +been brought up in the light of the blessed gospel and call +yourselves Christians. These poor savages are indeed the +enemies of our Lord; but you, if ye be not true believers, are +traitors!”</p> + +<p>I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher +spoke in this earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. +Peterkin, too, did not seem to like it, and I thought would +willingly have escaped; but Jack seemed deeply impressed, and +wore an anxious expression on his naturally grave countenance, +while he assented to the teacher’s remarks and put to him +many earnest questions. Meanwhile the natives who composed +our crew, having nothing particular to do, had squatted down on +the deck and taken out their little books containing the +translated portions of the New Testament, along with hymns and +spelling-books, and were now busily engaged, some vociferating +the alphabet, others learning prayers off by heart, while a few +sang hymns,—all of them being utterly unmindful of our +presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon afterwards +they all engaged in a prayer which was afterwards translated to +us, and proved to be a petition for the success of our +undertaking and for the conversion of the heathen.</p> + +<p>While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and +several savages leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the +teacher and informed him that Tararo could not come on board that +day, being busy with some religious ceremonies before the gods, +which could on no account be postponed. He was also engaged +with a friendly chief who was about to take his departure from +the island, and therefore begged that the teacher and his friends +would land and pay a visit to him. To this the teacher +returned answer that we would land immediately.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, as we were about to step +into our little boat, “I’m not going to take any +weapons with me, and I recommend you to take none either. +We are altogether in the power of these savages, and the utmost +we could do, if they were to attack us, would be to kill a few of +them before we were ourselves overpowered. I think that our +only chance of success lies in mild measures. Don’t +you think so?”</p> + +<p>To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down +a huge bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair +of enormous horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe +the natives! We then jumped into our boat and rowed +ashore.</p> + +<p>On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked +savages, who shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house +or shed where a baked pig and a variety of vegetables were +prepared for us. Having partaken of these, the teacher +begged to be conducted to the chief; but there seemed some +hesitation, and after some consultation among themselves, one of +the men stood forward and spoke to the teacher.</p> + +<p>“What says he?” inquired Jack when the savage had +concluded.</p> + +<p>“He says that the chief is just going to the temple of +his god and cannot see us yet; so we must be patient, my +friend.”</p> + +<p>“Well,” cried Jack, rising; “if he +won’t come to see me, I’ll e’en go and see +him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their +proceedings at this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, +friend?”</p> + +<p>“I cannot,” said the teacher, shaking his head; +“I must not go to the heathen temples and witness their +inhuman rites, except for the purpose of condemning their +wickedness and folly.”</p> + +<p>“Very good,” returned Jack; “then I’ll +go alone, for I cannot condemn their doings till I have seen +them.”</p> + +<p>Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him +through the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind +the village, on the top of which stood the Buré, or +temple, under the dark shade of a group of iron-wood trees. +As we went through the village, I was again led to contrast the +rude huts and sheds, and their almost naked savage-looking +inhabitants, with the natives of the Christian village, who, to +use the teacher’s scriptural expression, were now +“clothed and in their right mind.”</p> + +<p>As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we +were arrested by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the +rear. Drawing aside into the bushes we awaited their coming +up, and as they drew near we observed that it was a procession of +the natives, many of whom were dancing and gesticulating in the +most frantic manner. They had an exceedingly hideous +aspect, owing to the black, red, and yellow paints with which +their faces and naked bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of +these came a band of men carrying three or four planks, on which +were seated in rows upwards of a dozen men. I shuddered +involuntarily as I recollected the sacrifice of human victims at +the island of Emo, and turned with a look of fear to Jack as I +said,—</p> + +<p>“Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are +going to commit some of their cruel practices on these wretched +men. We had better not go to the temple. We shall +only be horrified without being able to do any good, for I fear +they are going to kill them.”</p> + +<p>Jack’s face wore an expression of deep compassion as he +said, in a low voice, “No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of +these poor fellows are over long ago.”</p> + +<p>I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, +who were now quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they +were all dead. They were tied firmly with ropes in a +sitting posture on the planks, and seemed, as they bent their +sightless eye-balls and grinning mouths over the dancing crew +below, as if they were laughing in ghastly mockery at the utter +inability of their enemies to hurt them now. These, we +discovered afterwards, were the men who had been slain in the +battle of the previous day, and were now on their way to be first +presented to the gods, and then eaten. Behind these came +two men leading between them a third, whose hands were pinioned +behind his back. He walked with a firm step, and wore a +look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him along; so +that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to receive +some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and +children, with whom we mingled and followed to the temple.</p> + +<p>Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall +circular building, open at one side. Around it were strewn +heaps of human bones and skulls. At a table inside sat the +priest, an elderly man, with a long gray beard. He was +seated on a stool, and before him lay several knives, made of +wood, bone, and splinters of bamboo, with which he performed his +office of dissecting dead bodies. Farther in lay a variety +of articles that had been dedicated to the god, and among them +were many spears and clubs. I observed among the latter +some with human teeth sticking in them, where the victims had +been clubbed in their mouths.</p> + +<p>Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with +vermilion and soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a +man, called a “dan-vosa” (orator), advanced, and, +laying his hands on their heads, began to chide them, apparently, +in a low bantering tone. What he said we knew not, but, as +he went on, he waxed warm, and at last shouted to them at the top +of his lungs, and finally finished by kicking the bodies over and +running away, amid the shouts and laughter of the people, who now +rushed forward. Seizing the bodies by a leg, or an arm, or +by the hair of the head, they dragged them over stumps and stones +and through sloughs, until they were exhausted. The bodies +were then brought back to the temple and dissected by the priest, +after which they were taken out to be baked.</p> + +<p>Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones +were heated red hot. When ready these were spread out on +the ground, and a thick coating of leaves strewn over them to +slack the heat. On this “lovo,” or oven, the +bodies were then placed, covered over, and left to bake.</p> + +<p>The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring +hill or mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house +lying ready to be erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated +by curiosity, we staggered after them mechanically, scarce +knowing where we were going or what we did, and feeling a sort of +impression that all we saw was a dreadful dream.</p> + +<p>Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a +certain spot. We pressed forward and obtained a sight of +what they were doing. A large wooden beam or post lay on +the ground, beside the other parts of the frame-work of the +house, and close to the end of it was a hole about seven feet +deep and upwards of two feet wide. While we looked, the man +whom we had before observed with his hands pinioned, was carried +into the circle. His hands were now free, but his legs were +tightly strapped together. The post of the house was then +placed in the hole, and the man put in beside it. His head +was a good way below the surface of the hole, and his arms were +clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until all +was covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards +told, was a <i>ceremony</i> usually performed at the dedication +of a new temple, or the erection of a chief’s house!</p> + +<p>“Come, come,” cried Jack, on beholding this +horrible tragedy, “we have seen enough, enough, far more +than enough! Let us go.”</p> + +<p>Jack’s face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we +hurried back to rejoin the teacher, and I have no doubt that he +felt terrible anxiety when he considered the number and ferocity +of the savages, and the weakness of the few arms which were ready +indeed to essay, but impotent to effect, Avatea’s +deliverance from these ruthless men.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with +its consequences—Plans of escape, and heroic resolves.</p> + +<p>When we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what +had passed, he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but +we had not sat long in conversation, when we were interrupted by +the arrival of Tararo on the beach, accompanied by a number of +followers bearing baskets of vegetables and fruits on their +heads.</p> + +<p>We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our +interpreter, much pleasure in seeing us.</p> + +<p>“And what is it that my friends wish to say to +me?” he inquired.</p> + +<p>The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be +spared.</p> + +<p>“Tell him,” said Jack, “that I consider that +I have a right to ask this of him, having not only saved the +girl’s life, but the lives of his own people also; and say +that I wish her to be allowed to follow her own wishes, and join +the Christians.”</p> + +<p>While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and +we could see plainly that our request met with no favourable +reception. He replied with considerable energy, and at some +length.</p> + +<p>“What says he?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“I regret to say that he will not listen to the +proposal. He says he has pledged his word to his friend +that the girl shall be sent to him, and a deputy is even now on +this island awaiting the fulfilment of the pledge.”</p> + +<p>Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. “Tell +Tararo,” he exclaimed with flashing eye, “that if he +does not grant my demand, it will be worse for him. Say I +have a big gun on board my schooner that will blow his village +into the sea, if he does not give up the girl.”</p> + +<p>“Nay, my friend,” said the teacher, gently, +“I will not tell him that; we must overcome evil with +good.’”</p> + +<p>“What does my friend say?” inquired the chief, who +seemed nettled by Jack’s looks of defiance.</p> + +<p>“He is displeased,” replied the teacher.</p> + +<p>Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked +towards the men who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who +had now emptied the whole on the beach in an enormous pile.</p> + +<p>“What are they doing there?” I inquired.</p> + +<p>“I think that they are laying out a gift which they +intend to present to some one,” said the teacher.</p> + +<p>At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl +between them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and +vegetables, placed her on the top of it. We started with +surprise and fear, for in the young female before us we +recognised the Samoan girl, Avatea!</p> + +<p>We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming +fears.</p> + +<p>“Oh! my dear young friend,” whispered the teacher, +in a voice of deep emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, +“she is to be made a sacrifice even now!”</p> + +<p>“Is she?” cried Jack, with a vehement shout, +spurning the teacher aside, and dashing over two natives who +stood in his way, while he rushed towards the heap, sprang up its +side, and seized Avatea by the arm. In another moment he +dragged her down, placed her back to a large tree, and, wrenching +a war-club from the hand of a native who seemed powerless and +petrified with surprise, whirled it above his head, and yelled, +rather than shouted, while his face blazed with fury, “Come +on, the whole nation of you, an ye like it, and do your +worst!”</p> + +<p>It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; +for every savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with +club and spear, and, doubtless, would speedily have poured out +his brave blood on the sod, had not the teacher rushed in between +them, and, raising his voice to its utmost, cried.—</p> + +<p>“Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to +judge in this matter. It is for Tararo, the chief, to say +whether or not the young man shall live or die.”</p> + +<p>The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the +gratifying acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the +teacher, or some lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack’s +former aid in time of need, that influenced Tararo, but he +stepped forward, and, waving his hand, said to his +people,—“Desist. The young man’s life is +mine.” Then, turning to Jack, he said, “You +have forfeited your liberty and life to me. Submit +yourself, for we are more numerous than the sand upon the +shore. You are but one; why should you die?”</p> + +<p>“Villain!” exclaimed Jack, passionately, “I +may die, but, assuredly, I shall not perish alone. I will +not submit until you promise that this girl shall not be +injured.”</p> + +<p>“You are very bold,” replied the chief, haughtily, +“but very foolish. Yet I will say that Avatea shall +not be sent away, at least for three days.”</p> + +<p>“You had better accept these terms,” whispered the +teacher, entreatingly. “If you persist in this mad +defiance, you will be slain, and Avatea will be lost. Three +days are worth having.”</p> + +<p>Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing +it moodily to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and +hung down his head in silence.</p> + +<p>Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher +to say that he did not forget his former services, and, +therefore, would leave him free as to his person, but that the +schooner would be detained till he had further considered the +matter.</p> + +<p>While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to +where Avatea was standing as possible, without creating +suspicion, and whispered to her a few words in the native +language. Avatea, who, during the whole of the foregoing +scene, had stood leaning against the tree perfectly passive, and +seemingly quite uninterested in all that was going on, replied by +a single rapid glance of her dark eye, which was instantly cast +down again on the ground at her feet.</p> + +<p>Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the +teacher on board the schooner.</p> + +<p>On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack +threw himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the +teacher seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his +shoulder, said,—</p> + +<p>“Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God +has given us three days, and we must use the means that are in +our power to free this poor girl from slavery. We must not +sit in idle disappointment, we must act”—</p> + +<p>“Act!” cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing +back his hair wildly; “it is mockery to balk of acting when +one is bound hand and foot. How can I act? I cannot +fight a whole nation of savages single-handed. Yes,” +he said, with a bitter smile, “I can fight them, but I +cannot conquer them, or save Avatea.”</p> + +<p>“Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just +now. You cannot expect that blessing which alone can insure +success, unless you are more submissive. I will tell you my +plans if you will listen.”</p> + +<p>“Listen!” cried Jack, eagerly, “of course I +will, my good fellow; I did not know you had any plans. Out +with them. I only hope you will show me how I can get the +girl on board of this schooner, and I’d up anchor and away +in no time. But proceed with your plans.”</p> + +<p>The teacher smiled sadly: “Ah! my friend, if one fathom +of your anchor chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a +thousand warriors would be standing on your deck. No, no, +that could not be done. Even now, your ship would be taken +from you were it not that Tararo has some feeling of gratitude +toward you. But I know Tararo well. He is a man of +falsehood, as all the unconverted savages are. The chief to +whom he has promised this girl is very powerful, and Tararo +<i>must</i> fulfil his promise. He has told you that he +would do nothing to the girl for three days; but that is because +the party who are to take her away will not be ready to start for +three days. Still, as he might have made you a prisoner +during those three days, I say that God has given them to +us.”</p> + +<p>“Well, but what do you propose to do?” said Jack, +impatiently.</p> + +<p>“My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I +think you have courage to brave it. It is this: There is an +island about fifty miles to the south of this, the natives of +which are Christians, and have been so for two years or more, and +the principal chief is Avatea’s lover. Once there, +Avatea would be safe. Now, I suggest that you should +abandon your schooner. Do you think that you can make so +great a sacrifice?”</p> + +<p>“Friend,” replied Jack, “when I make up my +mind to go through with a thing of importance, I can make any +sacrifice.”</p> + +<p>The teacher smiled. “Well, then, the savages could +not conceive it possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would +voluntarily lose your fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies +here they think they have you all safe: so I suggest that we get +a quantity of stores conveyed to a sequestered part of the shore, +provide a small canoe, put Avatea on board, and you three would +paddle to the Christian island.”</p> + +<p>“Bravo!” cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing +the teacher’s hand. “Missionary, you’re a +regular brick. I didn’t think you had so much in +you.”</p> + +<p>“As for me,” continued the teacher, “I will +remain on board till they discover that you are gone. Then +they will ask me where you are gone to, and I will refuse to +tell.”</p> + +<p>“And what’ll be the result of that?” +inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; +but,” he added, looking at Jack with a peculiar smile, +“I too am not afraid to die in a good cause!”</p> + +<p>“But how are we to get hold of Avatea?” inquired +Jack.</p> + +<p>“I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular +spot, to which I will guide you to-night. We shall then +arrange about it. She will easily manage to elude her +keepers, who are not very strict in watching her, thinking it +impossible that she could escape from the island. Indeed, I +am sure that such an idea will never enter their heads. +But, as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in a +small canoe, on the open sea, is a great voyage to make. +You may miss the island, too, in which case there is no other in +that direction for a hundred miles or more; and if you lose your +way and fall among other heathens, you know the law of +Feejee—a cast-away who gains the shore is doomed to +die. You must count the cost, my young friend.”</p> + +<p>“I have counted it,” replied Jack. “If +Avatea consents to run the risk, most certainly I will; and so +will my comrades also. Besides,” added Jack, looking +seriously into the teacher’s face, “your +Bible,—<i>our</i> Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those +who call on Him in the time of trouble; who holds the winds in +his fists and the waters in the hollow of his hand.”</p> + +<p>We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; +collected together such things as we should require, and laid out +on the deck provisions sufficient to maintain us for several +weeks, purposing to load the canoe with as much as she could hold +consistently with speed and safety. These we covered with a +tarpaulin, intending to convey them to the canoe only a few hours +before starting. When night spread her sable curtain over +the scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along with +the natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on +our enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and +followed our sable guide, who led us by a long detour, in order +to avoid the village, to the place of rendezvous. We had +not stood more than five minutes under the gloomy shade of the +thick foliage when a dark figure glided noiselessly up to us.</p> + +<p>“Ah! here you are,” said Jack, as Avatea +approached. “Now, then, tell her what we’ve +come about, and don’t waste time.”</p> + +<p>“I understan’ leetl English,” said Avatea, +in a low voice.</p> + +<p>“Why, where did you pick up English?” exclaimed +Jack, in amazement; “you were dumb as a stone when I saw +you last.”</p> + +<p>“She has learned all she knows of it from me,” +said the teacher, “since she came to the island.”</p> + +<p>We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering +into all the details, and concealing none of the danger, so that +she might be fully aware of the risk she ran. As we had +anticipated, she was too glad of the opportunity thus afforded +her to escape from her persecutors to think of the danger or +risk.</p> + +<p>“Then you’re willing to go with us, are +you?” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Yis, I am willing to go.”</p> + +<p>“And you’re not afraid to trust yourself out on +the deep sea so far?”</p> + +<p>“No, I not ’fraid to go. Safe with +Christian.”</p> + +<p>After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it +was time to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having +appointed to meet at the cliff where the canoe lay, on the +following night, just after dark, we hastened away—we to +row on board the schooner with muffled oars—Avatea to glide +back to her prison-hut among the Mango savages.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The flight—The pursuit—Despair and its +results—The lion bearded in his den again—Awful +danger threatened and wonderfully averted—A terrific +storm.</p> + +<p>As the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became +naturally very fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and +we spent the whole of the following day in a state of nervous +anxiety. We resolved to go a-shore and ramble about the +village, as if to observe the habits and dwellings of the people, +as we thought that an air of affected indifference to the events +of the previous day would be more likely than any other course of +conduct to avert suspicion as to our intentions. While we +were thus occupied, the teacher remained on board with the +Christian natives, whose powerful voices reached us ever and anon +as they engaged in singing hymns or in prayer.</p> + +<p>At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank +into the sea, and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to +which I have already referred, ended abruptly in a dark +night. Hastily throwing a few blankets into our little +boat, we stepped into it, and, whispering farewell to the natives +in the schooner, rowed gently over the lagoon, taking care to +keep as near to the beach as possible. We rowed in the +utmost silence and with muffled oars, so that had any one +observed us at the distance of a few yards, he might have almost +taken us for a phantom-boat or a shadow on the dark water. +Not a breath of air was stirring; but fortunately the gentle +ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with the soft roar of +the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the slight +plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars.</p> + +<p>Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging +cliff under whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow +in the water ready to be launched, and most of her cargo already +stowed away. As the keel of our little boat grated on the +sand, a hand was laid upon the bow, and a dim form was seen.</p> + +<p>“Ha!” said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped +upon the beach, “is that you, Avatea?”</p> + +<p>“Yis, it am me,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to +shove off the canoe,” whispered Jack to the teacher; +“and Peterkin, do you shove these blankets aboard, we may +want them before long. Avatea, step into the +middle;—that’s right.”</p> + +<p>“Is all ready?” whispered the teacher.</p> + +<p>“Not quite,” replied Peterkin. “Here, +Ralph, lay hold o’ this pair of oars, and stow them away if +you can. I don’t like paddles. After +we’re safe away I’ll try to rig up rollicks for +them.”</p> + +<p>“Now, then, in with you and shove off.”</p> + +<p>One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher’s hand, +and, with his whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we +shot like an arrow from the shore, sped over the still waters of +the lagoon, and paddled as swiftly as strong arms and willing +hearts could urge us over the long swell of the open sea.</p> + +<p>All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our +paddles in almost total silence and without halt, save twice to +recruit our failing energies with a mouthful of food and a +draught of water. Jack had taken the bearing of the island +just after starting, and laying a small pocket-compass before +him, kept the head of the canoe due south, for our chance of +hitting the island depended very much on the faithfulness of our +steersman in keeping our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its +proper course. Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and +Avatea worked untiringly in the middle.</p> + +<p>As the sun’s lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the +sea Jack ceased working, threw down his paddle, and called a +halt.</p> + +<p>“There,” he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn +sigh, “we’ve put a considerable breadth of water +between us and these black rascals, so now we’ll have a +hearty supper and a sound sleep.”</p> + +<p>“Hear, hear,” cried Peterkin. “Nobly +spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop water, Ralph. Why, girl +what’s wrong with you? You look just like a black owl +blinking in the sunshine.”</p> + +<p>Avatea smiled. “I sleepy,” she said; and as +if to prove the truth of this, she laid her head on the edge of +the canoe and fell fast asleep.</p> + +<p>“That’s uncommon sharp practice,” said +Peterkin, with a broad grin. “Don’t you think +we should awake her to make her eat something first? or, +perhaps,” he added, with a grave, meditative look, +“perhaps we might put some food in her mouth, which is so +elegantly open at the present moment, and see if she’d +swallow it while asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come round +to the front here and feed her quietly, while Jack and I are +tucking into the victuals. It would be a monstrous economy +of time.”</p> + +<p>I could not help smiling at Peterkin’s idea, which, +indeed, when I pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; +nevertheless I declined to put it in practice, being fearful of +the result should the victual chance to go down the wrong +throat. But, on suggesting this to Peterkin, he +exclaimed—</p> + +<p>“Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an +eye might see that if it went down Avatea’s throat it could +not go down the wrong throat!—unless, indeed, you have all +of a sudden become inordinately selfish, and think that all the +throats in the world are wrong ones except your own. +However, don’t talk so much, and hand me the pork before +Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled to at least one +minute morsel.”</p> + +<p>“Peterkin, you’re a villain. A paltry little +villain,” said Jack, quietly, as he tossed the hind legs +(including the tail) of a cold roast pig to his comrade; +“and I must again express my regret that unavoidable +circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and that +necessity has compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. +Were it not that you are incapable of walking upon the water, I +would order you, sir, out of the canoe.”</p> + +<p>“There! you’ve wakened Avatea with your long +tongue,” retorted Peterkin, with a frown, as the girl gave +vent to a deep sigh. “No,” he continued, +“it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth of her +black Apollo. I say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice +of that yam. Between you and Jack I run a chance of being +put on short allowance, if +not—yei—a—a—ow!”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s concluding remark was a yawn of so great +energy that Jack recommended him to postpone the conclusion of +his meal till next morning,—a piece of advice which he +followed so quickly, that I was forcibly reminded of his remark, +a few minutes before, in regard to the sharp practice of +Avatea.</p> + +<p>My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I +am much given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be +surprised to learn that I fell into a deep reverie on the subject +of sleep, which was continued without intermission into the +night, and prolonged without interruption into the following +morning. But I cannot feel assured that I actually slept +during that time, although I am tolerably certain that I was not +awake.</p> + +<p>Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, +while the night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and +silent.</p> + +<p>A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the +morning, just as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east.</p> + +<p>“What’s wrong?” cried Jack, starting up.</p> + +<p>Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread +towards the horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of +the largest sized war-canoes was approaching us!</p> + +<p>With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his +paddle, glanced at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, +commanded us to “give way.”</p> + +<p>But we did not require to be urged. Already our four +paddles were glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over +the glassy sea like a dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers +told that they had observed our motions.</p> + +<p>“I see something like land ahead,” said Jack, in a +hopeful tone. “It seems impossible that we could have +made the island yet; still, if it is so, we may reach it before +these fellows can catch us, for our canoe is light and our +muscles are fresh.”</p> + +<p>No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long +chase, we had no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a +hundred warriors. Nevertheless, we resolved to do our +utmost to escape, and paddled with a degree of vigour that kept +us well in advance of our pursuers. The war-canoe was so +far behind us that it seemed but a little speck on the sea, and +the shouts, to which the crew occasionally gave vent, came +faintly towards us on the morning breeze. We therefore +hoped that we should be able to keep in advance for an hour or +two, when we might, perhaps, reach the land ahead. But this +hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, not long after, +rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a fog-bank!</p> + +<p>A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was +expressed on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to +our hopes. But we had little time to think of regret. +Our danger was too great and imminent to permit of a +moment’s relaxation from our exertions. No hope now +animated our bosoms; but a feeling of despair, strange to say, +lent us power to work, and nerved our arms with such energy, that +it was several hours ere the savages overtook us. When we +saw that there was indeed no chance of escape, and that paddling +any longer would only serve to exhaust our strength, without +doing any good, we turned the side of our canoe towards the +approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles.</p> + +<p>Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, +Jack lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with +us, and, resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of +bold defiance. Peterkin took the other oar and also stood +up, but there was no anger visible on his countenance. When +not sparkling with fun, it usually wore a mild, sad expression, +which was deepened on the present occasion, as he glanced at +Avatea, who sat with her face resting in her hands upon her +knees. Without knowing very well what I intended to do, I +also arose and grasped my paddle with both hands.</p> + +<p>On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the +foam curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the +savages glancing the beams of the rising sun. Perfect +silence was maintained on both sides, and we could hear the +hissing water, and see the frowning eyes of the warriors, as they +came rushing on. When about twenty yards distant, five or +six of the savages in the bow rose, and, laying aside their +paddles, took up their spears. Jack and Peterkin raised +their oars, while, with a feeling of madness whirling in my +brain, I grasped my paddle and prepared for the onset. But, +before any of us could strike a blow, the sharp prow of the +war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the side, and hurled us +into the sea!</p> + +<p>What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly +drowned; but when I recovered from the state of insensibility +into which I had been thrown, I found myself stretched on my +back, bound hand and foot between Jack and Peterkin, in the +bottom of the large canoe.</p> + +<p>In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the +savages only rested one hour. When night came, they rested +again for another hour, and appeared to sleep just as they +sat. But we were neither unbound nor allowed to speak to +each other during the voyage, nor was a morsel of food or a +draught of water given to us. For food, however, we cared +little; but we would have given much for a drop of water to cool +our parched lips, and we would have been glad, too, had they +loosened the cords that bound us, for they were tightly fastened +and occasioned us much pain. The air, also, was unusually +hot, so much so that I felt convinced that a storm was +brewing. This also added to our sufferings. However, +these were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from +which we had fled.</p> + +<p>While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, +who was seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not +fettered in any way. Our captors now drove us before them +towards the hut of Tararo, at which we speedily arrived, and +found the chief seated with an expression on his face that boded +us no good. Our friend the teacher stood beside him, with a +look of anxiety on his mild features.</p> + +<p>“How comes it,” said Tararo, turning to the +teacher, “that these youths have abused our +hospitality?”</p> + +<p>“Tell him,” replied Jack, “that we have not +abused his hospitality, for his hospitality has not been extended +to us. I came to the island to deliver Avatea, and my only +regret is that I have failed to do so. If I get another +chance, I will try to save her yet.”</p> + +<p>The teacher shook his head. “Nay, my young friend, +I had better not tell him that. It will only incense +him.”</p> + +<p>“Fear not,” replied Jack. “If you +don’t tell him that, you’ll tell him nothing, for I +won’t say anything softer.”</p> + +<p>On hearing Jack’s speech, Tararo frowned and his eye +flashed with anger.</p> + +<p>“Go,” he said, “presumptuous boy. My +debt to you is cancelled. You and your companions shall +die.”</p> + +<p>As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, +who seized Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, +and, dragging us from the hut of the chief, led us through the +wood to the outskirts of the village. Here they thrust us +into a species of natural cave in a cliff, and, having barricaded +the entrance, left us in total darkness.</p> + +<p>After feeling about for some time—for our legs were +unshackled, although our wrists were still bound with +thongs—we found a low ledge of rock running along one side +of the cavern. On this we seated ourselves, and for a long +time maintained unbroken silence.</p> + +<p>At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. +“Alas! dear Jack and Peterkin,” said I, “what +is to become of us? I fear that we are doomed to +die.”</p> + +<p>“I know not,” replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, +“I know not; Ralph, I regret deeply the hastiness of my +violent temper, which, I must confess, has been the chief cause +of our being brought to this sad condition. Perhaps the +teacher may do something for us. But I have little +hope.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! no,” said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; +“I am sure he can’t help us. Tararo +doesn’t care more for him than for one of his +dogs.”</p> + +<p>“Truly,” said I, “there seems no chance of +deliverance, unless the Almighty puts forth his arm to save +us. Yet I must say that I have great hope, my comrades, for +we have come to this dark place by no fault of ours—unless +it be a fault to try to succour a woman in distress.”</p> + +<p>I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to +the cavern, which was caused by the removal of the +barricade. Immediately after, three men entered, and, +taking us by the collars of our coats, led us away through the +forest. As we advanced, we heard much shouting and beating +of native drums in the village, and at first we thought that our +guards were conducting us to the hut of Tararo again. But +in this we were mistaken. The beating of drums gradually +increased, and soon after we observed a procession of the natives +coming towards us. At the head of this procession we were +placed, and then we all advanced together towards the temple +where human victims were wont to be sacrificed!</p> + +<p>A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind +the awful scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful +spot. But deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence +we little expected it. During the whole of that day there +had been an unusual degree of heat in the atmosphere, and the sky +assumed that lurid aspect which portends a thunder-storm. +Just as we were approaching the horrid temple, a growl of thunder +burst overhead and heavy drops of rain began to fall.</p> + +<p>Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical +regions can form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane +that burst upon the island of Mango at this time. Before we +reached the temple, the storm burst upon us with a deafening +roar, and the natives, who knew too well the devastation that was +to follow, fled right and left through the woods in order to save +their property, leaving us alone in the midst of the howling +storm. The trees around us bent before the blast like +willows, and we were about to flee in order to seek shelter, when +the teacher ran toward us with a knife in his hand.</p> + +<p>“Thank the Lord,” he said, cutting our bonds, +“I am in time! Now, seek the shelter of the nearest +rock.”</p> + +<p>This we did without a moment’s hesitation, for the +whistling wind burst, ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the +trees, and, tearing them from their roots, hurled them with +violence to the ground. Rain cut across the land in sheets, +and lightning played like forked serpents in the air; while, high +above the roar of the hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, and +burst, and rolled in awful majesty.</p> + +<p>In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs +were blown completely off the houses in many cases; and in +others, the houses themselves were levelled with the +ground. In the midst of this, the natives were darting to +and fro, in some instances saving their goods, but in many others +seeking to save themselves from the storm of destruction that +whirled around them. But, terrific although the tempest was +on land, it was still more tremendous on the mighty ocean. +Billows sprang, as it were, from the great deep, and while their +crests were absolutely scattered into white mist, they fell upon +the beach with a crash that seemed to shake the solid land. +But they did not end there. Each successive wave swept +higher and higher on the beach, until the ocean lashed its angry +waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, in a sheet of +white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and carried +off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native +dwellings! It was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in +some degree at least, to impress the mind of beholders with the +might and the majesty of God.</p> + +<p>We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, +during which time the storm raged in fury; but on the night +following it abated somewhat, and in the morning we went to the +village to seek for food, being so famished with hunger that we +lost all feeling of danger and all wish to escape in our desire +to satisfy the cravings of nature. But no sooner had we +obtained food than we began to wish that we had rather +endeavoured to make our escape into the mountains. This we +attempted to do soon afterwards, but the natives were now able to +look after us, and on our showing a disposition to avoid +observation and make towards the mountains, we were seized by +three warriors, who once more bound our wrists and thrust us into +our former prison.</p> + +<p>It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down +the first savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his +fist, but he was speedily overpowered by others. Thus we +were again prisoners, with the prospect of torture and a violent +death before us.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Imprisonment—Sinking hopes—Unexpected freedom to +more than one, and in more senses than one.</p> + +<p>For a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary +prison, during which dismal time we did not see the face of a +human being, except that of the silent savage who brought us our +daily food.</p> + +<p>There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I +have felt as if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that +crushed my inmost heart could never pass away, until death should +make me cease to feel the present was such a season.</p> + +<p>During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill +at our hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the +cave—dreading lest it should prove to be that of our +executioner. But as time dragged heavily on, we ceased to +feel this alarm, and began to experience such a deep, +irrepressible longing for freedom, that we chafed and fretted in +our confinement like tigers. Then a feeling of despair came +over us, and we actually longed for the time when the savages +would take us forth to die! But these changes took place +very gradually, and were mingled sometimes with brighter +thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark cavern on +our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the past, +until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future.</p> + +<p>A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty +supply of yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted +our food.</p> + +<p>“Well, Ralph, how have you slept?” said Jack, in a +listless tone, on rising one morning from his humble couch. +“Were you much disturbed by the wind last night?”</p> + +<p>“No,” said I; “I dreamed of home all night, +and I thought that my mother smiled upon me, and beckoned me to +go to her; but I could not, for I was chained.”</p> + +<p>“And I dreamed, too,” said Peterkin; “but it +was of our happy home on the Coral Island. I thought we +were swimming in the Water Garden; then the savages gave a yell, +and we were immediately in the cave at Spouting Cliff, which, +somehow or other, changed into this gloomy cavern; and I awoke to +find it true.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s tone was so much altered by the depressing +influence of his long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was +he who spoke, I should scarcely have recognised it, so sad was +it, and so unlike to the merry, cheerful voice we had been +accustomed to hear. I pondered this much, and thought of +the terrible decline of happiness that may come on human beings +in so short a time; how bright the sunshine in the sky at one +time, and, in a short space, how dark the overshadowing +cloud! I had no doubt that the Bible would have given me +much light and comfort on this subject, if I had possessed one, +and I once more had occasion to regret deeply having neglected to +store my memory with its consoling truths.</p> + +<p>While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of +the cave, by saying, in a melancholy tone, “Oh, I wonder if +we shall ever see our dear island more.”</p> + +<p>His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he +bent down his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me +to see our once joyous companion in tears, and I felt a burning +desire to comfort him; but, alas! what could I say? I could +hold out no hope; and although I essayed twice to speak, the +words refused to pass my lips. While I hesitated, Jack sat +down beside him, and whispered a few words in his ear, while +Peterkin threw himself on his friend’s breast, and rested +his head on his shoulder.</p> + +<p>Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, +we heard footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately +our jailer entered. We were so much accustomed to his +regular visits, however, that we paid little attention to him, +expecting that he would set down our meagre fare, as usual, and +depart. But, to our surprise, instead of doing so, he +advanced towards us with a knife in his hand, and, going up to +Jack, he cut the thongs that bound his wrists, then he did the +same to Peterkin and me! For fully five minutes we stood in +speechless amazement, with our freed hands hanging idly by our +sides. The first thought that rushed into my mind was, that +the time had come to put us to death; and although, as I have +said before, we actually wished for death in the strength of our +despair, now that we thought it drew really near I felt all the +natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a chill of +horror at the suddenness of our call.</p> + +<p>But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage +pointed to the cave’s mouth, and we marched, almost +mechanically, into the open air. Here, to our surprise, we +found the teacher standing under a tree, with his hands clasped +before him, and the tears trickling down his dark cheeks. +On seeing Jack, who came out first, he sprang towards him, and +clasping him in his arms, exclaimed,—</p> + +<p>“Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of +God you are free!”</p> + +<p>“Free!” cried Jack.</p> + +<p>“Ay, free,” repeated the teacher, shaking us +warmly by the hands again and again; “free to go and come +as you will. The Lord has unloosed the bands of the captive +and set the prisoners free. A missionary has been sent to +us, and Tararo has embraced the Christian religion! The +people are even now burning their gods of wood! Come, my +dear friends, and see the glorious sight.”</p> + +<p>We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been +accustomed in our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we +imagined for a moment this must surely be nothing more than +another vivid dream. Our eyes and minds were dazzled, too, +by the brilliant sunshine, which almost blinded us after our long +confinement to the gloom of our prison, so that we felt giddy +with the variety of conflicting emotions that filled our +throbbing bosoms; but as we followed the footsteps of our sable +friend, and beheld the bright foliage of the trees, and heard the +cries of the paroquets, and smelt the rich perfume of the +flowering shrubs, the truth, that we were really delivered from +prison and from death, rushed with overwhelming power into our +souls, and, with one accord, while tears sprang to our eyes, we +uttered a loud long cheer of joy.</p> + +<p>It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who +chanced to be near. Running towards us, they shook us by +the hand with every demonstration of kindly feeling. They +then fell behind, and, forming a sort of procession, conducted us +to the dwelling of Tararo.</p> + +<p>The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never +forget. On a rude bench in front of his house sat the +chief. A native stood on his left hand, who, from his +dress, seemed to be a teacher. On his right stood an +English gentleman, who, I at once and rightly concluded, was a +missionary. He was tall, thin, and apparently past forty, +with a bald forehead, and thin gray hair. The expression of +his countenance was the most winning I ever saw, and his clear +gray eye beamed with a look that was frank, fearless, loving, and +truthful. In front of the chief was an open space, in the +centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to be set on +fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who +had come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A +bright smile overspread the missionary’s face as he +advanced quickly to meet us, and he shook us warmly by the +hands.</p> + +<p>“I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young +friends,” he said. “My friend, and your friend, +the teacher, has told me your history; and I thank our Father in +heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided me to this island, +and made me the instrument of saving you.”</p> + +<p>We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some +surprise how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in +our favour.</p> + +<p>“I will tell you that at a more convenient time,” +he answered, “meanwhile we must not forget the respect due +to the chief. He waits to receive you.”</p> + +<p>In the conversation that immediately followed between us and +Tararo, the latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus +Christ had been sent to the island, and that to it we were +indebted for our freedom. Moreover, he told us that we were +at liberty to depart in our schooner whenever we pleased, and +that we should be supplied with as much provision as we +required. He concluded by shaking hands with us warmly, and +performing the ceremony of rubbing noses.</p> + +<p>This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find +words to express our gratitude to the chief and to the +missionary.</p> + +<p>“And what of Avatea?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in +the midst of whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, +strapping fellow, whose noble mien and air of superiority bespoke +him a chief of no ordinary kind.</p> + +<p>“That youth is her lover. He came this very +morning in his war-canoe to treat with Tararo for Avatea. +He is to be married in a few days, and afterwards returns to his +island home with his bride!”</p> + +<p>“That’s capital,” said Jack, as he stepped +up to the savage and gave him a hearty shake of the hand. +“I wish you joy, my lad;—and you too, +Avatea.”</p> + +<p>As Jack spoke, Avatea’s lover took him by the hand and +led him to the spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, +surrounded by most of the chief men of the tribe. The girl +herself followed, and stood on his left hand while her lover +stood on his right, and, commanding silence, made the following +speech, which was translated by the missionary:—</p> + +<p>“Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is +old. Your heart also is large and very brave. I and +Avatea are your debtors, and we wish, in the midst of this +assembly, to acknowledge our debt, and to say that it is one +which we can never repay. You have risked your life for one +who was known to you only for a few days. But she was a +woman in distress, and that was enough to secure to her the aid +of a Christian man. We, who live in these islands of the +sea, know that the true Christians always act thus. Their +religion is one of love and kindness. We thank God that so +many Christians have been sent here—we hope many more will +come. Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray +for you and your brave comrades when you are far away.”</p> + +<p>To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, +in which he insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he +would have done for any woman under the sun. But +Jack’s forte did not lie in speech-making, so he terminated +rather abruptly by seizing the chief’s hand and shaking it +violently, after which he made a hasty retreat.</p> + +<p>“Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin,” said Jack, as we +mingled with the crowd, “it seems to me that the object we +came here for having been satisfactorily accomplished, we have +nothing more to do but get ready for sea as fast as we can, and +hurrah for dear old England!”</p> + +<p>“That’s my idea precisely,” said Peterkin, +endeavouring to wink, but he had wept so much of late, poor +fellow, that he found it difficult; “however, I’m not +going away till I see these fellows burn their gods.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire +was put to the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the +acclamations of the assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango +were reduced to ashes!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXV.</h2> + +<p>Conclusion.</p> + +<p>To part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene +of constant leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial +greeting to-day, are doomed ere long to unite for the last time, +when the quivering lips pronounce the +word—“Farewell.” It is a sad thought, but +should we on that account exclude it from our minds? May +not a lesson worth learning be gathered in the contemplation of +it? May it not, perchance, teach us to devote our thoughts +more frequently and attentively to that land where we meet, but +part no more?</p> + +<p>How many do we part from in this world with a light +“Good-bye,” whom we never see again! Often do I +think, in my meditations on this subject, that if we realized +more fully the shortness of the fleeting intercourse that we have +in this world with many of our fellow-men, we would try more +earnestly to do them good, to give them a friendly smile, as it +were, in passing (for the longest intercourse on earth is little +more than a passing word and glance), and show that we have +sympathy with them in the short quick struggle of life, by our +kindly words and looks and action.</p> + +<p>The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of +the South Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep +regret at parting with the natives of the island of Mango; for, +after they embraced the Christian faith, they sought, by showing +us the utmost kindness, to compensate for the harsh treatment we +had experienced at their hands; and we felt a growing affection +for the native teachers and the missionary, and especially for +Avatea and her husband.</p> + +<p>Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations +with the missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been +making for the island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop +was blown out of its course, during a violent gale, and driven to +this island. At first the natives refused to listen to what +he had to say; but, after a week’s residence among them, +Tararo came to him and said that he wished to become a Christian, +and would burn his idols. He proved himself to be sincere, +for, as we have seen, he persuaded all his people to do +likewise. I use the word persuaded advisedly; for, like all +the other Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a despot and might have +commanded obedience to his wishes; but he entered so readily into +the spirit of the new faith that he perceived at once the +impropriety of using constraint in the propagation of it. +He set the example, therefore; and that example was followed by +almost every man of the tribe.</p> + +<p>During the short time that we remained at the island, +repairing our vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives +had commenced building a large and commodious church, under the +superintendence of the missionary, and several rows of new +cottages were marked out; so that the place bid fair to become, +in a few months, as prosperous and beautiful as the Christian +village at the other end of the island.</p> + +<p>After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, +loaded with presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of +the native teachers went with them, for the purpose of visiting +still more distant islands of the sea, and spreading, if +possible, the light of the glorious gospel there.</p> + +<p>As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, +in order to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and +Peterkin and I held a consultation in the cabin of our +schooner,—which we found just as we had left her, for +everything that had been taken out of her was restored. We +now resolved to delay our departure no longer. The desire +to see our beloved native land was strong upon us, and we could +not wait.</p> + +<p>Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we +thought it likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient +crew of sailors to man our vessel; so we accepted their offer +gladly.</p> + +<p>It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white +sails of the pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. +The missionary, and thousands of the natives, came down to bid us +God-speed, and to see us sail away. As the vessel bent +before a light fair wind, we glided quickly over the lagoon under +a cloud of canvass.</p> + +<p>Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives +gave us a loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while +he stood on a coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the +wind, we heard the single word “Farewell” borne +faintly over the sea.</p> + +<p>That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the +wide sea and up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, +strangely mixed with sadness, passed through our +hearts,—for we were at length “homeward bound,” +and were gradually leaving far behind us the beautiful, bright, +green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND ***</div> +<div style='text-align:left'> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will +be renamed. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United +States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. +</div> + +<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> +<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person +or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the +Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when +you share it without charge with others. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work +on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: +</div> + +<blockquote> + <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most + other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions + whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms + of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online + at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you + are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws + of the country where you are located before using this eBook. + </div> +</blockquote> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg™ License. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format +other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain +Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +provided that: +</div> + +<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation.” + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ + works. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. + </div> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state +visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. +</div> + +</div> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/646-h/images/cover.jpg b/646-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad29032 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p0b.jpg b/646-h/images/p0b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d52657a --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p0b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p0s.jpg b/646-h/images/p0s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fca3f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p0s.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p136b.jpg b/646-h/images/p136b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2c16bf --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p136b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p136s.jpg b/646-h/images/p136s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..28fae21 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p136s.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p175b.jpg b/646-h/images/p175b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..99777cf --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p175b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p175s.jpg b/646-h/images/p175s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e92ee0d --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p175s.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p24b.jpg b/646-h/images/p24b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b990371 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p24b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p24s.jpg b/646-h/images/p24s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..99395a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p24s.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p334b.jpg b/646-h/images/p334b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d78e93 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p334b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p334s.jpg b/646-h/images/p334s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d64adc --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p334s.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p352b.jpg b/646-h/images/p352b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fec64ec --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p352b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p352s.jpg b/646-h/images/p352s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..10be9ae --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p352s.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p77b.jpg b/646-h/images/p77b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf601b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p77b.jpg diff --git a/646-h/images/p77s.jpg b/646-h/images/p77s.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3747990 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/images/p77s.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad437de --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #646 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/646) diff --git a/old/646.txt b/old/646.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ecfa88c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/646.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10150 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne, +Illustrated by Dalziel + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Coral Island + a Tale of the Pacific Ocean + + +Author: R. M. Ballantyne + + + +Release Date: April 12, 2007 [eBook #646] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND*** + + + + + +Transcribed from the 1884 Thomas Nelson and Sons edition by David Price, +email ccx074@pglaf.org + +{Book cover: cover.jpg} + + + + + +The Coral Island: +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + + +{A coral island: p0.jpg} + +BY + +ROBERT MICHAEL BALLANTYNE, +AUTHOR OF "HUDSON'S BAY; OR, EVERY-DAY LIFE IN THE WILDS OF NORTH +AMERICA; +"SNOW-FLAKES AND SUN-BEAMS; OR, THE YOUNG FUR-TRADERS;" +"UNGAVA: A TALE OF THE ESQUIMAUX," ETC., ETC. + +WITH ILLUSTRATIONS BY DALZIEL. + +London: +THOMAS NELSON AND SONS, PATERNOSTER ROW. +EDINBURGH; AND NEW YORK. +1884. + + + + +Preface + + +I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures herein set down. +With the memory of my boyish feelings strong upon me, I present my book +specially to boys, in the earnest hope that they may derive valuable +information, much pleasure, great profit, and unbounded amusement from +its pages. + +One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to be melancholy and +morose, and who cannot enter with kindly sympathy into the regions of +fun, let me seriously advise him to shut my book and put it away. It is +not meant for him. + +RALPH ROVER + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +The beginning--My early life and character--I thirst for adventure in +foreign lands and go to sea. + +Roving has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the joy of my +heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In childhood, in boyhood, and +in man's estate, I have been a rover; not a mere rambler among the woody +glens and upon the hill-tops of my own native land, but an enthusiastic +rover throughout the length and breadth of the wide wide world. + +It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in which I was +born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic Ocean. My father was a +sea-captain; my grandfather was a sea-captain; my great-grandfather had +been a marine. Nobody could tell positively what occupation _his_ father +had followed; but my dear mother used to assert that he had been a +midshipman, whose grandfather, on the mother's side, had been an admiral +in the royal navy. At anyrate we knew that, as far back as our family +could be traced, it had been intimately connected with the great watery +waste. Indeed this was the case on both sides of the house; for my +mother always went to sea with my father on his long voyages, and so +spent the greater part of her life upon the water. + +Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving disposition. Soon +after I was born, my father, being old, retired from a seafaring life, +purchased a small cottage in a fishing village on the west coast of +England, and settled down to spend the evening of his life on the shores +of that sea which had for so many years been his home. It was not long +after this that I began to show the roving spirit that dwelt within me. +For some time past my infant legs had been gaining strength, so that I +came to be dissatisfied with rubbing the skin off my chubby knees by +walking on them, and made many attempts to stand up and walk like a man; +all of which attempts, however, resulted in my sitting down violently and +in sudden surprise. One day I took advantage of my dear mother's absence +to make another effort; and, to my joy, I actually succeeded in reaching +the doorstep, over which I tumbled into a pool of muddy water that lay +before my father's cottage door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror +of my poor mother when she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a group +of cackling ducks, and the tenderness with which she stripped off my +dripping clothes and washed my dirty little body! From this time forth +my rambles became more frequent, and, as I grew older, more distant, +until at last I had wandered far and near on the shore and in the woods +around our humble dwelling, and did not rest content until my father +bound me apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to sea. + +For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in coasting +along the shores of my native land. My Christian name was Ralph, and my +comrades added to this the name of Rover, in consequence of the passion +which I always evinced for travelling. Rover was not my real name, but +as I never received any other I came at last to answer to it as naturally +as to my proper name; and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good reason +why I should not introduce myself to the reader as Ralph Rover. My +shipmates were kind, good-natured fellows, and they and I got on very +well together. They did, indeed, very frequently make game of and banter +me, but not unkindly; and I overheard them sometimes saying that Ralph +Rover was a "queer, old-fashioned fellow." This, I must confess, +surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but could come at no +satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my old-fashionedness lay. It +is true I was a quiet lad, and seldom spoke except when spoken to. +Moreover, I never could understand the jokes of my companions even when +they were explained to me: which dulness in apprehension occasioned me +much grief; however, I tried to make up for it by smiling and looking +pleased when I observed that they were laughing at some witticism which I +had failed to detect. I was also very fond of inquiring into the nature +of things and their causes, and often fell into fits of abstraction while +thus engaged in my mind. But in all this I saw nothing that did not seem +to be exceedingly natural, and could by no means understand why my +comrades should call me "an old-fashioned fellow." + +Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many seamen who +had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; and I freely confess +that my heart glowed ardently within me as they recounted their wild +adventures in foreign lands,--the dreadful storms they had weathered, the +appalling dangers they had escaped, the wonderful creatures they had seen +both on the land and in the sea, and the interesting lands and strange +people they had visited. But of all the places of which they told me, +none captivated and charmed my imagination so much as the Coral Islands +of the Southern Seas. They told me of thousands of beautiful fertile +islands that had been formed by a small creature called the coral insect, +where summer reigned nearly all the year round,--where the trees were +laden with a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit,--where the climate was +almost perpetually delightful,--yet where, strange to say, men were wild, +bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those favoured isles to which the +gospel of our Saviour had been conveyed. These exciting accounts had so +great an effect upon my mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I +resolved to make a voyage to the South Seas. + +I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear parents to +let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would never have become +a great captain had he remained in the coasting trade, he saw the truth +of what I said, and gave his consent. My dear mother, seeing that my +father had made up his mind, no longer offered opposition to my wishes. +"But oh, Ralph," she said, on the day I bade her adieu, "come back soon +to us, my dear boy, for we are getting old now, Ralph, and may not have +many years to live." + +I will not take up my reader's time with a minute account of all that +occurred before I took my final leave of my dear parents. Suffice it to +say, that my father placed me under the charge of an old mess-mate of his +own, a merchant captain, who was on the point of sailing to the South +Seas in his own ship, the Arrow. My mother gave me her blessing and a +small Bible; and her last request was, that I would never forget to read +a chapter every day, and say my prayers; which I promised, with tears in +my eyes, that I would certainly do. + +Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine large ship, +and set sail for the islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +The departure--The sea--My companions--Some account of the wonderful +sights we saw on the great deep--A dreadful storm and a frightful wreck. + +It was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her canvass to +the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the south. Oh, how my heart +bounded with delight as I listened to the merry chorus of the sailors, +while they hauled at the ropes and got in the anchor! The captain +shouted--the men ran to obey--the noble ship bent over to the breeze, and +the shore gradually faded from my view, while I stood looking on with a +kind of feeling that the whole was a delightful dream. + +The first thing that struck me as being different from anything I had yet +seen during my short career on the sea, was the hoisting of the anchor on +deck, and lashing it firmly down with ropes, as if we had now bid adieu +to the land for ever, and would require its services no more. + +"There, lass," cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, giving the fluke of the +anchor a hearty slap with his hand after the housing was +completed--"there, lass, take a good nap now, for we shan't ask you to +kiss the mud again for many a long day to come!" + +And so it was. That anchor did not "kiss the mud" for many long days +afterwards; and when at last it did, it was for the last time! + +There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were my special +favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, broad-shouldered youth of +eighteen, with a handsome, good-humoured, firm face. He had had a good +education, was clever and hearty and lion-like in his actions, but mild +and quiet in disposition. Jack was a general favourite, and had a +peculiar fondness for me. My other companion was Peterkin Gay. He was +little, quick, funny, decidedly mischievous, and about fourteen years +old. But Peterkin's mischief was almost always harmless, else he could +not have been so much beloved as he was. + +"Hallo! youngster," cried Jack Martin, giving me a slap on the shoulder, +the day I joined the ship, "come below and I'll show you your berth. You +and I are to be mess-mates, and I think we shall be good friends, for I +like the look o' you." + +Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became the best and +stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the stormy waves. + +I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. We had the usual +amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw many strange fish rolling +in the sea, and I was greatly delighted one day by seeing a shoal of +flying fish dart out of the water and skim through the air about a foot +above the surface. They were pursued by dolphins, which feed on them, +and one flying-fish in its terror flew over the ship, struck on the +rigging, and fell upon the deck. Its wings were just fins elongated, and +we found that they could never fly far at a time, and never mounted into +the air like birds, but skimmed along the surface of the sea. Jack and I +had it for dinner, and found it remarkably good. + +When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of America, the +weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors began to tell +stories about the furious gales and the dangers of that terrible cape. + +"Cape Horn," said one, "is the most horrible headland I ever doubled. +I've sailed round it twice already, and both times the ship was a'most +blow'd out o' the water." + +"An' I've been round it once," said another, "an' that time the sails +were split, and the ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they wouldn't +work, and we wos all but lost." + +"An' I've been round it five times," cried a third, "an' every time wos +wuss than another, the gales wos so tree-mendous!" + +"And I've been round it no times at all," cried Peterkin, with an +impudent wink of his eye, "an' _that_ time I wos blow'd inside out!" + +Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough weather, and, +in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were sailing gently, before a +warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific Ocean. Thus we proceeded on our +voyage, sometimes bounding merrily before a fair breeze, at other times +floating calmly on the glassy wave and fishing for the curious +inhabitants of the deep,--all of which, although the sailors thought +little of them, were strange, and interesting, and very wonderful to me. + +At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I shall never +forget the delight with which I gazed,--when we chanced to pass one,--at +the pure, white, dazzling shores, and the verdant palm-trees, which +looked bright and beautiful in the sunshine. And often did we three long +to be landed on one, imagining that we should certainly find perfect +happiness there! Our wish was granted sooner than we expected. + +One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm burst upon +our ship. The first squall of wind carried away two of our masts; and +left only the foremast standing. Even this, however, was more than +enough, for we did not dare to hoist a rag of sail on it. For five days +the tempest raged in all its fury. Everything was swept off the decks +except one small boat. The steersman was lashed to the wheel, lest he +should be washed away, and we all gave ourselves up for lost. The +captain said that he had no idea where we were, as we had been blown far +out of our course; and we feared much that we might get among the +dangerous coral reefs which are so numerous in the Pacific. At day-break +on the sixth morning of the gale we saw land ahead. It was an island +encircled by a reef of coral on which the waves broke in fury. There was +calm water within this reef, but we could only see one narrow opening +into it. For this opening we steered, but, ere we reached it, a +tremendous wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder completely off, and +left us at the mercy of the winds and waves. + +"It's all over with us now, lads," said the captain to the men; "get the +boat ready to launch; we shall be on the rocks in less than half an +hour." + +The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was little +hope of so small a boat living in such a sea. + +"Come boys," said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to me and Peterkin, as we +stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our fate;--"Come boys, we three shall +stick together. You see it is impossible that the little boat can reach +the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure to upset, so I mean rather +to trust myself to a large oar, I see through the telescope that the ship +will strike at the tail of the reef, where the waves break into the quiet +water inside; so, if we manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over +the breakers, we may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will you join +me?" + +We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with confidence, +although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his voice, that he had +little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the white waves that lashed +the reef and boiled against the rocks as if in fury, I felt that there +was but a step between us and death. My heart sank within me; but at +that moment my thoughts turned to my beloved mother, and I remembered +those words, which were among the last that she said to me--"Ralph, my +dearest child, always remember in the hour of danger to look to your Lord +and Saviour Jesus Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your +body and your soul." So I felt much comforted when I thought thereon. + +The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready with the boat, +and the captain beside them giving orders, when a tremendous wave came +towards us. We three ran towards the bow to lay hold of our oar, and had +barely reached it when the wave fell on the deck with a crash like +thunder. At the same moment the ship struck, the foremast broke off +close to the deck and went over the side, carrying the boat and men along +with it. Our oar got entangled with the wreck, and Jack seized an axe to +cut it free, but, owing to the motion of the ship, he missed the cordage +and struck the axe deep into the oar. Another wave, however, washed it +clear of the wreck. We all seized hold of it, and the next instant we +were struggling in the wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat +whirling in the surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming waves. +Then I became insensible. + +On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of soft +grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with Peterkin on his +knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples with water, and +endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a wound in my forehead. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +The Coral Island--Our first cogitations after landing, and the result of +them--We conclude that the island is uninhabited. + +There is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in recovering from +a state of insensibility, which is almost indescribable; a sort of +dreamy, confused consciousness; a half-waking half-sleeping condition, +accompanied with a feeling of weariness, which, however, is by no means +disagreeable. As I slowly recovered and heard the voice of Peterkin +inquiring whether I felt better, I thought that I must have overslept +myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for being lazy; but before I +could leap up in haste, the thought seemed to vanish suddenly away, and I +fancied that I must have been ill. Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, +and I thought of home, and the garden at the back of my father's cottage, +with its luxuriant flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my +dear mother trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. But the +roaring of the surf put these delightful thoughts to flight, and I was +back again at sea, watching the dolphins and the flying-fish, and reefing +topsails off the wild and stormy Cape Horn. Gradually the roar of the +surf became louder and more distinct. I thought of being wrecked far far +away from my native land, and slowly opened my eyes to meet those of my +companion Jack, who, with a look of intense anxiety, was gazing into my +face. + +"Speak to us, my dear Ralph," whispered Jack, tenderly, "are you better +now?" + +I smiled and looked up, saying, "Better; why, what do you mean, Jack? I'm +quite well." + +"Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in this way?" said +Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for the poor boy had been really +under the impression that I was dying. + +I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my forehead, +found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I had lost a good +deal of blood. + +"Come, come, Ralph," said Jack, pressing me gently backward, "lie down, +my boy; you're not right yet. Wet your lips with this water, it's cool +and clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at hand. There now, +don't say a word, hold your tongue," said he, seeing me about to speak. +"I'll tell you all about it, but you must not utter a syllable till you +have rested well." + +"Oh! don't stop him from speaking, Jack," said Peterkin, who, now that +his fears for my safety were removed, busied himself in erecting a +shelter of broken branches in order to protect me from the wind; which, +however, was almost unnecessary, for the rock beside which I had been +laid completely broke the force of the gale. "Let him speak, Jack; it's +a comfort to hear that he's alive, after lying there stiff and white and +sulky for a whole hour, just like an Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a +fellow as you are, Ralph; always up to mischief. You've almost knocked +out all my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It's very wicked of you, indeed it is." + +While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite clear +again, and I began to understand my position. "What do you mean by +saying I half choked you, Peterkin?" said I. + +"What do I mean? Is English not your mother tongue, or do you want me to +repeat it in French, by way of making it clearer? Don't you remember--" + +"I remember nothing," said I, interrupting him, "after we were thrown +into the sea." + +{Slowly recovering: p24.jpg} + +"Hush, Peterkin," said Jack, "you're exciting Ralph with your nonsense. +I'll explain it to you. You recollect that after the ship struck, we +three sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I noticed that the oar +struck your head and gave you that cut on the brow, which nearly stunned +you, so that you grasped Peterkin round the neck without knowing +apparently what you were about. In doing so you pushed the +telescope,--which you clung to as if it had been your life,--against +Peterkin's mouth--" + +"Pushed it against his mouth!" interrupted Peterkin, "say crammed it down +his throat. Why, there's a distinct mark of the brass rim on the back of +my gullet at this moment!" + +"Well, well, be that as it may," continued Jack, "you clung to him, +Ralph, till I feared you really would choke him; but I saw that he had a +good hold of the oar, so I exerted myself to the utmost to push you +towards the shore, which we luckily reached without much trouble, for the +water inside the reef is quite calm." + +"But the captain and crew, what of them?" I inquired anxiously. + +Jack shook his head. + +"Are they lost?" + +"No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not much chance of +their being saved. The ship struck at the very tail of the island on +which we are cast. When the boat was tossed into the sea it fortunately +did not upset, although it shipped a good deal of water, and all the men +managed to scramble into it; but before they could get the oars out the +gale carried them past the point and away to leeward of the island. After +we landed I saw them endeavouring to pull towards us, but as they had +only one pair of oars out of the eight that belong to the boat, and as +the wind was blowing right in their teeth, they gradually lost ground. +Then I saw them put about and hoist some sort of sail,--a blanket, I +fancy, for it was too small for the boat,--and in half an hour they were +out of sight." + +"Poor fellows," I murmured sorrowfully. + +"But the more I think about it, I've better hope of them," continued +Jack, in a more cheerful tone. "You see, Ralph, I've read a great deal +about these South Sea Islands, and I know that in many places they are +scattered about in thousands over the sea, so they're almost sure to fall +in with one of them before long." + +"I'm sure I hope so," said Peterkin, earnestly. "But what has become of +the wreck, Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there while I was +watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to pieces?" + +"No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the bottom," replied +Jack. "As I said before, she struck on the tail of the island and stove +in her bow, but the next breaker swung her clear, and she floated away to +leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made a hard struggle to reach her, +but long before they came near her she filled and went down. It was +after she foundered that I saw them trying to pull to the island." + +There wan a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I have no doubt +that each was revolving in his mind our extraordinary position. For my +part I cannot say that my reflections were very agreeable. I knew that +we were on an island, for Jack had said so, but whether it was inhabited +or not I did not know. If it should be inhabited, I felt certain, from +all I had heard of South Sea Islanders, that we should be roasted alive +and eaten. If it should turn out to be uninhabited, I fancied that we +should be starved to death. "Oh!" thought I, "if the ship had only stuck +on the rocks we might have done pretty well, for we could have obtained +provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a shelter, but +now--alas! alas! we are lost!" These last words I uttered aloud in my +distress. + +"Lost! Ralph?" exclaimed Jack, while a smile overspread his hearty +countenance. "Saved, you should have said. Your cogitations seem to have +taken a wrong road, and led you to a wrong conclusion." + +"Do you know what conclusion _I_ have come to?" said Peterkin. "I have +made up my mind that it's capital,--first rate,--the best thing that ever +happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that ever lay before three +jolly young tars. We've got an island all to ourselves. We'll take +possession in the name of the king; we'll go and enter the service of its +black inhabitants. Of course we'll rise, naturally, to the top of +affairs. White men always do in savage countries. You shall be king, +Jack; Ralph, prime minister, and I shall be--" + +"The court jester," interrupted Jack. + +"No," retorted Peterkin, "I'll have no title at all. I shall merely +accept a highly responsible situation under government, for you see, +Jack, I'm fond of having an enormous salary and nothing to do." + +"But suppose there are no natives?" + +"Then we'll build a charming villa, and plant a lovely garden round it, +stuck all full of the most splendiferous tropical flowers, and we'll farm +the land, plant, sow, reap, eat, sleep, and be merry." + +"But to be serious," said Jack, assuming a grave expression of +countenance, which I observed always had the effect of checking +Peterkin's disposition to make fun of everything, "we are really in +rather an uncomfortable position. If this is a desert island, we shall +have to live very much like the wild beasts, for we have not a tool of +any kind, not even a knife." + +"Yes, we have _that_," said Peterkin, fumbling in his trousers pocket, +from which he drew forth a small penknife with only one blade, and that +was broken. + +"Well, that's better than nothing; but come," said Jack, rising, "we are +wasting our time in _talking_ instead of _doing_. You seem well enough +to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our pockets, and then +let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort of island we have been +cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it seems likely to be our home for +some time to come." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy discovery--Our +island described--Jack proves himself to be learned and sagacious above +his fellows--Curious discoveries--Natural lemonade! + +We now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into our +personal property. When we reached the shore, after being wrecked, my +companions had taken off part of their clothes and spread them out in the +sun to dry, for, although the gale was raging fiercely, there was not a +single cloud in the bright sky. They had also stripped off most part of +my wet clothes and spread them also on the rocks. Having resumed our +garments, we now searched all our pockets with the utmost care, and laid +their contents out on a flat stone before us; and, now that our minds +were fully alive to our condition, it was with no little anxiety that we +turned our several pockets inside out, in order that nothing might escape +us. When all was collected together we found that our worldly goods +consisted of the following articles:-- + +First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about the middle +and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on its edge. +(Peterkin said of this, with his usual pleasantry, that it would do for a +saw as well as a knife, which was a great advantage.) Second, An old +German-silver pencil-case without any lead in it. Third, A piece of whip- +cord about six yards long. Fourth, A sailmaker's needle of a small size. +Fifth, A ship's telescope, which I happened to have in my hand at the +time the ship struck, and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was +in the water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out of my +grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I cannot understand why +I kept such a firm hold of this telescope. They say that a drowning man +will clutch at a straw. Perhaps it may have been some such feeling in +me, for I did not know that it was in my hand at the time we were +wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure in having it with us now, +although we did not see that it could be of much use to us, as the glass +at the small end was broken to pieces. Our sixth article was a brass +ring which Jack always wore on his little finger. I never understood why +he wore it, for Jack was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to +care for ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said "it was in memory of the +girl he left behind him!" But as he never spoke of this girl to either +of us, I am inclined to think that Peterkin was either jesting or +mistaken. In addition to these articles we had a little bit of tinder, +and the clothes on our backs. These last were as follows:-- + +Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair of +sailors' thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel shirt, a blue jacket, and +a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, besides a pair of worsted socks, +and a cotton pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen portraits of Lord Nelson +printed on it, and a union Jack in the middle. Peterkin had on a striped +flannel shirt,--which he wore outside his trousers, and belted round his +waist, after the manner of a tunic,--and a round black straw hat. He had +no jacket, having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; +but this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island proved +to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I often preferred +to go about without our jackets. Peterkin had also a pair of white +cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief with white spots all over it. My +own costume consisted of a blue flannel shirt, a blue jacket, a black +cap, and a pair of worsted socks, besides the shoes and canvass trousers +already mentioned. This was all we had, and besides these things we had +nothing else; but, when we thought of the danger from which we had +escaped, and how much worse off we might have been had the ship struck on +the reef during the night, we felt very thankful that we were possessed +of so much, although, I must confess, we sometimes wished that we had had +a little more. + +While we were examining these things, and talking about them, Jack +suddenly started and exclaimed-- + +"The oar! we have forgotten the oar." + +"What good will that do us?" said Peterkin; "there's wood enough on the +island to make a thousand oars." + +"Ay, lad," replied Jack, "but there's a bit of hoop iron at the end of +it, and that may be of much use to us." + +"Very true," said I, "let us go fetch it;" and with that we all three +rose and hastened down to the beach. I still felt a little weak from +loss of blood, so that my companions soon began to leave me behind; but +Jack perceived this, and, with his usual considerate good nature, turned +back to help me. This was now the first time that I had looked well +about me since landing, as the spot where I had been laid was covered +with thick bushes which almost hid the country from our view. As we now +emerged from among these and walked down the sandy beach together, I cast +my eyes about, and, truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose +at the beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale had +suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it dashed our +ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after accomplishing that. +The island on which we stood was hilly, and covered almost everywhere +with the most beautiful and richly coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, +none of which I knew the names of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa- +nut palms, which I recognised at once from the many pictures that I had +seen of them before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling whiteness +lined this bright green shore, and upon it there fell a gentle ripple of +the sea. This last astonished me much, for I recollected that at home +the sea used to fall in huge billows on the shore long after a storm had +subsided. But on casting my glance out to sea the cause became apparent. +About a mile distant from the shore I saw the great billows of the ocean +rolling like a green wall, and falling with a long, loud roar, upon a low +coral reef, where they were dashed into white foam and flung up in clouds +of spray. This spray sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here +and there, a beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling +drops. We afterwards found that this coral reef extended quite round the +island, and formed a natural breakwater to it. Beyond this the sea rose +and tossed violently from the effects of the storm; but between the reef +and the shore it was as calm and as smooth as a pond. + +My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at sight of so +many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned suddenly to the +contemplation of the Creator of them all. I mention this the more +gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed to say, I very seldom thought +of my Creator, although I was constantly surrounded by the most beautiful +and wonderful of His works. I observed from the expression of my +companion's countenance that he too derived much joy from the splendid +scenery, which was all the more agreeable to us after our long voyage on +the salt sea. There, the breeze was fresh and cold, but here it was +delightfully mild; and, when a puff blew off the land, it came laden with +the most exquisite perfume that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we +were startled by a loud "Huzza!" from Peterkin, and, on looking towards +the edge of the sea, we saw him capering and jumping about like a monkey, +and ever and anon tugging with all his might at something that lay upon +the shore. + +"What an odd fellow he is, to be sure," said Jack, taking me by the arm +and hurrying forward; "come, let us hasten to see what it is." + +"Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what we want," cried +Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging with all his power. "First +rate; just the very ticket!" + +I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin was in the +habit of using very remarkable and peculiar phrases. And I am free to +confess that I did not well understand the meaning of some of them,--such, +for instance, as "the very ticket;" but I think it my duty to recount +everything relating to my adventures with a strict regard to truthfulness +in as far as my memory serves me; so I write, as nearly as possible, the +exact words that my companions spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain +what he meant by "ticket," but he always answered me by going into fits +of laughter. However, by observing the occasions on which he used it, I +came to understand that it meant to show that something was remarkably +good, or fortunate. + +On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to pull the +axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, Jack struck it +while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among which it had become +entangled at the bow of the ship. Fortunately for us the axe had +remained fast in the oar, and even now, all Peterkin's strength could not +draw it out of the cut. + +"Ah! that is capital indeed," cried Jack, at the same time giving the axe +a wrench that plucked it out of the tough wood. "How fortunate this is! +It will be of more value to us than a hundred knives, and the edge is +quite new and sharp." + +"I'll answer for the toughness of the handle at any rate," cried +Peterkin; "my arms are nearly pulled out of the sockets. But see here, +our luck is great. There is iron on the blade." He pointed to a piece +of hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round the blade of the +oar to prevent it from splitting. + +This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on his knees, and +with the edge of the axe began carefully to force out the nails. But as +they were firmly fixed in, and the operation blunted our axe, we carried +the oar up with us to the place where we had left the rest of our things, +intending to burn the wood away from the iron at a more convenient time. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, after we had laid it on the stone which contained +our little all, "I propose that we should go to the tail of the island, +where the ship struck, which is only a quarter of a mile off, and see if +anything else has been thrown ashore. I don't expect anything, but it is +well to see. When we get back here it will be time to have our supper +and prepare our beds." + +"Agreed!" cried Peterkin and I together, as, indeed, we would have agreed +to any proposal that Jack made; for, besides his being older and much +stronger and taller than either of us, he was a very clever fellow, and I +think would have induced people much older than himself to choose him for +their leader, especially if they required to be led on a bold enterprise. + +Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so brightly in the +rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite dazzled by its glare, it +suddenly came into Peterkin's head that we had nothing to eat except the +wild berries which grew in profusion at our feet. + +"What shall we do, Jack?" said he, with a rueful look; "perhaps they may +be poisonous!" + +"No fear," replied Jack, confidently; "I have observed that a few of them +are not unlike some of the berries that grow wild on our own native +hills. Besides, I saw one or two strange birds eating them just a few +minutes ago, and what won't kill the birds won't kill us. But look up +there, Peterkin," continued Jack, pointing to the branched head of a +cocoa-nut palm. "There are nuts for us in all stages." + +"So there are!" cried Peterkin, who being of a very unobservant nature +had been too much taken up with other things to notice anything so high +above his head as the fruit of a palm tree. But, whatever faults my +young comrade had, he could not be blamed for want of activity or animal +spirits. Indeed, the nuts had scarcely been pointed out to him when he +bounded up the tall stem of the tree like a squirrel, and, in a few +minutes, returned with three nuts, each as large as a man's fist. + +"You had better keep them till we return," raid Jack. "Let us finish our +work before eating." + +"So be it, captain, go ahead," cried Peterkin, thrusting the nuts into +his trousers pocket. "In fact I don't want to eat just now, but I would +give a good deal for a drink. Oh that I could find a spring! but I don't +see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I say, Jack, how does it happen +that you seem to be up to everything? You have told us the names of half- +a-dozen trees already, and yet you say that you were never in the South +Seas before." + +"I'm not up to _everything_, Peterkin, as you'll find out ere long," +replied Jack, with a smile; "but I have been a great reader of books of +travel and adventure all my life, and that has put me up to a good many +things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with." + +"Oh, Jack, that's all humbug. If you begin to lay everything to the +credit of books, I'll quite lose my opinion of you," cried Peterkin, with +a look of contempt. "I've seen a lot o' fellows that were _always_ +poring over books, and when they came to try to _do_ anything, they were +no better than baboons!" + +"You are quite right," retorted Jack; "and I have seen a lot of fellows +who never looked into books at all, who knew nothing about anything +except the things they had actually seen, and very little they knew even +about these. Indeed, some were so ignorant that they did not know that +cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!" + +I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there was much +truth in it, as to Peterkin's ignorance. + +"Humph! maybe you're right," answered Peterkin; "but I would not give +_tuppence_ for a man of books, if he had nothing else in him." + +"Neither would I," said Jack; "but that's no reason why you should run +books down, or think less of me for having read them. Suppose, now, +Peterkin, that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give you a long +and particular account of the way to do it, would not that be very +useful?" + +"No doubt of it," said Peterkin, laughing. + +"And suppose I were to write the account in a letter instead of telling +you in words, would that be less useful?" + +"Well--no, perhaps not." + +"Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in the form of a +book, would it not be as good and useful as ever?" + +"Oh, bother! Jack, you're a philosopher, and that's worse than anything!" +cried Peterkin, with a look of pretended horror. + +"Very well, Peterkin, we shall see," returned Jack, halting under the +shade of a cocoa-nut tree. "You said you were thirsty just a minute ago; +now, jump up that tree and bring down a nut,--not a ripe one, bring a +green, unripe one." + +Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in earnest, he +obeyed. + +"Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it to your mouth, old +fellow," said Jack. + +Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into uncontrollable +laughter at the changes that instantly passed over his expressive +countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to his mouth, and thrown back +his head in order to catch what came out of it, than his eyes opened to +twice their ordinary size with astonishment, while his throat moved +vigorously in the act of swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense +delight overspread his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being +firmly fixed to the hole in the nut, could not take part in the +expression; but he endeavoured to make up for this by winking at us +excessively with his right eye. At length he stopped, and, drawing a +long breath, exclaimed-- + +"Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you're a Briton--the best fellow I +ever met in my life. Only taste that!" said he, turning to me and +holding the nut to my mouth. I immediately drank, and certainly I was +much surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed copiously down my +throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet taste, mingled with acid; +in fact, it was the likest thing to lemonade I ever tasted, and was most +grateful and refreshing. I handed the nut to Jack, who, after tasting +it, said, "Now, Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa +nut in my life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once +read that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is true!" + +"And pray," asked Peterkin, "what sort of 'stuff' does the ripe nut +contain?" + +"A hollow kernel," answered Jack, "with a liquid like milk in it; but it +does not satisfy thirst so well as hunger. It is very wholesome food I +believe." + +"Meat and drink on the same tree!" cried Peterkin; "washing in the sea, +lodging on the ground,--and all for nothing! My dear boys, we're set up +for life; it must be the ancient Paradise,--hurrah!" and Peterkin tossed +his straw hat in the air, and ran along the beach hallooing like a madman +with delight. + +We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were very unlike +Paradise in many things. But more of this in its proper place. + +We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had struck, but +did not find a single article, although we searched carefully among the +coral rocks, which at this place jutted out so far as nearly to join the +reef that encircled the island. Just as we were about to return, +however, we saw something black floating in a little cove that had +escaped our observation. Running forward, we drew it from the water, and +found it to be a long thick leather boot, such as fishermen at home wear; +and a few paces farther on we picked up its fellow. We at once +recognised these as having belonged to our captain, for he had worn them +during the whole of the storm, in order to guard his legs from the waves +and spray that constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on +seeing them was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack soon put +my mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if the captain had +been drowned with the boots on, he would certainly have been washed +ashore along with them, and that he had no doubt whatever he had kicked +them off while in the sea, that he might swim more easily. + +Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, as Jack +said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest too. I also +tried them, but, although I was long enough in the legs for them, they +were much too large in the feet for me; so we handed them to Jack, who +was anxious to make me keep them, but as they fitted his large limbs and +feet as if they had been made for him, I would not hear of it, so he +consented at last to use them. I may remark, however, that Jack did not +use them often, as they were extremely heavy. + +It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our encampment; so we +put off our visit to the top of a hill till next day, and employed the +light that yet remained to us in cutting down a quantity of boughs and +the broad leaves of a tree, of which none of us knew the name. With +these we erected a sort of rustic bower, in which we meant to pass the +night. There was no absolute necessity for this, because the air of our +island was so genial and balmy that we could have slept quite well +without any shelter; but we were so little used to sleeping in the open +air, that we did not quite relish the idea of lying down without any +covering over us: besides, our bower would shelter us from the night dews +or rain, if any should happen to fall. Having strewed the floor with +leaves and dry grass, we bethought ourselves of supper. + +But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no means of +making a fire. + +"Now, there's a fix!--what shall we do?" said Peterkin, while we both +turned our eyes to Jack, to whom we always looked in our difficulties. +Jack seemed not a little perplexed. + +"There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach," said he, "but they are +of no use at all without a steel. However, we must try." So saying, he +went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. On one of these he +placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; but it was with great +difficulty that a very small spark was struck out of the flints, and the +tinder, being a bad, hard piece, would not catch. He then tried the bit +of hoop iron, which would not strike fire at all; and after that the back +of the axe, with no better success. During all these trials Peterkin sat +with his hands in his pockets, gazing with a most melancholy visage at +our comrade, his face growing longer and more miserable at each +successive failure. + +"Oh dear!" he sighed, "I would not care a button for the cooking of our +victuals,--perhaps they don't need it,--but it's so dismal to eat one's +supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital day, that it's a pity +to finish off in this glum style. Oh, I have it!" he cried, starting up; +"the spy-glass,--the big glass at the end is a burning-glass!" + +"You forget that we have no sun," said I. + +Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the telescope he had +quite overlooked the absence of the sun. + +"Ah, boys, I've got it now!" exclaimed Jack, rising and cutting a branch +from a neighbouring bush, which be stripped of its leaves. "I recollect +seeing this done once at home. Hand me the bit of whip-cord." With the +cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then he cut a piece, about three +inches long, off the end of a dead branch, which he pointed at the two +ends. Round this he passed the cord of the bow, and placed one end +against his chest, which was protected from its point by a chip of wood; +the other point he placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to +saw vigorously with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill +while boring a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds the tinder +began to smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; and in less than a +quarter of an hour we were drinking our lemonade and eating cocoa nuts +round a fire that would have roasted an entire sheep, while the smoke, +flames, and sparks, flew up among the broad leaves of the overhanging +palm trees, and cast a warm glow upon our leafy bower. + +That night the starry sky looked down through the gently rustling trees +upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the surf upon the coral +reef was our lullaby. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith--We luxuriate in the sea, +try our diving powers, and make enchanting excursions among the coral +groves at the bottom of the ocean--The wonders of the deep enlarged upon. + +What a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious morning, and +find the rising sun staring into your face with dazzling brilliancy!--to +see the birds twittering in the bushes, and to hear the murmuring of a +rill, or the soft hissing ripples as they fall upon the sea-shore! At +any time and in any place such sights and sounds are most charming, but +more especially are they so when one awakens to them, for the fist time, +in a novel and romantic situation, with the soft sweet air of a tropical +climate mingling with the fresh smell of the sea, and stirring the +strange leaves that flutter overhead and around one, or ruffling the +plumage of the stranger birds that fly inquiringly around, as if to +demand what business we have to intrude uninvited on their domains. When +I awoke on the morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this most +delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of leaves, +gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees into the clear blue +sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that passed slowly across it, my +heart expanded more and more with an exulting gladness, the like of which +I had never felt before. While I meditated, my thoughts again turned to +the great and kind Creator of this beautiful world, as they had done on +the previous day, when I first beheld the sea and the coral reef, with +the mighty waves dashing over it into the calm waters of the lagoon. + +While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, for I had +faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to my beloved +mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was with a feeling of +dismay that I remembered I had left it in the ship. I was much troubled +about this. However, I consoled myself with reflecting that I could keep +the second part of my promise to her, namely, that I should never omit to +say my prayers. So I rose quietly, lest I should disturb my companions, +who were still asleep, and stepped aside into the bushes for this +purpose. + +On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay down to think +over our situation. Just at that moment I was attracted by the sight of +a very small parrot, which Jack afterwards told me was called a paroquet. +It was seated on a twig that overhung Peterkin's head, and I was speedily +lost in admiration of its bright green plumage, which was mingled with +other gay colours. While I looked I observed that the bird turned its +head slowly from side to side and looked downwards, fist with the one +eye, and then with the other. On glancing downwards I observed that +Peterkin's mouth was wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking +into it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in my +composition, and that I never could understand a joke. In regard to the +latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, when they were explained +to me, I understood jokes as well as most people: but in regard to the +former he must certainly have been wrong, for this bird seemed to me to +be extremely funny; and I could not help thinking that, if it should +happen to faint, or slip its foot, and fall off the twig into Peterkin's +mouth, he would perhaps think it funny too! Suddenly the paroquet bent +down its head and uttered a loud scream in his face. This awoke him, +and, with a cry of surprise, he started up, while the foolish bird flew +precipitately away. + +"Oh you monster!" cried Peterkin, shaking his fist at the bird. Then he +yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked what o'clock it was. + +I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches were at the +bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a little past sunrise. + +Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he looked up into the +bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his eyes glistened with delight, +and he uttered a faint "hurrah!" and yawned again. Then he gazed slowly +round, till, observing the calm sea through an opening in the bushes, he +started suddenly up as if he had received an electric shock, uttered a +vehement shout, flung off his garments, and, rushing over the white +sands, plunged into the water. The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow +with a look of grave surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of +intelligence on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that he +only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his feet, +threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a lion-like spring, +dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea with such force as quite +to envelop Peterkin in a shower of spray. Jack was a remarkably good +swimmer and diver, so that after his plunge we saw no sign of him for +nearly a minute; after which he suddenly emerged, with a cry of joy, a +good many yards out from the shore. My spirits were so much raised by +seeing all this that I, too, hastily threw off my garments and +endeavoured to imitate Jack's vigorous bound; but I was so awkward that +my foot caught on a stump, and I fell to the ground; then I slipped on a +stone while running over the mud, and nearly fell again, much to the +amusement of Peterkin, who laughed heartily, and called me a "slow +coach," while Jack cried out, "Come along, Ralph, and I'll help you." +However, when I got into the water I managed very well, for I was really +a good swimmer, and diver too. I could not, indeed, equal Jack, who was +superior to any Englishman I ever saw, but I infinitely surpassed +Peterkin, who could only swim a little, and could not dive at all. + +While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in running along +the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, and occasionally +dived for stones. I shall never forget my surprise and delight on first +beholding the bottom of the sea. As I have before stated, the water +within the reef was as calm as a pond; and, as there was no wind, it was +quite clear, from the surface to the bottom, so that we could see down +easily even at a depth of twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I dived +in shallower water, we expected to have found sand and stones, instead of +which we found ourselves in what appeared really to be an enchanted +garden. The whole of the bottom of the lagoon, as we called the calm +water within the reef, was covered with coral of every shape, size, and +hue. Some portions were formed like large mushrooms; others appeared +like the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached to them; but the +most common kind was a species of branching coral, and some portions were +of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure white. Among this there grew +large quantities of sea-weed of the richest hues imaginable, and of the +most graceful forms; while innumerable fishes--blue, red, yellow, green, +and striped--sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this submarine +garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our approaching them. + +On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, Jack and I +rose close to each other. + +"Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so lovely?" said Jack, as +he flung the spray from his hair. + +"Never," I replied. "It appears to me like fairy realms. I can scarcely +believe that we are not dreaming." + +"Dreaming!" cried Jack, "do you know, Ralph, I'm half tempted to think +that we really are dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to make the most +of it, and dream another dive; so here goes,--down again, my boy!" + +We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other while under +water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we could keep down much +longer than I ever recollect having done in our own seas at home. I +believe that this was owing to the heat of the water, which was so warm +that we afterwards found we could remain in it for two and three hours at +a time without feeling any unpleasant effects such as we used to +experience in the sea at home. When Jack reached the bottom, he grasped +the coral stems, and crept along on his hands and knees, peeping under +the sea-weed and among the rocks. I observed him also pick up one or two +large oysters, and retain them in his grasp, as if he meant to take them +up with him, so I also gathered a few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a +fish with blue and yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its +tail, but did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and attempted +to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang like an arrow to +the surface, where, on following him, I found him gasping and coughing, +and spitting water from his mouth. In a few minutes he recovered, and we +both turned to swim ashore. + +"I declare, Ralph," said he, "that I actually tried to laugh under +water." + +"So I saw," I replied; "and I observed that you very nearly caught that +fish by the tail. It would have done capitally for breakfast if you +had." + +"Breakfast enough here," said he, holding up the oysters, as we landed +and ran up the beach. "Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. Split open +these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. They'll agree with +the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no doubt." + +Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and opened them with +the edge of our axe, exclaiming, "Now, that _is_ capital. There's +nothing I'm so fond of." + +"Ah! that's lucky," remarked Jack. "I'll be able to keep you in good +order now, Master Peterkin. You know you can't dive any better than a +cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall have no oysters for +breakfast." + +"I'm very glad that our prospect of breakfast is so good," said I, "for +I'm very hungry." + +"Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph," said Peterkin, holding a +large oyster to my lips. I opened my mouth and swallowed it in silence, +and really it was remarkably good. + +We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for spending the +day. We had no difficulty with the fire this morning, as our burning- +glass was an admirable one; and while we roasted a few oysters and ate +our cocoa nuts, we held a long, animated conversation about our plans for +the future. What those plans were, and how we carried them into effect, +the reader shall see hereafter. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable and +interesting discoveries--We get a dreadful fright--The bread-fruit +tree--Wonderful peculiarity of some of the fruit trees--Signs of former +inhabitants. + +Our first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles we +possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a small cave +which we discovered near our encampment. This cave, we hoped, might be +useful to us afterwards as a store-house. Then we cut two large clubs +off a species of very hard tree which grew near at hand. One of these +was given to Peterkin, the other to me, and Jack armed himself with the +axe. We took these precautions because we purposed to make an excursion +to the top of the mountains of the interior, in order to obtain a better +view of our island. Of course we knew not what dangers might befall us +by the way, so thought it best to be prepared. + +Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished our fire, we +sallied forth and walked a short distance along the sea-beach, till we +came to the entrance of a valley, through which flowed the rivulet before +mentioned. Here we turned our backs on the sea and struck into the +interior. + +The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley was truly +splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle rise in the land, +which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart on each side of the +valley. These ridges,--which, as well as the low grounds between them, +were covered with trees and shrubs of the most luxuriant kind--continued +to recede inland for about two miles, when they joined the foot of a +small mountain. This hill rose rather abruptly from the head of the +valley, and was likewise entirely covered even to the top with trees, +except on one particular spot near the left shoulder, where was a bare +and rocky place of a broken and savage character. Beyond this hill we +could not see, and we therefore directed our course up the banks of the +rivulet towards the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, should +that be possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was. + +Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, carrying the +axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his enormous club, came second, as +he said he should like to be in a position to defend me if any danger +should threaten. I brought up the rear, but, having been more taken up +with the wonderful and curious things I saw at starting than with +thoughts of possible danger, I had very foolishly left my club behind me. +Although, as I have said the trees and bushes were very luxuriant, they +were not so thickly crowded together as to hinder our progress among +them. We were able to wind in and out, and to follow the banks of the +stream quite easily, although, it is true, the height and thickness of +the foliage prevented us from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a jutting- +out rock on the hill sides afforded us a position whence we could enjoy +the romantic view and mark our progress towards the foot of the hill. I +wag particularly struck, during the walk, with the richness of the +undergrowth in most places, and recognised many berries and plants that +resembled those of my native land, especially a tall, elegantly-formed +fern, which emitted an agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of +flowers, too, but I did not see so many of these as I should have +expected in such a climate. We also saw a great variety of small birds +of bright plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one that awoke +Peterkin so rudely in the morning. + +Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering anything to +alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing close under a part +of the hill which was hidden from our view by the broad leaves of the +banana trees, which grew in great luxuriance in that part. Jack was just +preparing to force his way through this thicket, when we were startled +and arrested by a strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to +us quite different from any of the sounds we had heard during the +previous part of our walk. + +"Hallo!" cried Peterkin, stopping short and grasping his club with both +hands, "what's that?" + +Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right hand, while +with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and endeavoured to peer +amongst them. + +"I can see nothing," he said, after a short pause. + +"I think it--" + +Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all sprang back +and stood on the defensive. For myself, having forgotten my club, and +not having taken the precaution to cut another, I buttoned my jacket, +doubled my fists, and threw myself into a boxing attitude. I must say, +however, that I felt somewhat uneasy; and my companions afterwards +confessed that their thoughts at this moment had been instantly filled +with all they had ever heard or read of wild beasts and savages, +torturings at the stake, roastings alive, and such like horrible things. +Suddenly the pattering noise increased with tenfold violence. It was +followed by a fearful crash among the bushes, which was rapidly repeated, +as if some gigantic animal were bounding towards us. In another moment +an enormous rock came crashing through the shrubbery, followed by a cloud +of dust and small stones, flew close past the spot where we stood, +carrying bushes and young trees along with it. + +"Pooh! is that all?" exclaimed Peterkin, wiping the perspiration off his +forehead. "Why, I thought it was all the wild men and beasts in the +South Sea Islands galloping on in one grand charge to sweep us off the +face of the earth, instead of a mere stone tumbling down the mountain +side." + +"Nevertheless," remarked Jack, "if that same stone had hit any of us, it +would have rendered the charge you speak of quite unnecessary, Peterkin." + +This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. On examining the +spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close to the foot of a very +rugged precipice, from which stones of various sizes were always tumbling +at intervals. Indeed, the numerous fragments lying scattered all around +might have suggested the cause of the sound, had we not been too suddenly +alarmed to think of anything. + +We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future excursions into +the interior, we would be careful to avoid this dangerous precipice. + +Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and prepared to ascend +it. Here Jack made a discovery which caused us all very great joy. This +was a tree of a remarkably beautiful appearance, which Jack confidently +declared to be the celebrated bread-fruit tree. + +"Is it celebrated?" inquired Peterkin, with a look of great simplicity. + +"It is," replied Jack + +"That's odd, now," rejoined Peterkin; "never heard of it before." + +"Then it's not so celebrated as I thought it was," returned Jack, quietly +squeezing Peterkin's hat over his eyes; "but listen, you ignorant boobie! +and hear of it now." + +Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as much +interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one of the most +valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears two, sometimes three, +crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit is very like wheaten bread in +appearance, and that it constitutes the principal food of many of the +islanders. + +"So," said Peterkin, "we seem to have everything ready prepared to our +hands in this wonderful island,--lemonade ready bottled in nuts, and loaf- +bread growing on the trees!" + +Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious fact that +he spoke almost the literal truth. "Moreover," continued Jack, "the +bread-fruit tree affords a capital gum, which serves the natives for +pitching their canoes; the bark of the young branches is made by them +into cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and of a good colour, they +build their houses. So you see, lads, that we have no lack of material +here to make us comfortable, if we are only clever enough to use it." + +"But are you sure that that's it?" asked Peterkin. + +"Quite sure," replied Jack; "for I was particularly interested in the +account I once read of it, and I remember the description well. I am +sorry, however, that I have forgotten the descriptions of many other +trees which I am sure we have seen to-day, if we could but recognise +them. So you see, Peterkin, I'm not up to everything yet." + +"Never mind, Jack," said Peterkin, with a grave, patronizing expression +of countenance, patting his tall companion on the shoulder,--"never mind, +Jack; you know a good deal for your age. You're a clever boy, sir,--a +promising young man; and if you only go on as you have begun, sir, you +will--" + +The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping up +Peterkin's heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick shrubs, where, +finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking in the sunshine, while +Jack and I examined the bread-tree. + +We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its broad leaves, +which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply indented, and of a +glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The fruit, with which it was loaded, +was nearly round, and appeared to be about six inches in diameter, with a +rough rind, marked with lozenge-shaped divisions. It was of various +colours, from light pea-green to brown and rich yellow. Jack said that +the yellow was the ripe fruit. We afterwards found that most of the +fruit-trees on the island were evergreens, and that we might, when we +wished, pluck the blossom and the ripe fruit from the same tree. Such a +wonderful difference from the trees of our own country surprised us not a +little. The bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; the trunk was +about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be twenty feet high, being +quite destitute of branches up to that height, where it branched off into +a beautiful and umbrageous head. We noticed that the fruit hung in +clusters of twos and threes on the branches; but as we were anxious to +get to the top of the hill, we refrained from attempting to pluck any at +that time. + +Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and it was +with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep sides of the +hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if possible a grander, prospect +met our gaze. We found that this was not the highest part of the island, +but that another hill lay beyond, with a wide valley between it and the +one on which we stood. This valley, like the first, was also full of +rich trees, some dark and some light green, some heavy and thick in +foliage, and others light, feathery, and graceful, while the beautiful +blossoms on many of them threw a sort of rainbow tint over all, and gave +to the valley the appearance of a garden of flowers. Among these we +recognised many of the bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, and +also a great many cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we pushed down +the hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to ascend the second +mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to the top, but the summit +was bare, and in some places broken. + +While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with much +interest. This was the stump of a tree that had evidently been cut down +with an axe! So, then, we were not the first who had viewed this +beautiful isle. The hand of man had been at work there before us. It +now began to recur to us again that perhaps the island was inhabited, +although we had not seen any traces of man until now; but a second glance +at the stump convinced us that we had not more reason to think so now +than formerly; for the surface of the wood was quite decayed, and partly +covered with fungus and green matter, so that it must have been cut many +years ago. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "some ship or other has touched here long ago +for wood, and only taken one tree." + +We did not think this likely, however, because, in such circumstances, +the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, and near the shore, +whereas this was a large tree and stood near the top of the mountain. In +fact it was the highest large tree on the mountain, all above it being +wood of very recent growth. + +"I can't understand it," said Jack, scratching the surface of the stump +with his axe. "I can only suppose that the savages have been here and +cut it for some purpose known only to themselves. But, hallo! what have +we here?" + +As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and fungus from +the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces of marks, as if some +inscription or initials had been cut thereon. But although the traces +were distinct, beyond all doubt, the exact form of the letters could not +be made out. Jack thought they looked like J. S. but we could not be +certain. They had apparently been carelessly cut, and long exposure to +the weather had so broken them up that we could not make out what they +were. We were exceedingly perplexed at this discovery, and stayed a long +time at the place conjecturing what these marks could have been, but +without avail; so, as the day was advancing, we left it and quickly +reached the top of the mountain. + +We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from it we saw +our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around us. As I have always +thought it impossible to get a thing properly into one's understanding +without comprehending it, I shall beg the reader's patience for a little +while I describe our island, thus, shortly:-- + +It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; the other, +on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a rich, beautiful valley, +as already said. This valley crossed the island from one end to the +other, being high in the middle and sloping on each side towards the sea. +The large mountain sloped, on the side farthest from where we had been +wrecked, gradually towards the sea; but although, when viewed at a +glance, it had thus a regular sloping appearance, a more careful +observation showed that it was broken up into a multitude of very small +vales, or rather dells and glens, intermingled with little rugged spots +and small but abrupt precipices here and there, with rivulets tumbling +over their edges and wandering down the slopes in little white streams, +sometimes glistening among the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa- +nut trees, or hid altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base of +this mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which terminated +abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the island, whence we had +come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot of which diverged three +valleys; one being that which we had ascended, with a smaller vale on +each side of it, and separated from it by the two ridges before +mentioned. In these smaller valleys there were no streams, but they were +clothed with the same luxuriant vegetation. + +The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, as it was +almost circular in form, its circumference must have been thirty +miles;--perhaps a little more, if allowance be made for the numerous bays +and indentations of the shore. The entire island was belted by a beach +of pure white sand, on which laved the gentle ripples of the lagoon. We +now also observed that the coral reef completely encircled the island; +but it varied its distance from it here and there, in some places being a +mile from the beach, in others, a few hundred yards, but the average +distance was half a mile. The reef lay very low, and the spray of the +surf broke quite over it in many places. This surf never ceased its +roar, for, however calm the weather might be, there is always a gentle +swaying motion in the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable +out at sea, reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water within +the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. There were three narrow +openings in the reef; one opposite each end of the valley which I have +described as crossing the island; the other opposite our own valley, +which we afterwards named the Valley of the Wreck. At each of these +openings the reef rose into two small green islets, covered with bushes +and having one or two cocoa-nut palms on each. These islets were very +singular, and appeared as if planted expressly for the purpose of marking +the channel into the lagoon. Our captain was making for one of these +openings the day we were wrecked, and would have reached it too, I doubt +not, had not the rudder been torn away. Within the lagoon were several +pretty, low coral islands, just opposite our encampment; and, immediately +beyond these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other islands, at various +distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all of them, as far as we could +discern, smaller than ours and apparently uninhabited. They seemed to be +low coral islands, raised but little above the sea, yet covered with +cocoa-nut trees. + +All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the top of the +mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we prepared to return; but +here again we discovered traces of the presence of man. These were a +pole or staff and one or two pieces of wood which had been squared with +an axe. All of these were, however, very much decayed, and they had +evidently not been touched for many years. + +Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. On the way we +fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, but whether old or of +recent date none of us were able to guess. This also tended to raise our +hopes of obtaining some animal food on the island, so we reached home in +good spirits, quite prepared for supper, and highly satisfied with our +excursion. + +After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we came to the +conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went to bed. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +Jack's ingenuity--We get into difficulties about fishing, and get out of +them by a method which gives us a cold bath--Horrible encounter with a +shark. + +For several days after the excursion related in the last chapter we did +not wander far from our encampment, but gave ourselves up to forming +plans for the future and making our present abode comfortable. + +There were various causes that induced this state of comparative +inaction. In the first place, although everything around us was so +delightful, and we could without difficulty obtain all that we required +for our bodily comfort, we did not quite like the idea of settling down +here for the rest of our lives, far away from our friends and our native +land. To set energetically about preparations for a permanent residence +seemed so like making up our minds to saying adieu to home and friends +for ever, that we tacitly shrank from it and put off our preparations, +for one reason and another, as long as we could. Then there was a little +uncertainty still as to there being natives on the island, and we +entertained a kind of faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. +But as day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to work at +our homestead. + +During this time, however, we had not been altogether idle. We made +several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, most of which did not +improve it. Then we removed our goods, and took up our abode in the +cave, but found the change so bad that we returned gladly to the bower. +Besides this we bathed very frequently, and talked a great deal; at least +Jack and Peterkin did,--I listened. Among other useful things, Jack, who +was ever the most active and diligent, converted about three inches of +the hoop-iron into an excellent knife. First he beat it quite flat with +the axe. Then he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with +our piece of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of +sand-stone. When it was finished he used it to shape a better handle, to +which he fixed it with a strip of his cotton handkerchief;--in which +operation he had, as Peterkin pointed out, torn off one of Lord Nelson's +noses. However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by Peterkin as a +fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to the end of it. This +the fish were allowed to swallow, and then they were pulled quickly +ashore. But as the line was very short and we had no boat, the fish we +caught were exceedingly small. + +One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been angling, and +said in a very cross tone, "I'll tell you what, Jack, I'm not going to be +humbugged with catching such contemptible things any longer. I want you +to swim out with me on your back, and let me fish in deep water!" + +"Dear me, Peterkin," replied Jack, "I had no idea you were taking the +thing so much to heart, else I would have got you out of that difficulty +long ago. Let me see,"--and Jack looked down at a piece of timber on +which he had been labouring, with a peculiar gaze of abstraction, which +he always assumed when trying to invent or discover anything. + +"What say you to building a boat?" he inquired, looking up hastily. + +"Take far too long," was the reply; "can't be bothered waiting. I want +to begin at once!" + +Again Jack considered. "I have it!" he cried. "We'll fell a large tree +and launch the trunk of it in the water, so that when you want to fish +you've nothing to do but to swim out to it." + +"Would not a small raft do better?" said I. + +"Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together with. Perhaps we +may find something hereafter that will do as well, but, in the meantime, +let us try the tree." + +This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far distant, where we +knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew near the water's edge. As +soon as we reached it Jack threw off his coat, and, wielding the axe with +his sturdy arms, hacked and hewed at it for a quarter of an hour without +stopping. Then he paused, and, while he sat down to rest, I continued +the work. Then Peterkin made a vigorous attack on it, so that when Jack +renewed his powerful blows, a few minutes cutting brought it down with a +terrible crash. + +"Hurrah! now for it," cried Jack; "let us off with its head." + +So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six yards from +the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, short poles or levers +from the stout branches, with which to roll the log down the beach into +the sea; for, as it was nearly two feet thick at the large end, we could +not move it without such helps. With the levers, however, we rolled it +slowly into the sea. + +Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next shaped the +levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted to embark. This was +easy enough to do; but, after seating ourselves astride the log, it was +with the utmost difficulty we kept it from rolling round and plunging us +into the water. Not that we minded that much; but we preferred, if +possible, to fish in dry clothes. To be sure, our trousers were +necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling in the water on each side of +the log; but, as they could be easily dried, we did not care. After half +an hour's practice, we became expert enough to keep our balance pretty +steadily. Then Peterkin laid down his paddle, and having baited his line +with a whole oyster, dropt it into deep water. + +"Now, then, Jack," said he, "be cautious; steer clear o' that sea-weed. +There; that's it; gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at least a foot +long down there, coming to--ha! that's it! Oh! bother, he's off." + +"Did he bite?" said Jack, urging the log onwards a little with his +paddle. + +"Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the moment I began to haul he +opened his jaws and let it out again." + +"Let him swallow it next time," said Jack, laughing at the melancholy +expression of Peterkin's visage. + +"There he's again," cried Peterkin, his eyes flashing with excitement. +"Look out! Now then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute _won't_ swallow +it!" + +"Try to haul him up by the mouth, then," cried Jack. "Do it gently." + +A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor Peterkin had +tried and failed again. + +"Never mind, lad," said Jack, in a voice of sympathy; "we'll move on, and +offer it to some other fish." So saying, Jack plied his paddle; but +scarcely had he moved from the spot, when a fish with an enormous head +and a little body darted from under a rock and swallowed the bait at +once. + +"Got him this time,--that's a fact!" cried Peterkin, hauling in the line. +"He's swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I declare. Oh what a +thumper!" + +As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward to see it, +and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his arms round the fish's neck; +and, in another instant, we were all floundering in the water! + +A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface like three +drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We soon recovered our +position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin secured the fish, which had +well-nigh escaped in the midst of our struggles. It was little worth +having, however; but, as Peterkin remarked, it was better than the smouts +he had been catching for the last two or three days; so we laid it on the +log before us, and having re-baited the line, dropt it in again for +another. + +Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention was suddenly +attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards away from us. Peterkin +shouted to us to paddle in that direction, as he thought it was a big +fish, and we might have a chance of catching it. But Jack, instead of +complying, said, in a deep, earnest tone of voice, which I never before +heard him use,-- + +"Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; quick,--it's a shark!" + +The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for it must be +remembered that our legs were hanging down in the water, and we could not +venture to pull them up without upsetting the log. Peterkin instantly +hauled up the line; and, grasping his paddle, exerted himself to the +utmost, while we also did our best to make for shore. But we were a good +way off, and the log being, as I have before said, very heavy, moved but +slowly through the water. We now saw the shark quite distinctly swimming +round and round us, its sharp fin every now and then protruding above the +water. From its active and unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up +its mind to attack us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our lives, +while he himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted "Look +out!--there he comes!" and in a second we saw the monstrous fish dive +close under us, and turn half over on his side. But we all made a great +commotion with our paddles, which no doubt frightened it away for that +time, as we saw it immediately after circling round us as before. + +"Throw the fish to him," cried Jack, in a quick, suppressed voice; "we'll +make the shore in time yet if we can keep him off for a few minutes." + +Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then plied his +paddle again with all his might. No sooner had the fish fallen on the +water than we observed the shark to sink. In another second we saw its +white breast rising; for sharks always turn over on their sides when +about to seize their prey, their mouths being not at the point of their +heads like those of other fish, but, as it were, under their chins. In +another moment his snout rose above the water,--his wide jaws, armed with +a terrific double row of teeth, appeared. The dead fish was engulfed, +and the shark sank out of sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that +it would be satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its +quick motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once. + +"Stop paddling," cried Jack suddenly. "I see it coming up behind us. +Now, obey my orders quickly. Our lives may depend on it Ralph. Peterkin, +do your best to _balance the log_. Don't look out for the shark. Don't +glance behind you. Do nothing but balance the log." + +{A dreadful adventure: p77.jpg} + +Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only too glad to +do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of escape, for we had +implicit confidence in Jack's courage and wisdom. For a few seconds, +that seemed long minutes to my mind, we sat thus silently; but I could +not resist glancing backward, despite the orders to the contrary. On +doing so, I saw Jack sitting rigid like a statue, with his paddle raised, +his lips compressed, and his eye-brows bent over his eyes, which glared +savagely from beneath them down into the water. I also saw the shark, to +my horror, quite close under the log, in the act of darting towards +Jack's foot. I could scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In +another moment the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the +water, and threw it over the log. The monster's snout rubbed against the +log as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into which Jack +instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its throat. So violent +was the act that Jack rose to his feet in performing it; the log was +thereby rolled completely over, and we were once more plunged into the +water. We all rose, spluttering and gasping, in a moment. + +"Now then, strike out for shore," cried Jack. "Here, Peterkin, catch +hold of my collar, and kick out with a will." + +Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such force that +he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being free from all +encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with him. As we had by this time +drawn pretty near to the shore, a few minutes more sufficed to carry us +into shallow water; and, finally, we landed in safety, though very much +exhausted, and not a little frightened by our terrible adventure. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to dive--How he did +it--More difficulties overcome--The water garden--Curious creatures of +the sea--The tank--Candles missed very much, and the candle-nut tree +discovered--Wonderful account of Peterkin's first voyage--Cloth found +growing on a tree--A plan projected, and arms prepared for offence and +defence--A dreadful cry. + +Our encounter with the shark was the first great danger that had befallen +us since landing on this island, and we felt very seriously affected by +it, especially when we considered that we had so often unwittingly +incurred the same danger before while bathing. We were now forced to +take to fishing again in the shallow water, until we should succeed in +constructing a raft. What troubled us most, however, was, that we were +compelled to forego our morning swimming excursions. We did, indeed, +continue to enjoy our bathe in the shallow water, but Jack and I found +that one great source of our enjoyment was gone, when we could no longer +dive down among the beautiful coral groves at the bottom of the lagoon. +We had come to be so fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest +in watching the formations of coral and the gambols of the many beautiful +fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that we had become +quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and the localities that +they chiefly haunted. We had also become expert divers. But we made it +a rule never to stay long under water at a time. Jack told me that to do +so often was bad for the lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, +would ere long do us a serious injury. So we never stayed at the bottom +as long as we might have done, but came up frequently to the top for +fresh air, and dived down again immediately. Sometimes, when Jack +happened to be in a humorous frame, he would seat himself at the bottom +of the sea on one of the brain corals, as if he were seated on a large +paddock-stool, and then make faces at me, in order, if possible, to make +me laugh under water. At first, when he took me unawares, he nearly +succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to laugh; but +afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being naturally of a +grave disposition, I had no difficulty in restraining myself. I used +often to wonder how poor Peterkin would have liked to be with us; and he +sometimes expressed much regret at being unable to join us. I used to do +my best to gratify him, poor fellow, by relating all the wonders that we +saw; but this, instead of satisfying, seemed only to whet his curiosity +the more, so one day we prevailed on him to try to go down with us. But, +although a brave boy in every other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the +water, and it was with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken down, +for he could never have managed to push himself down to the bottom +without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a yard or so +into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle and kick violently, +so we were forced to let him go, when he rose out of the water like a +cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful roar, and struck out for the land +with the utmost possible haste. + +Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought thereon, +Jack and I felt very much depressed in our spirits. I could see, also, +that Peterkin grieved and sympathized with us, for, when talking about +this matter, he refrained from jesting and bantering us upon it. + +As, however, a man's difficulties usually set him upon devising methods +to overcome them, whereby he often discovers better things than those he +may have lost, so this our difficulty induced us to think of searching +for a large pool among the rocks, where the water should be deep enough +for diving yet so surrounded by rocks as to prevent sharks from getting +at us. And such a pool we afterwards found, which proved to be very much +better than our most sanguine hopes anticipated. It was situated not +more than ten minutes' walk from our camp, and was in the form of a small +deep bay or basin, the entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so +shallow that no fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not +unless he should be a remarkably thin one. + +Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the coral +formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed plants far more +lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon itself. And the water +was so clear and still, that, although very deep, you could see the +minutest object at the bottom. Besides this, there was a ledge of rock +which overhung the basin at its deepest part, from which we could dive +pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit and see not only all the +wonders I had described to him, but also see Jack and me creeping amongst +the marine shrubbery at the bottom, like, as--he expressed it,--"two +great white sea-monsters." During these excursions of ours to the bottom +of the sea, we began to get an insight into the manners and customs of +its inhabitants, and to make discoveries of wonderful things, the like of +which we never before conceived. Among other things, we were deeply +interested with the operations of the little coral insect which, I was +informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely constructed many of the +numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, certainly, when we considered +the great reef which these insects had formed round the island on which +we were cast, and observed their ceaseless activity in building their +myriad cells, it did at first seem as if this might be true; but then, +again, when I looked at the mountains of the island, and reflected that +there were thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South +Seas, I doubted that there must be some mistake here. But more of this +hereafter. + +I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of the +anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and such-like +creatures; and was not content with watching those I saw during my dives +in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop out a hole in the coral rock +close to it, which I filled with salt water, and stocked with sundry +specimens of anemones and shell-fish, in order to watch more closely how +they were in the habit of passing their time. Our burning-glass also now +became a great treasure to me, as it enabled me to magnify, and so to +perceive more clearly the forms and actions of these curious creatures of +the deep. + +Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we began to +talk of a project which we had long had in contemplation,--namely, to +travel entirely round the island; in order, first, to ascertain whether +it contained any other productions which might be useful to us; and, +second, to see whether there might be any place more convenient and +suitable for our permanent residence than that on which we were now +encamped. Not that we were in any degree dissatisfied with it; on the +contrary, we entertained quite a home-feeling to our bower and its +neighbourhood; but if a better place did exist, there was no reason why +we should not make use of it. At any rate, it would be well to know of +its existence. + +We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack proposed that, +before undertaking such an excursion, we should supply ourselves with +good defensive arms, for, as we intended not only to go round all the +shore, but to ascend most of the valleys, before returning home, we +should be likely to meet in with, he would not say dangers, but, at +least, with everything that existed on the island, whatever that might +be. + +"Besides," said Jack, "it won't do for us to live on cocoa-nuts and +oysters always. No doubt they are very excellent in their way, but I +think a little animal food, now and then, would be agreeable as well as +good for us; and as there are many small birds among the trees, some of +which are probably very good to eat, I think it would be a capital plan +to make bows and arrows, with which we could easily knock them over." + +"First rate!" cried Peterkin. "You will make the bows, Jack, and I'll +try my hand at the arrows. The fact is, I'm quite tired of throwing +stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I think, and have +persevered up to the present time, but I've never hit anything yet." + +"You forget," said I, "you hit me one day on the shin." + +"Ah, true," replied Peterkin, "and a precious shindy you kicked up in +consequence. But you were at least four yards away from the impudent +paroquet I aimed at; so you see what a horribly bad shot I am." + +"But," said I, "Jack, you cannot make three bows and arrows before to- +morrow, and would it not be a pity to waste time, now that we have made +up our minds to go on this expedition? Suppose that you make one bow and +arrow for yourself, and we can take our clubs?" + +"That's true, Ralph. The day is pretty far advanced, and I doubt if I +can make even one bow before dark. To be sure I might work by +fire-light, after the sun goes down." + +We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed with the sun, +as we had no pressing call to work o' nights; and, indeed, our work +during the day was usually hard enough,--what between fishing, and +improving our bower, and diving in the Water Garden, and rambling in the +woods; so that, when night came, we were usually very glad to retire to +our beds. But now that we had a desire to work at night, we felt a wish +for candles. + +"Won't a good blazing fire give you light enough?" inquired Peterkin. + +"Yes," replied Jack, "quite enough; but then it will give us a great deal +more than enough of heat in this warm climate of ours." + +"True," said Peterkin; "I forgot that. It would roast us." + +"Well, as you're always doing that at any rate," remarked Jack, "we could +scarcely call it a change. But the fact is, I've been thinking over this +subject before. There is a certain nut growing in these islands which is +called the candle-nut, because the natives use it instead of candles, and +I know all about it, and how to prepare it for burning--" + +"Then why don't you do it?" interrupted Peterkin. "Why have you kept us +in the dark so long, you vile philosopher?" + +"Because," said Jack, "I have not seen the tree yet, and I'm not sure +that I should know either the tree or the nuts if I did see them. You +see, I forget the description." + +"Ah! that's just the way with me," said Peterkin with a deep sigh. "I +never could keep in my mind for half an hour the few descriptions I ever +attempted to remember. The very first voyage I ever made was caused by +my mistaking a description, or forgetting it, which is the same thing. +And a horrible voyage it was. I had to fight with the captain the whole +way out, and made the homeward voyage by swimming!" + +"Come, Peterkin," said I, "you can't get even _me_ to believe that." + +"Perhaps not, but it's true, notwithstanding," returned Peterkin, +pretending to be hurt at my doubting his word. + +"Let us hear how it happened," said Jack, while a good-natured smile +overspread his face. + +"Well, you must know," began Peterkin, "that the very day before I went +to sea, I was greatly taken up with a game at hockey, which I was playing +with my old school-fellows for the last time before leaving them. You +see I was young then, Ralph." Peterkin gazed, in an abstracted and +melancholy manner, out to sea! "Well, in the midst of the game, my +uncle, who had taken all the bother and trouble of getting me bound +'prentice and rigged out, came and took me aside, and told me that he was +called suddenly away from home, and would not be able to see me aboard, +as he had intended. 'However,' said he, 'the captain knows you are +coming, so that's not of much consequence; but as you'll have to find the +ship yourself, you must remember her name and description. D'ye hear, +boy?' I certainly did hear, but I'm afraid I did not understand, for my +mind was so taken up with the game, which I saw my side was losing, that +I began to grow impatient, and the moment my uncle finished his +description of the ship, and bade me good-bye, I bolted back to my game, +with only a confused idea of three masts, and a green painted tafferel, +and a gilt figure-head of Hercules with his club at the bow. Next day I +was so much cast down with everybody saying good-bye, and a lot o' my +female friends cryin' horribly over me, that I did not start for the +harbour, where the ship was lying among a thousand others, till it was +almost too late. So I had to run the whole way. When I reached the +pier, there were so many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. 'Now,' said I to myself, 'Peterkin, +you're in a fix.' Then I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and three +masts, belonging to a ship just about to start; so I darted on board, but +speedily jumped on shore again, when I found that two of the masts +belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a third! At last I +caught sight of what I made sure was it,--a fine large vessel just +casting off her moorings. The tafferel was green. Three masts,--yes, +that must be it,--and the gilt figure-head of Hercules. To be sure it +had a three-pronged pitchfork in its hand instead of a club; but that +might be my uncle's mistake; or perhaps Hercules sometimes varied his +weapons. 'Cast off!' roared a voice from the quarter-deck. 'Hold on!' +cried I, rushing frantically through the crowd. 'Hold on! hold on!' +repeated some of the bystanders, while the men at the ropes delayed for a +minute. This threw the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his +friends had come down to see him off, and having his orders contradicted +so flatly was too much for him. However, the delay was sufficient. I +took a race and a good leap; the ropes were cast off; the steam-tug gave +a puff, and we started. Suddenly the captain was up to me: 'Where did +you come from, you scamp, and what do you want here?' + +"'Please, sir,' said I, touching my cap, 'I'm you're new 'prentice come +aboard.' + +"'New 'Prentice,' said he, stamping, 'I've got no new 'prentice. My boys +are all aboard already. This is a trick, you young blackguard. You've +run away, you have;' and the captain stamped about the deck and swore +dreadfully; for, you see, the thought of having to stop the ship and +lower a boat and lose half an hour, all for the slake of sending a small +boy ashore, seemed to make him very angry. Besides, it was blowin' fresh +outside the harbour, so that, to have let the steamer alongside to put me +into it was no easy job. Just as we were passing the pier-head, where +several boats were rowing into harbour, the captain came up to me,-- + +"'You've run away, you blackguard,' he said, giving me a box on the ear. + +"'No I haven't,' said I, angrily; for the box was by no means a light +one. + +"Hark'ee, boy, can you swim?' + +"'Yes,' said I. + +"'Then do it,' and, seizing me by my trousers and the nape of my neck, he +tossed me over the side into the sea. The fellows in the boats at the +end of the pier, backed their oars on seeing this; but observing that I +could swim, they allowed me to make the best of my way to the pier-head. +So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim my first homeward voyage." + +Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. "But tell us about the +candle-nut tree," said I; "you were talking about it." + +"Very true," said Jack, "but I fear I can remember little about it. I +believe the nut is about the size of a walnut; and I think that the +leaves are white, but I am not sure." + +"Eh! ha! hum!" exclaimed Peterkin, "I saw a tree answering to that +description this very day." + +"Did you?" cried Jack. "Is it far from this?" + +"No, not half a mile." + +"Then lead me to it," said Jack, seizing his axe. + +In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the underwood of the +forest, headed by Peterkin. + +We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had closely +examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut tree. Its leaves were +of a beautiful silvery white, and formed a fine contrast to the +dark-green foliage of the surrounding trees. We immediately filled our +pockets with the nuts, after which Jack said,-- + +"Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one of the long +branches." + +This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was very high, +and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger trees, he was not +much accustomed to climbing the high ones. The leaf or branch was a very +large one, and we were surprised at its size and strength. Viewed from a +little distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems to be a tall, straight stem, +without a single branch except at the top, where there is a tuft of +feathery-looking leaves, that seem to wave like soft plumes in the wind. +But when we saw one of these leaves or branches at our feet, we found it +to be a strong stalk, about fifteen feet long, with a number of narrow, +pointed leaflets ranged alternately on each side. But what seemed to us +the most wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling +cloth, which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where it had +been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had the greatest +difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, on account of this +substance, as it was wrapped quite round the tree, and, he observed, +round all the other branches, thus forming a strong support to the large +leaves while exposed to high winds. When I call this substance cloth I +do not exaggerate. Indeed, with regard to all the things I saw during my +eventful career in the South Seas, I have been exceedingly careful not to +exaggerate, or in any way to mislead or deceive my readers. This cloth, +I say, was remarkably like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam +or fibre down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, about +the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these fibres, very long +and tough, the one layer crossing the other obliquely, and the whole was +cemented together with a still finer fibrous and adhesive substance. When +we regarded it attentively, we could with difficulty believe that it had +not been woven by human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth we +stripped carefully off, and found it to be above two feet long, by a foot +broad, and we carried it home with us as a great prize. + +Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the central spine or +stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. Having made a small fire, he +baked the nuts slightly, and then pealed off the husks. After this he +wished to bore a hole in them, which, not having anything better at hand +at the time, he did with the point of our useless pencil-case. Then he +strung them on the cocoa-nut spine, and on putting a light to the topmost +nut, we found to our joy that it burned with a clear, beautiful flame; +upon seeing which, Peterkin sprang up and danced round the fire for at +least five minutes in the excess of his satisfaction. + +"Now lads," said Jack, extinguishing our candle, the sun will set in an +hour, so we have no time to lose. "I shall go and cut a young tree to +make my bow out of, and you had better each of you go and select good +strong sticks for clubs, and we'll set to work at them after dark." + +So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by Peterkin, while +I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, and fell to examining its +structure. So engrossed was I in this that I was still sitting in the +same attitude and occupation when my companions returned. + +"I told you so!" cried Peterkin, with a loud laugh. "Oh, Ralph, you're +incorrigible. See, there's a club for you. I was sure, when we left you +looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find you poring over it when +we came back, so I just cut a club for you as well as for myself." + +"Thank you, Peterkin," said I. "It was kind of you to do that, instead +of scolding me for a lazy fellow, as I confess I deserve." + +"Oh! as to that," returned Peterkin, "I'll blow you up yet, if you wish +it--only it would be of no use if I did, for you're a perfect mule!" + +As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing it in a +holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our bower, we seated +ourselves on our leafy beds and began to work. + +"I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use," said Jack, chipping the +piece of wood he had brought with his axe. "I used to be a pretty fair +shot once. But what's that you're doing?" he added, looking at Peterkin, +who had drawn the end of a long pole into the tent, and was endeavouring +to fit a small piece of the hoop-iron to the end of it. + +"I'm going to enlist into the Lancers," answered Peterkin. "You see, +Jack, I find the club rather an unwieldy instrument for my delicately- +formed muscles, and I flatter myself I shall do more execution with a +spear." + +"Well, if length constitutes power," said Jack, "you'll certainly be +invincible." + +The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, being a very +strong but light and tough young tree, which merely required thinning at +the butt to be a serviceable weapon. + +"That's a very good idea," said I. + +"Which--this?" inquired Peterkin, pointing to the spear. + +"Yes;" I replied. + +"Humph!" said he; "you'd find it a pretty tough and matter-of-fact idea, +if you had it stuck through your gizzard, old boy!" + +"I mean the idea of making it is a good one," said I, laughing. "And, +now I think of it, I'll change my plan, too. I don't think much of a +club, so I'll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. I used to be +very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David slaying Goliath the +Philistine, and I was once thought to be expert at it." + +So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time we all worked +very busily without speaking. At length Peterkin looked up: "I say, +Jack, I'm sorry to say I must apply to you for another strip of your +handkerchief, to tie on this rascally head with. It's pretty well torn +at any rate, so you won't miss it." + +Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin suddenly laid +his hand on his arm and arrested him. + +"Hist, man," said he, "be tender; you should never be needlessly cruel if +you can help it. Do try to shave past Lord Nelson's mouth without +tearing it, if possible! Thanks. There are plenty more handkerchiefs on +the cocoa-nut trees." + +Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record his jests +and humorous sayings now! + +While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but most +strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the sea, but was so far +away that we could not clearly distinguish its precise direction. Rushing +out of our bower, we hastened down to the beach and stayed to listen. +Again it came quite loud and distinct on the night air,--a prolonged, +hideous cry, something like the braying of an ass. The moon had risen, +and we could see the islands in and beyond the lagoon quite plainly, but +there was no object visible to account for such a cry. A strong gust of +wind was blowing from the point whence the sound came, but this died away +while we were gazing out to sea. + +"What can it be?" said Peterkin, in a low whisper, while we all +involuntarily crept closer to each other. + +"Do you know," said Jack, "I have heard that mysterious sound twice +before, but never so loud as to-night. Indeed it was so faint that I +thought I must have merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to alarm +you, I said nothing about it." + +We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did not come, +we returned to the bower and resumed our work. + +"Very strange," said Peterkin, quite gravely. "Do you believe in ghosts, +Ralph?" + +"No," I answered, "I do not. Nevertheless I must confess that strange, +unaccountable sounds, such as we have just heard, make me feel a little +uneasy." + +"What say you to it, Jack?" + +"I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy," he replied. "I never saw +a ghost myself, and I never met with any one who had; and I have +generally found that strange and unaccountable things have almost always +been accounted for, and found to be quite simple, on close examination. I +certainly can't imagine what _that_ sound is; but I'm quite sure I shall +find out before long,--and if it's a ghost I'll--" + +"Eat it," cried Peterkin. + +"Yes, I'll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two arrows are finished; so if +you're ready we had better turn in." + +By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an iron point +very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, the lines of which +were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut cloth, plaited; and Jack +had made a stout bow, nearly five feet long, with two arrows, feathered +with two or three large plumes which some bird had dropt. They had no +barbs, but Jack said that if arrows were well feathered, they did not +require iron points, but would fly quite well if merely sharpened at the +point; which I did not know before. + +"A feathered arrow without a barb," said he, "is a good weapon, but a +barbed arrow without feathers is utterly useless." + +The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, part of +which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the bow. + +Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought it wise to +exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons before starting, so +we spent the whole of the next day in practising. And it was well we did +so, for we found that our arms were very imperfect, and that we were far +from perfect in the use of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much +too strong, and he had to thin it. Also the spear was much too heavy, +and so had to be reduced in thickness, although nothing would induce +Peterkin to have it shortened. My sling answered very well, but I had +fallen so much out of practice that my first stone knocked off Peterkin's +hat, and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. However, after +having spent the whole day in diligent practice, we began to find some of +our former expertness returning--at least Jack and I did. As for +Peterkin, being naturally a neat-handed boy, he soon handled his spear +well, and could run full tilt at a cocoa nut, and hit it with great +precision once out of every five times. + +But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to the +unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had made him +Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from morning till +night, perseveringly, at the same thing. Peterkin wished very much to +run about and stick his spear into everything he passed; but Jack put up +a cocoa nut, and would not let him leave off running at that for a +moment, except when he wanted to rest. We laughed at Jack for this, but +we were both convinced that it did us much good. + +That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down to rest, +although we were much fatigued, in order that we might be in readiness to +set out on our expedition at daylight on the following morning. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +Prepare for a journey round the island--Sagacious reflections--Mysterious +appearances and startling occurrences. + +Scarcely had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of the broad +Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing in Peterkin's ear +to awaken him, ran down the beach to take his customary dip in the sea. +We did not, as was our wont, bathe that morning in our Water Garden, but, +in order to save time, refreshed ourselves in the shallow water just +opposite the bower. Our breakfast was also despatched without loss of +time, and in less than an hour afterwards all our preparations for the +journey were completed. + +In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of cocoa-nut cloth +round his waist, into which he thrust the axe. I was also advised to put +on a belt and carry a short cudgel or bludgeon in it; for, as Jack truly +remarked, the sling would be of little use if we should chance to come to +close quarters with any wild animal. As for Peterkin, notwithstanding +that he carried such a long, and I must add, frightful-looking spear over +his shoulder, we could not prevail on him to leave his club behind; +"for," said he, "a spear at close quarters is not worth a button." I +must say that it seemed to me that the club was, to use his own style of +language, not worth a button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the +head, something like the club which I remember to have observed in +picture-books of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that he +required to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at all. +However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out upon our +travels. + +We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as we knew +that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in with cocoa-nut +trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as Peterkin said, with meat +and drink and pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the precaution, however, to +put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest we should want fire. + +The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that very still and +peaceful sort which made the few noises that we heard seem to be _quiet_ +noises. I know no other way of expressing this idea. Noises which so +far from interrupting the universal tranquillity of earth, sea, and +sky--rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the world around us really +was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the peculiarly melancholy--yet, it +seemed to me, cheerful--plaint of sea-birds floating on the glassy water, +or sailing in the sky, also the subdued twittering of little birds among +the bushes, the faint ripples on the beach, and the solemn boom of the +surf upon the distant coral reef. We felt very glad in our hearts as we +walked along the sands side by side. For my part, I felt so deeply +overjoyed, that I was surprised at my own sensations, and fell into a +reverie upon the causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion that a +state of profound peace and repose, both in regard to outward objects and +within the soul, is the happiest condition in which man can be placed; +for, although I had many a time been most joyful and happy when engaged +in bustling, energetic, active pursuits or amusements, I never found that +such joy or satisfaction was so deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as +that which I now experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this +opinion when I observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that +Peterkin's happiness was also very great; yet he did not express this by +dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much as a single shout, but +walked quietly between us with his eye sparkling, and a joyful smile upon +his countenance. My reader must not suppose that I thought all this in +the clear and methodical manner in which I have set it down here. These +thoughts did, indeed, pass through my mind, but they did so in a very +confused and indefinite manner, for I was young at that time, and not +much given to deep reflections. Neither did I consider that the peace +whereof I write is not to be found in this world--at least in its +perfection, although I have since learned that by religion a man may +attain to a very great degree of it. + +I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between us. We had two +ways of walking together about our island. When we travelled through the +woods, we always did so in single file, as by this method we advanced +with greater facility, the one treading in the other's footsteps. In +such cases Jack always took the lead, Peterkin followed, and I brought up +the rear. But when we travelled along the sands, which extended almost +in an unbroken line of glistening white round the island, we marched +abreast, as we found this method more sociable, and every way more +pleasant. Jack, being the tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin +marched between us, as by this arrangement either of us could talk to him +or he to us, while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse together, +we could conveniently do so over Peterkin's head. Peterkin used to say, +in reference to this arrangement, that had he been as tall as either of +us, our order of march might have been the same, for, as Jack often used +to scold him for letting everything we said to him pass in at one ear and +out at the other, his head could of course form no interruption to our +discourse. + +We were now fairly started. Half a mile's walk conveyed us round a bend +in the land which shut out our bower from view, and for some time we +advanced at a brisk pace without speaking, though our eyes were not idle, +but noted everything, in the woods, on the shore, or in the sea, that was +interesting. After passing the ridge of land that formed one side of our +valley--the Valley of the Wreck--we beheld another small vale lying +before us in all the luxuriant loveliness of tropical vegetation. We +had, indeed, seen it before from the mountain-top, but we had no idea +that it would turn out to be so much more lovely when we were close to +it. We were about to commence the exploration of this valley, when +Peterkin stopped us, and directed our attention to a very remarkable +appearance in advance along the shore. + +"What's yon, think you?" said he, levelling his spear, as if he expected +an immediate attack from the object in question, though it was full half +a mile distant. + +As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as if of +steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of several feet, and then +disappeared. Had this been near the sea, we would not have been so +greatly surprised, as it might in that case have been the surf, for at +this part of the coast the coral reef approached so near to the island +that in some parts it almost joined it. There was therefore no lagoon +between, and the heavy surf of the ocean beat almost up to the rocks. But +this white column appeared about fifty yards inland. The rocks at the +place were rugged, and they stretched across the sandy beach into the +sea. Scarce had we ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when +another column flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot +where the first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long irregular +intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were now quite sure that +the columns were watery or composed of spray, but what caused them we +could not guess, so we determined to go and see. + +In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the spray. We +had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The ground also was full of holes +here and there. Now, while we stood anxiously waiting for the +re-appearance of these water-spouts, we heard a low, rumbling sound near +us, which quickly increased to a gargling and hissing noise, and a moment +afterwards a thick spout of water burst upwards from a hole in the rock, +and spouted into the air with much violence, and so close to where Jack +and I were standing that it nearly touched us. We sprang to one side, +but not before a cloud of spray descended, and drenched us both to the +skin. + +Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few drops, and +burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on beholding our miserable +plight. + +"Mind your eye!" he shouted eagerly, "there goes another!" The words +were scarcely out of his mouth when there came up a spout from another +hole, which served us exactly in the same manner as before. + +Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was abruptly put a +stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to where he stood. + +"Where'll it spout this time, I wonder?" he said, looking about with some +anxiety, and preparing to run. Suddenly there came a loud hiss or snort; +a fierce spout of water burst up between Peterkin's legs, blew him off +his feet, enveloped him in its spray, and hurled him to the ground. He +fell with so much violence that we feared he must have broken some of his +bones, and ran anxiously to his assistance; but fortunately he had fallen +on a clump of tangled herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most +deplorable condition. + +It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite sure that he +was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the next spout might arise, +we assisted him hastily to jump up and hurry from the spot. + +I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the spout of water +was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin completely off his legs, I am +not quite certain of the exact height to which it lifted him, being +somewhat startled by the event, and blinded partially by the spray, so +that my power of observation was somewhat impaired for the moment. + +"What's to be done now?" inquired Peterkin ruefully. + +"Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves," replied Jack. + +"And here is material ready to our hand," said I, picking up a dried +branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the woods. + +In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again dried. While +they were hanging up before the fire, we walked down to the beach, and +soon observed that these curious spouts took place immediately after the +fall of a huge wave, never before it; and, moreover, that the spouts did +not take place excepting when the billow was an extremely large one. From +this we concluded that there must be a subterraneous channel in the rock +into which the water was driven by the larger waves, and finding no way +of escape except through these small holes, was thus forced up violently +through them. At any rate, we could not conceive any other reason for +these strange water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple and probable +one, we forthwith adopted it. + +"I say, Ralph, what's that in the water? is it a shark?" said Jack, just +as we were about to quit the place. + +I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which he was +looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I saw a very faint +pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed to move slightly while I +looked at it. + +"It's like a fish of some sort," said I. + +"Hallo, Peterkin!" cried Jack, "fetch your spear; here's work for it." + +But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be too short. + +"There, now," said Peterkin with a sneer, "you were always telling me it +was too long." + +Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let go his +hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must have missed, for +the handle soon rose again; and when the spear was drawn up, there was +the pale green object in exactly the same spot, slowly moving its tail. + +"Very odd," said Jack. + +But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack and all of +us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could neither hit it nor drive +it away, so we were compelled to continue our journey without discovering +what it was. I was very much perplexed at this strange appearance in the +water, and could not get it out of my mind for a long time afterwards. +However, I quieted myself by resolving that I would pay a visit to it +again at some more convenient season. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits--The resources of the +Coral Island gradually unfolded--The banian-tree--Another tree which is +supported by natural planks--Water-fowl found--A very remarkable +discovery, and a very peculiar murder--We luxuriate on the fat of the +land. + +Our examination of the little valley proved to be altogether most +satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to those we had +already seen in our own valley, but also one or two others of a different +species. We had also the satisfaction of discovering a peculiar +vegetable, which Jack concluded must certainly be that of which he had +read as being very common among the South Sea islanders, and which was +named _taro_. Also we found a large supply of yams, and another root +like a potato in appearance. As these were all quite new to us, we +regarded our lot as a most fortunate one, in being thus cast on an island +which was so prolific and so well stored with all the necessaries of +life. Long afterwards we found out that this island of ours was no +better in these respects than thousands of other islands in those seas. +Indeed, many of them were much richer and more productive; but that did +not render us the less grateful for our present good fortune. We each +put one of these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our +supper; of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds here, +and traces of some four-footed animal again. Meanwhile the sun began to +descend, so we returned to the shore, and pushed on round the spouting +rocks into the next valley. This was that valley of which I have spoken +as running across the entire island. It was by far the largest and most +beautiful that we had yet looked upon. Here were trees of every shape +and size and hue which it is possible to conceive of, many of which we +had not seen in the other valleys; for, the stream in this valley being +larger, and the mould much richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was +clothed with a more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees +were dark glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting well +with those of a pale light green, which were everywhere abundant. Among +these we recognised the broad dark heads of the bread-fruit, with its +golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage of the candle-nut, and several +species which bore a strong resemblance to the pine; while here and +there, in groups and in single trees, rose the tall forms of the cocoa- +nut palms, spreading abroad, and waving their graceful plumes high above +all the rest, as if they were a superior race of stately giants keeping +guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it was a most enchanting scene, +and I thanked God for having created such delightful spots for the use of +man. + +Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack uttered an +exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a little to one side +of us, said,-- + +"That's a banian-tree." + +"And what's a banian-tree?" inquired Peterkin, as we walked towards it. + +"A very curious one, as you shall see presently," replied Jack. "It is +called the _aoa_ here, if I recollect rightly, and has a wonderful +peculiarity about it. What an enormous one it is, to be sure." + +"_It_!" repeated Peterkin; "why, there are dozens of banians here! What +do you mean by talking bad grammar? Is your philosophy deserting you, +Jack?" + +"There is but one tree here of this kind," returned Jack, "as you will +perceive if you will examine it." And, sure enough, we did find that +what we had supposed was a forest of trees was in reality only one. Its +bark was of a light colour, and had a shining appearance, the leaves +being lance-shaped, small, and of a beautiful pea-green. But the +wonderful thing about it was, that the branches, which grew out from the +stem horizontally, sent down long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, +taking root, had themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like +the tree itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the branches at +various distances, and thus supported them on natural pillars, some of +which were so large and strong, that it was not easy at first to +distinguish the offspring from the parent stem. The fibres were of all +sizes and in all states of advancement, from the pillars we have just +mentioned to small cords which hung down and were about to take root, and +thin brown threads still far from the ground, which swayed about with +every motion of wind. In short, it seemed to us that, if there were only +space afforded to it, this single tree would at length cover the whole +island. + +Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, which, as its +peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely useful to us, merits +description. It was a splendid chestnut, but its proper name Jack did +not know. However, there were quantities of fine nuts upon it, some of +which we put in our pockets. But its stem was the wonderful part of it. +It rose to about twelve feet without a branch, and was not of great +thickness; on the contrary, it was remarkably slender for the size of the +tree; but, to make up for this, there were four or five wonderful +projections in this stem, which I cannot better describe than by asking +the reader to suppose that five planks of two inches thick and three feet +broad had been placed round the trunk of the tree, with their _edges_ +closely fixed to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that these +planks had been covered over with the bark of the tree and incorporated +with it. In short, they were just natural buttresses, without which the +stem could not have supported its heavy and umbrageous top. We found +these chestnuts to be very numerous. They grew chiefly on the banks of +the stream, and were of all sizes. + +While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack chipped a piece +off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood to be firm and easily +cut. He then struck the axe into it with all his force, and very soon +split it off close to the tree, first, however, having cut it across +transversely above and below. By this means he satisfied himself that we +could now obtain short planks, as it were all ready sawn, of any size and +thickness that we desired; which was a very great discovery indeed, +perhaps the most important we had yet made. + +We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp near the +beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome in the forest. On +our way we could not help admiring the birds which flew and chirped +around us. Among them we observed a pretty kind of paroquet, with a +green body, a blue head, and a red breast; also a few beautiful +turtledoves, and several flocks of wood-pigeons. The hues of many of +these birds were extremely vivid,--bright green, blue, and scarlet, being +the prevailing tints. We made several attempts throughout the day to +bring down one of these, both with the bow and the sling,--not for mere +sport, but to ascertain whether they were good for food. But we +invariably missed, although once or twice we were very near hitting. As +evening drew on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I slung a stone +into the midst of them at a venture, and had the good fortune to kill +one. We were startled, soon after, by a loud whistling noise above our +heads; and on looking up, saw a flock of wild ducks making for the coast. +We watched these, and, observing where they alighted, followed them up +until we came upon a most lovely blue lake, not more than two hundred +yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its placid surface, which +reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a mirror, was covered with +various species of wild ducks, feeding among the sedges and broad-leaved +water-plants which floated on it, while numerous birds like water-hens +ran to and fro most busily on its margin. These all with one accord flew +tumultuously away the instant we made our appearance. While walking +along the margin we observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could +not tell. + +Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a little out of +our way to see if we could procure one of those ducks; so, directing +Peterkin to go straight to the shore and kindle a fire, we separated, +promising to rejoin him speedily. But we did not find the ducks, +although we made a diligent search for half an hour. We were about to +retrace our steps, when we were arrested by one of the strangest sights +that we had yet beheld. + +Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew a superb +tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on the island. Its +trunk was at least five feet in diameter, with a smooth gray bark; above +this the spreading branches were clothed with light green leaves, amid +which were clusters of bright yellow fruit, so numerous as to weigh down +the boughs with their great weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum +species, of an oblong form, and a good deal larger than the magnum bonum +plum. The ground at the foot of this tree was thickly strewn with the +fallen fruit, in the midst of which lay sleeping, in every possible +attitude, at least twenty hogs of all ages and sizes, apparently quite +surfeited with a recent banquet. + +Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at these +coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning and snoring +heavily amid the remains of their supper. + +"Now, Ralph," said Jack, in a low whisper, "put a stone in your sling,--a +good big one,--and let fly at that fat fellow with his back toward you. +I'll try to put an arrow into yon little pig." + +"Don't you think we had better put them up first?" I whispered; "it seems +cruel to kill them while asleep." + +"If I wanted _sport_, Ralph, I would certainly set them up; but as we +only want _pork_, we'll let them lie. Besides, we're not sure of killing +them; so, fire away." + +Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it went bang +against the hog's flank as if against the head of a drum; but it had no +other effect than that of causing the animal to start to its feet, with a +frightful yell of surprise, and scamper away. At the same instant Jack's +bow twanged, and the arrow pinned the little pig to the ground by the +ear. + +"I've missed, after all," cried Jack, darting forward with uplifted axe, +while the little pig uttered a loud squeal, tore the arrow from the +ground, and ran away with it, along with the whole drove, into the bushes +and disappeared, though we heard them screaming long afterwards in the +distance. + +"That's very provoking, now," said Jack, rubbing the point of his nose. + +"Very," I replied, stroking my chin. + +"Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin," said Jack. "It's getting +late." And, without further remark, we threaded our way quickly through +the woods towards the shore. + +When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted and +beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for our +encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We wondered very much +at this; but Jack suggested that he might have gone to fetch water; so he +gave a shout to let him know that we had arrived, and sat down upon a +rock, while I threw off my jacket and seized the axe, intending to split +up one or two billets of wood. But I had scarce moved from the spot +when, in the distance, we heard a most appalling shriek, which was +followed up by a chorus of yells from the hogs, and a loud "hurrah!" + +"I do believe," said I, "that Peterkin has met with the hogs." + +"When Greek meets Greek," said Jack, soliloquizing, "then comes the tug +of--" + +"Hurrah!" shouted Peterkin in the distance. + +We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, and soon +descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us with a little pig +transfixed on the end of his long spear! + +"Well done, my boy!" exclaimed Jack, slapping him on the shoulder when he +came up, "you're the best shot amongst us." + +"Look here Jack!" cried Peterkin, as he disengaged the animal from his +spear. "Do you recognise that hole?" said he, pointing to the pig's ear; +"and are you familiar with this arrow, eh?" + +"Well, I declare!" said Jack. + +"Of course you do," interrupted Peterkin; "but, pray, restrain your +declarations at this time, and let's have supper, for I'm uncommonly +hungry, I can tell you; and it's no joke to charge a whole herd of swine +with their great-grandmother bristling like a giant porcupine at the head +of them!" + +We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display of viands +we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the light of the blazing +fire. There was, first of all, the little pig; then there was the taro- +root, and the yam, and the potato, and six plums; and, lastly, the wood- +pigeon. To these Peterkin added a bit of sugar-cane, which he had cut +from a little patch of that plant which he had found not long after +separating from us; "and," said he, "the patch was somewhat in a square +form, which convinces me it must have been planted by man." + +"Very likely," replied Jack. "From all we have seen, I'm inclined to +think that some of the savages must have dwelt here long ago." + +We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we were to cook +the pig. None of us had ever cut up one before, and we did not know +exactly how to begin; besides, we had nothing but the axe to do it with, +our knife having been forgotten. At last Jack started up and said,-- + +"Don't let us waste more time talking about it, boys. Hold it up, +Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg on this block of wood, so;" and he cut +it off, with a large portion of the haunch, at a single blow of the axe. +"Now the other,--that's it." And having thus cut off the two hind legs, +he made several deep gashes in them, thrust a sharp-pointed stick through +each, and stuck them up before the blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon was +then split open, quite flat, washed clean in salt water, and treated in a +similar manner. While these were cooking, we scraped a hole in the sand +and ashes under the fire, into which we put our vegetables, and covered +them up. + +The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and four or +five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and had a thick rind. We +found it somewhat like an Irish potato, and exceedingly good. The yam +was roundish, and had a rough brown skin. It was very sweet and well- +flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to find, was quite sweet and +exceedingly palatable, as also were the plums; and, indeed, the pork and +pigeon too, when we came to taste them. Altogether this was decidedly +the most luxurious supper we had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it +was out-of-sight better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin said +he feared that if we should remain long on the island he would infallibly +become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack remarked that he need not +fear that, for he was _both_ already! And so, having eaten our fill, not +forgetting to finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves comfortably down +to sleep upon a couch of branches under the overhanging ledge of a coral +rock. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon--Humble advice regarding +cold water--The "horrible cry" accounted for--The curious birds called +penguins--Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm--Questions on the formation +of coral islands--Mysterious footsteps--Strange discoveries and sad +sights. + +When we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun was already +a good way above the horizon, so I came to the conclusion that a heavy +supper is not conducive to early rising. Nevertheless, we felt +remarkably strong and well, and much disposed to have our breakfast. +First, however, we had our customary morning bathe, which refreshed us +greatly. + +I have often wondered very much in after years that the inhabitants of my +own dear land did not make more frequent use of this most charming +element, water. I mean in the way of cold bathing. Of course, I have +perceived that it is not convenient for them to go into the sea or the +rivers in winter, as we used to do on the Coral Island; but then, I knew +from experience that a large washing-tub and a sponge do form a most +pleasant substitute. The feelings of freshness, of cleanliness, of +vigour, and extreme hilarity, that always followed my bathes in the sea, +and even, when in England, my ablutions in the wash-tub, were so +delightful, that I would sooner have gone without my breakfast than +without my bathe in cold water. My readers will forgive me for asking +whether they are in the habit of bathing thus every morning; and if they +answer "No," they will pardon me for recommending them to begin at once. +Of late years, since retiring from the stirring life of adventure which I +have led so long in foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, so I do not +mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it down. Perhaps, in +reference to it, I may just hint that there may be too much of a good +thing. I know not; but of this I am quite certain, that there may also +be too little of a good thing; and the great delight I have had in cold +bathing during the course of my adventurous career inclines me to think +that it is better to risk taking too much than to content one's self with +too little. Such is my opinion, derived from much experience; but I put +it before my readers with the utmost diffidence and with profound +modesty, knowing that it may possibly jar with their feelings of +confidence in their own ability to know and judge as to what is best and +fittest in reference to their own affairs. But, to return from this +digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness. + +We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, and were just +beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually accompanies vigorous +exercise, when, on turning a point that revealed to us a new and +beautiful cluster of islands, we were suddenly arrested by the appalling +cry which had so alarmed us a few nights before. But this time we were +by no means so much alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas +at that time it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, +though I am unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many of the +fears that are apt to assail us in the dark. + +On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his spear. + +"Now, what can it be?" said he, looking round at Jack. "I tell you what +it is, if we are to go on being pulled up in a constant state of horror +and astonishment, as we have been for the last week, the sooner we're out +o' this island the better, notwithstanding the yams and lemonade, and +pork and plums!" + +Peterkin's remark was followed by a repetition of the cry, louder than +before. + +"It comes from one of these islands," said Jack. + +"It must be the ghost of a jackass, then," said Peterkin, "for I never +heard anything so like." + +We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, on the +largest, we observed curious objects moving on the shore. + +"Soldiers they are,--that's flat!" cried Peterkin, gazing at them in the +utmost amazement. + +And, in truth, Peterkin's remark seemed to me to be correct; for, at the +distance from which we saw them, they appeared to be an army of soldiers. +There they stood, rank and file, in lines and in squares, marching and +countermarching, with blue coats and white trousers. While we were +looking at them, the dreadful cry came again over the water, and Peterkin +suggested that it must be a regiment sent out to massacre the natives in +cold blood. At this remark Jack laughed and said,-- + +"Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!" + +"Penguins?" repeated Peterkin. + +"Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins,--nothing more or less than big sea- +birds, as you shall see one of these days, when we pay them a visit in +our boat, which I mean to set about building the moment we return to our +bower." + +"So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering army of +soldiers," remarked Peterkin, "have dwindled down to penguins,--big sea- +birds! Very good. Then I propose that we continue our journey as fast +as possible, lest our island should be converted into a dream before we +get completely round it." + +Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new discovery, +and the singular appearance of these birds, of which Jack could only give +us a very slight and vague account; and I began to long to commence to +our boat, in order that we might go and inspect them more narrowly. But +by degrees these thoughts left me, and I began to be much taken up again +with the interesting peculiarities of the country which we were passing +through. + +The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the first, at +about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we calculated, and we +hoped to sleep on the night following at our bower. I will not here note +so particularly all that we said and saw during the course of this second +day, as we did not make any further discoveries of great importance. The +shore along which we travelled, and the various parts of the woods +through which we passed, were similar to those which have been already +treated of. There were one or two observations that we made, however, +and these were as follows:-- + +We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew only in the +valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the streams, where the +soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm grew in every place +whatsoever,--not only on the hill sides, but also on the sea shore, and +even, as has been already stated, on the coral reef itself, where the +soil, if we may use the name, was nothing better than loose sand mingled +with broken shells and coral rock. So near to the sea, too, did this +useful tree grow, that in many places its roots were washed by the spray +from the breakers. Yet we found the trees growing thus on the sands to +be quite as luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, and the fruit as +good and refreshing also. Besides this, I noticed that, on the summit of +the high mountain, which we once more ascended at a different point from +our first ascent, were found abundance of shells and broken coral +formations, which Jack and I agreed proved either that this island must +have once been under the sea, or that the sea must once have been above +the island. In other words, that as shells and coral could not possibly +climb to the mountain top, they must have been washed upon it while the +mountain top was on a level with the sea. We pondered this very much; +and we put to ourselves the question, "What raised the island to its +present height above the sea?" But to this we could by no means give to +ourselves a satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have been blown up +by a volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must have jumped up of its +own accord! We also noticed, what had escaped us before, that the solid +rocks of which the island was formed were quite different from the live +coral rocks on the shore, where the wonderful little insects were +continually working. They seemed, indeed, to be of the same material,--a +substance like limestone; but, while the coral rocks were quite full of +minute cells in which the insects lived, the other rocks inland were hard +and solid, without the appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and +conversations on this subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin +said we should certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we +were such good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his pleasantry on +this and similar points to deter us from making our notes and +observations as we went along. + +We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but abstained from +killing any of them, having more than sufficient for our present +necessities. We saw also many of their foot-prints in this +neighbourhood. Among these we also observed the footprints of a smaller +animal, which we examined with much care, but could form no certain +opinion as to them. Peterkin thought they were those of a little dog, +but Jack and I thought differently. We became very curious on this +matter, the more so that we observed these foot-prints to lie scattered +about in one locality, as if the animal which had made them was wandering +round about in a very irregular manner, and without any object in view. +Early in the forenoon of our third day we observed these footprints to be +much more numerous than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged +off into the woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so +closely beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with difficulty. We +had now become so anxious to find out what animal this was, and where it +went to, that we determined to follow the track, and, if possible, clear +up the mystery. Peterkin said, in a bantering tone, that he was sure it +would be cleared up as usual in some frightfully simple way, and prove to +be no mystery at all! + +The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by the animal +itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had made it, and that +the smaller one made use of it. But everywhere the creeping plants and +tangled bushes crossed our path, so that we forced our way along with +some difficulty. Suddenly, as we came upon an open space, we heard a +faint cry, and observed a black animal standing in the track before us. + +"A wild-cat!" cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his bow, and discharging it +so hastily that he missed the animal, and hit the earth about half a foot +to one side of it. To our surprise the wild-cat did not fly, but walked +slowly towards the arrow, and snuffed at it. + +"That's the most comical wild-cat I ever saw!" cried Jack. + +"It's a tame wild-cat, I think," said Peterkin, levelling his spear to +make a charge. + +"Stop!" cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; "I do believe the poor +beast is blind. See, it strikes against the branches as it walks along. +It must be a very old one;" and I hastened towards it. + +"Only think," said Peterkin, with a suppressed laugh, "of a superannuated +wild-cat!" + +We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly so, but +extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we were quite +close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, putting up its back and +tail, while the black hair stood all on end, uttered a hoarse mew and a +fuff. + +"Poor thing," said Peterkin, gently extending his hand, and endeavouring +to pat the cat's head. "Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; puss, puss, puss; +cheetie pussy!" + +No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of anger fled, +and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself to be stroked, and +rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly all the time, and showing +every symptom of the most extreme delight. + +"It's no more a wild cat than I am!" cried Peterkin, taking it in his +arms. "It's quite tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!" + +We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little surprised, and, to +say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight of the poor animal's +excessive joy. It rubbed its head against Peterkin's cheek, licked his +chin, and thrust its head almost violently into his neck, while it purred +more loudly than I ever heard a cat purr before, and appeared to be so +much overpowered by its feelings, that it occasionally mewed and purred +almost in the same breath. Such demonstrations of joy and affection led +us at once to conclude that this poor cat must have known man before, and +we conjectured that it had been left either accidentally or by design on +the island many years ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at +meeting once more with human beings. While we were fondling the cat and +talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the midst of which +we stood. + +"Hallo!" exclaimed he; "this looks something like a clearing. The axe +has been at work here. Just look at these tree-stumps." + +We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found trees that +had been cut down here and there, also stumps and broken branches; all of +which, however, were completely covered over with moss, and bore evidence +of having been in this condition for some years. No human foot-prints +were to be seen, either on the track or among the bushes; but those of +the cat were found everywhere. We now determined to follow up the track +as far as it went, and Peterkin put the cat down; but it seemed to be so +weak, and mewed so very pitifully, that he took it up again and carried +it in his arms, where, in a few minutes, it fell sound asleep. + +About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more numerous, and +the track, diverging to the right, followed for a short space the banks +of a stream. Suddenly we came to a spot where once must have been a rude +bridge, the stones of which were scattered in the stream, and those on +each bank entirely covered over with moss. In silent surprise and +expectancy we continued to advance, and, a few yards farther on, beheld, +under the shelter of some bread-fruit trees, a small hut or cottage. I +cannot hope to convey to my readers a very correct idea of the feelings +that affected us on witnessing this unexpected sight. We stood for a +long time in silent wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy +stillness about the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at +length speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded by +some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin's voice, usually so +quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed now; for there was a +dreariness about this silent, lonely, uninhabited cottage,--so strange in +its appearance, so far away from the usual dwellings of man, so old, +decayed, and deserted in its aspect,--that fell upon our spirits like a +thick cloud, and blotted out as with a pall the cheerful sunshine that +had filled us since the commencement of our tour round the island. + +The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its construction. It was not +more than twelve feet long by ten feet broad, and about seven or eight +feet high. It had one window, or rather a small frame in which a window +might, perhaps, once have been, but which was now empty. The door was +exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, and the roof was covered +with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. But every part of it was in a +state of the utmost decay. Moss and green matter grew in spots all over +it. The woodwork was quite perforated with holes; the roof had nearly +fallen in, and appeared to be prevented from doing so altogether by the +thick matting of creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which years +of neglect had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while the thick, +luxuriant branches of the bread-fruit and other trees spread above it, +and flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, as if to guard it from the +heat and the light of day. We conversed long and in whispers about this +strange habitation ere we ventured to approach it; and when at length we +did so it was, at least on my part, with feelings of awe. + +At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from the deep +shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom within, he could not +clearly discern objects; so we lifted the latch and pushed open the door. +We observed that the latch was made of iron, and almost eaten away with +rust. In the like condition were also the hinges, which creaked as the +door swung back. On entering, we stood still and gazed around us, while +we were much impressed with the dreary stillness of the room. But what +we saw there surprised and shocked us not a little. There was no +furniture in the apartment save a little wooden stool and an iron pot, +the latter almost eaten through with rust. In the corner farthest from +the door was a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a +little heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to examine +them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that of a dog, which was +extended close beside that of the man, with its head resting on his bosom + +Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and could scarce +refrain from tears on beholding these sad remains. After some time, we +began to talk about what we had seen, and to examine in and around the +hut, in order to discover some clue to the name or history of this poor +man, who had thus died in solitude, with none to mourn his loss save his +cat and his faithful dog. But we found nothing,--neither a book nor a +scrap of paper. We found, however, the decayed remnants of what appeared +to have been clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things bore +marks of any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as to convince +us that they had lain in the condition in which we found them for many +years. + +This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the top of the +mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the patch of sugar-cane +and other traces of man which we had met with in the course of our +rambles over the island. And we were much saddened by the reflection +that the lot of this poor wanderer might possibly be our own, after many +years' residence on the island, unless we should be rescued by the visit +of some vessel or the arrival of natives. Having no clue whatever to +account for the presence of this poor human being in such a lonely spot, +we fell to conjecturing what could have brought him there. I was +inclined to think that he must have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose +vessel had been lost here, and all the crew been drowned except himself +and his dog and cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run +away from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him company. +We were also much occupied in our minds with the wonderful difference +between the cat and the dog. For here we saw that while the one +perished, like a loving friend, by its master's side, with its head +resting on his bosom, the other had sought to sustain itself by prowling +abroad in the forest, and had lived in solitude to a good old age. +However, we did not conclude from this that the cat was destitute of +affection, for we could not forget its emotions on first meeting with us; +but we saw from this, that the dog had a great deal more of generous love +in its nature than the cat, because it not only found it impossible to +live after the death of its master, but it must needs, when it came to +die, crawl to his side and rest its head upon his lifeless breast. + +While we were thinking on these things, and examining into everything +about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation from Peterkin. + +"I say, Jack," said he, "here is something that will be of use to us." + +"What is it?" said Jack, hastening across the room. + +"An old pistol," replied Peterkin, holding up the weapon, which he had +just pulled from under a heap of broken wood and rubbish that lay in a +corner. + +"That, indeed, might have been useful," said Jack, examining it, "if we +had any powder; but I suspect the bow and the sling will prove more +serviceable." + +"True, I forgot that," said Peterkin; "but we may as well take it with +us, for the flint will serve to strike fire with when the sun does not +shine." + +{A saddening discovery: p136.jpg} + +After having spent more than an hour at this place without discovering +anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the old cat, which had +lain very contentedly asleep on the stool whereon he had placed it, and +we prepared to take our departure. In leaving the hut, Jack stumbled +heavily against the door-post, which was so much decayed as to break +across, and the whole fabric of the hut seemed ready to tumble about our +ears. This put into our heads that we might as well pull it down, and so +form a mound over the skeleton. Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down +the other door-post, which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in +ruins to the ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor +recluse and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away the iron +pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much use to us +hereafter. + +During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and examined the +other end of the large valley, which we found to be so much alike to the +parts already described, that I shall not recount the particulars of what +we saw in this place. I may, however, remark, that we did not quite +recover our former cheerful spirits until we arrived at our bower, which +we did late in the evening, and found everything just in the same +condition as we had left it three days before. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + +Something wrong with the tank--Jack's wisdom and Peterkin's +impertinence--Wonderful behaviour of a crab--Good wishes for those who +dwell far from the sea--Jack commences to build a little boat. + +Rest is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. During my long +experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered life, I have found that +periods of profound rest at certain intervals, in addition to the +ordinary hours of repose, are necessary to the wellbeing of man. And the +nature as well as the period of this rest varies, according to the +different temperaments of individuals, and the peculiar circumstances in +which they may chance to be placed. To those who work with their minds, +bodily labour is rest. To those who labour with the body, deep sleep is +rest. To the downcast, the weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are +rest. Nay, further, I think that to the gay, the frivolous, the +reckless, when sated with pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves +to be rest of a kind, although, perchance, it were better that I should +call it relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one class of men to whom +rest is denied. There is no rest to the wicked. At this I do but hint, +however, as I treat not of that rest which is spiritual, but, more +particularly, of that which applies to the mind and to the body. + +Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we found it +exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after completing the journey +just related. It had not, indeed, been a very long journey, nevertheless +we had pursued it so diligently that our frames were not a little +prostrated. Our minds were also very much exhausted in consequence of +the many surprises, frequent alarms, and much profound thought, to which +they had been subjected; so that when we lay down on the night of our +return under the shelter of the bower, we fell immediately into very deep +repose. I can state this with much certainty, for Jack afterwards +admitted the fact, and Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard +snoring loudly at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition +we remained all night and the whole of the following day without awaking +once, or so much as moving our positions. When we did awake it was near +sunset, and we were all in such a state of lassitude that we merely rose +to swallow a mouthful of food. As Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a +yawn, we took breakfast at tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we +lay till the following forenoon. + +After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed lest we had +lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed on this head, for we had +carefully kept count of the days since we were cast upon our island, in +order that we might remember the Sabbath-day, which day we had hitherto +with one accord kept as a day of rest, and refrained from all work +whatsoever. However, on considering the subject, we all three +entertained the same opinion as to how long we had slept, and so our +minds were put at ease. + +We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to see how did +the animals which I had placed in the tank. We found the garden more +charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, and Jack and I plunged into +its depth, and gambolled among its radiant coral groves; while Peterkin +wallowed at the surface, and tried occasionally to kick us as we passed +below. Having dressed, I then hastened to the tank; but what was my +surprise and grief to find nearly all the animals dead, and the water in +a putrid condition! I was greatly distressed at this, and wondered what +could be the cause of it. + +"Why, you precious humbug," said Peterkin, coming up to me, "how could +you expect it to be otherwise? When fishes are accustomed to live in the +Pacific Ocean, how can you expect them to exist in a hole like that?" + +"Indeed, Peterkin," I replied, "there seems to be truth in what you say. +Nevertheless, now I think of it, there must be some error in your +reasoning; for, if I put in but a few very small animals, they will bear +the same proportion to this pond that the millions of fish bear to the +ocean." + +"I say, Jack," cried Peterkin, waving his hand, "come here, like a good +fellow. Ralph is actually talking philosophy. Do come to our +assistance, for he's out o' sight beyond me already!" + +"What's the matter?" inquired Jack, coming up, while he endeavoured to +scrub his long hair dry with a towel of cocoa-nut cloth. + +I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, quite agreed +with me. "Your best plan," he said, "will be to put very few animals at +first into your tank, and add more as you find it will bear them. And +look here," he added, pointing to the sides of the tank, which, for the +space of two inches above the water-level, were incrusted with salt, "you +must carry your philosophy a little farther, Ralph. That water has +evaporated so much that it is too salt for anything to live in. You will +require to add _fresh_ water now and then, in order to keep it at the +same degree of saltness as the sea." + +"Very true, Jack, that never struck me before," said I. + +"And, now I think of it," continued Jack, "it seems to me that the surest +way of arranging your tank so as to get it to keep pure and in good +condition, will be to imitate the ocean in it. In fact make it a +miniature Pacific. I don't see how you can hope to succeed unless you do +that." + +"Most true," said I, pondering what my companion said. "But I fear that +that will be very difficult." + +"Not at all," cried Jack, rolling his towel up into a ball, and throwing +it into the face of Peterkin, who had been grinning and winking at him +during the last five minutes. "Not at all. Look here. There is water +of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill your tank with sea water, +and keep it at that saltness by marking the height at which the water +stands on the sides. When it evaporates a little, pour in _fresh_ water +from the brook till it comes up to the mark, and then it will be right, +for the salt does not evaporate with the water. Then, there's lots of +sea-weed in the sea;--well, go and get one or two bits of sea-weed, and +put them into your tank. Of course the weed must be alive, and growing +to little stones; or you can chip a bit off the rocks with the weed +sticking to it. Then, if you like, you can throw a little sand and +gravel into your tank, and the thing's complete." + +"Nay, not quite," said Peterkin, who had been gravely attentive to this +off-hand advice, "not quite; you must first make three little men to dive +in it before it can be said to be perfect, and that would be rather +difficult, I fear, for two of them would require to be philosophers. But +hallo! what's this? I say, Ralph, look here. There's one o' your crabs +up to something uncommon. It's performing the most remarkable operation +for a crab I ever saw,--taking off its coat, I do believe, before going +to bed!" + +We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a little amused +at the conduct of one of the crabs which still survived it companions. It +was one of the common small crabs, like to those that are found running +about everywhere on the coasts of England. While we gazed at it, we +observed its back to split away from the lower part of its body, and out +of the gap thus formed came a soft lump which moved and writhed +unceasingly. This lump continued to increase in size until it appeared +like a bunch of crab's legs: and, indeed, such it proved in a very few +minutes to be; for the points of the toes were at length extricated from +this hole in its back, the legs spread out, the body followed, and the +crab walked away quite entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, +leaving a perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of one! + +"Well!" exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, "I've _heard_ of a man +jumping out of his skin and sitting down in his skeleton in order to cool +himself, but I never expected to _see_ a crab do it!" + +We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more so when we +observed that the new crab was larger than the crab that it came out of. +It was also quite soft, but by next morning its skin had hardened into a +good shell. We came thus to know that crabs grow in this way, and not by +the growing of their shells, as we had always thought before we saw this +wonderful operation. + +Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about preparing +my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came to regard it as +very sound and worthy of being acted on. So I forthwith put his plan in +execution, and found it to answer excellently well, indeed much beyond my +expectation; for I found that after a little experience had taught me the +proper proportion of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount of +water, the tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I did not +require ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, but only to add +a very little fresh water from the brook, now and then, as the other +evaporated. I therefore concluded that if I had been suddenly conveyed, +along with my tank, into some region where there was no salt sea at all, +my little sea and my sea-fish would have continued to thrive and to +prosper notwithstanding. This made me greatly to desire that those +people in the world who live far inland might know of my wonderful tank, +and, by having materials like to those of which it was made conveyed to +them, thus be enabled to watch the habits of those most mysterious +animals that reside in the sea, and examine with their own eyes the +wonders of the great deep. + +For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily employed in +building a little boat out of the curious natural planks of the chestnut +tree, I spent much of my time in examining with the burning-glass the +marvellous operations that were constantly going on in my tank. Here I +saw those anemones which cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs +of jelly, to the rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and +wait till little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched them, +when they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm around their +victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. Here I saw the ceaseless +working of those little coral insects whose efforts have encrusted the +islands of the Pacific with vast rocks, and surrounded them with enormous +reefs. And I observed that many of these insects, though extremely +minute, were very beautiful, coming out of their holes in a circle of +fine threads, and having the form of a shuttle-cock. Here I saw curious +little barnacles opening a hole in their backs and constantly putting out +a thin feathery hand, with which, I doubt not, they dragged their food +into their mouths. Here, also, I saw those crabs which have shells only +on the front of their bodies, but no shell whatever on their remarkably +tender tails, so that, in order to find a protection to them, they thrust +them into the empty shells of wilks, or some such fish, and when they +grow too big for one, change into another. But, most curious of all, I +saw an animal which had the wonderful power, when it became ill, of +casting its stomach and its teeth away from it, and getting an entirely +new set in the course of a few months! All this I saw, and a great deal +more, by means of my tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from +setting down more particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the +adventures that befell us while we remained on this island. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs--The mysterious green monster +explained--We are thrown into unutterable terror by the idea that Jack is +drowned--The Diamond Cave. + +"Come, Jack," cried Peterkin, one morning about three weeks after our +return from our long excursion, "let's be jolly to-day, and do something +vigorous. I'm quite tired of hammering and hammering, hewing and +screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of ours, that seems as +hard to build as Noah's ark; let us go on an excursion to the mountain +top, or have a hunt after the wild ducks, or make a dash at the pigs. I'm +quite flat--flat as bad ginger-beer--flat as a pancake; in fact, I want +something to rouse me, to toss me up, as it were. Eh! what do you say to +it?" + +"Well," answered Jack, throwing down the axe with which he was just about +to proceed towards the boat, "if that's what you want, I would recommend +you to make an excursion to the water-spouts; the last one we had to do +with tossed you up a considerable height, perhaps the next will send you +higher, who knows, if you're at all reasonable or moderate in your +expectations!" + +"Jack, my dear boy," said Peterkin, gravely, "you are really becoming too +fond of jesting. It's a thing I don't at all approve of, and if you +don't give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, we shall have to +part." + +"Well, then, Peterkin," replied Jack, with a smile, "what would you +have?" + +"Have?" said Peterkin, "I would _have_ nothing. I didn't say I wanted to +_have_; I said that I wanted to _do_." + +"By the by," said I, interrupting their conversation, "I am reminded by +this that we have not yet discovered the nature of yon curious appearance +that we saw near the water-spouts, on our journey round the island. +Perhaps it would be well to go for that purpose." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Peterkin, "I know the nature of it well enough." + +"What was it?" said I. + +"It was of a _mysterious_ nature to be sure!" said he, with a wave of his +hand, while he rose from the log on which he had been sitting, and +buckled on his belt, into which he thrust his enormous club. + +"Well then, let us away to the water-spouts," cried Jack, going up to the +bower for his bow and arrows; "and bring your spear, Peterkin. It may be +useful." + +We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, sallied +forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, which, as I have +before mentioned, were not far from our present place of abode. On +arriving there we hastened down to the edge of the rocks, and gazed over +into the sea, where we observed the pale-green object still distinctly +visible, moving its tail slowly to and fro in the water. + +"Most remarkable!" said Jack. + +"Exceedingly curious," said I. + +"Beats everything!" said Peterkin. + +"Now, Jack," he added, "you made such a poor figure in your last attempt +to stick that object, that I would advise you to let me try it. If it +has got a heart at all, I'll engage to send my spear right through the +core of it; if it hasn't got a heart, I'll send it through the spot where +its heart ought to be." + +"Fire away, then, my boy," replied Jack with a laugh. + +Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or two above +his head, then darted it like an arrow into the sea. Down it went +straight into the centre of the green object, passed quite through it, +and came up immediately afterwards, pure and unsullied, while the +mysterious tail moved quietly as before! + +"Now," said Peterkin, gravely, "that brute is a heartless monster; I'll +have nothing more to do with it." + +"I'm pretty sure now," said Jack, "that it is merely a phosphoric light; +but I must say I'm puzzled at its staying always in that exact spot." + +I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that it must be +phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had seen much while on +our voyage to these seas. "But," said I, "there is nothing to hinder us +from diving down to it, now that we are sure it is not a shark." + +"True," returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; "I'll go down, Ralph, +as I'm better at diving than you are. Now then, Peterkin, out o' the +road!" Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above his head, bent over +the rocks, and plunged into the sea. For a second or two the spray +caused by his dive hid him from view, then the water became still, and we +saw him swimming far down in the midst of the green object. Suddenly he +sank below it, and vanished altogether from our sight! We gazed +anxiously down at the spot where he had disappeared, for nearly a minute, +expecting every moment to see him rise again for breath; but fully a +minute passed, and still he did not reappear. Two minutes passed! and +then a flood of alarm rushed in upon my soul, when I considered that +during all my acquaintance with him, Jack had never stayed underwater +more than a minute at a time; indeed seldom so long. + +"Oh, Peterkin!" I said, in a voice that trembled with increasing anxiety, +"something has happened. It is more than three minutes now!" But +Peterkin did not answer and I observed that he was gazing down into the +water with a look of intense fear mingled with anxiety, while his face +was overspread with a deadly paleness. Suddenly he sprang to his feet +and rushed about in a frantic state, wringing his hands, and exclaiming, +"Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! It must have been a shark, and he is gone +for ever!" + +For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The intensity of my +feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But I was recalled to myself by +Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder and staring wildly into my face, +while he exclaimed, "Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has only fainted. Dive for +him, Ralph!" + +It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. In a moment I +rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without waiting to throw off my +garments, was on the point to spring into the waves, when I observed +something black rising up through the green object. In another moment +Jack's head rose to the surface, and he gave a wild shout, flinging back +the spray from his locks, as was his wont after a dive. Now we were +almost as much amazed at seeing him reappear, well and strong, as we had +been at first at his non-appearance; for, to the best of our judgment, he +had been nearly ten minutes under water, perhaps longer, and it required +no exertion of our reason to convince us that this was utterly impossible +for mortal man to do and retain his strength and faculties. It was +therefore with a feeling akin to superstitious awe that I held down my +hand and assisted him to clamber up the steep rocks. But no such feeling +affected Peterkin. No sooner did Jack gain the rocks and seat himself on +one, panting for breath, than he threw his arms round his neck, and burst +into a flood of tears. "Oh, Jack, Jack!" said he, "where were you? What +kept you so long?" + +After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit still and +listen to Jack's explanation, although he could not restrain himself from +attempting to wink every two minutes at me, in order to express his joy +at Jack's safety. I say he attempted to wink, but I am bound to add that +he did not succeed, for his eyes were so much swollen with weeping, that +his frequent attempts only resulted in a series of violent and altogether +idiotical contortions of the face, that were very far from expressing +what he intended. However, I knew what the poor fellow meant by it, so I +smiled to him in return, and endeavoured to make believe that he was +winking. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, when we were composed enough to listen to him, +"yon green object is not a shark; it is a stream of light issuing from a +cave in the rocks. Just after I made my dive, I observed that this light +came from the side of the rock above which we are now sitting; so I +struck out for it, and saw an opening into some place or other that +appeared to be luminous within. For one instant I paused to think +whether I ought to venture. Then I made up my mind, and dashed into it. +For you see, Peterkin, although I take some time to tell this, it +happened in the space of a few seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough +in me to serve to bring me out o' the hole and up to the surface again. +Well, I was just on the point of turning,--for I began to feel a little +uncomfortable in such a place,--when it seemed to me as if there was a +faint light right above me. I darted upwards, and found my head out of +water. This relieved me greatly, for I now felt that I could take in air +enough to enable me to return the way I came. Then it all at once +occurred to me that I might not be able to find the way out again; but, +on glancing downwards, my mind was put quite at rest by seeing the green +light below me streaming into the cave, just like the light that we had +seen streaming out of it, only what I now saw was much brighter. + +"At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed around me, it was so +dark; but gradually my eyes became accustomed to it, and I found that I +was in a huge cave, part of the walls of which I observed on each side of +me. The ceiling just above me was also visible, and I fancied that I +could perceive beautiful glittering objects there, but the farther end of +the cave was shrouded in darkness. While I was looking around me in +great wonder, it came into my head that you two would think I was +drowned; so I plunged down through the passage again in a great hurry, +rose to the surface, and--here I am!" + +When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this remarkable +cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down to see it; which I +did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, that I could scarcely see +anything. When I returned, we had a long conversation about it, during +which I observed that Peterkin had a most lugubrious expression on his +countenance. + +"What's the matter, Peterkin?" said I. + +"The matter?" he replied. "It's all very well for you two to be talking +away like mermaids about the wonders of this cave, but you know I must be +content to hear about it, while you are enjoying yourselves down there +like mad dolphins. It's really too bad." + +"I'm very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I am," said Jack, "but we +cannot help you. If you would only learn to dive--" + +"Learn to fly, you might as well say!" retorted Peterkin, in a very sulky +tone. + +"If you would only consent to keep still," said I, "we would take you +down with us in ten seconds." + +"Hum!" returned Peterkin; "suppose a salamander was to propose to you +'only to keep still,' and he would carry you through a blazing fire in a +few seconds, what would you say?" + +We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that nothing was +to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we could not rest satisfied +till we had seen more of this cave; so, after further consultation, Jack +and I determined to try if we could take down a torch with us, and set +fire to it in the cavern. This we found to be an undertaking of no small +difficulty; but we accomplished it at last by the following means:--First, +we made a torch of a very inflammable nature out of the bark of a certain +tree, which we cut into strips, and, after twisting, cemented together +with a kind of resin or gum, which we also obtained from another tree; +neither of which trees, however, was known by name to Jack. This, when +prepared, we wrapped up in a great number of plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so +that we were confident it could not get wet during the short time it +should be under water. Then we took a small piece of the tinder, which +we had carefully treasured up lest we should require it, as before said, +when the sun should fail us; also, we rolled up some dry grass and a few +chips, which, with a little bow and drill, like those described before, +we made into another bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When +all was ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against the rocks +we might be subjected to, we kept on. + +Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one bundle, with +the torch; I the other, with the things for producing fire. + +"Now don't weary for us, Peterkin, should we be gone some time," said +Jack; "we'll be sure to return in half-an-hour at the very latest, +however interesting the cave should be, that we may relieve your mind." + +"Farewell!" said Peterkin, coming up to us with a look of deep but +pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and kissed each of us on the +cheek. "Farewell! and while you are gone I shall repose my weary limbs +under the shelter of this bush, and meditate on the changefulness of all +things earthly, with special reference to the forsaken condition of a +poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!" So saying, Peterkin waved his hand, +turned from us, and cast himself upon the ground with a look of +melancholy resignation, which was so well feigned, that I would have +thought it genuine had he not accompanied it with a gentle wink. We both +laughed, and, springing from the rocks together, plunged head first into +the sea. + +We gained the interior of the submarine cave without difficulty, and, on +emerging from the waves, supported ourselves for some time by treading- +water, while we held the two bundles above our heads. This we did in +order to let our eyes become accustomed to the obscurity. Then, when we +could see sufficiently, we swam to a shelving rock, and landed in safety. +Having wrung the water from our trousers, and dried ourselves as well as +we could under the circumstances, we proceeded to ignite the torch. This +we accomplished without difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did it +flare up than we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects that were +revealed to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above us seemed to be +about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded into the distance, +until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be made of coral, and was +supported by massive columns of the same material. Immense icicles (as +they appeared to us) hung from it in various places. These, however, +were formed, not of ice, but of a species of limestone, which seemed to +flow in a liquid form towards the point of each, where it became solid. A +good many drops fell, however, to the rock below, and these formed little +cones, which rose to meet the points above. Some of them had already +met, and thus we saw how the pillars were formed, which at first seemed +to us as if they had been placed there by some human architect to support +the roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor was composed +of the same material as the pillars; and it presented the curious +appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water when gently ruffled by +the wind. There were several openings on either hand in the walls, that +seemed to lead into other caverns; but these we did not explore at this +time. We also observed that the ceiling was curiously marked in many +places, as if it were the fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the walls, +as well as the roof, sparkled in the light of our torch, and threw back +gleams and flashes, as if they were covered with precious stones. +Although we proceeded far into this cavern, we did not come to the end of +it; and we were obliged to return more speedily than we would otherwise +have done, as our torch was nearly expended. We did not observe any +openings in the roof, or any indications of places whereby light might +enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an immense mass of pure +white coral rock, which caught and threw back the little light that found +an entrance through the cave's mouth, and thus produced, we conjectured, +the pale-green object which had first attracted our attention. We +concluded, also, that the reflecting power of this rock was that which +gave forth the dim light that faintly illumined the first part of the +cave. + +Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the small piece +of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry spot; conceiving that we +might possibly stand in need of it, if at any future time we should +chance to wet our torch while diving into the cavern. As we stood for a +few minutes after it was out, waiting till our eyes became accustomed to +the gloom, we could not help remarking the deep, intense stillness and +the unutterable gloom of all around us; and, as I thought of the +stupendous dome above, and the countless gems that had sparkled in the +torch-light a few minutes before, it came into my mind to consider how +strange it is that God should make such wonderful and exquisitely beautiful +works never to be seen at all, except, indeed, by chance visitors such as +ourselves. + +I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the islands of +the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful than the one I +have just described. + +"Now, Ralph, are you ready?" said Jack, in a low voice, that seemed to +echo up into the dome above. + +"Quite ready." + +"Come along, then," said he; and, plunging off the ledge of the rock into +the water, we dived through the narrow entrance. In a few seconds we +were panting on the rocks above, and receiving the congratulations of our +friend Peterkin. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + +Strange peculiarity of the tides--Also of the twilight--Peterkin's +remarkable conduct in embracing a little pig and killing a big sow--Sage +remarks on jesting--Also on love. + +It was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to enjoy the glad +sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond Cave, as we named it; for, +although we did not stay more than half an hour away, it seemed to us +much longer. While we were dressing, and during our walk home, we did +our best to satisfy the curiosity of poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, +with lively sincerity, his inability to dive. + +There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as we best +could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the tide of these seas, +we might perhaps have found it possible to take him down with us at low +water; but as the tide never rose or fell more than eighteen inches or +two feet, this was impossible. + +This peculiarity of the tide--its slight rise and fall--had not attracted +our observation till some time after our residence on the island. Neither +had we observed another curious circumstance until we had been some time +there. This was the fact, that the tide rose and fell with constant +regularity, instead of being affected by the changes of the moon as in +our own country, and as it is in most other parts of the world,--at least +in all those parts with which I am acquainted. Every day and every +night, at twelve o'clock precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six +o'clock every morning and evening it is ebb. I can speak with much +confidence on this singular circumstance, as we took particular note of +it, and never found it to alter. Of course, I must admit, we had to +guess the hour of twelve midnight, and I think we could do this pretty +correctly; but in regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, because we +easily found the highest point that the sun reached in the sky by placing +ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed the sharp summit of a +cliff resting against the sky, just where the sun passed. + +Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the first few days +of our residence here, and could only account for it by our being so much +taken up with the more obvious wonders of our novel situation. I have +since learned, however, that this want of observation is a sad and very +common infirmity of human nature, there being hundreds of persons before +whose eyes the most wonderful things are passing every day, who +nevertheless are totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my +sympathy with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of conduct +which I have now for a long time myself adopted,--namely, the habit of +forcing my attention upon _all_ things that go on around me, and of +taking some degree of interest in them, whether I feel it naturally or +not. I suggest this the more earnestly, though humbly, because I have +very frequently come to know that my indifference to a thing has +generally been caused by my ignorance in regard to it. + +We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; and Jack +told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these tides did great +good to the world in many ways, particularly in the way of cleansing the +shores of the land, and carrying off the filth that was constantly poured +into the sea there-from; which, Peterkin suggested, was remarkably _tidy_ +of it to do. Poor Peterkin could never let slip an opportunity to joke, +however inopportune it might be: which at first we found rather a +disagreeable propensity, as it often interrupted the flow of very +agreeable conversation; and, indeed, I cannot too strongly record my +disapprobation of this tendency in general: but we became so used to it +at last that we found it no interruption whatever; indeed, strange to +say, we came to feel that it was a necessary part of our enjoyment (such +is the force of habit), and found the sudden outbursts of mirth, +resulting from his humorous disposition, quite natural and refreshing to +us in the midst of our more serious conversations. But I must not +misrepresent Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he knew +many things which we did not; and I also observed that those things which +he learned from experience were never forgotten. From all these things I +came at length to understand that things very opposite and dissimilar in +themselves, when united, do make an agreeable whole; as, for example, we +three on this our island, although most unlike in many things, when +united, made a trio so harmonious that I question if there ever met +before such an agreeable triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of +discord whatever in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral +Island; and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having been all +tuned to the same key, namely, that of _love_! Yes, we loved one another +with much fervency while we lived on that island; and, for the matter of +that, we love each other still. + +And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that just preceded +it--namely, the tides--I may here remark on another curious natural +phenomenon. We found that there was little or no twilight in this +island. We had a distinct remembrance of the charming long twilight at +home, which some people think the most delightful part of the day, though +for my part I have always preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, we +used to sit down on some rocky point or eminence, at the close of our +day's work, to enjoy the evening breeze; but no sooner had the sun sunk +below the horizon than all became suddenly dark. This rendered it +necessary that we should watch the sun when we happened to be out +hunting, for to be suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very +perplexing, as, although the stars shone with great beauty and +brilliancy, they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous boughs +that interlaced above our heads. + +But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin about the +Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the locality, we were +wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt and a squeal were borne +down by the land breeze to our ears. + +"That's the ticket!" was Peterkin's remarkable exclamation, as he started +convulsively, and levelled his spear. + +"Hist!" cried Jack; "these are your friends, Peterkin. They must have +come over expressly to pay you a friendly visit, for it is the first time +we have seen them on this side the island." + +"Come along!" cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the wood, while Jack and I +followed, smiling at his impatience. + +Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than before, came +down the valley. At this time we were just opposite the small vale which +lay between the Valley of the Wreck and Spouting Cliff. + +"I say, Peterkin," cried Jack, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Well, what is't?" + +"Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there on the hill side. If +you go and stand with Ralph in the lee of yon cliff, I'll cut round +behind and drive them through the gorge, so that you'll have a better +chance of picking out a good one. Now, mind you pitch into a fat young +pig, Peterkin," added Jack, as he sprang into the bushes. + +"Won't I, just!" said Peterkin, licking his lips, as we took our station +beside the cliff. "I feel quite a tender affection for young pigs in my +heart. Perhaps it would be more correct to say in my s--." + +"There they come!" cried I, as a terrific yell from Jack sent the whole +herd screaming down the hill. Now, Peterkin, being unable to hold back, +crept a short way up a very steep grassy mound, in order to get a better +view of the hogs before they came up; and just as he raised his head +above its summit, two little pigs, which had outrun their companions, +rushed over the top with the utmost precipitation. One of these brushed +close past Peterkin's ear; the other, unable to arrest its headlong +flight, went, as Peterkin himself afterwards expressed it, "bash" into +his arms with a sudden squeal, which was caused more by the force of the +blow than the will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently down +to the foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached than the little pig +recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and fled shrieking from the spot. +But I slang a large stone after it, which, being fortunately well aimed, +hit it behind the ear, and felled it to the earth. + +"Capital, Ralph! that's your sort!" cried Peterkin, who, to my surprise +and great relief, had risen to his feet. Apparently unhurt, though much +dishevelled, he rushed franticly towards the gorge, which the yells of +the hogs told us they were now approaching. I had made up my mind that I +would abstain from killing another, as, if Peterkin should be successful, +two were more than sufficient for our wants at the present time. Suddenly +they all burst forth,--two or three little round ones in advance, and an +enormous old sow with a drove of hogs at her heels. + +"Now, Peterkin," said I, "there's a nice little fat one; just spear it." + +But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass unharmed. I looked at +him in surprise, and saw that his lips were compressed and his eyebrows +knitted, as if he were about to fight with some awful enemy. + +"What is it?" I inquired, with some trepidation. + +Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a yell that +nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow to the heart. +Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear went in at one side and +came out at the other! + +"Oh, Peterkin!" said I, going up to him, "what have you done?" + +"Done? I've killed their great-great-grandmother, that's all," said he, +looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the transfixed animal. + +"Hallo! what's this?" said Jack, as he came up. "Why, Peterkin, you must +be fond of a tough chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, she'll try +your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick _her_, Peterkin?" + +"Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes." + +"What have your shoes to do with the old hog?' said I, smiling. + +"My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with her," replied +Peterkin; "nevertheless she will have a good deal to do with my future +shoes. The fact is, when I saw you floor that pig so neatly, Ralph, it +struck me that there was little use in killing another. Then I +remembered all at once that I had long wanted some leather or tough +substance to make shoes of, and this old grandmother seemed so tough that +I just made up my mind to stick her, and you see I've done it!" + +"That you certainly have, Peterkin," said Jack, as he was examining the +transfixed animal. + +We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, although the +distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At length we hit on the plan +of tying its four feet together, and passing the spear handle between +them. Jack took one end on his shoulder, I took the other on mine, and +Peterkin carried the small pig. + +Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin remarked, +with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he afterwards spoke in +similarly glowing terms in reference to the supper that followed, there +is every reason to believe that we retired that night to our leafy beds +in a high state of satisfaction. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + +Boat-building extraordinary--Peterkin tries his hand at cookery and fails +most signally--The boat finished--Curious conversation with the cat, and +other matters. + +For many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting assiduity +to the construction of our boat, which at length began to look somewhat +like one. But those only who have had the thing to do can entertain a +right idea of the difficulty involved in such an undertaking, with no +other implements than an axe, a bit of hoop-iron, a sail-needle, and a +broken pen-knife. But Jack did it. He was of, that disposition which +_will_ not be conquered. When he believed himself to be acting rightly, +he overcame all obstacles. I have seen Jack, when doubtful whether what +he was about to do were right or wrong, as timid and vacillating as a +little girl,--and I honour him for it! + +As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here relative to the +manner of its construction may not be amiss. + +I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful buttresses +or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with the chief part of our +material. First of all Jack sought out a limb of a tree of such a form +and size as, while it should form the keel a bend at either end should +form the stem and stern posts. Such a piece, however, was not easy to +obtain, but at last he procured it, by rooting up a small tree which had +a branch growing at the proper angle about ten feet up its stem, with two +strong roots growing in such a form as enabled him to make a flat-sterned +boat. This placed, he procured three branching roots of suitable size, +which he fitted to the keel at equal distances, thus forming three strong +ribs. Now, the squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of the +grooves in the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all work for +the axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully expert; but it +was quite a different affair when he came to nailing the ribs to the +keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a large hole, and no +nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, much perplexed here; but +Jack at length devised an instrument that served very well. He took the +remainder of our hoop-iron and beat it into the form of a pipe or +cylinder, about as thick as a man's finger. This he did by means of our +axe and the old rusty axe we had found at the house of the poor man at +the other side of the island. This, when made red hot, bored slowly +though the timbers; and, the better to retain the heat, Jack shut up one +end of it and filled it with sand. True, the work was very slowly done, +but it mattered not--we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into the keel, +but not quite through. Into these were placed stout pegs made of a tree +called iron-wood; and, when they were hammered well home, the timbers +were as firmly fixed as if they had been nailed with iron. The gunwales, +which were very stout, were fixed in a similar manner. But, besides the +wooden nails, they were firmly lashed to the stem and stern posts and +ribs by means of a species of cordage which we had contrived to make out +of the fibrous husk of the cocoa nut. This husk was very tough, and when +a number of the threads were joined together they formed excellent +cordage. At first we tied the different lengths together, but this was +such a clumsy and awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by +careful interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make good +cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost us much time +and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits when we grew weary, and +so all that we required was at last constructed. + +Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch thick. These +were dressed with the axe,--but clumsily, for an axe is ill adapted for +such work. Five of these planks on each side were sufficient, and we +formed the boat in a very rounded, barrel-like shape, in order to have as +little twisting of the planks as possible; for, although we could easily +bend them, we could not easily twist them. Having no nails to rivet the +planks with, we threw aside the ordinary fashion of boat building and +adopted one of our own. The planks were therefore placed on each other's +edges, and sewed together with the tough cordage already mentioned. They +were also thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. Each stitch +or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: Three holes were bored +in the upper plank and three in the lower,--the holes being above each +other, that is, in a vertical line. Through these holes the cord was +passed, and, when tied, formed a powerful stitch of three ply. Besides +this, we placed between the edges of the planks, layers of cocoa-nut +fibre, which, as it swelled when wetted, would, we hoped, make our little +vessel water-tight. But in order further to secure this end, we +collected a large quantity of pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with +which, when boiled in our old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside +of the boat, and, while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut +cloth on it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the interior +was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the exterior, being +uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action of the water, was we +hoped, likely to keep the boat quite dry. I may add that our hopes were +not disappointed. + +While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted him, but, +as our assistance was not much required, we more frequently went +a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the entrance of the long valley +which lay nearest to our bower. Here we found large flocks of ducks of +various kinds, some of them bearing so much resemblance to the wild ducks +of our own country that I think they must have been the same. On these +occasions we took the bow and the sling, with both of which we were often +successful, though I must confess I was the least so. Our suppers were +thus pleasantly varied, and sometimes we had such a profusion spread out +before us that we frequently knew not with which of the dainties to +begin. + +I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought home had +always a liberal share of our good things, and so well was it looked +after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered much of its former +strength, and seemed to improve in sight as well as hearing. + +{Leaving for the "mud-flats": p175.jpg} + +The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in front of the +entrance to our bower, was our table. On this rock we had spread out the +few articles we possessed the day we were shipwrecked; and on the same +rock, during many a day afterwards, we spread out the bountiful supply +with which we had been blessed on our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat +down at this table to a feast consisting of hot rolls,--as Peterkin +called the newly baked bread fruit,--a roast pig, roast duck, boiled and +roasted yams, cocoa nuts, taro, and sweet potatoes; which we followed up +with a dessert of plums, apples, and plantains,--the last being a large- +sized and delightful fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more +than twelve feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down with cocoa-nut +lemonade. + +Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new dish,--"a conglomerate," +as he used to say; but these generally turned out such atrocious +compounds that he was ultimately induced to give up his attempts in +extreme disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point out to Jack that his +failure was a direct contradiction to the proverb which he, Jack, was +constantly thrusting down his throat, namely, that "where there's a will +there's a way." For he had a great will to become a cook, but could by +no means find a way to accomplish that end. + +One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on which +dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, flinging down his +axe, exclaimed,-- + +"There, lads, the boat's finished at last! so we've nothing to do now but +shape two pair of oars, and then we may put to sea as soon as we like." + +This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for although we +were aware that the boat had been gradually getting near its completion, +it had taken so long that we did not expect it to be quite ready for at +least two or three weeks. But Jack had wrought hard and said nothing, in +order to surprise us. + +"My dear fellow," cried Peterkin, "you're a perfect trump. But why did +you not tell us it was so nearly ready? won't we have a jolly sail to- +morrow? eh?" + +"Don't talk so much, Peterkin," said Jack; "and, pray, hand me a bit of +that pig." + +"Certainly, my dear," cried Peterkin, seizing the axe; "what part will +you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece of the breast; which?" + +"A hind leg, if you please," answered Jack; "and, pray, be so good as to +include the tail." + +"With all my heart," said Peterkin, exchanging the axe for his hoop-iron +knife, with which he cut off the desired portion. "I'm only too glad, my +dear boy, to see that your appetite is so wholesale; and there's no +chance whatever of its dwindling down into re-tail again, at least in so +far as this pig is concerned. Ralph, lad, why don't you laugh?--eh?" he +added turning suddenly to me with a severe look of inquiry. + +"Laugh?" said I; "what at, Peterkin? why should I laugh?" + +Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves laughing so +immoderately that I was induced to believe I had missed noticing some +good joke, so I begged that it might be explained to me; but as this only +produced repeated roars of laughter, I smiled and helped myself to +another slice of plantain. + +"Well, but," continued Peterkin, "I was talking of a sail to-morrow. +Can't we have one, Jack?" + +"No," replied Jack, "we can't have a sail, but I hope we shall have a +row, as I intend to work hard at the oars this afternoon, and, if we +can't get them finished by sunset we'll light our candle-nuts, and turn +them out of hands before we turn into bed." + +"Very good," said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork to the cat, who +received it with a mew of satisfaction. "I'll help you, if I can." + +"Afterwards," continued Jack, "we will make a sail out of the cocoa-nut +cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we shall be able to sail to some of +the other islands, and visit our old friends the penguins." + +The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our observations to +the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the beautiful sea, afforded us +much delight, and, after dinner, we set about making the oars in good +earnest. Jack went into the woods and blocked them roughly out with the +axe, and I smoothed them down with the knife, while Peterkin remained in +the bower, spinning, or, rather, twisting some strong thick cordage with +which to fasten them to the boat. + +We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, Jack and I +returned to the bower with four stout oars, which required little to be +done to them save a slight degree of polishing with the knife. As we +drew near we were suddenly arrested by the sound of a voice! We were not +a little surprised at this--indeed I may almost say alarmed--for, +although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of talking, we had never, up to +this time, found him talking to himself. We listened intently, and still +heard the sound of a voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be +silent, and, advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in. + +The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little amusing. On the +top of a log which we sometimes used as a table, sat the black cat, with +a very demure expression on its countenance; and in front of it, sitting +on the ground, with his legs extended on either side of the log, was +Peterkin. At the moment we saw him he was gazing intently into the cat's +face, with his nose about four inches from it,--his hands being thrust +into his breeches pockets. + +"Cat," said Peterkin, turning his head a little on one side, "I love +you!" + +There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this affectionate +declaration but the cat said nothing. + +"Do you hear me?" cried Peterkin, sharply. "I love you--I do. Don't you +love me?" + +To this touching appeal the cat said "Mew," faintly. + +"Ah! that's right. You're a jolly old rascal. Why did you not speak at +once? eh?" and Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed the cat on the +nose! + +"Yes," continued Peterkin, after a pause, "I love you. D'you think I'd +say so if I didn't, you black villain? I love you because I've got to +take care of you, and to look after you, and to think about you, and to +see that you don't die--" + +"Mew, me-a-w!" said the cat. + +"Very good," continued Peterkin, "quite true, I have no doubt; but you've +no right to interrupt me, sir. Hold your tongue till I have done +speaking. Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me the first +time you ever saw me, and didn't seem to be afraid, and appeared to be +fond of me, though you didn't know that I wasn't going to kill you. Now, +that was brave, that was bold, and very jolly, old boy, and I love you +for it--I do!" + +Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat looked +placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if in +contemplation. Suddenly he looked up. + +"Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won't speak? eh? Now, tell +me; don't you think it's a monstrous shame that these two scoundrels, +Jack and Ralph, should keep us waiting for our supper so long?" + +Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; yawned +slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin's nose! + +"Just so, old boy, you're a clever fellow,--I really do believe the brute +understands me!" said Peterkin, while a broad grin overspread his face, +as he drew back and surveyed the cat. + +At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. The cat uttered an +angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up and exclaimed,-- + +"Bad luck to you, Jack! you've nearly made the heart jump out of my body, +you have." + +"Perhaps I have," replied Jack, laughing, as we entered the bower, "but, +as I don't intend to keep you or the cat any longer from your supper, I +hope that you'll both forgive me." + +Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but I observed +that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered ourselves, and he +did not seem to relish any allusion to the subject afterwards; so we +refrained from remarking on it ever after,--though it tickled us not a +little at the time. + +After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful adventures in +our little boat, and distant voyages upon the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + +The boat launched--We visit the coral reef--The great breaker that never +goes down--Coral insects--The way in which coral islands are made--The +boat's sail--We tax our ingenuity to form fish-hooks--Some of the fish we +saw--And a monstrous whale--Wonderful shower of little fish--Water-spouts. + +It was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first launched our +little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of the lagoon. Not a +breath of wind ruffled the surface of the deep. Not a cloud spotted the +deep blue sky. Not a sound that was discordant broke the stillness of +the morning, although there were many sounds, sweet, tiny, and melodious, +that mingled in the universal harmony of nature. The sun was just rising +from the Pacific's ample bosom and tipping the mountain tops with a red +glow. The sea was shining like a sheet of glass, yet heaving with the +long deep swell that, all the world round, indicates the life of ocean; +and the bright sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of +that pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious gems. +Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to its profoundest +depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift that heart in adoration +and gratitude to the great Creator of this magnificent and glorious +universe. + +At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and thither +without aim or object. But after the effervescence of our spirits was +abated, we began to look about us and to consider what we should do. + +"I vote that we row to the reef," cried Peterkin. + +"And I vote that we visit the islands within the lagoon," said I. + +"And I vote we do both," cried Jack, "so pull away, boys." + +As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat was so small +that only two were necessary. The extra pair were reserved in case any +accident should happen to the others. It was therefore only needful that +two of us should row, while the third steered, by means of an oar, and +relieved the rowers occasionally. + +First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over it, but saw +nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we landed on a larger island, +on which were growing a few cocoa-nut trees. Not having eaten anything +that morning, we gathered a few of the nuts and breakfasted. After this +we pulled straight out to sea and landed on the coral reef. + +This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We had now been so +long on shore that we had almost forgotten the appearance of breakers, +for there were none within the lagoon; but now, as we stood beside the +foam-crested billow of the open sea, all the enthusiasm of the sailor was +awakened in our breasts; and, as we gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that +single magnificent breaker that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot +the Coral Island behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm repose of +the scented woods; we forgot all that had passed during the last few +months, and remembered nothing but the storms, the calms, the fresh +breezes and the surging billows of the open sea. + +This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often alluded, was a +much larger and more sublime object than we had at all imagined it to be. +It rose many yards above the level of the sea, and could be seen +approaching at some distance from the reef. Slowly and majestically it +came on, acquiring greater volume and velocity as it advanced, until it +assumed the form of a clear watery arch, which sparkled in the bright +sun. On it came with resistless and solemn majesty,--the upper edge +lipped gently over, and it fell with a roar that seemed as though the +heart of Ocean were broken in the crash of tumultuous water, while the +foam-clad coral reef appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock! + +We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was with +difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I have once before +mentioned, this wave broke in many places over the reef and scattered +some of its spray into the lagoon, but in most places the reef was +sufficiently broad and elevated to receive and check its entire force. In +many places the coral rocks were covered with vegetation,--the beginning, +as it appeared to us, of future islands. Thus, on this reef, we came to +perceive how most of the small islands of those seas are formed. On one +part we saw the spray of the breaker washing over the rocks, and millions +of little, active, busy creatures continuing the work of building up this +living rampart. At another place, which was just a little too high for +the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all dead; for we found +that they never did their work above water. They had faithfully +completed the mighty work which their Creator had given them to do, and +they were now all dead. Again, in other spots the ceaseless lashing of +the sea had broken the dead coral in pieces, and cast it up in the form +of sand. Here sea-birds had alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and +stray bits of wood had been washed up, seeds of plants had been carried +by the wind and a few lovely blades of bright green had already sprung +up, which, when they died, would increase the size and fertility of these +emeralds of Ocean. At other places these islets had grown apace, and +were shaded by one or two cocoa-nut trees, which grew, literally, in the +sand, and were constantly washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have +before remarked, their fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our taste. + +Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the large coral +islands. We could now understand how the low ones were formed, but the +larger islands cost us much consideration, yet we could arrive at no +certain conclusion on the subject. + +Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during the whole +day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, and, withal, +rather hungry, to our bower. + +"Now," said Jack, "as our boat answers so well, we will get a mast and +sail made immediately." + +"So we will," cried Peterkin, as we all assisted to drag the boat above +high-water mark; "we'll light our candle and set about it this very +night. Hurrah, my boys, pull away!" + +As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on her keel; +and, as the sands were in this place mingled with broken coral rocks, we +saw portions of the wood being scraped off. + +"Hallo!" cried Jack, on seeing this. "That won't do. Our keel will be +worn off in no time at this rate." + +"So it will," said I, pondering deeply as to how this might be prevented. +But I am not of a mechanical turn, naturally, so I could conceive no +remedy save that of putting a plate of iron on the keel, but as we had no +iron I knew not what was to be done. "It seems to me, Jack," I added, +"that it is impossible to prevent the keel being worn off thus." + +"Impossible!" cried Peterkin, "my dear Ralph, you are mistaken, there is +nothing so easy--" + +"How?" I inquired, in some surprise. + +"Why, by not using the boat at all!" replied Peterkin. + +"Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin," said Jack, as he shouldered the +oars, "come along with me and I'll give you work to do. In the first +place, you will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to work to make +sewing twine with it--" + +"Please, captain," interrupted Peterkin, "I've got lots of it made +already,--more than enough, as a little friend of mine used to be in the +habit of saying every day after dinner." + +"Very well," continued Jack; "then you'll help Ralph to collect cocoa-nut +cloth, and cut it into shape, after which we'll make a sail of it. I'll +see to getting the mast and the gearing; so let's to work." + +And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from that time we +had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary rigging, in our little +boat. The sail was not, indeed, very handsome to look at, as it was +formed of a number of oblong patches of cloth; but we had sewed it well +by means of our sail-needle, so that it was strong, which was the chief +point. Jack had also overcome the difficulty about the keel, by pinning +to it a _false_ keel. This was a piece of tough wood, of the same length +and width as the real keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of +this depth because the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more +safe, but more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea where the +trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one direction, was a matter +of great importance. This piece of wood was pegged very firmly to the +keel; and we now launched our boat with the satisfaction of knowing that +when the false keel should be scraped off we could easily put on another; +whereas, should the real keel have been scraped away, we could not have +renewed it without taking our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said made +his "marrow quake to think upon." + +The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed about in the +lagoon with great delight, and examined with much interest the appearance +of our island from a distance. Also, we gazed into the depths of the +water, and watched for hours the gambols of the curious and +bright-coloured fish among the corals and sea-weed. Peterkin also made a +fishing line, and Jack constructed a number of hooks, some of which were +very good, others remarkably bad. Some of these hooks were made of iron- +wood, which did pretty well, the wood being extremely hard, and Jack made +them very thick and large. Fish there are not particular. Some of the +crooked bones in fish-heads also answered for this purpose pretty well. +But that which formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass +finger-ring belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little trouble to +manufacture it. First he cut it with the axe; then twisted it into the +form of a hook. The barb took him several hours to cut. He did it by +means of constant sawing with the broken pen-knife. As for the point, an +hour's rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent one. + +It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the appearance +of the multitudes of fish that were day after day drawn into our boat by +means of the brass hook. Peterkin always caught them,--for we observed +that he derived much pleasure from fishing,--while Jack and I found ample +amusement in looking on, also in gazing down at the coral groves, and in +baiting the hook. Among the fish that we saw, but did not catch, were +porpoises and sword-fish, whales and sharks. The porpoises came +frequently into our lagoon in shoals, and amused us not a little by their +bold leaps into the air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword- +fish were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting from +their noses. We often saw them darting after other fish, and no doubt +they sometimes killed them with their ivory swords. Jack remembered +having heard once of a sword-fish attacking a ship,--which seemed strange +indeed; but, as they are often in the habit of attacking whales, perhaps +it mistook the ship for one. This sword-fish ran against the vessel with +such force, that it drove its sword quite through the thick planks; and +when the ship arrived in harbour, long afterwards, the sword was found +still sticking in it! + +Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to bathe in +deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat to give us +warning, if he should see a shark approaching. As for the whales, they +never came into our lagoon, but we frequently saw them spouting in the +deep water beyond the reef. I shall never forget my surprise the first +day I saw one of these huge monsters close to me. We had been rambling +about on the reef during the morning, and were about to re-embark in our +little boat, to return home, when a loud blowing sound caused us to wheel +rapidly round. We were just in time to see a shower of spray falling, +and the flukes or tail of some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few +hundred yards off. We waited some time to see if he would rise again. As +we stood, the sea seemed to open up at our very feet; an immense spout of +water was sent with a snort high into the air, and the huge blunt head of +a sperm whale arose before us. It was so large that it could easily have +taken our little boat, along with ourselves, into its mouth! It plunged +slowly back into the sea, like a large ship foundering, and struck the +water with its tail so forcibly as to cause a sound like a cannon shot. +We also saw a great number of flying fish, although we caught none; and +we noticed that they never flew out of the water except when followed by +their bitter foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to escape. +But of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us so much as those that +we used to find in shallow pools after a shower of rain; and this not on +account of their appearance, for they were ordinary-looking and very +small, but on account of their having descended in a shower of rain! We +could account for them in no other way, because the pools in which we +found these fish were quite dry before the shower, and at some distance +above high-water mark. Jack, however, suggested a cause which seemed to +me very probable. We used often to see water-spouts in the sea. A water- +spout is a whirling body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp- +pointed pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long tongue, +which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have joined, they look +something like an hour-glass. The water-spout is then carried by the +wind, sometimes gently, sometimes with violence, over the sea, sometimes +up into the clouds, and then, bursting asunder, it descends in a deluge. +This often happens over the land as well as over the sea; and it +sometimes does much damage, but frequently it passes gently away. Now, +Jack thought that the little fish might perhaps have been carried up in a +water-spout, and so sent down again in a shower of rain. But we could +not be certain as to this point; yet we thought it likely. + +During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we caught a good +many eels, which we found to be very good to eat. We also found turtles +among the coral rocks, and made excellent soup in our iron kettle. +Moreover, we discovered many shrimps and prawns, so that we had no lack +of variety in our food; and, indeed, we never passed a week without +making some new and interesting discovery of some sort or other, either +on the land or in the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + +A monster wave and its consequences--The boat lost and found--Peterkin's +terrible accident--Supplies of food for a voyage in the boat--We visit +Penguin Island, and are amazed beyond measure--Account of the penguins. + +One day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were sitting on +the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an excursion which we +intended to make to Penguin Island the next day. + +"You see," said Peterkin, "it might be all very well for a stupid fellow +like me to remain here and leave the penguins alone, but it would be +quite inconsistent with your characters as philosophers to remain any +longer in ignorance of the habits and customs of these birds; so the +sooner we go the better." + +"Very true," said I; "there is nothing I desire so much as to have a +closer inspection of them." + +"And I think," said Jack, "that you had better remain at home, Peterkin, +to take care of the cat; for I'm sure the hogs will be at it in your +absence, out of revenge for your killing their great-grandmother so +recklessly." + +"Stay at home?" cried Peterkin; "my dear fellow, you would certainly lose +your way, or get upset, if I were not there to take care of you." + +"Ah, true," said Jack, gravely, "that did not occur to me; no doubt you +must go. Our boat does require a good deal of ballast; and all that you +say, Peterkin, carries so much weight with it, that we won't need stones +if you go." + +Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event occurred, which, +as it is not generally known, I shall be particular in recording here. + +While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, like a low +cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The day was a fine one, +though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was blowing, but the sea was not +rougher, or the breaker on the reef higher, than usual. At first we +thought that this looked like a thunder-cloud; and, as we had had a good +deal of broken weather of late, accompanied by occasional peals of +thunder, we supposed that a storm must be approaching. Gradually, +however, this line seemed to draw nearer, without spreading up over the +sky, as would certainly have been the case if it had been a storm-cloud. +Still nearer it came, and soon we saw that it was moving swiftly towards +the island; but there was no sound till it reached the islands out at +sea. As it passed these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, +that a cloud of white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the +air: it was accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture that +the approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but we had no +idea how large it was till it came near to ourselves. When it approached +the outer reef, however, we were awe-struck with its unusual magnitude; +and we sprang to our feet, and clambered hastily up to the highest point +of the precipice, under an indefinable feeling of fear. + +I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was very near to +the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was at a considerable +distance out to sea. Owing to this formation, the wave reached the reef +at the latter point before it struck at the foot of Spouting Cliff. The +instant it touched the reef we became aware, for the first time, of its +awful magnitude. It burst completely over the reef at all points, with a +roar that seemed louder to me than thunder; and this roar continued for +some seconds, while the wave rolled gradually along towards the cliff on +which we stood. As its crest reared before us, we felt that we were in +great danger, and turned to flee; but we were too late. With a crash +that seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic billow fell, and +instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of water-spouts with such +force that they shrieked on issuing from their narrow vents. It seemed +to us as if the earth had been blown up with water. We were stunned and +confused by the shock, and so drenched and blinded with spray, that we +knew not for a few moments whither to flee for shelter. At length we all +three gained an eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a scene +of devastation met our gaze as we looked along the shore! This enormous +wave not only burst over the reef, but continued its way across the +lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach of the island with such force that +passed completely over it and dashed into the woods, levelling the +smaller trees and bushes in its headlong course! + +On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been swept away, +and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have been utterly +destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we thought of this, and we +hastened round through the woods towards our home. On reaching it we +found, to our great relief of mind, that the force of the wave had been +expended just before reaching the bower; but the entrance to it was +almost blocked up by the torn-up bushes and tangled heaps of sea-weed. +Having satisfied ourselves as to the bower, we hurried to the spot where +the boat had been left; but no boat was there! The spot on which it had +stood was vacant, and no sign of it could we see on looking around us. + +"It may have been washed up into the woods," said Jack, hurrying up the +beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was to be seen, and we were about to +give ourselves over to despair, when Peterkin called to Jack and said,-- + +"Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious and wise as to +make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts grow upon trees; will +you now be so good as to inform me what sort of fruit that is growing on +the top of yonder bush? for I confess to being ignorant, or, at least, +doubtful on the point." + +We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our surprise, beheld +our little boat snugly nestled among the leaves! We were very much +overjoyed at this, for we would have suffered any loss rather than the +loss of our boat. We found that the wave had actually borne the boat on +its crest from the beach into the woods, and there launched it into the +heart of this bush; which was extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed +against a rock or a tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, whereas it +had not received the smallest injury. It was no easy matter, however, to +get it out of the bush and down to the sea again. This cost us two days +of hard labour to accomplish. + +We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the bower, and +spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the neighbourhood to +look as clean and orderly as before; for the uprooted bushes and sea-weed +that lay on the beach formed a more dreadfully confused-looking mass than +one who had not seen the place after the inundation could conceive. + +Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of those who +interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of our world, that +this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of the islands of the +Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the year. I heard this stated by +the missionaries during my career in those seas. They could not tell me +whether it visited all of the islands, but I was certainly assured that +it occurred periodically in some of them. + +After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the _debris_ of +the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to paying the penguins a +visit. The boat was therefore overhauled and a few repairs done. Then +we prepared a supply of provisions, for we intended to be absent at least +a night or two, perhaps longer. This took us some time to do, for while +Jack was busy with the boat, Peterkin was sent into the woods to spear a +hog or two, and had to search long, sometimes, ere he found them. +Peterkin was usually sent on this errand, when we wanted a pork chop +(which was not seldom), because he was so active, and could run so +wonderfully fast that he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, +being dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home without +having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, indeed, a more serious +accident happened to him. He had been out all morning alone and did not +return at the usual time to dinner. We wondered at this, for Peterkin +was always very punctual at the dinner hour. As supper-time drew near we +began to be anxious about him, and at length sallied forth to search the +woods. For a long time we sought in vain, but a little before dark we +came upon the tracks of the hogs, which we followed up until we came to +the brow of a rather steep bank or precipice. Looking over this we +beheld Peterkin lying in a state of insensibility at the foot, with his +cheek resting on the snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the earth +by the spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to bathe his +forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of seeing him revive. +After we had carried him home he related to as how the thing had +happened. + +"You must know," said he, "I walked about all the forenoon, till I was as +tired as an old donkey, without seeing a single grunter, not so much as a +track of one; but, as I was determined not to return empty-handed, I +resolved to go without my dinner and--" + +"What!" exclaimed Jack, "did you _really_ resolve to do that?" + +"Now, Jack, hold your tongue," returned Peterkin; "I say that I resolved +to forego my dinner and to push to the head of the small valley, where I +felt pretty sure of discovering the hogs. I soon found that I was on the +right scent, for I had scarcely walked half a mile in the direction of +the small plum tree we found there the other day, when a squeak fell on +my ear. 'Ho, ho,' said I, 'there you go, my boys;' and I hurried up the +glen. I soon started them, and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. +In a few seconds I was up with him, and stuck my spear right through his +dumpy body. Just as I did so, I saw that we were on the edge of a +precipice, whether high or low I knew not, but I had been running at such +a pace that I could not stop, so the pig and I gave a howl in concert and +went plunging over together. I remembered nothing more after that, till +I came to my senses and found you bathing my temples, and Ralph wringing +his hands over me." + +But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of getting +tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in hunting, and +returned before evening with three very nice little hogs. I, also, was +successful in my visit to the mud-flats, where I killed several ducks. So +that, when we launched and loaded our boat at sunrise the following +morning, we found our store of provisions to be more than sufficient. +Part had been cooked the night before, and, on taking note of the +different items, we found the account to stand thus:-- + +10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.) +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.) +6 Taro roots. +50 Fine large plums. +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe. +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.) +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw. +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing. + +I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by Peterkin +specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of its compounding a +profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; but I can say, with much +confidence, that we found it to be atrociously bad, and, after the first +tasting, scraped it carefully out and threw it overboard. We calculated +that this supply would last us for several days, but we afterwards found +that it was much more than we required, especially in regard to the cocoa +nuts, of which we found large supplies wherever we went. However, as +Peterkin remarked, it was better to have too much than too little, as we +knew not to what straits we might be put during our voyage. + +It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and rowed over +the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed between the two +green islets that guard the entrance. We experienced some difficulty and +no little danger in passing the surf of the breaker, and shipped a good +deal of water in the attempt; but, once past the billow, we found +ourselves floating placidly on the long oily swell that rose and fell +slowly as it rolled over the wide ocean. + +Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at about a mile +beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it must be at least twenty +miles distant by the way we should have to go. We might, indeed, have +shortened the way by coasting round our island inside of the lagoon, and +going out at the passage in the reef nearly opposite to Penguin Island, +but we preferred to go by the open sea; first, because it was more +adventurous; and, secondly, because we should have the pleasure of again +feeling the motion of the deep, which we all loved very much, not being +liable to sea sickness. + +"I wish we had a breeze," said Jack. + +"So do I," cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and wiping his heated brow; +"pulling is hard work. Oh dear, if we could only catch a hundred or two +of these gulls, tie them to the boat with long strings, and make them fly +as we want them, how capital it would be!" + +"Or bore a hole through a shark's tail, and reeve a rope through it, eh?" +remarked Jack. "But, I say, it seems that my wish is going to be +granted, for here comes a breeze. Ship your oar, Peterkin. Up with the +mast, Ralph; I'll see to the sail. Mind your helm; look out for +squalls!" + +This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark blue line +on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of time, swept down +on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it went. We presented the +stern of the boat to its first violence, and, in a few seconds, it +moderated into a steady breeze, to which we spread our sail and flew +merrily over the waves. Although the breeze died away soon afterwards, +it had been so stiff while it lasted, that we were carried over the +greater part of our way before it fell calm again; so that, when the +flapping of the sail against the mast told us that it was time to resume +the oars, we were not much more than a mile from Penguin Island. + +"There go the soldiers!" cried Peterkin as we came in sight of it; "how +spruce their white trousers look, this morning! I wonder if they will +receive us kindly. D'you think they are hospitable, Jack?" + +"Don't talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you shall see shortly." + +As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the manoeuvres and +appearance of these strange birds. They seemed to be of different +species, for some had crests on their heads while others had none, and +while some were about the size of a goose others appeared nearly as large +as a swan. We also saw a huge albatross soaring above the heads of the +penguins. It was followed and surrounded by numerous flocks of +sea-gulls. Having approached to within a few yards of the island, which +was a low rock, with no other vegetation on it than a few bushes, we lay +on our oars and gazed at the birds with surprise and pleasure, they +returning our gaze with interest. We now saw that their soldier-like +appearance was owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on +their short legs,--"Bolt-up-right," as Peterkin expressed it. They had +black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, and bluish backs. Their +wings were so short that they looked more like the fins of a fish, and, +indeed, we soon saw that they used them for the purpose of swimming under +water. There were no quills on these wings, but a sort of scaly +feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. Their legs were +short, and placed so far back that the birds, while on land, were obliged +to stand quite upright in order to keep their balance; but in the water +they floated like other water-fowl. At first we were so stunned with the +clamour which they and other sea-birds kept up around us, that we knew +not which way to look,--for they covered the rocks in thousands; but, as +we continued to gaze, we observed several quadrupeds (as we thought) +walking in the midst of the penguins. + +"Pull in a bit," cried Peterkin, "and let's see what these are. They +must be fond of noisy company, to consort with such creatures." + +To our surprise we found that these were no other than penguins which had +gone down on all fours, and were crawling among the bushes on their feet +and wings, just like quadrupeds. Suddenly one big old bird, that had +been sitting on a point very near to us, gazing in mute astonishment, +became alarmed, and, scuttling down the rocks, plumped or fell, rather +than ran, into the sea. It dived in a moment, and, a few seconds +afterwards, came out of the water far a-head, with such a spring, and +such a dive back into the sea again, that we could scarcely believe it +was not a fish that had leaped in sport. + +"That beats everything," said Peterkin, rubbing his nose, and screwing up +his face with an expression of exasperated amazement. "I've heard of a +thing being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I never did expect to live +to see a brute that was all three together,--at once--in one! But look +there!" he continued, pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, +"look there! there's no end to it. What _has_ that brute got under its +tail?" + +We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw a penguin +walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with an egg under its +tail. There were several others, we observed, burdened in the same way; +and we found afterwards that these were a species of penguins that always +carried their eggs so. Indeed, they had a most convenient cavity for the +purpose, just between the tail and the legs. We were very much impressed +with the regularity and order of this colony. The island seemed to be +apportioned out into squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and +sat in stiff solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and +down the spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but others were +feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us to laugh not a +little. The mother stood on a mound or raised rock, while the young one +stood patiently below her on the ground. Suddenly the mother raised her +head and uttered a series of the most discordant cackling sounds. + +"She's going to choke," cried Peterkin. + +But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked like it. In a +few seconds she put down her head and opened her mouth, into which the +young one thrust its beak and seemed to suck something from her throat. +Then the cackling was renewed, the sucking continued, and so the +operation of feeding was carried on till the young one was satisfied; but +what she fed her little one with, we could not tell. + +"Now, just look yonder!" said Peterkin, in an excited tone; "if that +isn't the most abominable piece of maternal deception I ever saw. That +rascally old lady penguin has just pitched her young one into the sea, +and there's another about to follow her example." + +This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep rock close +to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin endeavouring to entice +her young one into the water; but the young one seemed very unwilling to +go, and, notwithstanding the enticements of its mother, moved very slowly +towards her. At last she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it +a little towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as to say, +'Don't be afraid, darling! I won't hurt you, my pet!' but no sooner did +she get it to the edge of the rock, where it stood looking pensively down +at the sea, than she gave it a sudden and violent push, sending it +headlong down the slope into the water, where its mother left it to +scramble ashore as it best could. We observed many of them employed in +doing this, and we came to the conclusion that this is the way in which +old penguins teach their children to swim. + +Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we were +startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the most clumsy and +ludicrous manner towards the sea. The beach, here, was a sloping rock, +and when they came to it, some of them succeeded in hopping down in +safety, but others lost their balance and rolled and scrambled down the +slope in the most helpless manner. The instant they reached the water, +however, they seemed to be in their proper element. They dived and +bounded out of it and into it again with the utmost agility; and so, +diving and bounding and spluttering, for they could not fly, they went +rapidly out to sea. + +On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and said, "It's +my opinion that these birds are all stark, staring mad, and that this is +an enchanted island. I therefore propose that we should either put about +ship and fly in terror from the spot, or land valorously on the island, +and sell our lives as dearly as we can." + +"I vote for landing, so pull in, lads," said Jack, giving a stroke with +his oar that made the boat spin. In a few seconds we ran the boat into a +little creek where we made her fast to a projecting piece of coral, and, +running up the beach, entered the ranks of the penguins armed with our +cudgels and our spear. We were greatly surprised to find that, instead +of attacking us or showing signs of fear at our approach, these curious +birds did not move from their places until we laid hands on them, and +merely turned their eyes on us in solemn, stupid wonder as we passed. +There was one old penguin, however, that began to walk slowly toward the +sea, and Peterkin took it into his head that he would try to interrupt +its progress, so he ran between it and the sea and brandished his cudgel +in its face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It would not +retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but battled with +Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it reached the sea. Had +Peterkin used his club he could easily have felled it, no doubt; but, as +he had no wish to do so cruel an act merely out of sport, he let the bird +escape. + +We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the habits of these +curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we all three concluded, +after much consultation, that they were the most wonderful creatures we +had ever seen; and further, we thought it probable that they were the +most wonderful creatures in the world! + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + +An awful storm and its consequences--Narrow escape--A rock proves a sure +foundation--A fearful night and a bright morning--Deliverance from +danger. + +It was evening before we left the island of the penguins. As we had made +up our minds to encamp for the night on a small island, whereon grew a +few cocoa-nut trees, which was about two miles off, we lay to our oars +with some energy. But a danger was in store for us which we had not +anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so quickly to Penguin +Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff breeze, and, before we +had made half the distance to the small island, it became a regular gale. +Although it was not so directly against us as to prevent our rowing in +the course we wished to go, yet it checked us very much; and although the +force of the sea was somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began +to rise, and to roll their broken crests against our small craft, so that +she began to take in water, and we had much ado to keep ourselves afloat. +At last the wind and sea together became so violent that we found it +impossible to make the island, so Jack suddenly put the head of the boat +round and ordered Peterkin and me to hoist a corner of the sail, +intending to run back to Penguin Island. + +"We shall at least have the shelter of the bushes," he said, as the boat +flew before the wind, "and the penguins will keep us company." + +As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much against us +that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order to beat up for the +island, being by this change thrown much to leeward of it. What made +matters worse was, that the gale came in squalls, so that we were more +than once nearly upset. + +"Stand by, both of you," cried Jack, in a quick, earnest tone; "be ready +to dowse the sail. I very much fear we won't make the island after all." + +Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting everything to Jack +that we had fallen into the way of not considering things, especially +such things as were under Jack's care. We had, therefore, never doubted +for a moment that all was going well, so that it was with no little +anxiety that we heard him make the above remark. However, we had no time +for question or surmise, for, at the moment he spoke, a heavy squall was +bearing down upon us, and, as we were then flying with our lee gunwale +dipping occasionally under the waves, it was evident that we should have +to lower our sail altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the +boat, but Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did +not upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full of +water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again hoisted a corner of +the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared came upon us. We found it +quite impossible to make Penguin Island. The gale carried us quickly +past it towards the open sea, and the terrible truth flashed upon us that +we should be swept out and left to perish miserably in a small boat in +the midst of the wide ocean. + +This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw nothing in the +direction whither the wind was blowing us save the raging billows of the +sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed around us, for we were now +beyond the shelter of the islands, and it seemed as though any of the +huge billows, which curled over in masses of foam, might swallow us up in +a moment. The water, also, began to wash in over our sides, and I had to +keep constantly baling, for Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin the +sail for an instant, without endangering our lives. In the midst of this +distress Jack uttered an exclamation of hope, and pointed towards a low +island or rock which lay directly ahead. It had been hitherto +unobserved, owing to the dark clouds that obscured the sky and the +blinding spray that seemed to fill the whole atmosphere. + +As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute of trees +and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely over it. In fact +it was nothing more than the summit of one of the coral formations, which +rose only a few feet above the level of the water, and was, in stormy +weather, all but invisible. Over this island the waves were breaking in +the utmost fury, and our hearts sank within us as we saw that there was +not a spot where we could thrust our little boat without its being dashed +to pieces. + +"Show a little bit more sail," cried Jack, as we swept past the weather +side of the rock with fearful speed. + +"Ay, ay," answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot more of our sail. + +Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over and creak +so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I expected to be upset +every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart for his rashness. But I did +him injustice, for, although during two seconds the water rushed in-board +in a torrent, he succeeded in steering us sharply round to the leeward +side of the rock, where the water was comparatively calm, and the force +of the breeze broken. + +"Out your oars now, lads; that's well done. Give way!" We obeyed +instantly. The oars splashed into the waves together. One good hearty +pull, and we were floating in a comparatively calm creek that was so +narrow as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we were in perfect +safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our cable to the rocks, I +thanked God in my heart for our deliverance from so great danger. But, +although I have said we were now in safety, I suspect that few of my +readers would have envied our position. It is true we had no lack of +food, but we were drenched to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and +the spray flying over our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as +it were, in water; the spot on which we had landed was not more than +twelve yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not move without +the risk of being swept away by the storm. At the upper end of the creek +was a small hollow or cave in the rock, which sheltered us from the fury +of the winds and waves; and as the rock extended in a sort of ledge over +our heads, it prevented the spray from falling upon us. + +"Why," said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery again, "it seems to me +that we have got into a mermaid's cave, for there is nothing but water +all round us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the past." + +Peterkin's idea was not inappropriate, for, what with the sea roaring in +white foam up to our very feet, and the spray flying in white sheets +continually over our heads, and the water dripping heavily from the ledge +above like a curtain in front of our cave, it did seem to us very much +more like being below than above water. + +"Now, boys," cried Jack, "bestir yourselves, and let's make ourselves +comfortable. Toss out our provisions, Peterkin; and here, Ralph, lend a +hand to haul up the boat. Look sharp." + +"Ay, ay, captain," we cried, as we hastened to obey, much cheered by the +hearty manner of our comrade. + +Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, so that we +succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable than could have been +expected. We landed our provisions, wrung the water out of our garments, +spread our sail below us for a carpet, and, after having eaten a hearty +meal, began to feel quite cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits +sank again, for with the daylight all evidence of our security vanished +away. We could no longer see the firm rock on which we lay, while we +were stunned with the violence of the tempest that raged around us. The +night grew pitchy dark, as it advanced, so that we could not see our +hands when we held them up before our eyes, and were obliged to feel each +other occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for the storm at last +became so terrible that it was difficult to make our voices audible. A +slight variation of the wind, as we supposed, caused a few drops of spray +ever and anon to blow into our faces; and the eddy of the sea, in its mad +boiling, washed up into our little creek until it reached our feet and +threatened to tear away our boat. In order to prevent this latter +calamity, we hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare through the +watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror to the scene. Yet +we longed for those dismal flashes, for they were less appalling than the +thick blackness that succeeded them. Crashing peals of thunder seemed to +tear the skies in twain, and fell upon our ears through the wild yelling +of the hurricane as if it had been but a gentle summer breeze; while the +billows burst upon the weather side of the island until we fancied that +the solid rock was giving way, and, in our agony, we clung to the bare +ground, expecting every moment to be whirled away and whelmed in the +black howling sea! Oh! it was a night of terrible anxiety, and no one +can conceive the feelings of intense gratitude and relief with which we +at last saw the dawn of day break through the vapory mists around us. + +For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, while the storm +continued to rage with unabated fury. On the morning of the fourth day +it suddenly ceased, and the wind fell altogether; but the waves still ran +so high that we did not dare to put off in our boat. During the greater +part of this period we scarcely slept above a few minutes at a time, but +on the third night we slept soundly and awoke early on the fourth morning +to find the sea very much down, and the sun shining brightly again in the +clear blue sky. + +It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in our little +boat and steered away for our island home, which, we were overjoyed to +find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we had feared that we had +been blown out of sight of it altogether. As it was a dead calm we had +to row during the greater part of the day; but towards the afternoon a +fair breeze sprang up, which enabled us to hoist our sail. We soon +passed Penguin Island, and the other island which we had failed to reach +on the day the storm commenced; but as we had still enough of provisions, +and were anxious to get home, we did not land, to the great +disappointment of Peterkin, who seemed to entertain quite an affection +for the penguins. + +Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did not reach +the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and before we had sailed +more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, the wind died away altogether, +so that we had to take to our oars again. It was late and the moon and +stars were shining brightly when we arrived opposite the bower and leaped +upon the strand. So glad were we to be safe back again on our beloved +island, that we scarcely took time to drag the boat a short way up the +beach, and then ran up to see that all was right at the bower. I must +confess, however, that my joy was mingled with a vague sort of fear lest +our home had been visited and destroyed during our absence; but on +reaching it we found everything just as it had been left, and the poor +black cat curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our +humble dwelling. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + +Shoemaking--The even tenor of our way suddenly interrupted--An unexpected +visit and an appalling battle--We all become warriors, and Jack proves +himself be a hero. + +For many months after this we continued to live on our island in +uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went out a-fishing in +the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the woods, or ascended to the +mountain top, by way of variety, although Peterkin always asserted that +we went for the purpose of hailing any ship that might chance to heave in +sight. But I am certain that none of us wished to be delivered from our +captivity, for we were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say that as +we were very young we should not feel the loss of a year or two. +Peterkin, as I have said before, was thirteen years of age, Jack +eighteen, and I fifteen. But Jack was very tall, strong, and manly for +his age, and might easily have been mistaken for twenty. + +The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual summer, and +as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit and blossom all the +year round, we never wanted for a plentiful supply of food. The hogs, +too, seemed rather to increase than diminish, although Peterkin was very +frequent in his attacks on them with his spear. If at any time we failed +in finding a drove, we had only to pay a visit to the plum-tree before +mentioned, where we always found a large family of them asleep under its +branches. + +We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making various +garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had landed were +beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also succeeded in making excellent +shoes out of the skin of the old hog, in the following manner:--He first +cut a piece of the hide, of an oblong form, a few inches longer than his +foot. This he soaked in water, and, while it was wet, he sewed up one +end of it, so as to form a rough imitation of that part of the heel of a +shoe where the seam is. This done, he bored a row of holes all round the +edge of the piece of skin, through which a tough line was passed. Into +the sewed-up part of this shoe he thrust his heel, then, drawing the +string tight, the edges rose up and overlapped his foot all round. It is +true there were a great many ill-looking puckers in these shoes, but we +found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack came at last to +prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various other useful +articles, which added to our comfort, and once or twice spoke of building +us a house, but we had so great an affection for the bower, and, withal, +found it so serviceable, that we determined not to leave it, nor to +attempt the building of a house, which, in such a climate, might turn out +to be rather disagreeable than useful. + +We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on the other +side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we had powder and shot, +as it would render pig-killing much easier; but, after all, we had become +so expert in the use of our sling and bow and spear, that we were +independent of more deadly weapons. + +Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much pleasure +as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert in the water from +constant practice. As for Jack and I, we began to feel as if water were +our native element, and revelled in it with so much confidence and +comfort that Peterkin said he feared we would turn into fish some day, +and swim off and leave him; adding, that he had been for a long time +observing that Jack was becoming more and more like a shark every day. +Whereupon Jack remarked, that if he, Peterkin, were changed into a fish, +he would certainly turn into nothing better or bigger than a shrimp. Poor +Peterkin did not envy us our delightful excursions under water, except, +indeed, when Jack would dive down to the bottom of the Water Garden, sit +down on a rock and look up and make faces at him. Peterkin did feel +envious then, and often said he would give anything to be able to do +that. I was much amused when Peterkin said this; for if he could only +have seen his own face when he happened to take a short dive, he would +have seen that Jack's was far surpassed by it. The great difference +being, however, that Jack made faces on purpose--Peterkin couldn't help +it! + +Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and amusements, an +event occurred one day which was as unexpected as it was exceedingly +alarming and very horrible. + +Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the rocks at +Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from his garments, +having recently fallen by accident into the sea,--a thing he was +constantly doing,--when our attention was suddenly arrested by two +objects which appeared on the horizon. + +"What are yon, think you?" I said, addressing Jack. + +"I can't imagine," answered he; "I've noticed them for some time, and +fancied they were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them the more I +feel convinced they are much larger than gulls." + +"They seem to be coming towards us," said I. + +"Hallo! what's wrong?" inquired Peterkin, coming up. + +"Look there," said Jack. + +"Whales!" cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with his hand. "No! eh! can +they be boats, Jack?" + +Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing human faces +again. + +"I think you are about right, Peterkin;--but they seem to me to move +strangely for boats," said Jack, in a low tone, as if he were talking to +himself. + +I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack's countenance as he gazed +long and intently at the two objects, which were now nearing us fast. At +last he sprang to his feet. "They are canoes, Ralph! whether war-canoes +or not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all the natives of the South +Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they have little respect for +strangers. We must hide if they land here, which I earnestly hope they +will not do." + +I was greatly alarmed at Jack's speech, but I confess I thought less of +what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner in which he said it, and +it was with very uncomfortable feelings that Peterkin and I followed him +quickly into the woods. + +"How unfortunate," said I, as we gained the shelter of the bushes, "that +we have forgotten our arms." + +"It matters not," said Jack; "here are clubs enough and to spare." As he +spoke, he laid his hand on a bundle of stout poles of various sizes, +which Peterkin's ever-busy hands had formed, during our frequent visits +to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, than that of having +something to do. + +We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, and lay +down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes approach, without +ourselves being seen. At first we made an occasional remark on their +appearance, but after they entered the lagoon, and drew near the beach, +we ceased to speak, and gazed with intense interest at the scene before +us. + +We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by the other, +and that it contained a few women and children, as well as men,--perhaps +forty souls altogether; while the canoe which pursued it contained only +men. They seemed to be about the same in number, but were better armed, +and had the appearance of being a war party. Both crews were paddling +with all their might, and it seemed as if the pursuers exerted themselves +to overtake the natives ere they could land. In this, however, they +failed. The foremost canoe made for the beach close beneath the rocks +behind which we were concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors +in the water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam curled +from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in their black faces +as they strained every muscle of their naked bodies; nor did they relax +their efforts till the canoe struck the beach with a violent shock; then, +with a shout of defiance, the whole party sprang, as if by magic, from +the canoe to the shore. Three women, two of whom carried infants in +their arms, rushed into the woods; and the men crowded to the water's +edge, with stones in their hands, spears levelled, and clubs brandished, +to resist the landing of their enemies. + +The distance between the two canoes had been about half a mile, and, at +the great speed they were going, this was soon passed. As the pursuers +neared the shore, no sign of fear or hesitation was noticeable. On they +came like a wild charger,--received but recked not of a shower of stones. +The canoe struck, and, with a yell that seemed to issue from the throats +of incarnate fiends, they leaped into the water, and drove their enemies +up the beach. + +The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to behold. Most of the +men wielded clubs of enormous size and curious shapes, with which they +dashed out each other's brains. As they were almost entirely naked, and +had to bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their terrible hand-to-hand +encounters, they looked more like demons than human beings. I felt my +heart grow sick at the sight of this bloody battle, and would fain have +turned away, but a species of fascination seemed to hold me down and glue +my eyes upon the combatants. I observed that the attacking party was led +by a most extraordinary being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I +concluded was a chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous extent, +so that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light-yellow hue, which +surprised me much, for the man's body was as black as coal, and I felt +convinced that the hair must have been dyed. He was tattooed from head +to foot; and his face, besides being tattooed, was besmeared with red +paint, and streaked with white. Altogether, with his yellow turban-like +hair, his Herculean black frame, his glittering eyes and white teeth, he +seemed the most terrible monster I ever beheld. He was very active in +the fight, and had already killed four men. + +Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite as strong +and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club something like an +eagle's beak at the point. For a second or two these giants eyed each +other warily, moving round and round, as if to catch each other at a +disadvantage, but seeing that nothing was to be gained by this caution, +and that the loss of time might effectually turn the tide of battle +either way, they apparently made up their minds to attack at the same +instant, for, with a wild shout and simultaneous spring, they swung their +heavy clubs, which met with a loud report. Suddenly the yellow-haired +savage tripped, his enemy sprang forward, the ponderous club was swung, +but it did not descend, for at that moment the savage was felled to the +ground by a stone from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief's +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The savages who +landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on seeing the fall of +their chief. But not one escaped. They were all overtaken and felled to +the earth. I saw, however, that they were not all killed. Indeed, their +enemies, now that they were conquered, seemed anxious to take them alive; +and they succeeded in securing fifteen, whom they bound hand and foot +with cords, and, carrying them up into the woods, laid them down among +the bushes. Here they left them, for what purpose I knew not, and +returned to the scene of the late battle, where the remnant of the party +were bathing their wounds. + +Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, only twenty- +eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the bush to hunt for the +women and children. Of the other party, as I have said, only ten +survived, and these were lying bound and helpless on the grass. + +Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and whispered our fears +that the savages might clamber up the rocks to search for fresh water, +and so discover our place of concealment; but we were so much interested +in watching their movements that we agreed to remain where we were; and, +indeed, we could not easily have risen without exposing ourselves to +detection. One of the savages now went up to the wood and soon returned +with a bundle of fire-wood, and we were not a little surprised to see him +set fire to it by the very same means used by Jack the time we made our +first fire,--namely, with the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, +two of the party went again to the woods and returned with one of the +bound men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as the +thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their enemies. As +they bore him to the fire my feelings almost overpowered me. I gasped +for breath, and seizing my club, endeavoured to spring to my feet; but +Jack's powerful arm pinned me to the earth. Next moment one of the +savages raised his club, and fractured the wretched creature's skull. He +must have died instantly, and, strange though it may seem, I confess to a +feeling of relief when the deed was done, because I now knew that the +poor savage could not be burned alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to +quiver when the monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, after +roasting them slightly over the fire, devoured them. + +Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few seconds, the two +savages hastened towards the fire dragging the three women and their two +infants along with them. One of those women was much younger than her +companions, and we were struck with the modesty of her demeanour and the +gentle expression of her face, which, although she had the flattish nose +and thick lips of the others, was of a light-brown colour, and we +conjectured that she must be of a different race. She and her companions +wore short petticoats and a kind of tippet on their shoulders. Their +hair was jet black, but instead of being long, was short and +curly,--though not woolly--somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While +we gazed with interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, the big +chief advanced to one of the elder females and laid his hand upon the +child. But the mother shrank from him, and clasping the little one to +her bosom, uttered a wail of fear. With a savage laugh, the chief tore +the child from her arms and tossed it into the sea. A low groan burst +from Jack's lips as we witnessed this atrocious act and heard the +mother's shriek, as she fell insensible on the sand. The rippling waves +rolled the child on the beach, as if they refused to be a party in such a +foul murder, and we could observe that the little one still lived. + +The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief addressed her; but +although we heard his voice, and even the words distinctly, of course we +could not understand what he said. The girl made no answer to his fierce +questions, and we saw by the way in which he pointed to the fire that he +threatened her life. + +"Peterkin," said Jack in a hoarse whisper, "have you got your knife?" + +"Yes," replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as death. + +"That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding quick. Here is the small +knife, Ralph. Fly both of you through the bush, cut the cords that bind +the prisoners and set them free. There! quick, ere it be too late." Jack +sprang up, and seized a heavy but short bludgeon, while his strong frame +trembled with emotion, and large drops rolled down his forehead. + +At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few minutes before +advanced towards the girl with his heavy club. Jack uttered a yell that +rang like a death-shriek among the rocks. With one bound he leaped over +a precipice full fifteen feet high, and, before the savages had recovered +from their surprise, was in the midst of them; while Peterkin and I +dashed through the bushes towards the prisoners. With one blow of his +staff Jack felled the man with the club, then, turning round with a look +of fury, he rushed upon the big chief with the yellow hair. Had the blow +which Jack aimed at his head taken effect, the huge savage would have +needed no second stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it by +springing to one side, while, at the same time, he swung his ponderous +club at the head of his foe. It was now Jack's turn to leap aside, and +well was it for him that the first outburst of his blind fury was over, +else he had become an easy prey to his gigantic antagonist; but Jack was +cool now. He darted his blows rapidly and well, and the superiority of +his light weapon was strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could +easily evade the blows of the chief's heavy club, the chief could not so +easily evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, so quick was he, and +so frightfully did he fling about the mighty weapon, that, although Jack +struck him almost every blow, the strokes had to be delivered so quickly +that they wanted force to be very effectual. + +It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the success of +their chief in this encounter to be so certain that they refrained from +interfering. Had they doubted it, they would have probably ended the +matter at once by felling him. But they contented themselves with +awaiting the issue. + +The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now began to be +apparent. His movements became slower, his breath hissed through his +clenched teeth, and the surprised savages drew nearer in order to render +assistance. Jack observed this movement. He felt that his fate was +sealed, and resolved to cast his life upon the next blow. The chiefs +club was again about to descend on his head. He might have evaded it +easily, but instead of doing so, he suddenly shortened his grasp of his +own club, rushed in under the blow, struck his adversary right between +the eyes with all his force and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the +senseless body of the chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to +descend on the head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive +body of the chief completely covered him. That moment saved his life. +Ere the savages could tear the chief's body away, seven of their number +fell prostrate beneath the clubs of the prisoners whom Peterkin and I had +set free, and two others fell under our own hand. We could never have +accomplished this had not our enemies been so engrossed with the fight +between Jack and their chief that they had failed to observe us until we +were upon them. They still out-numbered our party by three, but we were +flushed with victory while they were taken by surprise and dispirited by +the fall of their chief. Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping +fury of Jack, who seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no +sooner shaken himself free of the chief's body than he rushed into the +midst of them, and in three blows equalized our numbers. Peterkin and I +flew to the rescue, the savages followed us, and, in less than ten +minutes, the whole of our opponents were knocked down or made prisoners, +bound hand and foot, and extended side by side upon the sea shore. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + +Intercourse with the savages--Cannibalism prevented--The slain are buried +and the survivors depart, leaving us again alone on our Coral Island. + +After the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and gazed at us +in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a flood of questions, +which, being wholly unintelligible, of course we could not answer. +However, by way of putting an end to it, Jack took the chief (who had +recovered from the effects of his wound) by the hand and shook it warmly. +No sooner did the blacks see that this was meant to express good-will +than they shook hands with us all round. After this ceremony was gone +through Jack went up to the girl, who had never once moved from the rock +where she had been left, but had continued an eager spectator of all that +had passed. He made signs to her to follow him and then, taking the +chief by the hand, was about to conduct him to the bower when his eye +fell on the poor infant which had been thrown into the sea and was still +lying on the shore. Dropping the chief's hand he hastened towards it, +and, to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We also found that +the mother was beginning to recover slowly. + +"Here, get out o' the way," said Jack, pushing us aside, as we stooped +over the poor woman and endeavoured to restore her, "I'll soon bring her +round." So saying, he placed the infant on her bosom and laid its warm +cheek on hers. The effect was wonderful. The woman opened her eyes, +felt the child, looked at it, and with a cry of joy clasped it in her +arms, at the same time endeavouring to rise, for the purpose, apparently, +of rushing into the woods. + +"There, that's all right," said Jack, once more taking the chief by the +hand. "Now Ralph and Peterkin, make the women and these fellows follow +me to the bower. Well entertain them as hospitably as we can." + +In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in front of +the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, several ducks, and a +variety of cold fish, together with an unlimited supply of cocoa-nuts, +bread-fruits, yams, taro, and plums; with all of which they seemed to be +quite familiar and perfectly satisfied. + +Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our day's work, took +a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and throwing ourselves on our beds +fell fast asleep. The savages it seems followed our example, and in half- +an-hour the whole camp was buried in repose. + +How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we lay down +the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the heavens. I +awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being unable at first to +comprehend our situation. "Now, then," said he, springing up, "let's see +after breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how long do you mean to +lie there?" + +Peterkin yawned heavily. "Well!" said he, opening his eyes and looking +up after some trouble, "if it isn't to-morrow morning, and me thinking it +was to-day all this time. Hallo! Venus, where did you come from? you +seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as well speak to the cat as +to you--better, in fact, for it understands me, and you don't." + +This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the elderly females, +who had seated herself on the rock in front of the bower, and, having +placed her child at her feet, was busily engaged in devouring the remains +of a roast pig. + +By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast in an +advanced state of preparation. During the course of it we made sundry +attempts to converse with the natives by signs, but without effect. At +last we hit upon a plan of discovering their names. Jack pointed to his +breast and said "Jack," very distinctly; then he pointed to Peterkin and +to me, repeating our names at the same time. Then he pointed to himself +again, and said "Jack," and laying his finger on the breast of the chief, +looked inquiringly into his face. The chief instantly understood him and +said "Tararo," twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it after him, and the +chief, nodding his head approvingly, said "Chuck." On hearing which, +Peterkin exploded with laughter; but Jack turned and with a frown rebuked +him, saying, "I must look even more indignantly at you than I feel, +Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don't like to be laughed at." +Then turning towards the youngest of the women, who was seated at the +door of the bower, he pointed to her; whereupon the chief said, "Avatea;" +and pointing towards the sun, raised his finger slowly towards the +zenith, where it remained steadily for a minute or two. + +"What can that mean, I wonder," said Jack, looking puzzled. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "the chief means she is an angel come down to +stay here for a while. If so, she's an uncommonly black one!" + +We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack went up to +her and said, "Avatea." The woman smiled sadly, and nodded her head, at +the same time pointing to her breast and then to the sun, in the same +manner as the chief had done. We were much puzzled to know what this +could signify, but as there was no way of solving our difficulty we were +obliged to rest content. + +Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking up his axe, +he led them to the place where the battle had been fought. Here we found +the prisoners, who had passed the night on the beach having been totally +forgotten by us, as our minds had been full of our guests, and were +ultimately overcome by sleep. They did not seem the worse for their +exposure, however, as we judged by the hearty appetite with which they +devoured the breakfast that was soon after given to them. Jack then +began to dig a hole in the sand, and, after working a few seconds, he +pointed to it and to the dead bodies that lay exposed on the beach. The +natives immediately perceived what he wanted, and, running for their +paddles, dug a hole in the course of half an hour that was quite large +enough to contain all the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they +tossed their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we felt +assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had we not +asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired chief was the last +thrown in. This wretched man would have recovered from the blow with +which Jack felled him, and, indeed, he did endeavour to rise during the +melee that followed his fall, but one of his enemies, happening to notice +the action, dealt him a blow with his club that killed him on the spot. + +While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one of the +savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made apparently of stone, cut +a large slice of flesh from his thigh. We knew at once that he intended +to make use of this for food, and could not repress a cry of horror and +disgust. + +"Come, come, you blackguard," cried Jack, starting up and seizing the man +by the arm, "pitch that into the hole. Do you hear?" + +The savage of course did not understand the command, but he perfectly +understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded the flesh, and +his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the hole. Nevertheless he did not +obey. Jack instantly turned to Tararo and made signs to him to enforce +obedience. The chief seemed to understand the appeal, for he stepped +forward, raised his club, and was on the point of dashing out the brains +of his offending subject, when Jack sprang forward and caught his +uplifted arm. + +"Stop!" he shouted, "you blockhead, I don't want you to kill the man." He +then pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The chief uttered a few +words, which had the desired effect; for the man threw the flesh into the +hole, which was immediately filled up. This man was of a morose, sulky +disposition, and, during all the time he remained on the island, regarded +us, especially Jack, with a scowling visage. His name, we found, was +Mahine. + +The next three or four days were spent by the savages in mending their +canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock it had sustained on +striking the shore. This canoe was a very curious structure. It was +about thirty feet long, and had a high towering stern. The timbers, of +which it was partly composed, were fastened much in the same way as those +of our little boat were put together; but the part that seemed most +curious to us was a sort of out-rigger, or long plank, which was attached +to the body of the canoe by means of two stout cross beams. These beams +kept the plank parallel with the canoe, but not in contact with it, for +it floated in the water with an open space between; thus forming a sort +of double canoe. This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting of +the canoe, which was so narrow that it could not have maintained an +upright position without the out-rigger. We could not help wondering +both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this contrivance. + +When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the prisoners +into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and fruit. Peterkin +also went to the plum-tree for the purpose of making a special onslaught +upon the hogs, and killed no less than six of them. These we baked and +presented to our friends on the day of their departure. On that day +Tararo made a great many energetic signs to us, which, after much +consideration, we came to understand were proposals that we should go +away with him to his island; but, having no desire to do so, we shook our +heads very decidedly. However, we consoled him by presenting him with +our rusty axe, which we thought we could spare, having the excellent one +which had been so providentially washed ashore to us the day we were +wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names carved on it, +and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as an ornament. + +In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the beach. Being unable +to speak to the savages, we went through the ceremony of shaking hands, +and expected they would depart; but, before doing so, Tararo went up to +Jack and rubbed noses with him, after which he did the same with Peterkin +and me! Seeing that this was their mode of salutation, we determined to +conform to their custom, so we rubbed noses heartily with the whole +party, women and all! The only disagreeable part of the process was, +when we came to rub noses with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that +when he saw his wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much +more inclined to _bang_ than to _rub_ his nose. Avatea was the last to +take leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of real sorrow when she +approached to bid us farewell. Besides her modest air and gentle manners +she was the only one of the party who exhibited the smallest sign of +regret at parting from us. Going up to Jack, she put out her flat little +nose to be rubbed, and thereafter paid the same compliment to Peterkin +and me. + +An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an indefinable +feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were seated in silence +beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on the wonderful events of +the last few days. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life--A sail!--An unexpected +salute--The end of the black cat--A terrible dive--An incautious +proceeding and a frightful catastrophe. + +Life is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, that it beat a +druggist's shop all to sticks; for, whereas the first is a compound of +good and bad, the other is a horrible compound of all that is utterly +detestable. And indeed the more I consider it the more I am struck with +the strange mixture of good and evil that exists not only in the material +earth but in our own natures. In our own Coral Island we had experienced +every variety of good that a bountiful Creator could heap on us. Yet on +the night of the storm we had seen how almost, in our case,--and +altogether, no doubt, in the case of others less fortunate--all this good +might be swept away for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in +the soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these good +and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, crushed and +hurled to the ground in destructive devastation. We had lived for many +months in a clime for the most part so beautiful, that we had often +wondered whether Adam and Eve had found Eden more sweet; and we had seen +the quiet solitudes of our paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious +savages, and the white sands stained with blood and strewed with lifeless +forms; yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many symptoms of a kindly +nature. I pondered these things much, and, while I considered them, +there recurred to my memory those words which I had read in my Bible,--the +works of God are wonderful, and his ways past finding out. + +After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and frequent +conversations about them, and I noticed that Peterkin's manner was now +much altered. He did not, indeed, jest less heartily than before, but he +did so less frequently, and often there was a tone of deep seriousness in +his manner, if not in his words, which made him seem to Jack and me as if +he had grown two years older within a few days. But indeed I was not +surprised at this, when I reflected on the awful realities which we had +witnessed so lately. We could by no means shake off a tendency to gloom +for several weeks afterwards; but, as time wore away, our usual good +spirits returned somewhat, and we began to think of the visit of the +savages with feelings akin to those with which we recall a terrible +dream. + +One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, preparatory +to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had kept us in such +constant supply of hogs that we had become quite tired of pork, and +desired a change. Peterkin was sunning himself on the ledge of rock, +while we were creeping among the rocks below. Happening to look up, I +observed Peterkin cutting the most extraordinary capers and making +violent gesticulations for us to come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose +immediately. + +"A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on the horizon there, just +over the entrance to the lagoon!" cried Peterkin, as we scrambled up the +rocks. + +"So it is, and a schooner, too!" said Jack, as he proceeded hastily to +dress. + +Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this discovery, for if +it should touch at our island we had no doubt the captain would be happy +to give us a passage to some of the civilized islands, where we could +find a ship sailing for England, or some other part of Europe. Home, +with all its associations, rushed in upon my heart like a flood, and, +much though I loved the Coral Island and the bower which had now been our +home so long, I felt that I could have quitted all at that moment without +a sigh. With joyful anticipations we hastened to the highest point of +rock near our dwelling, and awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now +perceived that she was making straight for the island, under a steady +breeze. + +In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she rounded to, and +backed her topsails in order to survey the coast. Seeing this, and +fearing that they might not perceive us, we all three waved pieces of +cocoa-nut cloth in the air, and soon had the satisfaction of seeing them +beginning to lower a boat and bustle about the decks as if they meant to +land. Suddenly a flag was run up to the peak, a little cloud of white +smoke rose from the schooner's side, and, before we could guess their +intentions, a cannon-shot came crashing through the bushes, carried away +several cocoa-nut trees in its passage, and burst in atoms against the +cliff a few yards below the spot on which we stood. + +With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the schooner's +peak was black, with a Death's head and cross bones upon it. As we gazed +at each other in blank amazement, the word "pirate" escaped our lips +simultaneously. + +"What is to be done?" cried Peterkin, as we observed a boat shoot from +the vessel's side, and make for the entrance of the reef. "If they take +us off the island, it will either be to throw us overboard for sport, or +to make pirates of us." + +I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only resource in this +emergency. He stood with folded arms, and his eyes fixed with a grave, +anxious expression on the ground. "There is but one hope," said he, +turning with a sad expression of countenance to Peterkin; "perhaps, after +all, we may not have to resort to it. If these villains are anxious to +take us, they will soon overrun the whole island. But come, follow me." + +Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, and led us +by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he halted, and, advancing +cautiously to the rocks, glanced over their edge. We were soon by his +side, and saw the boat, which was crowded with armed men, just touching +the shore. In an instant the crew landed, formed line, and rushed up to +our bower. + +In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of them +swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On reaching the +water's edge, he tossed it far into the sea, and joined his companions, +who appeared to be holding a hasty council. + +"You see what we may expect," said Jack bitterly. "The man who will +wantonly kill a poor brute for sport will think little of murdering a +fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance left,--the Diamond +Cave." + +"The Diamond Cave!" cried Peterkin, "then my chance is a poor one, for I +could not dive into it if all the pirates on the Pacific were at my +heels." + +"Nay, but," said I, "we will take you down, Peterkin, if you will only +trust us." + +As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, and radiate, +as if from a centre, towards the woods and along shore. + +"Now, Peterkin," said Jack, in a solemn tone, "you must make up your mind +to do it, or we must make up our minds to die in your company." + +"Oh, Jack, my dear friend," cried Peterkin, turning pale, "leave me; I +don't believe they'll think it worth while to kill me. Go, you and +Ralph, and dive into the cave." + +"That will not I," answered Jack quietly, while he picked up a stout +cudgel from the ground. "So now, Ralph, we must prepare to meet these +fellows. Their motto is, 'No quarter.' If we can manage to floor those +coming in this direction, we may escape into the woods for a while." + +"There are five of them," said I; "we have no chance." + +"Come, then," cried Peterkin, starting up, and grasping Jack convulsively +by the arm, "let us dive; I will go." + +Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the feelings of +horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare idea of being held +down, even for a few seconds,--that spasmodic, involuntary recoil from +compulsory immersion which has no connection whatever with cowardice; and +they will understand the amount of resolution that it required in +Peterkin to allow himself to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and +then, through a narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. But +there was no alternative. The pirates had already caught sight of us, +and were now within a short distance of the rocks. + +Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms. + +"Now, keep quite still, no struggling," said Jack, "or we are lost." + +Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble features, and +the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he had fully made up his +mind to go through with it. Just as the pirates gained the foot of the +rocks, which hid us for a moment from their view, we bent over the sea, +and plunged down together head foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. +He floated passively between us like a log of wood, and we passed the +tunnel and rose into the cave in a shorter space of time than I had ever +done it before. + +Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and in a few +seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in safety. Jack now +searched for the tinder and torch, which always lay in the cave. He soon +found them, and, lighting the torch, revealed to Peterkin's wondering +gaze the marvels of the place. But we were too wet to waste much time in +looking about us. Our first care was to take off our clothes, and wring +them as dry as we could. This done, we proceeded to examine into the +state of our larder, for, as Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing +how long the pirates might remain on the island. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "they may take it into their heads to stop here +altogether, and so we shall be buried alive in this place." + +"Don't you think, Peterkin, that it's the nearest thing to being drowned +alive that you ever felt?" said Jack with a smile. "But I've no fear of +that. These villains never stay long on shore. The sea is their home, +so you may depend upon it that they won't stay more than a day or two at +the furthest." + +We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in the cavern. +At various periods Jack and I had conveyed cocoa nuts and other fruits, +besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to this submarine cave, partly for +amusement, and partly from a feeling that we might possibly be driven one +day to take shelter here from the savages. Little did we imagine that +the first savages who would drive us into it would be white savages, +perhaps our own countrymen. We found the cocoa-nuts in good condition, +and the cooked yams, but the bread-fruits were spoiled. We also found +the cloth where we had left it; and, on opening it out, there proved to +be sufficient to make a bed; which was important, as the rock was damp. +Having collected it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch +in the midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange chamber +to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, ghastly +appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, with the thick +darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops that fell at long +intervals from the roof of the cavern into the still water; and the +strong contrast between all this and our bed and supper, which, with our +faces, were lit up with the deep red flame of the torch. + +We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, for we did +not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault above when we +happened to raise them. At last the faint light that came through the +opening died away, warning us that it was night and time for rest. We +therefore put out our torch and lay down to sleep. + +On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our faculties so as to +remember where we were, and we were in much uncertainty as to whether it +was early or late. We saw by the faint light that it was day, but could +not guess at the hour; so Jack proposed that he should dive out and +reconnoitre. + +"No, Jack," said I, "do you rest here. You've had enough to do during +the last few days. Rest yourself now, and take care of Peterkin, while I +go out to see what the pirates are about. I'll be very careful not to +expose myself, and I'll bring you word again in a short time." + +"Very well, Ralph," answered Jack, "please yourself, but don't be long; +and if you'll take my advice you'll go in your clothes, for I would like +to have some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees without clothes is +uncomfortable, to say the least of it." + +"The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp lookout," said Peterkin, "so, +pray, be careful." + +"No fear," said I; "good-bye." + +"Good-bye," answered my comrades. + +And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged into the +water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open air. On rising, I +was careful to come up gently and to breathe softly, while I kept close +in beside the rocks; but, as I observed no one near me, I crept slowly +out, and ascended the cliff a step at a time, till I obtained a full view +of the shore. No pirates were to be seen,--even their boat was gone; but +as it was possible they might have hidden themselves, I did not venture +too boldly forward. Then it occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to +my surprise, I saw the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on +the horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. Then my first +impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the good news; but I +checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, in order to make sure +that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate schooner. I looked long and +anxiously at her, and, giving vent to a deep sigh of relief, said aloud, +"Yes, there she goes; the villains have been baulked of their prey this +time at least." + +"Not so sure of that!" said a deep voice at my side; while, at the same +moment, a heavy hand grasped my shoulder, and held it as if in a vice. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + +I fall into the hands of pirates--How they treated me, and what I said to +them--The result of the whole ending in a melancholy separation and in a +most unexpected gift. + +My heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, turning round, +I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce aspect regarding me with a +smile of contempt. He was a white man,--that is to say, he was a man of +European blood, though his face, from long exposure to the weather, was +deeply bronzed. His dress was that of a common seaman, except that he +had on a Greek skull-cap, and wore a broad shawl of the richest silk +round his waist. In this shawl were placed two pair of pistols and a +heavy cutlass. He wore a beard and moustache, which, like the locks on +his head, were short, curly, and sprinkled with gray hairs. + +"So, youngster," he said, with a sardonic smile, while I felt his grasp +tighten on my shoulder, "the villains have been baulked of their prey, +have they? We shall see, we shall see. Now, you whelp, look yonder." As +he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill whistle. In a second or two it was +answered, and the pirate-boat rowed round the point at the Water Garden, +and came rapidly towards us. "Now, go, make a fire on that point; and +hark'ee, youngster, if you try to run away, I'll send a quick and sure +messenger after you," and he pointed significantly at his pistols. + +I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the burning-glass in my +pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a thick smoke ascended into the +air. It had scarcely appeared for two minutes when the boom of a gun +rolled over the sea, and, looking up, I saw that the schooner was making +for the island again. It now flashed across me that this was a ruse on +the part of the pirates, and that they had sent their vessel away, +knowing that it would lead us to suppose that they had left altogether. +But there was no use of regret now. I was completely in their power, so +I stood helplessly beside the pirate watching the crew of the boat as +they landed on the beach. For an instant I contemplated rushing over the +cliff into the sea, but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some of +the men were already between me and the water. + +There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their scheme, as the +crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who had captured me by the +title of captain. They were a ferocious set of men, with shaggy beards +and scowling brows. All of them were armed with cutlasses and pistols, +and their costumes were, with trifling variations, similar to that of the +captain. As I looked from one to the other, and observed the low, +scowling brows, that never unbent, even when the men laughed, and the +mean, rascally expression that sat on each face, I felt that my life hung +by a hair. + +"But where are the other cubs?" cried one of the men, with an oath that +made me shudder. "I'll swear to it there were three, at least, if not +more." + +"You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other dogs?" said the +captain. + +"If you mean my companions," said I, in a low voice, "I won't tell you." + +A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer. + +The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then drawing a pistol from +his belt, he cocked it and said, "Now, youngster, listen to me. I've no +time to waste here. If you don't tell me all you know, I'll blow your +brains out! Where are your comrades?" + +For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this extremity. +Suddenly a thought occurred to me. + +"Villain," said I, shaking my clenched fist in his face, "to blow my +brains out would make short work of me, and be soon over. Death by +drowning is as sure, and the agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to your +face, if you were to toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I would not +tell you where my companions are, and I dare you to try me!" + +The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. "Say you so?" cried +he, uttering a fierce oath. "Here, lads, take him by the legs and heave +him in,--quick!" + +The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my audacity, +advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me towards the cliff, I +congratulated myself not a little on the success of my scheme, for I knew +that once in the water I should be safe, and could rejoin Jack and +Peterkin in the cave. But my hopes were suddenly blasted by the captain +crying out, "Hold on, lads, hold on. We'll give him a taste of the thumb- +screws before throwing him to the sharks. Away with him into the boat. +Look alive! the breeze is freshening." + +The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down the rocks, +tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for some time stunned +with the violence of my fall. + +On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I perceived that +we were already outside the coral reef, and close alongside the schooner, +which was of small size and clipper built. I had only time to observe +this much, when I received a severe kick on the side from one of the men, +who ordered me, in a rough voice, to jump aboard. Rising hastily I +clambered up the side. In a few minutes the boat was hoisted on deck, +the vessel's head put close to the wind, and the Coral Island dropped +slowly astern as we beat up against a head sea. + +Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily engaged in +working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to me, so I remained +leaning against the bulwarks close to the gangway, watching their +operations. I was surprised to find that there were no guns or +carronades of any kind in the vessel, which had more of the appearance of +a fast-sailing trader than a pirate. But I was struck with the neatness +of everything. The brass work of the binnacle and about the tiller, as +well as the copper belaying-pins, were as brightly polished as if they +had just come from the foundry. The decks were pure white, and smooth. +The masts were clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and +truck, which were painted black. The standing and running rigging was in +the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. In short, +everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her low black hull to +the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an amount of care and strict +discipline that would have done credit to a ship of the Royal Navy. There +was nothing lumbering or unseemly about the vessel, excepting, perhaps, a +boat, which lay on the deck with its keel up between the fore and main +masts. It seemed disproportionately large for the schooner; but, when I +saw that the crew amounted to between thirty and forty men, I concluded +that this boat was held in reserve, in case of any accident compelling +the crew to desert the vessel. + +As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to that of +the captain. But in head gear they differed not only from him but from +each other, some wearing the ordinary straw hat of the merchant service, +while others wore cloth caps and red worsted night-caps. I observed that +all their arms were sent below; the captain only retaining his cutlass +and a single pistol in the folds of his shawl. Although the captain was +the tallest and most powerful man in the ship, he did not strikingly +excel many of his men in this respect, and the only difference that an +ordinary observer would have noticed was, a certain degree of open +candour, straightforward daring, in the bold, ferocious expression of his +face, which rendered him less repulsive than his low-browed associates, +but did not by any means induce the belief that he was a hero. This look +was, however, the indication of that spirit which gave him the +pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who called him captain. He +was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of personal fear, and utterly +reckless of consequences, and, therefore, a terror to his men, who +individually hated him, but unitedly felt it to be their advantage to +have him at their head. + +But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I had left on +shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, which was now far away +to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears rolled slowly down my cheeks +as I thought that I might never see them more. + +"So you're blubbering, are you, you obstinate whelp?" said the deep voice +of the captain, as he came up and gave me a box on the ear that nearly +felled me to the deck. "I don't allow any such weakness aboard o' this +ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or I'll give you something to cry +for." + +I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, but felt +that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, so I made no +reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my eyes. + +"I thought you were made of better stuff," continued the captain, +angrily; "I'd rather have a mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed puppy. +But I'll cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks before long. Now +go below, and stay there till I call you." + +As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg standing by the +side of the main-mast, on which the word _gunpowder_ was written in +pencil. It immediately flashed across me that, as we were beating up +against the wind, anything floating in the sea would be driven on the +reef encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected--for thought is +more rapid than the lightning--that my old companions had a pistol. +Without a moment's hesitation, therefore, I lifted the keg from the deck +and tossed it into the sea! An exclamation of surprise burst from the +captain and some of the men who witnessed this act of mine. + +Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the captain raised +his hand to strike me, while he shouted, "Boy! whelp! what mean you by +that?" + +"If you lower your hand," said I, in a loud voice, while I felt the blood +rush to my temples, "I'll tell you. Until you do so I'm dumb!" + +The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of amazement. + +"Now," continued I, "I threw that keg into the sea because the wind and +waves will carry it to my friends on the Coral Island, who happen to have +a pistol, but no powder. I hope that it will reach them soon, and my +only regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. Moreover, pirate, you +said just now that you thought I was made of better stuff! I don't know +what stuff I am made of,--I never thought much about that subject; but +I'm quite certain of this, that I am made of such stuff as the like of +you shall never tame, though you should do your worst." + +To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, smiled, and, +thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that encircled his waist, +turned on his heel and walked aft, while I went below. + +Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the men +received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, patting me on the +back, said, "Well done, lad! you're a brick, and I have no doubt will +turn out a rare cove. Bloody Bill, there, was just such a fellow as you +are, and he's now the biggest cut-throat of us all." + +"Take a can of beer, lad," cried another, "and wet your whistle after +that speech o' your'n to the captain. If any one o' us had made it, +youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this time." + +"Stop your clapper, Jack," vociferated a third; "give the boy a junck o' +meat. Don't you see he's a'most goin' to kick the bucket?" + +"And no wonder," said the first speaker, with an oath, "after the tumble +you gave him into the boat. I guess it would have broke _your_ neck if +you had got it." + +I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, to the +combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be recollected that +I had dived out of the cave that morning before breakfast, and it was now +near mid-day. I therefore gladly accepted a plate of boiled pork and a +yam, which were handed to me by one of the men from the locker on which +some of the crew were seated eating their dinner. But I must add that +the zest with which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of the +frightful oaths and the terrible language that flowed from the lips of +these godless men, even in the midst of their hilarity and good-humour. +The man who had been alluded to as Bloody Bill was seated near me, and I +could not help wondering at the moody silence he maintained among his +comrades. He did indeed reply to their questions in a careless, off-hand +tone, but he never volunteered a remark. The only difference between him +and the others was his taciturnity and his size, for he was nearly, if +not quite, as large a man as the captain. + +During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own reflections, +which were anything but agreeable, for I could not banish from my mind +the threat about the thumb-screws, of the nature and use of which I had a +vague but terrible conception. I was still meditating on my unhappy fate +when, just after night-fall, one of the watch on deck called down the +hatchway,-- + +"Hallo there! one o' you, tumble up and light the cabin lamp, and send +that boy aft to the captain--sharp!" + +"Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants you. Look alive," +said Bloody Bill, raising his huge frame from the locker on which he had +been asleep for the last two hours. He sprang up the ladder and I +instantly followed him, and, going aft, was shown into the cabin by one +of the men, who closed the door after me. + +A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft light over +the cabin, which was a small apartment, and comfortably but plainly +finished. Seated on a camp-stool at the table, and busily engaged in +examining a chart of the Pacific, was the captain, who looked up as I +entered, and, in a quiet voice, bade me be seated, while he threw down +his pencil, and, rising from the table, stretched himself on a sofa at +the upper end of the cabin. + +"Boy," said he, looking me full in the face, "what is your name?" + +"Ralph Rover," I replied. + +"Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that island? How +many companions had you on it? Answer me, now, and mind you tell no +lies." + +"I never tell lies," said I, firmly. + +The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, and bade me +answer his questions. + +I then told him the history of myself and my companions from the time we +sailed till the day of his visit to the island, taking care, however, to +make no mention of the Diamond Cave. After I had concluded, he was +silent for a few minutes; then, looking up, he said--"Boy, I believe +you." + +I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he should not +believe me. However, I made no reply. + +"And what," continued the captain, "makes you think that this schooner is +a pirate?" + +"The black flag," said I, "showed me what you are; and if any further +proof were wanting I have had it in the brutal treatment I have received +at your hands." + +The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he continued--"Boy, +you are too bold. I admit that we treated you roughly, but that was +because you made us lose time and gave us a good deal of trouble. As to +the black flag, that is merely a joke that my fellows play off upon +people sometimes in order to frighten them. It is their humour, and does +no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a lawful trader,--a rough one, I grant +you, but one can't help that in these seas, where there are so many +pirates on the water and such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry +on a trade in sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, +Ralph, to behave yourself and be a good boy, I'll take you along with me +and give you a good share of the profits. You see I'm in want of an +honest boy like you, to look after the cabin and keep the log, and +superintend the traffic on shore sometimes. What say you, Ralph, would +you like to become a sandal-wood trader?" + +I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal relieved to +find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; but instead of +replying I said, "If it be as you state, then why did you take me from my +island, and why do you not now take me back?" + +The captain smiled as he replied, "I took you off in anger, boy, and I'm +sorry for it. I would even now take you back, but we are too far away +from it. See, there it is," he added, laying his finger on the chart, +"and we are now here,--fifty miles at least. It would not be fair to my +men to put about now, for they have all an interest in the trade." + +I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more conversation, I +agreed to become one of the crew, at least until we could reach some +civilized island where I might be put ashore. The captain assented to +this proposition, and after thanking him for the promise, I left the +cabin and went on deck with feelings that ought to have been lighter, but +which were, I could not tell why, marvellously heavy and uncomfortable +still. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + +Bloody Bill--Dark surmises--A strange sail, and a strange crew, and a +still stranger cargo--New reasons for favouring missionaries--A murderous +massacre, and thoughts thereon. + +Three weeks after the conversation narrated in the last chapter, I was +standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner watching the gambols of a +shoal of porpoises that swam round us. It was a dead calm. One of those +still, hot, sweltering days, so common in the Pacific, when Nature seems +to have gone to sleep, and the only thing in water or in air that proves +her still alive, is her long, deep breathing, in the swell of the mighty +sea. No cloud floated in the deep blue above; no ripple broke the +reflected blue below. The sun shone fiercely in the sky, and a ball of +fire blazed, with almost equal power, from out the bosom of the water. So +intensely still was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of +the deep, that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, we +might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue liquid +ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck in all +creation, floating in the midst of it. + +No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of a porpoise, +the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on the swell, the patter +of the reef-points, and the occasional flap of the hanging sails. An +awning covered the fore and after parts of the schooner, under which the +men composing the watch on deck lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with +excessive heat. Bloody Bill, as the men invariably called him, was +standing at the tiller, but his post for the present was a sinecure, and +he whiled away the time by alternately gazing in dreamy abstraction at +the compass in the binnacle, and by walking to the taffrail in order to +spit into the sea. In one of these turns he came near to where I was +standing, and, leaning over the side, looked long and earnestly down into +the blue wave. + +This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was the only +human being on board with whom I had the slightest desire to become +better acquainted. The other men, seeing that I did not relish their +company, and knowing that I was a protege of the captain, treated me with +total indifference. Bloody Bill, it is true, did the same; but as this +was his conduct towards every one else, it was not peculiar in reference +to me. Once or twice I tried to draw him into conversation, but he +always turned away after a few cold monosyllables. As he now leaned over +the taffrail close beside me, I said to him,-- + +"Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do you never speak to any +one?" + +Bill smiled slightly as he replied, "Why, I s'pose it's because I haint +got nothin' to say!" + +"That's strange," said I, musingly; "you look like a man that could +think, and such men can usually speak." + +"So they can, youngster," rejoined Bill, somewhat sternly; "and I could +speak too if I had a mind to, but what's the use o' speakin' here! The +men only open their mouths to curse and swear, an' they seem to find it +entertaining; but I don't, so I hold my tongue." + +"Well, Bill, that's true, and I would rather not hear you speak at all +than hear you speak like the other men; but _I_ don't swear, Bill, so you +might talk to me sometimes, I think. Besides, I'm weary of spending day +after day in this way, without a single soul to say a pleasant word to. +I've been used to friendly conversation, Bill, and I really would take it +kind if you would talk with me a little now and then." + +Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad expression +pass across his sun-burnt face. + +"An' where have you been used to friendly conversation," said Bill, +looking down again into the sea; "not on that Coral Island, I take it?" + +"Yes, indeed," said I energetically; "I have spent many of the happiest +months in my life on that Coral Island;" and without waiting to be +further questioned, I launched out into a glowing account of the happy +life that Jack and Peterkin and I had spent together, and related +minutely every circumstance that befell us while on the island. + +"Boy, boy," said Bill, in a voice so deep that it startled me, "this is +no place for you." + +"That's true," said I; "I'm of little use on board, and I don't like my +comrades; but I can't help it, and at anyrate I hope to be free again +soon." + +"Free?" said Bill, looking at me in surprise. + +"Yes, free," returned I; "the captain said he would put me ashore after +this trip was over." + +"_This trip_! Hark'ee, boy," said Bill, lowering his voice, "what said +the captain to you the day you came aboard?" + +"He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no pirate, and told me +that if I would join him for this trip he would give me a good share of +the profits or put me on shore in some civilized island if I chose." + +Bill's brows lowered savagely as he muttered, "Ay, he said truth when he +told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but he lied when--" + +"Sail ho!" shouted the look-out at the masthead. + +"Where, away?" cried Bill, springing to the tiller; while the men, +startled by the sudden cry jumped up and gazed round the horizon. + +"On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir," answered the look-out. + +At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the rigging, +surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping his eye round the +horizon he gazed steadily at a particular point. + +"Take in top-sails," shouted the captain, swinging himself down on the +deck by the main-back stay. + +"Take in top-sails," roared the first mate. + +"Ay, ay, sir-r-r," answered the men as they sprang into the rigging and +went aloft like cats. + +Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet schooner. The top- +sails were taken in and stowed, the men stood by the sheets and halyards, +and the captain gazed anxiously at the breeze which was now rushing +towards us like a sheet of dark blue. In a few seconds it struck us. The +schooner trembled as if in surprise at the sudden onset, while she fell +away, then bending gracefully to the wind, as though in acknowledgment of +her subjection, she cut through the waves with her sharp prow like a +dolphin, while Bill directed her course towards the strange sail. + +In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that she was a +schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts and sails we +judged her to be a trader. She evidently did not like our appearance, +for, the instant the breeze reached her, she crowded all sail and showed +us her stern. As the breeze had moderated a little our top-sails were +again shaken out, and it soon became evident,--despite the proverb, "A +stern chase is a long one," that we doubled her speed and would overhaul +her speedily. When within a mile we hoisted British colours, but +receiving no acknowledgment, the captain ordered a shot to be fired +across her bows. In a moment, to my surprise, a large portion of the +bottom of the boat amidships was removed, and in the hole thus exposed +appeared an immense brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by +means of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The heavy ball +struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, ricochetting into +the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond it. + +This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel backed her +top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, about a hundred +yards off. + +"Lower the boat," cried the captain. + +In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the crew, who +were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the captain passed me to +get into it, he said, "jump into the stern sheets, Ralph, I may want +you." I obeyed, and in ten minutes more we were standing on the +stranger's deck. We were all much surprised at the sight that met our +eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we were accustomed to see, +there were only fifteen blacks standing on the quarter-deck and regarding +us with looks of undisguised alarm. They were totally unarmed and most +of them unclothed; one or two, however, wore portions of European attire. +One had on a pair of duck trousers which were much too large for him and +stuck out in a most ungainly manner. Another wore nothing but the common +scanty native garment round the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the +most ludicrous personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, was a +tall middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of countenance, who +wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, and a straw hat, while +his black brawny legs were totally uncovered below the knees. + +"Where's the commander of this ship?" inquired our captain, stepping up +to this individual. + +"I is capin," he answered, taking off his straw hat and making a low bow. + +"You!" said our captain, in surprise. "Where do you come from, and where +are you bound? What cargo have you aboard?" + +"We is come," answered the man with the swallow-tail, "from Aitutaki; we +was go for Rarotonga. We is native miss'nary ship; our name is de _Olive +Branch_; an' our cargo is two tons cocoa-nuts, seventy pigs, twenty cats, +and de Gosp'l." + +This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with a shout of +laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by the captain, whose +expression instantly changed from one of severity to that of frank +urbanity as he advanced towards the missionary and shook him warmly by +the hand. + +"I am very glad to have fallen in with you," said he, "and I wish you +much success in your missionary labours. Pray take me to your cabin, as +I wish to converse with you privately." + +The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led him away I +heard him saying, "Me most glad to find you trader; we t'ought you be +pirate. You very like one 'bout the masts." + +What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, but he +came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking hands cordially +with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and returned to the +schooner, which was immediately put before the wind. In a few minutes +the _Olive Branch_ was left far behind us. + +That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men talking +about this curious ship. + +"I wonder," said one, "why our captain looked so sweet on yon swallow- +tailed super-cargo o' pigs and Gospels. If it had been an ordinary +trader, now, he would have taken as many o' the pigs as he required and +sent the ship with all on board to the bottom." + +"Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you don't know that," cried +another. "The captain cares as much for the gospel as you do (an' that's +precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, that the only place +among the southern islands where a ship can put in and get what she wants +in comfort, is where the gospel has been sent to. There are hundreds o' +islands, at this blessed moment, where you might as well jump straight +into a shark's maw as land without a band o' thirty comrades armed to the +teeth to back you." + +"Ay," said a man with a deep scar over his right eye, "Dick's new to the +work. But if the captain takes us for a cargo o' sandal-wood to the +Feejees he'll get a taste o' these black gentry in their native +condition. For my part I don't know, an' I don't care, what the gospel +does to them; but I know that when any o' the islands chance to get it, +trade goes all smooth an' easy; but where they ha'nt got it, Beelzebub +himself could hardly desire better company." + +"Well, you ought to be a good judge," cried another, laughing, "for +you've never kept any company but the worst all your life!" + +"Ralph Rover!" shouted a voice down the hatchway. "Captain wants you, +aft." + +Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as I went the +strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of the gospel on +savage natures;--testimony which, as it was perfectly disinterested, I +had no doubt whatever was strictly true. + +On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and as we were +alone together I tried to draw him into conversation. After repeating to +him the conversation in the forecastle about the missionaries, I said,-- + +"Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in sandal-wood?" + +"Yes, Ralph, she is; but she's just as really a pirate. The black flag +you saw flying at the peak was no deception." + +"Then how can you say she's a trader?" asked I. + +"Why, as to that, she trades when she can't take by force, but she takes +by force, when she can, in preference. Ralph," he added, lowering his +voice, "if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have witnessed done on +these decks you would not need to ask if we were pirates. But you'll +find it out soon enough. As for the missionaries, the captain favours +them because they are useful to him. The South-Sea islanders are such +incarnate fiends that they are the better of being tamed, and the +missionaries are the only men who can do it." + +Our track after this lay through several clusters of small islets, among +which we were becalmed more than once. During this part of our voyage +the watch on deck and the look-out at the mast-head were more than +usually vigilant, as we were not only in danger of being attacked by the +natives, who, I learned from the captain's remarks, were a bloody and +deceitful tribe at this group, but we were also exposed to much risk from +the multitudes of coral reefs that rose up in the channels between the +islands, some of them just above the surface, others a few feet below it. +Our precautions against the savages I found were indeed necessary. + +One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most of which +appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of fresh water the +captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask or two. But we were +mistaken in thinking there were no natives; for scarcely had we drawn +near to the shore when a band of naked blacks rushed out of the bush and +assembled on the beach, brandishing their clubs and spears in a +threatening manner. Our men were well armed, but refrained from showing +any signs of hostility, and rowed nearer in order to converse with the +natives; and I now found that more than one of the crew could imperfectly +speak dialects of the language peculiar to the South Sea islanders. When +within forty yards of the shore, we ceased rowing, and the first mate +stood up to address the multitude; but, instead of answering us, they +replied with a shower of stones, some of which cut the men severely. +Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was about to be fired, +when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from the schooner, which lay +not more than five or six hundred yards off the shore. + +"Don't fire," he shouted, angrily. "Pull off to the point ahead of you." + +The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep curses as they +prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and they burned for revenge. +Three or four of them hesitated, and seemed disposed to mutiny. + +"Don't distress yourselves, lads," said the mate, while a bitter smile +curled his lip. "Obey orders. The captain's not the man to take an +insult tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I'll give myself to +the sharks." + +The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, which was now +crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, probably, to five or six +hundred. We had not rowed off above a couple of hundred yards when a +loud roar thundered over the sea, and the big brass gun sent a withering +shower of grape point blank into the midst of the living mass, through +which a wide lane was cut, while a yell, the like of which I could not +have imagined, burst from the miserable survivors as they fled to the +woods. Amongst the heaps of dead that lay on the sand, just where they +had fallen, I could distinguish mutilated forms writhing in agony, while +ever and anon one and another rose convulsively from out the mass, +endeavoured to stagger towards the wood, and ere they had taken a few +steps, fell and wallowed on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me +as I witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little time +to think, for the captain's deep voice came again over the water towards +us: "Pull ashore, lads, and fill your water casks." The men obeyed in +silence, and it seemed to me as if even their hard hearts were shocked by +the ruthless deed. On gaining the mouth of the rivulet at which we +intended to take in water, we found it flowing with blood, for the +greater part of those who were slain had been standing on the banks of +the stream, a short way above its mouth. Many of the wretched creatures +had fallen into it, and we found one body, which had been carried down, +jammed between two rocks, with the staring eyeballs turned towards us and +his black hair waving in the ripples of the blood-red stream. No one +dared to oppose our landing now, so we carried our casks to a pool above +the murdered group, and having filled them, returned on board. +Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried us away from +the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from the memory of what +I had seen. + +"And this," thought I, gazing in horror at the captain, who, with a quiet +look of indifference, leaned upon the taffrail smoking a cigar and +contemplating the fertile green islets as they passed like a lovely +picture before our eyes--"this is the man who favours the missionaries +because they are useful to him and can tame the savages better than any +one else can do it!" Then I wondered in my mind whether it were possible +for any missionary to tame _him_! + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious--Unpleasant +prospects--Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic agency--The +pirates negotiate with a Feejee chief--Various etceteras that are +calculated to surprise and horrify. + +It was many days after the events just narrated ere I recovered a little +of my wonted spirits. I could not shake off the feeling for a long time +that I was in a frightful dream, and the sight of our captain filled me +with so much horror that I kept out of his way as much as my duties about +the cabin would permit. Fortunately he took so little notice of me that +he did not observe my changed feelings towards him, otherwise it might +have been worse for me. + +But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first island we +should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of the natives +rather than remain an hour longer than I could help in the pirate +schooner. I pondered this subject a good deal, and at last made up my +mind to communicate my intention to Bloody Bill; for, during several +talks I had had with him of late, I felt assured that he too would +willingly escape if possible. When I told him of my design he shook his +head. "No, no, Ralph," said he, "you must not think of running away +here. Among some of the groups of islands you might do so with safety, +but if you tried it here you would find that you had jumped out of the +fryin' pan into the fire." + +"How so, Bill?" said I, "would the natives not receive me?" + +"That they would, lad; but they would eat you too." + +"Eat me!" said I in surprise, "I thought the South Sea islanders never +ate anybody except their enemies." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Bill. "I s'pose 'twas yer tender-hearted friends in +England that put that notion into your head. There's a set o' +soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who don't like to have their +feelin's ruffled, and when you tell them anything they don't like--that +shocks them, as they call it--no matter how true it be, they stop their +ears and cry out, 'Oh, that is _too_ horrible! We can't believe that!' +An' they say truth. They can't believe it 'cause they won't believe it. +Now, I believe there's thousands o' the people in England who are sich +born drivellin' _won't-believers_ that they think the black fellows +hereaway, at the worst, eat an enemy only now an' then, out o' spite; +whereas, I know for certain, and many captains of the British and +American navies know as well as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not +only their enemies but one another; and they do it not for spite, but for +pleasure. It's a _fact_ that they prefer human flesh to any other. But +they don't like white men's flesh so well as black. They say it makes +them sick." + +"Why, Bill," said I, "you told me just now that they would eat _me_ if +they caught me." + +"So I did; and so I think they would. I've only heard some o' them say +they don't like white men _so well_ as black; but if they was hungry they +wouldn't be particular. Anyhow, I'm sure they would kill you. You see, +Ralph, I've been a good while in them parts, and I've visited the +different groups of islands oftentimes as a trader. And thorough goin' +blackguards some o' them traders are. No better than pirates, I can tell +you. One captain that I sailed with was not a chip better than the one +we're with now. He was tradin' with a friendly chief one day, aboard his +vessel. The chief had swam off to us with the things for trade tied a- +top of his head, for them chaps are like otters in the water. Well, the +chief was hard on the captain, and would not part with some o' his +things. When their bargainin' was over they shook hands, and the chief +jumped over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty yards from the +ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. He then hove up +anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along shore, he dropped six black- +fellows with his rifle, remarkin' that 'that would spoil the trade for +the next comers.' But, as I was sayin', I'm up to the ways o' these +fellows. One o' the laws o' the country is, that every shipwrecked +person who happens to be cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to +be roasted and eaten. There was a small tradin' schooner wrecked off one +of these islands when we were lyin' there in harbour during a storm. The +crew was lost, all but three men, who swam ashore. The moment they +landed they were seized by the natives and carried up into the woods. We +knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could not help them, +for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore they would likely have +killed us all. We never saw the three men again; but we heard frightful +yelling, and dancing, and merry-making that night; and one of the +natives, who came aboard to trade with us next day, told us that the +_long pigs_, as he called the men, had been roasted and eaten, and their +bones were to be converted into sail needles. He also said that white +men were bad to eat, and that most o' the people on shore were sick." + +I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this terrible account +of the natives, and asked Bill what he would advise me to do. Looking +round the deck to make sure that we were not overheard, he lowered his +voice and said, "There are two or three ways that we might escape, Ralph, +but none o' them's easy. If the captain would only sail for some o' the +islands near Tahiti, we might run away there well enough, because the +natives are all Christians; an' we find that wherever the savages take up +with Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are safe +to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity myself," he continued, in +a soliloquising voice, "and I don't well know what it means; but a man +with half an eye can see what it does for these black critters. However, +the captain always keeps a sharp look out after us when we get to these +islands, for he half suspects that one or two o' us are tired of his +company. Then, we might manage to cut the boat adrift some fine night +when it's our watch on deck, and clear off before they discovered that we +were gone. But we would run the risk o' bein' caught by the blacks. I +wouldn't like to try that plan. But you and I will think over it, Ralph, +and see what's to be done. In the meantime it's our watch below, so I'll +go and turn in." + +Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade took his +place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into conversation with +him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, looked down into the +phosphorescent waves that gargled around the ladder, and streamed out +like a flame of blue light in the vessel's wake. My thoughts were very +sad, and I could scarce refrain from tears as I contrasted my present +wretched position with the happy, peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral +Island with my dear companions. As I thought upon Jack and Peterkin +anxious forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to myself the grief +and dismay with which they would search every nook and corner of the +island, in a vain attempt to discover my dead body; for I felt assured +that if they did not see any sign of the pirate schooner or boat, when +they came out of the cave to look for me, they would never imagine that I +had been carried away. I wondered, too, how Jack would succeed in +getting Peterkin out of the cave without my assistance; and I trembled +when I thought that he might lose presence of mind, and begin to kick +when he was in the tunnel! These thoughts were suddenly interrupted and +put to flight by a bright red blaze which lighted up the horizon to the +southward, and cut a crimson glow far over the sea. This appearance was +accompanied by a low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at the +same time, the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling wind blew +around us in fitful gusts. + +The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were under the +belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the captain coming on +deck, soon explained the phenomena. + +"It's only a volcano," said he. "I knew there was one hereabouts, but +thought it was extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; we'll +likely have a breeze, and it's well to be ready." + +As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed was not +rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant from the volcano, +these must have been carried to us from it by the wind. As the captain +had predicted, a stiff breeze soon afterwards sprang up, under the +influence of which we speedily left the volcano far behind us; but during +the greater part of the night we could see its lurid glare and hear its +distant thunder. The shower did not cease to fall for several hours, and +we must have sailed under it for nearly forty miles, perhaps farther. +When we emerged from the cloud, our decks and every part of the rigging +were completely covered with a thick coat of ashes. I was much +interested in this, and recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of +the islands of the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, +and had said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the Pacific were +nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a huge continent which had +sunk under the influence of volcanic agency. + +Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few miles to +windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant aspect. It +consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be nearly four thousand feet +high. They were separated from each other by a broad valley, whose thick- +growing trees ascended a considerable distance up the mountain sides; and +rich level plains, or meadow-land, spread round the base of the +mountains, except at the point immediately opposite the large valley, +where a river seemed to carry the trees, as it were, along with it down +to the white sandy shore. The mountain tops, unlike those of our Coral +Island, were sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while their sides were more +rugged and grand in outline than anything I had yet seen in those seas. +Bloody Bill was beside me when the island first hove in sight. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, "I know that island well. They call it Emo." + +"Have you been here before, then?" I inquired. + +"Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. 'Tis a famous island +for sandal-wood. We have taken many cargoes off it already, and have +paid for them too; for the savages are so numerous that we dared not try +to take it by force. But our captain has tried to cheat them so often, +that they're beginnin' not to like us overmuch now. Besides, the men +behaved ill the last time we were here; and I wonder the captain is not +afraid to venture. But he's afraid o' nothing earthly, I believe." + +We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our anchor in six +fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small creek, whose shores +were densely covered with mangroves and tall umbrageous trees. The +principal village of the natives lay about half a mile from this point. +Ordering the boat out, the captain jumped into it, and ordered me to +follow him. The men, fifteen in number, were well armed; and the mate +was directed to have Long Tom ready for emergencies. + +"Give way, lads," cried the captain. + +The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from the +schooner's side, and in a few minutes reached the shore. Here, contrary +to our expectation, we were met with the utmost cordiality by Romata, the +principal chief of the island, who conducted us to his house, and gave us +mats to sit upon. I observed in passing that the natives, of whom there +were two or three thousand, were totally unarmed. + +After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and various +roots was spread before us; of which we partook sparingly, and then +proceeded to business. The captain stated his object in visiting the +island, regretted that there had been a slight misunderstanding during +the last visit, and hoped that no ill-will was borne by either party, and +that a satisfactory trade would be accomplished. + +Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any differences +between them, protested that he was delighted to see his friends again, +and assured them they should have every assistance in cutting and +embarking the wood. The terms were afterwards agreed on, and we rose to +depart. All this conversation was afterwards explained to me by Bill, +who understood the language pretty well. + +Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great chief from +another island was then on a visit to him, and that he was to be +ceremoniously entertained on the following day. After begging to be +allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving permission, he sent his +canoe ashore to bring him off. At the same time he gave orders to bring +on board his two favourites, a cock and a paroquet. While the canoe was +gone on this errand, I had time to regard the savage chief attentively. +He was a man of immense size, with massive but beautifully moulded limbs +and figure, only parts of which, the broad chest and muscular arms, were +uncovered; for, although the lower orders generally wore no other +clothing than a strip of cloth called _maro_ round their loins, the +chief, on particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of +a species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese +paper-mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and moustache, and +his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it resembled a large +turban, in which was stuck a long wooden pin! I afterwards found that +this pin served for scratching the head, for which purpose the fingers +were too short without disarranging the hair. But Romata put himself to +much greater inconvenience on account of his hair, for we found that he +slept with his head resting on a wooden pillow, in which was cut a hollow +for the neck, so that the hair of the sleeper might not be disarranged. + +In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, who +certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having painted one +half of his face red and the other half yellow, besides ornamenting it +with various designs in black! Otherwise he was much the same in +appearance as Romata, though not so powerfully built. As this chief had +never seen a ship before, except, perchance, some of the petty traders +that at long intervals visit these remote islands, he was much taken up +with the neatness and beauty of all the fittings of the schooner. He was +particularly struck with a musket which was shown to him, and asked where +the white men got hatchets hard enough to cut the tree of which the +barrel was made! While he was thus engaged, his brother chief stood +aloof, talking with the captain, and fondling a superb cock and a little +blue-headed paroquet, the favourites of which I have before spoken. I +observed that all the other natives walked in a crouching posture while +in the presence of Romata. Before our guests left us, the captain +ordered the brass gun to be uncovered and fired for their gratification; +and I have every reason to believe he did so for the purpose of showing +our superior power, in case the natives should harbour any evil designs +against us. Romata had never seen this gun before, as it had not been +uncovered on previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed +it was very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he begged that +the captain would fire it. So a shot was put into it. The chiefs were +then directed to look at a rock about two miles out at sea, and the gun +was fired. In a second the top of the rock was seen to burst asunder, +and to fall in fragments into the sea. + +Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he pointed to +a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the captain to fire at +him, evidently supposing that his permission was quite sufficient to +justify the captain in such an act. He was therefore surprised, and not +a little annoyed, when the captain refused to fire at the native, and +ordered the gun to be housed. + +Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement to these +savages, that which pleased Romata's visitor most was the ship's pump. He +never tired of examining it, and pumping up the water. Indeed, so much +was he taken up with this pump, that he could not be prevailed on to +return on shore, but sent a canoe to fetch his favourite stool, on which +he seated himself, and spent the remainder of the day in pumping the +bilge-water out of the ship! + +Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the captain, with +one or two men, remained on board, in order to be ready, if need be, with +the brass gun, which was unhoused and conspicuously elevated, with its +capacious muzzle directed point blank at the chief's house. The men were +fully armed as usual; and the captain ordered me to go with them, to +assist in the work. I was much pleased with this order, for it freed me +from the captain's company, which I could not now endure, and it gave me +an opportunity of seeing the natives. + +As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant groves of +banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I observed that there +were many of the plum and banian trees, with which I had become familiar +on the Coral Island. I noticed also large quantities of taro-roots, +yams, and sweet potatoes, growing in enclosures. On turning into an open +glade of the woods, we came abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. +They were built chiefly of bamboos, and were thatched with the large +thick leaves of the pandanus; but many of them had little more than a +sloping roof and three sides with an open front, being the most simple +shelter from the weather that could well be imagined. Within these, and +around them, were groups of natives--men, women, and children--who all +stood up to gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party of men +whom the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile inland we +arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, while the men set to +work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to observe the country. + +About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one of whom +carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and potatoes on +several plantain leaves, which he presented to the men, who sat down +under the shade of a tree to dine. The chief sat down to dine also; but, +to my surprise, instead of feeding himself, one of his wives performed +that office for him! I was seated beside Bill, and asked him the reason +of this. + +"It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed himself," answered Bill; +"but I daresay he's not particular, except on great occasions. They've a +strange custom among them, Ralph, which is called _tabu_, and they carry +it to great lengths. If a man chooses a particular tree for his god, the +fruit o' that tree is tabued to him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be +killed by his people, and eaten, of course, for killing means eating +hereaway. Then, you see that great mop o' hair on the chief's head? +Well, he has a lot o' barbers to keep it in order; and it's a law that +whoever touches the head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his +hands are tabued; so, in that way, the barbers' hands are always tabued, +and they daren't use them for their lives, but have to be fed like big +babies, as they are, sure enough!" + +"That's odd, Bill. But look there," said I, pointing to a man whose skin +was of a much lighter colour than the generality of the natives. "I've +seen a few of these light-skinned fellows among the Fejeeans. They seem +to me to be of quite a different race." + +"So they are," answered Bill. "These fellows come from the Tongan +Islands, which lie a long way to the eastward. They come here to build +their big war-canoes; and as these take two, and sometimes four years, to +build, there's always some o' the brown-skins among the black sarpents o' +these islands." + +"By the way, Bill," said I, "your mentioning serpents, reminds me that I +have not seen a reptile of any kind since I came to this part of the +world." + +"No more there are any," said Bill, "if ye except the niggers themselves, +there's none on the islands, but a lizard or two and some sich harmless +things. But I never seed any myself. If there's none on the land, +however, there's more than enough in the water, and that minds me of a +wonderful brute they have here. But, come, I'll show it to you." So +saying, Bill arose, and, leaving the men still busy with the baked pig, +led me into the forest. After proceeding a short distance we came upon a +small pond of stagnant water. A native lad had followed us, to whom we +called and beckoned him to come to us. On Bill saying a few words to +him, which I did not understand, the boy advanced to the edge of the +pond, and gave a low peculiar whistle. Immediately the water became +agitated and an enormous eel thrust its head above the surface and +allowed the youth to touch it. It was about twelve feet long, and as +thick round the body as a man's thigh. + +"There," said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, "what do you think of +that for a god, Ralph? This is one o' their gods, and it has been fed +with dozens o' livin' babies already. How many more it'll get afore it +dies is hard to say." + +"Babies?" said I, with an incredulous look + +"Ay, babies," returned Bill. "Your soft-hearted folk at home would say, +'Oh, horrible! impossible!' to that, and then go away as comfortable and +unconcerned as if their sayin' 'horrible! impossible!' had made it a lie. +But I tell you, Ralph, it's a _fact_. I've seed it with my own eyes the +last time I was here, an' mayhap if you stop a while at this accursed +place, and keep a sharp look out, you'll see it too. They don't feed it +regularly with livin' babies, but they give it one now and then as a +treat. Bah! you brute!' cried Bill, in disgust, giving the reptile a +kick on the snout with his heavy boot, that sent it sweltering back in +agony into its loathsome pool. I thought it lucky for Bill, indeed for +all of us, that the native youth's back happened to be turned at the +time, for I am certain that if the poor savages had come to know that we +had so rudely handled their god, we should have had to fight our way back +to the ship. As we retraced our steps I questioned my companion further +on this subject. + +"How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a dreadful thing to be +done?" + +"Allow it? the mothers _do_ it! It seems to me that there's nothing too +fiendish or diabolical for these people to do. Why, in some of the +islands they have an institution called the _Areoi_, and the persons +connected with that body are ready for any wickedness that mortal man can +devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o' their customs is to +murder their infants the moment they are born. The mothers agree to it, +and the fathers do it. And the mildest ways they have of murdering them +is by sticking them through the body with sharp splinters of bamboo, +strangling them with their thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping +them to death while under the sod." + +I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these horrors. + +"But it's a curious fact," he continued, after a pause, during which we +walked in silence towards the spot where we had left our comrades,--"it's +a curious fact, that wherever the missionaries get a footin' all these +things come to an end at once, an' the savages take to doin' each other +good, and singin' psalms, just like Methodists." + +"God bless the missionaries!" said I, while a feeling of enthusiasm +filled my heart, so that I could speak with difficulty. "God bless and +prosper the missionaries till they get a footing in every island of the +sea!" + +"I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I could," said Bill, in a +deep, sad voice; "but it would be a mere mockery for a man to ask a +blessing for others who dare not ask one for himself. But, Ralph," he +continued, "I've not told you half o' the abominations I have seen durin' +my life in these seas. If we pull long together, lad, I'll tell you +more; and if times have not changed very much since I was here last, it's +like that you'll have a chance o' seeing a little for yourself before +long." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + +The Sandal-wood party--Native children's games, somewhat +surprising--Desperate amusements suddenly and fatally brought to a +close--An old friend recognised--News--Romata's mad conduct. + +Next day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I accompanied them +as before. During the dinner hour I wandered into the woods alone, being +disinclined for food that day. I had not rambled far when I found myself +unexpectedly on the sea-shore, having crossed a narrow neck of land which +separated the native village from a large bay. Here I found a party of +the islanders busy with one of their war-canoes, which was almost ready +for launching. I stood for a long time watching this party with great +interest, and observed that they fastened the timbers and planks to each +other very much in the same way in which I had seen Jack fasten those of +our little boat. But what surprised me most was its immense length, +which I measured very carefully, and found to be a hundred feet long; and +it was so capacious that it could have held three hundred men. It had +the unwieldy out-rigger and enormously high stern-posts which I had +remarked on the canoe that came to us while I was on the Coral Island. +Observing some boys playing at games a short way along the beach, I +resolved to go and watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were +engaged so busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe. + +Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I began to +think this must be the general play-ground of the village, I sat down on +a grassy bank under the shade of a plantain-tree, to watch them. And a +happier or more noisy crew I have never seen. There were at least two +hundred of them, both boys and girls, all of whom were clad in no other +garments than their own glossy little black skins, except the maro, or +strip of cloth round the loins of the boys, and a very short petticoat or +kilt on the girls. They did not all play at the same game, but amused +themselves in different groups. + +One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our blind-man's- +buff. Another set were walking on stilts, which raised the children +three feet from the ground. They were very expert at this amusement and +seldom tumbled. In another place I observed a group of girls standing +together, and apparently enjoying themselves very much; so I went up to +see what they were doing, and found that they were opening their eye-lids +with their fingers till their eyes appeared of an enormous size, and then +thrusting pieces of straw between the upper and lower lids, across the +eye-ball, to keep them in that position! This seemed to me, I must +confess, a very foolish as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the +children seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they made. +I pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that if little children +knew how silly they seem to grown-up people when they make faces, they +would not be so fond of doing it. In another place were a number of boys +engaged in flying kites, and I could not help wondering that some of the +games of those little savages should be so like to our own, although they +had never seen us at play. But the kites were different from ours in +many respects, being of every variety of shape. They were made of very +thin cloth, and the boys raised them to a wonderful height in the air by +means of twine made from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, +some of which showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor +savages, and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be sent out +to them. But the amusement which the greatest number of the children of +both sexes seemed to take chief delight in, was swimming and diving in +the sea; and the expertness which they exhibited was truly amazing. They +seemed to have two principal games in the water, one of which was to dive +off a sort of stage which had been erected near a deep part of the sea, +and chase each other in the water. Some of them went down to an +extraordinary depth; others skimmed along the surface, or rolled over and +over like porpoises, or diving under each other, came up unexpectedly and +pulled each other down by a leg or an arm. They never seemed to tire of +this sport, and, from the great heat of the water in the South Seas, they +could remain in it nearly all day without feeling chilled. Many of these +children were almost infants, scarce able to walk; yet they staggered +down the beach, flung their round fat little black bodies fearlessly into +deep water, and struck out to sea with as much confidence as ducklings. + +The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the surf. But as +this is an amusement in which all engage, from children of ten to gray- +headed men of sixty, and as I had an opportunity of witnessing it in +perfection the day following, I shall describe it more minutely. + +I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand swimming-match +was got up, for Romata came and told the captain that they were going to +engage in it, and begged him to "come and see." + +"What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?" I inquired of Bill, as we +walked together to a part of the shore on which several thousands of the +natives were assembled. + +"It's a very favourite lark with these 'xtr'or'nary critters," replied +Bill, giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably bulged out his +left cheek. "Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to the water as soon +a'most as they can walk, an' long before they can do that anything +respectably, so that they are as much at home in the sea as on the land. +Well, ye see, I 'spose they found swimmin' for miles out to sea, and +divin' fathoms deep, wasn't exciting enough, so they invented this game +o' the surf. Each man and boy, as you see, has got a short board or +plank, with which he swims out for a mile or more to sea, and then, +gettin' on the top o' yon thundering breaker, they come to shore on the +top of it, yellin' and screechin' like fiends. It's a marvel to me that +they're not dashed to shivers on the coral reef, for sure an' sartin am I +that if any o' us tried it, we wouldn't be worth the fluke of a broken +anchor after the wave fell. But there they go!" + +As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we were now +standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, plunged into the +surf, and were carried off by the seething foam of the retreating wave. + +At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined the shore, +so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff breeze had +rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the feet of the multitudes +who lined the beach. For some time the swimmers continued to strike out +to sea, breasting over the swell like hundreds of black seals. Then they +all turned, and, watching an approaching billow, mounted its white crest, +and, each laying his breast on the short flat board, came rolling towards +the shore, careering on the summit of the mighty wave, while they and the +onlookers shouted and yelled with excitement. Just as the monster wave +curled in solemn majesty to fling its bulky length upon the beach, most +of the swimmers slid back into the trough behind; others, slipping off +their boards, seized them in their hands, and, plunging through the +watery waste, swam out to repeat the amusement; but a few, who seemed to +me the most reckless, continued their career until they were launched +upon the beach, and enveloped in the churning foam and spray. One of +these last came in on the crest of the wave most manfully, and landed +with a violent bound almost on the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by +his peculiar head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained +as their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint with +which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to his feet, I +recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, my old friend of the +Coral Island! + +Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing quickly, took me +round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the effect of transferring a +good deal of the moist paint from his nose to mine. Then, recollecting +that this was not the white man's mode of salutation, he grasped me by +the hand and shook it violently. + +"Hallo, Ralph!" cried Bill, in surprise, "that chap seems to have taken a +sudden fancy to you, or he must be an old acquaintance." + +"Right, Bill," I replied, "he is indeed an old acquaintance;" and I +explained in a few words that he was the chief whose party Jack and +Peterkin and I had helped to save. + +Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an animated +conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the course of it to +me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him about the memorable +battle, and the part we had taken in it. When he paused, I begged of +Bill to ask him about the woman Avatea, for I had some hope that she +might have come with Tararo on this visit. "And ask him," said I, "who +she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different race from the +Feejeeans." On the mention of her name the chief frowned darkly, and +seemed to speak with much anger. + +"You're right, Ralph," said Bill, when the chief had ceased to talk; +"she's not a Feejee girl, but a Samoan. How she ever came to this place +the chief does not very clearly explain, but he says she was taken in +war, and that he got her three years ago, an' kept her as his daughter +ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else she'd have been roasted and +eaten like the rest." + +"But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?" said I. + +"Because the girl's somewhat obstinate, like most o' the sex, an' won't +marry the man he wants her to. It seems that a chief of some other +island came on a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but she +wouldn't have him on no account, bein' already in love, and engaged to a +young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a desperate shindy; so, +as he was going on a war expedition in his canoe, he left her to think +about it, sayin' he'd be back in six months or so, when he hoped she +wouldn't be so obstropolous. This happened just a week ago; an' Tararo +says that if she's not ready to go, when the chief returns, as his bride, +she'll be sent to him as a _long pig_." + +"As a long pig!" I exclaimed in surprise; "why what does he mean by +that?" + +"He means somethin' very unpleasant," answered Bill with a frown. "You +see these blackguards eat men an' women just as readily as they eat pigs; +and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each other in appearance, +they call men _long_ pigs. If Avatea goes to this fellow as a long pig, +it's all up with her, poor thing." + +"Is she on the island now?" I asked eagerly. + +"No, she's at Tararo's island." + +"And where does it lie?" + +"About fifty or sixty miles to the south'ard o' this," returned Bill; +"but I--" + +At this moment we were startled by the cry of "Mao! mao!--a shark! a +shark!" which was immediately followed by a shriek that rang clear and +fearfully loud above the tumult of cries that arose from the savages in +the water and on the land. We turned hastily towards the direction +whence the cry came, and had just time to observe the glaring eye-balls +of one of the swimmers as he tossed his arms in the air. Next instant he +was pulled under the waves. A canoe was instantly launched, and the hand +of the drowning man was caught, but only half of his body was dragged +from the maw of the monster, which followed the canoe until the water +became so shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next +billow was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore. + +In most countries of the world this would have made a deep impression on +the spectators, but the only effect it had upon these islanders was to +make them hurry with all speed out of the sea, lest a similar fate should +befall some of the others; but, so utterly reckless were they of human +life, that it did not for a moment suspend the progress of their +amusements. It is true the surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat +abruptly, but they immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me +that sharks do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being frightened away +by the immense numbers of men and boys in the water, and by the shouting +and splashing that they make. "But," said he, "such a thing as you have +seen just now don't frighten them much. They'll be at it again to-morrow +or next day, just as if there wasn't a single shark between Feejee and +Nova Zembla." + +After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing matches; and +being men of immense size and muscle, they did a good deal of injury to +each other, especially in boxing, in which not only the lower orders, but +several of the chiefs and priests engaged. Each bout was very quickly +terminated, for they did not pretend to a scientific knowledge of the +art, and wasted no time in sparring, but hit straight out at each other's +heads, and their blows were delivered with great force. Frequently one +of the combatants was knocked down with a single blow; and one gigantic +fellow hit his adversary so severely that he drove the skin entirely off +his forehead. This feat was hailed with immense applause by the +spectators. + +During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, though I confess +I could not refrain from beholding them, I was struck with the beauty of +many of the figures and designs that were tattooed on the persons of the +chiefs and principal men. One figure, that seemed to me very elegant, +was that of a palm-tree tattooed on the back of a man's leg, the roots +rising, as it were, from under his heel, the stem ascending the tendon of +the ankle, and the graceful head branching out upon the calf. I +afterwards learned that this process of tattooing is very painful, and +takes long to do, commencing at the age of ten, and being continued at +intervals up to the age of thirty. It is done by means of an instrument +made of bone, with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the kernel of +the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, and the mark thus +made is indelible. The operation is performed by a class of men whose +profession it is, and they tattoo as much at a time, as the person on +whom they are operating can bear; which is not much, the pain and +inflammation caused by tattooing being very great, sometimes causing +death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed with an ornamental stripe down +the legs, which gave them the appearance of being clad in tights. Others +had marks round the ankles and insteps, which looked like tight-fitting +and elegant boots. Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts +were very profusely marked with every imaginable species of +device,--muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, intermingled with +lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary figures. + +The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a few marks +on their feet and arms. But I must say, however objectionable this +strange practice may be, it nevertheless had this good effect, that it +took away very much from their appearance of nakedness. + +Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our schooner, we +observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood of his house, +apparently mad with passion. + +"Ah!" said Bill to me, "there he's at his old tricks again. That's his +way when he gets drink. The natives make a sort of drink o' their own, +and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy he's like a wild +tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a bottle, as usual, to keep +him in good humour. After drinkin' he usually goes to sleep, and the +people know it well and keep out of his way, for fear they should waken +him. Even the babies are taken out of ear-shot; for, when he's waked up, +he rushes out just as you see him now, and spears or clubs the first +person he meets." + +It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon had been in +his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about without one. Suddenly +he caught sight of an unfortunate man who was trying to conceal himself +behind a tree. Rushing towards him, Romata struck him a terrible blow on +the head, which knocked out the poor man's eye and also dislocated the +chief's finger. The wretched creature offered no resistance; he did not +even attempt to parry the blow. Indeed, from what Bill said, I found +that he might consider himself lucky in having escaped with his life, +which would certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of +a club at the time. + +"Have these wretched creatures no law among themselves," said I, "which +can restrain such wickedness?" + +"None," replied Bill. "The chief's word is law. He might kill and eat a +dozen of his own subjects any day for nothing more than his own pleasure, +and nobody would take the least notice of it." + +This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we wended our +way to the beach, but I could not observe any other expression on the +faces of the men than that of total indifference or contempt. It seemed +to me a very awful thing that it should be possible for men to come to +such hardness of heart and callousness to the sight of bloodshed and +violence; but, indeed, I began to find that such constant exposure to +scenes of blood was having a slight effect upon myself, and I shuddered +when I came to think that I, too, was becoming callous. + +I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up and down +the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the conclusion that if +I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such bloody deeds as I had witnessed +within the last few weeks, could so soon come to be less sensitive about +them, how little wonder that these poor ignorant savages, who were born +and bred in familiarity therewith, should think nothing of them at all, +and should hold human life in so very slight esteem. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + +Mischief brewing--My blood is made to run cold--Evil consultations and +wicked resolves--Bloody Bill attempts to do good and fails--The +attack--Wholesale murder--The flight--The escape. + +Next morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of deep +depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy fate, the +more wretched and miserable did I feel. + +I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most dreadful +character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere pastime. On shore were +the natives, whose practices were so horrible that I could not think of +them without shuddering. On board were none but pirates of the blackest +dye, who, although not cannibals, were foul murderers, and more +blameworthy even than the savages, inasmuch as they knew better. Even +Bill, with whom I had, under the strange circumstances of my lot, formed +a kind of intimacy, was so fierce in his nature as to have acquired the +title of "Bloody" from his vile companions. I felt very much cast down +the more I considered the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as +it seemed to me, at least for a long time to come. At last, in my +feeling of utter helplessness, I prayed fervently to the Almighty that he +would deliver me out of my miserable condition; and when I had done so I +felt some degree of comfort. + +When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the men usually +started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me to remain aboard that +day, as I did not feel well; but he looked at me angrily, and ordered me, +in a surly tone, to get ready to go on shore as usual. The fact was that +the captain had been out of humour for some time past. Romata and he had +had some differences, and high words had passed between them, during +which the chief had threatened to send a fleet of his war-canoes, with a +thousand men, to break up and burn the schooner; whereupon the captain +smiled sarcastically, and going up to the chief gazed sternly in his +face, while he said, "I have only to raise my little finger just now, and +my big gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five minutes!" +Although the chief was a bold man, he quailed before the pirate's glance +and threat, and made no reply; but a bad feeling had been raised and old +sores had been opened. + +I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. Before starting, +however, the captain called me into the cabin, and said,-- + +"Here, Ralph, I've got a mission for you, lad. That blackguard Romata is +in the dumps, and nothing will mollify him but a gift; so do you go up to +his house and give him these whales' teeth, with my compliments. Take +with you one of the men who can speak the language." + +I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six white +whales' teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, which seemed to me +very paltry things. However, I did not dare to hesitate or ask any +questions; so, gathering them up, I left the cabin and was soon on my way +to the chief's house, accompanied by Bill. On expressing my surprise at +the gift, he said,-- + +"They're paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but they're considered of +great value by them chaps. They're a sort o' cash among them. The red +ones are the most prized, one of them bein' equal to twenty o' the white +ones. I suppose the only reason for their bein' valuable is that there +ain't many of them, and they're hard to be got." + +On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in the midst +of a number of large bales of native cloth and other articles, which had +been brought to him as presents from time to time by inferior chiefs. He +received us rather haughtily, but on Bill explaining the nature of our +errand he became very condescending, and his eyes glistened with +satisfaction when he received the whales' teeth, although he laid them +aside with an assumption of kingly indifference. + +"Go," said he, with a wave of the hand,--"go, tell your captain that he +may cut wood to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come ashore,--I want to +have a palaver with him." + +As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his head: + +"There's mischief brewin' in that black rascal's head. I know him of +old. But what comes here?" + +As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in the wood, and +presently there issued from it a band of savages, in the midst of whom +were a number of men bearing burdens on their shoulders. At first I +thought that these burdens were poles with something rolled round them, +the end of each pole resting on a man's shoulder. But on a nearer +approach I saw that they were human beings, tied hand and foot, and so +lashed to the poles that they could not move. I counted twenty of them +as they passed. + +"More murder!" said Bill, in a voice that sounded between a hoarse laugh +and a groan. + +"Surely they are not going to murder them?" said I, looking anxiously +into Bill's face. + +"I don't know, Ralph," replied Bill, "what they're goin' to do with them; +but I fear they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that way." + +As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed that Bill +looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction where the procession +had disappeared. At last he stopped, and turning abruptly on his heel, +said,-- + +"I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom o' that affair. Let +us follow these black scoundrels and see what they're goin' to do." + +I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody practices; but +Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and went. We passed rapidly through +the bush, being guided in the right direction by the shouts of the +savages. Suddenly there was a dead silence, which continued for some +time, while Bill and I involuntarily quickened our pace until we were +running at the top of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously +mentioned. As we reached the verge of the wood, we discovered the +savages surrounding the large war-canoe, which they were apparently on +the point of launching. Suddenly the multitude put their united strength +to the canoe; but scarcely had the huge machine begun to move, when a +yell, the most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, rose high above the +shouting of the savages. It had not died away when another and another +smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I saw that these inhuman monsters +were actually launching their canoe over the living bodies of their +victims. But there was no pity in the breasts of these men. Forward +they went in ruthless indifference, shouting as they went, while high +above their voices rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, +as, one after another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst the +eyeballs from their sockets, and sent the life's blood gushing from their +mouths. Oh, reader, this is no fiction. I would not, for the sake of +thrilling you with horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was witnessed. +It is true; true as that accursed sin which has rendered the human heart +capable of such diabolical enormities! + +When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a deep +groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as if I had been +a child, cried,-- + +"Come along, lad; let's away!"--and so, staggering and stumbling over the +tangled underwood, we fled from the fatal spot. + +During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a horrible dream. +I scarce knew what was said to me, and was more than once blamed by the +men for idling my time. At last the hour to return aboard came. We +marched down to the beach, and I felt relief for the first time when my +feet rested on the schooner's deck. + +In the course of the evening I overheard part of a conversation between +the captain and the first mate, which startled me not a little. They +were down in the cabin, and conversed in an under-tone, but the sky-light +being off, I overheard every word that was said. + +"I don't half like it," said the mate. "It seems to me that we'll only +have hard fightin' and no pay." + +"No pay!" repeated the captain, in a voice of suppressed anger. "Do you +call a good cargo all for nothing no pay?" + +"Very true," returned the mate; "but we've got the cargo aboard. Why not +cut your cable and take French leave o' them? What's the use o' tryin' +to lick the blackguards when it'll do us no manner o' good?" + +"Mate," said the captain, in a low voice, "you talk like a fresh-water +sailor. I can only attribute this shyness to some strange delusion; for +surely" (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone as he said this) +"surely I am not to suppose that _you_ have become soft-hearted! Besides, +you are wrong in regard to the cargo being aboard; there's a good quarter +of it lying in the woods, and that blackguard chief knows it and won't +let me take it off. He defied us to do our worst, yesterday." + +"Defied us! did he?" cried the mate, with a bitter laugh. "Poor +contemptible thing!" + +"And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are afraid to attack +him." + +"Who said I was afraid?" growled the mate, sulkily. "I'm as ready as any +man in the ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend to do?" + +"I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up to the head of the +creek there, from which point we can command the pile of sandal-wood with +our gun. Then I shall land with all the men except two, who shall take +care of the schooner and be ready with the boat to take us off. We can +creep through the woods to the head of the village, where these cannibals +are always dancing round their suppers of human flesh, and if the +carbines of the men are loaded with a heavy charge of buck-shot, we can +drop forty or fifty at the first volley. After that the thing will be +easy enough. The savages will take to the mountains in a body, and we +shall take what we require, up anchor, and away." + +To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the cabin I heard the +captain say,-- + +"Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don't forget the buck-shot." + +The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this murderous +conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, who seemed much +perplexed about it. At length he said,-- + +"I'll tell you what I'll do, Ralph: I'll swim ashore after dark and fix a +musket to a tree not far from the place where we'll have to land, and +I'll tie a long string to the trigger, so that when our fellows cross it +they'll let it off, and so alarm the village in time to prevent an +attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin' back to the boat; so, +master captain," added Bill with a smile that for the first time seemed +to me to be mingled with good-natured cheerfulness, "you'll be baulked at +least for once in your life by Bloody Bill." + +After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. He slipped over +the side with a musket in his left hand, while with his right he swam +ashore and entered the woods. He soon returned, having accomplished his +purpose, and got on board without being seen,--I being the only one on +deck. + +When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on deck, the +cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. These sweeps were +immensely large oars, each requiring a couple of men to work it. In a +few minutes we entered the mouth of the creek, which was indeed the mouth +of a small river, and took about half an hour to ascend it, although the +spot where we intended to land was not more than six hundred yards from +the mouth, because there was a slight current against us, and the +mangroves which narrowed the creek, impeded the rowers in some places. +Having reached the spot, which was so darkened by overhanging trees that +we could see with difficulty, a small kedge anchor attached to a thin +line was let softly down over the stern. + +"Now, lads," whispered the captain, as he walked along the line of men, +who were all armed to the teeth, "don't be in a hurry, aim low, and don't +waste your first shots." + +He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in silence. There +was no room to row, but oars were not needed, as a slight push against +the side of the schooner sent the boat gliding to the shore. + +"There's no need of leaving two in the boat," whispered the mate, as the +men stepped out; "we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph stay." + +The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness with the boat- +hook, to shove ashore at a moment's notice if they should return, or to +shove off if any of the savages should happen to approach. He then threw +his carbine into the hollow of his arm and glided through the bushes +followed by his men. With a throbbing head I awaited the result of our +plan. I knew the exact locality where the musket was placed, for Bill +had described it to me, and I kept my straining eyes fixed upon the spot. +But no sound came, and I began to fear that either they had gone in +another direction or that Bill had not fixed the string properly. +Suddenly I heard a faint click, and observed one or two bright sparks +among the bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at +once that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming had not +caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly failed. A feeling of dread now +began to creep over me as I stood in the boat, in that dark, silent spot, +awaiting the issue of this murderous expedition. I shuddered as I +glanced at the water that glided past like a dark reptile. I looked back +at the schooner, but her hull was just barely visible, while her tapering +masts were lost among the trees which overshadowed her. Her lower sails +were set, but so thick was the gloom that they were quite invisible. + +Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices raised a yell in +the village; again the cry rose on the night air, and was followed by +broken shouts as of scattered parties of men bounding into the woods. +Then I heard another shout loud and close at hand. It was the voice of +the captain cursing the man who had fired the premature shot. Then came +the order, "Forward," followed by the wild hurrah of our men, as they +charged the savages. Shots now rang in quick succession, and at last a +loud volley startled the echoes of the woods. It was followed by a +multitude of wild shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another +"hurrah" from the men; the distance of the sound proving that they were +driving their enemies before them towards the sea. + +While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now mingled in +confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the leaves not far from me. +At first I thought it was a party of savages who had observed the +schooner, but I was speedily undeceived by observing a body of +natives--apparently several hundreds, as far as I could guess in the +uncertain light--bounding through the woods towards the scene of battle. +I saw at once that this was a party who had out-flanked our men, and +would speedily attack them in the rear. And so it turned out, for, in a +short time, the shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I +heard a death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear. + +At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of exultation +that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that our men had been +conquered. I was immediately thrown into dreadful consternation. What +was I now to do? To be taken by the savages was too horrible to be +thought of; to flee to the mountains was hopeless, as I should soon be +discovered; and to take the schooner out of the creek without assistance +was impossible. I resolved, however, to make the attempt, as being my +only hope, and was on the point of pushing off when my hand was stayed +and my blood chilled by an appalling shriek in which I recognised the +voice of one of the crew. It was succeeded by a shout from the savages. +Then came another, and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, +as I felt convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold blood. +With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on fire, I seized the +boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang from the bushes. + +"Stop! Ralph, stop!--there now, push off," he cried, and bounded into the +boat so violently as nearly to upset her. It was Bill's voice! In +another moment we were on board,--the boat made fast, the line of the +anchor cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first stroke of Bill's giant +arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, for in his haste he forgot +that I could scarcely move the unwieldy oar. Springing to the stern he +lashed the rudder in such a position as that, while it aided me, it acted +against him, and so rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The +schooner now began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we reached +its mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told that we were +discovered. Instantly a number of the savages plunged into the water and +swam towards us; but we were making so much way that they could not +overtake us. One, however, an immensely powerful man, succeeded in +laying hold of the cut rope that hung from the stern, and clambered +quickly upon deck. Bill caught sight of him the instant his head +appeared above the taffrail. But he did not cease to row, and did not +appear even to notice the savage until he was within a yard of him; then, +dropping the sweep, he struck him a blow on the forehead with his +clenched fist that felled him to the deck. Lifting him up he hurled him +overboard and resumed the oar. But now a greater danger awaited us, for +the savages had outrun us on the bank and were about to plunge into the +water ahead of the schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was +sealed. For one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, drawing a pistol +from his belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held the pan of his pistol +over the touch-hole and fired. The shot was succeeded by the hiss of the +cannon's priming, then the blaze and the crashing thunder of the +monstrous gun burst upon the savages with such deafening roar that it +seemed as if their very mountains had been rent asunder. + +This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation caused by the +unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a gentle breeze, which +the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us from feeling, bulged out our +sails; the schooner bent before it, and the shouts of the disappointed +savages grew fainter and fainter in the distance as we were slowly wafted +out to sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + +Reflections--The wounded man--The squall--True consolation--Death. + +There is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their bodies and +in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to be wonderfully +adapted and exactly proportioned to the circumstances in which +individuals may happen to be placed,--a power which, in most cases, is +sufficient to carry a man through and over every obstacle that may happen +to be thrown in his path through life, no matter how high or how steep +the mountain may be, but which often forsakes him the moment the summit +is gained, the point of difficulty passed; and leaves him prostrated, +with energies gone, nerves unstrung, and a feeling of incapacity +pervading the entire frame that renders the most trifling effort almost +impossible. + +During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to severe mental +and much physical excitement, which had almost crushed me down by the +time I was relieved from duty in the course of the evening. But when the +expedition, whose failure has just been narrated, was planned, my +anxieties and energies had been so powerfully aroused that I went through +the protracted scenes of that terrible night without a feeling of the +slightest fatigue. My mind and body were alike active and full of +energy. No sooner was the last thrilling fear of danger past, however, +than my faculties were utterly relaxed; and, when I felt the cool breezes +of the Pacific playing around my fevered brow, and heard the free waves +rippling at the schooner's prow, as we left the hated island behind us, +my senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck. + +From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by the arm, +saying,-- + +"Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we're safe now. Poor thing, I believe +he's fainted." And raising me in his arms he laid me on the folds of the +gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the tiller. "Here, take a +drop o' this, it'll do you good, my boy," he added, in a voice of +tenderness which I had never heard him use before, while he held a brandy- +flask to my lips. + +I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next moment my +head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast asleep. I slept long, for +when I awoke the sun was a good way above the horizon. I did not move on +first opening my eyes, as I felt a delightful sensation of rest pervading +me, and my eyes were riveted on and charmed with the gorgeous splendour +of the mighty ocean, that burst upon my sight. It was a dead calm; the +sea seemed a sheet of undulating crystal, tipped and streaked with the +saffron hues of sunrise, which had not yet merged into the glowing heat +of noon; and there was a deep calm in the blue dome above, that was not +broken even by the usual flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would have +lain in contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but my mind was +recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the present by the sight +of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet with his head reclining, +as if in sleep, on his right arm, which rested on the tiller. As he +seemed to rest peacefully I did not mean to disturb him, but the slight +noise I made in raising myself on my elbow caused him to start and look +round. + +"Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long and soundly," he +said, turning towards me. + +On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He was deadly pale, +and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks over his face, was clotted +with blood. Blood also stained his hollow cheeks and covered the front +of his shirt, which, with the greater part of dress, was torn and soiled +with mud. + +"Oh, Bill!" said I, with deep anxiety, "what is the matter with you? You +are ill. You must have been wounded." + +"Even so, lad," said Bill in a deep soft voice, while he extended his +huge frame on the couch from which I had just risen. "I've got an ugly +wound, I fear, and I've been waiting for you to waken, to ask you to get +me a drop o' brandy and a mouthful o' bread from the cabin lockers. You +seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that I didn't like to disturb you. But +I don't feel up to much just now." + +I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below immediately, and +returned in a few seconds with a bottle of brandy and some broken +biscuit. He seemed much refreshed after eating a few morsels and +drinking a long draught of water mingled with a little of the spirits. +Immediately afterwards he fell asleep, and I watched him anxiously until +he awoke, being desirous of knowing the nature and extent of his wound. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a slumber of an hour, "I'm +the better of that nap, Ralph; I feel twice the man I was;" and he +attempted to rise, but sank back again immediately with a deep groan. + +"Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look at your wound. +I'll make a comfortable bed for you here on deck, and get you some +breakfast. After that you shall tell me how you got it. Cheer up, +Bill," I added, seeing that he turned his head away; "you'll be all right +in a little, and I'll be a capital nurse to you though I'm no doctor." + +I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. While it was +kindling, I went to the steward's pantry and procured the materials for a +good breakfast, with which, in little more than half an hour, I returned +to my companion. He seemed much better, and smiled kindly on me as I set +before him a cup of coffee and a tray with several eggs and some bread on +it. + +"Now then, Bill," said I, cheerfully, sitting down beside him on the +deck, "let's fall to. I'm very hungry myself, I can tell you; but--I +forgot--your wound," I added, rising; "let me look at it." + +I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the chest. It did +not bleed much, and, as it was on the right side, I was in hopes that it +might not be very serious. But Bill shook his head. "However," said he, +"sit down, Ralph, and I'll tell you all about it." + +"You see, after we left the boat an' began to push through the bushes, we +went straight for the line of my musket, as I had expected; but by some +unlucky chance it didn't explode, for I saw the line torn away by the +men's legs, and heard the click o' the lock; so I fancy the priming had +got damp and didn't catch. I was in a great quandary now what to do, for +I couldn't concoct in my mind, in the hurry, any good reason for firin' +off my piece. But they say necessity's the mother of invention; so, just +as I was givin' it up and clinchin' my teeth to bide the worst o't, and +take what should come, a sudden thought came into my head. I stepped out +before the rest, seemin' to be awful anxious to be at the savages, +tripped my foot on a fallen tree, plunged head foremost into a bush, an', +ov coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a screechin' from the +camp as I never heard in all my life. I rose at once, and was rushin' on +with the rest when the captain called a halt. + +{The dying pirate: p334.jpg} + +"'You did that a-purpose, you villain!' he said, with a tremendous oath, +and, drawin' a pistol from his belt, let fly right into my breast. I +fell at once, and remembered no more till I was startled and brought +round by the most awful yell I ever heard in my life, except, maybe, the +shrieks o' them poor critters that were crushed to death under yon big +canoe. Jumpin' up, I looked round, and, through the trees, saw a fire +gleamin' not far off, the light o' which showed me the captain and men +tied hand and foot, each to a post, and the savages dancin' round them +like demons. I had scarce looked for a second, when I saw one o' them go +up to the captain flourishing a knife, and, before I could wink, he +plunged it into his breast, while another yell, like the one that roused +me, rang upon my ear. I didn't wait for more, but, bounding up, went +crashing through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows caught +sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin' into the +boat, as you know." + +Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and shuddered +frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from continuing the +subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his mind to other things. + +"But now, Bill," said I, "it behoves us to think about the future, and +what course of action we shall pursue. Here we are, on the wide Pacific, +in a well-appointed schooner, which is our own,--at least no one has a +better claim to it than we have,--and the world lies before us. Moreover, +here comes a breeze, so we must make up our minds which way to steer." + +"Ralph, boy," said my companion, "it matters not to me which way we go. I +fear that my time is short now. Go where you will. I'm content." + +"Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the Coral Island, and +see what has become of my dear old comrades, Jack and Peterkin. I +believe the island has no name, but the captain once pointed it out to me +on the chart, and I marked it afterwards; so, as we know pretty well our +position just now, I think I can steer to it. Then, as to working the +vessel, it is true I cannot hoist the sails single-handed, but luckily we +have enough of sail set already, and if it should come on to blow a +squall, I could at least drop the peaks of the main and fore sails, and +clew them up partially without help, and throw her head close into the +wind, so as to keep her all shaking till the violence of the squall is +past. And if we have continued light breezes, I'll rig up a complication +of blocks and fix them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able +to hoist the sails without help. 'Tis true I'll require half a day to +hoist them, but we don't need to mind that. Then I'll make a sort of +erection on deck to screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you can only +manage to sit beside the tiller and steer for two hours every day, so as +to let me get a nap, I'll engage to let you off duty all the rest of the +twenty-four hours. And if you don't feel able for steering, I'll lash +the helm and heave to, while I get you your breakfasts and dinners; and +so we'll manage famously, and soon reach the Coral Island." + +Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain. + +"And what will you do," said he, "if it comes on to blow a storm?" + +This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do in such a +case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and said, "Bill, when a man +has done all that he _can_ do, he ought to leave the rest to God." + +"Oh, Ralph," said my companion, in a faint voice, looking anxiously into +my face, "I wish that I had the feelin's about God that you seem to have, +at this hour. I'm dyin', Ralph; yet I, who have braved death a hundred +times, am afraid to die. I'm afraid to enter the next world. Something +within tells me there will be a reckoning when I go there. But it's all +over with me, Ralph. I feel that there's no chance o' my bein' saved." + +"Don't say that, Bill," said I, in deep compassion, "don't say that. I'm +quite sure there's hope even for you, but I can't remember the words of +the Bible that make me think so. Is there not a Bible on board, Bill?" + +"No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor boy that was taken +aboard against his will. He died, poor lad, I think, through ill +treatment and fear. After he was gone the captain found his Bible and +flung it overboard." + +I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the way in +which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me that I was +actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than this blood-stained +pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he never read the Bible, and was +never brought up to care for it; whereas I was carefully taught to read +it by my own mother, and had read it daily as long as I possessed one, +yet to so little purpose that I could not now call to mind a single text +that would meet this poor man's case, and afford him the consolation he +so much required. I was much distressed, and taxed my memory for a long +time. At last a text did flash into my mind, and I wondered much that I +had not thought of it before. + +"Bill," said I, in a low voice, "'Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ and +thou shalt be saved.'" + +"Ay, Ralph, I've heard the missionaries say that before now, but what +good can it do me? It's not for me that. It's not for the likes o' me." + +I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that that word was +for him as well as for me, I could not remember any other word whereby I +could prove it. + +After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, "Ralph, I've +led a terrible life. I've been a sailor since I was a boy, and I've gone +from bad to worse ever since I left my father's roof. I've been a pirate +three years now. It is true I did not choose the trade, but I was +inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here by force till I became +reckless and at last joined them. Since that time my hand has been +steeped in human blood again and again. Your young heart would grow cold +if I--; but why should I go on? 'Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is +fixed." + +"Bill," said I, "'Though your sins be red like crimson, they shall be +white as snow.' 'Only believe.'" + +"Only believe!" cried Bill, starting up on his elbow; "I've heard men +talk o' believing as if it was easy. Ha! 'tis easy enough for a man to +point to a rope and say, 'I believe that would bear my weight;' but 'tis +another thing for a man to catch hold o' that rope, and swing himself by +it over the edge of a precipice!" + +The energy with which he said this, and the action with which it was +accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back with a deep groan. As +if the very elements sympathized with this man's sufferings, a low moan +came sweeping over the sea. + +"Hist! Ralph," said Bill, opening his eves; "there's a squall coming, +lad. Look alive, boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the main-sail peak. +Them squalls come quick sometimes." + +I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall was indeed +bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my notice, owing to my being +so much engrossed by our conversation. I instantly did as Bill desired, +for the schooner was still lying motionless on the glassy sea. I +observed with some satisfaction that the squall was bearing down on the +larboard bow, so that it would strike the vessel in the position in which +she would be best able to stand the shock. Having done my best to +shorten sail, I returned aft, and took my stand at the helm. + +"Now, boy," said Bill, in a faint voice, "keep her close to the wind." + +A few seconds afterwards he said, "Ralph, let me hear those two texts +again." + +I repeated them. + +"Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?" + +"Quite sure," I replied. + +Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon us, and the +spray dashed over our decks. For a time the schooner stood it bravely, +and sprang forward against the rising sea like a war-horse. Meanwhile +clouds darkened the sky, and the sea began to rise in huge billows. There +was still too much sail on the schooner, and, as the gale increased, I +feared that the masts would be torn out of her or carried away, while the +wind whistled and shrieked through the strained rigging. Suddenly the +wind shifted a point, a heavy sea struck us on the bow, and the schooner +was almost laid on her beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my legs. +At the same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin which had +served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence against the sky- +light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I could see that the shock +had rendered him insensible, but I did not dare to quit the tiller for an +instant, as it required all my faculties, bodily and mental, to manage +the schooner. For an hour the blast drove us along, while, owing to the +sharpness of the vessel's bow and the press of canvass, she dashed +through the waves instead of breasting over them, thereby drenching the +decks with water fore and aft. At the end of that time the squall passed +away, and left us rocking on the bosom of the agitated sea. + +My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise Bill from +the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran below for the brandy +bottle and rubbed his face and hands with it, and endeavoured to pour a +little down his throat. But my efforts, although I continued them long +and assiduously, were of no avail; as I let go the hand which I had been +chafing it fell heavily on the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, and +sat for some time quite motionless, but there was no flutter there--the +pirate was dead! + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + +Alone on the deep--Necessity the mother of invention--A valuable book +discovered--Natural phenomenon--A bright day in my history. + +It was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I now seated +myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid features of my +late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past history and +contemplated with anxiety my present position. Alone! in the midst of +the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect knowledge of navigation, and in +a schooner requiring at least eight men as her proper crew. But I will +not tax the reader's patience with a minute detail of my feelings and +doings during the first few days that followed the death of my companion. +I will merely mention that I tied a cannon ball to his feet and, with +feelings of the deepest sorrow, consigned him to the deep. + +For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the east, and, as +my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid progress towards my +destination. I could not take an observation, which I very much +regretted, as the captain's quadrant was in the cabin; but, from the day +of setting sail from the island of the savages, I had kept a dead +reckoning, and as I knew pretty well now how much lee-way the schooner +made, I hoped to hit the Coral Island without much difficulty. In this I +was the more confident that I knew its position on the chart (which I +understood was a very good one), and so had its correct bearings by +compass. + +As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had got into +the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting the top-sails. +This was a most arduous task, and my first attempts were complete +failures, owing, in a great degree, to my reprehensible ignorance of +mechanical forces. The first error I made was in applying my apparatus +of blocks and pulleys to a rope which was too weak, so that the very +first heave I made broke it in two, and sent me staggering against the +after-hatch, over which I tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, +tumbled down the companion ladder into the cabin. I was much bruised and +somewhat stunned by this untoward accident. However, I considered it +fortunate that I was not killed. In my next attempt I made sure of not +coming by a similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and fitted up +larger blocks and ropes. But although the principle on which I acted was +quite correct, the machinery was now so massive and heavy that the mere +friction and stiffness of the thick cordage prevented me from moving it +at all. Afterwards, however, I came to proportion things more correctly; +but I could not avoid reflecting at the time how much better it would +have been had I learned all this from observation and study, instead of +waiting till I was forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious +lessons of experience. + +After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it took me the +greater part of a day to hoist the main-top sail. As I could not steer +and work at this at the same time, I lashed the helm in such a position +that, with a little watching now and then, it kept the schooner in her +proper course. By this means I was enabled also to go about the deck and +down below for things that I wanted, as occasion required; also to cook +and eat my victuals. But I did not dare to trust to this plan during the +three hours of rest that I allowed myself at night, as the wind might +have shifted, in which case I should have been blown far out of my course +ere I awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to during those +three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails in such a position +as that by acting against each other, they would keep the ship +stationary. After my night's rest, therefore, I had only to make +allowance for the lee-way she had made, and so resume my course. + +Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall should come, +but I made the best provision I could in the circumstances, and concluded +that by letting go the weather-braces of the top-sails and the top-sail +halyards at the same time, I should thereby render these sails almost +powerless. Besides this, I proposed to myself to keep a sharp look-out +on the barometer in the cabin, and if I observed at any time a sudden +fall in it, I resolved that I would instantly set about my multiform +appliances for reducing sail, so as to avoid being taken at unawares. +Thus I sailed prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I +calculated I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the thought of +which my heart bounded with joyful expectation. + +The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a volume of +Captain Cook's voyages. This, I suppose, the pirate captain had brought +with him in order to guide him, and to furnish him with information +regarding the islands of these seas. I found this a most delightful book +indeed, and I not only obtained much interesting knowledge about the sea +in which I was sailing, but I had many of my own opinions, derived from +experience, corroborated; and not a few of them corrected. Besides the +reading of this charming book, and the daily routine of occupations, +nothing of particular note happened to me during this voyage, except +once, when on rising one night, after my three hours' nap, while it was +yet dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating in +what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often noticed the +beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but this far exceeded +anything of the sort I ever saw before. The whole sea appeared somewhat +like milk and was remarkably luminous. + +I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, brought some of +the water on board and took it down to the cabin to examine it; but no +sooner did I approach the light than the strange appearance disappeared, +and when I removed the cabin lamp the luminous light appeared again. I +was much puzzled with this, and took up a little of the water in the +hollow of my hand and then let it run off, when I found that the luminous +substance was left behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but +when I got there it was gone. I found, however, that when I went into +the dark my hand shone again; so I took the large glass of the ship's +telescope and examined my hand minutely, when I found that there were on +it one or two small patches of a clear, transparent substance like jelly, +which were so thin as to be almost invisible to the naked eye. Thus I +came to know that the beautiful phosphoric light, which I had so often +admired before, was caused by animals, for I had no doubt that these were +of the same kind as the medusae or jelly-fish which are seen in all parts +of the world. + +On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a nap into +which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I gazed around me. I +was surprised and delighted to see a large albatross soaring majestically +over the ship. I immediately took it into my head that this was the +albatross I had seen at Penguin Island. I had, of course, no good reason +for supposing this, but the idea occurred to me, I know not why, and I +cherished it, and regarded the bird with as much affection as if he had +been an old friend. He kept me company all that day and left me as night +fell. + +Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the helm, for I +had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for day-light, and peered +towards the horizon, where I thought I observed something like a black +cloud against the dark sky. Being always on the alert for squalls, I ran +to the bow. There could be no doubt it was a squall, and as I listened I +thought I heard the murmur of the coming gale. Instantly I began to work +might and main at my cumbrous tackle for shortening sail, and in the +course of an hour and a half had the most of it reduced,--the top-sail +yards down on the caps, the top-sails clewed up, the sheets hauled in, +the main and fore peaks lowered, and the flying-jib down. While thus +engaged the dawn advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance ahead +in the midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared for the +worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the bow. I now +heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a single ray of the rising +sun gleamed over the ocean I saw--what! could it be that I was +dreaming?--that magnificent breaker with its ceaseless roar!--that +mountain top!--yes, once more I beheld the Coral Island! + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + +The effect of a cannon-shot--A happy reunion of a somewhat moist +nature--Retrospects and explanations--An awful dive--New plans--The last +of the Coral Island. + +I almost fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled emotions that +filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my beautiful island. It was +still many miles away, but sufficiently near to enable me to trace +distinctly the well-remembered outlines of the two mountains. My first +impulse was to utter an exclamation of gratitude for being carried to my +former happy home in safety; my second, to jump up, clap my hands, shout, +and run up and down the deck, with no other object in view than that of +giving vent to my excited feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, +and spent nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to +get a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again. + +After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now regretted +having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of hoisting the main- +top sail again; but recollecting that it would take me full half a day to +accomplish, and that, at the present rate of sailing, two hours would +bring me to the island, I immediately dismissed the idea. + +The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish preparations for +arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I remembered that they were not in +the habit of rising before six, and, as it was now only three, I hoped to +arrive before they were awake. Moreover, I set about making ready to let +go the anchor, resolving in my own mind that, as I knew the depth of +water in the passage of the reef and within the lagoon, I would run the +schooner in and bring up opposite the bower. Fortunately the anchor was +hanging at the cat-head, otherwise I should never have been able to use +it. Now, I had only to cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own +weight. After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a thought struck me. +I went to the powder magazine, brought up a blank cartridge and loaded +the big brass gun, which, it will be remembered, was unhoused when we set +sail, and, as I had no means of housing it, there it had stood, bristling +alike at fair weather and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its +mouth well, and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust the +poker into the fire. + +{A terrible surprise: p352.jpg} + +All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was blowing, so that I was +now not more than quarter of a mile from the reef. I was soon at the +entrance, and, as the schooner glided quietly through, I glanced +affectionately at the huge breaker, as if it had been the same one I had +seen there when I bade adieu, as I feared for ever, to the island. On +coming opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm hard down. The schooner +came round with a rapid, graceful bend, and lost way just opposite the +bower. Running forward, I let go the anchor, caught up the red-hot +poker, applied it to the brass gun, and the mountains with a _bang_, such +as had only once before broke their slumbering echoes! + +Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to the bang +with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the bower, in scanty +costume, his eye-balls starting from his head with surprise and terror. +One gaze he gave, one yell, and then fled into the bushes like a wild +cat. The next moment Jack went through exactly the same performance, the +only difference being, that his movements were less like those of Jack-in- +the-box, though not less vigorous and rapid than those of Peterkin. + +"Hallo!" I shouted, almost mad with joy, "what, ho! Peterkin! Jack! +hallo! it's me!" + +My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted and turned round, +and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that they recognised my voice, +by both of them running at full speed towards the beach. I could no +longer contain myself. Throwing off my jacket, I jumped overboard at the +same moment that Jack bounded into the sea. In another moment we met in +deep water, clasped each other round the neck, and sank, as a matter of +course, to the bottom! We were well-nigh choked, and instantly struggled +to the surface, where Peterkin was spluttering about like a wounded duck, +laughing and crying by turns, and choking himself with salt water! + +It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, an +adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on the beach, +as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in our dripping +garments, and giving utterance to incoherent rhapsodies, mingled with +wild shouts. It can be more easily imagined than described, so I will +draw a curtain over this part of my history, and carry the reader forward +over an interval of three days. + +During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing but roast +pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, plums, potatoes, +and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack the terrible and +wonderful adventures I had gone through since we last met. After I had +finished the account, they made me go all over it again; and, when I had +concluded the second recital, I had to go over it again, while they +commented upon it piecemeal. They were much affected by what I told them +of the probable fate of Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook the +idea of the poor girl being converted into a _long pig_! As for Jack, he +clenched his teeth, and shook his fist towards the sea, saying at the +same time, that he was sorry he had not broken Tararo's head, and he only +hoped that one day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the bridge +of that chief's nose! After they had "pumped me dry," as Peterkin said, +I begged to be informed of what had happened to them during my long +absence, and particularly as to how they got out of the Diamond Cave. + +"Well, you must know," began Jack, "after you had dived out of the cave, +on the day you were taken away from us, we waited very patiently for half +an hour, not expecting you to return before the end of that time. Then +we began to upbraid you for staying so long, when you knew we would be +anxious; but when an hour passed, we became alarmed, and I resolved at +all hazards to dive out, and see what had become of you, although I felt +for poor Peterkin, because, as he truly said, 'If you never come back, +I'm shut up here for life.' However, I promised not to run any risk, and +he let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of him!" + +"I should just think it was!" interrupted Peterkin, looking at Jack over +the edge of a monstrous potato which he happened to be devouring at the +time. + +"Well," continued Jack, "you may guess my consternation when you did not +answer to my halloo. At first I imagined that the pirates must have +killed you, and left you in the bush, or thrown you into the sea; then it +occurred to me that this would have served no end of theirs, so I came to +the conclusion that they must have carried you away with them. As this +thought struck me, I observed the pirate schooner standing away to the +nor'ard, almost hull-down on the horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to +watch her as she slowly sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my +boy, that I shed more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I +verify believe, all my life before--" + +"Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting," said Peterkin; "surely you must be +mistaken in that; you've often told me that, when you were a baby, you +used to howl and roar from morning to--" + +"Hold your tongue, Peterkin," cried Jack. "Well, after the schooner had +disappeared, I dived back into the cave, much to Peterkin's relief, and +told him what I had seen. We sat down and had a long talk over this +matter, and then we agreed to make a regular, systematic search through +the woods, so as to make sure, at least, that you had not been killed. +But now we thought of the difficulty of getting out of the cave without +your help. Peterkin became dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; +and I must confess that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not +hope alone to take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him +in; and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with him +that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt water. However, +there was no help for it, and I endeavoured to calm his fears as well as +I could: 'for,' said I, 'you can't live here, Peterkin;' to which he +replied, 'Of course not, Jack, I can only die here, and, as that's not at +all desirable, you had better propose something.' So I suggested that he +should take a good long breath, and trust himself to me. + +"'Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut cloth, into which I could +shove my head, and tie it tight round my neck?' he asked, with a haggard +smile. 'It might let me get one breath under water!' + +"'No use,' said I; 'it would fill in a moment and suffocate you. I see +nothing for it, Peterkin, if you really can't keep your breath so long, +but to let me knock you down, and carry you out while in a state of +insensibility.' + +"But Peterkin didn't relish this idea. He seemed to fear that I could +not be able to measure the exact force of the blow, and might, on the one +hand, hit him so softly as to render a second or third blow necessary, +which would be very uncomfortable; or, on the other hand, give him such a +smash as would entirely spoil his figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the life +out of him altogether! At last I got him persuaded to try to hold his +breath, and commit himself to me; so he agreed, and down we went. But I +had not got him half way through, when he began to struggle and kick like +a wild bull, burst from my grasp, and hit against the roof of the tunnel. +I was therefore, obliged to force him violently back into the cave gain, +where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he had lost his presence +of mind, and--" + +"Nothing of the sort," cried Peterkin, indignantly, "I had only lost my +wind; and if I had not had presence of mind enough to kick as I did, I +should have bu'st in your arms!" + +"Well, well, so be it," resumed Jack, with a smile, "but the upshot of it +was, that we had to hold another consultation on the point, and I really +believe that, had it not been for a happy thought of mine, we should have +been consulting there yet." + +"I wish we had," again interrupted Peterkin with a sigh. "I'm sure, +Ralph, if I had thought that you were coming back again, I would +willingly have awaited your return for months, rather than have endured +the mental agony which I went through! But proceed." + +"The thought was this," continued Jack, "that I should tie Peterkin's +hands and feet with cords, and then lash him firmly to a stout pole about +five feet long, in order to render him quite powerless, and keep him +straight and stiff. You should have seen his face of horror, Ralph, when +I suggested this: but he came to see that it was his only chance, and +told me to set about it as fast as I could; 'for,' said he, 'this is no +jokin', Jack, _I_ can tell you, and the sooner it's done the better.' I +soon procured the cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to +the cave, and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, +to say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English mummy would +be, if there were such things, for he was as white as a dead man." + +"'Now,' said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, 'swim with me as near to the +edge of the hole as you can before you dive, then let me take a long +breath, and, as I sha'nt be able to speak after I've taken it, you'll +watch my face, and the moment you see me wink--dive! And oh!' he added, +earnestly, 'pray don't be long!' + +"I promised to pay the strictest attention to his wishes, and swam with +him to the outlet of the cave. Here I paused. 'Now then,' said I, 'pull +away at the wind, lad.'" + +Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help thinking of the +frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as big as the ox. Then I +looked into his face earnestly. Slap went the lid of his right eye; down +went my head, and up went my heels. We shot through the passage like an +arrow, and rose to the surface of the open sea before you could count +twenty! + +"Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, on reaching the +free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough to have been heard a mile +off, and then, the change in his feelings was so sudden and great, that +he did not wait till we landed, but began, tied up as he was, to shout +and sing for joy as I supported him with my left arm to the shore. +However, in the middle of a laugh that a hyaena might have envied, I let +him accidentally slip, which extinguished him in a moment. + +"After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our search for your +dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low our hearts sank as we set +off, day after day, to examine the valleys and mountain sides with the +utmost care. In about three weeks we completed the survey of the whole +island, and had at least the satisfaction of knowing that you had not +been killed. But it occurred to us that you might have been thrown into +the sea, so we examined the sands and the lagoon carefully, and +afterwards went all round the outer reef. One day, while we were upon +the reef, Peterkin espied a small dark object lying among the rocks, +which seemed to be quite different from the surrounding stones. We +hastened towards the spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking +out the head we discovered that it was gunpowder." + +"It was I who sent you that, Jack," said I, with a smile. + +"Fork out!" cried Peterkin, energetically, starting to his feet and +extending his open hand to Jack. "Down with the money, sir, else I'll +have you shut up for life in a debtor's prison the moment we return to +England!" + +"I'll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime," returned Jack, laughing, "so +sit down and be quiet. The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered this keg +of powder, Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a thousand pounds that +you had something to do with it, and I took him a bet of ten thousand +that you had not. + +"Peterkin was right then," said I, explaining how the thing had occurred. + +"Well, we found it very useful," continued Jack; "although some of it had +got a little damp; and we furbished up the old pistol, with which +Peterkin is a crack shot now. But, to continue. We did not find any +other vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up all hope of ever +seeing you again. After this the island became a dreary place to us, and +we began to long for a ship to heave in sight and take us off. But now +that you're back again, my dear fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful +as it used to do, and I love it as much as ever." + +"And now," continued Jack, "I have a great desire to visit some of the +other islands of the South Seas. Here we have a first-rate schooner at +our disposal, so I don't see what should hinder us." + +"Just the very thing I was going to propose," cried Peterkin; "I vote for +starting at once." + +"Well, then," said Jack, "it seems to me that we could not do better than +shape our course for the island on which Avatea lives, and endeavour to +persuade Tararo to let her marry the black fellow to whom she is engaged, +instead of making a long pig of her. If he has a spark of gratitude in +him he'll do it. Besides, having become champions for this girl once +before, it behoves us, as true knights, not to rest until we set her +free; at least, all the heroes in all the story-books I have ever read +would count it foul disgrace to leave such a work unfinished." + +"I'm sure I don't know, or care, what your knights in story-books would +do," said Peterkin, "but I'm certain that it would be capital fun, so I'm +your man whenever you want me." + +This plan of Jack's was quite in accordance with his romantic, impulsive +nature; and, having made up his mind to save this black girl, he could +not rest until the thing was commenced. + +"But there may be great danger in this attempt," he said, at the end of a +long consultation on the subject; "will you, lads, go with me in spite of +this?" + +"Go with you?" we repeated in the same breath. + +"Can you doubt it?" said I. + +"For a moment," added Peterkin. + +I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on this +enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit the island; +and as the schooner was well laden with stores of every kind for a long +cruise, we had little to do except to add to our abundant supply a +quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, taro, yams, plums, and potatoes, +chiefly with the view of carrying the fragrance of our dear island along +with us as long as we could. + +When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different familiar +spots where most of our time had been spent. We ascended the mountain +top, and gazed for the last time at the rich green foliage in the +valleys, the white sandy beach, the placid lagoon, and the barrier coral- +reef with its crested breakers. Then we descended to Spouting Cliff, and +looked down at the pale-green monster which we had made such fruitless +efforts to spear in days gone by. From this we hurried to the Water +Garden and took a last dive into its clear waters, and a last gambol +amongst its coral groves. I hurried out before my companions, and +dressed in haste, in order to have a long examination of my tank, which +Peterkin, in the fulness of his heart, had tended with the utmost care, +as being a vivid remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition;--the water as clear and pellucid as +crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the most brilliant hues; the red, +purple, yellow, green, and striped anemones fully expanded, and +stretching out their arms as if to welcome and embrace their former +master; the starfish, zoophytes, sea-pens, and other innumerable marine +insects, looking fresh and beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, +looking as wide awake, impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It +was indeed so lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow +myself to be torn away from it. + +Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few articles we +possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the broken telescope, the +pen-knife, the hook made from the brass ring, and the sail-needle, with +which we had landed on the island;--also, the long boots and the pistol, +besides several curious articles of costume which we had manufactured +from time to time. + +These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having carved our +names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:-- + + JACK MARTIN, + RALPH ROVER, + PETERKIN GAY, + +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then hoisted on +board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation cost us great labour +and much time, as the anchor was so heavy that we could not move it +without the aid of my complex machinery of blocks and pulleys. A steady +breeze was blowing off shore when we set sail, at a little before sunset. +It swept us quickly past the reef and out to sea. The shore grew rapidly +more indistinct as the shades of evening fell, while our clipper bark +bounded lightly over the waves. Slowly the mountain top sank on the +horizon, until it became a mere speck. In another moment the sun and the +Coral Island sank together into the broad bosom of the Pacific. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + +The voyage--The island, and a consultation in which danger is scouted as +a thing unworthy of consideration--Rats and cats--The native +teacher--Awful revelations--Wonderful effects of Christianity. + +Our voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and prosperous. +The breeze continued generally fair, and at all times enabled us to lie +our course; for being, as I have said before, clipper-built, the pirate +schooner could lie very close to the wind, and made little lee-way. We +had no difficulty now in managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and +powerful, while Peterkin was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were +a very insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had proposed +to us to make such a voyage in it before we had been forced to go through +so many hardships from necessity, we would have turned away with pity +from the individual making such proposal as from a madman. I pondered +this a good deal, and at last concluded that men do not know how much +they are capable of doing till they try, and that we should never give +way to despair in any undertaking, however difficult it may seem:--always +supposing, however, that our cause is a good one, and that we can ask the +divine blessing on it. + +Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in some +things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth arrangement of +ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor's eye, a very lumbering and +clumsy appearance. But I will not drag my reader through the details of +this voyage. Suffice it to say, that, after an agreeable sail of about +three weeks, we arrived off the island of Mango, which I recognised at +once from the description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it +during one of our conversations. + +As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and held a +council of war. + +"Now, boys," said Jack, as we seated ourselves beside him on the cabin +sky-light, "before we go farther in this business, we must go over the +pros and cons of it; for, although you have so generously consented to +stick by me through thick and thin, it would be unfair did I not see that +you thoroughly understand the danger of what we are about to attempt." + +"Oh! bother the danger," cried Peterkin; "I wonder to hear _you_, Jack, +talk of danger. When a fellow begins to talk about it, he'll soon come +to magnify it to such a degree that he'll not be fit to face it when it +comes, no more than a suckin' baby!" + +"Nay, Peterkin," replied Jack, gravely, "I won't be jested out of it. I +grant you, that, when we've once resolved to act, and have made up our +minds what to do, we should think no more of danger. But, before we have +so resolved, it behoves us to look at it straight in the face, and +examine into it, and walk round it; for if we flinch at a distant view, +we're sure to run away when the danger is near. Now, I understand from +you, Ralph, that the island is inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out +cannibals, whose principal law is--'Might is right, and the weakest goes +to the wall?'" + +"Yes," said I, "so Bill gave me to understand. He told me, however, +that, at the southern side of it, the missionaries had obtained a footing +amongst an insignificant tribe. A native teacher had been sent there by +the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in persuading the chief at that part to +embrace Christianity. But instead of that being of any advantage to our +enterprise, it seems the very reverse; for the chief Tararo is a +determined heathen, and persecutes the Christians,--who are far too weak +in numbers to offer any resistance,--and looks with dislike upon all +white men, whom he regards as propagators of the new faith." + +"'Tis a pity," said Jack, "that the Christian tribe is so small, for we +shall scarcely be safe under their protection, I fear. If Tararo takes +it into his head to wish for our vessel, or to kill ourselves, he could +take us from them by force. You say that the native missionary talks +English?" + +"So I believe." + +"Then, what I propose is this," said Jack: "We will run round to the +south side of the island, and cut anchor off the Christian village. We +are too far away just now to have been descried by any of the savages, so +we shall get there unobserved, and have time to arrange our plans before +the heathen tribes know of our presence. But, in doing this, we run the +risk of being captured by the ill-disposed tribes, and being very ill +used, if not--a--" + +"Roasted alive and eaten," cried Peterkin. "Come, out with it, Jack; +according to your own showing, it's well to look the danger straight in +the face!" + +"Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you prepared, then, to +take your chance of that?" + +"I've been prepared and had my mind made up long ago," cried Peterkin, +swaggering about the deck with his hands thrust into his breeches' +pockets. "The fact is, Jack, I don't believe that Tararo will be so +ungrateful as to eat us; and I'm quite sure that he'll be too happy to +grant us whatever we ask: so the sooner we go in and win the better." + +Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage gratitude, as the +sequel will show. + +The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a long run to +the south'ard, we put about and beat up for the south side of Mango, +where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to off the coral reef. Here we +awaited the arrival of a canoe, which immediately put off on our rounding +to. When it arrived, a mild-looking native, of apparently forty years of +age, came on board, and, taking off his straw hat, made us a low bow. He +was clad in a respectable suit of European clothes; and the first words +he uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and shook hands with him, were,-- + +"Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at Mango--you are heartily +welcome." + +After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, "You must be the native +missionary teacher of whom I have heard--are you not?" + +"I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord Jesus at this +station." + +"You're the very man I want to see, then," replied Jack; "that's lucky. +Come down to the cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. I wish +particularly to speak with you. My men there" (pointing to Peterkin and +me) "will look after your people." + +"Thank you," said the teacher, as he followed Jack to the cabin, "I do +not drink wine or any strong drink." + +"Oh! then, there's lots of water, and you can have biscuit." + +"Now, 'pon my word, that's cool!" said Peterkin; "his _men_, forsooth! +Well, since we are to be men, we may as well come it as strong over these +black chaps as we can. Hallo, there!" he cried to the half dozen of +natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in wonder at all they saw, +"here's for you;" and he handed them a tray of broken biscuit and a can +of water. Then, thrusting his hands into his pockets, he walked up and +down the deck with an enormous swagger, whistling vociferously. + +In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and the latter, +bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe and paddled to the +shore. When he was gone, Peterkin stepped up to Jack, and, touching his +cap, said,-- + +"Well, captain, have you any communications to make to your _men_?" + +"Yes," cried Jack; "ready about, mind the helm and clew up your tongue, +while I con the schooner through the passage in the reef. The teacher, +who seems a first-rate fellow, says it's quite deep, and good anchorage +within the lagoon close to the shore." + +While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under a light +breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the island, living +amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a strong desire to join the +Christians, but Tararo would not let her, and kept her constantly in +close confinement. + +"Moreover," continued Jack, "I find that she belongs to one of the Samoan +Islands, where Christianity had been introduced long before her capture +by the heathens of a neighbouring island; and the very day after she was +taken, she was to have joined the church which had been planted there by +that excellent body, the London Missionary Society. The teacher tells +me, too, that the poor girl has fallen in love with a Christian chief, +who lives on an island some fifty miles or so to the south of this one, +and that she is meditating a desperate attempt at escape. So, you see, +we have come in the nick of time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow +whom you heard of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, the +heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there's to be a battle +fought the day after to-morrow, in which the principal leader is Tararo; +so that we'll not be able to commence our negotiations with the rascally +chief till the day after." + +The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at the head of +a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every description peculiar +to the tropics rose in the richest luxuriance to the summit of a hilly +ridge, which was the line of demarcation between the possessions of the +Christians and those of the neighbouring heathen chief. + +The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, stretching +in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. The cottages stood +several hundred yards from the beach, and were protected from the glare +of the sea by the rich foliage of rows of large Barringtonia and other +trees, which girt the shore. The village was about a mile in length, and +perfectly straight, with a wide road down the middle, on either side of +which were rows of the tufted-topped ti tree, whose delicate and +beautiful blossoms, hanging beneath their plume-crested tops, added +richness to the scene. The cottages of the natives were built beneath +these trees, and were kept in the most excellent order, each having a +little garden in front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks +were covered with black and white pebbles. + +Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly with lamp +black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red ochre, which +contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime that covered the +walls. On a prominent position stood a handsome church, which was quite +a curiosity in its way. It was a hundred feet long by fifty broad, and +was seated throughout to accommodate upwards of two thousand persons. It +had six large folding doors and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, +although a large and substantial edifice, it had been built, we were told +by the teacher, in the space of two months! There was not a single iron +nail in the fabric, and the natives had constructed it chiefly with their +stone and bone axes and other tools, having only one or two axes or tools +of European manufacture. Everything around this beautiful spot wore an +aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we dropped our anchor within a +stone's cast of the substantial coral wharf, I could not avoid +contrasting it with the wretched village of Emo, where I had witnessed so +many frightful scenes. When the teacher afterwards told me that the +people of this tribe had become converts only a year previous to our +arrival, and that they had been living before that in the practice of the +most bloody system of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, +"What a convincing proof that Christianity is of God!" + +On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm welcome by +the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a native, clothed in a +simple European gown and straw bonnet. The shore was lined with hundreds +of natives, whose persons were all more or less clothed with native +cloth. Some of the men had on a kind of poncho formed of this cloth, +their legs being uncovered. Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and +no upper garment except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of the +dresses, both of women and men, were grotesque enough, being very bad +imitations of the European garb; but all wore a dress of some sort or +other. They seemed very glad to see us, and crowded round us as the +teacher led the way to his dwelling, where we were entertained, in the +most sumptuous manner, on baked pig and all the varieties of fruits and +vegetables that the island produced. We were much annoyed, however, by +the rats: they seemed to run about the house like domestic animals. As +we sat at table, one of them peeped up at us over the edge of the cloth, +close to Peterkin's elbow, who floored it with a blow on the snout from +his knife, exclaiming as he did so-- + +"I say, Mister Teacher, why don't you set traps for these brutes?--surely +you are not fond of them!" + +"No," replied the teacher, with a smile; "we would be glad to get rid of +them if we could; but if we were to trap all the rats on the island, it +would occupy our whole time." + +"Are they, then, so numerous?" inquired Jack. + +"They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the north side eat them, +and think them very sweet. So did my people formerly; but they do not +eat so many now, because the missionary who was last here expressed +disgust at it. The poor people asked if it was wrong to eat rats; and he +told them that it was certainly not wrong, but that the people of England +would be much disgusted were they asked to eat rats." + +We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man when we +were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their numbers, for the +rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during our meal, two men were +stationed at the table to keep them off! + +"What a pity you have no cats," said Peterkin, as he aimed a blow at +another reckless intruder, and missed it. + +"We would, indeed, be glad to have a few," rejoined the teacher, "but +they are difficult to be got. The hogs, we find, are very good +rat-killers, but they do not seem to be able to keep the numbers down. I +have heard that they are better than cats." + +As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was wrinkled with a +smile of merriment. Observing that I had noticed it, he said:-- + +"I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the first cat that was +taken to Raratonga. This is one of the stations of the London Missionary +Society. It, like our own, is infested with rats, and a cat was brought +at last to the island. It was a large black one. On being turned loose, +instead of being content to stay among men, the cat took to the +mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes paying visits during the +night to the houses of the natives; some of whom, living at a distance +from the settlement, had not heard of the cat's arrival, and were +dreadfully frightened in consequence, calling it a 'monster of the deep,' +and flying in terror away from it. One night the cat, feeling a desire +for company, I suppose, took its way to the house of a chief, who had +recently been converted to Christianity, and had begun to learn to read +and pray. The chief's wife, who was sitting awake at his side while he +slept, beheld with horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard +with surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, she awoke +her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his old religion, and +burning his god, who, she declared, was now come to be avenged of them. +'Get up and pray! get up and pray!' she cried. The chief arose, and, on +opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring lights, and heard the same +ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme urgency of the case, he +commenced, with all possible vehemence, to vociferate the alphabet, as a +prayer to God to deliver them from the vengeance of Satan! On hearing +this, the cat, as much alarmed as themselves, fled precipitately away, +leaving the chief and his wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy +of their prayer." + +We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher related in +English so good, that we certainly could not have supposed him a native +but for the colour of his face and the foreign accent in his tone. Next +day we walked out with this interesting man, and were much entertained +and instructed by his conversation, as we rambled through the cool shady +groves of bananas, citrons, limes, and other trees, or sauntered among +the cottages of the natives, and watched them while they laboured +diligently in the taro beds, or manufactured the tapa or native cloth. To +some of these Jack put questions through the medium of the missionary; +and the replies were such as to surprise us at the extent of their +knowledge. Indeed, Peterkin very truly remarked that "they seemed to +know a considerable deal more than Jack himself!" + +Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained was the +following, in regard to coral formations:-- + +"The islands of the Pacific," said our friend, "are of three different +kinds or classes. Those of the first class are volcanic, mountainous, +and wild; some shooting their jagged peaks into the clouds at an +elevation of ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of the second class +are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height from one hundred to five +hundred feet. The hills on these are not so wild or broken as those of +the first class, but are richly clothed with vegetation, and very +beautiful. I have no doubt that the Coral Island on which you were +wrecked was one of this class. They are supposed to have been upheaved +from the bottom of the sea by volcanic agency, but they are not +themselves volcanic in their nature, neither are they of coral formation. +Those of the third class are the low coralline islands usually having +lagoons of water in their midst; they are very numerous. + +"As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are formed; there are +various opinions on this point. I will give you what seems to me the +most probable theory,--a theory, I may add, which is held by some of the +good and scientific missionaries. It is well known that there is much +lime in salt water; it is also known that coral is composed of lime. It +is supposed that the polypes, or coral insects, have the power of +attracting this lime to their bodies; and with this material they build +their little cells or habitations. They choose the summit of a volcano, +or the top of a submarine mountain, as a foundation on which to build; +for it is found that they never work at any great depth below the +surface. On this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, +reach the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the top +sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus forming the +coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the central island; after +that the insects within the lagoon cease working. When the surface of +the water is reached, these myriads of wonderful creatures die. Then +birds visit the spot, and seeds are thus conveyed thither, which take +root, and spring up, and flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline +islets of which you have seen so many in these seas. The reefs round the +large islands are formed in a similar manner. When we consider," added +the missionary, "the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we are +filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient king to +exclaim, 'How manifold, O God, are thy works! in wisdom thou hast made +them all.'" + +We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, and felt +not a little gratified to find that the opinions which Jack and I had +been led to form from personal observation on our Coral Island were thus +to a great extent corroborated. + +The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: "When missionaries +were first sent here, three years ago, a small vessel brought them; and +the chief, who is now dead, promised to treat well the two native +teachers who were left with their wives on the island. But scarcely had +the boat which landed them returned to the ship, than the natives began +to maltreat their guests, taking away all they possessed, and offering +them further violence, so that, when the boat was sent in haste to fetch +them away, the clothes of both men and women were torn nearly off their +backs. + +"Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and I, being in her, +volunteered to land alone, without any goods whatever; begging that my +wife might be brought to me the following year,--that is, _this_ year; +and, as you see, she is with me. But the surf was so high that the boat +could not land me; so with nothing on but my trousers and shirt, and with +a few catechisms and a Bible, besides some portions of the Scripture +translated into the Mango tongue, I sprang into the sea, and swam ashore +on the crest of a breaker. I was instantly dragged up the beach by the +natives; who, on finding I had nothing worth having upon me, let me +alone. I then made signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which +they did. At fist the natives listened to me in silence, but laughed at +what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed Saviour Jesus +Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me ill sometimes; but I +persevered, and continued to dwell among them, and dispute, and exhort +them to give up their sinful ways of life, burn their idols, and come to +Jesus. + +"About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief was dead. He was +the father of the present chief, who is now a most consistent member of +the church. It is a custom here that, when a chief dies, his wives are +strangled and buried with him. Knowing this, I hastened to his house to +endeavour to prevent such cruelty if possible. When I arrived, I found +two of the wives had already been killed, while another was in the act of +being strangled. I pleaded hard for her, but it was too late; she was +already dead. I then entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, +after much hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she termed +it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which was +accordingly done. + +"All this time the chief's son was walking up and down before his +father's house with a brow black as thunder. When he entered, I went in +with him, and found, to my surprise, that his father was not dead! The +old man was sitting on a mat in a corner, with an expression of placid +resignation on his face. + +"'Why,' said I, 'have you strangled your father's wives before he is +dead?' + +"To this the son replied, 'He is dead. That is no longer my father. He +is as good as dead now. He is to be _buried alive_.' + +"I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among the Feejee +islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or infirm, the heir to +the chieftainship has a right to depose his father; in which case he is +considered as dead, and is buried alive. The young chief was now about +to follow this custom, and, despite my earnest entreaties and pleadings, +the old chief was buried that day before my eyes in the same grave with +his four strangled wives! Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, and I +prayed to God to open the hearts of these poor creatures, as he had +already opened mine, and pour into them the light and the love of the +gospel of Jesus. My prayer was answered very soon. A week afterwards, +the son, who was now chief of the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on +his shoulders, and groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my +feet, he desired me to burn it! + +"You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I sprang up and embraced +him, while I shed tears of joy. Then we made a fire, and burned the god +to ashes, amid an immense concourse of the people, who seemed terrified +at what was being done, and shrank back when we burned the god, expecting +some signal vengeance to be taken upon us; but seeing that nothing +happened, they changed their minds, and thought that our God must be the +true one after all. From that time the mission prospered steadily, and +now, while there is not a single man in the tribe who has not burned his +household gods, and become a convert to Christianity, there are not a +few, I hope, who are true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as +brands from the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will +not tell you more of our progress at this time, but you see," he said, +waving his hand around him, "the village and the church did not exist a +year ago!" + +We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could not help +again in my heart praying God to prosper those missionary societies that +send such inestimable blessings to these islands of dark and bloody +idolatry. The teacher also added that the other tribes were very +indignant at this one for having burned its gods, and threatened to +destroy it altogether, but they had done nothing yet; "and if they +should," said the teacher, "the Lord is on our side; of whom shall we be +afraid?" + +"Have the missionaries many stations in these seas?" inquired Jack. + +"Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a great many in the Tahiti +group, and other islands in that quarter. Then the Wesleyans have the +Feejee Islands all to themselves, and the Americans have many stations in +other groups. But still, my friend, there are hundreds of islands here +the natives of which have never heard of Jesus, or the good word of God, +or the Holy Spirit; and thousands are living and dying in the practice of +those terrible sins and bloody murders of which you have already heard. I +trust, my friends," he added, looking earnestly into our faces, "I trust +that if you ever return to England, you will tell your Christian friends +that the horrors which they hear of in regard to these islands are +_literally true_, and that when they have heard the worst, the '_half has +not been told them_;' for there are perpetrated here foul deeds of +darkness of which man may not speak. You may also tell them," he said, +looking around with a smile, while a tear of gratitude trembled in his +eye and rolled down his coal-black cheek,--"tell them of the blessings +that the gospel has wrought _here_!" + +We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his request. On +returning towards the village, about noon, we remarked on the beautiful +whiteness of the cottages. + +"That is owing to the lime with which they are plastered," said the +teacher. "When the natives were converted, as I have described, I set +them to work to build cottages for themselves, and also this handsome +church which you see. When the framework and other parts of the houses +were up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the sea. They brought +immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, and, piling the coral +above it, set it on fire. + +"'Look! look!' cried the poor people, in amazement; 'what wonderful +people the Christians are! He is roasting stones. We shall not need +taro or bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!' + +"But their surprise was still greater when the coral was reduced to a +fine soft white powder. They immediately set up a great shout, and, +mingling the lime with water, rubbed their faces and their bodies all +over with it, and ran through the village screaming with delight. They +were also much surprised at another thing they saw me do. I wished to +make some household furniture, and constructed a turning-lathe to assist +me. The first thing that I turned was the leg of a sofa; which was no +sooner finished than the chief seized it with wonder and delight, and ran +through the village exhibiting it to the people, who looked upon it with +great admiration. The chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round +his neck as an ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen it +before he became a Christian he would have made it his god!" + +As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his door. Saying that +he had business to attend to, he left us to amuse ourselves as we best +could. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, turning abruptly towards us, and buttoning up his +jacket as he spoke, "I'm off to see the battle. I've no particular +fondness for seein' blood-shed, but I must find out the nature o' these +fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so that I may be able to +speak of it again, if need be, authoritatively. It's only six miles off, +and we don't run much more risk than that of getting a rap with a stray +stone or an over-shot arrow. Will you go?" + +"To be sure we will," said Peterkin. + +"If they chance to see us we'll cut and run for it," added Jack. + +"Dear me!" cried Peterkin,--"_you_ run! thought you would scorn to run +from any one." + +"So I would, if it were my duty to fight," returned Jack, coolly; "but as +I don't want to fight, and don't intend to fight, if they offer to attack +us I'll run away like the veriest coward that ever went by the name of +Peterkin. So come along." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + +A strange and bloody battle--The lion bearded in his den--Frightful +scenes of cruelty, and fears for the future. + +We had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot on which +the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two hours reached it. +The summit of a bare hill was the place chosen; for, unlike most of the +other islanders, who are addicted to bush-fighting, those of Mango are in +the habit of meeting on open ground. We arrived before the two parties +had commenced the deadly struggle, and, creeping as close up as we dared +among the rocks, we lay and watched them. + +The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in rank four +deep. Those in the first row were armed with long spears; the second, +with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third row was composed of young +men with slings; and the fourth consisted of women, who carried baskets +of stones for the slingers, and clubs and spears with which to supply the +warriors. Soon after we arrived, the attack was made with great fury. +There was no science displayed. The two bodies of savages rushed +headlong upon each other and engaged in a general _melee_, and a more +dreadful set of men I have never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made +of various substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as possible; and +as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, shouted, yelled, and +dashed each other to the ground, I thought I had never seen men look so +like demons before. + +We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed to be +perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands in order to +defend them. One stout young women we saw, whose husband was hard +pressed and about to be overcome: she lifted a large stone, and throwing +it at his opponent's head, felled him to the earth. But the battle did +not last long. The band most distant from us gave way and were routed, +leaving eighteen of their comrades dead upon the field. These the +victors brained as they lay; and putting some of their brains on leaves +went off with them, we were afterwards informed, to their temples, to +present them to their gods as an earnest of the human victims who were +soon to be brought there. + +We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the deepest +sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just witnessed. + +Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we made +preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the teacher endeavoured +to dissuade us. + +"You do not know," said he, turning to Jack, "the danger you run in +venturing amongst these ferocious savages. I feel much pity for poor +Avatea; but you are not likely to succeed in saving her, and you may die +in the attempt." + +"Well," said Jack, quietly, "I am not afraid to die in a good cause." + +The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and after a little +further conversation agreed to accompany us as interpreter; saying that, +although Tararo was unfriendly to him, he had hitherto treated him with +respect. + +We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail round the +island and drop anchor opposite the heathen village. We manned her with +natives, and hoped to overawe the savages by displaying our brass gun to +advantage. The teacher soon after came on board, and setting our sails +we put to sea. In two hours more we made the cliffs reverberate with the +crash of the big gun, which we fired by way of salute, while we ran the +British ensign up to the peak and cast anchor. The commotion on shore +showed us that we had struck terror into the hearts of the natives; but +seeing that we did not offer to molest them, a canoe at length put off +and paddled cautiously towards us. The teacher showed himself, and +explaining that we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, +desired the native to go and tell him to come on board. + +We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. During this time +the native teacher conversed with us again, and told us many things +concerning the success of the gospel among those islands; and perceiving +that we were by no means so much gratified as we ought to have been at +the hearing of such good news, he pressed us more closely in regard to +our personal interest in religion, and exhorted us to consider that our +souls were certainly in as great danger as those of the wretched heathen +whom we pitied so much, if we had not already found salvation in Jesus +Christ. "Nay, further," he added, "if such be your unhappy case, you +are, in the sight of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my +young friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, and +do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have been brought +up in the light of the blessed gospel and call yourselves Christians. +These poor savages are indeed the enemies of our Lord; but you, if ye be +not true believers, are traitors!" + +I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher spoke in this +earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. Peterkin, too, did not +seem to like it, and I thought would willingly have escaped; but Jack +seemed deeply impressed, and wore an anxious expression on his naturally +grave countenance, while he assented to the teacher's remarks and put to +him many earnest questions. Meanwhile the natives who composed our crew, +having nothing particular to do, had squatted down on the deck and taken +out their little books containing the translated portions of the New +Testament, along with hymns and spelling-books, and were now busily +engaged, some vociferating the alphabet, others learning prayers off by +heart, while a few sang hymns,--all of them being utterly unmindful of +our presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon afterwards they all +engaged in a prayer which was afterwards translated to us, and proved to +be a petition for the success of our undertaking and for the conversion +of the heathen. + +While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and several savages +leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the teacher and informed him that +Tararo could not come on board that day, being busy with some religious +ceremonies before the gods, which could on no account be postponed. He +was also engaged with a friendly chief who was about to take his +departure from the island, and therefore begged that the teacher and his +friends would land and pay a visit to him. To this the teacher returned +answer that we would land immediately. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, as we were about to step into our little boat, +"I'm not going to take any weapons with me, and I recommend you to take +none either. We are altogether in the power of these savages, and the +utmost we could do, if they were to attack us, would be to kill a few of +them before we were ourselves overpowered. I think that our only chance +of success lies in mild measures. Don't you think so?" + +To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down a huge +bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair of enormous +horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe the natives! We then +jumped into our boat and rowed ashore. + +On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked savages, who +shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house or shed where a baked +pig and a variety of vegetables were prepared for us. Having partaken of +these, the teacher begged to be conducted to the chief; but there seemed +some hesitation, and after some consultation among themselves, one of the +men stood forward and spoke to the teacher. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack when the savage had concluded. + +"He says that the chief is just going to the temple of his god and cannot +see us yet; so we must be patient, my friend." + +"Well," cried Jack, rising; "if he won't come to see me, I'll e'en go and +see him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their proceedings at +this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, friend?" + +"I cannot," said the teacher, shaking his head; "I must not go to the +heathen temples and witness their inhuman rites, except for the purpose +of condemning their wickedness and folly." + +"Very good," returned Jack; "then I'll go alone, for I cannot condemn +their doings till I have seen them." + +Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him through +the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind the village, on +the top of which stood the Bure, or temple, under the dark shade of a +group of iron-wood trees. As we went through the village, I was again +led to contrast the rude huts and sheds, and their almost naked savage- +looking inhabitants, with the natives of the Christian village, who, to +use the teacher's scriptural expression, were now "clothed and in their +right mind." + +As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we were arrested +by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the rear. Drawing aside +into the bushes we awaited their coming up, and as they drew near we +observed that it was a procession of the natives, many of whom were +dancing and gesticulating in the most frantic manner. They had an +exceedingly hideous aspect, owing to the black, red, and yellow paints +with which their faces and naked bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of +these came a band of men carrying three or four planks, on which were +seated in rows upwards of a dozen men. I shuddered involuntarily as I +recollected the sacrifice of human victims at the island of Emo, and +turned with a look of fear to Jack as I said,-- + +"Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are going to commit some of +their cruel practices on these wretched men. We had better not go to the +temple. We shall only be horrified without being able to do any good, +for I fear they are going to kill them." + +Jack's face wore an expression of deep compassion as he said, in a low +voice, "No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of these poor fellows are over +long ago." + +I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, who were now +quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they were all dead. They +were tied firmly with ropes in a sitting posture on the planks, and +seemed, as they bent their sightless eye-balls and grinning mouths over +the dancing crew below, as if they were laughing in ghastly mockery at +the utter inability of their enemies to hurt them now. These, we +discovered afterwards, were the men who had been slain in the battle of +the previous day, and were now on their way to be first presented to the +gods, and then eaten. Behind these came two men leading between them a +third, whose hands were pinioned behind his back. He walked with a firm +step, and wore a look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him +along; so that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to +receive some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and children, with +whom we mingled and followed to the temple. + +Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall circular +building, open at one side. Around it were strewn heaps of human bones +and skulls. At a table inside sat the priest, an elderly man, with a +long gray beard. He was seated on a stool, and before him lay several +knives, made of wood, bone, and splinters of bamboo, with which he +performed his office of dissecting dead bodies. Farther in lay a variety +of articles that had been dedicated to the god, and among them were many +spears and clubs. I observed among the latter some with human teeth +sticking in them, where the victims had been clubbed in their mouths. + +Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with vermilion and +soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a man, called a "dan-vosa" +(orator), advanced, and, laying his hands on their heads, began to chide +them, apparently, in a low bantering tone. What he said we knew not, +but, as he went on, he waxed warm, and at last shouted to them at the top +of his lungs, and finally finished by kicking the bodies over and running +away, amid the shouts and laughter of the people, who now rushed forward. +Seizing the bodies by a leg, or an arm, or by the hair of the head, they +dragged them over stumps and stones and through sloughs, until they were +exhausted. The bodies were then brought back to the temple and dissected +by the priest, after which they were taken out to be baked. + +Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones were heated +red hot. When ready these were spread out on the ground, and a thick +coating of leaves strewn over them to slack the heat. On this "lovo," or +oven, the bodies were then placed, covered over, and left to bake. + +The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring hill or +mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house lying ready to be +erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated by curiosity, we staggered +after them mechanically, scarce knowing where we were going or what we +did, and feeling a sort of impression that all we saw was a dreadful +dream. + +Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a certain spot. +We pressed forward and obtained a sight of what they were doing. A large +wooden beam or post lay on the ground, beside the other parts of the +frame-work of the house, and close to the end of it was a hole about +seven feet deep and upwards of two feet wide. While we looked, the man +whom we had before observed with his hands pinioned, was carried into the +circle. His hands were now free, but his legs were tightly strapped +together. The post of the house was then placed in the hole, and the man +put in beside it. His head was a good way below the surface of the hole, +and his arms were clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until +all was covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards told, +was a _ceremony_ usually performed at the dedication of a new temple, or +the erection of a chief's house! + +"Come, come," cried Jack, on beholding this horrible tragedy, "we have +seen enough, enough, far more than enough! Let us go." + +Jack's face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we hurried back to rejoin +the teacher, and I have no doubt that he felt terrible anxiety when he +considered the number and ferocity of the savages, and the weakness of +the few arms which were ready indeed to essay, but impotent to effect, +Avatea's deliverance from these ruthless men. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with its +consequences--Plans of escape, and heroic resolves. + +When we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what had passed, +he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but we had not sat long +in conversation, when we were interrupted by the arrival of Tararo on the +beach, accompanied by a number of followers bearing baskets of vegetables +and fruits on their heads. + +We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our interpreter, much +pleasure in seeing us. + +"And what is it that my friends wish to say to me?" he inquired. + +The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be spared. + +"Tell him," said Jack, "that I consider that I have a right to ask this +of him, having not only saved the girl's life, but the lives of his own +people also; and say that I wish her to be allowed to follow her own +wishes, and join the Christians." + +While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and we could +see plainly that our request met with no favourable reception. He +replied with considerable energy, and at some length. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack. + +"I regret to say that he will not listen to the proposal. He says he has +pledged his word to his friend that the girl shall be sent to him, and a +deputy is even now on this island awaiting the fulfilment of the pledge." + +Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. "Tell Tararo," he exclaimed with +flashing eye, "that if he does not grant my demand, it will be worse for +him. Say I have a big gun on board my schooner that will blow his +village into the sea, if he does not give up the girl." + +"Nay, my friend," said the teacher, gently, "I will not tell him that; we +must overcome evil with good.'" + +"What does my friend say?" inquired the chief, who seemed nettled by +Jack's looks of defiance. + +"He is displeased," replied the teacher. + +Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked towards the men +who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who had now emptied the whole +on the beach in an enormous pile. + +"What are they doing there?" I inquired. + +"I think that they are laying out a gift which they intend to present to +some one," said the teacher. + +At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl between +them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and vegetables, placed her on +the top of it. We started with surprise and fear, for in the young +female before us we recognised the Samoan girl, Avatea! + +We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming fears. + +"Oh! my dear young friend," whispered the teacher, in a voice of deep +emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, "she is to be made a sacrifice +even now!" + +"Is she?" cried Jack, with a vehement shout, spurning the teacher aside, +and dashing over two natives who stood in his way, while he rushed +towards the heap, sprang up its side, and seized Avatea by the arm. In +another moment he dragged her down, placed her back to a large tree, and, +wrenching a war-club from the hand of a native who seemed powerless and +petrified with surprise, whirled it above his head, and yelled, rather +than shouted, while his face blazed with fury, "Come on, the whole nation +of you, an ye like it, and do your worst!" + +It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; for every +savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with club and spear, and, +doubtless, would speedily have poured out his brave blood on the sod, had +not the teacher rushed in between them, and, raising his voice to its +utmost, cried.-- + +"Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to judge in this matter. +It is for Tararo, the chief, to say whether or not the young man shall +live or die." + +The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the gratifying +acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the teacher, or some +lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack's former aid in time of need, +that influenced Tararo, but he stepped forward, and, waving his hand, +said to his people,--"Desist. The young man's life is mine." Then, +turning to Jack, he said, "You have forfeited your liberty and life to +me. Submit yourself, for we are more numerous than the sand upon the +shore. You are but one; why should you die?" + +"Villain!" exclaimed Jack, passionately, "I may die, but, assuredly, I +shall not perish alone. I will not submit until you promise that this +girl shall not be injured." + +"You are very bold," replied the chief, haughtily, "but very foolish. Yet +I will say that Avatea shall not be sent away, at least for three days." + +"You had better accept these terms," whispered the teacher, entreatingly. +"If you persist in this mad defiance, you will be slain, and Avatea will +be lost. Three days are worth having." + +Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing it moodily +to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and hung down his head in +silence. + +Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher to say that +he did not forget his former services, and, therefore, would leave him +free as to his person, but that the schooner would be detained till he +had further considered the matter. + +While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to where Avatea +was standing as possible, without creating suspicion, and whispered to +her a few words in the native language. Avatea, who, during the whole of +the foregoing scene, had stood leaning against the tree perfectly +passive, and seemingly quite uninterested in all that was going on, +replied by a single rapid glance of her dark eye, which was instantly +cast down again on the ground at her feet. + +Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the teacher +on board the schooner. + +On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack threw +himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the teacher +seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his shoulder, +said,-- + +"Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God has given us three days, +and we must use the means that are in our power to free this poor girl +from slavery. We must not sit in idle disappointment, we must act"-- + +"Act!" cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing back his hair wildly; "it +is mockery to balk of acting when one is bound hand and foot. How can I +act? I cannot fight a whole nation of savages single-handed. Yes," he +said, with a bitter smile, "I can fight them, but I cannot conquer them, +or save Avatea." + +"Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just now. You cannot +expect that blessing which alone can insure success, unless you are more +submissive. I will tell you my plans if you will listen." + +"Listen!" cried Jack, eagerly, "of course I will, my good fellow; I did +not know you had any plans. Out with them. I only hope you will show me +how I can get the girl on board of this schooner, and I'd up anchor and +away in no time. But proceed with your plans." + +The teacher smiled sadly: "Ah! my friend, if one fathom of your anchor +chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a thousand warriors would be +standing on your deck. No, no, that could not be done. Even now, your +ship would be taken from you were it not that Tararo has some feeling of +gratitude toward you. But I know Tararo well. He is a man of falsehood, +as all the unconverted savages are. The chief to whom he has promised +this girl is very powerful, and Tararo _must_ fulfil his promise. He has +told you that he would do nothing to the girl for three days; but that is +because the party who are to take her away will not be ready to start for +three days. Still, as he might have made you a prisoner during those +three days, I say that God has given them to us." + +"Well, but what do you propose to do?" said Jack, impatiently. + +"My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I think you have +courage to brave it. It is this: There is an island about fifty miles to +the south of this, the natives of which are Christians, and have been so +for two years or more, and the principal chief is Avatea's lover. Once +there, Avatea would be safe. Now, I suggest that you should abandon your +schooner. Do you think that you can make so great a sacrifice?" + +"Friend," replied Jack, "when I make up my mind to go through with a +thing of importance, I can make any sacrifice." + +The teacher smiled. "Well, then, the savages could not conceive it +possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would voluntarily lose your +fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies here they think they have you +all safe: so I suggest that we get a quantity of stores conveyed to a +sequestered part of the shore, provide a small canoe, put Avatea on +board, and you three would paddle to the Christian island." + +"Bravo!" cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing the teacher's hand. +"Missionary, you're a regular brick. I didn't think you had so much in +you." + +"As for me," continued the teacher, "I will remain on board till they +discover that you are gone. Then they will ask me where you are gone to, +and I will refuse to tell." + +"And what'll be the result of that?" inquired Jack. + +"I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; but," he added, looking at Jack +with a peculiar smile, "I too am not afraid to die in a good cause!" + +"But how are we to get hold of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +"I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular spot, to which I +will guide you to-night. We shall then arrange about it. She will +easily manage to elude her keepers, who are not very strict in watching +her, thinking it impossible that she could escape from the island. +Indeed, I am sure that such an idea will never enter their heads. But, +as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in a small canoe, on +the open sea, is a great voyage to make. You may miss the island, too, +in which case there is no other in that direction for a hundred miles or +more; and if you lose your way and fall among other heathens, you know +the law of Feejee--a cast-away who gains the shore is doomed to die. You +must count the cost, my young friend." + +"I have counted it," replied Jack. "If Avatea consents to run the risk, +most certainly I will; and so will my comrades also. Besides," added +Jack, looking seriously into the teacher's face, "your Bible,--_our_ +Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those who call on Him in the time of +trouble; who holds the winds in his fists and the waters in the hollow of +his hand." + +We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; collected +together such things as we should require, and laid out on the deck +provisions sufficient to maintain us for several weeks, purposing to load +the canoe with as much as she could hold consistently with speed and +safety. These we covered with a tarpaulin, intending to convey them to +the canoe only a few hours before starting. When night spread her sable +curtain over the scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along +with the natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on our +enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and followed our sable +guide, who led us by a long detour, in order to avoid the village, to the +place of rendezvous. We had not stood more than five minutes under the +gloomy shade of the thick foliage when a dark figure glided noiselessly +up to us. + +"Ah! here you are," said Jack, as Avatea approached. "Now, then, tell +her what we've come about, and don't waste time." + +"I understan' leetl English," said Avatea, in a low voice. + +"Why, where did you pick up English?" exclaimed Jack, in amazement; "you +were dumb as a stone when I saw you last." + +"She has learned all she knows of it from me," said the teacher, "since +she came to the island." + +We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering into all the +details, and concealing none of the danger, so that she might be fully +aware of the risk she ran. As we had anticipated, she was too glad of +the opportunity thus afforded her to escape from her persecutors to think +of the danger or risk. + +"Then you're willing to go with us, are you?" said Jack. + +"Yis, I am willing to go." + +"And you're not afraid to trust yourself out on the deep sea so far?" + +"No, I not 'fraid to go. Safe with Christian." + +After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it was time +to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having appointed to meet at +the cliff where the canoe lay, on the following night, just after dark, +we hastened away--we to row on board the schooner with muffled +oars--Avatea to glide back to her prison-hut among the Mango savages. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + +The flight--The pursuit--Despair and its results--The lion bearded in his +den again--Awful danger threatened and wonderfully averted--A terrific +storm. + +As the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became naturally very +fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and we spent the whole of +the following day in a state of nervous anxiety. We resolved to go a- +shore and ramble about the village, as if to observe the habits and +dwellings of the people, as we thought that an air of affected +indifference to the events of the previous day would be more likely than +any other course of conduct to avert suspicion as to our intentions. +While we were thus occupied, the teacher remained on board with the +Christian natives, whose powerful voices reached us ever and anon as they +engaged in singing hymns or in prayer. + +At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank into the sea, +and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to which I have already +referred, ended abruptly in a dark night. Hastily throwing a few +blankets into our little boat, we stepped into it, and, whispering +farewell to the natives in the schooner, rowed gently over the lagoon, +taking care to keep as near to the beach as possible. We rowed in the +utmost silence and with muffled oars, so that had any one observed us at +the distance of a few yards, he might have almost taken us for a phantom- +boat or a shadow on the dark water. Not a breath of air was stirring; +but fortunately the gentle ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with +the soft roar of the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the +slight plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars. + +Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging cliff under +whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow in the water ready +to be launched, and most of her cargo already stowed away. As the keel +of our little boat grated on the sand, a hand was laid upon the bow, and +a dim form was seen. + +"Ha!" said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped upon the beach, "is that +you, Avatea?" + +"Yis, it am me," was the reply. + +"All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to shove off the canoe," +whispered Jack to the teacher; "and Peterkin, do you shove these blankets +aboard, we may want them before long. Avatea, step into the +middle;--that's right." + +"Is all ready?" whispered the teacher. + +"Not quite," replied Peterkin. "Here, Ralph, lay hold o' this pair of +oars, and stow them away if you can. I don't like paddles. After we're +safe away I'll try to rig up rollicks for them." + +"Now, then, in with you and shove off." + +One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher's hand, and, with his +whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we shot like an arrow from +the shore, sped over the still waters of the lagoon, and paddled as +swiftly as strong arms and willing hearts could urge us over the long +swell of the open sea. + +All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our paddles in +almost total silence and without halt, save twice to recruit our failing +energies with a mouthful of food and a draught of water. Jack had taken +the bearing of the island just after starting, and laying a small pocket- +compass before him, kept the head of the canoe due south, for our chance +of hitting the island depended very much on the faithfulness of our +steersman in keeping our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its proper +course. Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and Avatea worked untiringly +in the middle. + +As the sun's lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the sea Jack ceased +working, threw down his paddle, and called a halt. + +"There," he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn sigh, "we've put a +considerable breadth of water between us and these black rascals, so now +we'll have a hearty supper and a sound sleep." + +"Hear, hear," cried Peterkin. "Nobly spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop +water, Ralph. Why, girl what's wrong with you? You look just like a +black owl blinking in the sunshine." + +Avatea smiled. "I sleepy," she said; and as if to prove the truth of +this, she laid her head on the edge of the canoe and fell fast asleep. + +"That's uncommon sharp practice," said Peterkin, with a broad grin. +"Don't you think we should awake her to make her eat something first? or, +perhaps," he added, with a grave, meditative look, "perhaps we might put +some food in her mouth, which is so elegantly open at the present moment, +and see if she'd swallow it while asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come +round to the front here and feed her quietly, while Jack and I are +tucking into the victuals. It would be a monstrous economy of time." + +I could not help smiling at Peterkin's idea, which, indeed, when I +pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; nevertheless I declined to +put it in practice, being fearful of the result should the victual chance +to go down the wrong throat. But, on suggesting this to Peterkin, he +exclaimed-- + +"Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an eye might see +that if it went down Avatea's throat it could not go down the wrong +throat!--unless, indeed, you have all of a sudden become inordinately +selfish, and think that all the throats in the world are wrong ones +except your own. However, don't talk so much, and hand me the pork +before Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled to at least one minute +morsel." + +"Peterkin, you're a villain. A paltry little villain," said Jack, +quietly, as he tossed the hind legs (including the tail) of a cold roast +pig to his comrade; "and I must again express my regret that unavoidable +circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and that necessity has +compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. Were it not that you are +incapable of walking upon the water, I would order you, sir, out of the +canoe." + +"There! you've wakened Avatea with your long tongue," retorted Peterkin, +with a frown, as the girl gave vent to a deep sigh. "No," he continued, +"it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth of her black Apollo. I +say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice of that yam. Between you and +Jack I run a chance of being put on short allowance, if not--yei--a--a--ow!" + +Peterkin's concluding remark was a yawn of so great energy that Jack +recommended him to postpone the conclusion of his meal till next +morning,--a piece of advice which he followed so quickly, that I was +forcibly reminded of his remark, a few minutes before, in regard to the +sharp practice of Avatea. + +My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I am much +given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be surprised to learn that +I fell into a deep reverie on the subject of sleep, which was continued +without intermission into the night, and prolonged without interruption +into the following morning. But I cannot feel assured that I actually +slept during that time, although I am tolerably certain that I was not +awake. + +Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, while the +night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and silent. + +A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the morning, just +as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east. + +"What's wrong?" cried Jack, starting up. + +Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread towards the +horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of the largest sized +war-canoes was approaching us! + +With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his paddle, glanced +at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, commanded us to "give way." + +But we did not require to be urged. Already our four paddles were +glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over the glassy sea like a +dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers told that they had observed our +motions. + +"I see something like land ahead," said Jack, in a hopeful tone. "It +seems impossible that we could have made the island yet; still, if it is +so, we may reach it before these fellows can catch us, for our canoe is +light and our muscles are fresh." + +No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long chase, we had +no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a hundred warriors. +Nevertheless, we resolved to do our utmost to escape, and paddled with a +degree of vigour that kept us well in advance of our pursuers. The war- +canoe was so far behind us that it seemed but a little speck on the sea, +and the shouts, to which the crew occasionally gave vent, came faintly +towards us on the morning breeze. We therefore hoped that we should be +able to keep in advance for an hour or two, when we might, perhaps, reach +the land ahead. But this hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, +not long after, rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a fog- +bank! + +A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was expressed +on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to our hopes. But we +had little time to think of regret. Our danger was too great and +imminent to permit of a moment's relaxation from our exertions. No hope +now animated our bosoms; but a feeling of despair, strange to say, lent +us power to work, and nerved our arms with such energy, that it was +several hours ere the savages overtook us. When we saw that there was +indeed no chance of escape, and that paddling any longer would only serve +to exhaust our strength, without doing any good, we turned the side of +our canoe towards the approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles. + +Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, Jack +lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with us, and, +resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of bold defiance. +Peterkin took the other oar and also stood up, but there was no anger +visible on his countenance. When not sparkling with fun, it usually wore +a mild, sad expression, which was deepened on the present occasion, as he +glanced at Avatea, who sat with her face resting in her hands upon her +knees. Without knowing very well what I intended to do, I also arose and +grasped my paddle with both hands. + +On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the foam +curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the savages glancing +the beams of the rising sun. Perfect silence was maintained on both +sides, and we could hear the hissing water, and see the frowning eyes of +the warriors, as they came rushing on. When about twenty yards distant, +five or six of the savages in the bow rose, and, laying aside their +paddles, took up their spears. Jack and Peterkin raised their oars, +while, with a feeling of madness whirling in my brain, I grasped my +paddle and prepared for the onset. But, before any of us could strike a +blow, the sharp prow of the war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the +side, and hurled us into the sea! + +What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly drowned; but +when I recovered from the state of insensibility into which I had been +thrown, I found myself stretched on my back, bound hand and foot between +Jack and Peterkin, in the bottom of the large canoe. + +In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the savages +only rested one hour. When night came, they rested again for another +hour, and appeared to sleep just as they sat. But we were neither +unbound nor allowed to speak to each other during the voyage, nor was a +morsel of food or a draught of water given to us. For food, however, we +cared little; but we would have given much for a drop of water to cool +our parched lips, and we would have been glad, too, had they loosened the +cords that bound us, for they were tightly fastened and occasioned us +much pain. The air, also, was unusually hot, so much so that I felt +convinced that a storm was brewing. This also added to our sufferings. +However, these were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from +which we had fled. + +While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, who was +seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not fettered in any way. +Our captors now drove us before them towards the hut of Tararo, at which +we speedily arrived, and found the chief seated with an expression on his +face that boded us no good. Our friend the teacher stood beside him, +with a look of anxiety on his mild features. + +"How comes it," said Tararo, turning to the teacher, "that these youths +have abused our hospitality?" + +"Tell him," replied Jack, "that we have not abused his hospitality, for +his hospitality has not been extended to us. I came to the island to +deliver Avatea, and my only regret is that I have failed to do so. If I +get another chance, I will try to save her yet." + +The teacher shook his head. "Nay, my young friend, I had better not tell +him that. It will only incense him." + +"Fear not," replied Jack. "If you don't tell him that, you'll tell him +nothing, for I won't say anything softer." + +On hearing Jack's speech, Tararo frowned and his eye flashed with anger. + +"Go," he said, "presumptuous boy. My debt to you is cancelled. You and +your companions shall die." + +As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, who seized +Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, and, dragging us +from the hut of the chief, led us through the wood to the outskirts of +the village. Here they thrust us into a species of natural cave in a +cliff, and, having barricaded the entrance, left us in total darkness. + +After feeling about for some time--for our legs were unshackled, although +our wrists were still bound with thongs--we found a low ledge of rock +running along one side of the cavern. On this we seated ourselves, and +for a long time maintained unbroken silence. + +At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. "Alas! dear Jack and +Peterkin," said I, "what is to become of us? I fear that we are doomed +to die." + +"I know not," replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, "I know not; Ralph, I +regret deeply the hastiness of my violent temper, which, I must confess, +has been the chief cause of our being brought to this sad condition. +Perhaps the teacher may do something for us. But I have little hope." + +"Ah! no," said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; "I am sure he can't help us. +Tararo doesn't care more for him than for one of his dogs." + +"Truly," said I, "there seems no chance of deliverance, unless the +Almighty puts forth his arm to save us. Yet I must say that I have great +hope, my comrades, for we have come to this dark place by no fault of +ours--unless it be a fault to try to succour a woman in distress." + +I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to the cavern, +which was caused by the removal of the barricade. Immediately after, +three men entered, and, taking us by the collars of our coats, led us +away through the forest. As we advanced, we heard much shouting and +beating of native drums in the village, and at first we thought that our +guards were conducting us to the hut of Tararo again. But in this we +were mistaken. The beating of drums gradually increased, and soon after +we observed a procession of the natives coming towards us. At the head +of this procession we were placed, and then we all advanced together +towards the temple where human victims were wont to be sacrificed! + +A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind the awful +scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful spot. But +deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence we little expected it. +During the whole of that day there had been an unusual degree of heat in +the atmosphere, and the sky assumed that lurid aspect which portends a +thunder-storm. Just as we were approaching the horrid temple, a growl of +thunder burst overhead and heavy drops of rain began to fall. + +Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical regions can +form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane that burst upon the +island of Mango at this time. Before we reached the temple, the storm +burst upon us with a deafening roar, and the natives, who knew too well +the devastation that was to follow, fled right and left through the woods +in order to save their property, leaving us alone in the midst of the +howling storm. The trees around us bent before the blast like willows, +and we were about to flee in order to seek shelter, when the teacher ran +toward us with a knife in his hand. + +"Thank the Lord," he said, cutting our bonds, "I am in time! Now, seek +the shelter of the nearest rock." + +This we did without a moment's hesitation, for the whistling wind burst, +ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the trees, and, tearing them from +their roots, hurled them with violence to the ground. Rain cut across +the land in sheets, and lightning played like forked serpents in the air; +while, high above the roar of the hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, +and burst, and rolled in awful majesty. + +In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs were blown +completely off the houses in many cases; and in others, the houses +themselves were levelled with the ground. In the midst of this, the +natives were darting to and fro, in some instances saving their goods, +but in many others seeking to save themselves from the storm of +destruction that whirled around them. But, terrific although the tempest +was on land, it was still more tremendous on the mighty ocean. Billows +sprang, as it were, from the great deep, and while their crests were +absolutely scattered into white mist, they fell upon the beach with a +crash that seemed to shake the solid land. But they did not end there. +Each successive wave swept higher and higher on the beach, until the +ocean lashed its angry waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, +in a sheet of white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and +carried off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native dwellings! It +was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in some degree at least, to +impress the mind of beholders with the might and the majesty of God. + +We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, during which +time the storm raged in fury; but on the night following it abated +somewhat, and in the morning we went to the village to seek for food, +being so famished with hunger that we lost all feeling of danger and all +wish to escape in our desire to satisfy the cravings of nature. But no +sooner had we obtained food than we began to wish that we had rather +endeavoured to make our escape into the mountains. This we attempted to +do soon afterwards, but the natives were now able to look after us, and +on our showing a disposition to avoid observation and make towards the +mountains, we were seized by three warriors, who once more bound our +wrists and thrust us into our former prison. + +It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down the first +savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his fist, but he was +speedily overpowered by others. Thus we were again prisoners, with the +prospect of torture and a violent death before us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + +Imprisonment--Sinking hopes--Unexpected freedom to more than one, and in +more senses than one. + +For a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary prison, during +which dismal time we did not see the face of a human being, except that +of the silent savage who brought us our daily food. + +There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I have felt as +if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that crushed my inmost heart +could never pass away, until death should make me cease to feel the +present was such a season. + +During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill at our +hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the cave--dreading lest it +should prove to be that of our executioner. But as time dragged heavily +on, we ceased to feel this alarm, and began to experience such a deep, +irrepressible longing for freedom, that we chafed and fretted in our +confinement like tigers. Then a feeling of despair came over us, and we +actually longed for the time when the savages would take us forth to die! +But these changes took place very gradually, and were mingled sometimes +with brighter thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark +cavern on our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the +past, until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future. + +A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty supply of +yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted our food. + +"Well, Ralph, how have you slept?" said Jack, in a listless tone, on +rising one morning from his humble couch. "Were you much disturbed by +the wind last night?" + +"No," said I; "I dreamed of home all night, and I thought that my mother +smiled upon me, and beckoned me to go to her; but I could not, for I was +chained." + +"And I dreamed, too," said Peterkin; "but it was of our happy home on the +Coral Island. I thought we were swimming in the Water Garden; then the +savages gave a yell, and we were immediately in the cave at Spouting +Cliff, which, somehow or other, changed into this gloomy cavern; and I +awoke to find it true." + +Peterkin's tone was so much altered by the depressing influence of his +long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was he who spoke, I should +scarcely have recognised it, so sad was it, and so unlike to the merry, +cheerful voice we had been accustomed to hear. I pondered this much, and +thought of the terrible decline of happiness that may come on human +beings in so short a time; how bright the sunshine in the sky at one +time, and, in a short space, how dark the overshadowing cloud! I had no +doubt that the Bible would have given me much light and comfort on this +subject, if I had possessed one, and I once more had occasion to regret +deeply having neglected to store my memory with its consoling truths. + +While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of the cave, by +saying, in a melancholy tone, "Oh, I wonder if we shall ever see our dear +island more." + +His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he bent down +his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me to see our once joyous +companion in tears, and I felt a burning desire to comfort him; but, +alas! what could I say? I could hold out no hope; and although I essayed +twice to speak, the words refused to pass my lips. While I hesitated, +Jack sat down beside him, and whispered a few words in his ear, while +Peterkin threw himself on his friend's breast, and rested his head on his +shoulder. + +Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, we heard +footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately our jailer +entered. We were so much accustomed to his regular visits, however, that +we paid little attention to him, expecting that he would set down our +meagre fare, as usual, and depart. But, to our surprise, instead of +doing so, he advanced towards us with a knife in his hand, and, going up +to Jack, he cut the thongs that bound his wrists, then he did the same to +Peterkin and me! For fully five minutes we stood in speechless +amazement, with our freed hands hanging idly by our sides. The first +thought that rushed into my mind was, that the time had come to put us to +death; and although, as I have said before, we actually wished for death +in the strength of our despair, now that we thought it drew really near I +felt all the natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a +chill of horror at the suddenness of our call. + +But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage pointed to the +cave's mouth, and we marched, almost mechanically, into the open air. +Here, to our surprise, we found the teacher standing under a tree, with +his hands clasped before him, and the tears trickling down his dark +cheeks. On seeing Jack, who came out first, he sprang towards him, and +clasping him in his arms, exclaimed,-- + +"Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of God you are +free!" + +"Free!" cried Jack. + +"Ay, free," repeated the teacher, shaking us warmly by the hands again +and again; "free to go and come as you will. The Lord has unloosed the +bands of the captive and set the prisoners free. A missionary has been +sent to us, and Tararo has embraced the Christian religion! The people +are even now burning their gods of wood! Come, my dear friends, and see +the glorious sight." + +We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been accustomed in +our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we imagined for a moment this +must surely be nothing more than another vivid dream. Our eyes and minds +were dazzled, too, by the brilliant sunshine, which almost blinded us +after our long confinement to the gloom of our prison, so that we felt +giddy with the variety of conflicting emotions that filled our throbbing +bosoms; but as we followed the footsteps of our sable friend, and beheld +the bright foliage of the trees, and heard the cries of the paroquets, +and smelt the rich perfume of the flowering shrubs, the truth, that we +were really delivered from prison and from death, rushed with +overwhelming power into our souls, and, with one accord, while tears +sprang to our eyes, we uttered a loud long cheer of joy. + +It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who chanced to +be near. Running towards us, they shook us by the hand with every +demonstration of kindly feeling. They then fell behind, and, forming a +sort of procession, conducted us to the dwelling of Tararo. + +The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never forget. On a +rude bench in front of his house sat the chief. A native stood on his +left hand, who, from his dress, seemed to be a teacher. On his right +stood an English gentleman, who, I at once and rightly concluded, was a +missionary. He was tall, thin, and apparently past forty, with a bald +forehead, and thin gray hair. The expression of his countenance was the +most winning I ever saw, and his clear gray eye beamed with a look that +was frank, fearless, loving, and truthful. In front of the chief was an +open space, in the centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to +be set on fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who +had come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A bright smile +overspread the missionary's face as he advanced quickly to meet us, and +he shook us warmly by the hands. + +"I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young friends," he said. "My +friend, and your friend, the teacher, has told me your history; and I +thank our Father in heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided me to +this island, and made me the instrument of saving you." + +We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some surprise +how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in our favour. + +"I will tell you that at a more convenient time," he answered, "meanwhile +we must not forget the respect due to the chief. He waits to receive +you." + +In the conversation that immediately followed between us and Tararo, the +latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus Christ had been sent to +the island, and that to it we were indebted for our freedom. Moreover, +he told us that we were at liberty to depart in our schooner whenever we +pleased, and that we should be supplied with as much provision as we +required. He concluded by shaking hands with us warmly, and performing +the ceremony of rubbing noses. + +This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find words to +express our gratitude to the chief and to the missionary. + +"And what of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in the midst of +whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, strapping fellow, whose +noble mien and air of superiority bespoke him a chief of no ordinary +kind. + +"That youth is her lover. He came this very morning in his war-canoe to +treat with Tararo for Avatea. He is to be married in a few days, and +afterwards returns to his island home with his bride!" + +"That's capital," said Jack, as he stepped up to the savage and gave him +a hearty shake of the hand. "I wish you joy, my lad;--and you too, +Avatea." + +As Jack spoke, Avatea's lover took him by the hand and led him to the +spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, surrounded by most of the +chief men of the tribe. The girl herself followed, and stood on his left +hand while her lover stood on his right, and, commanding silence, made +the following speech, which was translated by the missionary:-- + +"Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is old. Your heart +also is large and very brave. I and Avatea are your debtors, and we +wish, in the midst of this assembly, to acknowledge our debt, and to say +that it is one which we can never repay. You have risked your life for +one who was known to you only for a few days. But she was a woman in +distress, and that was enough to secure to her the aid of a Christian +man. We, who live in these islands of the sea, know that the true +Christians always act thus. Their religion is one of love and kindness. +We thank God that so many Christians have been sent here--we hope many +more will come. Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray +for you and your brave comrades when you are far away." + +To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, in which he +insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he would have done for any +woman under the sun. But Jack's forte did not lie in speech-making, so +he terminated rather abruptly by seizing the chief's hand and shaking it +violently, after which he made a hasty retreat. + +"Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin," said Jack, as we mingled with the crowd, +"it seems to me that the object we came here for having been +satisfactorily accomplished, we have nothing more to do but get ready for +sea as fast as we can, and hurrah for dear old England!" + +"That's my idea precisely," said Peterkin, endeavouring to wink, but he +had wept so much of late, poor fellow, that he found it difficult; +"however, I'm not going away till I see these fellows burn their gods." + +Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire was put to +the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the acclamations of the +assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango were reduced to ashes! + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + +Conclusion. + +To part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene of constant +leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial greeting to-day, are +doomed ere long to unite for the last time, when the quivering lips +pronounce the word--"Farewell." It is a sad thought, but should we on +that account exclude it from our minds? May not a lesson worth learning +be gathered in the contemplation of it? May it not, perchance, teach us +to devote our thoughts more frequently and attentively to that land where +we meet, but part no more? + +How many do we part from in this world with a light "Good-bye," whom we +never see again! Often do I think, in my meditations on this subject, +that if we realized more fully the shortness of the fleeting intercourse +that we have in this world with many of our fellow-men, we would try more +earnestly to do them good, to give them a friendly smile, as it were, in +passing (for the longest intercourse on earth is little more than a +passing word and glance), and show that we have sympathy with them in the +short quick struggle of life, by our kindly words and looks and action. + +The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of the South +Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep regret at parting +with the natives of the island of Mango; for, after they embraced the +Christian faith, they sought, by showing us the utmost kindness, to +compensate for the harsh treatment we had experienced at their hands; and +we felt a growing affection for the native teachers and the missionary, +and especially for Avatea and her husband. + +Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations with the +missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been making for the +island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop was blown out of its +course, during a violent gale, and driven to this island. At first the +natives refused to listen to what he had to say; but, after a week's +residence among them, Tararo came to him and said that he wished to +become a Christian, and would burn his idols. He proved himself to be +sincere, for, as we have seen, he persuaded all his people to do +likewise. I use the word persuaded advisedly; for, like all the other +Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a despot and might have commanded obedience to +his wishes; but he entered so readily into the spirit of the new faith +that he perceived at once the impropriety of using constraint in the +propagation of it. He set the example, therefore; and that example was +followed by almost every man of the tribe. + +During the short time that we remained at the island, repairing our +vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives had commenced building +a large and commodious church, under the superintendence of the +missionary, and several rows of new cottages were marked out; so that the +place bid fair to become, in a few months, as prosperous and beautiful as +the Christian village at the other end of the island. + +After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, loaded with +presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of the native teachers went +with them, for the purpose of visiting still more distant islands of the +sea, and spreading, if possible, the light of the glorious gospel there. + +As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, in order +to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and Peterkin and I held a +consultation in the cabin of our schooner,--which we found just as we had +left her, for everything that had been taken out of her was restored. We +now resolved to delay our departure no longer. The desire to see our +beloved native land was strong upon us, and we could not wait. + +Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we thought it +likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient crew of sailors to +man our vessel; so we accepted their offer gladly. + +It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white sails of the +pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. The missionary, and +thousands of the natives, came down to bid us God-speed, and to see us +sail away. As the vessel bent before a light fair wind, we glided +quickly over the lagoon under a cloud of canvass. + +Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives gave us a +loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while he stood on a +coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the wind, we heard the single +word "Farewell" borne faintly over the sea. + +That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the wide sea and +up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, strangely mixed with +sadness, passed through our hearts,--for we were at length "homeward +bound," and were gradually leaving far behind us the beautiful, bright, +green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND*** + + +******* This file should be named 646.txt or 646.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/6/4/646 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/old/646.zip b/old/646.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..66516d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/646.zip diff --git a/old/coril10.txt b/old/coril10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b1e3f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/coril10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10722 @@ + +Project Gutenberg's Etext of The Coral Island, R. M. Ballantyne + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +The Coral Island +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + +R. M. Ballantyne + +September, 1996 [Etext #646] + + +Project Gutenberg's Etext of The Coral Island, R. M. Ballantyne +*****This file should be named coril10.txt or coril10.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, coril11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, coril10a.txt. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, for time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001 +should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it +will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001. + + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/BU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (BU = Benedictine +University). (Subscriptions to our paper newsletter go to BU.) + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail). + +****** +If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please +FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: +[Mac users, do NOT point and click. . .type] + +ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 +or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information] +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books +and +GET NEW GUT for general information +and +MGET GUT* for newsletters. + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Benedictine University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association / Benedictine + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Benedictine University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +The Coral Island: A Tale of the Pacific Ocean by R. M. Ballantyne. +Scanned and proofed by David Price +email ccx074@coventry.ac.uk + + + + + +The Coral Island: A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + + + + +Preface + + +I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures herein set +down. With the memory of my boyish feelings strong upon me, I +present my book specially to boys, in the earnest hope that they +may derive valuable information, much pleasure, great profit, and +unbounded amusement from its pages. + +One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to be +melancholy and morose, and who cannot enter with kindly sympathy +into the regions of fun, let me seriously advise him to shut my +book and put it away. It is not meant for him. + +RALPH ROVER + + + +CHAPTER I. + + + +The beginning - My early life and character - I thirst for +adventure in foreign lands and go to sea. + + +ROVING has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the joy of +my heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In childhood, in +boyhood, and in man's estate, I have been a rover; not a mere +rambler among the woody glens and upon the hill-tops of my own +native land, but an enthusiastic rover throughout the length and +breadth of the wide wide world. + +It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in which I +was born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic Ocean. My +father was a sea-captain; my grandfather was a sea-captain; my +great-grandfather had been a marine. Nobody could tell positively +what occupation HIS father had followed; but my dear mother used to +assert that he had been a midshipman, whose grandfather, on the +mother's side, had been an admiral in the royal navy. At anyrate +we knew that, as far back as our family could be traced, it had +been intimately connected with the great watery waste. Indeed this +was the case on both sides of the house; for my mother always went +to sea with my father on his long voyages, and so spent the greater +part of her life upon the water. + +Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving +disposition. Soon after I was born, my father, being old, retired +from a seafaring life, purchased a small cottage in a fishing +village on the west coast of England, and settled down to spend the +evening of his life on the shores of that sea which had for so many +years been his home. It was not long after this that I began to +show the roving spirit that dwelt within me. For some time past my +infant legs had been gaining strength, so that I came to be +dissatisfied with rubbing the skin off my chubby knees by walking +on them, and made many attempts to stand up and walk like a man; +all of which attempts, however, resulted in my sitting down +violently and in sudden surprise. One day I took advantage of my +dear mother's absence to make another effort; and, to my joy, I +actually succeeded in reaching the doorstep, over which I tumbled +into a pool of muddy water that lay before my father's cottage +door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror of my poor mother when +she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a group of cackling +ducks, and the tenderness with which she stripped off my dripping +clothes and washed my dirty little body! From this time forth my +rambles became more frequent, and, as I grew older, more distant, +until at last I had wandered far and near on the shore and in the +woods around our humble dwelling, and did not rest content until my +father bound me apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to +sea. + +For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in +coasting along the shores of my native land. My Christian name was +Ralph, and my comrades added to this the name of Rover, in +consequence of the passion which I always evinced for travelling. +Rover was not my real name, but as I never received any other I +came at last to answer to it as naturally as to my proper name; +and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good reason why I should not +introduce myself to the reader as Ralph Rover. My shipmates were +kind, good-natured fellows, and they and I got on very well +together. They did, indeed, very frequently make game of and +banter me, but not unkindly; and I overheard them sometimes saying +that Ralph Rover was a "queer, old-fashioned fellow." This, I must +confess, surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but +could come at no satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my old- +fashionedness lay. It is true I was a quiet lad, and seldom spoke +except when spoken to. Moreover, I never could understand the +jokes of my companions even when they were explained to me: which +dulness in apprehension occasioned me much grief; however, I tried +to make up for it by smiling and looking pleased when I observed +that they were laughing at some witticism which I had failed to +detect. I was also very fond of inquiring into the nature of +things and their causes, and often fell into fits of abstraction +while thus engaged in my mind. But in all this I saw nothing that +did not seem to be exceedingly natural, and could by no means +understand why my comrades should call me "an old-fashioned +fellow." + +Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many +seamen who had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; and +I freely confess that my heart glowed ardently within me as they +recounted their wild adventures in foreign lands, - the dreadful +storms they had weathered, the appalling dangers they had escaped, +the wonderful creatures they had seen both on the land and in the +sea, and the interesting lands and strange people they had visited. +But of all the places of which they told me, none captivated and +charmed my imagination so much as the Coral Islands of the Southern +Seas. They told me of thousands of beautiful fertile islands that +had been formed by a small creature called the coral insect, where +summer reigned nearly all the year round, - where the trees were +laden with a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit, - where the +climate was almost perpetually delightful, - yet where, strange to +say, men were wild, bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those +favoured isles to which the gospel of our Saviour had been +conveyed. These exciting accounts had so great an effect upon my +mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I resolved to make a +voyage to the South Seas. + +I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear +parents to let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would +never have become a great captain had he remained in the coasting +trade, he saw the truth of what I said, and gave his consent. My +dear mother, seeing that my father had made up his mind, no longer +offered opposition to my wishes. "But oh, Ralph," she said, on the +day I bade her adieu, "come back soon to us, my dear boy, for we +are getting old now, Ralph, and may not have many years to live." + +I will not take up my reader's time with a minute account of all +that occurred before I took my final leave of my dear parents. +Suffice it to say, that my father placed me under the charge of an +old mess-mate of his own, a merchant captain, who was on the point +of sailing to the South Seas in his own ship, the Arrow. My mother +gave me her blessing and a small Bible; and her last request was, +that I would never forget to read a chapter every day, and say my +prayers; which I promised, with tears in my eyes, that I would +certainly do. + +Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine large +ship, and set sail for the islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + +CHAPTER II. + + + +The departure - The sea - My companions - Some account of the +wonderful sights we saw on the great deep - A dreadful storm and a +frightful wreck. + + +IT was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her +canvass to the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the south. +Oh, how my heart bounded with delight as I listened to the merry +chorus of the sailors, while they hauled at the ropes and got in +the anchor! The captain shouted - the men ran to obey - the noble +ship bent over to the breeze, and the shore gradually faded from my +view, while I stood looking on with a kind of feeling that the +whole was a delightful dream. + +The first thing that struck me as being different from anything I +had yet seen during my short career on the sea, was the hoisting of +the anchor on deck, and lashing it firmly down with ropes, as if we +had now bid adieu to the land for ever, and would require its +services no more. + +"There, lass," cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, giving the fluke +of the anchor a hearty slap with his hand after the housing was +completed - "there, lass, take a good nap now, for we shan't ask +you to kiss the mud again for many a long day to come!" + +And so it was. That anchor did not "kiss the mud" for many long +days afterwards; and when at last it did, it was for the last time! + +There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were my +special favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, broad- +shouldered youth of eighteen, with a handsome, good-humoured, firm +face. He had had a good education, was clever and hearty and lion- +like in his actions, but mild and quiet in disposition. Jack was a +general favourite, and had a peculiar fondness for me. My other +companion was Peterkin Gay. He was little, quick, funny, decidedly +mischievous, and about fourteen years old. But Peterkin's mischief +was almost always harmless, else he could not have been so much +beloved as he was. + +"Hallo! youngster," cried Jack Martin, giving me a slap on the +shoulder, the day I joined the ship, "come below and I'll show you +your berth. You and I are to be mess-mates, and I think we shall +be good friends, for I like the look o' you." + +Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became the best +and stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the stormy +waves. + +I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. We had the +usual amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw many strange +fish rolling in the sea, and I was greatly delighted one day by +seeing a shoal of flying fish dart out of the water and skim +through the air about a foot above the surface. They were pursued +by dolphins, which feed on them, and one flying-fish in its terror +flew over the ship, struck on the rigging, and fell upon the deck. +Its wings were just fins elongated, and we found that they could +never fly far at a time, and never mounted into the air like birds, +but skimmed along the surface of the sea. Jack and I had it for +dinner, and found it remarkably good. + +When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of America, +the weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors began to +tell stories about the furious gales and the dangers of that +terrible cape. + +"Cape Horn," said one, "is the most horrible headland I ever +doubled. I've sailed round it twice already, and both times the +ship was a'most blow'd out o' the water." + +"An' I've been round it once," said another, "an' that time the +sails were split, and the ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they +wouldn't work, and we wos all but lost." + +"An' I've been round it five times," cried a third, "an' every time +wos wuss than another, the gales wos so tree-mendous!" + +"And I've been round it no times at all," cried Peterkin, with an +impudent wink of his eye, "an' THAT time I wos blow'd inside out!" + +Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough +weather, and, in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were sailing +gently, before a warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific Ocean. +Thus we proceeded on our voyage, sometimes bounding merrily before +a fair breeze, at other times floating calmly on the glassy wave +and fishing for the curious inhabitants of the deep, - all of +which, although the sailors thought little of them, were strange, +and interesting, and very wonderful to me. + +At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I shall +never forget the delight with which I gazed, - when we chanced to +pass one, - at the pure, white, dazzling shores, and the verdant +palm-trees, which looked bright and beautiful in the sunshine. And +often did we three long to be landed on one, imagining that we +should certainly find perfect happiness there! Our wish was +granted sooner than we expected. + +One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm burst +upon our ship. The first squall of wind carried away two of our +masts; and left only the foremast standing. Even this, however, +was more than enough, for we did not dare to hoist a rag of sail on +it. For five days the tempest raged in all its fury. Everything +was swept off the decks except one small boat. The steersman was +lashed to the wheel, lest he should be washed away, and we all gave +ourselves up for lost. The captain said that he had no idea where +we were, as we had been blown far out of our course; and we feared +much that we might get among the dangerous coral reefs which are so +numerous in the Pacific. At day-break on the sixth morning of the +gale we saw land ahead. It was an island encircled by a reef of +coral on which the waves broke in fury. There was calm water +within this reef, but we could only see one narrow opening into it. +For this opening we steered, but, ere we reached it, a tremendous +wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder completely off, and left +us at the mercy of the winds and waves. + +"It's all over with us now, lads," said the captain to the men; +"get the boat ready to launch; we shall be on the rocks in less +than half an hour." + +The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was +little hope of so small a boat living in such a sea. + +"Come boys," said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to me and Peterkin, +as we stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our fate; - "Come boys, we +three shall stick together. You see it is impossible that the +little boat can reach the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure +to upset, so I mean rather to trust myself to a large oar, I see +through the telescope that the ship will strike at the tail of the +reef, where the waves break into the quiet water inside; so, if we +manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over the breakers, we +may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will you join me?" + +We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with +confidence, although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his +voice, that he had little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the +white waves that lashed the reef and boiled against the rocks as if +in fury, I felt that there was but a step between us and death. My +heart sank within me; but at that moment my thoughts turned to my +beloved mother, and I remembered those words, which were among the +last that she said to me - "Ralph, my dearest child, always +remember in the hour of danger to look to your Lord and Saviour +Jesus Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your body +and your soul." So I felt much comforted when I thought thereon. + +The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready with the +boat, and the captain beside them giving orders, when a tremendous +wave came towards us. We three ran towards the bow to lay hold of +our oar, and had barely reached it when the wave fell on the deck +with a crash like thunder. At the same moment the ship struck, the +foremast broke off close to the deck and went over the side, +carrying the boat and men along with it. Our oar got entangled +with the wreck, and Jack seized an axe to cut it free, but, owing +to the motion of the ship, he missed the cordage and struck the axe +deep into the oar. Another wave, however, washed it clear of the +wreck. We all seized hold of it, and the next instant we were +struggling in the wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat +whirling in the surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming +waves. Then I became insensible. + +On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of soft +grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with Peterkin on +his knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples with water, and +endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a wound in my +forehead. + + + +CHAPTER III. + + + +The Coral Island - Our first cogitations after landing, and the +result of them - We conclude that the island is uninhabited. + + +THERE is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in recovering +from a state of insensibility, which is almost indescribable; a +sort of dreamy, confused consciousness; a half-waking half-sleeping +condition, accompanied with a feeling of weariness, which, however, +is by no means disagreeable. As I slowly recovered and heard the +voice of Peterkin inquiring whether I felt better, I thought that I +must have overslept myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for +being lazy; but before I could leap up in haste, the thought seemed +to vanish suddenly away, and I fancied that I must have been ill. +Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, and I thought of home, and the +garden at the back of my father's cottage, with its luxuriant +flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my dear mother +trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. But the roaring of +the surf put these delightful thoughts to flight, and I was back +again at sea, watching the dolphins and the flying-fish, and +reefing topsails off the wild and stormy Cape Horn. Gradually the +roar of the surf became louder and more distinct. I thought of +being wrecked far far away from my native land, and slowly opened +my eyes to meet those of my companion Jack, who, with a look of +intense anxiety, was gazing into my face. + +"Speak to us, my dear Ralph," whispered Jack, tenderly, "are you +better now?" + +I smiled and looked up, saying, "Better; why, what do you mean, +Jack? I'm quite well" + +"Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in this way?" +said Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for the poor boy had been +really under the impression that I was dying. + +I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my +forehead, found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I +had lost a good deal of blood. + +"Come, come, Ralph," said Jack, pressing me gently backward, "lie +down, my boy; you're not right yet. Wet your lips with this water, +it's cool and clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at +hand. There now, don't say a word, hold your tongue," said he, +seeing me about to speak. "I'll tell you all about it, but you +must not utter a syllable till you have rested well." + +"Oh! don't stop him from speaking, Jack," said Peterkin, who, now +that his fears for my safety were removed, busied himself in +erecting a shelter of broken branches in order to protect me from +the wind; which, however, was almost unnecessary, for the rock +beside which I had been laid completely broke the force of the +gale. "Let him speak, Jack; it's a comfort to hear that he's +alive, after lying there stiff and white and sulky for a whole +hour, just like an Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a fellow as you +are, Ralph; always up to mischief. You've almost knocked out all +my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It's very wicked of you, indeed it is." + +While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite +clear again, and I began to understand my position. "What do you +mean by saying I half choked you, Peterkin?" said I. + +"What do I mean? Is English not your mother tongue, or do you want +me to repeat it in French, by way of making it clearer? Don't you +remember - " + +"I remember nothing," said I, interrupting him, "after we were +thrown into the sea." + +"Hush, Peterkin," said Jack, "you're exciting Ralph with your +nonsense. I'll explain it to you. You recollect that after the +ship struck, we three sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I +noticed that the oar struck your head and gave you that cut on the +brow, which nearly stunned you, so that you grasped Peterkin round +the neck without knowing apparently what you were about. In doing +so you pushed the telescope, - which you clung to as if it had been +your life, - against Peterkin's mouth - " + +"Pushed it against his mouth!" interrupted Peterkin, "say crammed +it down his throat. Why, there's a distinct mark of the brass rim +on the back of my gullet at this moment!" + +"Well, well, be that as it may," continued Jack, "you clung to him, +Ralph, till I feared you really would choke him; but I saw that he +had a good hold of the oar, so I exerted myself to the utmost to +push you towards the shore, which we luckily reached without much +trouble, for the water inside the reef is quite calm." + +"But the captain and crew, what of them?" I inquired anxiously. + +Jack shook his head. + +"Are they lost?" + +"No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not much chance +of their being saved. The ship struck at the very tail of the +island on which we are cast. When the boat was tossed into the sea +it fortunately did not upset, although it shipped a good deal of +water, and all the men managed to scramble into it; but before they +could get the oars out the gale carried them past the point and +away to leeward of the island. After we landed I saw them +endeavouring to pull towards us, but as they had only one pair of +oars out of the eight that belong to the boat, and as the wind was +blowing right in their teeth, they gradually lost ground. Then I +saw them put about and hoist some sort of sail, - a blanket, I +fancy, for it was too small for the boat, - and in half an hour +they were out of sight." + +"Poor fellows," I murmured sorrowfully. + +"But the more I think about it, I've better hope of them," +continued Jack, in a more cheerful tone. "You see, Ralph, I've +read a great deal about these South Sea Islands, and I know that in +many places they are scattered about in thousands over the sea, so +they're almost sure to fall in with one of them before long." + +"I'm sure I hope so," said Peterkin, earnestly. "But what has +become of the wreck, Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there +while I was watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to pieces?" + +"No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the bottom," +replied Jack. "As I said before, she struck on the tail of the +island and stove in her bow, but the next breaker swung her clear, +and she floated away to leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made +a hard struggle to reach her, but long before they came near her +she filled and went down. It was after she foundered that I saw +them trying to pull to the island." + +There wan a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I have no +doubt that each was revolving in his mind our extraordinary +position. For my part I cannot say that my reflections were very +agreeable. I knew that we were on an island, for Jack had said so, +but whether it was inhabited or not I did not know. If it should +be inhabited, I felt certain, from all I had heard of South Sea +Islanders, that we should be roasted alive and eaten. If it should +turn out to be uninhabited, I fancied that we should be starved to +death. "Oh!" thought I, "if the ship had only stuck on the rocks +we might have done pretty well, for we could have obtained +provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a shelter, but +now - alas! alas! we are lost!" These last words I uttered aloud +in my distress. + +"Lost! Ralph?" exclaimed Jack, while a smile overspread his hearty +countenance. "Saved, you should have said. Your cogitations seem +to have taken a wrong road, and led you to a wrong conclusion." + +"Do you know what conclusion I have come to?" said Peterkin. "I +have made up my mind that it's capital, - first rate, - the best +thing that ever happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that +ever lay before three jolly young tars. We've got an island all to +ourselves. We'll take possession in the name of the king; we'll go +and enter the service of its black inhabitants. Of course we'll +rise, naturally, to the top of affairs. White men always do in +savage countries. You shall be king, Jack; Ralph, prime minister, +and I shall be - " + +"The court jester," interrupted Jack. + +"No," retorted Peterkin, "I'll have no title at all. I shall +merely accept a highly responsible situation under government, for +you see, Jack, I'm fond of having an enormous salary and nothing to +do." + +"But suppose there are no natives?" + +"Then we'll build a charming villa, and plant a lovely garden round +it, stuck all full of the most splendiferous tropical flowers, and +we'll farm the land, plant, sow, reap, eat, sleep, and be merry." + +"But to be serious," said Jack, assuming a grave expression of +countenance, which I observed always had the effect of checking +Peterkin's disposition to make fun of everything, "we are really in +rather an uncomfortable position. If this is a desert island, we +shall have to live very much like the wild beasts, for we have not +a tool of any kind, not even a knife." + +"Yes, we have THAT," said Peterkin, fumbling in his trousers +pocket, from which he drew forth a small penknife with only one +blade, and that was broken. + +"Well, that's better than nothing; but come," said Jack, rising, +"we are wasting our time in TALKING instead of DOING. You seem +well enough to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our +pockets, and then let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort of +island we have been cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it seems +likely to be our home for some time to come." + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + + +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy discovery - +Our island described - Jack proves himself to be learned and +sagacious above his fellows - Curious discoveries - Natural +lemonade! + + +WE now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into our +personal property. When we reached the shore, after being wrecked, +my companions had taken off part of their clothes and spread them +out in the sun to dry, for, although the gale was raging fiercely, +there was not a single cloud in the bright sky. They had also +stripped off most part of my wet clothes and spread them also on +the rocks. Having resumed our garments, we now searched all our +pockets with the utmost care, and laid their contents out on a flat +stone before us; and, now that our minds were fully alive to our +condition, it was with no little anxiety that we turned our several +pockets inside out, in order that nothing might escape us. When +all was collected together we found that our worldly goods +consisted of the following articles:- + +First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about the +middle and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on its +edge. (Peterkin said of this, with his usual pleasantry, that it +would do for a saw as well as a knife, which was a great +advantage.) Second, An old German-silver pencil-case without any +lead in it. Third, A piece of whip-cord about six yards long. +Fourth, A sailmaker's needle of a small size. Fifth, A ship's +telescope, which I happened to have in my hand at the time the ship +struck, and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was in the +water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out of my +grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I cannot +understand why I kept such a firm hold of this telescope. They say +that a drowning man will clutch at a straw. Perhaps it may have +been some such feeling in me, for I did not know that it was in my +hand at the time we were wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure +in having it with us now, although we did not see that it could be +of much use to us, as the glass at the small end was broken to +pieces. Our sixth article was a brass ring which Jack always wore +on his little finger. I never understood why he wore it, for Jack +was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to care for +ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said "it was in memory of the girl +he left behind him!" But as he never spoke of this girl to either +of us, I am inclined to think that Peterkin was either jesting or +mistaken. In addition to these articles we had a little bit of +tinder, and the clothes on our backs. These last were as follows:- + +Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair of +sailors' thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel shirt, a blue +jacket, and a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, besides a pair of +worsted socks, and a cotton pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen +portraits of Lord Nelson printed on it, and a union Jack in the +middle. Peterkin had on a striped flannel shirt, - which he wore +outside his trousers, and belted round his waist, after the manner +of a tunic, - and a round black straw hat. He had no jacket, +having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; but +this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island +proved to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I +often preferred to go about without our jackets. Peterkin had also +a pair of white cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief with white +spots all over it. My own costume consisted of a blue flannel +shirt, a blue jacket, a black cap, and a pair of worsted socks, +besides the shoes and canvass trousers already mentioned. This was +all we had, and besides these things we had nothing else; but, when +we thought of the danger from which we had escaped, and how much +worse off we might have been had the ship struck on the reef during +the night, we felt very thankful that we were possessed of so much, +although, I must confess, we sometimes wished that we had had a +little more. + +While we were examining these things, and talking about them, Jack +suddenly started and exclaimed - + +"The oar! we have forgotten the oar." + +"What good will that do us?" said Peterkin; "there's wood enough on +the island to make a thousand oars." + +"Ay, lad," replied Jack, "but there's a bit of hoop iron at the end +of it, and that may be of much use to us." + +"Very true," said I, "let us go fetch it;" and with that we all +three rose and hastened down to the beach. I still felt a little +weak from loss of blood, so that my companions soon began to leave +me behind; but Jack perceived this, and, with his usual considerate +good nature, turned back to help me. This was now the first time +that I had looked well about me since landing, as the spot where I +had been laid was covered with thick bushes which almost hid the +country from our view. As we now emerged from among these and +walked down the sandy beach together, I cast my eyes about, and, +truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose at the +beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale had +suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it +dashed our ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after +accomplishing that. The island on which we stood was hilly, and +covered almost everywhere with the most beautiful and richly +coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, none of which I knew the names +of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa-nut palms, which I +recognised at once from the many pictures that I had seen of them +before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling whiteness lined this +bright green shore, and upon it there fell a gentle ripple of the +sea. This last astonished me much, for I recollected that at home +the sea used to fall in huge billows on the shore long after a +storm had subsided. But on casting my glance out to sea the cause +became apparent. About a mile distant from the shore I saw the +great billows of the ocean rolling like a green wall, and falling +with a long, loud roar, upon a low coral reef, where they were +dashed into white foam and flung up in clouds of spray. This spray +sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here and there, a +beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling drops. +We afterwards found that this coral reef extended quite round the +island, and formed a natural breakwater to it. Beyond this the sea +rose and tossed violently from the effects of the storm; but +between the reef and the shore it was as calm and as smooth as a +pond. + +My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at sight +of so many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned suddenly to the +contemplation of the Creator of them all. I mention this the more +gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed to say, I very seldom +thought of my Creator, although I was constantly surrounded by the +most beautiful and wonderful of His works. I observed from the +expression of my companion's countenance that he too derived much +joy from the splendid scenery, which was all the more agreeable to +us after our long voyage on the salt sea. There, the breeze was +fresh and cold, but here it was delightfully mild; and, when a puff +blew off the land, it came laden with the most exquisite perfume +that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we were startled by a +loud "Huzza!" from Peterkin, and, on looking towards the edge of +the sea, we saw him capering and jumping about like a monkey, and +ever and anon tugging with all his might at something that lay upon +the shore. + +"What an odd fellow he is, to be sure," said Jack, taking me by the +arm and hurrying forward; "come, let us hasten to see what it is." + +"Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what we want," cried +Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging with all his power. +"First rate; just the very ticket!" + +I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin was in +the habit of using very remarkable and peculiar phrases. And I am +free to confess that I did not well understand the meaning of some +of them, - such, for instance, as "the very ticket;" but I think it +my duty to recount everything relating to my adventures with a +strict regard to truthfulness in as far as my memory serves me; so +I write, as nearly as possible, the exact words that my companions +spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain what he meant by +"ticket," but he always answered me by going into fits of laughter. +However, by observing the occasions on which he used it, I came to +understand that it meant to show that something was remarkably +good, or fortunate. + +On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to pull +the axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, Jack +struck it while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among which it +had become entangled at the bow of the ship. Fortunately for us +the axe had remained fast in the oar, and even now, all Peterkin's +strength could not draw it out of the cut. + +"Ah! that is capital indeed," cried Jack, at the same time giving +the axe a wrench that plucked it out of the tough wood. "How +fortunate this is! It will be of more value to us than a hundred +knives, and the edge is quite new and sharp." + +"I'll answer for the toughness of the handle at any rate," cried +Peterkin; "my arms are nearly pulled out of the sockets. But see +here, our luck is great. There is iron on the blade." He pointed +to a piece of hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round +the blade of the oar to prevent it from splitting. + +This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on his knees, +and with the edge of the axe began carefully to force out the +nails. But as they were firmly fixed in, and the operation blunted +our axe, we carried the oar up with us to the place where we had +left the rest of our things, intending to burn the wood away from +the iron at a more convenient time. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, after we had laid it on the stone which +contained our little all, "I propose that we should go to the tail +of the island, where the ship struck, which is only a quarter of a +mile off, and see if anything else has been thrown ashore. I don't +expect anything, but it is well to see. When we get back here it +will be time to have our supper and prepare our beds." + +"Agreed!" cried Peterkin and I together, as, indeed, we would have +agreed to any proposal that Jack made; for, besides his being older +and much stronger and taller than either of us, he was a very +clever fellow, and I think would have induced people much older +than himself to choose him for their leader, especially if they +required to be led on a bold enterprise. + +Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so brightly +in the rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite dazzled by +its glare, it suddenly came into Peterkin's head that we had +nothing to eat except the wild berries which grew in profusion at +our feet. + +"What shall we do, Jack?" said he, with a rueful look; "perhaps +they may be poisonous!" + +"No fear," replied Jack, confidently; "I have observed that a few +of them are not unlike some of the berries that grow wild on our +own native hills. Besides, I saw one or two strange birds eating +them just a few minutes ago, and what won't kill the birds won't +kill us. But look up there, Peterkin," continued Jack, pointing to +the branched head of a cocoa-nut palm. "There are nuts for us in +all stages." + +"So there are!" cried Peterkin, who being of a very unobservant +nature had been too much taken up with other things to notice +anything so high above his head as the fruit of a palm tree. But, +whatever faults my young comrade had, he could not be blamed for +want of activity or animal spirits. Indeed, the nuts had scarcely +been pointed out to him when he bounded up the tall stem of the +tree like a squirrel, and, in a few minutes, returned with three +nuts, each as large as a man's fist. + +"You had better keep them till we return," raid Jack. "Let us +finish our work before eating." + +"So be it, captain, go ahead," cried Peterkin, thrusting the nuts +into his trousers pocket. "In fact I don't want to eat just now, +but I would give a good deal for a drink. Oh that I could find a +spring! but I don't see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I +say, Jack, how does it happen that you seem to be up to everything? +You have told us the names of half-a-dozen trees already, and yet +you say that you were never in the South Seas before." + +"I'm not up to EVERYTHING, Peterkin, as you'll find out ere long," +replied Jack, with a smile; "but I have been a great reader of +books of travel and adventure all my life, and that has put me up +to a good many things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with." + +"Oh, Jack, that's all humbug. If you begin to lay everything to +the credit of books, I'll quite lose my opinion of you," cried +Peterkin, with a look of contempt. "I've seen a lot o' fellows +that were ALWAYS poring over books, and when they came to try to DO +anything, they were no better than baboons!" + +"You are quite right," retorted Jack; "and I have seen a lot of +fellows who never looked into books at all, who knew nothing about +anything except the things they had actually seen, and very little +they knew even about these. Indeed, some were so ignorant that +they did not know that cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!" + +I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there was +much truth in it, as to Peterkin's ignorance. + +"Humph! maybe you're right," answered Peterkin; "but I would not +give TUPPENCE for a man of books, if he had nothing else in him." + +"Neither would I," said Jack; "but that's no reason why you should +run books down, or think less of me for having read them. Suppose, +now, Peterkin, that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give +you a long and particular account of the way to do it, would not +that be very useful?" + +"No doubt of it," said Peterkin, laughing. + +"And suppose I were to write the account in a letter instead of +telling you in words, would that be less useful?" + +"Well - no, perhaps not." + +"Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in the form +of a book, would it not be as good and useful as ever?" + +"Oh, bother! Jack, you're a philosopher, and that's worse than +anything!" cried Peterkin, with a look of pretended horror. + +"Very well, Peterkin, we shall see," returned Jack, halting under +the shade of a cocoa-nut tree. "You said you were thirsty just a +minute ago; now, jump up that tree and bring down a nut, - not a +ripe one, bring a green, unripe one." + +Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in earnest, he +obeyed. + +"Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it to your +mouth, old fellow," said Jack. + +Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into +uncontrollable laughter at the changes that instantly passed over +his expressive countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to his +mouth, and thrown back his head in order to catch what came out of +it, than his eyes opened to twice their ordinary size with +astonishment, while his throat moved vigorously in the act of +swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense delight overspread +his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being firmly fixed to +the hole in the nut, could not take part in the expression; but he +endeavoured to make up for this by winking at us excessively with +his right eye. At length he stopped, and, drawing a long breath, +exclaimed - + +"Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you're a Briton - the best +fellow I ever met in my life. Only taste that!" said he, turning +to me and holding the nut to my mouth. I immediately drank, and +certainly I was much surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed +copiously down my throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet +taste, mingled with acid; in fact, it was the likest thing to +lemonade I ever tasted, and was most grateful and refreshing. I +handed the nut to Jack, who, after tasting it, said, "Now, +Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa nut in my +life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once read +that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is true!" + +"And pray," asked Peterkin, "what sort of 'stuff' does the ripe nut +contain?" + +"A hollow kernel," answered Jack, "with a liquid like milk in it; +but it does not satisfy thirst so well as hunger. It is very +wholesome food I believe." + +"Meat and drink on the same tree!" cried Peterkin; "washing in the +sea, lodging on the ground, - and all for nothing! My dear boys, +we're set up for life; it must be the ancient Paradise, - hurrah!" +and Peterkin tossed his straw hat in the air, and ran along the +beach hallooing like a madman with delight. + +We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were very +unlike Paradise in many things. But more of this in its proper +place. + +We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had struck, +but did not find a single article, although we searched carefully +among the coral rocks, which at this place jutted out so far as +nearly to join the reef that encircled the island. Just as we were +about to return, however, we saw something black floating in a +little cove that had escaped our observation. Running forward, we +drew it from the water, and found it to be a long thick leather +boot, such as fishermen at home wear; and a few paces farther on we +picked up its fellow. We at once recognised these as having +belonged to our captain, for he had worn them during the whole of +the storm, in order to guard his legs from the waves and spray that +constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on seeing them +was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack soon put my +mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if the captain had +been drowned with the boots on, he would certainly have been washed +ashore along with them, and that he had no doubt whatever he had +kicked them off while in the sea, that he might swim more easily. + +Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, as +Jack said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest too. +I also tried them, but, although I was long enough in the legs for +them, they were much too large in the feet for me; so we handed +them to Jack, who was anxious to make me keep them, but as they +fitted his large limbs and feet as if they had been made for him, I +would not hear of it, so he consented at last to use them. I may +remark, however, that Jack did not use them often, as they were +extremely heavy. + +It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our encampment; +so we put off our visit to the top of a hill till next day, and +employed the light that yet remained to us in cutting down a +quantity of boughs and the broad leaves of a tree, of which none of +us knew the name. With these we erected a sort of rustic bower, in +which we meant to pass the night. There was no absolute necessity +for this, because the air of our island was so genial and balmy +that we could have slept quite well without any shelter; but we +were so little used to sleeping in the open air, that we did not +quite relish the idea of lying down without any covering over us: +besides, our bower would shelter us from the night dews or rain, if +any should happen to fall. Having strewed the floor with leaves +and dry grass, we bethought ourselves of supper. + +But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no means +of making a fire. + +"Now, there's a fix! - what shall we do?" said Peterkin, while we +both turned our eyes to Jack, to whom we always looked in our +difficulties. Jack seemed not a little perplexed. + +"There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach," said he, "but +they are of no use at all without a steel. However, we must try." +So saying, he went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. +On one of these he placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; +but it was with great difficulty that a very small spark was struck +out of the flints, and the tinder, being a bad, hard piece, would +not catch. He then tried the bit of hoop iron, which would not +strike fire at all; and after that the back of the axe, with no +better success. During all these trials Peterkin sat with his +hands in his pockets, gazing with a most melancholy visage at our +comrade, his face growing longer and more miserable at each +successive failure. + +"Oh dear!" he sighed, "I would not care a button for the cooking of +our victuals, - perhaps they don't need it, - but it's so dismal to +eat one's supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital day, +that it's a pity to finish off in this glum style. Oh, I have it!" +he cried, starting up; "the spy-glass, - the big glass at the end +is a burning-glass!" + +"You forget that we have no sun," said I. + +Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the telescope +he had quite overlooked the absence of the sun. + +"Ah, boys, I've got it now!" exclaimed Jack, rising and cutting a +branch from a neighbouring bush, which be stripped of its leaves. +"I recollect seeing this done once at home. Hand me the bit of +whip-cord." With the cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then +he cut a piece, about three inches long, off the end of a dead +branch, which he pointed at the two ends. Round this he passed the +cord of the bow, and placed one end against his chest, which was +protected from its point by a chip of wood; the other point he +placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to saw vigorously +with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill while boring +a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds the tinder began to +smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; and in less than a +quarter of an hour we were drinking our lemonade and eating cocoa +nuts round a fire that would have roasted an entire sheep, while +the smoke, flames, and sparks, flew up among the broad leaves of +the overhanging palm trees, and cast a warm glow upon our leafy +bower. + +That night the starry sky looked down through the gently rustling +trees upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the surf upon +the coral reef was our lullaby. + + + +CHAPTER V. + + + +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith - We luxuriate in the +sea, try our diving powers, and make enchanting excursions among +the coral groves at the bottom of the ocean - The wonders of the +deep enlarged upon. + + +WHAT a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious morning, +and find the rising sun staring into your face with dazzling +brilliancy! - to see the birds twittering in the bushes, and to +hear the murmuring of a rill, or the soft hissing ripples as they +fall upon the sea-shore! At any time and in any place such sights +and sounds are most charming, but more especially are they so when +one awakens to them, for the fist time, in a novel and romantic +situation, with the soft sweet air of a tropical climate mingling +with the fresh smell of the sea, and stirring the strange leaves +that flutter overhead and around one, or ruffling the plumage of +the stranger birds that fly inquiringly around, as if to demand +what business we have to intrude uninvited on their domains. When +I awoke on the morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this +most delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of +leaves, gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees into +the clear blue sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that passed +slowly across it, my heart expanded more and more with an exulting +gladness, the like of which I had never felt before. While I +meditated, my thoughts again turned to the great and kind Creator +of this beautiful world, as they had done on the previous day, when +I first beheld the sea and the coral reef, with the mighty waves +dashing over it into the calm waters of the lagoon. + +While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, for I +had faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to my +beloved mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was with +a feeling of dismay that I remembered I had left it in the ship. I +was much troubled about this. However, I consoled myself with +reflecting that I could keep the second part of my promise to her, +namely, that I should never omit to say my prayers. So I rose +quietly, lest I should disturb my companions, who were still +asleep, and stepped aside into the bushes for this purpose. + +On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay down to +think over our situation. Just at that moment I was attracted by +the sight of a very small parrot, which Jack afterwards told me was +called a paroquet. It was seated on a twig that overhung +Peterkin's head, and I was speedily lost in admiration of its +bright green plumage, which was mingled with other gay colours. +While I looked I observed that the bird turned its head slowly from +side to side and looked downwards, fist with the one eye, and then +with the other. On glancing downwards I observed that Peterkin's +mouth was wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking into +it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in my +composition, and that I never could understand a joke. In regard +to the latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, when they +were explained to me, I understood jokes as well as most people: +but in regard to the former he must certainly have been wrong, for +this bird seemed to me to be extremely funny; and I could not help +thinking that, if it should happen to faint, or slip its foot, and +fall off the twig into Peterkin's mouth, he would perhaps think it +funny too! Suddenly the paroquet bent down its head and uttered a +loud scream in his face. This awoke him, and, with a cry of +surprise, he started up, while the foolish bird flew precipitately +away. + +"Oh you monster!" cried Peterkin, shaking his fist at the bird. +Then he yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked what o'clock it was. + +I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches were +at the bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a little +past sunrise. + +Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he looked up into +the bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his eyes glistened +with delight, and he uttered a faint "hurrah!" and yawned again. +Then he gazed slowly round, till, observing the calm sea through an +opening in the bushes, he started suddenly up as if he had received +an electric shock, uttered a vehement shout, flung off his +garments, and, rushing over the white sands, plunged into the +water. The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow with a look of +grave surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of +intelligence on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that +he only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his +feet, threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a lion- +like spring, dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea with +such force as quite to envelop Peterkin in a shower of spray. Jack +was a remarkably good swimmer and diver, so that after his plunge +we saw no sign of him for nearly a minute; after which he suddenly +emerged, with a cry of joy, a good many yards out from the shore. +My spirits were so much raised by seeing all this that I, too, +hastily threw off my garments and endeavoured to imitate Jack's +vigorous bound; but I was so awkward that my foot caught on a +stump, and I fell to the ground; then I slipped on a stone while +running over the mud, and nearly fell again, much to the amusement +of Peterkin, who laughed heartily, and called me a "slow coach," +while Jack cried out, "Come along, Ralph, and I'll help you." +However, when I got into the water I managed very well, for I was +really a good swimmer, and diver too. I could not, indeed, equal +Jack, who was superior to any Englishman I ever saw, but I +infinitely surpassed Peterkin, who could only swim a little, and +could not dive at all. + +While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in running +along the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, and +occasionally dived for stones. I shall never forget my surprise +and delight on first beholding the bottom of the sea. As I have +before stated, the water within the reef was as calm as a pond; +and, as there was no wind, it was quite clear, from the surface to +the bottom, so that we could see down easily even at a depth of +twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I dived in shallower water, +we expected to have found sand and stones, instead of which we +found ourselves in what appeared really to be an enchanted garden. +The whole of the bottom of the lagoon, as we called the calm water +within the reef, was covered with coral of every shape, size, and +hue. Some portions were formed like large mushrooms; others +appeared like the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached +to them; but the most common kind was a species of branching coral, +and some portions were of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure +white. Among this there grew large quantities of sea-weed of the +richest hues imaginable, and of the most graceful forms; while +innumerable fishes - blue, red, yellow, green, and striped - +sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this submarine +garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our approaching +them. + +On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, Jack +and I rose close to each other. + +"Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so lovely?" said +Jack, as he flung the spray from his hair. + +"Never," I replied. "It appears to me like fairy realms. I can +scarcely believe that we are not dreaming." + +"Dreaming!" cried Jack, "do you know, Ralph, I'm half tempted to +think that we really are dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to +make the most of it, and dream another dive; so here goes, - down +again, my boy!" + +We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other while +under water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we could keep +down much longer than I ever recollect having done in our own seas +at home. I believe that this was owing to the heat of the water, +which was so warm that we afterwards found we could remain in it +for two and three hours at a time without feeling any unpleasant +effects such as we used to experience in the sea at home. When +Jack reached the bottom, he grasped the coral stems, and crept +along on his hands and knees, peeping under the sea-weed and among +the rocks. I observed him also pick up one or two large oysters, +and retain them in his grasp, as if he meant to take them up with +him, so I also gathered a few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a fish +with blue and yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its +tail, but did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and +attempted to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang +like an arrow to the surface, where, on following him, I found him +gasping and coughing, and spitting water from his mouth. In a few +minutes he recovered, and we both turned to swim ashore. + +"I declare, Ralph," said he, "that I actually tried to laugh under +water." + +"So I saw," I replied; "and I observed that you very nearly caught +that fish by the tail. It would have done capitally for breakfast +if you had." + +"Breakfast enough here," said he, holding up the oysters, as we +landed and ran up the beach. "Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. +Split open these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. +They'll agree with the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no doubt." + +Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and opened +them with the edge of our axe, exclaiming, "Now, that IS capital. +There's nothing I'm so fond of." + +"Ah! that's lucky," remarked Jack. "I'll be able to keep you in +good order now, Master Peterkin. You know you can't dive any +better than a cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall +have no oysters for breakfast." + +"I'm very glad that our prospect of breakfast is so good," said I, +"for I'm very hungry." + +"Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph," said Peterkin, +holding a large oyster to my lips. I opened my mouth and swallowed +it in silence, and really it was remarkably good. + +We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for spending +the day. We had no difficulty with the fire this morning, as our +burning-glass was an admirable one; and while we roasted a few +oysters and ate our cocoa nuts, we held a long, animated +conversation about our plans for the future. What those plans +were, and how we carried them into effect, the reader shall see +hereafter. + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + + +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable and +interesting discoveries - We get a dreadful fright - The bread- +fruit tree - Wonderful peculiarity of some of the fruit trees - +Signs of former inhabitants. + + +OUR first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles we +possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a small +cave which we discovered near our encampment. This cave, we hoped, +might be useful to us afterwards as a store-house. Then we cut two +large clubs off a species of very hard tree which grew near at +hand. One of these was given to Peterkin, the other to me, and +Jack armed himself with the axe. We took these precautions because +we purposed to make an excursion to the top of the mountains of the +interior, in order to obtain a better view of our island. Of +course we knew not what dangers might befall us by the way, so +thought it best to be prepared. + +Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished our +fire, we sallied forth and walked a short distance along the sea- +beach, till we came to the entrance of a valley, through which +flowed the rivulet before mentioned. Here we turned our backs on +the sea and struck into the interior. + +The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley was +truly splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle rise in +the land, which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart on each +side of the valley. These ridges, - which, as well as the low +grounds between them, were covered with trees and shrubs of the +most luxuriant kind - continued to recede inland for about two +miles, when they joined the foot of a small mountain. This hill +rose rather abruptly from the head of the valley, and was likewise +entirely covered even to the top with trees, except on one +particular spot near the left shoulder, where was a bare and rocky +place of a broken and savage character. Beyond this hill we could +not see, and we therefore directed our course up the banks of the +rivulet towards the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, +should that be possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was. + +Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, +carrying the axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his enormous +club, came second, as he said he should like to be in a position to +defend me if any danger should threaten. I brought up the rear, +but, having been more taken up with the wonderful and curious +things I saw at starting than with thoughts of possible danger, I +had very foolishly left my club behind me. Although, as I have +said the trees and bushes were very luxuriant, they were not so +thickly crowded together as to hinder our progress among them. We +were able to wind in and out, and to follow the banks of the stream +quite easily, although, it is true, the height and thickness of the +foliage prevented us from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a +jutting-out rock on the hill sides afforded us a position whence we +could enjoy the romantic view and mark our progress towards the +foot of the hill. I wag particularly struck, during the walk, with +the richness of the undergrowth in most places, and recognised many +berries and plants that resembled those of my native land, +especially a tall, elegantly-formed fern, which emitted an +agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of flowers, too, but I +did not see so many of these as I should have expected in such a +climate. We also saw a great variety of small birds of bright +plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one that awoke Peterkin +so rudely in the morning. + +Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering +anything to alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing +close under a part of the hill which was hidden from our view by +the broad leaves of the banana trees, which grew in great +luxuriance in that part. Jack was just preparing to force his way +through this thicket, when we were startled and arrested by a +strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to us quite +different from any of the sounds we had heard during the previous +part of our walk. + +"Hallo!" cried Peterkin, stopping short and grasping his club with +both hands, "what's that?" + +Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right hand, +while with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and +endeavoured to peer amongst them. + +"I can see nothing," he said, after a short pause. + +"I think it - " + +Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all +sprang back and stood on the defensive. For myself, having +forgotten my club, and not having taken the precaution to cut +another, I buttoned my jacket, doubled my fists, and threw myself +into a boxing attitude. I must say, however, that I felt somewhat +uneasy; and my companions afterwards confessed that their thoughts +at this moment had been instantly filled with all they had ever +heard or read of wild beasts and savages, torturings at the stake, +roastings alive, and such like horrible things. Suddenly the +pattering noise increased with tenfold violence. It was followed +by a fearful crash among the bushes, which was rapidly repeated, as +if some gigantic animal were bounding towards us. In another +moment an enormous rock came crashing through the shrubbery, +followed by a cloud of dust and small stones, flew close past the +spot where we stood, carrying bushes and young trees along with it. + +"Pooh! is that all?" exclaimed Peterkin, wiping the perspiration +off his forehead. "Why, I thought it was all the wild men and +beasts in the South Sea Islands galloping on in one grand charge to +sweep us off the face of the earth, instead of a mere stone +tumbling down the mountain side." + +"Nevertheless," remarked Jack, "if that same stone had hit any of +us, it would have rendered the charge you speak of quite +unnecessary, Peterkin." + +This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. On +examining the spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close to the +foot of a very rugged precipice, from which stones of various sizes +were always tumbling at intervals. Indeed, the numerous fragments +lying scattered all around might have suggested the cause of the +sound, had we not been too suddenly alarmed to think of anything. + +We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future +excursions into the interior, we would be careful to avoid this +dangerous precipice. + +Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and prepared to +ascend it. Here Jack made a discovery which caused us all very +great joy. This was a tree of a remarkably beautiful appearance, +which Jack confidently declared to be the celebrated bread-fruit +tree. + +"Is it celebrated?" inquired Peterkin, with a look of great +simplicity. + +"It is," replied Jack + +"That's odd, now," rejoined Peterkin; "never heard of it before." + +"Then it's not so celebrated as I thought it was," returned Jack, +quietly squeezing Peterkin's hat over his eyes; "but listen, you +ignorant boobie! and hear of it now." + +Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as much +interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one of the +most valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears two, +sometimes three, crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit is very +like wheaten bread in appearance, and that it constitutes the +principal food of many of the islanders. + +"So," said Peterkin, "we seem to have everything ready prepared to +our hands in this wonderful island, - lemonade ready bottled in +nuts, and loaf-bread growing on the trees!" + +Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious fact +that he spoke almost the literal truth. "Moreover," continued +Jack, "the bread-fruit tree affords a capital gum, which serves the +natives for pitching their canoes; the bark of the young branches +is made by them into cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and +of a good colour, they build their houses. So you see, lads, that +we have no lack of material here to make us comfortable, if we are +only clever enough to use it." + +"But are you sure that that's it?" asked Peterkin. + +"Quite sure," replied Jack; "for I was particularly interested in +the account I once read of it, and I remember the description well. +I am sorry, however, that I have forgotten the descriptions of many +other trees which I am sure we have seen to-day, if we could but +recognise them. So you see, Peterkin, I'm not up to everything +yet." + +"Never mind, Jack," said Peterkin, with a grave, patronizing +expression of countenance, patting his tall companion on the +shoulder, - "never mind, Jack; you know a good deal for your age. +You're a clever boy, sir, - a promising young man; and if you only +go on as you have begun, sir, you will - " + +The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping up +Peterkin's heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick shrubs, +where, finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking in the +sunshine, while Jack and I examined the bread-tree. + +We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its broad +leaves, which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply indented, +and of a glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The fruit, with which +it was loaded, was nearly round, and appeared to be about six +inches in diameter, with a rough rind, marked with lozenge-shaped +divisions. It was of various colours, from light pea-green to +brown and rich yellow. Jack said that the yellow was the ripe +fruit. We afterwards found that most of the fruit-trees on the +island were evergreens, and that we might, when we wished, pluck +the blossom and the ripe fruit from the same tree. Such a +wonderful difference from the trees of our own country surprised us +not a little. The bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; +the trunk was about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be +twenty feet high, being quite destitute of branches up to that +height, where it branched off into a beautiful and umbrageous head. +We noticed that the fruit hung in clusters of twos and threes on +the branches; but as we were anxious to get to the top of the hill, +we refrained from attempting to pluck any at that time. + +Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and it +was with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep +sides of the hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if possible +a grander, prospect met our gaze. We found that this was not the +highest part of the island, but that another hill lay beyond, with +a wide valley between it and the one on which we stood. This +valley, like the first, was also full of rich trees, some dark and +some light green, some heavy and thick in foliage, and others +light, feathery, and graceful, while the beautiful blossoms on many +of them threw a sort of rainbow tint over all, and gave to the +valley the appearance of a garden of flowers. Among these we +recognised many of the bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, +and also a great many cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we +pushed down the hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to +ascend the second mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to +the top, but the summit was bare, and in some places broken. + +While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with much +interest. This was the stump of a tree that had evidently been cut +down with an axe! So, then, we were not the first who had viewed +this beautiful isle. The hand of man had been at work there before +us. It now began to recur to us again that perhaps the island was +inhabited, although we had not seen any traces of man until now; +but a second glance at the stump convinced us that we had not more +reason to think so now than formerly; for the surface of the wood +was quite decayed, and partly covered with fungus and green matter, +so that it must have been cut many years ago. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "some ship or other has touched here long +ago for wood, and only taken one tree." + +We did not think this likely, however, because, in such +circumstances, the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, and +near the shore, whereas this was a large tree and stood near the +top of the mountain. In fact it was the highest large tree on the +mountain, all above it being wood of very recent growth. + +"I can't understand it," said Jack, scratching the surface of the +stump with his axe. "I can only suppose that the savages have been +here and cut it for some purpose known only to themselves. But, +hallo! what have we here?" + +As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and +fungus from the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces of +marks, as if some inscription or initials had been cut thereon. +But although the traces were distinct, beyond all doubt, the exact +form of the letters could not be made out. Jack thought they +looked like J. S. but we could not be certain. They had apparently +been carelessly cut, and long exposure to the weather had so broken +them up that we could not make out what they were. We were +exceedingly perplexed at this discovery, and stayed a long time at +the place conjecturing what these marks could have been, but +without avail; so, as the day was advancing, we left it and quickly +reached the top of the mountain. + +We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from it we +saw our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around us. As I have +always thought it impossible to get a thing properly into one's +understanding without comprehending it, I shall beg the reader's +patience for a little while I describe our island, thus, shortly:- + +It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; the +other, on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a rich, +beautiful valley, as already said. This valley crossed the island +from one end to the other, being high in the middle and sloping on +each side towards the sea. The large mountain sloped, on the side +farthest from where we had been wrecked, gradually towards the sea; +but although, when viewed at a glance, it had thus a regular +sloping appearance, a more careful observation showed that it was +broken up into a multitude of very small vales, or rather dells and +glens, intermingled with little rugged spots and small but abrupt +precipices here and there, with rivulets tumbling over their edges +and wandering down the slopes in little white streams, sometimes +glistening among the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa-nut +trees, or hid altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base +of this mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which +terminated abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the island, +whence we had come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot of which +diverged three valleys; one being that which we had ascended, with +a smaller vale on each side of it, and separated from it by the two +ridges before mentioned. In these smaller valleys there were no +streams, but they were clothed with the same luxuriant vegetation. + +The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, as it +was almost circular in form, its circumference must have been +thirty miles; - perhaps a little more, if allowance be made for the +numerous bays and indentations of the shore. The entire island was +belted by a beach of pure white sand, on which laved the gentle +ripples of the lagoon. We now also observed that the coral reef +completely encircled the island; but it varied its distance from it +here and there, in some places being a mile from the beach, in +others, a few hundred yards, but the average distance was half a +mile. The reef lay very low, and the spray of the surf broke quite +over it in many places. This surf never ceased its roar, for, +however calm the weather might be, there is always a gentle swaying +motion in the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable out +at sea, reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water +within the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. There were +three narrow openings in the reef; one opposite each end of the +valley which I have described as crossing the island; the other +opposite our own valley, which we afterwards named the Valley of +the Wreck. At each of these openings the reef rose into two small +green islets, covered with bushes and having one or two cocoa-nut +palms on each. These islets were very singular, and appeared as if +planted expressly for the purpose of marking the channel into the +lagoon. Our captain was making for one of these openings the day +we were wrecked, and would have reached it too, I doubt not, had +not the rudder been torn away. Within the lagoon were several +pretty, low coral islands, just opposite our encampment; and, +immediately beyond these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other +islands, at various distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all +of them, as far as we could discern, smaller than ours and +apparently uninhabited. They seemed to be low coral islands, +raised but little above the sea, yet covered with cocoa-nut trees. + +All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the top +of the mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we prepared to +return; but here again we discovered traces of the presence of man. +These were a pole or staff and one or two pieces of wood which had +been squared with an axe. All of these were, however, very much +decayed, and they had evidently not been touched for many years. + +Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. On the +way we fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, but +whether old or of recent date none of us were able to guess. This +also tended to raise our hopes of obtaining some animal food on the +island, so we reached home in good spirits, quite prepared for +supper, and highly satisfied with our excursion. + +After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we came to +the conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went to bed. + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + + +Jack's ingenuity - We get into difficulties about fishing, and get +out of them by a method which gives us a cold bath - Horrible +encounter with a shark. + + +FOR several days after the excursion related in the last chapter we +did not wander far from our encampment, but gave ourselves up to +forming plans for the future and making our present abode +comfortable. + +There were various causes that induced this state of comparative +inaction. In the first place, although everything around us was so +delightful, and we could without difficulty obtain all that we +required for our bodily comfort, we did not quite like the idea of +settling down here for the rest of our lives, far away from our +friends and our native land. To set energetically about +preparations for a permanent residence seemed so like making up our +minds to saying adieu to home and friends for ever, that we tacitly +shrank from it and put off our preparations, for one reason and +another, as long as we could. Then there was a little uncertainty +still as to there being natives on the island, and we entertained a +kind of faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. But as +day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to work +at our homestead. + +During this time, however, we had not been altogether idle. We +made several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, most of which +did not improve it. Then we removed our goods, and took up our +abode in the cave, but found the change so bad that we returned +gladly to the bower. Besides this we bathed very frequently, and +talked a great deal; at least Jack and Peterkin did, - I listened. +Among other useful things, Jack, who was ever the most active and +diligent, converted about three inches of the hoop-iron into an +excellent knife. First he beat it quite flat with the axe. Then +he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with our piece +of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of sand-stone. +When it was finished he used it to shape a better handle, to which +he fixed it with a strip of his cotton handkerchief; - in which +operation he had, as Peterkin pointed out, torn off one of Lord +Nelson's noses. However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by +Peterkin as a fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to +the end of it. This the fish were allowed to swallow, and then +they were pulled quickly ashore. But as the line was very short +and we had no boat, the fish we caught were exceedingly small. + +One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been angling, +and said in a very cross tone, "I'll tell you what, Jack, I'm not +going to be humbugged with catching such contemptible things any +longer. I want you to swim out with me on your back, and let me +fish in deep water!" + +"Dear me, Peterkin," replied Jack, "I had no idea you were taking +the thing so much to heart, else I would have got you out of that +difficulty long ago. Let me see," - and Jack looked down at a +piece of timber on which he had been labouring, with a peculiar +gaze of abstraction, which he always assumed when trying to invent +or discover anything. + +"What say you to building a boat?" he inquired, looking up hastily. + +"Take far too long," was the reply; "can't be bothered waiting. I +want to begin at once!" + +Again Jack considered. "I have it!" he cried. "We'll fell a large +tree and launch the trunk of it in the water, so that when you want +to fish you've nothing to do but to swim out to it." + +"Would not a small raft do better?" said I. + +"Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together with. +Perhaps we may find something hereafter that will do as well, but, +in the meantime, let us try the tree." + +This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far distant, +where we knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew near the +water's edge. As soon as we reached it Jack threw off his coat, +and, wielding the axe with his sturdy arms, hacked and hewed at it +for a quarter of an hour without stopping. Then he paused, and, +while he sat down to rest, I continued the work. Then Peterkin +made a vigorous attack on it, so that when Jack renewed his +powerful blows, a few minutes cutting brought it down with a +terrible crash. + +"Hurrah! now for it," cried Jack; "let us off with its head." + +So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six +yards from the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, short +poles or levers from the stout branches, with which to roll the log +down the beach into the sea; for, as it was nearly two feet thick +at the large end, we could not move it without such helps. With +the levers, however, we rolled it slowly into the sea. + +Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next shaped +the levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted to embark. +This was easy enough to do; but, after seating ourselves astride +the log, it was with the utmost difficulty we kept it from rolling +round and plunging us into the water. Not that we minded that +much; but we preferred, if possible, to fish in dry clothes. To be +sure, our trousers were necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling +in the water on each side of the log; but, as they could be easily +dried, we did not care. After half an hour's practice, we became +expert enough to keep our balance pretty steadily. Then Peterkin +laid down his paddle, and having baited his line with a whole +oyster, dropt it into deep water. + +"Now, then, Jack," said he, "be cautious; steer clear o' that sea- +weed. There; that's it; gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at +least a foot long down there, coming to - ha! that's it! Oh! +bother, he's off." + +"Did he bite?" said Jack, urging the log onwards a little with his +paddle. + +"Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the moment I began to +haul he opened his jaws and let it out again." + +"Let him swallow it next time," said Jack, laughing at the +melancholy expression of Peterkin's visage. + +"There he's again," cried Peterkin, his eyes flashing with +excitement. "Look out! Now then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute +WON'T swallow it!" + +"Try to haul him up by the mouth, then," cried Jack. "Do it +gently." + +A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor Peterkin +had tried and failed again. + +"Never mind, lad," said Jack, in a voice of sympathy; "we'll move +on, and offer it to some other fish." So saying, Jack plied his +paddle; but scarcely had he moved from the spot, when a fish with +an enormous head and a little body darted from under a rock and +swallowed the bait at once. + +"Got him this time, - that's a fact!" cried Peterkin, hauling in +the line. "He's swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I +declare. Oh what a thumper!" + +As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward to +see it, and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his arms round +the fish's neck; and, in another instant, we were all floundering +in the water! + +A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface like +three drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We soon recovered +our position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin secured the fish, +which had well-nigh escaped in the midst of our struggles. It was +little worth having, however; but, as Peterkin remarked, it was +better than the smouts he had been catching for the last two or +three days; so we laid it on the log before us, and having re- +baited the line, dropt it in again for another. + +Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention was +suddenly attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards away +from us. Peterkin shouted to us to paddle in that direction, as he +thought it was a big fish, and we might have a chance of catching +it. But Jack, instead of complying, said, in a deep, earnest tone +of voice, which I never before heard him use, - + +"Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; quick, - it's a +shark!" + +The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for it +must be remembered that our legs were hanging down in the water, +and we could not venture to pull them up without upsetting the log. +Peterkin instantly hauled up the line; and, grasping his paddle, +exerted himself to the utmost, while we also did our best to make +for shore. But we were a good way off, and the log being, as I +have before said, very heavy, moved but slowly through the water. +We now saw the shark quite distinctly swimming round and round us, +its sharp fin every now and then protruding above the water. From +its active and unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up its +mind to attack us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our +lives, while he himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted +"Look out! - there he comes!" and in a second we saw the monstrous +fish dive close under us, and turn half over on his side. But we +all made a great commotion with our paddles, which no doubt +frightened it away for that time, as we saw it immediately after +circling round us as before. + +"Throw the fish to him," cried Jack, in a quick, suppressed voice; +"we'll make the shore in time yet if we can keep him off for a few +minutes." + +Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then plied +his paddle again with all his might. No sooner had the fish fallen +on the water than we observed the shark to sink. In another second +we saw its white breast rising; for sharks always turn over on +their sides when about to seize their prey, their mouths being not +at the point of their heads like those of other fish, but, as it +were, under their chins. In another moment his snout rose above +the water, - his wide jaws, armed with a terrific double row of +teeth, appeared. The dead fish was engulfed, and the shark sank +out of sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that it would be +satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its quick +motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once. + +"Stop paddling," cried Jack suddenly. "I see it coming up behind +us. Now, obey my orders quickly. Our lives may depend on it +Ralph. Peterkin, do your best to BALANCE THE LOG. Don't look out +for the shark. Don't glance behind you. Do nothing but balance +the log." + +Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only too +glad to do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of escape, +for we had implicit confidence in Jack's courage and wisdom. For a +few seconds, that seemed long minutes to my mind, we sat thus +silently; but I could not resist glancing backward, despite the +orders to the contrary. On doing so, I saw Jack sitting rigid like +a statue, with his paddle raised, his lips compressed, and his eye- +brows bent over his eyes, which glared savagely from beneath them +down into the water. I also saw the shark, to my horror, quite +close under the log, in the act of darting towards Jack's foot. I +could scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In another moment +the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the water, and +threw it over the log. The monster's snout rubbed against the log +as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into which Jack +instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its throat. So +violent was the act that Jack rose to his feet in performing it; +the log was thereby rolled completely over, and we were once more +plunged into the water. We all rose, spluttering and gasping, in a +moment. + +"Now then, strike out for shore," cried Jack. "Here, Peterkin, +catch hold of my collar, and kick out with a will." + +Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such force +that he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being free from +all encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with him. As we had by +this time drawn pretty near to the shore, a few minutes more +sufficed to carry us into shallow water; and, finally, we landed in +safety, though very much exhausted, and not a little frightened by +our terrible adventure. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + + +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to dive - How +he did it - More difficulties overcome - The water garden - Curious +creatures of the sea - The tank - Candles missed very much, and the +candle-nut tree discovered - Wonderful account of Peterkin's first +voyage - Cloth found growing on a tree - A plan projected, and arms +prepared for offence and defence - A dreadful cry. + + +OUR encounter with the shark was the first great danger that had +befallen us since landing on this island, and we felt very +seriously affected by it, especially when we considered that we had +so often unwittingly incurred the same danger before while bathing. +We were now forced to take to fishing again in the shallow water, +until we should succeed in constructing a raft. What troubled us +most, however, was, that we were compelled to forego our morning +swimming excursions. We did, indeed, continue to enjoy our bathe +in the shallow water, but Jack and I found that one great source of +our enjoyment was gone, when we could no longer dive down among the +beautiful coral groves at the bottom of the lagoon. We had come to +be so fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest in +watching the formations of coral and the gambols of the many +beautiful fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that +we had become quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and +the localities that they chiefly haunted. We had also become +expert divers. But we made it a rule never to stay long under +water at a time. Jack told me that to do so often was bad for the +lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, would ere long do us +a serious injury. So we never stayed at the bottom as long as we +might have done, but came up frequently to the top for fresh air, +and dived down again immediately. Sometimes, when Jack happened to +be in a humorous frame, he would seat himself at the bottom of the +sea on one of the brain corals, as if he were seated on a large +paddock-stool, and then make faces at me, in order, if possible, to +make me laugh under water. At first, when he took me unawares, he +nearly succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to +laugh; but afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being +naturally of a grave disposition, I had no difficulty in +restraining myself. I used often to wonder how poor Peterkin would +have liked to be with us; and he sometimes expressed much regret at +being unable to join us. I used to do my best to gratify him, poor +fellow, by relating all the wonders that we saw; but this, instead +of satisfying, seemed only to whet his curiosity the more, so one +day we prevailed on him to try to go down with us. But, although a +brave boy in every other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the +water, and it was with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken +down, for he could never have managed to push himself down to the +bottom without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a +yard or so into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle and +kick violently, so we were forced to let him go, when he rose out +of the water like a cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful roar, +and struck out for the land with the utmost possible haste. + +Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought +thereon, Jack and I felt very much depressed in our spirits. I +could see, also, that Peterkin grieved and sympathized with us, +for, when talking about this matter, he refrained from jesting and +bantering us upon it. + +As, however, a man's difficulties usually set him upon devising +methods to overcome them, whereby he often discovers better things +than those he may have lost, so this our difficulty induced us to +think of searching for a large pool among the rocks, where the +water should be deep enough for diving yet so surrounded by rocks +as to prevent sharks from getting at us. And such a pool we +afterwards found, which proved to be very much better than our most +sanguine hopes anticipated. It was situated not more than ten +minutes' walk from our camp, and was in the form of a small deep +bay or basin, the entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so +shallow that no fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not +unless he should be a remarkably thin one. + +Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the coral +formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed plants far +more lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon itself. And +the water was so clear and still, that, although very deep, you +could see the minutest object at the bottom. Besides this, there +was a ledge of rock which overhung the basin at its deepest part, +from which we could dive pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit +and see not only all the wonders I had described to him, but also +see Jack and me creeping amongst the marine shrubbery at the +bottom, like, as - he expressed it, - "two great white sea- +monsters." During these excursions of ours to the bottom of the +sea, we began to get an insight into the manners and customs of its +inhabitants, and to make discoveries of wonderful things, the like +of which we never before conceived. Among other things, we were +deeply interested with the operations of the little coral insect +which, I was informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely +constructed many of the numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, +certainly, when we considered the great reef which these insects +had formed round the island on which we were cast, and observed +their ceaseless activity in building their myriad cells, it did at +first seem as if this might be true; but then, again, when I looked +at the mountains of the island, and reflected that there were +thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South Seas, I +doubted that there must be some mistake here. But more of this +hereafter. + +I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of the +anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and such-like +creatures; and was not content with watching those I saw during my +dives in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop out a hole in the +coral rock close to it, which I filled with salt water, and stocked +with sundry specimens of anemones and shell-fish, in order to watch +more closely how they were in the habit of passing their time. Our +burning-glass also now became a great treasure to me, as it enabled +me to magnify, and so to perceive more clearly the forms and +actions of these curious creatures of the deep. + +Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we +began to talk of a project which we had long had in contemplation, +- namely, to travel entirely round the island; in order, first, to +ascertain whether it contained any other productions which might be +useful to us; and, second, to see whether there might be any place +more convenient and suitable for our permanent residence than that +on which we were now encamped. Not that we were in any degree +dissatisfied with it; on the contrary, we entertained quite a home- +feeling to our bower and its neighbourhood; but if a better place +did exist, there was no reason why we should not make use of it. +At any rate, it would be well to know of its existence. + +We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack proposed that, +before undertaking such an excursion, we should supply ourselves +with good defensive arms, for, as we intended not only to go round +all the shore, but to ascend most of the valleys, before returning +home, we should be likely to meet in with, he would not say +dangers, but, at least, with everything that existed on the island, +whatever that might be. + +"Besides," said Jack, "it won't do for us to live on cocoa-nuts and +oysters always. No doubt they are very excellent in their way, but +I think a little animal food, now and then, would be agreeable as +well as good for us; and as there are many small birds among the +trees, some of which are probably very good to eat, I think it +would be a capital plan to make bows and arrows, with which we +could easily knock them over." + +"First rate!" cried Peterkin. "You will make the bows, Jack, and +I'll try my hand at the arrows. The fact is, I'm quite tired of +throwing stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I +think, and have persevered up to the present time, but I've never +hit anything yet." + +"You forget," said I, "you hit me one day on the shin." + +"Ah, true," replied Peterkin, "and a precious shindy you kicked up +in consequence. But you were at least four yards away from the +impudent paroquet I aimed at; so you see what a horribly bad shot I +am." + +"But," said I, "Jack, you cannot make three bows and arrows before +to-morrow, and would it not be a pity to waste time, now that we +have made up our minds to go on this expedition? Suppose that you +make one bow and arrow for yourself, and we can take our clubs?" + +"That's true, Ralph. The day is pretty far advanced, and I doubt +if I can make even one bow before dark. To be sure I might work by +fire-light, after the sun goes down." + +We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed with the +sun, as we had no pressing call to work o' nights; and, indeed, our +work during the day was usually hard enough, - what between +fishing, and improving our bower, and diving in the Water Garden, +and rambling in the woods; so that, when night came, we were +usually very glad to retire to our beds. But now that we had a +desire to work at night, we felt a wish for candles. + +"Won't a good blazing fire give you light enough?" inquired +Peterkin. + +"Yes," replied Jack, "quite enough; but then it will give us a +great deal more than enough of heat in this warm climate of ours." + +"True," said Peterkin; "I forgot that. It would roast us." + +"Well, as you're always doing that at any rate," remarked Jack, "we +could scarcely call it a change. But the fact is, I've been +thinking over this subject before. There is a certain nut growing +in these islands which is called the candle-nut, because the +natives use it instead of candles, and I know all about it, and how +to prepare it for burning - " + +"Then why don't you do it?" interrupted Peterkin. "Why have you +kept us in the dark so long, you vile philosopher?" + +"Because," said Jack, "I have not seen the tree yet, and I'm not +sure that I should know either the tree or the nuts if I did see +them. You see, I forget the description." + +"Ah! that's just the way with me," said Peterkin with a deep sigh. +"I never could keep in my mind for half an hour the few +descriptions I ever attempted to remember. The very first voyage I +ever made was caused by my mistaking a description, or forgetting +it, which is the same thing. And a horrible voyage it was. I had +to fight with the captain the whole way out, and made the homeward +voyage by swimming!" + +"Come, Peterkin," said I, "you can't get even ME to believe that." + +"Perhaps not, but it's true, notwithstanding," returned Peterkin, +pretending to be hurt at my doubting his word. + +"Let us hear how it happened," said Jack, while a good-natured +smile overspread his face. + +"Well, you must know," began Peterkin, "that the very day before I +went to sea, I was greatly taken up with a game at hockey, which I +was playing with my old school-fellows for the last time before +leaving them. You see I was young then, Ralph." Peterkin gazed, +in an abstracted and melancholy manner, out to sea! "Well, in the +midst of the game, my uncle, who had taken all the bother and +trouble of getting me bound 'prentice and rigged out, came and took +me aside, and told me that he was called suddenly away from home, +and would not be able to see me aboard, as he had intended. +'However,' said he, 'the captain knows you are coming, so that's +not of much consequence; but as you'll have to find the ship +yourself, you must remember her name and description. D'ye hear, +boy?' I certainly did hear, but I'm afraid I did not understand, +for my mind was so taken up with the game, which I saw my side was +losing, that I began to grow impatient, and the moment my uncle +finished his description of the ship, and bade me good-bye, I +bolted back to my game, with only a confused idea of three masts, +and a green painted tafferel, and a gilt figure-head of Hercules +with his club at the bow. Next day I was so much cast down with +everybody saying good-bye, and a lot o' my female friends cryin' +horribly over me, that I did not start for the harbour, where the +ship was lying among a thousand others, till it was almost too +late. So I had to run the whole way. When I reached the pier, +there were so many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. 'Now,' said I to myself, 'Peterkin, +you're in a fix.' Then I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and +three masts, belonging to a ship just about to start; so I darted +on board, but speedily jumped on shore again, when I found that two +of the masts belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a +third! At last I caught sight of what I made sure was it, - a fine +large vessel just casting off her moorings. The tafferel was +green. Three masts, - yes, that must be it, - and the gilt figure- +head of Hercules. To be sure it had a three-pronged pitchfork in +its hand instead of a club; but that might be my uncle's mistake; +or perhaps Hercules sometimes varied his weapons. 'Cast off!' +roared a voice from the quarter-deck. 'Hold on!' cried I, rushing +frantically through the crowd. 'Hold on! hold on!' repeated some +of the bystanders, while the men at the ropes delayed for a minute. +This threw the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his +friends had come down to see him off, and having his orders +contradicted so flatly was too much for him. However, the delay +was sufficient. I took a race and a good leap; the ropes were cast +off; the steam-tug gave a puff, and we started. Suddenly the +captain was up to me: 'Where did you come from, you scamp, and +what do you want here?' + +"'Please, sir,' said I, touching my cap, 'I'm you're new 'prentice +come aboard.' + +"'New 'Prentice,' said he, stamping, 'I've got no new 'prentice. +My boys are all aboard already. This is a trick, you young +blackguard. You've run away, you have;' and the captain stamped +about the deck and swore dreadfully; for, you see, the thought of +having to stop the ship and lower a boat and lose half an hour, all +for the slake of sending a small boy ashore, seemed to make him +very angry. Besides, it was blowin' fresh outside the harbour, so +that, to have let the steamer alongside to put me into it was no +easy job. Just as we were passing the pier-head, where several +boats were rowing into harbour, the captain came up to me, - + +"'You've run away, you blackguard,' he said, giving me a box on the +ear. + +"'No I haven't,' said I, angrily; for the box was by no means a +light one. + +"Hark'ee, boy, can you swim?' + +"'Yes,' said I. + +"'Then do it,' and, seizing me by my trousers and the nape of my +neck, he tossed me over the side into the sea. The fellows in the +boats at the end of the pier, backed their oars on seeing this; but +observing that I could swim, they allowed me to make the best of my +way to the pier-head. So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim +my first homeward voyage." + +Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. "But tell us +about the candle-nut tree," said I; "you were talking about it." + +"Very true," said Jack, "but I fear I can remember little about it. +I believe the nut is about the size of a walnut; and I think that +the leaves are white, but I am not sure." + +"Eh! ha! hum!" exclaimed Peterkin, "I saw a tree answering to that +description this very day." + +"Did you?" cried Jack. "Is it far from this?" + +"No, not half a mile." + +"Then lead me to it," said Jack, seizing his axe. + +In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the underwood of +the forest, headed by Peterkin. + +We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had closely +examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut tree. Its leaves +were of a beautiful silvery white, and formed a fine contrast to +the dark-green foliage of the surrounding trees. We immediately +filled our pockets with the nuts, after which Jack said, - + +"Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one of the +long branches." + +This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was very +high, and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger trees, +he was not much accustomed to climbing the high ones. The leaf or +branch was a very large one, and we were surprised at its size and +strength. Viewed from a little distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems +to be a tall, straight stem, without a single branch except at the +top, where there is a tuft of feathery-looking leaves, that seem to +wave like soft plumes in the wind. But when we saw one of these +leaves or branches at our feet, we found it to be a strong stalk, +about fifteen feet long, with a number of narrow, pointed leaflets +ranged alternately on each side. But what seemed to us the most +wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling cloth, +which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where it had +been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had the greatest +difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, on account of +this substance, as it was wrapped quite round the tree, and, he +observed, round all the other branches, thus forming a strong +support to the large leaves while exposed to high winds. When I +call this substance cloth I do not exaggerate. Indeed, with regard +to all the things I saw during my eventful career in the South +Seas, I have been exceedingly careful not to exaggerate, or in any +way to mislead or deceive my readers. This cloth, I say, was +remarkably like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam or +fibre down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, +about the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these +fibres, very long and tough, the one layer crossing the other +obliquely, and the whole was cemented together with a still finer +fibrous and adhesive substance. When we regarded it attentively, +we could with difficulty believe that it had not been woven by +human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth we stripped carefully +off, and found it to be above two feet long, by a foot broad, and +we carried it home with us as a great prize. + +Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the central +spine or stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. Having made a +small fire, he baked the nuts slightly, and then pealed off the +husks. After this he wished to bore a hole in them, which, not +having anything better at hand at the time, he did with the point +of our useless pencil-case. Then he strung them on the cocoa-nut +spine, and on putting a light to the topmost nut, we found to our +joy that it burned with a clear, beautiful flame; upon seeing +which, Peterkin sprang up and danced round the fire for at least +five minutes in the excess of his satisfaction. + +"Now lads," said Jack, extinguishing our candle, the sun will set +in an hour, so we have no time to lose. "I shall go and cut a +young tree to make my bow out of, and you had better each of you go +and select good strong sticks for clubs, and we'll set to work at +them after dark." + +So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by Peterkin, +while I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, and fell to +examining its structure. So engrossed was I in this that I was +still sitting in the same attitude and occupation when my +companions returned. + +"I told you so!" cried Peterkin, with a loud laugh. "Oh, Ralph, +you're incorrigible. See, there's a club for you. I was sure, +when we left you looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find +you poring over it when we came back, so I just cut a club for you +as well as for myself." + +"Thank you, Peterkin," said I. "It was kind of you to do that, +instead of scolding me for a lazy fellow, as I confess I deserve." + +"Oh! as to that," returned Peterkin, "I'll blow you up yet, if you +wish it - only it would be of no use if I did, for you're a perfect +mule!" + +As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing it in +a holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our bower, we +seated ourselves on our leafy beds and began to work. + +"I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use," said Jack, +chipping the piece of wood he had brought with his axe. "I used to +be a pretty fair shot once. But what's that you're doing?" he +added, looking at Peterkin, who had drawn the end of a long pole +into the tent, and was endeavouring to fit a small piece of the +hoop-iron to the end of it. + +"I'm going to enlist into the Lancers," answered Peterkin. "You +see, Jack, I find the club rather an unwieldy instrument for my +delicately-formed muscles, and I flatter myself I shall do more +execution with a spear." + +"Well, if length constitutes power," said Jack, "you'll certainly +be invincible." + +The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, being a +very strong but light and tough young tree, which merely required +thinning at the butt to be a serviceable weapon. + +"That's a very good idea," said I. + +"Which - this?" inquired Peterkin, pointing to the spear. + +"Yes;" I replied. + +"Humph!" said he; "you'd find it a pretty tough and matter-of-fact +idea, if you had it stuck through your gizzard, old boy!" + +"I mean the idea of making it is a good one," said I, laughing. +"And, now I think of it, I'll change my plan, too. I don't think +much of a club, so I'll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. +I used to be very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David +slaying Goliath the Philistine, and I was once thought to be expert +at it." + +So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time we all +worked very busily without speaking. At length Peterkin looked up: +"I say, Jack, I'm sorry to say I must apply to you for another +strip of your handkerchief, to tie on this rascally head with. +It's pretty well torn at any rate, so you won't miss it." + +Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin suddenly +laid his hand on his arm and arrested him. + +"Hist, man," said he, "be tender; you should never be needlessly +cruel if you can help it. Do try to shave past Lord Nelson's mouth +without tearing it, if possible! Thanks. There are plenty more +handkerchiefs on the cocoa-nut trees." + +Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record his +jests and humorous sayings now! + +While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but most +strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the sea, but was +so far away that we could not clearly distinguish its precise +direction. Rushing out of our bower, we hastened down to the beach +and stayed to listen. Again it came quite loud and distinct on the +night air, - a prolonged, hideous cry, something like the braying +of an ass. The moon had risen, and we could see the islands in and +beyond the lagoon quite plainly, but there was no object visible to +account for such a cry. A strong gust of wind was blowing from the +point whence the sound came, but this died away while we were +gazing out to sea. + +"What can it be?" said Peterkin, in a low whisper, while we all +involuntarily crept closer to each other. + +"Do you know," said Jack, "I have heard that mysterious sound twice +before, but never so loud as to-night. Indeed it was so faint that +I thought I must have merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to +alarm you, I said nothing about it." + +We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did not +come, we returned to the bower and resumed our work. + +"Very strange," said Peterkin, quite gravely. "Do you believe in +ghosts, Ralph?" + +"No," I answered, "I do not. Nevertheless I must confess that +strange, unaccountable sounds, such as we have just heard, make me +feel a little uneasy." + +"What say you to it, Jack?" + +"I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy," he replied. "I +never saw a ghost myself, and I never met with any one who had; and +I have generally found that strange and unaccountable things have +almost always been accounted for, and found to be quite simple, on +close examination. I certainly can't imagine what THAT sound is; +but I'm quite sure I shall find out before long, - and if it's a +ghost I'll - " + +"Eat it," cried Peterkin. + +"Yes, I'll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two arrows are finished; +so if you're ready we had better turn in." + +By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an iron +point very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, the +lines of which were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut cloth, +plaited; and Jack had made a stout bow, nearly five feet long, with +two arrows, feathered with two or three large plumes which some +bird had dropt. They had no barbs, but Jack said that if arrows +were well feathered, they did not require iron points, but would +fly quite well if merely sharpened at the point; which I did not +know before. + +"A feathered arrow without a barb," said he, "is a good weapon, but +a barbed arrow without feathers is utterly useless." + +The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, part of +which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the bow. + +Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought it +wise to exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons +before starting, so we spent the whole of the next day in +practising. And it was well we did so, for we found that our arms +were very imperfect, and that we were far from perfect in the use +of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much too strong, and +he had to thin it. Also the spear was much too heavy, and so had +to be reduced in thickness, although nothing would induce Peterkin +to have it shortened. My sling answered very well, but I had +fallen so much out of practice that my first stone knocked off +Peterkin's hat, and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. +However, after having spent the whole day in diligent practice, we +began to find some of our former expertness returning - at least +Jack and I did. As for Peterkin, being naturally a neat-handed +boy, he soon handled his spear well, and could run full tilt at a +cocoa nut, and hit it with great precision once out of every five +times. + +But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to the +unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had made him +Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from morning +till night, perseveringly, at the same thing. Peterkin wished very +much to run about and stick his spear into everything he passed; +but Jack put up a cocoa nut, and would not let him leave off +running at that for a moment, except when he wanted to rest. We +laughed at Jack for this, but we were both convinced that it did us +much good. + +That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down to +rest, although we were much fatigued, in order that we might be in +readiness to set out on our expedition at daylight on the following +morning. + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + + +Prepare for a journey round the island - Sagacious reflections - +Mysterious appearances and startling occurrences. + + +SCARCELY had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of the +broad Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing in +Peterkin's ear to awaken him, ran down the beach to take his +customary dip in the sea. We did not, as was our wont, bathe that +morning in our Water Garden, but, in order to save time, refreshed +ourselves in the shallow water just opposite the bower. Our +breakfast was also despatched without loss of time, and in less +than an hour afterwards all our preparations for the journey were +completed. + +In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of cocoa-nut +cloth round his waist, into which he thrust the axe. I was also +advised to put on a belt and carry a short cudgel or bludgeon in +it; for, as Jack truly remarked, the sling would be of little use +if we should chance to come to close quarters with any wild animal. +As for Peterkin, notwithstanding that he carried such a long, and I +must add, frightful-looking spear over his shoulder, we could not +prevail on him to leave his club behind; "for," said he, "a spear +at close quarters is not worth a button." I must say that it +seemed to me that the club was, to use his own style of language, +not worth a button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the head, +something like the club which I remember to have observed in +picture-books of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that +he required to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at +all. However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out +upon our travels. + +We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as we +knew that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in with +cocoa-nut trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as Peterkin +said, with meat and drink and pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the +precaution, however, to put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest +we should want fire. + +The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that very still +and peaceful sort which made the few noises that we heard seem to +be QUIET noises. I know no other way of expressing this idea. +Noises which so far from interrupting the universal tranquillity of +earth, sea, and sky - rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the +world around us really was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the +peculiarly melancholy - yet, it seemed to me, cheerful - plaint of +sea-birds floating on the glassy water, or sailing in the sky, also +the subdued twittering of little birds among the bushes, the faint +ripples on the beach, and the solemn boom of the surf upon the +distant coral reef. We felt very glad in our hearts as we walked +along the sands side by side. For my part, I felt so deeply +overjoyed, that I was surprised at my own sensations, and fell into +a reverie upon the causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion +that a state of profound peace and repose, both in regard to +outward objects and within the soul, is the happiest condition in +which man can be placed; for, although I had many a time been most +joyful and happy when engaged in bustling, energetic, active +pursuits or amusements, I never found that such joy or satisfaction +was so deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as that which I now +experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this opinion when I +observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that Peterkin's +happiness was also very great; yet he did not express this by +dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much as a single +shout, but walked quietly between us with his eye sparkling, and a +joyful smile upon his countenance. My reader must not suppose that +I thought all this in the clear and methodical manner in which I +have set it down here. These thoughts did, indeed, pass through my +mind, but they did so in a very confused and indefinite manner, for +I was young at that time, and not much given to deep reflections. +Neither did I consider that the peace whereof I write is not to be +found in this world - at least in its perfection, although I have +since learned that by religion a man may attain to a very great +degree of it. + +I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between us. We +had two ways of walking together about our island. When we +travelled through the woods, we always did so in single file, as by +this method we advanced with greater facility, the one treading in +the other's footsteps. In such cases Jack always took the lead, +Peterkin followed, and I brought up the rear. But when we +travelled along the sands, which extended almost in an unbroken +line of glistening white round the island, we marched abreast, as +we found this method more sociable, and every way more pleasant. +Jack, being the tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin marched +between us, as by this arrangement either of us could talk to him +or he to us, while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse +together, we could conveniently do so over Peterkin's head. +Peterkin used to say, in reference to this arrangement, that had he +been as tall as either of us, our order of march might have been +the same, for, as Jack often used to scold him for letting +everything we said to him pass in at one ear and out at the other, +his head could of course form no interruption to our discourse. + +We were now fairly started. Half a mile's walk conveyed us round a +bend in the land which shut out our bower from view, and for some +time we advanced at a brisk pace without speaking, though our eyes +were not idle, but noted everything, in the woods, on the shore, or +in the sea, that was interesting. After passing the ridge of land +that formed one side of our valley - the Valley of the Wreck - we +beheld another small vale lying before us in all the luxuriant +loveliness of tropical vegetation. We had, indeed, seen it before +from the mountain-top, but we had no idea that it would turn out to +be so much more lovely when we were close to it. We were about to +commence the exploration of this valley, when Peterkin stopped us, +and directed our attention to a very remarkable appearance in +advance along the shore. + +"What's yon, think you?" said he, levelling his spear, as if he +expected an immediate attack from the object in question, though it +was full half a mile distant. + +As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as if +of steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of several feet, +and then disappeared. Had this been near the sea, we would not +have been so greatly surprised, as it might in that case have been +the surf, for at this part of the coast the coral reef approached +so near to the island that in some parts it almost joined it. +There was therefore no lagoon between, and the heavy surf of the +ocean beat almost up to the rocks. But this white column appeared +about fifty yards inland. The rocks at the place were rugged, and +they stretched across the sandy beach into the sea. Scarce had we +ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when another column +flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot where the +first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long irregular +intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were now quite sure +that the columns were watery or composed of spray, but what caused +them we could not guess, so we determined to go and see. + +In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the +spray. We had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The ground also was +full of holes here and there. Now, while we stood anxiously +waiting for the re-appearance of these water-spouts, we heard a +low, rumbling sound near us, which quickly increased to a gargling +and hissing noise, and a moment afterwards a thick spout of water +burst upwards from a hole in the rock, and spouted into the air +with much violence, and so close to where Jack and I were standing +that it nearly touched us. We sprang to one side, but not before a +cloud of spray descended, and drenched us both to the skin. + +Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few drops, +and burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on beholding our +miserable plight. + +"Mind your eye!" he shouted eagerly, "there goes another!" The +words were scarcely out of his mouth when there came up a spout +from another hole, which served us exactly in the same manner as +before. + +Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was abruptly +put a stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to where he +stood. + +"Where'll it spout this time, I wonder?" he said, looking about +with some anxiety, and preparing to run. Suddenly there came a +loud hiss or snort; a fierce spout of water burst up between +Peterkin's legs, blew him off his feet, enveloped him in its spray, +and hurled him to the ground. He fell with so much violence that +we feared he must have broken some of his bones, and ran anxiously +to his assistance; but fortunately he had fallen on a clump of +tangled herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most deplorable +condition. + +It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite sure +that he was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the next spout +might arise, we assisted him hastily to jump up and hurry from the +spot. + +I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the spout of +water was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin completely off his +legs, I am not quite certain of the exact height to which it lifted +him, being somewhat startled by the event, and blinded partially by +the spray, so that my power of observation was somewhat impaired +for the moment. + +"What's to be done now?" inquired Peterkin ruefully. + +"Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves," replied Jack. + +"And here is material ready to our hand," said I, picking up a +dried branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the woods. + +In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again dried. +While they were hanging up before the fire, we walked down to the +beach, and soon observed that these curious spouts took place +immediately after the fall of a huge wave, never before it; and, +moreover, that the spouts did not take place excepting when the +billow was an extremely large one. From this we concluded that +there must be a subterraneous channel in the rock into which the +water was driven by the larger waves, and finding no way of escape +except through these small holes, was thus forced up violently +through them. At any rate, we could not conceive any other reason +for these strange water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple +and probable one, we forthwith adopted it. + +"I say, Ralph, what's that in the water? is it a shark?" said Jack, +just as we were about to quit the place. + +I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which he +was looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I saw a +very faint pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed to move +slightly while I looked at it. + +"It's like a fish of some sort," said I. + +"Hallo, Peterkin!" cried Jack, "fetch your spear; here's work for +it." + +But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be too +short. + +"There, now," said Peterkin with a sneer, "you were always telling +me it was too long." + +Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let go +his hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must have +missed, for the handle soon rose again; and when the spear was +drawn up, there was the pale green object in exactly the same spot, +slowly moving its tail. + +"Very odd," said Jack. + +But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack and +all of us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could neither hit +it nor drive it away, so we were compelled to continue our journey +without discovering what it was. I was very much perplexed at this +strange appearance in the water, and could not get it out of my +mind for a long time afterwards. However, I quieted myself by +resolving that I would pay a visit to it again at some more +convenient season. + + + +CHAPTER X. + + + +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits - The resources +of the Coral Island gradually unfolded - The banian-tree - Another +tree which is supported by natural planks - Water-fowl found - A +very remarkable discovery, and a very peculiar murder - We +luxuriate on the fat of the land. + + +OUR examination of the little valley proved to be altogether most +satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to those we +had already seen in our own valley, but also one or two others of a +different species. We had also the satisfaction of discovering a +peculiar vegetable, which Jack concluded must certainly be that of +which he had read as being very common among the South Sea +islanders, and which was named TARO. Also we found a large supply +of yams, and another root like a potato in appearance. As these +were all quite new to us, we regarded our lot as a most fortunate +one, in being thus cast on an island which was so prolific and so +well stored with all the necessaries of life. Long afterwards we +found out that this island of ours was no better in these respects +than thousands of other islands in those seas. Indeed, many of +them were much richer and more productive; but that did not render +us the less grateful for our present good fortune. We each put one +of these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our supper; +of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds here, +and traces of some four-footed animal again. Meanwhile the sun +began to descend, so we returned to the shore, and pushed on round +the spouting rocks into the next valley. This was that valley of +which I have spoken as running across the entire island. It was by +far the largest and most beautiful that we had yet looked upon. +Here were trees of every shape and size and hue which it is +possible to conceive of, many of which we had not seen in the other +valleys; for, the stream in this valley being larger, and the mould +much richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was clothed with a +more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees were dark +glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting well with +those of a pale light green, which were everywhere abundant. Among +these we recognised the broad dark heads of the bread-fruit, with +its golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage of the candle-nut, and +several species which bore a strong resemblance to the pine; while +here and there, in groups and in single trees, rose the tall forms +of the cocoa-nut palms, spreading abroad, and waving their graceful +plumes high above all the rest, as if they were a superior race of +stately giants keeping guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it +was a most enchanting scene, and I thanked God for having created +such delightful spots for the use of man. + +Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack +uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a +little to one side of us, said, - + +"That's a banian-tree." + +"And what's a banian-tree?" inquired Peterkin, as we walked towards +it. + +"A very curious one, as you shall see presently," replied Jack. +"It is called the AOA here, if I recollect rightly, and has a +wonderful peculiarity about it. What an enormous one it is, to be +sure." + +"IT!" repeated Peterkin; "why, there are dozens of banians here! +What do you mean by talking bad grammar? Is your philosophy +deserting you, Jack?" + +"There is but one tree here of this kind," returned Jack, "as you +will perceive if you will examine it." And, sure enough, we did +find that what we had supposed was a forest of trees was in reality +only one. Its bark was of a light colour, and had a shining +appearance, the leaves being lance-shaped, small, and of a +beautiful pea-green. But the wonderful thing about it was, that +the branches, which grew out from the stem horizontally, sent down +long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, taking root, had +themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like the tree +itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the branches at +various distances, and thus supported them on natural pillars, some +of which were so large and strong, that it was not easy at first to +distinguish the offspring from the parent stem. The fibres were of +all sizes and in all states of advancement, from the pillars we +have just mentioned to small cords which hung down and were about +to take root, and thin brown threads still far from the ground, +which swayed about with every motion of wind. In short, it seemed +to us that, if there were only space afforded to it, this single +tree would at length cover the whole island. + +Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, which, as +its peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely useful to us, +merits description. It was a splendid chestnut, but its proper +name Jack did not know. However, there were quantities of fine +nuts upon it, some of which we put in our pockets. But its stem +was the wonderful part of it. It rose to about twelve feet without +a branch, and was not of great thickness; on the contrary, it was +remarkably slender for the size of the tree; but, to make up for +this, there were four or five wonderful projections in this stem, +which I cannot better describe than by asking the reader to suppose +that five planks of two inches thick and three feet broad had been +placed round the trunk of the tree, with their EDGES closely fixed +to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that these planks +bad been covered over with the bark of the tree and incorporated +with it. In short, they were just natural buttresses, without +which the stem could not have supported its heavy and umbrageous +top. We found these chestnuts to be very numerous. They grew +chiefly on the banks of the stream, and were of all sizes. + +While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack chipped a +piece off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood to be firm +and easily cut. He then struck the axe into it with all his force, +and very soon split it off close to the tree, first, however, +having cut it across transversely above and below. By this means +he satisfied himself that we could now obtain short planks, as it +were all ready sawn, of any size and thickness that we desired; +which was a very great discovery indeed, perhaps the most important +we had yet made. + +We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp near +the beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome in the +forest. On our way we could not help admiring the birds which flew +and chirped around us. Among them we observed a pretty kind of +paroquet, with a green body, a blue head, and a red breast; also a +few beautiful turtledoves, and several flocks of wood-pigeons. The +hues of many of these birds were extremely vivid, - bright green, +blue, and scarlet, being the prevailing tints. We made several +attempts throughout the day to bring down one of these, both with +the bow and the sling, - not for mere sport, but to ascertain +whether they were good for food. But we invariably missed, +although once or twice we were very near hitting. As evening drew +on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I slung a stone into +the midst of them at a venture, and had the good fortune to kill +one. We were startled, soon after, by a loud whistling noise above +our heads; and on looking up, saw a flock of wild ducks making for +the coast. We watched these, and, observing where they alighted, +followed them up until we came upon a most lovely blue lake, not +more than two hundred yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its +placid surface, which reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a +mirror, was covered with various species of wild ducks, feeding +among the sedges and broad-leaved water-plants which floated on it, +while numerous birds like water-hens ran to and fro most busily on +its margin. These all with one accord flew tumultuously away the +instant we made our appearance. While walking along the margin we +observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could not tell. + +Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a little +out of our way to see if we could procure one of those ducks; so, +directing Peterkin to go straight to the shore and kindle a fire, +we separated, promising to rejoin him speedily. But we did not +find the ducks, although we made a diligent search for half an +hour. We were about to retrace our steps, when we were arrested by +one of the strangest sights that we had yet beheld. + +Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew a +superb tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on the +island. Its trunk was at least five feet in diameter, with a +smooth gray bark; above this the spreading branches were clothed +with light green leaves, amid which were clusters of bright yellow +fruit, so numerous as to weigh down the boughs with their great +weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum species, of an oblong +form, and a good deal larger than the magnum bonum plum. The +ground at the foot of this tree was thickly strewn with the fallen +fruit, in the midst of which lay sleeping, in every possible +attitude, at least twenty hogs of all ages and sizes, apparently +quite surfeited with a recent banquet. + +Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at these +coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning and +snoring heavily amid the remains of their supper. + +"Now, Ralph," said Jack, in a low whisper, "put a stone in your +sling, - a good big one, - and let fly at that fat fellow with his +back toward you. I'll try to put an arrow into yon little pig." + +"Don't you think we had better put them up first?" I whispered; "it +seems cruel to kill them while asleep." + +"If I wanted SPORT, Ralph, I would certainly set them up; but as we +only want PORK, we'll let them lie. Besides, we're not sure of +killing them; so, fire away." + +Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it went +bang against the hog's flank as if against the head of a drum; but +it had no other effect than that of causing the animal to start to +its feet, with a frightful yell of surprise, and scamper away. At +the same instant Jack's bow twanged, and the arrow pinned the +little pig to the ground by the ear. + +"I've missed, after all," cried Jack, darting forward with uplifted +axe, while the little pig uttered a loud squeal, tore the arrow +from the ground, and ran away with it, along with the whole drove, +into the bushes and disappeared, though we heard them screaming +long afterwards in the distance. + +"That's very provoking, now," said Jack, rubbing the point of his +nose. + +"Very," I replied, stroking my chin. + +"Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin," said Jack. "It's +getting late." And, without further remark, we threaded our way +quickly through the woods towards the shore. + +When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted and +beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for our +encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We wondered very +much at this; but Jack suggested that he might have gone to fetch +water; so he gave a shout to let him know that we had arrived, and +sat down upon a rock, while I threw off my jacket and seized the +axe, intending to split up one or two billets of wood. But I had +scarce moved from the spot when, in the distance, we heard a most +appalling shriek, which was followed up by a chorus of yells from +the hogs, and a loud "hurrah!" + +"I do believe," said I, "that Peterkin has met with the hogs." + +"When Greek meets Greek," said Jack, soliloquizing, "then comes the +tug of - " + +"Hurrah!" shouted Peterkin in the distance. + +We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, and +soon descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us with a +little pig transfixed on the end of his long spear! + +"Well done, my boy!" exclaimed Jack, slapping him on the shoulder +when he came up, "you're the best shot amongst us." + +"Look here Jack!" cried Peterkin, as he disengaged the animal from +his spear. "Do you recognise that hole?" said he, pointing to the +pig's ear; "and are you familiar with this arrow, eh?" + +"Well, I declare!" said Jack. + +"Of course you do," interrupted Peterkin; "but, pray, restrain your +declarations at this time, and let's have supper, for I'm +uncommonly hungry, I can tell you; and it's no joke to charge a +whole herd of swine with their great-grandmother bristling like a +giant porcupine at the head of them!" + +We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display of +viands we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the light +of the blazing fire. There was, first of all, the little pig; then +there was the taro-root, and the yam, and the potato, and six +plums; and, lastly, the wood-pigeon. To these Peterkin added a bit +of sugar-cane, which he had cut from a little patch of that plant +which he had found not long after separating from us; "and," said +he, "the patch was somewhat in a square form, which convinces me it +must have been planted by man." + +"Very likely," replied Jack. "From all we have seen, I'm inclined +to think that some of the savages must have dwelt here long ago." + +We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we were to +cook the pig. None of us had ever cut up one before, and we did +not know exactly how to begin; besides, we had nothing but the axe +to do it with, our knife having been forgotten. At last Jack +started up and said, - + +"Don't let us waste more time talking about it, boys. Hold it up, +Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg on this block of wood, so;" and +he cut it off, with a large portion of the haunch, at a single blow +of the axe. "Now the other, - that's it." And having thus cut off +the two hind legs, he made several deep gashes in them, thrust a +sharp-pointed stick through each, and stuck them up before the +blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon was then split open, quite flat, +washed clean in salt water, and treated in a similar manner. While +these were cooking, we scraped a hole in the sand and ashes under +the fire, into which we put our vegetables, and covered them up. + +The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and four +or five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and had a thick +rind. We found it somewhat like an Irish potato, and exceedingly +good. The yam was roundish, and had a rough brown skin. It was +very sweet and well-flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to +find, was quite sweet and exceedingly palatable, as also were the +plums; and, indeed, the pork and pigeon too, when we came to taste +them. Altogether this was decidedly the most luxurious supper we +had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it was out-of-sight +better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin said he feared +that if we should remain long on the island he would infallibly +become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack remarked that he need +not fear that, for he was BOTH already! And so, having eaten our +fill, not forgetting to finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves +comfortably down to sleep upon a couch of branches under the +overhanging ledge of a coral rock. + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + + +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon - Humble advice +regarding cold water - The "horrible cry" accounted for - The +curious birds called penguins - Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm - +Questions on the formation of coral islands - Mysterious footsteps +- Strange discoveries and sad sights. + + +WHEN we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun was +already a good way above the horizon, so I came to the conclusion +that a heavy supper is not conducive to early rising. +Nevertheless, we felt remarkably strong and well, and much disposed +to have our breakfast. First, however, we had our customary +morning bathe, which refreshed us greatly. + +I have often wondered very much in after years that the inhabitants +of my own dear land did not make more frequent use of this most +charming element, water. I mean in the way of cold bathing. Of +course, I have perceived that it is not convenient for them to go +into the sea or the rivers in winter, as we used to do on the Coral +Island; but then, I knew from experience that a large washing-tub +and a sponge do form a most pleasant substitute. The feelings of +freshness, of cleanliness, of vigour, and extreme hilarity, that +always followed my bathes in the sea, and even, when in England, my +ablutions in the wash-tub, were so delightful, that I would sooner +have gone without my breakfast than without my bathe in cold water. +My readers will forgive me for asking whether they are in the habit +of bathing thus every morning; and if they answer "No," they will +pardon me for recommending them to begin at once. Of late years, +since retiring from the stirring life of adventure which I have led +so long in foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, so I +do not mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it down. +Perhaps, in reference to it, I may just hint that there may be too +much of a good thing. I know not; but of this I am quite certain, +that there may also be too little of a good thing; and the great +delight I have had in cold bathing during the course of my +adventurous career inclines me to think that it is better to risk +taking too much than to content one's self with too little. Such +is my opinion, derived from much experience; but I put it before my +readers with the utmost diffidence and with profound modesty, +knowing that it may possibly jar with their feelings of confidence +in their own ability to know and judge as to what is best and +fittest in reference to their own affairs. But, to return from +this digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness. + +We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, and +were just beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually +accompanies vigorous exercise, when, on turning a point that +revealed to us a new and beautiful cluster of islands, we were +suddenly arrested by the appalling cry which had so alarmed us a +few nights before. But this time we were by no means so much +alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas at that time +it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, though I am +unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many of the fears +that are apt to assail us in the dark. + +On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his spear. + +"Now, what can it be?" said he, looking round at Jack. "I tell you +what it is, if we are to go on being pulled up in a constant state +of horror and astonishment, as we have been for the last week, the +sooner we're out o' this island the better, notwithstanding the +yams and lemonade, and pork and plums!" + +Peterkin's remark was followed by a repetition of the cry, louder +than before. + +"It comes from one of these islands," said Jack. + +"It must be the ghost of a jackass, then," said Peterkin, "for I +never heard anything so like." + +We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, on +the largest, we observed curious objects moving on the shore. + +"Soldiers they are, - that's flat!" cried Peterkin, gazing at them +in the utmost amazement. + +And, in truth, Peterkin's remark seemed to me to be correct; for, +at the distance from which we saw them, they appeared to be an army +of soldiers. There they stood, rank and file, in lines and in +squares, marching and countermarching, with blue coats and white +trousers. While we were looking at them, the dreadful cry came +again over the water, and Peterkin suggested that it must be a +regiment sent out to massacre the natives in cold blood. At this +remark Jack laughed and said, - + +"Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!" + +"Penguins?" repeated Peterkin. + +"Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins, - nothing more or less than big +sea-birds, as you shall see one of these days, when we pay them a +visit in our boat, which I mean to set about building the moment we +return to our bower." + +"So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering army of +soldiers," remarked Peterkin, "have dwindled down to penguins, - +big sea-birds! Very good. Then I propose that we continue our +journey as fast as possible, lest our island should be converted +into a dream before we get completely round it." + +Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new +discovery, and the singular appearance of these birds, of which +Jack could only give us a very slight and vague account; and I +began to long to commence to our boat, in order that we might go +and inspect them more narrowly. But by degrees these thoughts left +me, and I began to be much taken up again with the interesting +peculiarities of the country which we were passing through. + +The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the +first, at about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we +calculated, and we hoped to sleep on the night following at our +bower. I will not here note so particularly all that we said and +saw during the course of this second day, as we did not make any +further discoveries of great importance. The shore along which we +travelled, and the various parts of the woods through which we +passed, were similar to those which have been already treated of. +There were one or two observations that we made, however, and these +were as follows:- + +We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew only +in the valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the +streams, where the soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm +grew in every place whatsoever, - not only on the hill sides, but +also on the sea shore, and even, as has been already stated, on the +coral reef itself, where the soil, if we may use the name, was +nothing better than loose sand mingled with broken shells and coral +rock. So near to the sea, too, did this useful tree grow, that in +many places its roots were washed by the spray from the breakers. +Yet we found the trees growing thus on the sands to be quite as +luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, and the fruit as good +and refreshing also. Besides this, I noticed that, on the summit +of the high mountain, which we once more ascended at a different +point from our first ascent, were found abundance of shells and +broken coral formations, which Jack and I agreed proved either that +this island must have once been under the sea, or that the sea must +once have been above the island. In other words, that as shells +and coral could not possibly climb to the mountain top, they must +have been washed upon it while the mountain top was on a level with +the sea. We pondered this very much; and we put to ourselves the +question, "What raised the island to its present height above the +sea?" But to this we could by no means give to ourselves a +satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have been blown up by a +volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must have jumped up of its +own accord! We also noticed, what had escaped us before, that the +solid rocks of which the island was formed were quite different +from the live coral rocks on the shore, where the wonderful little +insects were continually working. They seemed, indeed, to be of +the sauce material, - a substance like limestone; but, while the +coral rocks were quite full of minute cells in which the insects +lived, the other rocks inland were hard and solid, without the +appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and conversations on this +subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin said we should +certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we were such +good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his pleasantry on this +and similar points to deter us from making our notes and +observations as we went along. + +We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but abstained +from killing any of them, having more than sufficient for our +present necessities. We saw also many of their foot-prints in this +neighbourhood. Among these we also observed the footprints of a +smaller animal, which we examined with much care, but could form no +certain opinion as to them. Peterkin thought they were those of a +little dog, but Jack and I thought differently. We became very +curious on this matter, the more so that we observed these foot- +prints to lie scattered about in one locality, as if the animal +which had made them was wandering round about in a very irregular +manner, and without any object in view. Early in the forenoon of +our third day we observed these footprints to be much more numerous +than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged off into the +woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so closely +beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with difficulty. We +had now become so anxious to find out what animal this was, and +where it went to, that we determined to follow the track, and, if +possible, clear up the mystery. Peterkin said, in a bantering +tone, that he was sure it would be cleared up as usual in some +frightfully simple way, and prove to be no mystery at all! + +The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by the +animal itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had made +it, and that the smaller one made use of it. But everywhere the +creeping plants and tangled bushes crossed our path, so that we +forced our way along with some difficulty. Suddenly, as we came +upon an open space, we heard a faint cry, and observed a black +animal standing in the track before us. + +"A wild-cat!" cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his bow, and +discharging it so hastily that he missed the animal, and hit the +earth about half a foot to one side of it. To our surprise the +wild-cat did not fly, but walked slowly towards the arrow, and +snuffed at it. + +"That's the most comical wild-cat I ever saw!" cried Jack. + +"It's a tame wild-cat, I think," said Peterkin, levelling his spear +to make a charge. + +"Stop!" cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; "I do believe the +poor beast is blind. See, it strikes against the branches as it +walks along. It must be a very old one;" and I hastened towards +it. + +"Only think," said Peterkin, with a suppressed laugh, "of a +superannuated wild-cat!" + +We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly so, +but extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we were +quite close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, putting up its +back and tail, while the black hair stood all on end, uttered a +hoarse mew and a fuff. + +"Poor thing," said Peterkin, gently extending his hand, and +endeavouring to pat the cat's head. "Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; +puss, puss, puss; cheetie pussy!" + +No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of anger +fled, and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself to be +stroked, and rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly all the +time, and showing every symptom of the most extreme delight. + +"It's no more a wild cat than I am!" cried Peterkin, taking it in +his arms. "It's quite tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!" + +We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little surprised, +and, to say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight of the poor +animal's excessive joy. It rubbed its head against Peterkin's +cheek, licked his chin, and thrust its head almost violently into +his neck, while it purred more loudly than I ever heard a cat purr +before, and appeared to be so much overpowered by its feelings, +that it occasionally mewed and purred almost in the same breath. +Such demonstrations of joy and affection led us at once to conclude +that this poor cat must have known man before, and we conjectured +that it had been left either accidentally or by design on the +island many years ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at +meeting once more with human beings. While we were fondling the +cat and talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the +midst of which we stood. + +"Hallo!" exclaimed he; "this looks something like a clearing. The +axe has been at work here. Just look at these tree-stumps." + +We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found trees +that had been cut down here and there, also stumps and broken +branches; all of which, however, were completely covered over with +moss, and bore evidence of having been in this condition for some +years. No human foot-prints were to be seen, either on the track +or among the bushes; but those of the cat were found everywhere. +We now determined to follow up the track as far as it went, and +Peterkin put the cat down; but it seemed to be so weak, and mewed +so very pitifully, that he took it up again and carried it in his +arms, where, in a few minutes, it fell sound asleep. + +About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more numerous, +and the track, diverging to the right, followed for a short space +the banks of a stream. Suddenly we came to a spot where once must +have been a rude bridge, the stones of which were scattered in the +stream, and those on each bank entirely covered over with moss. In +silent surprise and expectancy we continued to advance, and, a few +yards farther on, beheld, under the shelter of some bread-fruit +trees, a small hut or cottage. I cannot hope to convey to my +readers a very correct idea of the feelings that affected us on +witnessing this unexpected sight. We stood for a long time in +silent wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy stillness +about the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at +length speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded +by some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin's voice, +usually so quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed now; for +there was a dreariness about this silent, lonely, uninhabited +cottage, - so strange in its appearance, so far away from the usual +dwellings of man, so old, decayed, and deserted in its aspect, - +that fell upon our spirits like a thick cloud, and blotted out as +with a pall the cheerful sunshine that had filled us since the +commencement of our tour round the island. + +The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its construction. It was +not more than twelve feet long by ten feet broad, and about seven +or eight feet high. It had one window, or rather a small frame in +which a window might, perhaps, once have been, but which was now +empty. The door was exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, +and the roof was covered with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. +But every part of it was in a state of the utmost decay. Moss and +green matter grew in spots all over it. The woodwork was quite +perforated with holes; the roof had nearly fallen in, and appeared +to be prevented from doing so altogether by the thick matting of +creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which years of neglect +had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while the thick, luxuriant +branches of the bread-fruit and other trees spread above it, and +flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, as if to guard it from +the heat and the light of day. We conversed long and in whispers +about this strange habitation ere we ventured to approach it; and +when at length we did so it was, at least on my part, with feelings +of awe. + +At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from the +deep shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom within, +he could not clearly discern objects; so we lifted the latch and +pushed open the door. We observed that the latch was made of iron, +and almost eaten away with rust. In the like condition were also +the hinges, which creaked as the door swung back. On entering, we +stood still and gazed around us, while we were much impressed with +the dreary stillness of the room. But what we saw there surprised +and shocked us not a little. There was no furniture in the +apartment save a little wooden stool and an iron pot, the latter +almost eaten through with rust. In the corner farthest from the +door was a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a +little heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to +examine them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that of a +dog, which was extended close beside that of the man, with its head +resting on his bosom + +Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and could +scarce refrain from tears on beholding these sad remains. After +some time, we began to talk about what we had seen, and to examine +in and around the hut, in order to discover some clue to the name +or history of this poor man, who had thus died in solitude, with +none to mourn his loss save his cat and his faithful dog. But we +found nothing, - neither a book nor a scrap of paper. We found, +however, the decayed remnants of what appeared to have been +clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things bore marks of +any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as to convince us +that they had lain in the condition in which we found them for many +years. + +This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the top of +the mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the patch of +sugar-cane and other traces of man which we had met with in the +course of our rambles over the island. And we were much saddened +by the reflection that the lot of this poor wanderer might possibly +be our own, after many years' residence on the island, unless we +should be rescued by the visit of some vessel or the arrival of +natives. Having no clue whatever to account for the presence of +this poor human being in such a lonely spot, we fell to +conjecturing what could have brought him there. I was inclined to +think that he must have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose vessel had +been lost here, and all the crew been drowned except himself and +his dog and cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run +away from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him +company. We were also much occupied in our minds with the +wonderful difference between the cat and the dog. For here we saw +that while the one perished, like a loving friend, by its master's +side, with its head resting on his bosom, the other had sought to +sustain itself by prowling abroad in the forest, and had lived in +solitude to a good old age. However, we did not conclude from this +that the cat was destitute of affection, for we could not forget +its emotions on first meeting with us; but we saw from this, that +the dog had a great deal more of generous love in its nature than +the cat, because it not only found it impossible to live after the +death of its master, but it must needs, when it came to die, crawl +to his side and rest its head upon his lifeless breast. + +While we were thinking on these things, and examining into +everything about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation from +Peterkin. + +"I say, Jack," said he, "here is something that will be of use to +us." + +"What is it?" said Jack, hastening across the room. + +"An old pistol," replied Peterkin, holding up the weapon, which he +had just pulled from under a heap of broken wood and rubbish that +lay in a corner. + +"That, indeed, might have been useful," said Jack, examining it, +"if we had any powder; but I suspect the bow and the sling will +prove more serviceable." + +"True, I forgot that," said Peterkin; "but we may as well take it +with us, for the flint will serve to strike fire with when the sun +does not shine." + +After having spent more than an hour at this place without +discovering anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the old +cat, which had lain very contentedly asleep on the stool whereon he +had placed it, and we prepared to take our departure. In leaving +the hut, Jack stumbled heavily against the door-post, which was so +much decayed as to break across, and the whole fabric of the hut +seemed ready to tumble about our ears. This put into our heads +that we might as well pull it down, and so form a mound over the +skeleton. Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down the other door- +post, which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in ruins to +the ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor +recluse and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away +the iron pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much +use to us hereafter. + +During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and examined +the other end of the large valley, which we found to be so much +alike to the parts already described, that I shall not recount the +particulars of what we saw in this place. I may, however, remark, +that we did not quite recover our former cheerful spirits until we +arrived at our bower, which we did late in the evening, and found +everything just in the same condition as we had left it three days +before. + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + + +Something wrong with the tank - Jack's wisdom and Peterkin's +impertinence - Wonderful behaviour of a crab - Good wishes for +those who dwell far from the sea - Jack commences to build a little +boat. + + +REST is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. During my long +experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered life, I have found +that periods of profound rest at certain intervals, in addition to +the ordinary hours of repose, are necessary to the wellbeing of +man. And the nature as well as the period of this rest varies, +according to the different temperaments of individuals, and the +peculiar circumstances in which they may chance to be placed. To +those who work with their minds, bodily labour is rest. To those +who labour with the body, deep sleep is rest. To the downcast, the +weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are rest. Nay, further, I +think that to the gay, the frivolous, the reckless, when sated with +pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves to be rest of a +kind, although, perchance, it were better that I should call it +relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one class of men to whom +rest is denied. There is no rest to the wicked. At this I do but +hint, however, as I treat not of that rest which is spiritual, but, +more particularly, of that which applies to the mind and to the +body. + +Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we found +it exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after completing the +journey just related. It had not, indeed, been a very long +journey, nevertheless we had pursued it so diligently that our +frames were not a little prostrated. Our minds were also very much +exhausted in consequence of the many surprises, frequent alarms, +and much profound thought, to which they had been subjected; so +that when we lay down on the night of our return under the shelter +of the bower, we fell immediately into very deep repose. I can +state this with much certainty, for Jack afterwards admitted the +fact, and Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard snoring +loudly at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition we +remained all night and the whole of the following day without +awaking once, or so much as moving our positions. When we did +awake it was near sunset, and we were all in such a state of +lassitude that we merely rose to swallow a mouthful of food. As +Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a yawn, we took breakfast at +tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we lay till the +following forenoon. + +After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed lest +we had lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed on this +head, for we had carefully kept count of the days since we were +cast upon our island, in order that we might remember the Sabbath- +day, which day we had hitherto with one accord kept as a day of +rest, and refrained from all work whatsoever. However, on +considering the subject, we all three entertained the same opinion +as to how long we had slept, and so our minds were put at ease. + +We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to see +how did the animals which I had placed in the tank. We found the +garden more charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, and Jack and +I plunged into its depth, and gambolled among its radiant coral +groves; while Peterkin wallowed at the surface, and tried +occasionally to kick us as we passed below. Having dressed, I then +hastened to the tank; but what was my surprise and grief to find +nearly all the animals dead, and the water in a putrid condition! +I was greatly distressed at this, and wondered what could be the +cause of it. + +"Why, you precious humbug," said Peterkin, coming up to me, "how +could you expect it to be otherwise? When fishes are accustomed to +live in the Pacific Ocean, how can you expect them to exist in a +hole like that?" + +"Indeed, Peterkin," I replied, "there seems to be truth in what you +say. Nevertheless, now I think of it, there must be some error in +your reasoning; for, if I put in but a few very small animals, they +will bear the same proportion to this pond that the millions of +fish bear to the ocean." + +"I say, Jack," cried Peterkin, waving his hand, "come here, like a +good fellow. Ralph is actually talking philosophy. Do come to our +assistance, for he's out o' sight beyond me already!" + +"What's the matter?" inquired Jack, coming up, while he endeavoured +to scrub his long hair dry with a towel of cocoa-nut cloth. + +I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, quite +agreed with me. "Your best plan," he said, "will be to put very +few animals at first into your tank, and add more as you find it +will bear them. And look here," he added, pointing to the sides of +the tank, which, for the space of two inches above the water-level, +were incrusted with salt, "you must carry your philosophy a little +farther, Ralph. That water has evaporated so much that it is too +salt for anything to live in. You will require to add FRESH water +now and then, in order to keep it at the same degree of saltness as +the sea." + +"Very true, Jack, that never struck me before," said I. + +"And, now I think of it," continued Jack, "it seems to me that the +surest way of arranging your tank so as to get it to keep pure and +in good condition, will be to imitate the ocean in it. In fact +make it a miniature Pacific. I don't see how you can hope to +succeed unless you do that." + +"Most true," said I, pondering what my companion said. "But I fear +that that will be very difficult." + +"Not at all," cried Jack, rolling his towel up into a ball, and +throwing it into the face of Peterkin, who had been grinning and +winking at him during the last five minutes. "Not at all. Look +here. There is water of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill +your tank with sea water, and keep it at that saltness by marking +the height at which the water stands on the sides. When it +evaporates a little, pour in FRESH water from the brook till it +comes up to the mark, and then it will be right, for the salt does +not evaporate with the water. Then, there's lots of sea-weed in +the sea; - well, go and get one or two bits of sea-weed, and put +them into your tank. Of course the weed must be alive, and growing +to little stones; or you can chip a bit off the rocks with the weed +sticking to it. Then, if you like, you can throw a little sand and +gravel into your tank, and the thing's complete." + +"Nay, not quite," said Peterkin, who had been gravely attentive to +this off-hand advice, "not quite; you must first make three little +men to dive in it before it can be said to be perfect, and that +would be rather difficult, I fear, for two of them would require to +be philosophers. But hallo! what's this? I say, Ralph, look here. +There's one o' your crabs up to something uncommon. It's +performing the most remarkable operation for a crab I ever saw, - +taking off its coat, I do believe, before going to bed!" + +We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a little +amused at the conduct of one of the crabs which still survived it +companions. It was one of the common small crabs, like to those +that are found running about everywhere on the coasts of England. +While we gazed at it, we observed its back to split away from the +lower part of its body, and out of the gap thus formed came a soft +lump which moved and writhed unceasingly. This lump continued to +increase in size until it appeared like a bunch of crab's legs: +and, indeed, such it proved in a very few minutes to be; for the +points of the toes were at length extricated from this hole in its +back, the legs spread out, the body followed, and the crab walked +away quite entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, leaving +a perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of one! + +"Well!" exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, "I've HEARD of a +man jumping out of his skin and sitting down in his skeleton in +order to cool himself, but I never expected to SEE a crab do it!" + +We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more so +when we observed that the new crab was larger than the crab that it +came out of. It was also quite soft, but by next morning its skin +had hardened into a good shell. We came thus to know that crabs +grow in this way, and not by the growing of their shells, as we had +always thought before we saw this wonderful operation. + +Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about +preparing my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came to +regard it as very sound and worthy of being acted on. So I +forthwith put his plan in execution, and found it to answer +excellently well, indeed much beyond my expectation; for I found +that after a little experience had taught me the proper proportion +of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount of water, the +tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I did not require +ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, but only to add a +very little fresh water from the brook, now and then, as the other +evaporated. I therefore concluded that if I had been suddenly +conveyed, along with my tank, into some region where there was no +salt sea at all, my little sea and my sea-fish would have continued +to thrive and to prosper notwithstanding. This made me greatly to +desire that those people in the world who live far inland might +know of my wonderful tank, and, by having materials like to those +of which it was made conveyed to them, thus be enabled to watch the +habits of those most mysterious animals that reside in the sea, and +examine with their own eyes the wonders of the great deep. + +For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily +employed in building a little boat out of the curious natural +planks of the chestnut tree, I spent much of my time in examining +with the burning-glass the marvellous operations that were +constantly going on in my tank. Here I saw those anemones which +cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs of jelly, to the +rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and wait till +little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched them, when +they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm around their +victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. Here I saw the +ceaseless working of those little coral insects whose efforts have +encrusted the islands of the Pacific with vast rocks, and +surrounded them with enormous reefs. And I observed that many of +these insects, though extremely minute, were very beautiful, coming +out of their holes in a circle of fine threads, and having the form +of a shuttle-cock. Here I saw curious little barnacles opening a +hole in their backs and constantly putting out a thin feathery +hand, with which, I doubt not, they dragged their food into their +mouths. Here, also, I saw those crabs which have shells only on +the front of their bodies, but no shell whatever on their +remarkably tender tails, so that, in order to find a protection to +them, they thrust them into the empty shells of wilks, or some such +fish, and when they grow too big for one, change into another. +But, most curious of all, I saw an animal which had the wonderful +power, when it became ill, of casting its stomach and its teeth +away from it, and getting an entirely new set in the course of a +few months! All this I saw, and a great deal more, by means of my +tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from setting down more +particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the adventures +that befell us while we remained on this island. + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + + +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs - The mysterious green +monster explained - We are thrown into unutterable terror by the +idea that Jack is drowned - The Diamond Cave. + + +"COME, Jack," cried Peterkin, one morning about three weeks after +our return from our long excursion, "let's be jolly to-day, and do +something vigorous. I'm quite tired of hammering and hammering, +hewing and screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of +ours, that seems as hard to build as Noah's ark; let us go on an +excursion to the mountain top, or have a hunt after the wild ducks, +or make a dash at the pigs. I'm quite flat - flat as bad ginger- +beer - flat as a pancake; in fact, I want something to rouse me, to +toss me up, as it were. Eh! what do you say to it?" + +"Well," answered Jack, throwing down the axe with which he was just +about to proceed towards the boat, "if that's what you want, I +would recommend you to make an excursion to the water-spouts; the +last one we had to do with tossed you up a considerable height, +perhaps the next will send you higher, who knows, if you're at all +reasonable or moderate in your expectations!" + +"Jack, my dear boy," said Peterkin, gravely, "you are really +becoming too fond of jesting. It's a thing I don't at all approve +of, and if you don't give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, +we shall have to part." + +"Well, then, Peterkin," replied Jack, with a smile, "what would you +have?" + +"Have?" said Peterkin, "I would HAVE nothing. I didn't say I +wanted to HAVE; I said that I wanted to DO." + +"By the by," said I, interrupting their conversation, "I am +reminded by this that we have not yet discovered the nature of yon +curious appearance that we saw near the water-spouts, on our +journey round the island. Perhaps it would be well to go for that +purpose." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Peterkin, "I know the nature of it well +enough." + +"What was it?" said I. + +"It was of a MYSTERIOUS nature to be sure!" said he, with a wave of +his hand, while he rose from the log on which he had been sitting, +and buckled on his belt, into which he thrust his enormous club. + +"Well then, let us away to the water-spouts," cried Jack, going up +to the bower for his bow and arrows; "and bring your spear, +Peterkin. It may be useful." + +We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, +sallied forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, +which, as I have before mentioned, were not far from our present +place of abode. On arriving there we hastened down to the edge of +the rocks, and gazed over into the sea, where we observed the pale- +green object still distinctly visible, moving its tail slowly to +and fro in the water. + +"Most remarkable!" said Jack. + +"Exceedingly curious," said I. + +"Beats everything!" said Peterkin. + +"Now, Jack," he added, "you made such a poor figure in your last +attempt to stick that object, that I would advise you to let me try +it. If it has got a heart at all, I'll engage to send my spear +right through the core of it; if it hasn't got a heart, I'll send +it through the spot where its heart ought to be." + +"Fire away, then, my boy," replied Jack with a laugh. + +Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or two +above his head, then darted it like an arrow into the sea. Down it +went straight into the centre of the green object, passed quite +through it, and came up immediately afterwards, pure and unsullied, +while the mysterious tail moved quietly as before! + +"Now," said Peterkin, gravely, "that brute is a heartless monster; +I'll have nothing more to do with it." + +"I'm pretty sure now," said Jack, "that it is merely a phosphoric +light; but I must say I'm puzzled at its staying always in that +exact spot." + +I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that it +must be phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had seen +much while on our voyage to these seas. "But," said I, "there is +nothing to hinder us from diving down to it, now that we are sure +it is not a shark." + +"True," returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; "I'll go down, +Ralph, as I'm better at diving than you are. Now then, Peterkin, +out o' the road!" Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above his +head, bent over the rocks, and plunged into the sea. For a second +or two the spray caused by his dive hid him from view, then the +water became still, and we saw him swimming far down in the midst +of the green object. Suddenly he sank below it, and vanished +altogether from our sight! We gazed anxiously down at the spot +where he had disappeared, for nearly a minute, expecting every +moment to see him rise again for breath; but fully a minute passed, +and still he did not reappear. Two minutes passed! and then a +flood of alarm rushed in upon my soul, when I considered that +during all my acquaintance with him, Jack had never stayed +underwater more than a minute at a time; indeed seldom so long. + +"Oh, Peterkin!" I said, in a voice that trembled with increasing +anxiety, "something has happened. It is more than three minutes +now!" But Peterkin did not answer and I observed that he was +gazing down into the water with a look of intense fear mingled with +anxiety, while his face was overspread with a deadly paleness. +Suddenly he sprang to his feet and rushed about in a frantic state, +wringing his hands, and exclaiming, "Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! +It must have been a shark, and he is gone for ever!" + +For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The intensity of +my feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But I was recalled to +myself by Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder and staring wildly +into my face, while he exclaimed, "Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has +only fainted. Dive for him, Ralph!" + +It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. In a +moment I rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without waiting to +throw off my garments, was on the point to spring into the waves, +when I observed something black rising up through the green object. +In another moment Jack's head rose to the surface, and he gave a +wild shout, flinging back the spray from his locks, as was his wont +after a dive. Now we were almost as much amazed at seeing him re- +appear, well and strong, as we had been at first at his non- +appearance; for, to the best of our judgment, he had been nearly +ten minutes under water, perhaps longer, and it required no +exertion of our reason to convince us that this was utterly +impossible for mortal man to do and retain his strength and +faculties. It was therefore with a feeling akin to superstitious +awe that I held down my hand and assisted him to clamber up the +steep rocks. But no such feeling affected Peterkin. No sooner did +Jack gain the rocks and seat himself on one, panting for breath, +than he threw his arms round his neck, and burst into a flood of +tears. "Oh, Jack, Jack!" said he, "where were you? What kept you +so long?" + +After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit still +and listen to Jack's explanation, although he could not restrain +himself from attempting to wink every two minutes at me, in order +to express his joy at Jack's safety. I say he attempted to wink, +but I am bound to add that he did not succeed, for his eyes were so +much swollen with weeping, that his frequent attempts only resulted +in a series of violent and altogether idiotical contortions of the +face, that were very far from expressing what he intended. +However, I knew what the poor fellow meant by it, so I smiled to +him in return, and endeavoured to make believe that he was winking. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, when we were composed enough to listen to +him, "yon green object is not a shark; it is a stream of light +issuing from a cave in the rocks. Just after I made my dive, I +observed that this light came from the side of the rock above which +we are now sitting; so I struck out for it, and saw an opening into +some place or other that appeared to be luminous within. For one +instant I paused to think whether I ought to venture. Then I made +up my mind, and dashed into it. For you see, Peterkin, although I +take some time to tell this, it happened in the space of a few +seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough in me to serve to bring +me out o' the hole and up to the surface again. Well, I was just +on the point of turning, - for I began to feel a little +uncomfortable in such a place, - when it seemed to me as if there +was a faint light right above me. I darted upwards, and found my +head out of water. This relieved me greatly, for I now felt that I +could take in air enough to enable me to return the way I came. +Then it all at once occurred to me that I might not be able to find +the way out again; but, on glancing downwards, my mind was put +quite at rest by seeing the green light below me streaming into the +cave, just like the light that we had seen streaming out of it, +only what I now saw was much brighter. + +"At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed around me, it +was so dark; but gradually my eyes became accustomed to it, and I +found that I was in a huge cave, part of the walls of which I +observed on each side of me. The ceiling just above me was also +visible, and I fancied that I could perceive beautiful glittering +objects there, but the farther end of the cave was shrouded in +darkness. While I was looking around me in great wonder, it came +into my head that you two would think I was drowned; so I plunged +down through the passage again in a great hurry, rose to the +surface, and - here I am!" + +When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this +remarkable cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down +to see it; which I did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, +that I could scarcely see anything. When I returned, we had a long +conversation about it, during which I observed that Peterkin had a +most lugubrious expression on his countenance. + +"What's the matter, Peterkin?" said I. + +"The matter?" he replied. "It's all very well for you two to be +talking away like mermaids about the wonders of this cave, but you +know I must be content to hear about it, while you are enjoying +yourselves down there like mad dolphins. It's really too bad." + +"I'm very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I am," said Jack, "but we +cannot help you. If you would only learn to dive - " + +"Learn to fly, you might as well say!" retorted Peterkin, in a very +sulky tone. + +"If you would only consent to keep still," said I, "we would take +you down with us in ten seconds." + +"Hum!" returned Peterkin; "suppose a salamander was to propose to +you 'only to keep still,' and he would carry you through a blazing +fire in a few seconds, what would you say?" + +We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that +nothing was to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we could not +rest satisfied till we had seen more of this cave; so, after +further consultation, Jack and I determined to try if we could take +down a torch with us, and set fire to it in the cavern. This we +found to be an undertaking of no small difficulty; but we +accomplished it at last by the following means:- First, we made a +torch of a very inflammable nature out of the bark of a certain +tree, which we cut into strips, and, after twisting, cemented +together with a kind of resin or gum, which we also obtained from +another tree; neither of which trees, however, was known by name to +Jack. This, when prepared, we wrapped up in a great number of +plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so that we were confident it could not +get wet during the short time it should be under water. Then we +took a small piece of the tinder, which we had carefully treasured +up lest we should require it, as before said, when the sun should +fail us; also, we rolled up some dry grass and a few chips, which, +with a little bow and drill, like those described before, we made +into another bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When +all was ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against the +rocks we might be subjected to, we kept on. + +Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one +bundle, with the torch; I the other, with the things for producing +fire. + +"Now don't weary for us, Peterkin, should we be gone some time," +said Jack; "we'll be sure to return in half-an-hour at the very +latest, however interesting the cave should be, that we may relieve +your mind." + +"Farewell!" said Peterkin, coming up to us with a look of deep but +pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and kissed each of us on +the cheek. "Farewell! and while you are gone I shall repose my +weary limbs under the shelter of this bush, and meditate on the +changefulness of all things earthly, with special reference to the +forsaken condition of a poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!" So saying, +Peterkin waved his hand, turned from us, and cast himself upon the +ground with a look of melancholy resignation, which was so well +feigned, that I would have thought it genuine had he not +accompanied it with a gentle wink. We both laughed, and, springing +from the rocks together, plunged head first into the sea. + +We gained the interior of the submarine cave without difficulty, +and, on emerging from the waves, supported ourselves for some time +by treading-water, while we held the two bundles above our heads. +This we did in order to let our eyes become accustomed to the +obscurity. Then, when we could see sufficiently, we swam to a +shelving rock, and landed in safety. Having wrung the water from +our trousers, and dried ourselves as well as we could under the +circumstances, we proceeded to ignite the torch. This we +accomplished without difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did +it flare up than we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects +that were revealed to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above +us seemed to be about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded +into the distance, until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be +made of coral, and was supported by massive columns of the same +material. Immense icicles (as they appeared to us) hung from it in +various places. These, however, were formed, not of ice, but of a +species of limestone, which seemed to flow in a liquid form towards +the point of each, where it became solid. A good many drops fell, +however, to the rock below, and these formed little cones, which +rose to meet the points above. Some of them had already met, and +thus we saw how the pillars were formed, which at first seemed to +us as if they had been placed there by some human architect to +support the roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor +was composed of the same material as the pillars; and it presented +the curious appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water when +gently ruffled by the wind. There were several openings on either +hand in the walls, that seemed to lead into other caverns; but +these we did not explore at this time. We also observed that the +ceiling was curiously marked in many places, as if it were the +fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the walls, as well as the roof, +sparkled in the light of our torch, and threw back gleams and +flashes, as if they were covered with precious stones. Although we +proceeded far into this cavern, we did not come to the end of it; +and we were obliged to return more speedily than we would otherwise +have done, as our torch was nearly expended. We did not observe +any openings in the roof, or any indications of places whereby +light might enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an +immense mass of pure white coral rock, which caught and threw back +the little light that found an entrance through the cave's mouth, +and thus produced, we conjectured, the pale-green object which had +first attracted our attention. We concluded, also, that the +reflecting power of this rock was that which gave forth the dim +light that faintly illumined the first part of the cave. + +Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the small +piece of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry spot; +conceiving that we might possibly stand in need of it, if at any +future time we should chance to wet our torch while diving into the +cavern. As we stood for a few minutes after it was out, waiting +till our eyes became accustomed to the gloom, we could not help +remarking the deep, intense stillness and the unutterable gloom of +all around us; and, as I thought of the stupendous dome above, and +the countless gems that had sparkled in the torch-light a few +minutes before, it came into my mind to consider how strange it is +that God should make such wonderful and extremely-beautiful works +never to be seen at all, except, indeed, by chance visitors such as +ourselves. + +I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the +islands of the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful +than the one I have just described. + +"Now, Ralph, are you ready?" said Jack, in a low voice, that seemed +to echo up into the dome above. + +"Quite ready." + +"Come along, then," said he; and, plunging off the ledge of the +rock into the water, we dived through the narrow entrance. In a +few seconds we were panting on the rocks above, and receiving the +congratulations of our friend Peterkin. + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + + +Strange peculiarity of the tides - Also of the twilight - +Peterkin's remarkable conduct in embracing a little pig and killing +a big sow - Sage remarks on jesting - Also on love. + + +IT was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to enjoy +the glad sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond Cave, as we +named it; for, although we did not stay more than half an hour +away, it seemed to us much longer. While we were dressing, and +during our walk home, we did our best to satisfy the curiosity of +poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, with lively sincerity, his +inability to dive. + +There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as we +best could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the tide of +these seas, we might perhaps have found it possible to take him +down with us at low water; but as the tide never rose or fell more +than eighteen inches or two feet, this was impossible. + +This peculiarity of the tide - its slight rise and fall - had not +attracted our observation till some time after our residence on the +island. Neither had we observed another curious circumstance until +we had been some time there. This was the fact, that the tide rose +and fell with constant regularity, instead of being affected by the +changes of the moon as in our own country, and as it is in most +other parts of the world, - at least in all those parts with which +I am acquainted. Every day and every night, at twelve o'clock +precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six o'clock every +morning and evening it is ebb. I can speak with much confidence on +this singular circumstance, as we took particular note of it, and +never found it to alter. Of course, I must admit, we had to guess +the hour of twelve midnight, and I think we could do this pretty +correctly; but in regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, +because we easily found the highest point that the sun reached in +the sky by placing ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed +the sharp summit of a cliff resting against the sky, just where the +sun passed. + +Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the first +few days of our residence here, and could only account for it by +our being so much taken up with the more obvious wonders of our +novel situation. I have since learned, however, that this want of +observation is a sad and very common infirmity of human nature, +there being hundreds of persons before whose eyes the most +wonderful things are passing every day, who nevertheless are +totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my sympathy +with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of conduct +which I have now for a long time myself adopted, - namely, the +habit of forcing my attention upon ALL things that go on around me, +and of taking some degree of interest in them, whether I feel it +naturally or not. I suggest this the more earnestly, though +humbly, because I have very frequently come to know that my +indifference to a thing has generally been caused by my ignorance +in regard to it. + +We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; and +Jack told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these tides +did great good to the world in many ways, particularly in the way +of cleansing the shores of the land, and carrying off the filth +that was constantly poured into the sea there-from; which, Peterkin +suggested, was remarkably TIDY of it to do. Poor Peterkin could +never let slip an opportunity to joke, however inopportune it might +be: which at first we found rather a disagreeable propensity, as +it often interrupted the flow of very agreeable conversation; and, +indeed, I cannot too strongly record my disapprobation of this +tendency in general: but we became so used to it at last that we +found it no interruption whatever; indeed, strange to say, we came +to feel that it was a necessary part of our enjoyment (such is the +force of habit), and found the sudden outbursts of mirth, resulting +from his humorous disposition, quite natural and refreshing to us +in the midst of our more serious conversations. But I must not +misrepresent Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he +knew many things which we did not; and I also observed that those +things which he learned from experience were never forgotten. From +all these things I came at length to understand that things very +opposite and dissimilar in themselves, when united, do make an +agreeable whole; as, for example, we three on this our island, +although most unlike in many things, when united, made a trio so +harmonious that I question if there ever met before such an +agreeable triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of discord +whatever in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral +Island; and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having +been all tuned to the same key, namely, that of LOVE! Yes, we +loved one another with much fervency while we lived on that island; +and, for the matter of that, we love each other still. + +And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that just +preceded it - namely, the tides - I may here remark on another +curious natural phenomenon. We found that there was little or no +twilight in this island. We had a distinct remembrance of the +charming long twilight at home, which some people think the most +delightful part of the day, though for my part I have always +preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, we used to sit down on +some rocky point or eminence, at the close of our day's work, to +enjoy the evening breeze; but no sooner had the sun sunk below the +horizon than all became suddenly dark. This rendered it necessary +that we should watch the sun when we happened to be out hunting, +for to be suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very +perplexing, as, although the stars shone with great beauty and +brilliancy, they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous +boughs that interlaced above our heads. + +But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin about +the Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the locality, we +were wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt and a squeal +were borne down by the land breeze to our ears. + +"That's the ticket!" was Peterkin's remarkable exclamation, as he +started convulsively, and levelled his spear. + +"Hist!" cried Jack; "these are your friends, Peterkin. They must +have come over expressly to pay you a friendly visit, for it is the +first time we have seen them on this side the island." + +"Come along!" cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the wood, while Jack +and I followed, smiling at his impatience. + +Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than before, +came down the valley. At this time we were just opposite the small +vale which lay between the Valley of the Wreck and Spouting Cliff. + +"I say, Peterkin," cried Jack, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Well, what is't?" + +"Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there on the hill +side. If you go and stand with Ralph in the lee of yon cliff, I'll +cut round behind and drive them through the gorge, so that you'll +have a better chance of picking out a good one. Now, mind you +pitch into a fat young pig, Peterkin," added Jack, as he sprang +into the bushes. + +"Won't I, just!" said Peterkin, licking his lips, as we took our +station beside the cliff. "I feel quite a tender affection for +young pigs in my heart. Perhaps it would be more correct to say in +my s-." + +"There they come!" cried I, as a terrific yell from Jack sent the +whole herd screaming down the hill. Now, Peterkin, being unable to +hold back, crept a short way up a very steep grassy mound, in order +to get a better view of the hogs before they came up; and just as +he raised his head above its summit, two little pigs, which had +outrun their companions, rushed over the top with the utmost +precipitation. One of these brushed close past Peterkin's ear; the +other, unable to arrest its headlong flight, went, as Peterkin +himself afterwards expressed it, "bash" into his arms with a sudden +squeal, which was caused more by the force of the blow than the +will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently down to the +foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached than the little pig +recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and fled shrieking from the +spot. But I slang a large stone after it, which, being fortunately +well aimed, hit it behind the ear, and felled it to the earth. + +"Capital, Ralph! that's your sort!" cried Peterkin, who, to my +surprise and great relief, had risen to his feet. Apparently +unhurt, though much dishevelled, he rushed franticly towards the +gorge, which the yells of the hogs told us they were now +approaching. I had made up my mind that I would abstain from +killing another, as, if Peterkin should be successful, two were +more than sufficient for our wants at the present time. Suddenly +they all burst forth, - two or three little round ones in advance, +and an enormous old sow with a drove of hogs at her heels. + +"Now, Peterkin," said I, "there's a nice little fat one; just spear +it." + +But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass unharmed. I +looked at him in surprise, and saw that his lips were compressed +and his eyebrows knitted, as if he were about to fight with some +awful enemy. + +"What is it?" I inquired, with some trepidation. + +Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a yell +that nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow to the +heart. Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear went in at +one side and came out at the other! + +"Oh, Peterkin!" said I, going up to him, "what have you done?" + +"Done? I've killed their great-great-grandmother, that's all," +said he, looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the +transfixed animal. + +"Hallo! what's this?" said Jack, as he came up. "Why, Peterkin, +you must be fond of a tough chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, +she'll try your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick HER, +Peterkin?" + +"Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes." + +"What have your shoes to do with the old hog?' said I, smiling. + +"My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with her," replied +Peterkin; "nevertheless she will have a good deal to do with my +future shoes. The fact is, when I saw you floor that pig so +neatly, Ralph, it struck me that there was little use in killing +another. Then I remembered all at once that I had long wanted some +leather or tough substance to make shoes of, and this old +grandmother seemed so tough that I just made up my mind to stick +her, and you see I've done it!" + +"That you certainly have, Peterkin," said Jack, as he was examining +the transfixed animal. + +We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, although +the distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At length we hit +on the plan of tying its four feet together, and passing the spear +handle between them. Jack took one end on his shoulder, I took the +other on mine, and Peterkin carried the small pig. + +Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin +remarked, with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he +afterwards spoke in similarly glowing terms in reference to the +supper that followed, there is every reason to believe that we +retired that night to our leafy beds in a high state of +satisfaction. + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + + +Boat-building extraordinary - Peterkin tries his hand at cookery +and fails most signally - The boat finished - Curious conversation +with the cat, and other matters. + + +FOR many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting +assiduity to the construction of our boat, which at length began to +look somewhat like one. But those only who have had the thing to +do can entertain a right idea of the difficulty involved in such an +undertaking, with no other implements than an axe, a bit of hoop- +iron, a sail-needle, and a broken pen-knife. But Jack did it. He +was of, that disposition which WILL not be conquered. When he +believed himself to be acting rightly, he overcame all obstacles. +I have seen Jack, when doubtful whether what he was about to do +were right or wrong, as timid and vacillating as a little girl, - +and I honour him for it! + +As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here relative +to the manner of its construction may not be amiss. + +I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful +buttresses or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with the chief +part of our material. First of all Jack sought out a limb of a +tree of such a form and size as, while it should form the keel a +bend at either end should form the stem and stern posts. Such a +piece, however, was not easy to obtain, but at last he procured it, +by rooting up a small tree which had a branch growing at the proper +angle about ten feet up its stem, with two strong roots growing in +such a form as enabled him to make a flat-sterned boat. This +placed, he procured three branching roots of suitable size, which +he fitted to the keel at equal distances, thus forming three strong +ribs. Now, the squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of +the grooves in the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all +work for the axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully +expert; but it was quite a different affair when he came to nailing +the ribs to the keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a +large hole, and no nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, +much perplexed here; but Jack at length devised an instrument that +served very well. He took the remainder of our hoop-iron and beat +it into the form of a pipe or cylinder, about as thick as a man's +finger. This he did by means of our axe and the old rusty axe we +had found at the house of the poor man at the other side of the +island. This, when made red hot, bored slowly though the timbers; +and, the better to retain the heat, Jack shut up one end of it and +filled it with sand. True, the work was very slowly done, but it +mattered not - we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into the +keel, but not quite through. Into these were placed stout pegs +made of a tree called iron-wood; and, when they were hammered well +home, the timbers were as firmly fixed as if they had been nailed +with iron. The gunwales, which were very stout, were fixed in a +similar manner. But, besides the wooden nails, they were firmly +lashed to the stem and stern posts and ribs by means of a species +of cordage which we had contrived to make out of the fibrous husk +of the cocoa nut. This husk was very tough, and when a number of +the threads were joined together they formed excellent cordage. At +first we tied the different lengths together, but this was such a +clumsy and awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by +careful interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make +good cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost us +much time and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits when we +grew weary, and so all that we required was at last constructed. + +Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch thick. +These were dressed with the axe, - but clumsily, for an axe is ill +adapted for such work. Five of these planks on each side were +sufficient, and we formed the boat in a very rounded, barrel-like +shape, in order to have as little twisting of the planks as +possible; for, although we could easily bend them, we could not +easily twist them. Having no nails to rivet the planks with, we +threw aside the ordinary fashion of boat building and adopted one +of our own. The planks were therefore placed on each other's +edges, and sewed together with the tough cordage already mentioned. +They were also thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. +Each stitch or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: +Three holes were bored in the upper plank and three in the lower, - +the holes being above each other, that is, in a vertical line. +Through these holes the cord was passed, and, when tied, formed a +powerful stitch of three ply. Besides this, we placed between the +edges of the planks, layers of cocoa-nut fibre, which, as it +swelled when wetted, would, we hoped, make our little vessel water- +tight. But in order further to secure this end, we collected a +large quantity of pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with which, when +boiled in our old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside of the +boat, and, while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut +cloth on it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the +interior was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the +exterior, being uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action of +the water, was we hoped, likely to keep the boat quite dry. I may +add that our hopes were not disappointed. + +While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted him, +but, as our assistance was not much required, we more frequently +went a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the entrance of the +long valley which lay nearest to our bower. Here we found large +flocks of ducks of various kinds, some of them bearing so much +resemblance to the wild ducks of our own country that I think they +must have been the same. On these occasions we took the bow and +the sling, with both of which we were often successful, though I +must confess I was the least so. Our suppers were thus pleasantly +varied, and sometimes we had such a profusion spread out before us +that we frequently knew not with which of the dainties to begin. + +I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought home +had always a liberal share of our good things, and so well was it +looked after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered much of its +former strength, and seemed to improve in sight as well as hearing. + +The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in front +of the entrance to our bower, was our table. On this rock we had +spread out the few articles we possessed the day we were +shipwrecked; and on the same rock, during many a day afterwards, we +spread out the bountiful supply with which we had been blessed on +our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat down at this table to a feast +consisting of hot rolls, - as Peterkin called the newly baked bread +fruit, - a roast pig, roast duck, boiled and roasted yams, cocoa +nuts, taro, and sweet potatoes; which we followed up with a dessert +of plums, apples, and plantains, - the last being a large-sized and +delightful fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more than +twelve feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down with +cocoa-nut lemonade. + +Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new dish, - "a +conglomerate," as he used to say; but these generally turned out +such atrocious compounds that he was ultimately induced to give up +his attempts in extreme disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point +out to Jack that his failure was a direct contradiction to the +proverb which he, Jack, was constantly thrusting down his throat, +namely, that "where there's a will there's a way." For he had a +great will to become a cook, but could by no means find a way to +accomplish that end. + +One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on which +dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, flinging down +his axe, exclaimed, - + +"There, lads, the boat's finished at last! so we've nothing to do +now but shape two pair of oars, and then we may put to sea as soon +as we like." + +This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for although +we were aware that the boat had been gradually getting near its +completion, it had taken so long that we did not expect it to be +quite ready for at least two or three weeks. But Jack had wrought +hard and said nothing, in order to surprise us. + +"My dear fellow," cried Peterkin, "you're a perfect trump. But why +did you not tell us it was so nearly ready? won't we have a jolly +sail to-morrow? eh?" + +"Don't talk so much, Peterkin," said Jack; "and, pray, hand me a +bit of that pig." + +"Certainly, my dear," cried Peterkin, seizing the axe; "what part +will you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece of the breast; which?" + +"A hind leg, if you please," answered Jack; "and, pray, be so good +as to include the tail." + +"With all my heart," said Peterkin, exchanging the axe for his +hoop-iron knife, with which he cut off the desired portion. "I'm +only too glad, my dear boy, to see that your appetite is so +wholesale; and there's no chance whatever of its dwindling down +into re-tail again, at least in so far as this pig is concerned. +Ralph, lad, why don't you laugh? - eh?" he added turning suddenly +to me with a severe look of inquiry. + +"Laugh?" said I; "what at, Peterkin? why should I laugh?" + +Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves laughing +so immoderately that I was induced to believe I had missed noticing +some good joke, so I begged that it might be explained to me; but +as this only produced repeated roars of laughter, I smiled and +helped myself to another slice of plantain. + +"Well, but," continued Peterkin, "I was talking of a sail to- +morrow. Can't we have one, Jack?" + +"No," replied Jack, "we can't have a sail, but I hope we shall have +a row, as I intend to work hard at the oars this afternoon, and, if +we can't get them finished by sunset we'll light our candle-nuts, +and turn them out of hands before we turn into bed." + +"Very good," said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork to the cat, who +received it with a mew of satisfaction. "I'll help you, if I can." + +"Afterwards," continued Jack, "we will make a sail out of the +cocoa-nut cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we shall be able to +sail to some of the other islands, and visit our old friends the +penguins." + +The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our +observations to the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the +beautiful sea, afforded us much delight, and, after dinner, we set +about making the oars in good earnest. Jack went into the woods +and blocked them roughly out with the axe, and I smoothed them down +with the knife, while Peterkin remained in the bower, spinning, or, +rather, twisting some strong thick cordage with which to fasten +them to the boat. + +We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, Jack +and I returned to the bower with four stout oars, which required +little to be done to them save a slight degree of polishing with +the knife. As we drew near we were suddenly arrested by the sound +of a voice! We were not a little surprised at this - indeed I may +almost say alarmed - for, although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of +talking, we had never, up to this time, found him talking to +himself. We listened intently, and still heard the sound of a +voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be silent, and, +advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in. + +The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little amusing. On +the top of a log which we sometimes used as a table, sat the black +cat, with a very demure expression on its countenance; and in front +of it, sitting on the ground, with his legs extended on either side +of the log, was Peterkin. At the moment we saw him he was gazing +intently into the cat's face, with his nose about four inches from +it, - his hands being thrust into his breeches pockets. + +"Cat," said Peterkin, turning his head a little on one side, "I +love you!" + +There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this +affectionate declaration but the cat said nothing. + +"Do you hear me?" cried Peterkin, sharply. "I love you - I do. +Don't you love me?" + +To this touching appeal the cat said "Mew," faintly. + +"Ah! that's right. You're a jolly old rascal. Why did you not +speak at once? eh?" and Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed +the cat on the nose! + +"Yes," continued Peterkin, after a pause, "I love you. D'you think +I'd say so if I didn't, you black villain? I love you because I've +got to take care of you, and to look after you, and to think about +you, and to see that you don't die - " + +"Mew, me-a-w!" said the cat. + +"Very good," continued Peterkin, "quite true, I have no doubt; but +you've no right to interrupt me, sir. Hold your tongue till I have +done speaking. Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me +the first time you ever saw me, and didn't seem to be afraid, and +appeared to be fond of me, though you didn't know that I wasn't +going to kill you. Now, that was brave, that was bold, and very +jolly, old boy, and I love you for it - I do!" + +Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat +looked placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if in +contemplation. Suddenly he looked up. + +"Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won't speak? eh? Now, +tell me; don't you think it's a monstrous shame that these two +scoundrels, Jack and Ralph, should keep us waiting for our supper +so long?" + +Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; yawned +slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin's nose! + +"Just so, old boy, you're a clever fellow, - I really do believe +the brute understands me!" said Peterkin, while a broad grin +overspread his face, as he drew back and surveyed the cat. + +At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. The cat +uttered an angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up and +exclaimed, - + +"Bad luck to you, Jack! you've nearly made the heart jump out of my +body, you have." + +"Perhaps I have," replied Jack, laughing, as we entered the bower, +"but, as I don't intend to keep you or the cat any longer from your +supper, I hope that you'll both forgive me." + +Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but I +observed that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered +ourselves, and he did not seem to relish any allusion to the +subject afterwards; so we refrained from remarking on it ever +after, - though it tickled us not a little at the time. + +After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful +adventures in our little boat, and distant voyages upon the sea. + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + + +The boat launched - We visit the coral reef - The great breaker +that never goes down - Coral insects - The way in which coral +islands are made - The boat's sail - We tax our ingenuity to form +fish-hooks - Some of the fish we saw - And a monstrous whale - +Wonderful shower of little fish - Water-spouts. + + +IT was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first launched +our little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of the lagoon. +Not a breath of wind ruffled the surface of the deep. Not a cloud +spotted the deep blue sky. Not a sound that was discordant broke +the stillness of the morning, although there were many sounds, +sweet, tiny, and melodious, that mingled in the universal harmony +of nature. The sun was just rising from the Pacific's ample bosom +and tipping the mountain tops with a red glow. The sea was shining +like a sheet of glass, yet heaving with the long deep swell that, +all the world round, indicates the life of ocean; and the bright +sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of that +pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious gems. +Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to its +profoundest depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift that +heart in adoration and gratitude to the great Creator of this +magnificent and glorious universe. + +At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and +thither without aim or object. But after the effervescence of our +spirits was abated, we began to look about us and to consider what +we should do. + +"I vote that we row to the reef," cried Peterkin. + +"And I vote that we visit the islands within the lagoon," said I. + +"And I vote we do both," cried Jack, "so pull away, boys." + +As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat was so +small that only two were necessary. The extra pair were reserved +in case any accident should happen to the others. It was therefore +only needful that two of us should row, while the third steered, by +means of an oar, and relieved the rowers occasionally. + +First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over it, +but saw nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we landed on a +larger island, on which were growing a few cocoa-nut trees. Not +having eaten anything that morning, we gathered a few of the nuts +and breakfasted. After this we pulled straight out to sea and +landed on the coral reef. + +This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We had now +been so long on shore that we had almost forgotten the appearance +of breakers, for there were none within the lagoon; but now, as we +stood beside the foam-crested billow of the open sea, all the +enthusiasm of the sailor was awakened in our breasts; and, as we +gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that single magnificent breaker +that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot the Coral Island +behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm repose of the scented +woods; we forgot all that had passed during the last few months, +and remembered nothing but the storms, the calms, the fresh breezes +and the surging billows of the open sea. + +This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often alluded, was +a much larger and more sublime object than we had at all imagined +it to be. It rose many yards above the level of the sea, and could +be seen approaching at some distance from the reef. Slowly and +majestically it came on, acquiring greater volume and velocity as +it advanced, until it assumed the form of a clear watery arch, +which sparkled in the bright sun. On it came with resistless and +solemn majesty, - the upper edge lipped gently over, and it fell +with a roar that seemed as though the heart of Ocean were broken in +the crash of tumultuous water, while the foam-clad coral reef +appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock! + +We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was with +difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I have once +before mentioned, this wave broke in many places over the reef and +scattered some of its spray into the lagoon, but in most places the +reef was sufficiently broad and elevated to receive and check its +entire force. In many places the coral rocks were covered with +vegetation, - the beginning, as it appeared to us, of future +islands. Thus, on this reef, we came to perceive how most of the +small islands of those seas are formed. On one part we saw the +spray of the breaker washing over the rocks, and millions of +little, active, busy creatures continuing the work of building up +this living rampart. At another place, which was just a little too +high for the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all +dead; for we found that they never did their work above water. +They had faithfully completed the mighty work which their Creator +had given them to do, and they were now all dead. Again, in other +spots the ceaseless lashing of the sea had broken the dead coral in +pieces, and cast it up in the form of sand. Here sea-birds had +alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and stray bits of wood had been +washed up, seeds of plants had been carried by the wind and a few +lovely blades of bright green had already sprung up, which, when +they died, would increase the size and fertility of these emeralds +of Ocean. At other places these islets had grown apace, and were +shaded by one or two cocoa-nut trees, which grew, literally, in the +sand, and were constantly washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have +before remarked, their fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our +taste. + +Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the large +coral islands. We could now understand how the low ones were +formed, but the larger islands cost us much consideration, yet we +could arrive at no certain conclusion on the subject. + +Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during the +whole day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, and, +withal, rather hungry, to our bower. + +"Now," said Jack, "as our boat answers so well, we will get a mast +and sail made immediately." + +"So we will," cried Peterkin, as we all assisted to drag the boat +above high-water mark; "we'll light our candle and set about it +this very night. Hurrah, my boys, pull away!" + +As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on her +keel; and, as the sands were in this place mingled with broken +coral rocks, we saw portions of the wood being scraped off. + +"Hallo!" cried Jack, on seeing this. "That won't do. Our keel +will be worn off in no time at this rate." + +"So it will," said I, pondering deeply as to how this might be +prevented. But I am not of a mechanical turn, naturally, so I +could conceive no remedy save that of putting a plate of iron on +the keel, but as we had no iron I knew not what was to be done. +"It seems to me, Jack," I added, "that it is impossible to prevent +the keel being worn off thus." + +"Impossible!" cried Peterkin, "my dear Ralph, you are mistaken, +there is nothing so easy - " + +"How?" I inquired, in some surprise. + +"Why, by not using the boat at all!" replied Peterkin. + +"Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin," said Jack, as he shouldered +the oars, "come along with me and I'll give you work to do. In the +first place, you will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to +work to make sewing twine with it - " + +"Please, captain," interrupted Peterkin, "I've got lots of it made +already, - more than enough, as a little friend of mine used to be +in the habit of saying every day after dinner." + +"Very well," continued Jack; "then you'll help Ralph to collect +cocoa-nut cloth, and cut it into shape, after which we'll make a +sail of it. I'll see to getting the mast and the gearing; so let's +to work." + +And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from that +time we had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary rigging, in +our little boat. The sail was not, indeed, very handsome to look +at, as it was formed of a number of oblong patches of cloth; but we +had sewed it well by means of our sail-needle, so that it was +strong, which was the chief point. Jack had also overcome the +difficulty about the keel, by pinning to it a FALSE keel. This was +a piece of tough wood, of the same length and width as the real +keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of this depth because +the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more safe, but +more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea where the +trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one direction, was a +matter of great importance. This piece of wood was pegged very +firmly to the keel; and we now launched our boat with the +satisfaction of knowing that when the false keel should be scraped +off we could easily put on another; whereas, should the real keel +have been scraped away, we could not have renewed it without taking +our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said made his "marrow quake to +think upon." + +The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed about in +the lagoon with great delight, and examined with much interest the +appearance of our island from a distance. Also, we gazed into the +depths of the water, and watched for hours the gambols of the +curious and bright-coloured fish among the corals and sea-weed. +Peterkin also made a fishing line, and Jack constructed a number of +hooks, some of which were very good, others remarkably bad. Some +of these hooks were made of iron-wood, which did pretty well, the +wood being extremely hard, and Jack made them very thick and large. +Fish there are not particular. Some of the crooked bones in fish- +heads also answered for this purpose pretty well. But that which +formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass finger-ring +belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little trouble to manufacture +it. First he cut it with the axe; then twisted it into the form of +a hook. The barb took him several hours to cut. He did it by +means of constant sawing with the broken pen-knife. As for the +point, an hour's rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent +one. + +It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the +appearance of the multitudes of fish that were day after day drawn +into our boat by means of the brass hook. Peterkin always caught +them, - for we observed that he derived much pleasure from fishing, +- while Jack and I found ample amusement in looking on, also in +gazing down at the coral groves, and in baiting the hook. Among +the fish that we saw, but did not catch, were porpoises and sword- +fish, whales and sharks. The porpoises came frequently into our +lagoon in shoals, and amused us not a little by their bold leaps +into the air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword-fish +were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting +from their noses. We often saw them darting after other fish, and +no doubt they sometimes killed them with their ivory swords. Jack +remembered having heard once of a sword-fish attacking a ship, - +which seemed strange indeed; but, as they are often in the habit of +attacking whales, perhaps it mistook the ship for one. This sword- +fish ran against the vessel with such force, that it drove its +sword quite through the thick planks; and when the ship arrived in +harbour, long afterwards, the sword was found still sticking in it! + +Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to bathe +in deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat to give +us warning, if he should see a shark approaching. As for the +whales, they never came into our lagoon, but we frequently saw them +spouting in the deep water beyond the reef. I shall never forget +my surprise the first day I saw one of these huge monsters close to +me. We had been rambling about on the reef during the morning, and +were about to re-embark in our little boat, to return home, when a +loud blowing sound caused us to wheel rapidly round. We were just +in time to see a shower of spray falling, and the flukes or tail of +some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few hundred yards off. +We waited some time to see if he would rise again. As we stood, +the sea seemed to open up at our very feet; an immense spout of +water was sent with a snort high into the air, and the huge blunt +head of a sperm whale arose before us. It was so large that it +could easily have taken our little boat, along with ourselves, into +its mouth! It plunged slowly back into the sea, like a large ship +foundering, and struck the water with its tail so forcibly as to +cause a sound like a cannon shot. We also saw a great number of +flying fish, although we caught none; and we noticed that they +never flew out of the water except when followed by their bitter +foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to escape. But +of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us so much as those +that we used to find in shallow pools after a shower of rain; and +this not on account of their appearance, for they were ordinary- +looking and very small, but on account of their having descended in +a shower of rain! We could account for them in no other way, +because the pools in which we found these fish were quite dry +before the shower, and at some distance above high-water mark. +Jack, however, suggested a cause which seemed to me very probable. +We used often to see water-spouts in the sea. A water-spout is a +whirling body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp- +pointed pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long +tongue, which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have +joined, they look something like an hour-glass. The water-spout is +then carried by the wind, sometimes gently, sometimes with +violence, over the sea, sometimes up into the clouds, and then, +bursting asunder, it descends in a deluge. This often happens over +the land as well as over the sea; and it sometimes does much +damage, but frequently it passes gently away. Now, Jack thought +that the little fish might perhaps have been carried up in a water- +spout, and so sent down again in a shower of rain. But we could +not be certain as to this point; yet we thought it likely. + +During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we caught a +good many eels, which we found to be very good to eat. We also +found turtles among the coral rocks, and made excellent soup in our +iron kettle. Moreover, we discovered many shrimps and prawns, so +that we had no lack of variety in our food; and, indeed, we never +passed a week without making some new and interesting discovery of +some sort or other, either on the land or in the sea. + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + + +A monster wave and its consequences - The boat lost and found - +Peterkin's terrible accident - Supplies of food for a voyage in the +boat - We visit Penguin Island, and are amazed beyond measure - +Account of the penguins. + + +ONE day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were +sitting on the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an excursion +which we intended to make to Penguin Island the next day. + +"You see," said Peterkin, "it might be all very well for a stupid +fellow like me to remain here and leave the penguins alone, but it +would be quite inconsistent with your characters as philosophers to +remain any longer in ignorance of the habits and customs of these +birds; so the sooner we go the better." + +"Very true," said I; "there is nothing I desire so much as to have +a closer inspection of them." + +"And I think," said Jack, "that you had better remain at home, +Peterkin, to take care of the cat; for I'm sure the hogs will be at +it in your absence, out of revenge for your killing their great- +grandmother so recklessly." + +"Stay at home?" cried Peterkin; "my dear fellow, you would +certainly lose your way, or get upset, if I were not there to take +care of you." + +"Ah, true," said Jack, gravely, "that did not occur to me; no doubt +you must go. Our boat does require a good deal of ballast; and all +that you say, Peterkin, carries so much weight with it, that we +won't need stones if you go." + +Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event occurred, +which, as it is not generally known, I shall be particular in +recording here. + +While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, like +a low cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The day was a +fine one, though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was blowing, but the +sea was not rougher, or the breaker on the reef higher, than usual. +At first we thought that this looked like a thunder-cloud; and, as +we had had a good deal of broken weather of late, accompanied by +occasional peals of thunder, we supposed that a storm must be +approaching. Gradually, however, this line seemed to draw nearer, +without spreading up over the sky, as would certainly have been the +case if it had been a storm-cloud. Still nearer it came, and soon +we saw that it was moving swiftly towards the island; but there was +no sound till it reached the islands out at sea. As it passed +these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, that a cloud of +white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the air: it was +accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture that the +approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but we had no +idea how large it was till it came near to ourselves. When it +approached the outer reef, however, we were awe-struck with its +unusual magnitude; and we sprang to our feet, and clambered hastily +up to the highest point of the precipice, under an indefinable +feeling of fear. + +I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was very +near to the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was at a +considerable distance out to sea. Owing to this formation, the +wave reached the reef at the latter point before it struck at the +foot of Spouting Cliff. The instant it touched the reef we became +aware, for the first time, of its awful magnitude. It burst +completely over the reef at all points, with a roar that seemed +louder to me than thunder; and this roar continued for some +seconds, while the wave rolled gradually along towards the cliff on +which we stood. As its crest reared before us, we felt that we +were in great danger, and turned to flee; but we were too late. +With a crash that seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic +billow fell, and instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of +water-spouts with such force that they shrieked on issuing from +their narrow vents. It seemed to us as if the earth had been blown +up with water. We were stunned and confused by the shock, and so +drenched and blinded with spray, that we knew not for a few moments +whither to flee for shelter. At length we all three gained an +eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a scene of +devastation met our gaze as we looked along the shore! This +enormous wave not only burst over the reef, but continued its way +across the lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach of the island with +such force that passed completely over it and dashed into the +woods, levelling the smaller trees and bushes in its headlong +course! + +On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been swept +away, and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have been +utterly destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we thought of +this, and we hastened round through the woods towards our home. On +reaching it we found, to our great relief of mind, that the force +of the wave had been expended just before reaching the bower; but +the entrance to it was almost blocked up by the torn-up bushes and +tangled heaps of sea-weed. Having satisfied ourselves as to the +bower, we hurried to the spot where the boat had been left; but no +boat was there! The spot on which it had stood was vacant, and no +sign of it could we see on looking around us. + +"It may have been washed up into the woods," said Jack, hurrying up +the beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was to be seen, and we were +about to give ourselves over to despair, when Peterkin called to +Jack and said, - + +"Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious and wise +as to make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts grow upon +trees; will you now be so good as to inform me what sort of fruit +that is growing on the top of yonder bush? for I confess to being +ignorant, or, at least, doubtful on the point." + +We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our surprise, +beheld our little boat snugly nestled among the leaves! We were +very much overjoyed at this, for we would have suffered any loss +rather than the loss of our boat. We found that the wave had +actually borne the boat on its crest from the beach into the woods, +and there launched it into the heart of this bush; which was +extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed against a rock or a +tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, whereas it had not +received the smallest injury. It was no easy matter, however, to +get it out of the bush and down to the sea again. This cost us two +days of hard labour to accomplish. + +We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the +bower, and spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the +neighbourhood to look as clean and orderly as before; for the +uprooted bushes and sea-weed that lay on the beach formed a more +dreadfully confused-looking mass than one who had not seen the +place after the inundation could conceive. + +Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of those who +interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of our world, +that this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of the islands of +the Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the year. I heard this +stated by the missionaries during my career in those seas. They +could not tell me whether it visited all of the islands, but I was +certainly assured that it occurred periodically in some of them. + +After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the DEBRIS +of the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to paying the +penguins a visit. The boat was therefore overhauled and a few +repairs done. Then we prepared a supply of provisions, for we +intended to be absent at least a night or two, perhaps longer. +This took us some time to do, for while Jack was busy with the +boat, Peterkin was sent into the woods to spear a hog or two, and +had to search long, sometimes, ere he found them. Peterkin was +usually sent on this errand, when we wanted a pork chop (which was +not seldom), because he was so active, and could run so wonderfully +fast that he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, being +dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home +without having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, indeed, a +more serious accident happened to him. He had been out all morning +alone and did not return at the usual time to dinner. We wondered +at this, for Peterkin was always very punctual at the dinner hour. +As supper-time drew near we began to be anxious about him, and at +length sallied forth to search the woods. For a long time we +sought in vain, but a little before dark we came upon the tracks of +the hogs, which we followed up until we came to the brow of a +rather steep bank or precipice. Looking over this we beheld +Peterkin lying in a state of insensibility at the foot, with his +cheek resting on the snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the +earth by the spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to +bathe his forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of +seeing him revive. After we had carried him home he related to as +how the thing had happened. + +"You must know," said he, "I walked about all the forenoon, till I +was as tired as an old donkey, without seeing a single grunter, not +so much as a track of one; but, as I was determined not to return +empty-handed, I resolved to go without my dinner and - " + +"What!" exclaimed Jack, "did you REALLY resolve to do that?" + +"Now, Jack, hold your tongue," returned Peterkin; "I say that I +resolved to forego my dinner and to push to the head of the small +valley, where I felt pretty sure of discovering the hogs. I soon +found that I was on the right scent, for I had scarcely walked half +a mile in the direction of the small plum tree we found there the +other day, when a squeak fell on my ear. 'Ho, ho,' said I, 'there +you go, my boys;' and I hurried up the glen. I soon started them, +and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. In a few seconds I +was up with him, and stuck my spear right through his dumpy body. +Just as I did so, I saw that we were on the edge of a precipice, +whether high or low I knew not, but I had been running at such a +pace that I could not stop, so the pig and I gave a howl in concert +and went plunging over together. I remembered nothing more after +that, till I came to my senses and found you bathing my temples, +and Ralph wringing his hands over me." + +But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of getting +tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in hunting, and +returned before evening with three very nice little hogs. I, also, +was successful in my visit to the mud-flats, where I killed several +ducks. So that, when we launched and loaded our boat at sunrise +the following morning, we found our store of provisions to be more +than sufficient. Part had been cooked the night before, and, on +taking note of the different items, we found the account to stand +thus:- + + +10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.) +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.) +6 Taro roots. +50 Fine large plums. +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe. +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.) +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw. +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing. + + +I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by Peterkin +specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of its compounding +a profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; but I can say, +with much confidence, that we found it to be atrociously bad, and, +after the first tasting, scraped it carefully out and threw it +overboard. We calculated that this supply would last us for +several days, but we afterwards found that it was much more than we +required, especially in regard to the cocoa nuts, of which we found +large supplies wherever we went. However, as Peterkin remarked, it +was better to have too much than too little, as we knew not to what +straits we might be put during our voyage. + +It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and rowed +over the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed between +the two green islets that guard the entrance. We experienced some +difficulty and no little danger in passing the surf of the breaker, +and shipped a good deal of water in the attempt; but, once past the +billow, we found ourselves floating placidly on the long oily swell +that rose and fell slowly as it rolled over the wide ocean. + +Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at about a +mile beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it must be at +least twenty miles distant by the way we should have to go. We +might, indeed, have shortened the way by coasting round our island +inside of the lagoon, and going out at the passage in the reef +nearly opposite to Penguin Island, but we preferred to go by the +open sea; first, because it was more adventurous; and, secondly, +because we should have the pleasure of again feeling the motion of +the deep, which we all loved very much, not being liable to sea +sickness. + +"I wish we had a breeze," said Jack. + +"So do I," cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and wiping his heated +brow; "pulling is hard work. Oh dear, if we could only catch a +hundred or two of these gulls, tie them to the boat with long +strings, and make them fly as we want them, how capital it would +be!" + +"Or bore a hole through a shark's tail, and reeve a rope through +it, eh?" remarked Jack. "But, I say, it seems that my wish is +going to be granted, for here comes a breeze. Ship your oar, +Peterkin. Up with the mast, Ralph; I'll see to the sail. Mind +your helm; look out for squalls!" + +This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark blue +line on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of time, +swept down on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it went. We +presented the stern of the boat to its first violence, and, in a +few seconds, it moderated into a steady breeze, to which we spread +our sail and flew merrily over the waves. Although the breeze died +away soon afterwards, it had been so stiff while it lasted, that we +were carried over the greater part of our way before it fell calm +again; so that, when the flapping of the sail against the mast told +us that it was time to resume the oars, we were not much more than +a mile from Penguin Island. + +"There go the soldiers!" cried Peterkin as we came in sight of it; +"how spruce their white trousers look, this morning! I wonder if +they will receive us kindly. D'you think they are hospitable, +Jack?" + +"Don't talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you shall see shortly." + +As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the manoeuvres +and appearance of these strange birds. They seemed to be of +different species, for some had crests on their heads while others +had none, and while some were about the size of a goose others +appeared nearly as large as a swan. We also saw a huge albatross +soaring above the heads of the penguins. It was followed and +surrounded by numerous flocks of sea-gulls. Having approached to +within a few yards of the island, which was a low rock, with no +other vegetation on it than a few bushes, we lay on our oars and +gazed at the birds with surprise and pleasure, they returning our +gaze with interest. We now saw that their soldier-like appearance +was owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on their +short legs, - "Bolt-up-right," as Peterkin expressed it. They had +black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, and bluish backs. +Their wings were so short that they looked more like the fins of a +fish, and, indeed, we soon saw that they used them for the purpose +of swimming under water. There were no quills on these wings, but +a sort of scaly feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. +Their legs were short, and placed so far back that the birds, while +on land, were obliged to stand quite upright in order to keep their +balance; but in the water they floated like other water-fowl. At +first we were so stunned with the clamour which they and other sea- +birds kept up around us, that we knew not which way to look, - for +they covered the rocks in thousands; but, as we continued to gaze, +we observed several quadrupeds (as we thought) walking in the midst +of the penguins. + +"Pull in a bit," cried Peterkin, "and let's see what these are. +They must be fond of noisy company, to consort with such +creatures." + +To our surprise we found that these were no other than penguins +which had gone down on all fours, and were crawling among the +bushes on their feet and wings, just like quadrupeds. Suddenly one +big old bird, that had been sitting on a point very near to us, +gazing in mute astonishment, became alarmed, and, scuttling down +the rocks, plumped or fell, rather than ran, into the sea. It +dived in a moment, and, a few seconds afterwards, came out of the +water far a-head, with such a spring, and such a dive back into the +sea again, that we could scarcely believe it was not a fish that +had leaped in sport. + +"That beats everything," said Peterkin, rubbing his nose, and +screwing up his face with an expression of exasperated amazement. +"I've heard of a thing being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I +never did expect to live to see a brute that was all three +together, - at once - in one! But look there!" he continued, +pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, "look there! +there's no end to it. What HAS that brute got under its tail?" + +We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw a +penguin walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with an +egg under its tail. There were several others, we observed, +burdened in the same way; and we found afterwards that these were a +species of penguins that always carried their eggs so. Indeed, +they had a most convenient cavity for the purpose, just between the +tail and the legs. We were very much impressed with the regularity +and order of this colony. The island seemed to be apportioned out +into squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and sat in stiff +solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and down the +spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but others were +feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us to laugh not a +little. The mother stood on a mound or raised rock, while the +young one stood patiently below her on the ground. Suddenly the +mother raised her head and uttered a series of the most discordant +cackling sounds. + +"She's going to choke," cried Peterkin. + +But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked like it. +In a few seconds she put down her head and opened her mouth, into +which the young one thrust its beak and seemed to suck something +from her throat. Then the cackling was renewed, the sucking +continued, and so the operation of feeding was carried on till the +young one was satisfied; but what she fed her little one with, we +could not tell. + +"Now, just look yonder!" said Peterkin, in an excited tone; "if +that isn't the most abominable piece of maternal deception I ever +saw. That rascally old lady penguin has just pitched her young one +into the sea, and there's another about to follow her example." + +This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep rock +close to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin +endeavouring to entice her young one into the water; but the young +one seemed very unwilling to go, and, notwithstanding the +enticements of its mother, moved very slowly towards her. At last +she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it a little +towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as to say, +'Don't be afraid, darling! I won't hurt you, my pet!' but no +sooner did she get it to the edge of the rock, where it stood +looking pensively down at the sea, than she gave it a sudden and +violent push, sending it headlong down the slope into the water, +where its mother left it to scramble ashore as it best could. We +observed many of them employed in doing this, and we came to the +conclusion that this is the way in which old penguins teach their +children to swim. + +Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we were +startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the most +clumsy and ludicrous manner towards the sea. The beach, here, was +a sloping rock, and when they came to it, some of them succeeded in +hopping down in safety, but others lost their balance and rolled +and scrambled down the slope in the most helpless manner. The +instant they reached the water, however, they seemed to be in their +proper element. They dived and bounded out of it and into it again +with the utmost agility; and so, diving and bounding and +spluttering, for they could not fly, they went rapidly out to sea, + +On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and said, +"It's my opinion that these birds are all stark, staring mad, and +that this is an enchanted island. I therefore propose that we +should either put about ship and fly in terror from the spot, or +land valorously on the island, and sell our lives as dearly as we +can." + +"I vote for landing, so pull in, lads," said Jack, giving a stroke +with his oar that made the boat spin. In a few seconds we ran the +boat into a little creek where we made her fast to a projecting +piece of coral, and, running up the beach, entered the ranks of the +penguins armed with our cudgels and our spear. We were greatly +surprised to find that, instead of attacking us or showing signs of +fear at our approach, these curious birds did not move from their +places until we laid hands on them, and merely turned their eyes on +us in solemn, stupid wonder as we passed. There was one old +penguin, however, that began to walk slowly toward the sea, and +Peterkin took it into his head that he would try to interrupt its +progress, so he ran between it and the sea and brandished his +cudgel in its face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It +would not retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but +battled with Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it +reached the sea. Had Peterkin used his club he could easily have +felled it, no doubt; but, as he had no wish to do so cruel an act +merely out of sport, he let the bird escape. + +We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the habits of +these curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we all three +concluded, after much consultation, that they were the most +wonderful creatures we had ever seen; and further, we thought it +probable that they were the most wonderful creatures in the world! + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + + +An awful storm and its consequences - Narrow escape - A rock proves +a sure foundation - A fearful night and a bright morning - +Deliverance from danger. + + +IT was evening before we left the island of the penguins. As we +had made up our minds to encamp for the night on a small island, +whereon grew a few cocoa-nut trees, which was about two miles off, +we lay to our oars with some energy. But a danger was in store for +us which we had not anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so +quickly to Penguin Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff +breeze, and, before we had made half the distance to the small +island, it became a regular gale. Although it was not so directly +against us as to prevent our rowing in the course we wished to go, +yet it checked us very much; and although the force of the sea was +somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began to rise, and to +roll their broken crests against our small craft, so that she began +to take in water, and we had much ado to keep ourselves afloat. At +last the wind and sea together became so violent that we found it +impossible to make the island, so Jack suddenly put the head of the +boat round and ordered Peterkin and me to hoist a corner of the +sail, intending to run back to Penguin Island. + +"We shall at least have the shelter of the bushes," he said, as the +boat flew before the wind, "and the penguins will keep us company." + +As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much against +us that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order to beat +up for the island, being by this change thrown much to leeward of +it. What made matters worse was, that the gale came in squalls, so +that we were more than once nearly upset. + +"Stand by, both of you," cried Jack, in a quick, earnest tone; "be +ready to dowse the sail. I very much fear we won't make the island +after all." + +Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting everything to +Jack that we had fallen into the way of not considering things, +especially such things as were under Jack's care. We had, +therefore, never doubted for a moment that all was going well, so +that it was with no little anxiety that we heard him make the above +remark. However, we had no time for question or surmise, for, at +the moment he spoke, a heavy squall was bearing down upon us, and, +as we were then flying with our lee gunwale dipping occasionally +under the waves, it was evident that we should have to lower our +sail altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the boat, but +Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did not +upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full of +water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again hoisted a +corner of the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared came upon +us. We found it quite impossible to make Penguin Island. The gale +carried us quickly past it towards the open sea, and the terrible +truth flashed upon us that we should be swept out and left to +perish miserably in a small boat in the midst of the wide ocean. + +This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw nothing +in the direction whither the wind was blowing us save the raging +billows of the sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed around us, +for we were now beyond the shelter of the islands, and it seemed as +though any of the huge billows, which curled over in masses of +foam, might swallow us up in a moment. The water, also, began to +wash in over our sides, and I had to keep constantly baling, for +Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin the sail for an instant, +without endangering our lives. In the midst of this distress Jack +uttered an exclamation of hope, and pointed towards a low island or +rock which lay directly ahead. It had been hitherto unobserved, +owing to the dark clouds that obscured the sky and the blinding +spray that seemed to fill the whole atmosphere. + +As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute of +trees and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely over +it. In fact it was nothing more than the summit of one of the +coral formations, which rose only a few feet above the level of the +water, and was, in stormy weather, all but invisible. Over this +island the waves were breaking in the utmost fury, and our hearts +sank within us as we saw that there was not a spot where we could +thrust our little boat without its being dashed to pieces. + +"Show a little bit more sail," cried Jack, as we swept past the +weather side of the rock with fearful speed. + +"Ay, ay," answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot more of our +sail. + +Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over and +creak so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I expected to +be upset every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart for his +rashness. But I did him injustice, for, although during two +seconds the water rushed in-board in a torrent, he succeeded in +steering us sharply round to the leeward side of the rock, where +the water was comparatively calm, and the force of the breeze +broken. + +"Out your oars now, lads; that's well done. Give way!" We obeyed +instantly. The oars splashed into the waves together. One good +hearty pull, and we were floating in a comparatively calm creek +that was so narrow as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we +were in perfect safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our +cable to the rocks, I thanked God in my heart for our deliverance +from so great danger. But, although I have said we were now in +safety, I suspect that few of my readers would have envied our +position. It is true we had no lack of food, but we were drenched +to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and the spray flying over +our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as it were, in +water; the spot on which we had landed was not more than twelve +yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not move without the +risk of being swept away by the storm. At the upper end of the +creek was a small hollow or cave in the rock, which sheltered us +from the fury of the winds and waves; and as the rock extended in a +sort of ledge over our heads, it prevented the spray from falling +upon us. + +"Why," said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery again, "it seems to +me that we have got into a mermaid's cave, for there is nothing but +water all round us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the +past." + +Peterkin's idea was not inappropriate, for, what with the sea +roaring in white foam up to our very feet, and the spray flying in +white sheets continually over our heads, and the water dripping +heavily from the ledge above like a curtain in front of our cave, +it did seem to us very much more like being below than above water. + +"Now, boys," cried Jack, "bestir yourselves, and let's make +ourselves comfortable. Toss out our provisions, Peterkin; and +here, Ralph, lend a hand to haul up the boat. Look sharp." + +"Ay, ay, captain," we cried, as we hastened to obey, much cheered +by the hearty manner of our comrade. + +Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, so +that we succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable than +could have been expected. We landed our provisions, wrung the +water out of our garments, spread our sail below us for a carpet, +and, after having eaten a hearty meal, began to feel quite +cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits sank again, for with +the daylight all evidence of our security vanished away. We could +no longer see the firm rock on which we lay, while we were stunned +with the violence of the tempest that raged around us. The night +grew pitchy dark, as it advanced, so that we could not see our +hands when we held them up before our eyes, and were obliged to +feel each other occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for +the storm at last became so terrible that it was difficult to make +our voices audible. A slight variation of the wind, as we +supposed, caused a few drops of spray ever and anon to blow into +our faces; and the eddy of the sea, in its mad boiling, washed up +into our little creek until it reached our feet and threatened to +tear away our boat. In order to prevent this latter calamity, we +hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare through +the watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror to the +scene. Yet we longed for those dismal flashes, for they were less +appalling than the thick blackness that succeeded them. Crashing +peals of thunder seemed to tear the skies in twain, and fell upon +our ears through the wild yelling of the hurricane as if it had +been but a gentle summer breeze; while the billows burst upon the +weather side of the island until we fancied that the solid rock was +giving way, and, in our agony, we clung to the bare ground, +expecting every moment to be whirled away and whelmed in the black +howling sea! Oh! it was a night of terrible anxiety, and no one +can conceive the feelings of intense gratitude and relief with +which we at last saw the dawn of day break through the vapory mists +around us. + +For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, while the +storm continued to rage with unabated fury. On the morning of the +fourth day it suddenly ceased, and the wind fell altogether; but +the waves still ran so high that we did not dare to put off in our +boat. During the greater part of this period we scarcely slept +above a few minutes at a time, but on the third night we slept +soundly and awoke early on the fourth morning to find the sea very +much down, and the sun shining brightly again in the clear blue +sky. + +It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in our +little boat and steered away for our island home, which, we were +overjoyed to find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we had +feared that we had been blown out of sight of it altogether. As it +was a dead calm we had to row during the greater part of the day; +but towards the afternoon a fair breeze sprang up, which enabled us +to hoist our sail. We soon passed Penguin Island, and the other +island which we had failed to reach on the day the storm commenced; +but as we had still enough of provisions, and were anxious to get +home, we did not land, to the great disappointment of Peterkin, who +seemed to entertain quite an affection for the penguins. + +Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did not +reach the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and before we +had sailed more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, the wind died +away altogether, so that we had to take to our oars again. It was +late and the moon and stars were shining brightly when we arrived +opposite the bower and leaped upon the strand. So glad were we to +be safe back again on our beloved island, that we scarcely took +time to drag the boat a short way up the beach, and then ran up to +see that all was right at the bower. I must confess, however, that +my joy was mingled with a vague sort of fear lest our home had been +visited and destroyed during our absence; but on reaching it we +found everything just as it had been left, and the poor black cat +curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our humble +dwelling. + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + + +Shoemaking - The even tenor of our way suddenly interrupted - An +unexpected visit and an appalling battle - We all become warriors, +and Jack proves himself be a hero. + + +FOR many months after this we continued to live on our island in +uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went out a- +fishing in the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the woods, +or ascended to the mountain top, by way of variety, although +Peterkin always asserted that we went for the purpose of hailing +any ship that might chance to heave in sight. But I am certain +that none of us wished to be delivered from our captivity, for we +were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say that as we were very +young we should not feel the loss of a year or two. Peterkin, as I +have said before, was thirteen years of age, Jack eighteen, and I +fifteen. But Jack was very tall, strong, and manly for his age, +and might easily have been mistaken for twenty. + +The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual +summer, and as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit and +blossom all the year round, we never wanted for a plentiful supply +of food. The hogs, too, seemed rather to increase than diminish, +although Peterkin was very frequent in his attacks on them with his +spear. If at any time we failed in finding a drove, we had only to +pay a visit to the plum-tree before mentioned, where we always +found a large family of them asleep under its branches. + +We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making +various garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had +landed were beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also succeeded +in making excellent shoes out of the skin of the old hog, in the +following manner:- He first cut a piece of the hide, of an oblong +form, a few inches longer than his foot. This he soaked in water, +and, while it was wet, he sewed up one end of it, so as to form a +rough imitation of that part of the heel of a shoe where the seam +is. This done, he bored a row of holes all round the edge of the +piece of skin, through which a tough line was passed. Into the +sewed-up part of this shoe he thrust his heel, then, drawing the +string tight, the edges rose up and overlapped his foot all round. +It is true there were a great many ill-looking puckers in these +shoes, but we found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack +came at last to prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various +other useful articles, which added to our comfort, and once or +twice spoke of building us a house, but we had so great an +affection for the bower, and, withal, found it so serviceable, that +we determined not to leave it, nor to attempt the building of a +house, which, in such a climate, might turn out to be rather +disagreeable than useful. + +We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on the +other side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we had +powder and shot, as it would render pig-killing much easier; but, +after all, we had become so expert in the use of our sling and bow +and spear, that we were independent of more deadly weapons. + +Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much +pleasure as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert in +the water from constant practice. As for Jack and I, we began to +feel as if water were our native element, and revelled in it with +so much confidence and comfort that Peterkin said he feared we +would turn into fish some day, and swim off and leave him; adding, +that he had been for a long time observing that Jack was becoming +more and more like a shark every day. Whereupon Jack remarked, +that if he, Peterkin, were changed into a fish, he would certainly +turn into nothing better or bigger than a shrimp. Poor Peterkin +did not envy us our delightful excursions under water, except, +indeed, when Jack would dive down to the bottom of the Water +Garden, sit down on a rock and look up and make faces at him. +Peterkin did feel envious then, and often said he would give +anything to be able to do that. I was much amused when Peterkin +said this; for if he could only have seen his own face when he +happened to take a short dive, he would have seen that Jack's was +far surpassed by it. The great difference being, however, that +Jack made faces on purpose - Peterkin couldn't help it! + +Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and amusements, +an event occurred one day which was as unexpected as it was +exceedingly alarming and very horrible. + +Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the rocks +at Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from his +garments, having recently fallen by accident into the sea, - a +thing he was constantly doing, - when our attention was suddenly +arrested by two objects which appeared on the horizon. + +"What are yon, think you?" I said, addressing Jack. + +"I can't imagine," answered he; "I've noticed them for some time, +and fancied they were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them +the more I feel convinced they are much larger than gulls." + +"They seem to be coming towards us," said I. + +"Hallo! what's wrong?" inquired Peterkin, coming up. + +"Look there," said Jack. + +"Whales!" cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with his hand. "No! eh! +can they be boats, Jack?" + +Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing human +faces again. + +"I think you are about right, Peterkin; - but they seem to me to +move strangely for boats," said Jack, in a low tone, as if he were +talking to himself. + +I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack's countenance as he +gazed long and intently at the two objects, which were now nearing +us fast. At last he sprang to his feet. "They are canoes, Ralph! +whether war-canoes or not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all +the natives of the South Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they +have little respect for strangers. We must hide if they land here, +which I earnestly hope they will not do." + +I was greatly alarmed at Jack's speech, but I confess I thought +less of what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner in which +he said it, and it was with very uncomfortable feelings that +Peterkin and I followed him quickly into the woods. + +"How unfortunate," said I, as we gained the shelter of the bushes, +"that we have forgotten our arms." + +"It matters not," said Jack; "here are clubs enough and to spare." +As he spoke, he laid his hand on a bundle of stout poles of various +sizes, which Peterkin's ever-busy hands had formed, during our +frequent visits to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, +than that of having something to do. + +We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, and +lay down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes approach, +without ourselves being seen. At first we made an occasional +remark on their appearance, but after they entered the lagoon, and +drew near the beach, we ceased to speak, and gazed with intense +interest at the scene before us. + +We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by the +other, and that it contained a few women and children, as well as +men, - perhaps forty souls altogether; while the canoe which +pursued it contained only men. They seemed to be about the same in +number, but were better armed, and had the appearance of being a +war party. Both crews were paddling with all their might, and it +seemed as if the pursuers exerted themselves to overtake the +natives ere they could land. In this, however, they failed. The +foremost canoe made for the beach close beneath the rocks behind +which we were concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors +in the water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam +curled from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in their +black faces as they strained every muscle of their naked bodies; +nor did they relax their efforts till the canoe struck the beach +with a violent shock; then, with a shout of defiance, the whole +party sprang, as if by magic, from the canoe to the shore. Three +women, two of whom carried infants in their arms, rushed into the +woods; and the men crowded to the water's edge, with stones in +their hands, spears levelled, and clubs brandished, to resist the +landing of their enemies. + +The distance between the two canoes had been about half a mile, +and, at the great speed they were going, this was soon passed. As +the pursuers neared the shore, no sign of fear or hesitation was +noticeable. On they came like a wild charger, - received but +recked not of a shower of stones. The canoe struck, and, with a +yell that seemed to issue from the throats of incarnate fiends, +they leaped into the water, and drove their enemies up the beach. + +The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to behold. Most +of the men wielded clubs of enormous size and curious shapes, with +which they dashed out each other's brains. As they were almost +entirely naked, and had to bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their +terrible hand-to-hand encounters, they looked more like demons than +human beings. I felt my heart grow sick at the sight of this +bloody battle, and would fain have turned away, but a species of +fascination seemed to hold me down and glue my eyes upon the +combatants. I observed that the attacking party was led by a most +extraordinary being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I +concluded was a chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous +extent, so that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light- +yellow hue, which surprised me much, for the man's body was as +black as coal, and I felt convinced that the hair must have been +dyed. He was tattooed from head to foot; and his face, besides +being tattooed, was besmeared with red paint, and streaked with +white. Altogether, with his yellow turban-like hair, his Herculean +black frame, his glittering eyes and white teeth, he seemed the +most terrible monster I ever beheld. He was very active in the +fight, and had already killed four men. + +Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite as +strong and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club something +like an eagle's beak at the point. For a second or two these +giants eyed each other warily, moving round and round, as if to +catch each other at a disadvantage, but seeing that nothing was to +be gained by this caution, and that the loss of time might +effectually turn the tide of battle either way, they apparently +made up their minds to attack at the same instant, for, with a wild +shout and simultaneous spring, they swung their heavy clubs, which +met with a loud report. Suddenly the yellow-haired savage tripped, +his enemy sprang forward, the ponderous club was swung, but it did +not descend, for at that moment the savage was felled to the ground +by a stone from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief's +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The savages who +landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on seeing the fall +of their chief. But not one escaped. They were all overtaken and +felled to the earth. I saw, however, that they were not all +killed. Indeed, their enemies, now that they were conquered, +seemed anxious to take them alive; and they succeeded in securing +fifteen, whom they bound hand and foot with cords, and, carrying +them up into the woods, laid them down among the bushes. Here they +left them, for what purpose I knew not, and returned to the scene +of the late battle, where the remnant of the party were bathing +their wounds. + +Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, only +twenty-eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the bush to +hunt for the women and children. Of the other party, as I have +said, only ten survived, and these were lying bound and helpless on +the grass. + +Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and whispered our +fears that the savages might clamber up the rocks to search for +fresh water, and so discover our place of concealment; but we were +so much interested in watching their movements that we agreed to +remain where we were; and, indeed, we could not easily have risen +without exposing ourselves to detection. One of the savages now +went up to the wood and soon returned with a bundle of fire-wood, +and we were not a little surprised to see him set fire to it by the +very same means used by Jack the time we made our first fire, - +namely, with the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, two of +the party went again to the woods and returned with one of the +bound men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as +the thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their +enemies. As they bore him to the fire my feelings almost +overpowered me. I gasped for breath, and seizing my club, +endeavoured to spring to my feet; but Jack's powerful arm pinned me +to the earth. Next moment one of the savages raised his club, and +fractured the wretched creature's skull. He must have died +instantly, and, strange though it may seem, I confess to a feeling +of relief when the deed was done, because I now knew that the poor +savage could not be burned alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to +quiver when the monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, +after roasting them slightly over the fire, devoured them. + +Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few seconds, +the two savages hastened towards the fire dragging the three women +and their two infants along with them. One of those women was much +younger than her companions, and we were struck with the modesty of +her demeanour and the gentle expression of her face, which, +although she had the flattish nose and thick lips of the others, +was of a light-brown colour, and we conjectured that she must be of +a different race. She and her companions wore short petticoats and +a kind of tippet on their shoulders. Their hair was jet black, but +instead of being long, was short and curly, - though not woolly - +somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While we gazed with +interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, the big chief +advanced to one of the elder females and laid his hand upon the +child. But the mother shrank from him, and clasping the little one +to her bosom, uttered a wail of fear. With a savage laugh, the +chief tore the child from her arms and tossed it into the sea. A +low groan burst from Jack's lips as we witnessed this atrocious act +and heard the mother's shriek, as she fell insensible on the sand. +The rippling waves rolled the child on the beach, as if they +refused to be a party in such a foul murder, and we could observe +that the little one still lived. + +The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief addressed +her; but although we heard his voice, and even the words +distinctly, of course we could not understand what he said. The +girl made no answer to his fierce questions, and we saw by the way +in which he pointed to the fire that he threatened her life. + +"Peterkin," said Jack in a hoarse whisper, "have you got your +knife?" + +"Yes," replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as death. + +"That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding quick. Here is the +small knife, Ralph. Fly both of you through the bush, cut the +cords that bind the prisoners and set them free. There! quick, ere +it be too late. Jack sprang up, and seized a heavy but short +bludgeon, while his strong frame trembled with emotion, and large +drops rolled down his forehead. + +At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few minutes +before advanced towards the girl with his heavy club. Jack uttered +a yell that rang like a death-shriek among the rocks. With one +bound he leaped over a precipice full fifteen feet high, and, +before the savages had recovered from their surprise, was in the +midst of them; while Peterkin and I dashed through the bushes +towards the prisoners. With one blow of his staff Jack felled the +man with the club, then, turning round with a look of fury, he +rushed upon the big chief with the yellow hair. Had the blow which +Jack aimed at his head taken effect, the huge savage would have +needed no second stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it +by springing to one side, while, at the same time, he swung his +ponderous club at the head of his foe. It was now Jack's turn to +leap aside, and well was it for him that the first outburst of his +blind fury was over, else he had become an easy prey to his +gigantic antagonist; but Jack was cool now. He darted his blows +rapidly and well, and the superiority of his light weapon was +strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could easily evade +the blows of the chief's heavy club, the chief could not so easily +evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, so quick was he, and +so frightfully did he fling about the mighty weapon, that, although +Jack struck him almost every blow, the strokes had to be delivered +so quickly that they wanted force to be very effectual + +It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the success +of their chief in this encounter to be so certain that they +refrained from interfering. Had they doubted it, they would have +probably ended the matter at once by felling him. But they +contented themselves with awaiting the issue. + +The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now began +to be apparent. His movements became slower, his breath hissed +through his clenched teeth, and the surprised savages drew nearer +in order to render assistance. Jack observed this movement. He +felt that his fate was sealed, and resolved to cast his life upon +the next blow. The chiefs club was again about to descend on his +head. He might have evaded it easily, but instead of doing so, he +suddenly shortened his grasp of his own club, rushed in under the +blow, struck his adversary right between the eyes with all his +force and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the senseless body of +the chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to descend on the +head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive body of +the chief completely covered him. That moment saved his life. Ere +the savages could tear the chief's body away, seven of their number +fell prostrate beneath the clubs of the prisoners whom Peterkin and +I had set free, and two others fell under our own hand. We could +never have accomplished this had not our enemies been so engrossed +with the fight between Jack and their chief that they had failed to +observe us until we were upon them. They still out-numbered our +party by three, but we were flushed with victory while they were +taken by surprise and dispirited by the fall of their chief. +Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping fury of Jack, who +seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no sooner shaken +himself free of the chief's body than he rushed into the midst of +them, and in three blows equalized our numbers. Peterkin and I +flew to the rescue, the savages followed us, and, in less than ten +minutes, the whole of our opponents were knocked down or made +prisoners, bound hand and foot, and extended side by side upon the +sea shore. + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + + +Intercourse with the savages - Cannibalism prevented - The slain +are buried and the survivors depart, leaving us again alone on our +Coral Island. + + +AFTER the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and gazed +at us in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a flood of +questions, which, being wholly unintelligible, of course we could +not answer. However, by way of putting an end to it, Jack took the +chief (who had recovered from the effects of his wound) by the hand +and shook it warmly. No sooner did the blacks see that this was +meant to express good-will than they shook hands with us all round. +After this ceremony was gone through Jack went up to the girl, who +had never once moved from the rock where she had been left, but had +continued an eager spectator of all that had passed. He made signs +to her to follow him and then, taking the chief by the hand, was +about to conduct him to the bower when his eye fell on the poor +infant which had been thrown into the sea and was still lying on +the shore. Dropping the chief's hand he hastened towards it, and, +to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We also found that +the mother was beginning to recover slowly. + +"Here, get out o' the way," said Jack, pushing us aside, as we +stooped over the poor woman and endeavoured to restore her, "I'll +soon bring her round." So saying, he placed the infant on her +bosom and laid its warm cheek on hers. The effect was wonderful. +The woman opened her eyes, felt the child, looked at it, and with a +cry of joy clasped it in her arms, at the same time endeavouring to +rise, for the purpose, apparently, of rushing into the woods. + +"There, that's all right," said Jack, once more taking the chief by +the hand. "Now Ralph and Peterkin, make the women and these +fellows follow me to the bower. Well entertain them as hospitably +as we can." + +In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in front +of the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, several +ducks, and a variety of cold fish, together with an unlimited +supply of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruits, yams, taro, and plums; with all +of which they seemed to be quite familiar and perfectly satisfied. + +Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our day's +work, took a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and throwing +ourselves on our beds fell fast asleep. The savages it seems +followed our example, and in half-an-hour the whole camp was buried +in repose. + +How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we lay +down the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the +heavens. I awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being unable at +first to comprehend our situation. "Now, then," said he, springing +up, "let's see after breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how +long do you mean to lie there?" + +Peterkin yawned heavily. "Well!" said he, opening his eyes and +looking up after some trouble, "if it isn't to-morrow morning, and +me thinking it was to-day all this time. Hallo! Venus, where did +you come from? you seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as +well speak to the cat as to you - better, in fact, for it +understands me, and you don't." + +This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the elderly +females, who had seated herself on the rock in front of the bower, +and, having placed her child at her feet, was busily engaged in +devouring the remains of a roast pig. + +By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast in +an advanced state of preparation. During the course of it we made +sundry attempts to converse with the natives by signs, but without +effect. At last we hit upon a plan of discovering their names. +Jack pointed to his breast and add "Jack," very distinctly; then he +pointed to Peterkin and to me, repeating our names at the same +time. Then he pointed to himself again, and said "Jack," and +laying his finger on the breast of the chief, looked inquiringly +into his face. The chief instantly understood him and said +"Tararo," twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it after him, and the +chief, nodding his head approvingly, said "Chuck." On hearing +which, Peterkin exploded with laughter; but Jack turned and with a +frown rebuked him, saying, "I must look even more indignantly at +you than I feel, Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don't like +to be laughed at." Then turning towards the youngest of the women, +who was seated at the door of the bower, he pointed to her; +whereupon the chief said, "Avatea;" and pointing towards the sun, +raised his finger slowly towards the zenith, where it remained +steadily for a minute or two. + +"What can that mean, I wonder," said Jack, looking puzzled. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "the chief means she is an angel come +down to stay here for a while. If so, she's an uncommonly black +one!" + +We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack went +up to her and said, "Avatea." The woman smiled sadly, and nodded +her head, at the same time pointing to her breast and then to the +sun, in the same manner as the chief had done. We were much +puzzled to know what this could signify, but as there was no way of +solving our difficulty we were obliged to rest content. + +Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking up +his axe, he led them to the place where the battle had been fought. +Here we found the prisoners, who had passed the night on the beach +having been totally forgotten by us, as our minds had been full of +our guests, and were ultimately overcome by sleep. They did not +seem the worse for their exposure, however, as we judged by the +hearty appetite with which they devoured the breakfast that was +soon after given to them. Jack then began to dig a hole in the +sand, and, after working a few seconds, he pointed to it and to the +dead bodies that lay exposed on the beach. The natives immediately +perceived what he wanted, and, running for their paddles, dug a +hole in the course of half an hour that was quite large enough to +contain all the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they +tossed their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we +felt assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had +we not asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired chief +was the last thrown in. This wretched man would have recovered +from the blow with which Jack felled him, and, indeed, he did +endeavour to rise during the melee that followed his fall, but one +of his enemies, happening to notice the action, dealt him a blow +with his club that killed him on the spot. + +While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one of the +savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made apparently of +stone, cut a large slice of flesh from his thigh. We knew at once +that he intended to make use of this for food, and could not +repress a cry of horror and disgust. + +"Come, come, you blackguard," cried Jack, starting up and seizing +the man by the arm, "pitch that into the hole. Do you hear?" + +The savage of course did not understand the command, but he +perfectly understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded +the flesh, and his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the hole. +Nevertheless he did not obey. Jack instantly turned to Tararo and +made signs to him to enforce obedience. The chief seemed to +understand the appeal, for he stepped forward, raised his club, and +was on the point of dashing out the brains of his offending +subject, when Jack sprang forward and caught his uplifted arm. + +"Stop!" he shouted, "you blockhead, I don't want you to kill the +man." He then pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The +chief uttered a few words, which had the desired effect; for the +man threw the flesh into the hole, which was immediately filled up. +This man was of a morose, sulky disposition, and, during all the +time he remained on the island, regarded us, especially Jack, with +a scowling visage. His name, we found, was Mahine. + +The next three or four days were spent by the savages in mending +their canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock it had +sustained on striking the shore. This canoe was a very curious +structure. It was about thirty feet long, and had a high towering +stern. The timbers, of which it was partly composed, were fastened +much in the same way as those of our little boat were put together; +but the part that seemed most curious to us was a sort of out- +rigger, or long plank, which was attached to the body of the canoe +by means of two stout cross beams. These beams kept the plank +parallel with the canoe, but not in contact with it, for it floated +in the water with an open space between; thus forming a sort of +double canoe. This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting +of the canoe, which was so narrow that it could not have maintained +an upright position without the out-rigger. We could not help +wondering both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this +contrivance. + +When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the +prisoners into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and +fruit. Peterkin also went to the plum-tree for the purpose of +making a special onslaught upon the hogs, and killed no less than +six of them. These we baked and presented to our friends on the +day of their departure. On that day Tararo made a great many +energetic signs to us, which, after much consideration, we came to +understand were proposals that we should go away with him to his +island; but, having no desire to do so, we shook our heads very +decidedly. However, we consoled him by presenting him with our +rusty axe, which we thought we could spare, having the excellent +one which had been so providentially washed ashore to us the day we +were wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names +carved on it, and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as an +ornament. + +In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the beach. Being +unable to speak to the savages, we went through the ceremony of +shaking hands, and expected they would depart; but, before doing +so, Tararo went up to Jack and rubbed noses with him, after which +he did the same with Peterkin and me! Seeing that this was their +mode of salutation, we determined to conform to their custom, so we +rubbed noses heartily with the whole party, women and all! The +only disagreeable part of the process was, when we came to rub +noses with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that when he saw +his wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much more +inclined to BANG than to RUB his nose. Avatea was the last to take +leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of real sorrow when she +approached to bid us farewell. Besides her modest air and gentle +manners she was the only one of the party who exhibited the +smallest sign of regret at parting from us. Going up to Jack, she +put out her flat little nose to be rubbed, and thereafter paid the +same compliment to Peterkin and me. + +An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an +indefinable feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were +seated in silence beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on +the wonderful events of the last few days. + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + + +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life - A sail! - An +unexpected salute - The end of the black cat - A terrible dive - An +incautious proceeding and a frightful catastrophe. + + +LIFE is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, that it +beat a druggist's shop all to sticks; for, whereas the first is a +compound of good and bad, the other is a horrible compound of all +that is utterly detestable. And indeed the more I consider it the +more I am struck with the strange mixture of good and evil that +exists not only in the material earth but in our own natures. In +our own Coral Island we had experienced every variety of good that +a bountiful Creator could heap on us. Yet on the night of the +storm we had seen how almost, in our case, - and altogether, no +doubt, in the case of others less fortunate - all this good might +be swept away for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in +the soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these +good and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, +crushed and hurled to the ground in destructive devastation. We +had lived for many months in a clime for the most part so +beautiful, that we had often wondered whether Adam and Eve had +found Eden more sweet; and we had seen the quiet solitudes of our +paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious savages, and the +white sands stained with blood and strewed with lifeless forms; +yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many symptoms of a kindly +nature. I pondered these things much, and, while I considered +them, there recurred to my memory those words which I had read in +my Bible, - the works of God are wonderful, and his ways past +finding out. + +After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and +frequent conversations about them, and I noticed that Peterkin's +manner was now much altered. He did not, indeed, jest less +heartily than before, but he did so less frequently, and often +there was a tone of deep seriousness in his manner, if not in his +words, which made him seem to Jack and me as if he had grown two +years older within a few days. But indeed I was not surprised at +this, when I reflected on the awful realities which we had +witnessed so lately. We could by no means shake off a tendency to +gloom for several weeks afterwards; but, as time wore away, our +usual good spirits returned somewhat, and we began to think of the +visit of the savages with feelings akin to those with which we +recall a terrible dream. + +One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, +preparatory to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had kept +us in such constant supply of hogs that we had become quite tired +of pork, and desired a change. Peterkin was sunning himself on the +ledge of rock, while we were creeping among the rocks below. +Happening to look up, I observed Peterkin cutting the most +extraordinary capers and making violent gesticulations for us to +come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose immediately. + +"A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on the horizon there, +just over the entrance to the lagoon!" cried Peterkin, as we +scrambled up the rocks. + +"So it is, and a schooner, too!" said Jack, as he proceeded hastily +to dress. + +Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this discovery, +for if it should touch at our island we had no doubt the captain +would be happy to give us a passage to some of the civilized +islands, where we could find a ship sailing for England, or some +other part of Europe. Home, with all its associations, rushed in +upon my heart like a flood, and, much though I loved the Coral +Island and the bower which had now been our home so long, I felt +that I could have quitted all at that moment without a sigh. With +joyful anticipations we hastened to the highest point of rock near +our dwelling, and awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now +perceived that she was making straight for the island, under a +steady breeze. + +In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she rounded +to, and backed her topsails in order to survey the coast. Seeing +this, and fearing that they might not perceive us, we all three +waved pieces of cocoa-nut cloth in the air, and soon had the +satisfaction of seeing them beginning to lower a boat and bustle +about the decks as if they meant to land. Suddenly a flag was run +up to the peak, a little cloud of white smoke rose from the +schooner's side, and, before we could guess their intentions, a +cannon-shot came crashing through the bushes, carried away several +cocoa-nut trees in its passage, and burst in atoms against the +cliff a few yards below the spot on which we stood. + +With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the +schooner's peak was black, with a Death's head and cross bones upon +it. As we gazed at each other in blank amazement, the word +"pirate" escaped our lips simultaneously. + +"What is to be done?" cried Peterkin, as we observed a boat shoot +from the vessel's side, and make for the entrance of the reef. "If +they take us off the island, it will either be to throw us +overboard for sport, or to make pirates of us." + +I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only resource in +this emergency. He stood with folded arms, and his eyes fixed with +a grave, anxious expression on the ground. "There is but one +hope," said he, turning with a sad expression of countenance to +Peterkin; "perhaps, after all, we may not have to resort to it. If +these villains are anxious to take us, they will soon overrun the +whole island. But come, follow me." + +Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, and +led us by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he halted, +and, advancing cautiously to the rocks, glanced over their edge. +We were soon by his side, and saw the boat, which was crowded with +armed men, just touching the shore. In an instant the crew landed, +formed line, and rushed up to our bower. + +In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of them +swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On reaching the +water's edge, he tossed it far into the sea, and joined his +companions, who appeared to be holding a hasty council. + +"You see what we may expect," said Jack bitterly. "The man who +will wantonly kill a poor brute for sport will think little of +murdering a fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance +left, - the Diamond Cave." + +"The Diamond Cave!" cried Peterkin, "then my chance is a poor one, +for I could not dive into it if all the pirates on the Pacific were +at my heels." + +"Nay, but," said I, "we will take you down, Peterkin, if you will +only trust us." + +As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, and +radiate, as if from a centre, towards the woods and along shore. + +"Now, Peterkin," said Jack, in a solemn tone, "you must make up +your mind to do it, or we must make up our minds to die in your +company." + +"Oh, Jack, my dear friend," cried Peterkin, turning pale, "leave +me; I don't believe they'll think it worth while to kill me. Go, +you and Ralph, and dive into the cave." + +"That will not I," answered Jack quietly, while he picked up a +stout cudgel from the ground. "So now, Ralph, we must prepare to +meet these fellows. Their motto is, 'No quarter.' If we can +manage to floor those coming in this direction, we may escape into +the woods for a while." + +"There are five of them," said I; "we have no chance." + +"Come, then," cried Peterkin, starting up, and grasping Jack +convulsively by the arm, "let us dive; I will go." + +Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the +feelings of horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare +idea of being held down, even for a few seconds, - that spasmodic, +involuntary recoil from compulsory immersion which has no +connection whatever with cowardice; and they will understand the +amount of resolution that it required in Peterkin to allow himself +to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and then, through a +narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. But there was no +alternative. The pirates had already caught sight of us, and were +now within a short distance of the rocks. + +Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms. + +"Now, keep quite still, no struggling," said Jack, "or we are +lost." + +Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble +features, and the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he had +fully made up his mind to go through with it. Just as the pirates +gained the foot of the rocks, which hid us for a moment from their +view, we bent over the sea, and plunged down together head +foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. He floated passively +between us like a log of wood, and we passed the tunnel and rose +into the cave in a shorter space of time than I had ever done it +before. + +Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and in a +few seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in safety. +Jack now searched for the tinder and torch, which always lay in the +cave. He soon found them, and, lighting the torch, revealed to +Peterkin's wondering gaze the marvels of the place. But we were +too wet to waste much time in looking about us. Our first care was +to take off our clothes, and wring them as dry as we could. This +done, we proceeded to examine into the state of our larder, for, as +Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing how long the pirates +might remain on the island. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "they may take it into their heads to +stop here altogether, and so we shall be buried alive in this +place." + +"Don't you think, Peterkin, that it's the nearest thing to being +drowned alive that you ever felt?" said Jack with a smile. "But +I've no fear of that. These villains never stay long on shore. +The sea is their home, so you may depend upon it that they won't +stay more than a day or two at the furthest." + +We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in the +cavern. At various periods Jack and I had conveyed cocoa nuts and +other fruits, besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to this submarine +cave, partly for amusement, and partly from a feeling that we might +possibly be driven one day to take shelter here from the savages. +Little did we imagine that the first savages who would drive us +into it would be white savages, perhaps our own countrymen. We +found the cocoa-nuts in good condition, and the cooked yams, but +the bread-fruits were spoiled. We also found the cloth where we +had left it; and, on opening it out, there proved to be sufficient +to make a bed; which was important, as the rock was damp. Having +collected it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch +in the midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange +chamber to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, +ghastly appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, +with the thick darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops +that fell at long intervals from the roof of the cavern into the +still water; and the strong contrast between all this and our bed +and supper, which, with our faces, were lit up with the deep red +flame of the torch. + +We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, for +we did not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault above +when we happened to raise them. At last the faint light that came +through the opening died away, warning us that it was night and +time for rest. We therefore put out our torch and lay down to +sleep. + +On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our faculties so +as to remember where we were, and we were in much uncertainty as to +whether it was early or late. We saw by the faint light that it +was day, but could not guess at the hour; so Jack proposed that he +should dive out and reconnoitre. + +"No, Jack," said I, "do you rest here. You've had enough to do +during the last few days. Rest yourself now, and take care of +Peterkin, while I go out to see what the pirates are about. I'll +be very careful not to expose myself, and I'll bring you word again +in a short time." + +"Very well, Ralph," answered Jack, "please yourself, but don't be +long; and if you'll take my advice you'll go in your clothes, for I +would like to have some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees +without clothes is uncomfortable, to say the least of it." + +"The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp lookout," said Peterkin, +"so, pray, be careful." + +"No fear," said I; "good-bye." + +"Good-bye," answered my comrades. + +And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged into +the water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open air. On +rising, I was careful to come up gently and to breathe softly, +while I kept close in beside the rocks; but, as I observed no one +near me, I crept slowly out, and ascended the cliff a step at a +time, till I obtained a full view of the shore. No pirates were to +be seen, - even their boat was gone; but as it was possible they +might have hidden themselves, I did not venture too boldly forward. +Then it occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to my surprise, I +saw the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on the +horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. Then my first +impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the good news; but I +checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, in order to make +sure that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate schooner. I +looked long and anxiously at her, and, giving vent to a deep sigh +of relief, said aloud, "Yes, there she goes; the villains have been +baulked of their prey this time at least." + +"Not so sure of that!" said a deep voice at my side; while, at the +same moment, a heavy hand grasped my shoulder, and held it as if in +a vice. + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + + +I fall into the hands of pirates - How they treated me, and what I +said to them - The result of the whole ending in a melancholy +separation and in a most unexpected gift. + + +MY heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, turning +round, I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce aspect +regarding me with a smile of contempt. He was a white man, - that +is to say, he was a man of European blood, though his face, from +long exposure to the weather, was deeply bronzed. His dress was +that of a common seaman, except that he had on a Greek skull-cap, +and wore a broad shawl of the richest silk round his waist. In +this shawl were placed two pair of pistols and a heavy cutlass. He +wore a beard and moustache, which, like the locks on his head, were +short, curly, and sprinkled with gray hairs. + +"So, youngster," he said, with a Sardonic smile, while I felt his +grasp tighten on my shoulder, "the villains have been baulked of +their prey, have they? We shall see, we shall see. Now, you +whelp, look yonder. As he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill +whistle. In a second or two it was answered, and the pirate-boat +rowed round the point at the Water Garden, and came rapidly towards +us. "Now, go, make a fire on that point; and hark'ee, youngster, +if you try to run away, I'll send a quick and sure messenger after +you," and he pointed significantly at his pistols. + +I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the burning-glass in +my pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a thick smoke ascended +into the air. It had scarcely appeared for two minutes when the +boom of a gun rolled over the sea, and, looking up, I saw that the +schooner was making for the island again. It now flashed across me +that this was a ruse on the part of the pirates, and that they had +sent their vessel away, knowing that it would lead us to suppose +that they had left altogether. But there was no use of regret now. +I was completely in their power, so I stood helplessly beside the +pirate watching the crew of the boat as they landed on the beach. +For an instant I contemplated rushing over the cliff into the sea, +but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some of the men were +already between me and the water. + +There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their scheme, as +the crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who had captured +me by the title of captain. They were a ferocious set of men, with +shaggy beards and scowling brows. All of them were armed with +cutlasses and pistols, and their costumes were, with trifling +variations, similar to that of the captain. As I looked from one +to the other, and observed the low, scowling brows, that never +unbent, even when the men laughed, and the mean, rascally +expression that sat on each face, I felt that my life hung by a +hair. + +"But where are the other cubs?" cried one of the men, with an oath +that made me shudder. "I'll swear to it there were three, at +least, if not more." + +"You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other dogs?" said the +captain. + +"If you mean my companions," said I, in a low voice, "I won't tell +you." + +A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer. + +The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then drawing a pistol +from his belt, he cocked it and said, "Now, youngster, listen to +me. I've no time to waste here. If you don't tell me all you +know, I'll blow your brains out! Where are your comrades?" + +For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this +extremity. Suddenly a thought occurred to me. + +"Villain," said I, shaking my clenched fist in his face, "to blow +my brains out would make short work of me, and be soon over. Death +by drowning is as sure, and the agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to +your face, if you were to toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I +would not tell you where my companions are, and I dare you to try +me!" + +The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. "Say you so?" +cried he, uttering a fierce oath. "Here, lads, take him by the +legs and heave him in, - quick!" + +The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my audacity, +advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me towards the cliff, +I congratulated myself not a little on the success of my scheme, +for I knew that once in the water I should be safe, and could +rejoin Jack and Peterkin in the cave. But my hopes were suddenly +blasted by the captain crying out, "Hold on, lads, hold on. We'll +give him a taste of the thumb-screws before throwing him to the +sharks. Away with him into the boat. Look alive! the breeze is +freshening." + +The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down the +rocks, tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for some +time stunned with the violence of my fall. + +On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I perceived +that we were already outside the coral reef, and close alongside +the schooner, which was of small size and clipper built. I had +only time to observe this much, when I received a severe kick on +the side from one of the men, who ordered me, in a rough voice, to +jump aboard. Rising hastily I clambered up the side. In a few +minutes the boat was hoisted on deck, the vessel's head put close +to the wind, and the Coral Island dropped slowly astern as we beat +up against a head sea. + +Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily engaged +in working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to me, so I +remained leaning against the bulwarks close to the gangway, +watching their operations. I was surprised to find that there were +no guns or carronades of any kind in the vessel, which had more of +the appearance of a fast-sailing trader than a pirate. But I was +struck with the neatness of everything. The brass work of the +binnacle and about the tiller, as well as the copper belaying-pins, +were as brightly polished as if they had just come from the +foundry. The decks were pure white, and smooth. The masts were +clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and truck, +which were painted black. The standing and running rigging was in +the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. In short, +everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her low black hull +to the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an amount of care and +strict discipline that would have done credit to a ship of the +Royal Navy. There was nothing lumbering or unseemly about the +vessel, excepting, perhaps, a boat, which lay on the deck with its +keel up between the fore and main masts. It seemed +disproportionately large for the schooner; but, when I saw that the +crew amounted to between thirty and forty men, I concluded that +this boat was held in reserve, in case of any accident compelling +the crew to desert the vessel. + +As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to that +of the captain. But in head gear they differed not only from him +but from each other, some wearing the ordinary straw hat of the +merchant service, while others wore cloth caps and red worsted +night-caps. I observed that all their arms were sent below; the +captain only retaining his cutlass and a single pistol in the folds +of his shawl. Although the captain was the tallest and most +powerful man in the ship, he did not strikingly excel many of his +men in this respect, and the only difference that an ordinary +observer would have noticed was, a certain degree of open candour, +straightforward daring, in the bold, ferocious expression of his +face, which rendered him less repulsive than his low-browed +associates, but did not by any means induce the belief that he was +a hero. This look was, however, the indication of that spirit +which gave him the pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who +called him captain. He was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of +personal fear, and utterly reckless of consequences, and, +therefore, a terror to his men, who individually hated him, but +unitedly felt it to be their advantage to have him at their head. + +But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I had +left on shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, which was +now far away to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears rolled +slowly down my cheeks as I thought that I might never see them +more. + +"So you're blubbering, are you, you obstinate whelp?" said the deep +voice of the captain, as he came up and gave me a box on the ear +that nearly felled me to the deck. "I don't allow any such +weakness aboard o' this ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or +I'll give you something to cry for." + +I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, but +felt that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, so I +made no reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my eyes. + +"I thought you were made of better stuff," continued the captain, +angrily; "I'd rather have a mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed +puppy. But I'll cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks +before long. Now go below, and stay there till I call you." + +As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg standing by +the side of the main-mast, on which the word GUNPOWDER was written +in pencil. It immediately flashed across me that, as we were +beating up against the wind, anything floating in the sea would be +driven on the reef encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected +- for thought is more rapid than the lightning - that my old +companions had a pistol. Without a moment's hesitation, therefore, +I lifted the keg from the deck and tossed it into the sea! An +exclamation of surprise burst from the captain and some of the men +who witnessed this act of mine. + +Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the captain +raised his hand to strike me, while he shouted, "Boy! whelp! what +mean you by that?" + +"If you lower your hand," said I, in a loud voice, while I felt the +blood rush to my temples, "I'll tell you. Until you do so I'm +dumb!" + +The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of amazement. + +"Now," continued I, "I threw that keg into the sea because the wind +and waves will carry it to my friends on the Coral Island, who +happen to have a pistol, but no powder. I hope that it will reach +them soon, and my only regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. +Moreover, pirate, you said just now that you thought I was made of +better stuff! I don't know what stuff I am made of, - I never +thought much about that subject; but I'm quite certain of this, +that I am made of such stuff as the like of you shall never tame, +though you should do your worst." + +To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, smiled, +and, thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that encircled +his waist, turned on his heel and walked aft, while I went below. + +Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the men +received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, patting me +on the back, said, "Well done, lad! you're a brick, and I have no +doubt will turn out a rare cove. Bloody Bill, there, was just such +a fellow as you are, and he's now the biggest cut-throat of us +all." + +"Take a can of beer, lad," cried another, "and wet your whistle +after that speech o' your'n to the captain. If any one o' us had +made it, youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this +time." + +"Stop your clapper, Jack," vociferated a third; "give the boy a +junck o' meat. Don't you see he's a'most goin' to kick the +bucket?" + +"And no wonder," said the first speaker, with an oath, "after the +tumble you gave him into the boat. I guess it would have broke +YOUR neck if you had got it." + +I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, to +the combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be +recollected that I had dived out of the cave that morning before +breakfast, and it was now near mid-day. I therefore gladly +accepted a plate of boiled pork and a yam, which were handed to me +by one of the men from the locker on which some of the crew were +seated eating their dinner. But I must add that the zest with +which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of the frightful +oaths and the terrible language that flowed from the lips of these +godless men, even in the midst of their hilarity and good-humour. +The man who had been alluded to as Bloody Bill was seated near me, +and I could not help wondering at the moody silence he maintained +among his comrades. He did indeed reply to their questions in a +careless, off-hand tone, but he never volunteered a remark. The +only difference between him and the others was his taciturnity and +his size, for he was nearly, if not quite, as large a man as the +captain. + +During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own +reflections, which were anything but agreeable, for I could not +banish from my mind the threat about the thumb-screws, of the +nature and use of which I had a vague but terrible conception. I +was still meditating on my unhappy fate when, just after night- +fall, one of the watch on deck called down the hatchway, - + +"Hallo there! one o' you, tumble up and light the cabin lamp, and +send that boy aft to the captain - sharp!" + +"Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants you. Look +alive," said Bloody Bill, raising his huge frame from the locker on +which he had been asleep for the last two hours. He sprang up the +ladder and I instantly followed him, and, going aft, was shown into +the cabin by one of the men, who closed the door after me. + +A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft light +over the cabin, which was a small apartment, and comfortably but +plainly finished. Seated on a camp-stool at the table, and busily +engaged in examining a chart of the Pacific, was the captain, who +looked up as I entered, and, in a quiet voice, bade me be seated, +while he threw down his pencil, and, rising from the table, +stretched himself on a sofa at the upper end of the cabin. + +"Boy," said he, looking me full in the face, "what is your name?" + +"Ralph Rover," I replied. + +"Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that island? +How many companions had you on it? Answer me, now, and mind you +tell no lies." + +"I never tell lies," said I, firmly. + +The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, and +bade me answer his questions. + +I then told him the history of myself and my companions from the +time we sailed till the day of his visit to the island, taking +care, however, to make no mention of the Diamond Cave. After I had +concluded, he was silent for a few minutes; then, looking up, he +said - "Boy, I believe you." + +I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he +should not believe me. However, I made no reply. + +"And what," continued the captain, "makes you think that this +schooner is a pirate?" + +"The black flag," said I, "showed me what you are; and if any +further proof were wanting I have had it in the brutal treatment I +have received at your hands." + +The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he continued +- "Boy, you are too bold. I admit that we treated you roughly, but +that was because you made us lose time and gave us a good deal of +trouble. As to the black flag, that is merely a joke that my +fellows play off upon people sometimes in order to frighten them. +It is their humour, and does no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a +lawful trader, - a rough one, I grant you, but one can't help that +in these seas, where there are so many pirates on the water and +such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry on a trade in +sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, Ralph, to +behave yourself and be a good boy, I'll take you along with me and +give you a good share of the profits. You see I'm in want of an +honest boy like you, to look after the cabin and keep the log, and +superintend the traffic on shore sometimes. What say you, Ralph, +would you like to become a sandal-wood trader?" + +I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal relieved +to find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; but instead +of replying I said, "If it be as you state, then why did you take +me from my island, and why do you not now take me back?" + +The captain smiled as he replied, "I took you off in anger, boy, +and I'm sorry for it. I would even now take you back, but we are +too far away from it. See, there it is," he added, laying his +finger on the chart, "and we are now here, - fifty miles at least. +It would not be fair to my men to put about now, for they have all +an interest in the trade." + +I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more +conversation, I agreed to become one of the crew, at least until we +could reach some civilized island where I might be put ashore. The +captain assented to this proposition, and after thanking him for +the promise, I left the cabin and went on deck with feelings that +ought to have been lighter, but which were, I could not tell why, +marvellously heavy and uncomfortable still. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + + +Bloody Bill - Dark surmises - A strange sail, and a strange crew, +and a still stranger cargo - New reasons for favouring missionaries +- A murderous massacre, and thoughts thereon. + + +THREE weeks after the conversation narrated in the last chapter, I +was standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner watching the +gambols of a shoal of porpoises that swam round us. It was a dead +calm. One of those still, hot, sweltering days, so common in the +Pacific, when Nature seems to have gone to sleep, and the only +thing in water or in air that proves her still alive, is her long, +deep breathing, in the swell of the mighty sea. No cloud floated +in the deep blue above; no ripple broke the reflected blue below. +The sun shone fiercely in the sky, and a ball of fire blazed, with +almost equal power, from out the bosom of the water. So intensely +still was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of the +deep, that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, +we might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue +liquid ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck in +all creation, floating in the midst of it. + +No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of a +porpoise, the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on the +swell, the patter of the reef-points, and the occasional flap of +the hanging sails. An awning covered the fore and after parts of +the schooner, under which the men composing the watch on deck +lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with excessive heat. Bloody +Bill, as the men invariably called him, was standing at the tiller, +but his post for the present was a sinecure, and he whiled away the +time by alternately gazing in dreamy abstraction at the compass in +the binnacle, and by walking to the taffrail in order to spit into +the sea. In one of these turns he came near to where I was +standing, and, leaning over the side, looked long and earnestly +down into the blue wave. + +This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was the +only human being on board with whom I had the slightest desire to +become better acquainted. The other men, seeing that I did not +relish their company, and knowing that I was a protege of the +captain, treated me with total indifference. Bloody Bill, it is +true, did the same; but as this was his conduct towards every one +else, it was not peculiar in reference to me. Once or twice I +tried to draw him into conversation, but he always turned away +after a few cold monosyllables. As he now leaned over the taffrail +close beside me, I said to him, - + +"Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do you never speak to +any one?" + +Bill smiled slightly as he replied, "Why, I s'pose it's because I +haint got nothin' to say!" + +"That's strange," said I, musingly; "you look like a man that could +think, and such men can usually speak." + +"So they can, youngster," rejoined Bill, somewhat sternly; "and I +could speak too if I had a mind to, but what's the use o' speakin' +here! The men only open their mouths to curse and swear, an' they +seem to find it entertaining; but I don't, so I hold my tongue." + +"Well, Bill, that's true, and I would rather not hear you speak at +all than hear you speak like the other men; but I don't swear, +Bill, so you might talk to me sometimes, I think. Besides, I'm +weary of spending day after day in this way, without a single soul +to say a pleasant word to. I've been used to friendly +conversation, Bill, and I really would take it kind if you would +talk with me a little now and then." + +Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad +expression pass across his sun-burnt face. + +"An' where have you been used to friendly conversation," said Bill, +looking down again into the sea; "not on that Coral Island, I take +it?" + +"Yes, indeed," said I energetically; "I have spent many of the +happiest months in my life on that Coral Island;" and without +waiting to be further questioned, I launched out into a glowing +account of the happy life that Jack and Peterkin and I had spent +together, and related minutely every circumstance that befell us +while on the island. + +"Boy, boy," said Bill, in a voice so deep that it startled me, +"this is no place for you." + +"That's true," said I; "I'm of little use on board, and I don't +like my comrades; but I can't help it, and at anyrate I hope to be +free again soon." + +"Free?" said Bill, looking at me in surprise. + +"Yes, free," returned I; "the captain said he would put me ashore +after this trip was over." + +"THIS TRIP! Hark'ee, boy," said Bill, lowering his voice, "what +said the captain to you the day you came aboard?" + +"He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no pirate, and +told me that if I would join him for this trip he would give me a +good share of the profits or put me on shore in some civilized +island if I chose." + +Bill's brows lowered savagely as he muttered, "Ay, he said truth +when he told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but he lied when - " + +"Sail ho!" shouted the look-out at the masthead. + +"Where, away?" cried Bill, springing to the tiller; while the men, +startled by the sudden cry jumped up and gazed round the horizon. + +"On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir," answered the look-out. + +At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the +rigging, surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping his +eye round the horizon he gazed steadily at a particular point. + +"Take in top-sails," shouted the captain, swinging himself down on +the deck by the main-back stay. + +"Take in top-sails," roared the first mate. + +"Ay, ay, sir-r-r," answered the men as they sprang into the rigging +and went aloft like cats. + +Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet schooner. The +top-sails were taken in and stowed, the men stood by the sheets and +halyards, and the captain gazed anxiously at the breeze which was +now rushing towards us like a sheet of dark blue. In a few seconds +it struck us. The schooner trembled as if in surprise at the +sudden onset, while she fell away, then bending gracefully to the +wind, as though in acknowledgment of her subjection, she cut +through the waves with her sharp prow like a dolphin, while Bill +directed her course towards the strange sail. + +In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that she was +a schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts and sails +we judged her to be a trader. She evidently did not like our +appearance, for, the instant the breeze reached her, she crowded +all sail and showed us her stern. As the breeze had moderated a +little our top-sails were again shaken out, and it soon became +evident, - despite the proverb, "A stern chase is a long one," that +we doubled her speed and would overhaul her speedily. When within +a mile we hoisted British colours, but receiving no acknowledgment, +the captain ordered a shot to be fired across her bows. In a +moment, to my surprise, a large portion of the bottom of the boat +amidships was removed, and in the hole thus exposed appeared an +immense brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by means +of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The heavy ball +struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, ricochetting +into the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond it. + +This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel backed her +top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, about a +hundred yards off. + +"Lower the boat," cried the captain. + +In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the crew, +who were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the captain +passed me to get into it, he said, "jump into the stern sheets, +Ralph, I may want you." I obeyed, and in ten minutes more we were +standing on the stranger's deck. We were all much surprised at the +sight that met our eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we +were accustomed to see, there were only fifteen blacks standing on +the quarter-deck and regarding us with looks of undisguised alarm. +They were totally unarmed and most of them unclothed; one or two, +however, wore portions of European attire. One had on a pair of +duck trousers which were much too large for him and stuck out in a +most ungainly manner. Another wore nothing but the common scanty +native garment round the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the +most ludicrous personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, +was a tall middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of +countenance, who wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, +and a straw hat, while his black brawny legs were totally uncovered +below the knees. + +"Where's the commander of this ship?" inquired our captain, +stepping up to this individual. + +"I is capin," he answered, taking off his straw hat and making a +low bow. + +"You!" said our captain, in surprise. "Where do you come from, and +where are you bound? What cargo have you aboard?" + +"We is come," answered the man with the swallow-tail, "from +Aitutaki; we was go for Rarotonga. We is native miss'nary ship; +our name is de OLIVE BRANCH; an' our cargo is two tons cocoa-nuts, +seventy pigs, twenty cats, and de Gosp'l." + +This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with a +shout of laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by the +captain, whose expression instantly changed from one of severity to +that of frank urbanity as he advanced towards the missionary and +shook him warmly by the hand. + +"I am very glad to have fallen in with you," said he, "and I wish +you much success in your missionary labours. Pray take me to your +cabin, as I wish to converse with you privately." + +The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led him +away I heard him saying, "Me most glad to find you trader; we +t'ought you be pirate. You very like one 'bout the masts." + +What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, but +he came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking hands +cordially with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and +returned to the schooner, which was immediately put before the +wind. In a few minutes the OLIVE BRANCH was left far behind us. + +That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men +talking about this curious ship. + +"I wonder," said one, "why our captain looked so sweet on yon +swallow-tailed super-cargo o' pigs and Gospels. If it had been an +ordinary trader, now, he would have taken as many o' the pigs as he +required and sent the ship with all on board to the bottom." + +"Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you don't know that," +cried another. "The captain cares as much for the gospel as you do +(an' that's precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, +that the only place among the southern islands where a ship can put +in and get what she wants in comfort, is where the gospel has been +sent to. There are hundreds o' islands, at this blessed moment, +where you might as well jump straight into a shark's maw as land +without a band o' thirty comrades armed to the teeth to back you." + +"Ay," said a man with a deep scar over his right eye, "Dick's new +to the work. But if the captain takes us for a cargo o' sandal- +wood to the Feejees he'll get a taste o' these black gentry in +their native condition. For my part I don't know, an' I don't +care, what the gospel does to them; but I know that when any o' the +islands chance to get it, trade goes all smooth an' easy; but where +they ha'nt got it, Beelzebub himself could hardly desire better +company." + +"Well, you ought to be a good judge," cried another, laughing, "for +you've never kept any company but the worst all your life!" + +"Ralph Rover!" shouted a voice down the hatchway. "Captain wants +you, aft." + +Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as I +went the strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of the +gospel on savage natures; - testimony which, as it was perfectly +disinterested, I had no doubt whatever was strictly true. + +On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and as we +were alone together I tried to draw him into conversation. After +repeating to him the conversation in the forecastle about the +missionaries, I said, - + +"Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in sandal-wood?" + +"Yes, Ralph, she is; but she's just as really a pirate. The black +flag you saw flying at the peak was no deception." + +"Then how can you say she's a trader?" asked I. + +"Why, as to that, she trades when she can't take by force, but she +takes by force, when she can, in preference. Ralph," he added, +lowering his voice, "if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have +witnessed done on these decks you would not need to ask if we were +pirates. But you'll find it out soon enough. As for the +missionaries, the captain favours them because they are useful to +him. The South-Sea islanders are such incarnate fiends that they +are the better of being tamed, and the missionaries are the only +men who can do it." + +Our track after this lay through several clusters of small islets, +among which we were becalmed more than once. During this part of +our voyage the watch on deck and the look-out at the mast-head were +more than usually vigilant, as we were not only in danger of being +attacked by the natives, who, I learned from the captain's remarks, +were a bloody and deceitful tribe at this group, but we were also +exposed to much risk from the multitudes of coral reefs that rose +up in the channels between the islands, some of them just above the +surface, others a few feet below it. Our precautions against the +savages I found were indeed necessary. + +One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most of +which appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of fresh +water the captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask or two. +But we were mistaken in thinking there were no natives; for +scarcely had we drawn near to the shore when a band of naked blacks +rushed out of the bush and assembled on the beach, brandishing +their clubs and spears in a threatening manner. Our men were well +armed, but refrained from showing any signs of hostility, and rowed +nearer in order to converse with the natives; and I now found that +more than one of the crew could imperfectly speak dialects of the +language peculiar to the South Sea islanders. When within forty +yards of the shore, we ceased rowing, and the first mate stood up +to address the multitude; but, instead of answering us, they +replied with a shower of stones, some of which cut the men +severely. Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was +about to be fired, when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from +the schooner, which lay not more than five or six hundred yards off +the shore. + +"Don't fire," he shouted, angrily. "Pull off to the point ahead of +you." + +The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep curses as +they prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and they burned +for revenge. Three or four of them hesitated, and seemed disposed +to mutiny. + +"Don't distress yourselves, lads," said the mate, while a bitter +smile curled his lip. "Obey orders. The captain's not the man to +take an insult tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I'll +give myself to the sharks." + +The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, which +was now crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, probably, +to five or six hundred. We had not rowed off above a couple of +hundred yards when a loud roar thundered over the sea, and the big +brass gun sent a withering shower of grape point blank into the +midst of the living mass, through which a wide lane was cut, while +a yell, the like of which I could not have imagined, burst from the +miserable survivors as they fled to the woods. Amongst the heaps +of dead that lay on the sand, just where they had fallen, I could +distinguish mutilated forms writhing in agony, while ever and anon +one and another rose convulsively from out the mass, endeavoured to +stagger towards the wood, and ere they had taken a few steps, fell +and wallowed on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me as I +witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little +time to think, for the captain's deep voice came again over the +water towards us: "Pull ashore, lads, and fill your water casks." +The men obeyed in silence, and it seemed to me as if even their +hard hearts were shocked by the ruthless deed. On gaining the +mouth of the rivulet at which we intended to take in water, we +found it flowing with blood, for the greater part of those who were +slain had been standing on the banks of the stream, a short way +above its mouth. Many of the wretched creatures had fallen into +it, and we found one body, which had been carried down, jammed +between two rocks, with the staring eyeballs turned towards us and +his black hair waving in the ripples of the blood-red stream. No +one dared to oppose our landing now, so we carried our casks to a +pool above the murdered group, and having filled them, returned on +board. Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried +us away from the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from +the memory of what I had seen. + +"And this," thought I, gazing in horror at the captain, who, with a +quiet look of indifference, leaned upon the taffrail smoking a +cigar and contemplating the fertile green islets as they passed +like a lovely picture before our eyes - "this is the man who +favours the missionaries because they are useful to him and can +tame the savages better than any one else can do it!" Then I +wondered in my mind whether it were possible for any missionary to +tame HIM! + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + + +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious - Unpleasant prospects - +Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic agency - The +pirates negotiate with a Feejee chief - Various etceteras that are +calculated to surprise and horrify. + + +IT was many days after the events just narrated ere I recovered a +little of my wonted spirits. I could not shake off the feeling for +a long time that I was in a frightful dream, and the sight of our +captain filled me with so much horror that I kept out of his way as +much as my duties about the cabin would permit. Fortunately he +took so little notice of me that he did not observe my changed +feelings towards him, otherwise it might have been worse for me. + +But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first island +we should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of the +natives rather than remain an hour longer than I could help in the +pirate schooner. I pondered this subject a good deal, and at last +made up my mind to communicate my intention to Bloody Bill; for, +during several talks I had had with him of late, I felt assured +that he too would willingly escape if possible. When I told him of +my design he shook his head. "No, no, Ralph," said he, "you must +not think of running away here. Among some of the groups of +islands you might do so with safety, but if you tried it here you +would find that you had jumped out of the fryin' pan into the +fire." + +"How so, Bill?" said I, "would the natives not receive me?" + +"That they would, lad; but they would eat you too." + +"Eat me!" said I in surprise, "I thought the South Sea islanders +never ate anybody except their enemies." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Bill. "I s'pose 'twas yer tender-hearted +friends in England that put that notion into your head. There's a +set o' soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who don't like to +have their feelin's ruffled, and when you tell them anything they +don't like - that shocks them, as they call it - no matter how true +it be, they stop their ears and cry out, 'Oh, that is TOO horrible! +We can't believe that!' An' they say truth. They can't believe it +'cause they won't believe it. Now, I believe there's thousands o' +the people in England who are sich born drivellin' WON'T-BELIEVERS +that they think the black fellows hereaway, at the worst, eat an +enemy only now an' then, out o' spite; whereas, I know for certain, +and many captains of the British and American navies know as well +as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not only their enemies but one +another; and they do it not for spite, but for pleasure. It's a +FACT that they prefer human flesh to any other. But they don't +like white men's flesh so well as black. They say it makes them +sick." + +"Why, Bill," said I, "you told me just now that they would eat ME +if they caught me." + +"So I did; and so I think they would. I've only heard some o' them +say they don't like white men SO WELL as black; but if they was +hungry they wouldn't be particular. Anyhow, I'm sure they would +kill you. You see, Ralph, I've been a good while in them parts, +and I've visited the different groups of islands oftentimes as a +trader. And thorough goin' blackguards some o' them traders are. +No better than pirates, I can tell you. One captain that I sailed +with was not a chip better than the one we're with now. He was +tradin' with a friendly chief one day, aboard his vessel. The +chief had swam off to us with the things for trade tied a-top of +his head, for them chaps are like otters in the water. Well, the +chief was hard on the captain, and would not part with some o' his +things. When their bargainin' was over they shook hands, and the +chief jumped over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty +yards from the ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. +He then hove up anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along +shore, he dropped six black-fellows with his rifle, remarkin' that +'that would spoil the trade for the next comers.' But, as I was +sayin', I'm up to the ways o' these fellows. One o' the laws o' +the country is, that every shipwrecked person who happens to be +cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to be roasted and +eaten. There was a small tradin' schooner wrecked off one of these +islands when we were lyin' there in harbour during a storm. The +crew was lost, all but three men, who swam ashore. The moment they +landed they were seized by the natives and carried up into the +woods. We knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could +not help them, for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore +they would likely have killed us all. We never saw the three men +again; but we heard frightful yelling, and dancing, and merry- +making that night; and one of the natives, who came aboard to trade +with us next day, told us that the LONG PIGS, as he called the men, +had been roasted and eaten, and their bones were to be converted +into sail needles. He also said that white men were bad to eat, +and that most o' the people on shore were sick." + +I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this terrible +account of the natives, and asked Bill what he would advise me to +do. Looking round the deck to make sure that we were not +overheard, he lowered his voice and said, "There are two or three +ways that we might escape, Ralph, but none o' them's easy. If the +captain would only sail for some o' the islands near Tahiti, we +might run away there well enough, because the natives are all +Christians; an' we find that wherever the savages take up with +Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are safe +to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity myself," he +continued, in a soliloquising voice, "and I don't well know what it +means; but a man with half an eye can see what it does for these +black critters. However, the captain always keeps a sharp look out +after us when we get to these islands, for he half suspects that +one or two o' us are tired of his company. Then, we might manage +to cut the boat adrift some fine night when it's our watch on deck, +and clear off before they discovered that we were gone. But we +would run the risk o' bein' caught by the blacks. I wouldn't like +to try that plan. But you and I will think over it, Ralph, and see +what's to be done. In the meantime it's our watch below, so I'll +go and turn in." + +Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade took +his place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into +conversation with him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, +looked down into the phosphorescent waves that gargled around the +ladder, and streamed out like a flame of blue light in the vessel's +wake. My thoughts were very sad, and I could scarce refrain from +tears as I contrasted my present wretched position with the happy, +peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral Island with my dear +companions. As I thought upon Jack and Peterkin anxious +forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to myself the grief and +dismay with which they would search every nook and corner of the +island, in a vain attempt to discover my dead body; for I felt +assured that if they did not see any sign of the pirate schooner or +boat, when they came out of the cave to look for me, they would +never imagine that I had been carried away. I wondered, too, how +Jack would succeed in getting Peterkin out of the cave without my +assistance; and I trembled when I thought that he might lose +presence of mind, and begin to kick when he was in the tunnel! +These thoughts were suddenly interrupted and put to flight by a +bright red blaze which lighted up the horizon to the southward, and +cut a crimson glow far over the sea. This appearance was +accompanied by a low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at +the same time, the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling +wind blew around us in fitful gusts. + +The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were under the +belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the captain +coming on deck, soon explained the phenomena. + +"It's only a volcano," said he. "I knew there was one hereabouts, +but thought it was extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; +we'll likely have a breeze, and it's well to be ready." + +As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed was +not rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant from the +volcano, these must have been carried to us from it by the wind. +As the captain had predicted, a stiff breeze soon afterwards sprang +up, under the influence of which we speedily left the volcano far +behind us; but during the greater part of the night we could see +its lurid glare and hear its distant thunder. The shower did not +cease to fall for several hours, and we must have sailed under it +for nearly forty miles, perhaps farther. When we emerged from the +cloud, our decks and every part of the rigging were completely +covered with a thick coat of ashes. I was much interested in this, +and recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of the islands +of the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, and +had said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the Pacific +were nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a huge +continent which had sunk under the influence of volcanic agency. + +Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few +miles to windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant +aspect. It consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be nearly +four thousand feet high. They were separated from each other by a +broad valley, whose thick-growing trees ascended a considerable +distance up the mountain sides; and rich level plains, or meadow- +land, spread round the base of the mountains, except at the point +immediately opposite the large valley, where a river seemed to +carry the trees, as it were, along with it down to the white sandy +shore. The mountain tops, unlike those of our Coral Island, were +sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while their sides were more rugged +and grand in outline than anything I had yet seen in those seas. +Bloody Bill was beside me when the island first hove in sight. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, "I know that island well. They call it Emo." + +"Have you been here before, then?" I inquired. + +"Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. 'Tis a famous +island for sandal-wood. We have taken many cargoes off it already, +and have paid for them too; for the savages are so numerous that we +dared not try to take it by force. But our captain has tried to +cheat them so often, that they're beginnin' not to like us overmuch +now. Besides, the men behaved ill the last time we were here; and +I wonder the captain is not afraid to venture. But he's afraid o' +nothing earthly, I believe." + +We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our anchor in +six fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small creek, whose +shores were densely covered with mangroves and tall umbrageous +trees. The principal village of the natives lay about half a mile +from this point. Ordering the boat out, the captain jumped into +it, and ordered me to follow him. The men, fifteen in number, were +well armed; and the mate was directed to have Long Tom ready for +emergencies. + +"Give way, lads," cried the captain. + +The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from the +schooner's side, and in a few minutes reached the shore. Here, +contrary to our expectation, we were met with the utmost cordiality +by Romata, the principal chief of the island, who conducted us to +his house, and gave us mats to sit upon. I observed in passing +that the natives, of whom there were two or three thousand, were +totally unarmed. + +After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and +various roots was spread before us; of which we partook sparingly, +and then proceeded to business. The captain stated his object in +visiting the island, regretted that there had been a slight +misunderstanding during the last visit, and hoped that no ill-will +was borne by either party, and that a satisfactory trade would be +accomplished. + +Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any +differences between them, protested that he was delighted to see +his friends again, and assured them they should have every +assistance in cutting and embarking the wood. The terms were +afterwards agreed on, and we rose to depart. All this conversation +was afterwards explained to me by Bill, who understood the language +pretty well. + +Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great chief +from another island was then on a visit to him, and that he was to +be ceremoniously entertained on the following day. After begging +to be allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving permission, he +sent his canoe ashore to bring him off. At the same time he gave +orders to bring on board his two favourites, a cock and a paroquet. +While the canoe was gone on this errand, I had time to regard the +savage chief attentively. He was a man of immense size, with +massive but beautifully moulded limbs and figure, only parts of +which, the broad chest and muscular arms, were uncovered; for, +although the lower orders generally wore no other clothing than a +strip of cloth called MARO round their loins, the chief, on +particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of a +species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese paper- +mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and moustache, and +his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it resembled a +large turban, in which was stuck a long wooden pin! I afterwards +found that this pin served for scratching the head, for which +purpose the fingers were too short without disarranging the hair. +But Romata put himself to much greater inconvenience on account of +his hair, for we found that he slept with his head resting on a +wooden pillow, in which was cut a hollow for the neck, so that the +hair of the sleeper might not be disarranged. + +In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, who +certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having painted +one half of his face red and the other half yellow, besides +ornamenting it with various designs in black! Otherwise he was +much the same in appearance as Romata, though not so powerfully +built. As this chief had never seen a ship before, except, +perchance, some of the petty traders that at long intervals visit +these remote islands, he was much taken up with the neatness and +beauty of all the fittings of the schooner. He was particularly +struck with a musket which was shown to him, and asked where the +white men got hatchets hard enough to cut the tree of which the +barrel was made! While he was thus engaged, his brother chief +stood aloof, talking with the captain, and fondling a superb cock +and a little blue-headed paroquet, the favourites of which I have +before spoken. I observed that all the other natives walked in a +crouching posture while in the presence of Romata. Before our +guests left us, the captain ordered the brass gun to be uncovered +and fired for their gratification; and I have every reason to +believe he did so for the purpose of showing our superior power, in +case the natives should harbour any evil designs against us. +Romata had never seen this gun before, as it had not been uncovered +on previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed it +was very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he begged +that the captain would fire it. So a shot was put into it. The +chiefs were then directed to look at a rock about two miles out at +sea, and the gun was fired. In a second the top of the rock was +seen to burst asunder, and to fall in fragments into the sea. + +Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he +pointed to a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the +captain to fire at him, evidently supposing that his permission was +quite sufficient to justify the captain in such an act. He was +therefore surprised, and not a little annoyed, when the captain +refused to fire at the native, and ordered the gun to be housed. + +Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement to +these savages, that which pleased Romata's visitor most was the +ship's pump. He never tired of examining it, and pumping up the +water. Indeed, so much was he taken up with this pump, that he +could not be prevailed on to return on shore, but sent a canoe to +fetch his favourite stool, on which he seated himself, and spent +the remainder of the day in pumping the bilge-water out of the +ship! + +Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the +captain, with one or two men, remained on board, in order to be +ready, if need be, with the brass gun, which was unhoused and +conspicuously elevated, with its capacious muzzle directed point +blank at the chief's house. The men were fully armed as usual; and +the captain ordered me to go with them, to assist in the work. I +was much pleased with this order, for it freed me from the +captain's company, which I could not now endure, and it gave me an +opportunity of seeing the natives. + +As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant groves +of banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I observed that +there were many of the plum and banian trees, with which I had +become familiar on the Coral Island. I noticed also large +quantities of taro-roots, yams, and sweet potatoes, growing in +enclosures. On turning into an open glade of the woods, we came +abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. They were built chiefly +of bamboos, and were thatched with the large thick leaves of the +pandanus; but many of them had little more than a sloping roof and +three sides with an open front, being the most simple shelter from +the weather that could well be imagined. Within these, and around +them, were groups of natives - men, women, and children - who all +stood up to gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party +of men whom the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile +inland we arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, +while the men set to work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to +observe the country. + +About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one of +whom carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and +potatoes on several plantain leaves, which he presented to the men, +who sat down under the shade of a tree to dine. The chief sat down +to dine also; but, to my surprise, instead of feeding himself, one +of his wives performed that office for him! I was seated beside +Bill, and asked him the reason of this. + +"It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed himself," answered +Bill; "but I daresay he's not particular, except on great +occasions. They've a strange custom among them, Ralph, which is +called TABU, and they carry it to great lengths. If a man chooses +a particular tree for his god, the fruit o' that tree is tabued to +him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be killed by his people, and +eaten, of course, for killing means eating hereaway. Then, you see +that great mop o' hair on the chief's head? Well, he has a lot o' +barbers to keep it in order; and it's a law that whoever touches +the head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his hands are +tabued; so, in that way, the barbers' hands are always tabued, and +they daren't use them for their lives, but have to be fed like big +babies, as they are, sure enough!" + +"That's odd, Bill. But look there," said I, pointing to a man +whose skin was of a much lighter colour than the generality of the +natives. "I've seen a few of these light-skinned fellows among the +Fejeeans. They seem to me to be of quite a different race." + +"So they are," answered Bill. "These fellows come from the Tongan +Islands, which lie a long way to the eastward. They come here to +build their big war-canoes; and as these take two, and sometimes +four years, to build, there's always some o' the brown-skins among +the black sarpents o' these islands." + +"By the way, Bill," said I, "your mentioning serpents, reminds me +that I have not seen a reptile of any kind since I came to this +part of the world." + +"No more there are any," said Bill, "if ye except the niggers +themselves, there's none on the islands, but a lizard or two and +some sich harmless things. But I never seed any myself. If +there's none on the land, however, there's more than enough in the +water, and that minds me of a wonderful brute they have here. But, +come, I'll show it to you." So saying, Bill arose, and, leaving +the men still busy with the baked pig, led me into the forest. +After proceeding a short distance we came upon a small pond of +stagnant water. A native lad had followed us, to whom we called +and beckoned him to come to us. On Bill saying a few words to him, +which I did not understand, the boy advanced to the edge of the +pond, and gave a low peculiar whistle. Immediately the water +became agitated and an enormous eel thrust its head above the +surface and allowed the youth to touch it. It was about twelve +feet long, and as thick round the body as a man's thigh. + +"There," said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, "what do you +think of that for a god, Ralph? This is one o' their gods, and it +has been fed with dozens o' livin' babies already. How many more +it'll get afore it dies is hard to say." + +"Babies?" said I, with an incredulous look + +"Ay, babies," returned Bill. "Your soft-hearted folk at home would +say, 'Oh, horrible! impossible!' to that, and then go away as +comfortable and unconcerned as if their sayin' 'horrible! +impossible!' had made it a lie. But I tell you, Ralph, it's a +FACT. I've seed it with my own eyes the last time I was here, an' +mayhap if you stop a while at this accursed place, and keep a sharp +look out, you'll see it too. They don't feed it regularly with +livin' babies, but they give it one now and then as a treat. Bah! +you brute!' cried Bill, in disgust, giving the reptile a kick on +the snout with his heavy boot, that sent it sweltering back in +agony into its loathsome pool. I thought it lucky for Bill, indeed +for all of us, that the native youth's back happened to be turned +at the time, for I am certain that if the poor savages had come to +know that we had so rudely handled their god, we should have had to +fight our way back to the ship. As we retraced our steps I +questioned my companion further on this subject. + +"How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a dreadful thing +to be done?" + +"Allow it? the mothers DO it! It seems to me that there's nothing +too fiendish or diabolical for these people to do. Why, in some of +the islands they have an institution called the AREOI, and the +persons connected with that body are ready for any wickedness that +mortal man can devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o' +their customs is to murder their infants the moment they are born. +The mothers agree to it, and the fathers do it. And the mildest +ways they have of murdering them is by sticking them through the +body with sharp splinters of bamboo, strangling them with their +thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping them to death while +under the sod." + +I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these horrors. + +"But it's a curious fact," he continued, after a pause, during +which we walked in silence towards the spot where we had left our +comrades, - "it's a curious fact, that wherever the missionaries +get a footin' all these things come to an end at once, an' the +savages take to doin' each other good, and singin' psalms, just +like Methodists." + +"God bless the missionaries!" said I, while a feeling of enthusiasm +filled my heart, so that I could speak with difficulty. "God bless +and prosper the missionaries till they get a footing in every +island of the sea!" + +"I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I could," said Bill, in +a deep, sad voice; "but it would be a mere mockery for a man to ask +a blessing for others who dare not ask one for himself. But, +Ralph," he continued, "I've not told you half o' the abominations I +have seen durin' my life in these seas. If we pull long together, +lad, I'll tell you more; and if times have not changed very much +since I was here last, it's like that you'll have a chance o' +seeing a little for yourself before long." + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + + +The Sandal-wood party - Native children's games, somewhat +surprising - Desperate amusements suddenly and fatally brought to a +close - An old friend recognised - News - Romata's mad conduct + + +NEXT day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I +accompanied them as before. During the dinner hour I wandered into +the woods alone, being disinclined for food that day. I had not +rambled far when I found myself unexpectedly on the sea-shore, +having crossed a narrow neck of land which separated the native +village from a large bay. Here I found a party of the islanders +busy with one of their war-canoes, which was almost ready for +launching. I stood for a long time watching this party with great +interest, and observed that they fastened the timbers and planks to +each other very much in the same way in which I had seen Jack +fasten those of our little boat. But what surprised me most was +its immense length, which I measured very carefully, and found to +be a hundred feet long; and it was so capacious that it could have +held three hundred men. It had the unwieldy out-rigger and +enormously high stern-posts which I had remarked on the canoe that +came to us while I was on the Coral Island. Observing some boys +playing at games a short way along the beach, I resolved to go and +watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were engaged so +busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe. + +Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I began +to think this must be the general play-ground of the village, I sat +down on a grassy bank under the shade of a plantain-tree, to watch +them. And a happier or more noisy crew I have never seen. There +were at least two hundred of them, both boys and girls, all of whom +were clad in no other garments than their own glossy little black +skins, except the maro, or strip of cloth round the loins of the +boys, and a very short petticoat or kilt on the girls. They did +not all play at the same game, but amused themselves in different +groups. + +One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our blind- +man's-buff. Another set were walking on stilts, which raised the +children three feet from the ground. They were very expert at this +amusement and seldom tumbled. In another place I observed a group +of girls standing together, and apparently enjoying themselves very +much; so I went up to see what they were doing, and found that they +were opening their eye-lids with their fingers till their eyes +appeared of an enormous size, and then thrusting pieces of straw +between the upper and lower lids, across the eye-ball, to keep them +in that position! This seemed to me, I must confess, a very +foolish as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the children +seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they made. I +pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that if little +children knew how silly they seem to grown-up people when they make +faces, they would not be so fond of doing it. In another place +were a number of boys engaged in flying kites, and I could not help +wondering that some of the games of those little savages should be +so like to our own, although they had never seen us at play. But +the kites were different from ours in many respects, being of every +variety of shape. They were made of very thin cloth, and the boys +raised them to a wonderful height in the air by means of twine made +from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, some of which +showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor savages, +and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be sent out to +them. But the amusement which the greatest number of the children +of both sexes seemed to take chief delight in, was swimming and +diving in the sea; and the expertness which they exhibited was +truly amazing. They seemed to have two principal games in the +water, one of which was to dive off a sort of stage which had been +erected near a deep part of the sea, and chase each other in the +water. Some of them went down to an extraordinary depth; others +skimmed along the surface, or rolled over and over like porpoises, +or diving under each other, came up unexpectedly and pulled each +other down by a leg or an arm. They never seemed to tire of this +sport, and, from the great heat of the water in the South Seas, +they could remain in it nearly all day without feeling chilled. +Many of these children were almost infants, scarce able to walk; +yet they staggered down the beach, flung their round fat little +black bodies fearlessly into deep water, and struck out to sea with +as much confidence as ducklings. + +The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the surf. +But as this is an amusement in which all engage, from children of +ten to gray-headed men of sixty, and as I had an opportunity of +witnessing it in perfection the day following, I shall describe it +more minutely. + +I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand swimming- +match was got up, for Romata came and told the captain that they +were going to engage in it, and begged him to "come and see." + +"What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?" I inquired of Bill, +as we walked together to a part of the shore on which several +thousands of the natives were assembled. + +"It's a very favourite lark with these 'xtr'or'nary critters," +replied Bill, giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably +bulged out his left cheek. "Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to +the water as soon a'most as they can walk, an' long before they can +do that anything respectably, so that they are as much at home in +the sea as on the land. Well, ye see, I 'spose they found swimmin' +for miles out to sea, and divin' fathoms deep, wasn't exciting +enough, so they invented this game o' the surf. Each man and boy, +as you see, has got a short board or plank, with which he swims out +for a mile or more to sea, and then, gettin' on the top o' yon +thundering breaker, they come to shore on the top of it, yellin' +and screechin' like fiends. It's a marvel to me that they're not +dashed to shivers on the coral reef, for sure an' sartin am I that +if any o' us tried it, we wouldn't be worth the fluke of a broken +anchor after the wave fell. But there they go!" + +As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we were +now standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, plunged +into the surf, and were carried off by the seething foam of the +retreating wave. + +At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined the +shore, so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff +breeze had rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the feet +of the multitudes who lined the beach. For some time the swimmers +continued to strike out to sea, breasting over the swell like +hundreds of black seals. Then they all turned, and, watching an +approaching billow, mounted its white crest, and, each laying his +breast on the short flat board, came rolling towards the shore, +careering on the summit of the mighty wave, while they and the +onlookers shouted and yelled with excitement. Just as the monster +wave curled in solemn majesty to fling its bulky length upon the +beach, most of the swimmers slid back into the trough behind; +others, slipping off their boards, seized them in their hands, and, +plunging through the watery waste, swam out to repeat the +amusement; but a few, who seemed to me the most reckless, continued +their career until they were launched upon the beach, and enveloped +in the churning foam and spray. One of these last came in on the +crest of the wave most manfully, and landed with a violent bound +almost on the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by his peculiar +head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained as +their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint with +which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to his +feet, I recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, my old +friend of the Coral Island! + +Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing quickly, +took me round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the effect of +transferring a good deal of the moist paint from his nose to mine. +Then, recollecting that this was not the white man's mode of +salutation, he grasped me by the hand and shook it violently. + +"Hallo, Ralph!" cried Bill, in surprise, "that chap seems to have +taken a sudden fancy to you, or he must be an old acquaintance." + +"Right, Bill," I replied, "he is indeed an old acquaintance;" and I +explained in a few words that he was the chief whose party Jack and +Peterkin and I had helped to save. + +Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an animated +conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the course of it +to me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him about the +memorable battle, and the part we had taken in it. When he paused, +I begged of Bill to ask him about the woman Avatea, for I had some +hope that she might have come with Tararo on this visit. "And ask +him," said I, "who she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different +race from the Feejeeans." On the mention of her name the chief +frowned darkly, and seemed to speak with much anger. + +"You're right, Ralph," said Bill, when the chief had ceased to +talk; "she's not a Feejee girl, but a Samoan. How she ever came to +this place the chief does not very clearly explain, but he says she +was taken in war, and that he got her three years ago, an' kept her +as his daughter ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else she'd +have been roasted and eaten like the rest." + +"But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?" said I. + +"Because the girl's somewhat obstinate, like most o' the sex, an' +won't marry the man he wants her to. It seems that a chief of some +other island came on a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but +she wouldn't have him on no account, bein' already in love, and +engaged to a young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a +desperate shindy; so, as he was going on a war expedition in his +canoe, he left her to think about it, sayin' he'd be back in six +months or so, when he hoped she wouldn't be so obstropolous. This +happened just a week ago; an' Tararo says that if she's not ready +to go, when the chief returns, as his bride, she'll be sent to him +as a LONG PIG." + +"As a long pig!" I exclaimed in surprise; "why what does he mean by +that?" + +"He means somethin' very unpleasant," answered Bill with a frown. +"You see these blackguards eat men an' women just as readily as +they eat pigs; and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each +other in appearance, they call men LONG pigs. If Avatea goes to +this fellow as a long pig, it's all up with her, poor thing." + +"Is she on the island now?" I asked eagerly. + +"No, she's at Tararo's island." + +"And where does it lie?" + +"About fifty or sixty miles to the south'ard o' this," returned +Bill; " but I - " + +At this moment we were startled by the cry of "Mao! mao! - a shark! +a shark!" which was immediately followed by a shriek that rang +clear and fearfully loud above the tumult of cries that arose from +the savages in the water and on the land. We turned hastily +towards the direction whence the cry came, and had just time to +observe the glaring eye-balls of one of the swimmers as he tossed +his arms in the air. Next instant he was pulled under the waves. +A canoe was instantly launched, and the hand of the drowning man +was caught, but only half of his body was dragged from the maw of +the monster, which followed the canoe until the water became so +shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next billow +was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore. + +In most countries of the world this would have made a deep +impression on the spectators, but the only effect it had upon these +islanders was to make them hurry with all speed out of the sea, +lest a similar fate should befall some of the others; but, so +utterly reckless were they of human life, that it did not for a +moment suspend the progress of their amusements. It is true the +surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat abruptly, but they +immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me that sharks +do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being frightened away by the +immense numbers of men and boys in the water, and by the shouting +and splashing that they make. "But," said he, "such a thing as you +have seen just now don't frighten them much. They'll be at it +again to-morrow or next day, just as if there wasn't a single shark +between Feejee and Nova Zembla." + +After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing +matches; and being men of immense size and muscle, they did a good +deal of injury to each other, especially in boxing, in which not +only the lower orders, but several of the chiefs and priests +engaged. Each bout was very quickly terminated, for they did not +pretend to a scientific knowledge of the art, and wasted no time in +sparring, but hit straight out at each other's heads, and their +blows were delivered with great force. Frequently one of the +combatants was knocked down with a single blow; and one gigantic +fellow hit his adversary so severely that he drove the skin +entirely off his forehead. This feat was hailed with immense +applause by the spectators. + +During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, though I +confess I could not refrain from beholding them, I was struck with +the beauty of many of the figures and designs that were tattooed on +the persons of the chiefs and principal men. One figure, that +seemed to me very elegant, was that of a palm-tree tattooed on the +back of a man's leg, the roots rising, as it were, from under his +heel, the stem ascending the tendon of the ankle, and the graceful +head branching out upon the calf. I afterwards learned that this +process of tattooing is very painful, and takes long to do, +commencing at the age of ten, and being continued at intervals up +to the age of thirty. It is done by means of an instrument made of +bone, with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the kernel +of the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, and the +mark thus made is indelible. The operation is performed by a class +of men whose profession it is, and they tattoo as much at a time, +as the person on whom they are operating can bear; which is not +much, the pain and inflammation caused by tattooing being very +great, sometimes causing death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed +with an ornamental stripe down the legs, which gave them the +appearance of being clad in tights. Others had marks round the +ankles and insteps, which looked like tight-fitting and elegant +boots. Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts were very +profusely marked with every imaginable species of device, - +muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, intermingled with +lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary figures. + +The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a few +marks on their feet and arms. But I must say, however +objectionable this strange practice may be, it nevertheless had +this good effect, that it took away very much from their appearance +of nakedness. + +Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our schooner, +we observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood of his house, +apparently mad with passion. + +"Ah!" said Bill to me, "there he's at his old tricks again. That's +his way when he gets drink. The natives make a sort of drink o' +their own, and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy +he's like a wild tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a +bottle, as usual, to keep him in good humour. After drinkin' he +usually goes to sleep, and the people know it well and keep out of +his way, for fear they should waken him. Even the babies are taken +out of ear-shot; for, when he's waked up, he rushes out just as you +see him now, and spears or clubs the first person he meets." + +It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon had +been in his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about without +one. Suddenly he caught sight of an unfortunate man who was trying +to conceal himself behind a tree. Rushing towards him, Romata +struck him a terrible blow on the head, which knocked out the poor +man's eye and also dislocated the chief's finger. The wretched +creature offered no resistance; he did not even attempt to parry +the blow. Indeed, from what Bill said, I found that he might +consider himself lucky in having escaped with his life, which would +certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of a +club at the time. + +"Have these wretched creatures no law among themselves," said I, +"which can restrain such wickedness?" + +"None," replied Bill. "The chief's word is law. He might kill and +eat a dozen of his own subjects any day for nothing more than his +own pleasure, and nobody would take the least notice of it." + +This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we +wended our way to the beach, but I could not observe any other +expression on the faces of the men than that of total indifference +or contempt. It seemed to me a very awful thing that it should be +possible for men to come to such hardness of heart and callousness +to the sight of bloodshed and violence; but, indeed, I began to +find that such constant exposure to scenes of blood was having a +slight effect upon myself, and I shuddered when I came to think +that I, too, was becoming callous. + +I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up and +down the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the +conclusion that if I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such bloody +deeds as I had witnessed within the last few weeks, could so soon +come to be less sensitive about them, how little wonder that these +poor ignorant savages, who were born and bred in familiarity +therewith, should think nothing of them at all, and should hold +human life in so very slight esteem. + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + + +Mischief brewing - My blood is made to run cold - Evil +consultations and wicked resolves - Bloody Bill attempts to do good +and fails - The attack - Wholesale murder - The flight - The +escape. + + + +NEXT morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of deep +depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy fate, +the more wretched and miserable did I feel. + +I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most dreadful +character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere pastime. On +shore were the natives, whose practices were so horrible that I +could not think of them without shuddering. On board were none but +pirates of the blackest dye, who, although not cannibals, were foul +murderers, and more blameworthy even than the savages, inasmuch as +they knew better. Even Bill, with whom I had, under the strange +circumstances of my lot, formed a kind of intimacy, was so fierce +in his nature as to have acquired the title of "Bloody" from his +vile companions. I felt very much cast down the more I considered +the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as it seemed to me, +at least for a long time to come. At last, in my feeling of utter +helplessness, I prayed fervently to the Almighty that he would +deliver me out of my miserable condition; and when I had done so I +felt some degree of comfort. + +When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the men +usually started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me to +remain aboard that day, as I did not feel well; but he looked at me +angrily, and ordered me, in a surly tone, to get ready to go on +shore as usual. The fact was that the captain had been out of +humour for some time past. Romata and he had had some differences, +and high words had passed between them, during which the chief had +threatened to send a fleet of his war-canoes, with a thousand men, +to break up and burn the schooner; whereupon the captain smiled +sarcastically, and going up to the chief gazed sternly in his face, +while he said, "I have only to raise my little finger just now, and +my big gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five minutes!" +Although the chief was a bold man, he quailed before the pirate's +glance and threat, and made no reply; but a bad feeling had been +raised and old sores had been opened. + +I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. Before +starting, however, the captain called me into the cabin, and said, +- + +"Here, Ralph, I've got a mission for you, lad. That blackguard +Romata is in the dumps, and nothing will mollify him but a gift; so +do you go up to his house and give him these whales' teeth, with my +compliments. Take with you one of the men who can speak the +language." + +I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six +white whales' teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, which +seemed to me very paltry things. However, I did not dare to +hesitate or ask any questions; so, gathering them up, I left the +cabin and was soon on my way to the chief's house, accompanied by +Bill. On expressing my surprise at the gift, he said, - + +"They're paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but they're considered +of great value by them chaps. They're a sort o' cash among them. +The red ones are the most prized, one of them bein' equal to twenty +o' the white ones. I suppose the only reason for their bein' +valuable is that there ain't many of them, and they're hard to be +got." + +On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in the +midst of a number of large bales of native cloth and other +articles, which had been brought to him as presents from time to +time by inferior chiefs. He received us rather haughtily, but on +Bill explaining the nature of our errand he became very +condescending, and his eyes glistened with satisfaction when he +received the whales' teeth, although he laid them aside with an +assumption of kingly indifference. + +"Go," said he, with a wave of the hand, - "go, tell your captain +that he may cut wood to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come +ashore, - I want to have a palaver with him." + +As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his head: + +"There's mischief brewin' in that black rascal's head. I know him +of old. But what comes here?" + +As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in the +wood, and presently there issued from it a band of savages, in the +midst of whom were a number of men bearing burdens on their +shoulders. At first I thought that these burdens were poles with +something rolled round them, the end of each pole resting on a +man's shoulder. But on a nearer approach I saw that they were +human beings, tied hand and foot, and so lashed to the poles that +they could not move. I counted twenty of them as they passed. + +"More murder!" said Bill, in a voice that sounded between a hoarse +laugh and a groan. + +"Surely they are not going to murder them?" said I, looking +anxiously into Bill's face. + +"I don't know, Ralph," replied Bill, "what they're goin' to do with +them; but I fear they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that +way." + +As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed that +Bill looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction where the +procession had disappeared. At last he stopped, and turning +abruptly on his heel, said, - + +"I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom o' that +affair. Let us follow these black scoundrels and see what they're +goin' to do." + +I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody +practices; but Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and went. We +passed rapidly through the bush, being guided in the right +direction by the shouts of the savages. Suddenly there was a dead +silence, which continued for some time, while Bill and I +involuntarily quickened our pace until we were running at the top +of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously mentioned. +As we reached the verge of the wood, we discovered the savages +surrounding the large war-canoe, which they were apparently on the +point of launching. Suddenly the multitude put their united +strength to the canoe; but scarcely had the huge machine begun to +move, when a yell, the most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, +rose high above the shouting of the savages. It had not died away +when another and another smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I +saw that these inhuman monsters were actually launching their canoe +over the living bodies of their victims. But there was no pity in +the breasts of these men. Forward they went in ruthless +indifference, shouting as they went, while high above their voices +rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, as, one after +another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst the eyeballs +from their sockets, and sent the life's blood gushing from their +mouths. Oh, reader, this is no fiction. I would not, for the sake +of thrilling you with horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was +witnessed. It is true; true as that accursed sin which has +rendered the human heart capable of such diabolical enormities! + +When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a deep +groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as if I had +been a child, cried, - + +"Come along, lad; let's away!" - and so, staggering and stumbling +over the tangled underwood, we fled from the fatal spot. + +During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a horrible +dream. I scarce knew what was said to me, and was more than once +blamed by the men for idling my time. At last the hour to return +aboard came. We marched down to the beach, and I felt relief for +the first time when my feet rested on the schooner's deck. + +In the course of the evening I overheard part of a conversation +between the captain and the first mate, which startled me not a +little. They were down in the cabin, and conversed in an under- +tone, but the sky-light being off, I overheard every word that was +said. + +"I don't half like it," said the mate. "It seems to me that we'll +only have hard fightin' and no pay." + +"No pay!" repeated the captain, in a voice of suppressed anger. +"Do you call a good cargo all for nothing no pay?" + +"Very true," returned the mate; "but we've got the cargo aboard. +Why not cut your cable and take French leave o' them? What's the +use o' tryin' to lick the blackguards when it'll do us no manner o' +good?" + +"Mate," said the captain, in a low voice, "you talk like a fresh- +water sailor. I can only attribute this shyness to some strange +delusion; for surely" (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone +as he said this) "surely I am not to suppose that YOU have become +soft-hearted! Besides, you are wrong in regard to the cargo being +aboard; there's a good quarter of it lying in the woods, and that +blackguard chief knows it and won't let me take it off. He defied +us to do our worst, yesterday." + +"Defied us! did he?' cried the mate, with a bitter laugh. "Poor +contemptible thing!" + +"And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are afraid to +attack him." + +"Who said I was afraid?" growled the mate, sulkily. "I'm as ready +as any man in the ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend +to do?" + +"I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up to the head +of the creek there, from which point we can command the pile of +sandal-wood with our gun. Then I shall land with all the men +except two, who shall take care of the schooner and be ready with +the boat to take us off. We can creep through the woods to the +head of the village, where these cannibals are always dancing round +their suppers of human flesh, and if the carbines of the men are +loaded with a heavy charge of buck-shot, we can drop forty or fifty +at the first volley. After that the thing will be easy enough. +The savages will take to the mountains in a body, and we shall take +what we require, up anchor, and away." + +To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the cabin I +heard the captain say, - + +"Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don't forget the buck- +shot." + +The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this +murderous conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, who +seemed much perplexed about it. At length he said, - + +"I'll tell you what I'll do, Ralph: I'll swim ashore after dark +and fix a musket to a tree not far from the place where we'll have +to land, and I'll tie a long string to the trigger, so that when +our fellows cross it they'll let it off, and so alarm the village +in time to prevent an attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin' +back to the boat; so, master captain," added Bill with a smile that +for the first time seemed to me to be mingled with good-natured +cheerfulness, "you'll be baulked at least for once in your life by +Bloody Bill." + +After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. He slipped +over the side with a musket in his left hand, while with his right +he swam ashore and entered the woods. He soon returned, having +accomplished his purpose, and got on board without being seen, - I +being the only one on deck. + +When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on deck, +the cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. These sweeps +were immensely large oars, each requiring a couple of men to work +it. In a few minutes we entered the mouth of the creek, which was +indeed the mouth of a small river, and took about half an hour to +ascend it, although the spot where we intended to land was not more +than six hundred yards from the mouth, because there was a slight +current against us, and the mangroves which narrowed the creek, +impeded the rowers in some places. Having reached the spot, which +was so darkened by overhanging trees that we could see with +difficulty, a small kedge anchor attached to a thin line was let +softly down over the stern. + +"Now, lads," whispered the captain, as he walked along the line of +men, who were all armed to the teeth, "don't be in a hurry, aim +low, and don't waste your first shots." + +He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in silence. +There was no room to row, but oars were not needed, as a slight +push against the side of the schooner sent the boat gliding to the +shore. + +"There's no need of leaving two in the boat," whispered the mate, +as the men stepped out; "we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph +stay." + +The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness with the +boat-hook, to shove ashore at a moment's notice if they should +return, or to shove off if any of the savages should happen to +approach. He then threw his carbine into the hollow of his arm and +glided through the bushes followed by his men. With a throbbing +head I awaited the result of our plan. I knew the exact locality +where the musket was placed, for Bill had described it to me, and I +kept my straining eyes fixed upon the spot. But no sound came, and +I began to fear that either they had gone in another direction or +that Bill had not fixed the string properly. Suddenly I heard a +faint click, and observed one or two bright sparks among the +bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at once +that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming had +not caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly failed. A feeling of +dread now began to creep over me as I stood in the boat, in that +dark, silent spot, awaiting the issue of this murderous expedition. +I shuddered as I glanced at the water that glided past like a dark +reptile. I looked back at the schooner, but her hull was just +barely visible, while her tapering masts were lost among the trees +which overshadowed her. Her lower sails were set, but so thick was +the gloom that they were quite invisible. + +Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices raised a +yell in the village; again the cry rose on the night air, and was +followed by broken shouts as of scattered parties of men bounding +into the woods. Then I heard another shout loud and close at hand. +It was the voice of the captain cursing the man who had fired the +premature shot. Then came the order, "Forward," followed by the +wild hurrah of our men, as they charged the savages. Shots now +rang in quick succession, and at last a loud volley startled the +echoes of the woods. It was followed by a multitude of wild +shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another "hurrah" from +the men; the distance of the sound proving that they were driving +their enemies before them towards the sea. + +While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now +mingled in confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the leaves +not far from me. At first I thought it was a party of savages who +had observed the schooner, but I was speedily undeceived by +observing a body of natives - apparently several hundreds, as far +as I could guess in the uncertain light - bounding through the +woods towards the scene of battle. I saw at once that this was a +party who had out-flanked our men, and would speedily attack them +in the rear. And so it turned out, for, in a short time, the +shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I heard a +death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear. + +At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of +exultation that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that our +men had been conquered. I was immediately thrown into dreadful +consternation. What was I now to do? To be taken by the savages +was too horrible to be thought of; to flee to the mountains was +hopeless, as I should soon be discovered; and to take the schooner +out of the creek without assistance was impossible. I resolved, +however, to make the attempt, as being my only hope, and was on the +point of pushing off when my hand was stayed and my blood chilled +by an appalling shriek in which I recognised the voice of one of +the crew. It was succeeded by a shout from the savages. Then came +another, and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, as +I felt convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold blood. +With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on fire, I seized +the boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang from the bushes. + +"Stop! Ralph, stop! - there now, push off," he cried, and bounded +into the boat so violently as nearly to upset her. It was Bill's +voice! In another moment we were on board, - the boat made fast, +the line of the anchor cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first +stroke of Bill's giant arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, +for in his haste he forgot that I could scarcely move the unwieldy +oar. Springing to the stern he lashed the rudder in such a +position as that, while it aided me, it acted against him, and so +rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The schooner now +began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we reached its +mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told that we were +discovered. Instantly a number of the savages plunged into the +water and swam towards us; but we were making so much way that they +could not overtake us. One, however, an immensely powerful man, +succeeded in laying hold of the cut rope that hung from the stern, +and clambered quickly upon deck. Bill caught sight of him the +instant his head appeared above the taffrail. But he did not cease +to row, and did not appear even to notice the savage until he was +within a yard of him; then, dropping the sweep, he struck him a +blow on the forehead with his clenched fist that felled him to the +deck. Lifting him up he hurled him overboard and resumed the oar. +But now a greater danger awaited us, for the savages had outrun us +on the bank and were about to plunge into the water ahead of the +schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was sealed. For +one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, drawing a pistol from his +belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held the pan of his pistol over +the touch-hole and fired. The shot was succeeded by the hiss of +the cannon's priming, then the blaze and the crashing thunder of +the monstrous gun burst upon the savages with such deafening roar +that it seemed as if their very mountains had been rent asunder. + +This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation caused by +the unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a gentle +breeze, which the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us from +feeling, bulged out our sails; the schooner bent before it, and the +shouts of the disappointed savages grew fainter and fainter in the +distance as we were slowly wafted out to sea. + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + + +Reflections - The wounded man - The squall - True consolation - +Death. + + +THERE is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their bodies +and in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to be +wonderfully adapted and exactly proportioned to the circumstances +in which individuals may happen to be placed, - a power which, in +most cases, is sufficient to carry a man through and over every +obstacle that may happen to be thrown in his path through life, no +matter how high or how steep the mountain may be, but which often +forsakes him the moment the summit is gained, the point of +difficulty passed; and leaves him prostrated, with energies gone, +nerves unstrung, and a feeling of incapacity pervading the entire +frame that renders the most trifling effort almost impossible. + +During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to severe +mental and much physical excitement, which had almost crushed me +down by the time I was relieved from duty in the course of the +evening. But when the expedition, whose failure has just been +narrated, was planned, my anxieties and energies had been so +powerfully aroused that I went through the protracted scenes of +that terrible night without a feeling of the slightest fatigue. My +mind and body were alike active and full of energy. No sooner was +the last thrilling fear of danger past, however, than my faculties +were utterly relaxed; and, when I felt the cool breezes of the +Pacific playing around my fevered brow, and heard the free waves +rippling at the schooner's prow, as we left the hated island behind +us, my senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck. + +From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by the +arm, saying, - + +"Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we're safe now. Poor thing, I +believe he's fainted." And raising me in his arms he laid me on +the folds of the gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the +tiller. "Here, take a drop o' this, it'll do you good, my boy," he +added, in a voice of tenderness which I had never heard him use +before, while he held a brandy-flask to my lips. + +I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next moment +my head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast asleep. I slept +long, for when I awoke the sun was a good way above the horizon. I +did not move on first opening my eyes, as I felt a delightful +sensation of rest pervading me, and my eyes were riveted on and +charmed with the gorgeous splendour of the mighty ocean, that burst +upon my sight. It was a dead calm; the sea seemed a sheet of +undulating crystal, tipped and streaked with the saffron hues of +sunrise, which had not yet merged into the glowing heat of noon; +and there was a deep calm in the blue dome above, that was not +broken even by the usual flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would +have lain in contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but +my mind was recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the +present by the sight of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet +with his head reclining, as if in sleep, on his right arm, which +rested on the tiller. As he seemed to rest peacefully I did not +mean to disturb him, but the slight noise I made in raising myself +on my elbow caused him to start and look round. + +"Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long and +soundly," he said, turning towards me. + +On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He was deadly +pale, and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks over his face, +was clotted with blood. Blood also stained his hollow cheeks and +covered the front of his shirt, which, with the greater part of +dress, was torn and soiled with mud. + +"Oh, Bill!" said I, with deep anxiety, "what is the matter with +you? You are ill. You must have been wounded." + +"Even so, lad," said Bill in a deep soft voice, while he extended +his huge frame on the couch from which I had just risen. "I've got +an ugly wound, I fear, and I've been waiting for you to waken, to +ask you to get me a drop o' brandy and a mouthful o' bread from the +cabin lockers. You seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that I +didn't like to disturb you. But I don't feel up to much just now." + +I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below immediately, +and returned in a few seconds with a bottle of brandy and some +broken biscuit. He seemed much refreshed after eating a few +morsels and drinking a long draught of water mingled with a little +of the spirits. Immediately afterwards he fell asleep, and I +watched him anxiously until he awoke, being desirous of knowing the +nature and extent of his wound. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a slumber of an +hour, "I'm the better of that nap, Ralph; I feel twice the man I +was;" and he attempted to rise, but sank back again immediately +with a deep groan. + +"Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look at your +wound. I'll make a comfortable bed for you here on deck, and get +you some breakfast. After that you shall tell me how you got it. +Cheer up, Bill," I added, seeing that he turned his head away; +"you'll be all right in a little, and I'll be a capital nurse to +you though I'm no doctor." + +I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. While it was +kindling, I went to the steward's pantry and procured the materials +for a good breakfast, with which, in little more than half an hour, +I returned to my companion. He seemed much better, and smiled +kindly on me as I set before him a cup of coffee and a tray with +several eggs and some bread on it. + +"Now then, Bill," said I, cheerfully, sitting down beside him on +the deck, "let's fall to. I'm very hungry myself, I can tell you; +but - I forgot - your wound," I added, rising; "let me look at it." + +I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the chest. +It did not bleed much, and, as it was on the right side, I was in +hopes that it might not be very serious. But Bill shook his head. +"However," said he, "sit down, Ralph, and I'll tell you all about +it." + +"You see, after we left the boat an' began to push through the +bushes, we went straight for the line of my musket, as I had +expected; but by some unlucky chance it didn't explode, for I saw +the line torn away by the men's legs, and heard the click o' the +lock; so I fancy the priming had got damp and didn't catch. I was +in a great quandary now what to do, for I couldn't concoct in my +mind, in the hurry, any good reason for firin' off my piece. But +they say necessity's the mother of invention; so, just as I was +givin' it up and clinchin' my teeth to bide the worst o't, and take +what should come, a sudden thought came into my head. I stepped +out before the rest, seemin' to be awful anxious to be at the +savages, tripped my foot on a fallen tree, plunged head foremost +into a bush, an', ov coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a +screechin' from the camp as I never heard in all my life. I rose +at once, and was rushin' on with the rest when the captain called a +halt. + +"'You did that a-purpose, you villain!' he said, with a tremendous +oath, and, drawin' a pistol from his belt, let fly right into my +breast. I fell at once, and remembered no more till I was startled +and brought round by the most awful yell I ever heard in my life, +except, maybe, the shrieks o' them poor critters that were crushed +to death under yon big canoe. Jumpin' up, I looked round, and, +through the trees, saw a fire gleamin' not far off, the light o' +which showed me the captain and men tied hand and foot, each to a +post, and the savages dancin' round them like demons. I had scarce +looked for a second, when I saw one o' them go up to the captain +flourishing a knife, and, before I could wink, he plunged it into +his breast, while another yell, like the one that roused me, rang +upon my ear. I didn't wait for more, but, bounding up, went +crashing through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows +caught sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin' +into the boat, as you know." + +Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and shuddered +frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from continuing the +subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his mind to other +things. + +"But now, Bill," said I, "it behoves us to think about the future, +and what course of action we shall pursue. Here we are, on the +wide Pacific, in a well-appointed schooner, which is our own, - at +least no one has a better claim to it than we have, - and the world +lies before us. Moreover, here comes a breeze, so we must make up +our minds which way to steer." + +"Ralph, boy," said my companion, "it matters not to me which way we +go. I fear that my time is short now. Go where you will. I'm +content." + +"Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the Coral Island, +and see what has become of my dear old comrades, Jack and Peterkin. +I believe the island has no name, but the captain once pointed it +out to me on the chart, and I marked it afterwards; so, as we know +pretty well our position just now, I think I can steer to it. +Then, as to working the vessel, it is true I cannot hoist the sails +single-handed, but luckily we have enough of sail set already, and +if it should come on to blow a squall, I could at least drop the +peaks of the main and fore sails, and clew them up partially +without help, and throw her head close into the wind, so as to keep +her all shaking till the violence of the squall is past. And if we +have continued light breezes, I'll rig up a complication of blocks +and fix them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able to +hoist the sails without help. 'Tis true I'll require half a day to +hoist them, but we don't need to mind that. Then I'll make a sort +of erection on deck to screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you +can only manage to sit beside the tiller and steer for two hours +every day, so as to let me get a nap, I'll engage to let you off +duty all the rest of the twenty-four hours. And if you don't feel +able for steering, I'll lash the helm and heave to, while I get you +your breakfasts and dinners; and so we'll manage famously, and soon +reach the Coral Island." + +Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain. + +"And what will you do," said he, "if it comes on to blow a storm?" + +This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do in +such a case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and said, "Bill, +when a man has done all that he CAN do, he ought to leave the rest +to God." + +"Oh, Ralph," said my companion, in a faint voice, looking anxiously +into my face, "I wish that I had the feelin's about God that you +seem to have, at this hour. I'm dyin', Ralph; yet I, who have +braved death a hundred times, am afraid to die. I'm afraid to +enter the next world. Something within tells me there will be a +reckoning when I go there. But it's all over with me, Ralph. I +feel that there's no chance o' my bein' saved." + +"Don't say that, Bill," said I, in deep compassion, "don't say +that. I'm quite sure there's hope even for you, but I can't +remember the words of the Bible that make me think so. Is there +not a Bible on board, Bill?" + +"No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor boy that was +taken aboard against his will. He died, poor lad, I think, through +ill treatment and fear. After he was gone the captain found his +Bible and flung it overboard." + +I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the way +in which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me that I +was actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than this blood- +stained pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he never read the +Bible, and was never brought up to care for it; whereas I was +carefully taught to read it by my own mother, and had read it daily +as long as I possessed one, yet to so little purpose that I could +not now call to mind a single text that would meet this poor man's +case, and afford him the consolation he so much required. I was +much distressed, and taxed my memory for a long time. At last a +text did flash into my mind, and I wondered much that I had not +thought of it before. + +"Bill," said I, in a low voice, "'Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ +and thou shalt be saved.'" + +"Ay, Ralph, I've heard the missionaries say that before now, but +what good can it do me? It's not for me that. It's not for the +likes o' me." + +I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that that +word was for him as well as for me, I could not remember any other +word whereby I could prove it. + +After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, "Ralph, +I've led a terrible life. I've been a sailor since I was a boy, +and I've gone from bad to worse ever since I left my father's roof. +I've been a pirate three years now. It is true I did not choose +the trade, but I was inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here +by force till I became reckless and at last joined them. Since +that time my hand has been steeped in human blood again and again. +Your young heart would grow cold if I - ; but why should I go on? +'Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is fixed." + +"Bill," said I, "'Though your sins be red like crimson, they shall +be white as snow.' 'Only believe.'" + +"Only believe!" cried Bill, starting up on his elbow; "I've heard +men talk o' believing as if it was easy. Ha! 'tis easy enough for +a man to point to a rope and say, 'I believe that would bear my +weight;' but 'tis another thing for a man to catch hold o' that +rope, and swing himself by it over the edge of a precipice!" + +The energy with which he said this, and the action with which it +was accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back with a deep +groan. As if the very elements sympathized with this man's +sufferings, a low moan came sweeping over the sea. + +"Hist! Ralph," said Bill, opening his eves; "there's a squall +coming, lad. Look alive, boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the +main-sail peak. Them squalls come quick sometimes." + +I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall was +indeed bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my notice, +owing to my being so much engrossed by our conversation. I +instantly did as Bill desired, for the schooner was still lying +motionless on the glassy sea. I observed with some satisfaction +that the squall was bearing down on the larboard bow, so that it +would strike the vessel in the position in which she would be best +able to stand the shock. Having done my best to shorten sail, I +returned aft, and took my stand at the helm. + +"Now, boy," said Bill, in a faint voice, "keep her close to the +wind." + +A few seconds afterwards he said, "Ralph, let me hear those two +texts again." + +I repeated them. + +"Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?" + +"Quite sure," I replied. + +Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon us, +and the spray dashed over our decks. For a time the schooner stood +it bravely, and sprang forward against the rising sea like a war- +horse. Meanwhile clouds darkened the sky, and the sea began to +rise in huge billows. There was still too much sail on the +schooner, and, as the gale increased, I feared that the masts would +be torn out of her or carried away, while the wind whistled and +shrieked through the strained rigging. Suddenly the wind shifted a +point, a heavy sea struck us on the bow, and the schooner was +almost laid on her beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my +legs. At the same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin +which had served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence +against the sky-light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I +could see that the shock had rendered him insensible, but I did not +dare to quit the tiller for an instant, as it required all my +faculties, bodily and mental, to manage the schooner. For an hour +the blast drove us along, while, owing to the sharpness of the +vessel's bow and the press of canvass, she dashed through the waves +instead of breasting over them, thereby drenching the decks with +water fore and aft. At the end of that time the squall passed +away, and left us rocking on the bosom of the agitated sea. + +My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise Bill +from the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran below for the +brandy bottle and rubbed his face and hands with it, and +endeavoured to pour a little down his throat. But my efforts, +although I continued them long and assiduously, were of no avail; +as I let go the hand which I had been chafing it fell heavily on +the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, and sat for some time +quite motionless, but there was no flutter there - the pirate was +dead! + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + + +Alone on the deep - Necessity the mother of invention - A valuable +book discovered - Natural phenomenon - A bright day in my history. + + +IT was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I now +seated myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid +features of my late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past +history and contemplated with anxiety my present position. Alone! +in the midst of the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect knowledge +of navigation, and in a schooner requiring at least eight men as +her proper crew. But I will not tax the reader's patience with a +minute detail of my feelings and doings during the first few days +that followed the death of my companion. I will merely mention +that I tied a cannon ball to his feet and, with feelings of the +deepest sorrow, consigned him to the deep. + +For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the east, +and, as my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid progress +towards my destination. I could not take an observation, which I +very much regretted, as the captain's quadrant was in the cabin; +but, from the day of setting sail from the island of the savages, I +had kept a dead reckoning, and as I knew pretty well now how much +lee-way the schooner made, I hoped to hit the Coral Island without +much difficulty. In this I was the more confident that I knew its +position on the chart (which I understood was a very good one), and +so had its correct bearings by compass. + +As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had got +into the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting the +top-sails. This was a most arduous task, and my first attempts +were complete failures, owing, in a great degree, to my +reprehensible ignorance of mechanical forces. The first error I +made was in applying my apparatus of blocks and pulleys to a rope +which was too weak, so that the very first heave I made broke it in +two, and sent me staggering against the after-hatch, over which I +tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, tumbled down the +companion ladder into the cabin. I was much bruised and somewhat +stunned by this untoward accident. However, I considered it +fortunate that I was not killed. In my next attempt I made sure of +not coming by a similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and +fitted up larger blocks and ropes. But although the principle on +which I acted was quite correct, the machinery was now so massive +and heavy that the mere friction and stiffness of the thick cordage +prevented me from moving it at all. Afterwards, however, I came to +proportion things more correctly; but I could not avoid reflecting +at the time how much better it would have been had I learned all +this from observation and study, instead of waiting till I was +forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious lessons of +experience. + +After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it took +me the greater part of a day to hoist the main-top sail. As I +could not steer and work at this at the same time, I lashed the +helm in such a position that, with a little watching now and then, +it kept the schooner in her proper course. By this means I was +enabled also to go about the deck and down below for things that I +wanted, as occasion required; also to cook and eat my victuals. +But I did not dare to trust to this plan during the three hours of +rest that I allowed myself at night, as the wind might have +shifted, in which case I should have been blown far out of my +course ere I awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to +during those three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails +in such a position as that by acting against each other, they would +keep the ship stationary. After my night's rest, therefore, I had +only to make allowance for the lee-way she had made, and so resume +my course. + +Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall should +come, but I made the best provision I could in the circumstances, +and concluded that by letting go the weather-braces of the top- +sails and the top-sail halyards at the same time, I should thereby +render these sails almost powerless. Besides this, I proposed to +myself to keep a sharp look-out on the barometer in the cabin, and +if I observed at any time a sudden fall in it, I resolved that I +would instantly set about my multiform appliances for reducing +sail, so as to avoid being taken at unawares. Thus I sailed +prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I calculated +I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the thought of which +my heart bounded with joyful expectation. + +The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a +volume of Captain Cook's voyages. This, I suppose, the pirate +captain had brought with him in order to guide him, and to furnish +him with information regarding the islands of these seas. I found +this a most delightful book indeed, and I not only obtained much +interesting knowledge about the sea in which I was sailing, but I +had many of my own opinions, derived from experience, corroborated; +and not a few of them corrected. Besides the reading of this +charming book, and the daily routine of occupations, nothing of +particular note happened to me during this voyage, except once, +when on rising one night, after my three hours' nap, while it was +yet dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating +in what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often noticed the +beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but this far exceeded +anything of the sort I ever saw before. The whole sea appeared +somewhat like milk and was remarkably luminous. + +I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, brought +some of the water on board and took it down to the cabin to examine +it; but no sooner did I approach the light than the strange +appearance disappeared, and when I removed the cabin lamp the +luminous light appeared again. I was much puzzled with this, and +took up a little of the water in the hollow of my hand and then let +it run off, when I found that the luminous substance was left +behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but when I got there +it was gone. I found, however, that when I went into the dark my +hand shone again; so I took the large glass of the ship's telescope +and examined my hand minutely, when I found that there were on it +one or two small patches of a clear, transparent substance like +jelly, which were so thin as to be almost invisible to the naked +eye. Thus I came to know that the beautiful phosphoric light, +which I had so often admired before, was caused by animals, for I +had no doubt that these were of the same kind as the medusae or +jelly-fish which are seen in all parts of the world. + +On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a nap +into which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I gazed +around me. I was surprised and delighted to see a large albatross +soaring majestically over the ship. I immediately took it into my +head that this was the albatross I had seen at Penguin Island. I +had, of course, no good reason for supposing this, but the idea +occurred to me, I know not why, and I cherished it, and regarded +the bird with as much affection as if he had been an old friend. +He kept me company all that day and left me as night fell. + +Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the helm, +for I had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for day-light, +and peered towards the horizon, where I thought I observed +something like a black cloud against the dark sky. Being always on +the alert for squalls, I ran to the bow. There could be no doubt +it was a squall, and as I listened I thought I heard the murmur of +the coming gale. Instantly I began to work might and main at my +cumbrous tackle for shortening sail, and in the course of an hour +and a half had the most of it reduced, - the top-sail yards down on +the caps, the top-sails clewed up, the sheets hauled in, the main +and fore peaks lowered, and the flying-jib down. While thus +engaged the dawn advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance +ahead in the midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared +for the worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the +bow. I now heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a single +ray of the rising sun gleamed over the ocean I saw - what! could it +be that I was dreaming? - that magnificent breaker with its +ceaseless roar! - that mountain top! - yes, once more I beheld the +Coral Island! + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + + +The effect of a cannon-shot - A happy reunion of a somewhat moist +nature - Retrospects and explanations - An awful dive - New plans - +The last of the Coral Island. + + +I ALMOST fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled emotions +that filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my beautiful +island. It was still many miles away, but sufficiently near to +enable me to trace distinctly the well-remembered outlines of the +two mountains. My first impulse was to utter an exclamation of +gratitude for being carried to my former happy home in safety; my +second, to jump up, clap my hands, shout, and run up and down the +deck, with no other object in view than that of giving vent to my +excited feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, and spent +nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to get +a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again. + +After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now +regretted having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of +hoisting the main-top sail again; but recollecting that it would +take me full half a day to accomplish, and that, at the present +rate of sailing, two hours would bring me to the island, I +immediately dismissed the idea. + +The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish preparations +for arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I remembered that they +were not in the habit of rising before six, and, as it was now only +three, I hoped to arrive before they were awake. Moreover, I set +about making ready to let go the anchor, resolving in my own mind +that, as I knew the depth of water in the passage of the reef and +within the lagoon, I would run the schooner in and bring up +opposite the bower. Fortunately the anchor was hanging at the cat- +head, otherwise I should never have been able to use it. Now, I +had only to cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own weight. +After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a thought +struck me. I went to the powder magazine, brought up a blank +cartridge and loaded the big brass gun, which, it will be +remembered, was unhoused when we set sail, and, as I had no means +of housing it, there it had stood, bristling alike at fair weather +and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its mouth well, +and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust the poker +into the fire. + +All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was blowing, so that +I was now not more than quarter of a mile from the reef. I was +soon at the entrance, and, as the schooner glided quietly through, +I glanced affectionately at the huge breaker, as if it had been the +same one I had seen there when I bade adieu, as I feared for ever, +to the island. On coming opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm +hard down. The schooner came round with a rapid, graceful bend, +and lost way just opposite the bower. Running forward, I let go +the anchor, caught up the red-hot poker, applied it to the brass +gun, and the mountains with a BANG, such as had only once before +broke their slumbering echoes! + +Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to the +bang with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the bower, +in scanty costume, his eye-balls starting from his head with +surprise and terror. One gaze he gave, one yell, and then fled +into the bushes like a wild cat. The next moment Jack went through +exactly the same performance, the only difference being, that his +movements were less like those of Jack-in-the-box, though not less +vigorous and rapid than those of Peterkin. + +"Hallo!" I shouted, almost mad with joy, "what, ho! Peterkin! +Jack! hallo! it's me!" + +My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted and turned +round, and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that they +recognised my voice, by both of them running at full speed towards +the beach. I could no longer contain myself. Throwing off my +jacket, I jumped overboard at the same moment that Jack bounded +into the sea. In another moment we met in deep water, clasped each +other round the neck, and sank, as a matter of course, to the +bottom! We were well-nigh choked, and instantly struggled to the +surface, where Peterkin was spluttering about like a wounded duck, +laughing and crying by turns, and choking himself with salt water! + +It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, an +adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on the +beach, as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in our +dripping garments, and giving utterance to incoherent rhapsodies, +mingled with wild shouts. It can be more easily imagined than +described, so I will draw a curtain over this part of my history, +and carry the reader forward over an interval of three days. + +During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing but +roast pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, +plums, potatoes, and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack +the terrible and wonderful adventures I had gone through since we +last met. After I had finished the account, they made me go all +over it again; and, when I had concluded the second recital, I had +to go over it again, while they commented upon it piecemeal. They +were much affected by what I told them of the probable fate of +Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook the idea of the poor +girl being converted into a LONG PIG! As for Jack, he clenched his +teeth, and shook his fist towards the sea, saying at the same time, +that he was sorry he had not broken Tararo's head, and he only +hoped that one day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the +bridge of that chief's nose! After they had "pumped me dry," as +Peterkin said, I begged to be informed of what had happened to them +during my long absence, and particularly as to how they got out of +the Diamond Cave. + +"Well, you must know," began Jack, "after you had dived out of the +cave, on the day you were taken away from us, we waited very +patiently for half an hour, not expecting you to return before the +end of that time. Then we began to upbraid you for staying so +long, when you knew we would be anxious; but when an hour passed, +we became alarmed, and I resolved at all hazards to dive out, and +see what had become of you, although I felt for poor Peterkin, +because, as he truly said, 'If you never come back, I'm shut up +here for life.' However, I promised not to run any risk, and he +let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of him!" + +"I should just think it was!" interrupted Peterkin, looking at Jack +over the edge of a monstrous potato which he happened to be +devouring at the time. + +"Well," continued Jack, "you may guess my consternation when you +did not answer to my halloo. At first I imagined that the pirates +must have killed you, and left you in the bush, or thrown you into +the sea; then it occurred to me that this would have served no end +of theirs, so I came to the conclusion that they must have carried +you away with them. As this thought struck me, I observed the +pirate schooner standing away to the nor'ard, almost hull-down on +the horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to watch her as she slowly +sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my boy, that I shed +more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I verify +believe, all my life before - " + +"Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting," said Peterkin; "surely you +must be mistaken in that; you've often told me that, when you were +a baby, you used to howl and roar from morning to - " + +"Hold your tongue, Peterkin," cried Jack. "Well, after the +schooner had disappeared, I dived back into the cave, much to +Peterkin's relief, and told him what I had seen. We sat down and +had a long talk over this matter, and then we agreed to make a +regular, systematic search through the woods, so as to make sure, +at least, that you had not been killed. But now we thought of the +difficulty of getting out of the cave without your help. Peterkin +became dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; and I must +confess that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not hope +alone to take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him +in; and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with +him that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt water. +However, there was no help for it, and I endeavoured to calm his +fears as well as I could: 'for,' said I, 'you can't live here, +Peterkin;' to which he replied, 'Of course not, Jack, I can only +die here, and, as that's not at all desirable, you had better +propose something.' So I suggested that he should take a good long +breath, and trust himself to me. + +"'Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut cloth, into which I +could shove my head, and tie it tight round my neck?' he asked, +with a haggard smile. 'It might let me get one breath under +water!' + +"'No use,' said I; 'it would fill in a moment and suffocate you. I +see nothing for it, Peterkin, if you really can't keep your breath +so long, but to let me knock you down, and carry you out while in a +state of insensibility.' + +"But Peterkin didn't relish this idea. He seemed to fear that I +could not be able to measure the exact force of the blow, and +might, on the one hand, hit him so softly as to render a second or +third blow necessary, which would be very uncomfortable; or, on the +other hand, give him such a smash as would entirely spoil his +figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the life out of him altogether! At +last I got him persuaded to try to hold his breath, and commit +himself to me; so he agreed, and down we went. But I had not got +him half way through, when he began to struggle and kick like a +wild bull, burst from my grasp, and hit against the roof of the +tunnel. I was therefore, obliged to force him violently back into +the cave gain, where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he +had lost his presence of mind, and - " + +"Nothing of the sort," cried Peterkin, indignantly, "I had only +lost my wind; and if I had not had presence of mind enough to kick +as I did, I should have bu'st in your arms!" + +"Well, well, so be it," resumed Jack, with a smile, "but the upshot +of it was, that we had to hold another consultation on the point, +and I really believe that, had it not been for a happy thought of +mine, we should have been consulting there yet." + +"I wish we had," again interrupted Peterkin with a sigh. "I'm +sure, Ralph, if I had thought that you were coming back again, I +would willingly have awaited your return for months, rather than +have endured the mental agony which I went through! But proceed." + +"The thought was this," continued Jack, "that I should tie +Peterkin's hands and feet with cords, and then lash him firmly to a +stout pole about five feet long, in order to render him quite +powerless, and keep him straight and stiff. You should have seen +his face of horror, Ralph, when I suggested this: but he came to +see that it was his only chance, and told me to set about it as +fast as I could; 'for,' said he, 'this is no jokin', Jack, I can +tell you, and the sooner it's done the better.' I soon procured +the cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to the cave, +and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, to +say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English mummy +would be, if there were such things, for he was as white as a dead +man." + +"'Now,' said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, 'swim with me as near +to the edge of the hole as you can before you dive, then let me +take a long breath, and, as I sha'nt be able to speak after I've +taken it, you'll watch my face, and the moment you see me wink - +dive! And oh!' he added, earnestly, 'pray don't be long!' + +"I promised to pay the strictest attention to his wishes, and swam +with him to the outlet of the cave. Here I paused. 'Now then,' +said I, 'pull away at the wind, lad.'" + +Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help thinking of +the frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as big as the +ox. Then I looked into his face earnestly. Slap went the lid of +his right eye; down went my head, and up went my heels. We shot +through the passage like an arrow, and rose to the surface of the +open sea before you could count twenty! + +"Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, on reaching +the free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough to have been +heard a mile off, and then, the change in his feelings was so +sudden and great, that he did not wait till we landed, but began, +tied up as he was, to shout and sing for joy as I supported him +with my left arm to the shore. However, in the middle of a laugh +that a hyaena might have envied, I let him accidentally slip, which +extinguished him in a moment. + +"After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our search for +your dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low our hearts sank +as we set off, day after day, to examine the valleys and mountain +sides with the utmost care. In about three weeks we completed the +survey of the whole island, and had at least the satisfaction of +knowing that you had not been killed. But it occurred to us that +you might have been thrown into the sea, so we examined the sands +and the lagoon carefully, and afterwards went all round the outer +reef. One day, while we were upon the reef, Peterkin espied a +small dark object lying among the rocks, which seemed to be quite +different from the surrounding stones. We hastened towards the +spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking out the head we +discovered that it was gunpowder." + +"It was I who sent you that, Jack," said I, with a smile. + +"Fork out!" cried Peterkin, energetically, starting to his feet and +extending his open hand to Jack. "Down with the money, sir, else +I'll have you shut up for life in a debtor's prison the moment we +return to England!" + +"I'll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime," returned Jack, laughing, +"so sit down and be quiet. The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered +this keg of powder, Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a +thousand pounds that you had something to do with it, and I took +him a bet of ten thousand that you had not. + +"Peterkin was right then," said I, explaining how the thing had +occurred. + +"Well, we found it very useful," continued Jack; "although some of +it had got a little damp; and we furbished up the old pistol, with +which Peterkin is a crack shot now. But, to continue. We did not +find any other vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up +all hope of ever seeing you again. After this the island became a +dreary place to us, and we began to long for a ship to heave in +sight and take us off. But now that you're back again, my dear +fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful as it used to do, and I +love it as much as ever." + +"And now," continued Jack, "I have a great desire to visit some of +the other islands of the South Seas. Here we have a first-rate +schooner at our disposal, so I don't see what should hinder us." + +"Just the very thing I was going to propose," cried Peterkin; "I +vote for starting at once." + +"Well, then," said Jack, "it seems to me that we could not do +better than shape our course for the island on which Avatea lives, +and endeavour to persuade Tararo to let her marry the black fellow +to whom she is engaged, instead of making a long pig of her. If he +has a spark of gratitude in him he'll do it. Besides, having +become champions for this girl once before, it behoves us, as true +knights, not to rest until we set her free; at least, all the +heroes in all the story-books I have ever read would count it foul +disgrace to leave such a work unfinished." + +"I'm sure I don't know, or care, what your knights in story-books +would do," said Peterkin, "but I'm certain that it would be capital +fun, so I'm your man whenever you want me." + +This plan of Jack's was quite in accordance with his romantic, +impulsive nature; and, having made up his mind to save this black +girl, he could not rest until the thing was commenced. + +"But there may be great danger in this attempt," he said, at the +end of a long consultation on the subject; "will you, lads, go with +me in spite of this?" + +"Go with you?" we repeated in the same breath. + +"Can you doubt it?" said I. + +"For a moment," added Peterkin. + +I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on this +enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit the +island; and as the schooner was well laden with stores of every +kind for a long cruise, we had little to do except to add to our +abundant supply a quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, taro, yams, +plums, and potatoes, chiefly with the view of carrying the +fragrance of our dear island along with us as long as we could. + +When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different +familiar spots where most of our time had been spent. We ascended +the mountain top, and gazed for the last time at the rich green +foliage in the valleys, the white sandy beach, the placid lagoon, +and the barrier coral-reef with its crested breakers. Then we +descended to Spouting Cliff, and looked down at the pale-green +monster which we had made such fruitless efforts to spear in days +gone by. From this we hurried to the Water Garden and took a last +dive into its clear waters, and a last gambol amongst its coral +groves. I hurried out before my companions, and dressed in haste, +in order to have a long examination of my tank, which Peterkin, in +the fulness of his heart, had tended with the utmost care, as being +a vivid remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition; - the water as clear and +pellucid as crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the most +brilliant hues; the red, purple, yellow, green, and striped +anemones fully expanded, and stretching out their arms as if to +welcome and embrace their former master; the starfish, zoophytes, +sea-pens, and other innumerable marine insects, looking fresh and +beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, looking as wide awake, +impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It was indeed so +lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow myself to be +torn away from it. + +Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few +articles we possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the broken +telescope, the pen-knife, the hook made from the brass ring, and +the sail-needle, with which we had landed on the island; - also, +the long boots and the pistol, besides several curious articles of +costume which we had manufactured from time to time. + +These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having carved +our names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:- + + +JACK MARTIN, +RALPH ROVER, +PETERKIN GAY, + + +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then hoisted +on board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation cost us +great labour and much time, as the anchor was so heavy that we +could not move it without the aid of my complex machinery of blocks +and pulleys. A steady breeze was blowing off shore when we set +sail, at a little before sunset. It swept us quickly past the reef +and out to sea. The shore grew rapidly more indistinct as the +shades of evening fell, while our clipper bark bounded lightly over +the waves. Slowly the mountain top sank on the horizon, until it +became a mere speck. In another moment the sun and the Coral +Island sank together into the broad bosom of the Pacific. + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + + +The voyage - The island, and a consultation in which danger is +scouted as a thing unworthy of consideration - Rats and cats - The +native teacher - Awful revelations - Wonderful effects of +Christianity. + + +OUR voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and +prosperous. The breeze continued generally fair, and at all times +enabled us to lie our course; for being, as I have said before, +clipper-built, the pirate schooner could lie very close to the +wind, and made little lee-way. We had no difficulty now in +managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and powerful, while Peterkin +was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were a very +insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had proposed to +us to make such a voyage in it before we had been forced to go +through so many hardships from necessity, we would have turned away +with pity from the individual making such proposal as from a +madman. I pondered this a good deal, and at last concluded that +men do not know how much they are capable of doing till they try, +and that we should never give way to despair in any undertaking, +however difficult it may seem:- always supposing, however, that our +cause is a good one, and that we can ask the divine blessing on it. + +Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in +some things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth +arrangement of ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor's eye, a +very lumbering and clumsy appearance. But I will not drag my +reader through the details of this voyage. Suffice it to say, +that, after an agreeable sail of about three weeks, we arrived off +the island of Mango, which I recognised at once from the +description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it during one of +our conversations. + +As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and held +a council of war. + +"Now, boys," said Jack, as we seated ourselves beside him on the +cabin sky-light, "before we go farther in this business, we must go +over the pros and cons of it; for, although you have so generously +consented to stick by me through thick and thin, it would be unfair +did I not see that you thoroughly understand the danger of what we +are about to attempt." + +"Oh! bother the danger," cried Peterkin; "I wonder to hear YOU, +Jack, talk of danger. When a fellow begins to talk about it, he'll +soon come to magnify it to such a degree that he'll not be fit to +face it when it comes, no more than a suckin' baby!" + +"Nay, Peterkin," replied Jack, gravely, "I won't be jested out of +it. I grant you, that, when we've once resolved to act, and have +made up our minds what to do, we should think no more of danger. +But, before we have so resolved, it behoves us to look at it +straight in the face, and examine into it, and walk round it; for +if we flinch at a distant view, we're sure to run away when the +danger is near. Now, I understand from you, Ralph, that the island +is inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out cannibals, whose +principal law is - 'Might is right, and the weakest goes to the +wall?'" + +"Yes," said I, "so Bill gave me to understand. He told me, +however, that, at the southern side of it, the missionaries had +obtained a footing amongst an insignificant tribe. A native +teacher had been sent there by the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in +persuading the chief at that part to embrace Christianity. But +instead of that being of any advantage to our enterprise, it seems +the very reverse; for the chief Tararo is a determined heathen, and +persecutes the Christians, - who are far too weak in numbers to +offer any resistance, - and looks with dislike upon all white men, +whom he regards as propagators of the new faith." + +"'Tis a pity," said Jack, "that the Christian tribe is so small, +for we shall scarcely be safe under their protection, I fear. If +Tararo takes it into his head to wish for our vessel, or to kill +ourselves, he could take us from them by force. You say that the +native missionary talks English?" + +"So I believe." + +"Then, what I propose is this," said Jack: "We will run round to +the south side of the island, and cut anchor off the Christian +village. We are too far away just now to have been descried by any +of the savages, so we shall get there unobserved, and have time to +arrange our plans before the heathen tribes know of our presence. +But, in doing this, we run the risk of being captured by the ill- +disposed tribes, and being very ill used, if not - a - " + +"Roasted alive and eaten," cried Peterkin. "Come, out with it, +Jack; according to your own showing, it's well to look the danger +straight in the face!" + +"Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you prepared, then, +to take your chance of that?" + +"I've been prepared and had my mind made up long ago," cried +Peterkin, swaggering about the deck with his hands thrust into his +breeches' pockets. "The fact is, Jack, I don't believe that Tararo +will be so ungrateful as to eat us; and I'm, quite sure that he'll +be too happy to grant us whatever we ask: so the sooner we go in +and win the better." + +Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage gratitude, +as the sequel will show. + +The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a long +run to the south'ard, we put about and beat up for the south side +of Mango, where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to off the coral +reef. Here we awaited the arrival of a canoe, which immediately +put off on our rounding to. When it arrived, a mild-looking +native, of apparently forty years of age, came on board, and, +taking off his straw hat, made us a low bow. He was clad in a +respectable suit of European clothes; and the first words he +uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and shook hands with him, were, - + +"Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at Mango - you are +heartily welcome." + +After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, "You must be the +native missionary teacher of whom I have heard - are you not?" + +"I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord Jesus at this +station." + +"You're the very man I want to see, then," replied Jack; "that's +lucky. Come down to the cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. +I wish particularly to speak with you. My men there" (pointing to +Peterkin and me) "will look after your people." + +"Thank you," said the teacher, as he followed Jack to the cabin, "I +do not drink wine or any strong drink." + +"Oh! then, there's lots of water, and you can have biscuit." + +"Now, 'pon my word, that's cool!" said Peterkin; "his MEN, +forsooth! Well, since we are to be men, we may as well come it as +strong over these black chaps as we can. Hallo, there!" he cried +to the half dozen of natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in +wonder at all they saw, "here's for you;" and he handed them a tray +of broken biscuit and a can of water. Then, thrusting his hands +into his pockets, he walked up and down the deck with an enormous +swagger, whistling vociferously. + +In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and the +latter, bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe and +paddled to the shore. When he was gone, Peterkin stepped up to +Jack, and, touching his cap, said, - + +"Well, captain, have you any communications to make to your MEN?" + +"Yes," cried Jack; "ready about, mind the helm and clew up your +tongue, while I con the schooner through the passage in the reef. +The teacher, who seems a first-rate fellow, says it's quite deep, +and good anchorage within the lagoon close to the shore." + +While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under a +light breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the +island, living amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a +strong desire to join the Christians, but Tararo would not let her, +and kept her constantly in close confinement. + +"Moreover," continued Jack, "I find that she belongs to one of the +Samoan Islands, where Christianity had been introduced long before +her capture by the heathens of a neighbouring island; and the very +day after she was taken, she was to have joined the church which +had been planted there by that excellent body, the London +Missionary Society. The teacher tells me, too, that the poor girl +has fallen in love with a Christian chief, who lives on an island +some fifty miles or so to the south of this one, and that she is +meditating a desperate attempt at escape. So, you see, we have +come in the nick of time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow +whom you heard of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, +the heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there's to be +a battle fought the day after to-morrow, in which the principal +leader is Tararo; so that we'll not be able to commence our +negotiations with the rascally chief till the day after." + +The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at the +head of a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every +description peculiar to the tropics rose in the richest luxuriance +to the summit of a hilly ridge, which was the line of demarcation +between the possessions of the Christians and those of the +neighbouring heathen chief. + +The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, +stretching in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. The +cottages stood several hundred yards from the beach, and were +protected from the glare of the sea by the rich foliage of rows of +large Barringtonia and other trees, which girt the shore. The +village was about a mile in length, and perfectly straight, with a +wide road down the middle, on either side of which were rows of the +tufted-topped ti tree, whose delicate and beautiful blossoms, +hanging beneath their plume-crested tops, added richness to the +scene. The cottages of the natives were built beneath these trees, +and were kept in the most excellent order, each having a little +garden in front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks +were covered with black and white pebbles. + +Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly with +lamp black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red ochre, +which contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime that +covered the walls. On a prominent position stood a handsome +church, which was quite a curiosity in its way. It was a hundred +feet long by fifty broad, and was seated throughout to accommodate +upwards of two thousand persons. It had six large folding doors +and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, although a large and +substantial edifice, it had been built, we were told by the +teacher, in the space of two months! There was not a single iron +nail in the fabric, and the natives had constructed it chiefly with +their stone and bone axes and other tools, having only one or two +axes or tools of European manufacture. Everything around this +beautiful spot wore an aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we +dropped our anchor within a stone's cast of the substantial coral +wharf, I could not avoid contrasting it with the wretched village +of Emo, where I had witnessed so many frightful scenes. When the +teacher afterwards told me that the people of this tribe had become +converts only a year previous to our arrival, and that they had +been living before that in the practice of the most bloody system +of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, "What a +convincing proof that Christianity is of God!" + +On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm +welcome by the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a +native, clothed in a simple European gown and straw bonnet. The +shore was lined with hundreds of natives, whose persons were all +more or less clothed with native cloth. Some of the men had on a +kind of poncho formed of this cloth, their legs being uncovered. +Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and no upper garment +except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of the dresses, both of +women and men, were grotesque enough, being very bad imitations of +the European garb; but all wore a dress of some sort or other. +They seemed very glad to see us, and crowded round us as the +teacher led the way to his dwelling, where we were entertained, in +the most sumptuous manner, on baked pig and all the varieties of +fruits and vegetables that the island produced. We were much +annoyed, however, by the rats: they seemed to run about the house +like domestic animals. As we sat at table, one of them peeped up +at us over the edge of the cloth, close to Peterkin's elbow, who +floored it with a blow on the snout from his knife, exclaiming as +he did so - + +"I say, Mister Teacher, why don't you set traps for these brutes? - +surely you are not fond of them!" + +"No," replied the teacher, with a smile; "we would be glad to get +rid of them if we could; but if we were to trap all the rats on the +island, it would occupy our whole time." + +"Are they, then, so numerous?" inquired Jack. + +"They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the north side eat +them, and think them very sweet. So did my people formerly; but +they do not eat so many now, because the missionary who was last +here expressed disgust at it. The poor people asked if it was +wrong to eat rats; and he told them that it was certainly not +wrong, but that the people of England would be much disgusted were +they asked to eat rats." + +We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man when +we were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their +numbers, for the rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during +our meal, two men were stationed at the table to keep them off! + +"What a pity you have no cats," said Peterkin, as he aimed a blow +at another reckless intruder, and missed it. + +"We would, indeed, be glad to have a few," rejoined the teacher, +"but they are difficult to be got. The hogs, we find, are very +good rat-killers, but they do not seem to be able to keep the +numbers down. I have heard that they are better than cats." + +As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was wrinkled +with a smile of merriment. Observing that I had noticed it, he +said:- + +"I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the first cat that +was taken to Raratonga. This is one of the stations of the London +Missionary Society. It, like our own, is infested with rats, and a +cat was brought at last to the island. It was a large black one. +On being turned loose, instead of being content to stay among men, +the cat took to the mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes +paying visits during the night to the houses of the natives; some +of whom, living at a distance from the settlement, had not heard of +the cat's arrival, and were dreadfully frightened in consequence, +calling it a 'monster of the deep,' and flying in terror away from +it. One night the cat, feeling a desire for company, I suppose, +took its way to the house of a chief, who had recently been +converted to Christianity, and had begun to learn to read and pray. +The chief's wife, who was sitting awake at his side while he slept, +beheld with horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard +with surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, she +awoke her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his old +religion, and burning his god, who, she declared, was now come to +be avenged of them. 'Get up and pray! get up and pray!' she cried. +The chief arose, and, on opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring +lights, and heard the same ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme +urgency of the case, he commenced, with all possible vehemence, to +vociferate the alphabet, as a prayer to God to deliver them from +the vengeance of Satan! On hearing this, the cat, as much alarmed +as themselves, fled precipitately away, leaving the chief and his +wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy of their prayer." + +We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher related +in English so good, that we certainly could not have supposed him a +native but for the colour of his face and the foreign accent in his +tone. Next day we walked out with this interesting man, and were +much entertained and instructed by his conversation, as we rambled +through the cool shady groves of bananas, citrons, limes, and other +trees, or sauntered among the cottages of the natives, and watched +them while they laboured diligently in the taro beds, or +manufactured the tapa or native cloth. To some of these Jack put +questions through the medium of the missionary; and the replies +were such as to surprise us at the extent of their knowledge. +Indeed, Peterkin very truly remarked that "they seemed to know a +considerable deal more than Jack himself!" + +Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained was +the following, in regard to coral formations:- + +"The islands of the Pacific," said our friend, "are of three +different kinds or classes. Those of the first class are volcanic, +mountainous, and wild; some shooting their jagged peaks into the +clouds at an elevation of ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of +the second class are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height +from one hundred to five hundred feet. The hills on these are not +so wild or broken as those of the first class, but are richly +clothed with vegetation, and very beautiful. I have no doubt that +the Coral Island on which you were wrecked was one of this class. +They are supposed to have been upheaved from the bottom of the sea +by volcanic agency, but they are not themselves volcanic in their +nature, neither are they of coral formation. Those of the third +class are the low coralline islands usually having lagoons of water +in their midst; they are very numerous. + +"As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are formed; +there are various opinions on this point. I will give you what +seems to me the most probable theory, - a theory, I may add, which +is held by some of the good and scientific missionaries. It is +well known that there is much lime in salt water; it is also known +that coral is composed of lime. It is supposed that the polypes, +or coral insects, have the power of attracting this lime to their +bodies; and with this material they build their little cells or +habitations. They choose the summit of a volcano, or the top of a +submarine mountain, as a foundation on which to build; for it is +found that they never work at any great depth below the surface. +On this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, +reach the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the +top sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus +forming the coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the +central island; after that the insects within the lagoon cease +working. When the surface of the water is reached, these myriads +of wonderful creatures die. Then birds visit the spot, and seeds +are thus conveyed thither, which take root, and spring up, and +flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline islets of which you +have seen so many in these seas. The reefs round the large islands +are formed in a similar manner. When we consider," added the +missionary, "the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we +are filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient king +to exclaim, 'How manifold, O God, are thy works! in wisdom thou +hast made them all.'" + +We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, and +felt not a little gratified to find that the opinions which Jack +and I had been led to form from personal observation on our Coral +Island were thus to a great extent corroborated. + +The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: "When +missionaries were first sent here, three years ago, a small vessel +brought them; and the chief, who is now dead, promised to treat +well the two native teachers who were left with their wives on the +island. But scarcely had the boat which landed them returned to +the ship, than the natives began to maltreat their guests, taking +away all they possessed, and offering them further violence, so +that, when the boat was sent in haste to fetch them away, the +clothes of both men and women were torn nearly off their backs. + +"Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and I, being +in her, volunteered to land alone, without any goods whatever; +begging that my wife might be brought to me the following year, - +that is, THIS year; and, as you see, she is with me. But the surf +was so high that the boat could not land me; so with nothing on but +my trousers and shirt, and with a few catechisms and a Bible, +besides some portions of the Scripture translated into the Mango +tongue, I sprang into the sea, and swam ashore on the crest of a +breaker. I was instantly dragged up the beach by the natives; who, +on finding I had nothing worth having upon me, let me alone. I +then made signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which they +did. At fist the natives listened to me in silence, but laughed at +what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed Saviour +Jesus Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me ill sometimes; +but I persevered, and continued to dwell among them, and dispute, +and exhort them to give up their sinful ways of life, burn their +idols, and come to Jesus. + +"About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief was dead. He +was the father of the present chief, who is now a most consistent +member of the church. It is a custom here that, when a chief dies, +his wives are strangled and buried with him. Knowing this, I +hastened to his house to endeavour to prevent such cruelty if +possible. When I arrived, I found two of the wives had already +been killed, while another was in the act of being strangled. I +pleaded hard for her, but it was too late; she was already dead. I +then entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, after much +hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she +termed it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which +was accordingly done. + +"All this time the chief's son was walking up and down before his +father's house with a brow black as thunder. When he entered, I +went in with him, and found, to my surprise, that his father was +not dead! The old man was sitting on a mat in a corner, with an +expression of placid resignation on his face. + +"'Why,' said I, 'have you strangled your father's wives before he +is dead?' + +"To this the son replied, 'He is dead. That is no longer my +father. He is as good as dead now. He is to be BURIED ALIVE.' + +"I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among the Feejee +islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or infirm, the +heir to the chieftainship has a right to depose his father; in +which case he is considered as dead, and is buried alive. The +young chief was now about to follow this custom, and, despite my +earnest entreaties and pleadings, the old chief was buried that day +before my eyes in the same grave with his four strangled wives! +Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, and I prayed to God to open +the hearts of these poor creatures, as he had already opened mine, +and pour into them the light and the love of the gospel of Jesus. +My prayer was answered very soon. A week afterwards, the son, who +was now chief of the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on his +shoulders, and groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my +feet, he desired me to burn it! + +"You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I sprang up and +embraced him, while I shed tears of joy. Then we made a fire, and +burned the god to ashes, amid an immense concourse of the people, +who seemed terrified at what was being done, and shrank back when +we burned the god, expecting some signal vengeance to be taken upon +us; but seeing that nothing happened, they changed their minds, and +thought that our God must be the true one after all. From that +time the mission prospered steadily, and now, while there is not a +single man in the tribe who has not burned his household gods, and +become a convert to Christianity, there are not a few, I hope, who +are true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as brands from +the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will not +tell you more of our progress at this time, but you see," he said, +waving his hand around him, "the village and the church did not +exist a year ago!" + +We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could not +help again in my heart praying God to prosper those missionary +societies that send such inestimable blessings to these islands of +dark and bloody idolatry. The teacher also added that the other +tribes were very indignant at this one for having burned its gods, +and threatened to destroy it altogether, but they had done nothing +yet; "and if they should," said the teacher, "the Lord is on our +side; of whom shall we be afraid?" + +"Have the missionaries many stations in these seas?" inquired Jack. + +"Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a great many in the +Tahiti group, and other islands in that quarter. Then the +Wesleyans have the Feejee Islands all to themselves, and the +Americans have many stations in other groups. But still, my +friend, there are hundreds of islands here the natives of which +have never heard of Jesus, or the good word of God, or the Holy +Spirit; and thousands are living and dying in the practice of those +terrible sins and bloody murders of which you have already heard. +I trust, my friends," he added, looking earnestly into our faces, +"I trust that if you ever return to England, you will tell your +Christian friends that the horrors which they hear of in regard to +these islands are LITERALLY TRUE, and that when they have heard the +worst, the 'HALF HAS NOT BEEN TOLD THEM;' for there are perpetrated +here foul deeds of darkness of which man may not speak. You may +also tell them," he said, looking around with a smile, while a tear +of gratitude trembled in his eye and rolled down his coal-black +cheek, - "tell them of the blessings that the gospel has wrought +HERE!" + +We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his +request. On returning towards the village, about noon, we remarked +on the beautiful whiteness of the cottages. + +"That is owing to the lime with which they are plastered," said the +teacher. "When the natives were converted, as I have described, I +set them to work to build cottages for themselves, and also this +handsome church which you see. When the framework and other parts +of the houses were up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the +sea. They brought immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, +and, piling the coral above it, set it on fire. + +"'Look! look!' cried the poor people, in amazement; 'what wonderful +people the Christians are! He is roasting stones. We shall not +need taro or bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!' + +"But their surprise was still greater when the coral was reduced to +a fine soft white powder. They immediately set up a great shout, +and, mingling the lime with water, rubbed their faces and their +bodies all over with it, and ran through the village screaming with +delight. They were also much surprised at another thing they saw +me do. I wished to make some household furniture, and constructed +a turning-lathe to assist me. The first thing that I turned was +the leg of a sofa; which was no sooner finished than the chief +seized it with wonder and delight, and ran through the village +exhibiting it to the people, who looked upon it with great +admiration. The chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round +his neck as an ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen +it before he became a Christian he would have made it his god!" + +As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his door. Saying +that he had business to attend to, he left us to amuse ourselves as +we best could. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, turning abruptly towards us, and buttoning +up his jacket as he spoke, "I'm off to see the battle. I've no +particular fondness for seein' blood-shed, but I must find out the +nature o' these fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so +that I may be able to speak of it again, if need be, +authoritatively. It's only six miles off, and we don't run much +more risk than that of getting a rap with a stray stone or an over- +shot arrow. Will you go?" + +"To be sure we will," said Peterkin. + +"If they chance to see us we'll cut and run for it," added Jack. + +"Dear me!" cried Peterkin, - "YOU run! thought you would scorn to +run from any one." + +"So I would, if it were my duty to fight," returned Jack, coolly; +"but as I don't want to fight, and don't intend to fight, if they +offer to attack us I'll run away like the veriest coward that ever +went by the name of Peterkin. So come along." + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + + +A strange and bloody battle - The lion bearded in his den - +Frightful scenes of cruelty, and fears for the future. + + +WE had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot on +which the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two hours +reached it. The summit of a bare hill was the place chosen; for, +unlike most of the other islanders, who are addicted to bush- +fighting, those of Mango are in the habit of meeting on open +ground. We arrived before the two parties had commenced the deadly +struggle, and, creeping as close up as we dared among the rocks, we +lay and watched them. + +The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in rank +four deep. Those in the first row were armed with long spears; the +second, with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third row was +composed of young men with slings; and the fourth consisted of +women, who carried baskets of stones for the slingers, and clubs +and spears with which to supply the warriors. Soon after we +arrived, the attack was made with great fury. There was no science +displayed. The two bodies of savages rushed headlong upon each +other and engaged in a general MELEE, and a more dreadful set of +men I have never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made of +various substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as +possible; and as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, +shouted, yelled, and dashed each other to the ground, I thought I +had never seen men look so like demons before. + +We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed to +be perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands in +order to defend them. One stout young women we saw, whose husband +was hard pressed and about to be overcome: she lifted a large +stone, and throwing it at his opponent's head, felled him to the +earth. But the battle did not last long. The band most distant +from us gave way and were routed, leaving eighteen of their +comrades dead upon the field. These the victors brained as they +lay; and putting some of their brains on leaves went off with them, +we were afterwards informed, to their temples, to present them to +their gods as an earnest of the human victims who were soon to be +brought there. + +We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the +deepest sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just +witnessed. + +Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we made +preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the teacher +endeavoured to dissuade us. + +"You do not know," said he, turning to Jack, "the danger you run in +venturing amongst these ferocious savages. I feel much pity for +poor Avatea; but you are not likely to succeed in saving her, and +you may die in the attempt." + +"Well," said Jack, quietly, "I am not afraid to die in a good +cause." + +The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and after a +little further conversation agreed to accompany us as interpreter; +saying that, although Tararo was unfriendly to him, he had hitherto +treated him with respect. + +We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail round +the island and drop anchor opposite the heathen village. We manned +her with natives, and hoped to overawe the savages by displaying +our brass gun to advantage. The teacher soon after came on board, +and setting our sails we put to sea. In two hours more we made the +cliffs reverberate with the crash of the big gun, which we fired by +way of salute, while we ran the British ensign up to the peak and +cast anchor. The commotion on shore showed us that we had struck +terror into the hearts of the natives; but seeing that we did not +offer to molest them, a canoe at length put off and paddled +cautiously towards us. The teacher showed himself, and explaining +that we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, desired +the native to go and tell him to come on board. + +We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. During this +time the native teacher conversed with us again, and told us many +things concerning the success of the gospel among those islands; +and perceiving that we were by no means so much gratified as we +ought to have been at the hearing of such good news, he pressed us +more closely in regard to our personal interest in religion, and +exhorted us to consider that our souls were certainly in as great +danger as those of the wretched heathen whom we pitied so much, if +we had not already found salvation in Jesus Christ. "Nay, +further," he added, "if such be your unhappy case, you are, in the +sight of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my young +friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, and +do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have been +brought up in the light of the blessed gospel and call yourselves +Christians. These poor savages are indeed the enemies of our Lord; +but you, if ye be not true believers, are traitors!" + +I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher spoke +in this earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. Peterkin, +too, did not seem to like it, and I thought would willingly have +escaped; but Jack seemed deeply impressed, and wore an anxious +expression on his naturally grave countenance, while he assented to +the teacher's remarks and put to him many earnest questions. +Meanwhile the natives who composed our crew, having nothing +particular to do, had squatted down on the deck and taken out their +little books containing the translated portions of the New +Testament, along with hymns and spelling-books, and were now busily +engaged, some vociferating the alphabet, others learning prayers +off by heart, while a few sang hymns, - all of them being utterly +unmindful of our presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon +afterwards they all engaged in a prayer which was afterwards +translated to us, and proved to be a petition for the success of +our undertaking and for the conversion of the heathen. + +While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and several +savages leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the teacher and +informed him that Tararo could not come on board that day, being +busy with some religious ceremonies before the gods, which could on +no account be postponed. He was also engaged with a friendly chief +who was about to take his departure from the island, and therefore +begged that the teacher and his friends would land and pay a visit +to him. To this the teacher returned answer that we would land +immediately. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, as we were about to step into our little +boat, "I'm not going to take any weapons with me, and I recommend +you to take none either. We are altogether in the power of these +savages, and the utmost we could do, if they were to attack us, +would be to kill a few of them before we were ourselves +overpowered. I think that our only chance of success lies in mild +measures. Don't you think so?" + +To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down a +huge bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair of +enormous horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe the +natives! We then jumped into our boat and rowed ashore. + +On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked savages, +who shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house or shed +where a baked pig and a variety of vegetables were prepared for us. +Having partaken of these, the teacher begged to be conducted to the +chief; but there seemed some hesitation, and after some +consultation among themselves, one of the men stood forward and +spoke to the teacher. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack when the savage had concluded. + +"He says that the chief is just going to the temple of his god and +cannot see us yet; so we must be patient, my friend." + +"Well," cried Jack, rising; "if he won't come to see me, I'll e'en +go and see him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their +proceedings at this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, +friend?" + +"I cannot," said the teacher, shaking his head; "I must not go to +the heathen temples and witness their inhuman rites, except for the +purpose of condemning their wickedness and folly." + +"Very good," returned Jack; "then I'll go alone, for I cannot +condemn their doings till I have seen them." + +Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him +through the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind the +village, on the top of which stood the Bure, or temple, under the +dark shade of a group of iron-wood trees. As we went through the +village, I was again led to contrast the rude huts and sheds, and +their almost naked savage-looking inhabitants, with the natives of +the Christian village, who, to use the teacher's scriptural +expression, were now "clothed and in their right mind." + +As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we were +arrested by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the rear. +Drawing aside into the bushes we awaited their coming up, and as +they drew near we observed that it was a procession of the natives, +many of whom were dancing and gesticulating in the most frantic +manner. They had an exceedingly hideous aspect, owing to the +black, red, and yellow paints with which their faces and naked +bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of these came a band of men +carrying three or four planks, on which were seated in rows upwards +of a dozen men. I shuddered involuntarily as I recollected the +sacrifice of human victims at the island of Emo, and turned with a +look of fear to Jack as I said, - + +"Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are going to commit +some of their cruel practices on these wretched men. We had better +not go to the temple. We shall only be horrified without being +able to do any good, for I fear they are going to kill them." + +Jack's face wore an expression of deep compassion as he said, in a +low voice, "No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of these poor fellows +are over long ago." + +I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, who +were now quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they were +all dead. They were tied firmly with ropes in a sitting posture on +the planks, and seemed, as they bent their sightless eye-balls and +grinning mouths over the dancing crew below, as if they were +laughing in ghastly mockery at the utter inability of their enemies +to hurt them now. These, we discovered afterwards, were the men +who had been slain in the battle of the previous day, and were now +on their way to be first presented to the gods, and then eaten. +Behind these came two men leading between them a third, whose hands +were pinioned behind his back. He walked with a firm step, and +wore a look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him +along; so that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to +receive some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and +children, with whom we mingled and followed to the temple. + +Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall circular +building, open at one side. Around it were strewn heaps of human +bones and skulls. At a table inside sat the priest, an elderly +man, with a long gray beard. He was seated on a stool, and before +him lay several knives, made of wood, bone, and splinters of +bamboo, with which he performed his office of dissecting dead +bodies. Farther in lay a variety of articles that had been +dedicated to the god, and among them were many spears and clubs. I +observed among the latter some with human teeth sticking in them, +where the victims had been clubbed in their mouths. + +Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with vermilion +and soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a man, called a +"dan-vosa" (orator), advanced, and, laying his hands on their +heads, began to chide them, apparently, in a low bantering tone. +What he said we knew not, but, as he went on, he waxed warm, and at +last shouted to them at the top of his lungs, and finally finished +by kicking the bodies over and running away, amid the shouts and +laughter of the people, who now rushed forward. Seizing the bodies +by a leg, or an arm, or by the hair of the head, they dragged them +over stumps and stones and through sloughs, until they were +exhausted. The bodies were then brought back to the temple and +dissected by the priest, after which they were taken out to be +baked. + +Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones were +heated red hot. When ready these were spread out on the ground, +and a thick coating of leaves strewn over them to slack the heat. +On this "lovo," or oven, the bodies were then placed, covered over, +and left to bake. + +The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring hill +or mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house lying +ready to be erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated by +curiosity, we staggered after them mechanically, scarce knowing +where we were going or what we did, and feeling a sort of +impression that all we saw was a dreadful dream. + +Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a certain +spot. We pressed forward and obtained a sight of what they were +doing. A large wooden beam or post lay on the ground, beside the +other parts of the frame-work of the house, and close to the end of +it was a hole about seven feet deep and upwards of two feet wide. +While we looked, the man whom we had before observed with his hands +pinioned, was carried into the circle. His hands were now free, +but his legs were tightly strapped together. The post of the house +was then placed in the hole, and the man put in beside it. His +head was a good way below the surface of the hole, and his arms +were clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until all was +covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards told, +was a CEREMONY usually performed at the dedication of a new temple, +or the erection of a chief's house + +"Come, come," cried Jack, on beholding this horrible tragedy, "we +have seen enough, enough, far more than enough! Let us go." + +Jack's face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we hurried back to +rejoin the teacher, and I have no doubt that he felt terrible +anxiety when he considered the number and ferocity of the savages, +and the weakness of the few arms which were ready indeed to essay, +but impotent to effect, Avatea's deliverance from these ruthless +men. + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + + +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with its +consequences - Plans of escape, and heroic resolves. + + +WHEN we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what had +passed, he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but we +had not sat long in conversation, when we were interrupted by the +arrival of Tararo on the beach, accompanied by a number of +followers bearing baskets of vegetables and fruits on their heads. + +We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our interpreter, +much pleasure in seeing us. + +"And what is it that my friends wish to say to me?" he inquired. + +The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be +spared. + +"Tell him," said Jack, "that I consider that I have a right to ask +this of him, having not only saved the girl's life, but the lives +of his own people also; and say that I wish her to be allowed to +follow her own wishes, and join the Christians." + +While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and we +could see plainly that our request met with no favourable +reception. He replied with considerable energy, and at some +length. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack. + +"I regret to say that he will not listen to the proposal. He says +he has pledged his word to his friend that the girl shall be sent +to him, and a deputy is even now on this island awaiting the +fulfilment of the pledge." + +Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. "Tell Tararo," he exclaimed +with flashing eye, "that if he does not grant my demand, it will be +worse for him. Say I have a big gun on board my schooner that will +blow his village into the sea, if he does not give up the girl." + +"Nay, my friend," said the teacher, gently, "I will not tell him +that; we must overcome evil with good.'" + +"What does my friend say?" inquired the chief, who seemed nettled +by Jack's looks of defiance. + +"He is displeased," replied the teacher. + +Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked towards the +men who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who had now emptied +the whole on the beach in an enormous pile. + +"What are they doing there?" I inquired. + +"I think that they are laying out a gift which they intend to +present to some one," said the teacher. + +At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl +between them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and vegetables, +placed her on the top of it. We started with surprise and fear, +for in the young female before us we recognised the Samoan girl, +Avatea! + +We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming fears. + +"Oh! my dear young friend," whispered the teacher, in a voice of +deep emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, "she is to be made a +sacrifice even now!" + +"Is she?" cried Jack, with a vehement shout, spurning the teacher +aside, and dashing over two natives who stood in his way, while he +rushed towards the heap, sprang up its side, and seized Avatea by +the arm. In another moment he dragged her down, placed her back to +a large tree, and, wrenching a war-club from the hand of a native +who seemed powerless and petrified with surprise, whirled it above +his head, and yelled, rather than shouted, while his face blazed +with fury, "Come on, the whole nation of you, an ye like it, and do +your worst!" + +It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; for +every savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with club and +spear, and, doubtless, would speedily have poured out his brave +blood on the sod, had not the teacher rushed in between them, and, +raising his voice to its utmost, cried. - + +"Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to judge in this +matter. It is for Tararo, the chief, to say whether or not the +young man shall live or die." + +The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the +gratifying acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the +teacher, or some lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack's former +aid in time of need, that influenced Tararo, but he stepped +forward, and, waving his hand, said to his people, - "Desist. The +young man's life is mine." Then, turning to Jack, he said, "You +have forfeited your liberty and life to me. Submit yourself, for +we are more numerous than the sand upon the shore. You are but +one; why should you die?" + +"Villain!" exclaimed Jack, passionately, "I may die, but, +assuredly, I shall not perish alone. I will not submit until you +promise that this girl shall not be injured." + +"You are very bold," replied the chief, haughtily, "but very +foolish. Yet I will say that Avatea shall not be sent away, at +least for three days." + +"You had better accept these terms," whispered the teacher, +entreatingly. "If you persist in this mad defiance, you will be +slain, and Avatea will be lost. Three days are worth having." + +Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing it +moodily to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and hung +down his head in silence. + +Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher to +say that he did not forget his former services, and, therefore, +would leave him free as to his person, but that the schooner would +be detained till he had further considered the matter. + +While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to where +Avatea was standing as possible, without creating suspicion, and +whispered to her a few words in the native language. Avatea, who, +during the whole of the foregoing scene, had stood leaning against +the tree perfectly passive, and seemingly quite uninterested in all +that was going on, replied by a single rapid glance of her dark +eye, which was instantly cast down again on the ground at her feet. + +Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the +teacher on board the schooner. + +On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack threw +himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the teacher +seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his shoulder, +said, - + +"Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God has given us three +days, and we must use the means that are in our power to free this +poor girl from slavery. We must not sit in idle disappointment, we +must act" - + +"Act!" cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing back his hair +wildly; "it is mockery to balk of acting when one is bound hand and +foot. How can I act? I cannot fight a whole nation of savages +single-handed. Yes," he said, with a bitter smile, "I can fight +them, but I cannot conquer them, or save Avatea." + +"Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just now. You +cannot expect that blessing which alone can insure success, unless +you are more submissive. I will tell you my plans if you will +listen." + +"Listen!" cried Jack, eagerly, "of course I will, my good fellow; I +did not know you had any plans. Out with them. I only hope you +will show me how I can get the girl on board of this schooner, and +I'd up anchor and away in no time. But proceed with your plans." + +The teacher smiled sadly: "Ah! my friend, if one fathom of your +anchor chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a thousand warriors +would be standing on your deck. No, no, that could not be done. +Even now, your ship would be taken from you were it not that Tararo +has some feeling of gratitude toward you. But I know Tararo well. +He is a man of falsehood, as all the unconverted savages are. The +chief to whom he has promised this girl is very powerful, and +Tararo MUST fulfil his promise. He has told you that he would do +nothing to the girl for three days; but that is because the party +who are to take her away will not be ready to start for three days. +Still, as he might have made you a prisoner during those three +days, I say that God has given them to us." + +"Well, but what do you propose to do?" said Jack, impatiently. + +"My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I think you +have courage to brave it. It is this: There is an island about +fifty miles to the south of this, the natives of which are +Christians, and have been so for two years or more, and the +principal chief is Avatea's lover. Once there, Avatea would be +safe. Now, I suggest that you should abandon your schooner. Do +you think that you can make so great a sacrifice?" + +"Friend," replied Jack, "when I make up my mind to go through with +a thing of importance, I can make any sacrifice." + +The teacher smiled. "Well, then, the savages could not conceive it +possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would voluntarily lose +your fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies here they think +they have you all safe: so I suggest that we get a quantity of +stores conveyed to a sequestered part of the shore, provide a small +canoe, put Avatea on board, and you three would paddle to the +Christian island." + +"Bravo!" cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing the teacher's +hand. "Missionary, you're a regular brick. I didn't think you had +so much in you." + +"As for me," continued the teacher, "I will remain on board till +they discover that you are gone. Then they will ask me where you +are gone to, and I will refuse to tell." + +"And what'll be the result of that?" inquired Jack. + +"I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; but," he added, looking at +Jack with a peculiar smile, "I too am not afraid to die in a good +cause!" + +"But how are we to get hold of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +"I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular spot, to which +I will guide you to-night. We shall then arrange about it. She +will easily manage to elude her keepers, who are not very strict in +watching her, thinking it impossible that she could escape from the +island. Indeed, I am sure that such an idea will never enter their +heads. But, as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in +a small canoe, on the open sea, is a great voyage to make. You may +miss the island, too, in which case there is no other in that +direction for a hundred miles or more; and if you lose your way and +fall among other heathens, you know the law of Feejee - a cast-away +who gains the shore is doomed to die. You must count the cost, my +young friend." + +"I have counted it," replied Jack. "If Avatea consents to run the +risk, most certainly I will; and so will my comrades also. +Besides," added Jack, looking seriously into the teacher's face, +"your Bible, - OUR Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those who call +on Him in the time of trouble; who holds the winds in his fists and +the waters in the hollow of his hand." + +We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; +collected together such things as we should require, and laid out +on the deck provisions sufficient to maintain us for several weeks, +purposing to load the canoe with as much as she could hold +consistently with speed and safety. These we covered with a +tarpaulin, intending to convey them to the canoe only a few hours +before starting. When night spread her sable curtain over the +scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along with the +natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on our +enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and followed our +sable guide, who led us by a long detour, in order to avoid the +village, to the place of rendezvous. We had not stood more than +five minutes under the gloomy shade of the thick foliage when a +dark figure glided noiselessly up to us. + +"Ah! here you are," said Jack, as Avatea approached. "Now, then, +tell her what we've come about, and don't waste time." + +"I understan' leetl English," said Avatea, in a low voice. + +"Why, where did you pick up English?" exclaimed Jack, in amazement; +"you were dumb as a stone when I saw you last." + +"She has learned all she knows of it from me," said the teacher, +"since she came to the island." + +We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering into +all the details, and concealing none of the danger, so that she +might be fully aware of the risk she ran. As we had anticipated, +she was too glad of the opportunity thus afforded her to escape +from her persecutors to think of the danger or risk. + +"Then you're willing to go with us, are you?" said Jack. + +"Yis, I am willing to go." + +"And you're not afraid to trust yourself out on the deep sea so +far?" + +"No, I not 'fraid to go. Safe with Christian." + +After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it was +time to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having appointed +to meet at the cliff where the canoe lay, on the following night, +just after dark, we hastened away - we to row on board the schooner +with muffled oars - Avatea to glide back to her prison-hut among +the Mango savages. + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + + +The flight - The pursuit - Despair and its results - The lion +bearded in his den again - Awful danger threatened and wonderfully +averted - A terrific storm. + + +AS the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became naturally +very fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and we spent +the whole of the following day in a state of nervous anxiety. We +resolved to go a-shore and ramble about the village, as if to +observe the habits and dwellings of the people, as we thought that +an air of affected indifference to the events of the previous day +would be more likely than any other course of conduct to avert +suspicion as to our intentions. While we were thus occupied, the +teacher remained on board with the Christian natives, whose +powerful voices reached us ever and anon as they engaged in singing +hymns or in prayer. + +At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank into the +sea, and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to which I have +already referred, ended abruptly in a dark night. Hastily throwing +a few blankets into our little boat, we stepped into it, and, +whispering farewell to the natives in the schooner, rowed gently +over the lagoon, taking care to keep as near to the beach as +possible. We rowed in the utmost silence and with muffled oars, so +that had any one observed us at the distance of a few yards, he +might have almost taken us for a phantom-boat or a shadow on the +dark water. Not a breath of air was stirring; but fortunately the +gentle ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with the soft roar +of the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the slight +plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars. + +Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging cliff +under whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow in the +water ready to be launched, and most of her cargo already stowed +away. As the keel of our little boat grated on the sand, a hand +was laid upon the bow, and a dim form was seen. + +"Ha!" said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped upon the beach, "is +that you, Avatea?" + +"Yis, it am me," was the reply. + +"All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to shove off the canoe," +whispered Jack to the teacher; "and Peterkin, do you shove these +blankets aboard, we may want them before long. Avatea, step into +the middle; - that's right." + +"Is all ready?" whispered the teacher. + +"Not quite," replied Peterkin. "Here, Ralph, lay hold o' this pair +of oars, and stow them away if you can. I don't like paddles. +After we're safe away I'll try to rig up rollicks for them." + +"Now, then, in with you and shove off." + +One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher's hand, and, with his +whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we shot like an arrow +from the shore, sped over the still waters of the lagoon, and +paddled as swiftly as strong arms and willing hearts could urge us +over the long swell of the open sea. + +All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our +paddles in almost total silence and without halt, save twice to +recruit our failing energies with a mouthful of food and a draught +of water. Jack had taken the bearing of the island just after +starting, and laying a small pocket-compass before him, kept the +head of the canoe due south, for our chance of hitting the island +depended very much on the faithfulness of our steersman in keeping +our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its proper course. +Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and Avatea worked untiringly in +the middle. + +As the sun's lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the sea Jack +ceased working, threw down his paddle, and called a halt. + +"There," he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn sigh, "we've put a +considerable breadth of water between us and these black rascals, +so now we'll have a hearty supper and a sound sleep." + +"Hear, hear," cried Peterkin. "Nobly spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop +water, Ralph. Why, girl what's wrong with you? You look just like +a black owl blinking in the sunshine." + +Avatea smiled. "I sleepy," she said; and as if to prove the truth +of this, she laid her head on the edge of the canoe and fell fast +asleep. + +"That's uncommon sharp practice," said Peterkin, with a broad grin. +"Don't you think we should awake her to make her eat something +first? or, perhaps," he added, with a grave, meditative look, +"perhaps we might put some food in her mouth, which is so elegantly +open at the present moment, and see if she'd swallow it while +asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come round to the front here and +feed her quietly, while Jack and I are tucking into the victuals. +It would be a monstrous economy of time." + +I could not help smiling at Peterkin's idea, which, indeed, when I +pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; nevertheless I +declined to put it in practice, being fearful of the result should +the victual chance to go down the wrong throat. But, on suggesting +this to Peterkin, he exclaimed - + +"Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an eye might +see that if it went down Avatea's throat it could not go down the +wrong throat! - unless, indeed, you have all of a sudden become +inordinately selfish, and think that all the throats in the world +are wrong ones except your own. However, don't talk so much, and +hand me the pork before Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled +to at least one minute morsel." + +"Peterkin, you're a villain. A paltry little villain," said Jack, +quietly, as he tossed the hind legs (including the tail) of a cold +roast pig to his comrade; "and I must again express my regret that +unavoidable circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and +that necessity has compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. +Were it not that you are incapable of walking upon the water, I +would order you, sir, out of the canoe." + +"There! you've wakened Avatea with your long tongue," retorted +Peterkin, with a frown, as the girl gave vent to a deep sigh. +"No," he continued, "it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth +of her black Apollo. I say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice +of that yam. Between you and Jack I run a chance of being put on +short allowance, if not - yei - a - a - ow!" + +Peterkin's concluding remark was a yawn of so great energy that +Jack recommended him to postpone the conclusion of his meal till +next morning, - a piece of advice which he followed so quickly, +that I was forcibly reminded of his remark, a few minutes before, +in regard to the sharp practice of Avatea. + +My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I am +much given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be surprised to +learn that I fell into a deep reverie on the subject of sleep, +which was continued without intermission into the night, and +prolonged without interruption into the following morning. But I +cannot feel assured that I actually slept during that time, +although I am tolerably certain that I was not awake. + +Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, while +the night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and silent. + +A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the morning, +just as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east. + +"What's wrong?" cried Jack, starting up. + +Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread towards +the horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of the +largest sized war-canoes was approaching us! + +With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his paddle, +glanced at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, commanded us to +"give way." + +But we did not require to be urged. Already our four paddles were +glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over the glassy sea +like a dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers told that they had +observed our motions. + +"I see something like land ahead," said Jack, in a hopeful tone. +"It seems impossible that we could have made the island yet; still, +if it is so, we may reach it before these fellows can catch us, for +our canoe is light and our muscles are fresh." + +No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long chase, +we had no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a hundred +warriors. Nevertheless, we resolved to do our utmost to escape, +and paddled with a degree of vigour that kept us well in advance of +our pursuers. The war-canoe was so far behind us that it seemed +but a little speck on the sea, and the shouts, to which the crew +occasionally gave vent, came faintly towards us on the morning +breeze. We therefore hoped that we should be able to keep in +advance for an hour or two, when we might, perhaps, reach the land +ahead. But this hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, +not long after, rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a +fog-bank! + +A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was +expressed on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to our +hopes. But we had little time to think of regret. Our danger was +too great and imminent to permit of a moment's relaxation from our +exertions. No hope now animated our bosoms; but a feeling of +despair, strange to say, lent us power to work, and nerved our arms +with such energy, that it was several hours ere the savages +overtook us. When we saw that there was indeed no chance of +escape, and that paddling any longer would only serve to exhaust +our strength, without doing any good, we turned the side of our +canoe towards the approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles. + +Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, Jack +lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with us, and, +resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of bold +defiance. Peterkin took the other oar and also stood up, but there +was no anger visible on his countenance. When not sparkling with +fun, it usually wore a mild, sad expression, which was deepened on +the present occasion, as he glanced at Avatea, who sat with her +face resting in her hands upon her knees. Without knowing very +well what I intended to do, I also arose and grasped my paddle with +both hands. + +On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the foam +curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the savages +glancing the beams of the rising sun. Perfect silence was +maintained on both sides, and we could hear the hissing water, and +see the frowning eyes of the warriors, as they came rushing on. +When about twenty yards distant, five or six of the savages in the +bow rose, and, laying aside their paddles, took up their spears. +Jack and Peterkin raised their oars, while, with a feeling of +madness whirling in my brain, I grasped my paddle and prepared for +the onset. But, before any of us could strike a blow, the sharp +prow of the war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the side, and +hurled us into the sea! + +What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly drowned; +but when I recovered from the state of insensibility into which I +had been thrown, I found myself stretched on my back, bound hand +and foot between Jack and Peterkin, in the bottom of the large +canoe. + +In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the +savages only rested one hour. When night came, they rested again +for another hour, and appeared to sleep just as they sat. But we +were neither unbound nor allowed to speak to each other during the +voyage, nor was a morsel of food or a draught of water given to us. +For food, however, we cared little; but we would have given much +for a drop of water to cool our parched lips, and we would have +been glad, too, had they loosened the cords that bound us, for they +were tightly fastened and occasioned us much pain. The air, also, +was unusually hot, so much so that I felt convinced that a storm +was brewing. This also added to our sufferings. However, these +were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from which we +had fled. + +While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, who +was seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not fettered +in any way. Our captors now drove us before them towards the hut +of Tararo, at which we speedily arrived, and found the chief seated +with an expression on his face that boded us no good. Our friend +the teacher stood beside him, with a look of anxiety on his mild +features. + +"How comes it," said Tararo, turning to the teacher, "that these +youths have abused our hospitality?" + +"Tell him," replied Jack, "that we have not abused his hospitality, +for his hospitality has not been extended to us. I came to the +island to deliver Avatea, and my only regret is that I have failed +to do so. If I get another chance, I will try to save her yet." + +The teacher shook his head. "Nay, my young friend, I had better +not tell him that. It will only incense him." + +"Fear not," replied Jack. "If you don't tell him that, you'll tell +him nothing, for I won't say anything softer." + +On hearing Jack's speech, Tararo frowned and his eye flashed with +anger. + +"Go," he said, "presumptuous boy. My debt to you is cancelled. +You and your companions shall die." + +As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, who +seized Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, and, +dragging us from the hut of the chief, led us through the wood to +the outskirts of the village. Here they thrust us into a species +of natural cave in a cliff, and, having barricaded the entrance, +left us in total darkness. + +After feeling about for some time - for our legs were unshackled, +although our wrists were still bound with thongs - we found a low +ledge of rock running along one side of the cavern. On this we +seated ourselves, and for a long time maintained unbroken silence. + +At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. "Alas! dear Jack +and Peterkin," said I, "what is to become of us? I fear that we +are doomed to die." + +"I know not," replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, "I know not; +Ralph, I regret deeply the hastiness of my violent temper, which, I +must confess, has been the chief cause of our being brought to this +sad condition. Perhaps the teacher may do something for us. But I +have little hope." + +"Ah! no," said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; "I am sure he can't +help us. Tararo doesn't care more for him than for one of his +dogs." + +"Truly," said I, "there seems no chance of deliverance, unless the +Almighty puts forth his arm to save us. Yet I must say that I have +great hope, my comrades, for we have come to this dark place by no +fault of ours - unless it be a fault to try to succour a woman in +distress." + +I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to the +cavern, which was caused by the removal of the barricade. +Immediately after, three men entered, and, taking us by the collars +of our coats, led us away through the forest. As we advanced, we +heard much shouting and beating of native drums in the village, and +at first we thought that our guards were conducting us to the hut +of Tararo again. But in this we were mistaken. The beating of +drums gradually increased, and soon after we observed a procession +of the natives coming towards us. At the head of this procession +we were placed, and then we all advanced together towards the +temple where human victims were wont to be sacrificed! + +A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind the +awful scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful spot. +But deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence we little +expected it. During the whole of that day there had been an +unusual degree of heat in the atmosphere, and the sky assumed that +lurid aspect which portends a thunder-storm. Just as we were +approaching the horrid temple, a growl of thunder burst overhead +and heavy drops of rain began to fall + +Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical regions +can form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane that burst +upon the island of Mango at this time. Before we reached the +temple, the storm burst upon us with a deafening roar, and the +natives, who knew too well the devastation that was to follow, fled +right and left through the woods in order to save their property, +leaving us alone in the midst of the howling storm. The trees +around us bent before the blast like willows, and we were about to +flee in order to seek shelter, when the teacher ran toward us with +a knife in his hand. + +"Thank the Lord," he said, cutting our bonds, "I am in time! Now, +seek the shelter of the nearest rock." + +This we did without a moment's hesitation, for the whistling wind +burst, ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the trees, and, +tearing them from their roots, hurled them with violence to the +ground. Rain cut across the land in sheets, and lightning played +like forked serpents in the air; while, high above the roar of the +hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, and burst, and rolled in +awful majesty. + +In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs were +blown completely off the houses in many cases; and in others, the +houses themselves were levelled with the ground. In the midst of +this, the natives were darting to and fro, in some instances saving +their goods, but in many others seeking to save themselves from the +storm of destruction that whirled around them. But, terrific +although the tempest was on land, it was still more tremendous on +the mighty ocean. Billows sprang, as it were, from the great deep, +and while their crests were absolutely scattered into white mist, +they fell upon the beach with a crash that seemed to shake the +solid land. But they did not end there. Each successive wave +swept higher and higher on the beach, until the ocean lashed its +angry waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, in a sheet +of white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and carried +off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native dwellings! It +was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in some degree at least, +to impress the mind of beholders with the might and the majesty of +God. + +We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, during +which time the storm raged in fury; but on the night following it +abated somewhat, and in the morning we went to the village to seek +for food, being so famished with hunger that we lost all feeling of +danger and all wish to escape in our desire to satisfy the cravings +of nature. But no sooner had we obtained food than we began to +wish that we had rather endeavoured to make our escape into the +mountains. This we attempted to do soon afterwards, but the +natives were now able to look after us, and on our showing a +disposition to avoid observation and make towards the mountains, we +were seized by three warriors, who once more bound our wrists and +thrust us into our former prison. + +It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down the +first savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his fist, +but he was speedily overpowered by others. Thus we were again +prisoners, with the prospect of torture and a violent death before +us. + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + + +Imprisonment - Sinking hopes - Unexpected freedom to more than one, +and in more senses than one. + + +FOR a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary prison, +during which dismal time we did not see the face of a human being, +except that of the silent savage who brought us our daily food. + +There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I have +felt as if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that crushed my +inmost heart could never pass away, until death should make me +cease to feel the present was such a season. + +During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill at +our hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the cave - dreading +lest it should prove to be that of our executioner. But as time +dragged heavily on, we ceased to feel this alarm, and began to +experience such a deep, irrepressible longing for freedom, that we +chafed and fretted in our confinement like tigers. Then a feeling +of despair came over us, and we actually longed for the time when +the savages would take us forth to die! But these changes took +place very gradually, and were mingled sometimes with brighter +thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark cavern on +our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the past, +until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future. + +A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty supply +of yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted our food. + +"Well, Ralph, how have you slept?" said Jack, in a listless tone, +on rising one morning from his humble couch. "Were you much +disturbed by the wind last night?" + +"No," said I; "I dreamed of home all night, and I thought that my +mother smiled upon me, and beckoned me to go to her; but I could +not, for I was chained." + +"And I dreamed, too," said Peterkin; "but it was of our happy home +on the Coral Island. I thought we were swimming in the Water +Garden; then the savages gave a yell, and we were immediately in +the cave at Spouting Cliff, which, somehow or other, changed into +this gloomy cavern; and I awoke to find it true." + +Peterkin's tone was so much altered by the depressing influence of +his long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was he who spoke, I +should scarcely have recognised it, so sad was it, and so unlike to +the merry, cheerful voice we had been accustomed to hear. I +pondered this much, and thought of the terrible decline of +happiness that may come on human beings in so short a time; how +bright the sunshine in the sky at one time, and, in a short space, +how dark the overshadowing cloud! I had no doubt that the Bible +would have given me much light and comfort on this subject, if I +had possessed one, and I once more had occasion to regret deeply +having neglected to store my memory with its consoling truths. + +While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of the +cave, by saying, in a melancholy tone, "Oh, I wonder if we shall +ever see our dear island more." + +His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he bent +down his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me to see our +once joyous companion in tears, and I felt a burning desire to +comfort him; but, alas! what could I say? I could hold out no +hope; and although I essayed twice to speak, the words refused to +pass my lips. While I hesitated, Jack sat down beside him, and +whispered a few words in his ear, while Peterkin threw himself on +his friend's breast, and rested his head on his shoulder. + +Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, we heard +footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately our jailer +entered. We were so much accustomed to his regular visits, +however, that we paid little attention to him, expecting that he +would set down our meagre fare, as usual, and depart. But, to our +surprise, instead of doing so, he advanced towards us with a knife +in his hand, and, going up to Jack, he cut the thongs that bound +his wrists, then he did the same to Peterkin and me! For fully +five minutes we stood in speechless amazement, with our freed hands +hanging idly by our sides. The first thought that rushed into my +mind was, that the time had come to put us to death; and although, +as I have said before, we actually wished for death in the strength +of our despair, now that we thought it drew really near I felt all +the natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a chill +of horror at the suddenness of our call + +But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage pointed to +the cave's mouth, and we marched, almost mechanically, into the +open air. Here, to our surprise, we found the teacher standing +under a tree, with his hands clasped before him, and the tears +trickling down his dark cheeks. On seeing Jack, who came out +first, he sprang towards him, and clasping him in his arms, +exclaimed, - + +"Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of God you +are free!" + +"Free!" cried Jack. + +"Ay, free," repeated the teacher, shaking us warmly by the hands +again and again; "free to go and come as you will. The Lord has +unloosed the bands of the captive and set the prisoners free. A +missionary has been sent to us, and Tararo has embraced the +Christian religion! The people are even now burning their gods of +wood! Come, my dear friends, and see the glorious sight." + +We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been +accustomed in our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we imagined +for a moment this must surely be nothing more than another vivid +dream. Our eyes and minds were dazzled, too, by the brilliant +sunshine, which almost blinded us after our long confinement to the +gloom of our prison, so that we felt giddy with the variety of +conflicting emotions that filled our throbbing bosoms; but as we +followed the footsteps of our sable friend, and beheld the bright +foliage of the trees, and heard the cries of the paroquets, and +smelt the rich perfume of the flowering shrubs, the truth, that we +were really delivered from prison and from death, rushed with +overwhelming power into our souls, and, with one accord, while +tears sprang to our eyes, we uttered a loud long cheer of joy. + +It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who +chanced to be near. Running towards us, they shook us by the hand +with every demonstration of kindly feeling. They then fell behind, +and, forming a sort of procession, conducted us to the dwelling of +Tararo. + +The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never forget. +On a rude bench in front of his house sat the chief. A native +stood on his left hand, who, from his dress, seemed to be a +teacher. On his right stood an English gentleman, who, I at once +and rightly concluded, was a missionary. He was tall, thin, and +apparently past forty, with a bald forehead, and thin gray hair. +The expression of his countenance was the most winning I ever saw, +and his clear gray eye beamed with a look that was frank, fearless, +loving, and truthful. In front of the chief was an open space, in +the centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to be set on +fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who had +come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A bright smile +overspread the missionary's face as he advanced quickly to meet us, +and he shook us warmly by the hands. + +"I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young friends," he said. "My +friend, and your friend, the teacher, has told me your history; and +I thank our Father in heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided +me to this island, and made me the instrument of saving you." + +We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some +surprise how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in our +favour. + +"I will tell you that at a more convenient time," he answered, +"meanwhile we must not forget the respect due to the chief. He +waits to receive you." + +In the conversation that immediately followed between us and +Tararo, the latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus +Christ had been sent to the island, and that to it we were indebted +for our freedom. Moreover, he told us that we were at liberty to +depart in our schooner whenever we pleased, and that we should be +supplied with as much provision as we required. He concluded by +shaking hands with us warmly, and performing the ceremony of +rubbing noses. + +This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find words to +express our gratitude to the chief and to the missionary. + +"And what of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in the +midst of whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, strapping +fellow, whose noble mien and air of superiority bespoke him a chief +of no ordinary kind. + +"That youth is her lover. He came this very morning in his war- +canoe to treat with Tararo for Avatea. He is to be married in a +few days, and afterwards returns to his island home with his +bride!" + +"That's capital," said Jack, as he stepped up to the savage and +gave him a hearty shake of the hand. "I wish you joy, my lad; - +and you too, Avatea." + +As Jack spoke, Avatea's lover took him by the hand and led him to +the spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, surrounded by most +of the chief men of the tribe. The girl herself followed, and +stood on his left hand while her lover stood on his right, and, +commanding silence, made the following speech, which was translated +by the missionary:- + +"Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is old. Your +heart also is large and very brave. I and Avatea are your debtors, +and we wish, in the midst of this assembly, to acknowledge our +debt, and to say that it is one which we can never repay. You have +risked your life for one who was known to you only for a few days. +But she was a woman in distress, and that was enough to secure to +her the aid of a Christian man. We, who live in these islands of +the sea, know that the true Christians always act thus. Their +religion is one of love and kindness. We thank God that so many +Christians have been sent here - we hope many more will come. +Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray for you and +your brave comrades when you are far away." + +To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, in +which he insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he would +have done for any woman under the sun. But Jack's forte did not +lie in speech-making, so he terminated rather abruptly by seizing +the chief's hand and shaking it violently, after which he made a +hasty retreat. + +"Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin," said Jack, as we mingled with the +crowd, "it seems to me that the object we came here for having been +satisfactorily accomplished, we have nothing more to do but get +ready for sea as fast as we can, and hurrah for dear old England!" + +"That's my idea precisely," said Peterkin, endeavouring to wink, +but he had wept so much of late, poor fellow, that he found it +difficult; "however, I'm not going away till I see these fellows +burn their gods." + +Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire was +put to the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the +acclamations of the assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango +were reduced to ashes! + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + + +Conclusion. + + +TO part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene of +constant leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial greeting +to-day, are doomed ere long to unite for the last time, when the +quivering lips pronounce the word - "Farewell." It is a sad +thought, but should we on that account exclude it from our minds? +May not a lesson worth learning be gathered in the contemplation of +it? May it not, perchance, teach us to devote our thoughts more +frequently and attentively to that land where we meet, but part no +more? + +How many do we part from in this world with a light "Good-bye," +whom we never see again! Often do I think, in my meditations on +this subject, that if we realized more fully the shortness of the +fleeting intercourse that we have in this world with many of our +fellow-men, we would try more earnestly to do them good, to give +them a friendly smile, as it were, in passing (for the longest +intercourse on earth is little more than a passing word and +glance), and show that we have sympathy with them in the short +quick struggle of life, by our kindly words and looks and action. + +The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of the +South Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep regret +at parting with the natives of the island of Mango; for, after they +embraced the Christian faith, they sought, by showing us the utmost +kindness, to compensate for the harsh treatment we had experienced +at their hands; and we felt a growing affection for the native +teachers and the missionary, and especially for Avatea and her +husband. + +Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations with +the missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been making +for the island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop was blown +out of its course, during a violent gale, and driven to this +island. At first the natives refused to listen to what he had to +say; but, after a week's residence among them, Tararo came to him +and said that he wished to become a Christian, and would burn his +idols. He proved himself to be sincere, for, as we have seen, he +persuaded all his people to do likewise. I use the word persuaded +advisedly; for, like all the other Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a +despot and might have commanded obedience to his wishes; but he +entered so readily into the spirit of the new faith that he +perceived at once the impropriety of using constraint in the +propagation of it. He set the example, therefore; and that example +was followed by almost every man of the tribe. + +During the short time that we remained at the island, repairing our +vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives had commenced +building a large and commodious church, under the superintendence +of the missionary, and several rows of new cottages were marked +out; so that the place bid fair to become, in a few months, as +prosperous and beautiful as the Christian village at the other end +of the island. + +After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, +loaded with presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of the +native teachers went with them, for the purpose of visiting still +more distant islands of the sea, and spreading, if possible, the +light of the glorious gospel there. + +As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, in +order to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and Peterkin +and I held a consultation in the cabin of our schooner, - which we +found just as we had left her, for everything that had been taken +out of her was restored. We now resolved to delay our departure no +longer. The desire to see our beloved native land was strong upon +us, and we could not wait. + +Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we thought +it likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient crew of +sailors to man our vessel; so we accepted their offer gladly. + +It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white sails +of the pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. The +missionary, and thousands of the natives, came down to bid us God- +speed, and to see us sail away. As the vessel bent before a light +fair wind, we glided quickly over the lagoon under a cloud of +canvass. + +Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives gave +us a loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while he +stood on a coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the wind, we +heard the single word "Farewell" borne faintly over the sea. + +That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the wide sea +and up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, strangely mixed +with sadness, passed through our hearts, - for we were at length +"homeward bound," and were gradually leaving far behind us the +beautiful, bright, green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg eText The Coral Island + diff --git a/old/coril10.zip b/old/coril10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..23b3cd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/coril10.zip |
